<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<?xml-stylesheet href="/stylesheet.xsl" type="text/xsl"?>
<rss version="2.0" xmlns:dc="http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/" xmlns:atom="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xmlns:sy="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/syndication/" xmlns:content="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/content/" xmlns:itunes="http://www.itunes.com/dtds/podcast-1.0.dtd" xmlns:podcast="https://podcastindex.org/namespace/1.0">
  <channel>
    <atom:link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://feeds.transistor.fm/the-business-of-open-source" title="MP3 Audio"/>
    <atom:link rel="hub" href="https://pubsubhubbub.appspot.com/"/>
    <podcast:podping usesPodping="true"/>
    <title>The Business of Open Source</title>
    <generator>Transistor (https://transistor.fm)</generator>
    <itunes:new-feed-url>https://feeds.transistor.fm/the-business-of-open-source</itunes:new-feed-url>
    <description>Whether you're a founder of an open source startup, an open source maintainer or just an open source enthusiast, join host Emily Omier as she talks to the people who work at the intersection of open source and business, from startup founders to leaders of open source giants and all the people who help open source startups grow. </description>
    <copyright>Emily Omier Consulting</copyright>
    <podcast:guid>08f7088f-a5d1-5883-8930-24f5acb806d7</podcast:guid>
    <podcast:locked>yes</podcast:locked>
    <podcast:trailer pubdate="Fri, 08 May 2020 00:00:00 -0700" url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/fcd1731f/3d94d6c3.mp3" length="3546760" type="audio/mpeg">Introduction to The Business of Cloud Native</podcast:trailer>
    <language>en</language>
    <pubDate>Wed, 11 Feb 2026 02:15:13 -0800</pubDate>
    <lastBuildDate>Wed, 11 Feb 2026 02:16:22 -0800</lastBuildDate>
    <link>https://www.emilyomier.com/podcast</link>
    <image>
      <url>https://img.transistorcdn.com/jWinFBOdCsk_uouTFPIaKFoiPINazJ2uKEubLYthLNg/rs:fill:0:0:1/w:1400/h:1400/q:60/mb:500000/aHR0cHM6Ly9pbWct/dXBsb2FkLXByb2R1/Y3Rpb24udHJhbnNp/c3Rvci5mbS9zaG93/LzEwNTI5LzE2NTY1/MTIwMDAtYXJ0d29y/ay5qcGc.jpg</url>
      <title>The Business of Open Source</title>
      <link>https://www.emilyomier.com/podcast</link>
    </image>
    <itunes:category text="Technology"/>
    <itunes:category text="Business">
      <itunes:category text="Entrepreneurship"/>
    </itunes:category>
    <itunes:type>episodic</itunes:type>
    <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
    <itunes:image href="https://img.transistorcdn.com/jWinFBOdCsk_uouTFPIaKFoiPINazJ2uKEubLYthLNg/rs:fill:0:0:1/w:1400/h:1400/q:60/mb:500000/aHR0cHM6Ly9pbWct/dXBsb2FkLXByb2R1/Y3Rpb24udHJhbnNp/c3Rvci5mbS9zaG93/LzEwNTI5LzE2NTY1/MTIwMDAtYXJ0d29y/ay5qcGc.jpg"/>
    <itunes:summary>Whether you're a founder of an open source startup, an open source maintainer or just an open source enthusiast, join host Emily Omier as she talks to the people who work at the intersection of open source and business, from startup founders to leaders of open source giants and all the people who help open source startups grow. </itunes:summary>
    <itunes:subtitle>Whether you're a founder of an open source startup, an open source maintainer or just an open source enthusiast, join host Emily Omier as she talks to the people who work at the intersection of open source and business, from startup founders to leaders of open source giants and all the people who help open source startups grow.</itunes:subtitle>
    <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
    <itunes:owner>
      <itunes:name>Emily Omier</itunes:name>
    </itunes:owner>
    <itunes:complete>No</itunes:complete>
    <itunes:explicit>Yes</itunes:explicit>
    <item>
      <title>Changing Your Price Anchor with Anais Concepcion </title>
      <itunes:episode>268</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>268</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Changing Your Price Anchor with Anais Concepcion </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">9fe32447-6051-4be6-8f4b-6079d768dc53</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/66e720d1</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>There’s a new episode of The Business of Open Source today! It’s been a while. </p><p><br></p><p>I talked with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/anaisconce/">Anais Concepcion</a> about a program she’s been testing at <a href="https://www.getgrist.com">Grist</a> to give <a href="https://www.getgrist.com/enterprise-lite-free-activation-key-faq/">free activation codes</a> for the enterprise version of Grist to individuals and small businesses that have a revenue under $1 million. The program has been in place for 5 months, and Anais came on the show to talk about both the strategy behind the program as well as some preliminary results. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>The strategy </strong>comes down to shifting the perception of Grist Open Source and Grist Enterprise. The goal, Anais says, is to make the ecosystem consider Grist Enterprise the ‘default’ version of Grist, rather than the other way around. In fact, she’s considering renaming Grist Enterprise to just “Grist” to reinforce the idea that it is not the ‘special’ version of Grist, but the default version. </p><p><br></p><p>There were other strategic goals, too. One is to get more feedback on the ‘enterprise’ features, another is to avoid nickel-and-diming individual users while making sure that big companies are paying. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>The results </strong>so far have been interesting. The biggest concrete result has been in partnership relationships; it’s easier for small consulting / development shops to get access to the full Grist and to then resell it to their clients. There haven’t been been any signed deals yet as a result of this dynamic, but there are companies in discussions with the Grist sales team that probably wouldn’t have happened without the program… it will be interesting to see what happens as the program matures. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>After we turned off the recording, we had an interesting discussion about pricing as well; at <a href="https://05f5.com"><strong>Open Source Founders Summit</strong></a> Anais is going to do a workshop on pricing strategy. Not how much to charge, but what to charge for (consumption, seats, etc), how to set pricing anchors, and more. Join us in May if that’s interesting to you! </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>There’s a new episode of The Business of Open Source today! It’s been a while. </p><p><br></p><p>I talked with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/anaisconce/">Anais Concepcion</a> about a program she’s been testing at <a href="https://www.getgrist.com">Grist</a> to give <a href="https://www.getgrist.com/enterprise-lite-free-activation-key-faq/">free activation codes</a> for the enterprise version of Grist to individuals and small businesses that have a revenue under $1 million. The program has been in place for 5 months, and Anais came on the show to talk about both the strategy behind the program as well as some preliminary results. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>The strategy </strong>comes down to shifting the perception of Grist Open Source and Grist Enterprise. The goal, Anais says, is to make the ecosystem consider Grist Enterprise the ‘default’ version of Grist, rather than the other way around. In fact, she’s considering renaming Grist Enterprise to just “Grist” to reinforce the idea that it is not the ‘special’ version of Grist, but the default version. </p><p><br></p><p>There were other strategic goals, too. One is to get more feedback on the ‘enterprise’ features, another is to avoid nickel-and-diming individual users while making sure that big companies are paying. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>The results </strong>so far have been interesting. The biggest concrete result has been in partnership relationships; it’s easier for small consulting / development shops to get access to the full Grist and to then resell it to their clients. There haven’t been been any signed deals yet as a result of this dynamic, but there are companies in discussions with the Grist sales team that probably wouldn’t have happened without the program… it will be interesting to see what happens as the program matures. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>After we turned off the recording, we had an interesting discussion about pricing as well; at <a href="https://05f5.com"><strong>Open Source Founders Summit</strong></a> Anais is going to do a workshop on pricing strategy. Not how much to charge, but what to charge for (consumption, seats, etc), how to set pricing anchors, and more. Join us in May if that’s interesting to you! </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 11 Feb 2026 02:15:12 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/66e720d1/1c9d4c5a.mp3" length="21034220" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1953</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>There’s a new episode of The Business of Open Source today! It’s been a while. </p><p><br></p><p>I talked with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/anaisconce/">Anais Concepcion</a> about a program she’s been testing at <a href="https://www.getgrist.com">Grist</a> to give <a href="https://www.getgrist.com/enterprise-lite-free-activation-key-faq/">free activation codes</a> for the enterprise version of Grist to individuals and small businesses that have a revenue under $1 million. The program has been in place for 5 months, and Anais came on the show to talk about both the strategy behind the program as well as some preliminary results. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>The strategy </strong>comes down to shifting the perception of Grist Open Source and Grist Enterprise. The goal, Anais says, is to make the ecosystem consider Grist Enterprise the ‘default’ version of Grist, rather than the other way around. In fact, she’s considering renaming Grist Enterprise to just “Grist” to reinforce the idea that it is not the ‘special’ version of Grist, but the default version. </p><p><br></p><p>There were other strategic goals, too. One is to get more feedback on the ‘enterprise’ features, another is to avoid nickel-and-diming individual users while making sure that big companies are paying. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>The results </strong>so far have been interesting. The biggest concrete result has been in partnership relationships; it’s easier for small consulting / development shops to get access to the full Grist and to then resell it to their clients. There haven’t been been any signed deals yet as a result of this dynamic, but there are companies in discussions with the Grist sales team that probably wouldn’t have happened without the program… it will be interesting to see what happens as the program matures. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>After we turned off the recording, we had an interesting discussion about pricing as well; at <a href="https://05f5.com"><strong>Open Source Founders Summit</strong></a> Anais is going to do a workshop on pricing strategy. Not how much to charge, but what to charge for (consumption, seats, etc), how to set pricing anchors, and more. Join us in May if that’s interesting to you! </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Earning Trust with Tom Hacohen</title>
      <itunes:episode>267</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>267</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Earning Trust with Tom Hacohen</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">036c1986-cd66-4071-9865-ec177f90a9ef</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/38dcea95</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tomhacohen/">Tom Hacohen</a>, CEO and founder at <a href="https://www.svix.com">Svix. </a>We kicked off the conversation by talking about why Svix is an open core company… but Tom still initially didn’t think he’d be a good guest for the podcast. Unlike a lot of open source companies, Svix doesn’t make open source a huge part of its identity. Yes, there are business reasons for being an open source company, but the open source nature of the company isn’t plastered all over every piece of marketing material. </p><p><br></p><p>So why does it matter? </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Developers prefer open source, and they’ll always choose the open source option if there is one. On the other hand, developers don’t often have buying power (and don’t even know how to buy software even if they did). But developers can influence buying decisions, and that can be important. </li><li>We also talked about how there are different constraints that the open source project and the cloud version operate under. For example, ease of deployment doesn’t matter in the cloud version, because it doesn’t impact user experience at all. But the opposite is the case for the open source project, and that leads to different technical decisions. </li><li>We talked about the problem getting information about people who use the open source project, because it is hard to get developers to talk. This is a puzzle that Tom says he still hasn’t cracked. </li><li>Being an open source / open core company is a distraction, and it can be hard to manage externally and internally. </li><li>We talked a lot about trust — how open source helps you earn trust, but you still need to earn and keep the trust. </li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Want to talk more about the ins and outs of running open source businesses, and how open source companies win? Come to <a href="https://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> next May in Paris. And if you’re struggling to figure out how to monetize your open source company, you might want to <a href="http://www.emilyomier.com">work with me. </a></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tomhacohen/">Tom Hacohen</a>, CEO and founder at <a href="https://www.svix.com">Svix. </a>We kicked off the conversation by talking about why Svix is an open core company… but Tom still initially didn’t think he’d be a good guest for the podcast. Unlike a lot of open source companies, Svix doesn’t make open source a huge part of its identity. Yes, there are business reasons for being an open source company, but the open source nature of the company isn’t plastered all over every piece of marketing material. </p><p><br></p><p>So why does it matter? </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Developers prefer open source, and they’ll always choose the open source option if there is one. On the other hand, developers don’t often have buying power (and don’t even know how to buy software even if they did). But developers can influence buying decisions, and that can be important. </li><li>We also talked about how there are different constraints that the open source project and the cloud version operate under. For example, ease of deployment doesn’t matter in the cloud version, because it doesn’t impact user experience at all. But the opposite is the case for the open source project, and that leads to different technical decisions. </li><li>We talked about the problem getting information about people who use the open source project, because it is hard to get developers to talk. This is a puzzle that Tom says he still hasn’t cracked. </li><li>Being an open source / open core company is a distraction, and it can be hard to manage externally and internally. </li><li>We talked a lot about trust — how open source helps you earn trust, but you still need to earn and keep the trust. </li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Want to talk more about the ins and outs of running open source businesses, and how open source companies win? Come to <a href="https://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> next May in Paris. And if you’re struggling to figure out how to monetize your open source company, you might want to <a href="http://www.emilyomier.com">work with me. </a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 08 Oct 2025 01:10:05 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/38dcea95/c4cf0d08.mp3" length="30424531" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2127</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tomhacohen/">Tom Hacohen</a>, CEO and founder at <a href="https://www.svix.com">Svix. </a>We kicked off the conversation by talking about why Svix is an open core company… but Tom still initially didn’t think he’d be a good guest for the podcast. Unlike a lot of open source companies, Svix doesn’t make open source a huge part of its identity. Yes, there are business reasons for being an open source company, but the open source nature of the company isn’t plastered all over every piece of marketing material. </p><p><br></p><p>So why does it matter? </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Developers prefer open source, and they’ll always choose the open source option if there is one. On the other hand, developers don’t often have buying power (and don’t even know how to buy software even if they did). But developers can influence buying decisions, and that can be important. </li><li>We also talked about how there are different constraints that the open source project and the cloud version operate under. For example, ease of deployment doesn’t matter in the cloud version, because it doesn’t impact user experience at all. But the opposite is the case for the open source project, and that leads to different technical decisions. </li><li>We talked about the problem getting information about people who use the open source project, because it is hard to get developers to talk. This is a puzzle that Tom says he still hasn’t cracked. </li><li>Being an open source / open core company is a distraction, and it can be hard to manage externally and internally. </li><li>We talked a lot about trust — how open source helps you earn trust, but you still need to earn and keep the trust. </li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Want to talk more about the ins and outs of running open source businesses, and how open source companies win? Come to <a href="https://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> next May in Paris. And if you’re struggling to figure out how to monetize your open source company, you might want to <a href="http://www.emilyomier.com">work with me. </a></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Go-To-Market for Open Source Companies with Quentin Sinig</title>
      <itunes:episode>266</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>266</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Go-To-Market for Open Source Companies with Quentin Sinig</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">2ee8deba-74f6-48cf-af90-7ff88e6e2a14</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/c665a91a</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/quentinsinig/">Quentin Sinig</a>, who has been the first “business” hire at three open source companies; Strapi, Kestra and now Pruna.ai. We covered a lot of ground in this conversation, which was especially interesting because it spanned three open source companies so we were able to talk about patterns Quentin saw at all of them, as well as how the ecosystem is changing now. </p><p><br></p><p>We talked about the need to find product-market fit, particularly in the AI era — Quentin says that AI companies need to find product-market fit constantly, because the ecosystem is changing so quickly. </p><p><br></p><p>Quentin mentioned hearing from an advisor earlier in his career that you can’t focus on both usage and revenue — but that in some ways you are forced to focus on both, especially now. When I asked how you decide which of the two goals you should throw more resources behind, he couldn’t say… it’s such a case-by-case decision that there isn’t an easy formula for deciding. </p><p><br></p><p>Lastly, I had a burning question: What actually does go-to-market mean? And what does it mean to be a “Head of Go To Market?” Quentin says that to a large extent it’s a euphemism for sales, but there’s a little more to it than just that. In his mind, Go-To-Market is a much less siloed function than sales. It’s about getting the entire company aligned, in the expectation that ultimately that will lead to sales. But it’s not just about forcing prospects down the funnel or cold calling, either. </p><p><br></p><p>Want to talk more about the specifics of go-to-market for open source companies, with people who have been there? You should join O<a href="https://05f5.com">pen Source Founders Summit</a>, an in-person conference for leadership in open source companies. The next edition will be May 18th and 19th, 2026 in Paris. </p><p><br></p><p>And curious about my consulting options? Check out how I <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">help open source companies here. </a></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/quentinsinig/">Quentin Sinig</a>, who has been the first “business” hire at three open source companies; Strapi, Kestra and now Pruna.ai. We covered a lot of ground in this conversation, which was especially interesting because it spanned three open source companies so we were able to talk about patterns Quentin saw at all of them, as well as how the ecosystem is changing now. </p><p><br></p><p>We talked about the need to find product-market fit, particularly in the AI era — Quentin says that AI companies need to find product-market fit constantly, because the ecosystem is changing so quickly. </p><p><br></p><p>Quentin mentioned hearing from an advisor earlier in his career that you can’t focus on both usage and revenue — but that in some ways you are forced to focus on both, especially now. When I asked how you decide which of the two goals you should throw more resources behind, he couldn’t say… it’s such a case-by-case decision that there isn’t an easy formula for deciding. </p><p><br></p><p>Lastly, I had a burning question: What actually does go-to-market mean? And what does it mean to be a “Head of Go To Market?” Quentin says that to a large extent it’s a euphemism for sales, but there’s a little more to it than just that. In his mind, Go-To-Market is a much less siloed function than sales. It’s about getting the entire company aligned, in the expectation that ultimately that will lead to sales. But it’s not just about forcing prospects down the funnel or cold calling, either. </p><p><br></p><p>Want to talk more about the specifics of go-to-market for open source companies, with people who have been there? You should join O<a href="https://05f5.com">pen Source Founders Summit</a>, an in-person conference for leadership in open source companies. The next edition will be May 18th and 19th, 2026 in Paris. </p><p><br></p><p>And curious about my consulting options? Check out how I <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">help open source companies here. </a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 24 Sep 2025 07:31:52 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/c665a91a/41a6c94a.mp3" length="18068885" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2094</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/quentinsinig/">Quentin Sinig</a>, who has been the first “business” hire at three open source companies; Strapi, Kestra and now Pruna.ai. We covered a lot of ground in this conversation, which was especially interesting because it spanned three open source companies so we were able to talk about patterns Quentin saw at all of them, as well as how the ecosystem is changing now. </p><p><br></p><p>We talked about the need to find product-market fit, particularly in the AI era — Quentin says that AI companies need to find product-market fit constantly, because the ecosystem is changing so quickly. </p><p><br></p><p>Quentin mentioned hearing from an advisor earlier in his career that you can’t focus on both usage and revenue — but that in some ways you are forced to focus on both, especially now. When I asked how you decide which of the two goals you should throw more resources behind, he couldn’t say… it’s such a case-by-case decision that there isn’t an easy formula for deciding. </p><p><br></p><p>Lastly, I had a burning question: What actually does go-to-market mean? And what does it mean to be a “Head of Go To Market?” Quentin says that to a large extent it’s a euphemism for sales, but there’s a little more to it than just that. In his mind, Go-To-Market is a much less siloed function than sales. It’s about getting the entire company aligned, in the expectation that ultimately that will lead to sales. But it’s not just about forcing prospects down the funnel or cold calling, either. </p><p><br></p><p>Want to talk more about the specifics of go-to-market for open source companies, with people who have been there? You should join O<a href="https://05f5.com">pen Source Founders Summit</a>, an in-person conference for leadership in open source companies. The next edition will be May 18th and 19th, 2026 in Paris. </p><p><br></p><p>And curious about my consulting options? Check out how I <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">help open source companies here. </a></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Open Foundations with Or Weis</title>
      <itunes:episode>265</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>265</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Open Foundations with Or Weis</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">4125c857-24ff-4ffc-b832-1b943e0cd295</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/a2796f5d</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke to <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/orweis/">Or Weis</a>, the CEO and co-founder of Permit.io. Or is a serial entrepreneur who has had a long career in developer tools. We talked about Permit’s relationship with open source, including of course the open source projects that they create and maintain. </p><p><br></p><p>One thing to note is that none of Permit’s open source projects are branded as “Permit.” They are all separate from the <a href="http://permit.io">permit.io</a> brand. On the other hand, Or talked about the essential balancing act for open source companies… figuring out the balance between what goes in the open source project and what goes in the commercial offering. “Companies that get it wrong die, and companies that get it right end up flourishing,” he said. </p><p><br></p><p>Or Weiss has a theory about open source businesses that he calls ‘<a href="https://thenewstack.io/rip-open-core-long-live-open-source/">open foundations</a>.’ He thinks that this model is better than open core — to be honest I think open foundations is a type of open core, but I think that Or’s argument about how to do open core are fundamentally correct. </p><p><br></p><p>Permit’s primary open source project is OPAL, and the way that Or puts it is that Permit uses OPAL, but it is not OPAL. The two pieces of software are different and have different value propositions. He also talked about how important it is for everyone to understand what features belong in the project and what belongs in the product… by ‘everyone’ he means product managers in your team but also members of the open source community. </p><p><br></p><p>We also talked about how you have to have a moat for your product, and especially with AI coding tools a lot of models do not have a moat anymore. Which is why he doesn’t think that just SSO and a fancy UI are enough of a difference between project and product anymore. </p><p><br></p><p>If you are interested in having more conversations about building open source businesses, join us next May in Paris at <a href="https://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit! </a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke to <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/orweis/">Or Weis</a>, the CEO and co-founder of Permit.io. Or is a serial entrepreneur who has had a long career in developer tools. We talked about Permit’s relationship with open source, including of course the open source projects that they create and maintain. </p><p><br></p><p>One thing to note is that none of Permit’s open source projects are branded as “Permit.” They are all separate from the <a href="http://permit.io">permit.io</a> brand. On the other hand, Or talked about the essential balancing act for open source companies… figuring out the balance between what goes in the open source project and what goes in the commercial offering. “Companies that get it wrong die, and companies that get it right end up flourishing,” he said. </p><p><br></p><p>Or Weiss has a theory about open source businesses that he calls ‘<a href="https://thenewstack.io/rip-open-core-long-live-open-source/">open foundations</a>.’ He thinks that this model is better than open core — to be honest I think open foundations is a type of open core, but I think that Or’s argument about how to do open core are fundamentally correct. </p><p><br></p><p>Permit’s primary open source project is OPAL, and the way that Or puts it is that Permit uses OPAL, but it is not OPAL. The two pieces of software are different and have different value propositions. He also talked about how important it is for everyone to understand what features belong in the project and what belongs in the product… by ‘everyone’ he means product managers in your team but also members of the open source community. </p><p><br></p><p>We also talked about how you have to have a moat for your product, and especially with AI coding tools a lot of models do not have a moat anymore. Which is why he doesn’t think that just SSO and a fancy UI are enough of a difference between project and product anymore. </p><p><br></p><p>If you are interested in having more conversations about building open source businesses, join us next May in Paris at <a href="https://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit! </a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 17 Sep 2025 01:36:41 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/a2796f5d/89a26384.mp3" length="26405802" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2222</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke to <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/orweis/">Or Weis</a>, the CEO and co-founder of Permit.io. Or is a serial entrepreneur who has had a long career in developer tools. We talked about Permit’s relationship with open source, including of course the open source projects that they create and maintain. </p><p><br></p><p>One thing to note is that none of Permit’s open source projects are branded as “Permit.” They are all separate from the <a href="http://permit.io">permit.io</a> brand. On the other hand, Or talked about the essential balancing act for open source companies… figuring out the balance between what goes in the open source project and what goes in the commercial offering. “Companies that get it wrong die, and companies that get it right end up flourishing,” he said. </p><p><br></p><p>Or Weiss has a theory about open source businesses that he calls ‘<a href="https://thenewstack.io/rip-open-core-long-live-open-source/">open foundations</a>.’ He thinks that this model is better than open core — to be honest I think open foundations is a type of open core, but I think that Or’s argument about how to do open core are fundamentally correct. </p><p><br></p><p>Permit’s primary open source project is OPAL, and the way that Or puts it is that Permit uses OPAL, but it is not OPAL. The two pieces of software are different and have different value propositions. He also talked about how important it is for everyone to understand what features belong in the project and what belongs in the product… by ‘everyone’ he means product managers in your team but also members of the open source community. </p><p><br></p><p>We also talked about how you have to have a moat for your product, and especially with AI coding tools a lot of models do not have a moat anymore. Which is why he doesn’t think that just SSO and a fancy UI are enough of a difference between project and product anymore. </p><p><br></p><p>If you are interested in having more conversations about building open source businesses, join us next May in Paris at <a href="https://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit! </a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Straddling open source software and the hardware industry with Rob Taylor</title>
      <itunes:episode>264</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>264</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Straddling open source software and the hardware industry with Rob Taylor</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">d9ad79ba-d45c-4d47-827d-a88b0189d2fa</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/2cee9cf7</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/robtaylor78/">Rob Taylor</a>, CTO/CSO and founder of <a href="https://www.chipflow.io">ChipFlow. </a>Although ChipFlow is unambiguously a software company, it creates software that facilitate the creation of semiconductors, so it straddles the software and hardware worlds.</p><p><br></p><p>Some of the things we talked about include: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>The state of open source in the semiconductor space, and why that matters. A large part of it is the high cost of proprietary software for chip design, and the fact that there are a lot of barriers to entry, both for the design software and to chip creation. </li><li>Rob also talked about how an open source approach is the only way to bridge between research institutions and universities and the commercial world — too often, researchers would do brilliant work during a Ph.D. program and then it would be completely lost when they entered the commercial world. </li><li>On the other hand, open source is little-known and mistrusted in the semiconductor space. Rob described it as a marketing liability, which is why it’s downplayed on the company webpage. —&gt; I come across this more often than is often recognized inside the open source bubble. </li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>It’s one thing to build an open source company in the software infrastructure space, where open source has a positive reputation and is often seen as simply table stakes; it’s quite another to build an open source company in a conservative industry where open source doesn’t have a positive image. Perhaps the most interesting thing is that this means you have to have a reason other than marketing to build and maintain the open source project. </p><p><br></p><p>Want to join others to talk about the challenges and opportunities in building open source companies? Join us at <a href="https://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> next spring in Paris. </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/robtaylor78/">Rob Taylor</a>, CTO/CSO and founder of <a href="https://www.chipflow.io">ChipFlow. </a>Although ChipFlow is unambiguously a software company, it creates software that facilitate the creation of semiconductors, so it straddles the software and hardware worlds.</p><p><br></p><p>Some of the things we talked about include: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>The state of open source in the semiconductor space, and why that matters. A large part of it is the high cost of proprietary software for chip design, and the fact that there are a lot of barriers to entry, both for the design software and to chip creation. </li><li>Rob also talked about how an open source approach is the only way to bridge between research institutions and universities and the commercial world — too often, researchers would do brilliant work during a Ph.D. program and then it would be completely lost when they entered the commercial world. </li><li>On the other hand, open source is little-known and mistrusted in the semiconductor space. Rob described it as a marketing liability, which is why it’s downplayed on the company webpage. —&gt; I come across this more often than is often recognized inside the open source bubble. </li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>It’s one thing to build an open source company in the software infrastructure space, where open source has a positive reputation and is often seen as simply table stakes; it’s quite another to build an open source company in a conservative industry where open source doesn’t have a positive image. Perhaps the most interesting thing is that this means you have to have a reason other than marketing to build and maintain the open source project. </p><p><br></p><p>Want to join others to talk about the challenges and opportunities in building open source companies? Join us at <a href="https://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> next spring in Paris. </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 10 Sep 2025 05:02:03 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/2cee9cf7/a1e9474f.mp3" length="22144904" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2067</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/robtaylor78/">Rob Taylor</a>, CTO/CSO and founder of <a href="https://www.chipflow.io">ChipFlow. </a>Although ChipFlow is unambiguously a software company, it creates software that facilitate the creation of semiconductors, so it straddles the software and hardware worlds.</p><p><br></p><p>Some of the things we talked about include: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>The state of open source in the semiconductor space, and why that matters. A large part of it is the high cost of proprietary software for chip design, and the fact that there are a lot of barriers to entry, both for the design software and to chip creation. </li><li>Rob also talked about how an open source approach is the only way to bridge between research institutions and universities and the commercial world — too often, researchers would do brilliant work during a Ph.D. program and then it would be completely lost when they entered the commercial world. </li><li>On the other hand, open source is little-known and mistrusted in the semiconductor space. Rob described it as a marketing liability, which is why it’s downplayed on the company webpage. —&gt; I come across this more often than is often recognized inside the open source bubble. </li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>It’s one thing to build an open source company in the software infrastructure space, where open source has a positive reputation and is often seen as simply table stakes; it’s quite another to build an open source company in a conservative industry where open source doesn’t have a positive image. Perhaps the most interesting thing is that this means you have to have a reason other than marketing to build and maintain the open source project. </p><p><br></p><p>Want to join others to talk about the challenges and opportunities in building open source companies? Join us at <a href="https://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> next spring in Paris. </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>The double-edged sword of big initial customers with Taco Potze</title>
      <itunes:episode>263</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>263</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>The double-edged sword of big initial customers with Taco Potze</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">1e0637cb-49b5-4607-95ef-45e7822ac960</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/c59c883c</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week I’m back from vacation and I have a new episode of The Business of Open Source, with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tacopotze/">Taco Potze</a>! </p><p><br></p><p>Taco is the co-founder and CEO of <a href="https://www.getopensocial.com/product/cloud-platform">Open Social. </a></p><p><br></p><p>A couple interesting takeaways from our conversation: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>When you’re transitioning from a services company to a product company, it’s much easier if the product you work on is connected to the services your clients are already paying for. </li><li>Landing a huge customer, particularly if it’s your first customer, can be a double-edged sword. On the one hand you have a lot of revenue, but you also risk becoming your customer’s servant and losing control of your product’s roadmap. </li><li>You can’t do everything; and particularly you can’t build a product that meets the needs of small, medium and large organizations. </li><li>Sometimes you need to re-launch / reposition. Open Social recently completely changed their positioning earlier this year in response to changes in the marketplace and how their customers were use the product. </li><li>Customers might not care about open source, but they care very much about lock-in, exit costs, and data sovereignty. This is all a part of risk management that CIOs are thinking about a lot. </li><li>Some organizations use both the self-hosted and the SaaS product. </li><li>One of the biggest / most instructive mistakes they made was maintaining completely separate codebases. When they invested in merging the codebases, it dramatically improved the customer experience in relation to updates, bug fixes and simplicity of the engineering effort. </li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p> We talked about <a href="https://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> at the end — and which is where I first met Taco. If you’re interested in joining us in 2026, sign up for the newsletter! Tickets will be on sale soon. </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week I’m back from vacation and I have a new episode of The Business of Open Source, with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tacopotze/">Taco Potze</a>! </p><p><br></p><p>Taco is the co-founder and CEO of <a href="https://www.getopensocial.com/product/cloud-platform">Open Social. </a></p><p><br></p><p>A couple interesting takeaways from our conversation: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>When you’re transitioning from a services company to a product company, it’s much easier if the product you work on is connected to the services your clients are already paying for. </li><li>Landing a huge customer, particularly if it’s your first customer, can be a double-edged sword. On the one hand you have a lot of revenue, but you also risk becoming your customer’s servant and losing control of your product’s roadmap. </li><li>You can’t do everything; and particularly you can’t build a product that meets the needs of small, medium and large organizations. </li><li>Sometimes you need to re-launch / reposition. Open Social recently completely changed their positioning earlier this year in response to changes in the marketplace and how their customers were use the product. </li><li>Customers might not care about open source, but they care very much about lock-in, exit costs, and data sovereignty. This is all a part of risk management that CIOs are thinking about a lot. </li><li>Some organizations use both the self-hosted and the SaaS product. </li><li>One of the biggest / most instructive mistakes they made was maintaining completely separate codebases. When they invested in merging the codebases, it dramatically improved the customer experience in relation to updates, bug fixes and simplicity of the engineering effort. </li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p> We talked about <a href="https://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> at the end — and which is where I first met Taco. If you’re interested in joining us in 2026, sign up for the newsletter! Tickets will be on sale soon. </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 03 Sep 2025 02:19:56 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/c59c883c/66879a6a.mp3" length="26533909" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2352</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week I’m back from vacation and I have a new episode of The Business of Open Source, with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tacopotze/">Taco Potze</a>! </p><p><br></p><p>Taco is the co-founder and CEO of <a href="https://www.getopensocial.com/product/cloud-platform">Open Social. </a></p><p><br></p><p>A couple interesting takeaways from our conversation: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>When you’re transitioning from a services company to a product company, it’s much easier if the product you work on is connected to the services your clients are already paying for. </li><li>Landing a huge customer, particularly if it’s your first customer, can be a double-edged sword. On the one hand you have a lot of revenue, but you also risk becoming your customer’s servant and losing control of your product’s roadmap. </li><li>You can’t do everything; and particularly you can’t build a product that meets the needs of small, medium and large organizations. </li><li>Sometimes you need to re-launch / reposition. Open Social recently completely changed their positioning earlier this year in response to changes in the marketplace and how their customers were use the product. </li><li>Customers might not care about open source, but they care very much about lock-in, exit costs, and data sovereignty. This is all a part of risk management that CIOs are thinking about a lot. </li><li>Some organizations use both the self-hosted and the SaaS product. </li><li>One of the biggest / most instructive mistakes they made was maintaining completely separate codebases. When they invested in merging the codebases, it dramatically improved the customer experience in relation to updates, bug fixes and simplicity of the engineering effort. </li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p> We talked about <a href="https://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> at the end — and which is where I first met Taco. If you’re interested in joining us in 2026, sign up for the newsletter! Tickets will be on sale soon. </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Build for Dual Audiences with Pablo Ruiz-Muzquiz</title>
      <itunes:episode>262</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>262</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Build for Dual Audiences with Pablo Ruiz-Muzquiz</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">5433400d-d075-45a0-a413-7d5c27e8bef8</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/1f7d83e3</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/pruizmuzquiz/">Pablo Ruiz-Muzquiz</a>, CEO and co-founder of <a href="https://penpot.app">Penpot. </a>We started out by talking about the transition from services company to product company, how they decided to pivot to building a product company and when they made the decision to go all-in on the product. </p><p><br></p><p>Perhaps the most interesting part of the conversation is the discussion of the business model. It’s almost like open core in reverse. Penpot open source is fully featured and very flexible; but there’s a separate product available for business stakeholders to control how Penpot is used in their organizations. So when you need gouvernance and control, you should pay for the additional product to control Penpot usage in your organization. But if you don’t need to limit how Penpot is used at all, you (and everyone else in your organization) can use the open source version without the additional controls. </p><p><br></p><p>We also talked about dual audiences. Penpot has to appeal to designers and developers, and building something (and ultimately marketing/selling it) that has to appeal to two very different stakeholders. We talked about how the company manages that balance, and why they want to have more developers using Penpot than designers. </p><p><br></p><p>We talked a bit about <a href="https://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> as well. If you’re interested in learning from other founders and leaders in open source companies, join us at Open Source Founders Summit in Paris! </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/pruizmuzquiz/">Pablo Ruiz-Muzquiz</a>, CEO and co-founder of <a href="https://penpot.app">Penpot. </a>We started out by talking about the transition from services company to product company, how they decided to pivot to building a product company and when they made the decision to go all-in on the product. </p><p><br></p><p>Perhaps the most interesting part of the conversation is the discussion of the business model. It’s almost like open core in reverse. Penpot open source is fully featured and very flexible; but there’s a separate product available for business stakeholders to control how Penpot is used in their organizations. So when you need gouvernance and control, you should pay for the additional product to control Penpot usage in your organization. But if you don’t need to limit how Penpot is used at all, you (and everyone else in your organization) can use the open source version without the additional controls. </p><p><br></p><p>We also talked about dual audiences. Penpot has to appeal to designers and developers, and building something (and ultimately marketing/selling it) that has to appeal to two very different stakeholders. We talked about how the company manages that balance, and why they want to have more developers using Penpot than designers. </p><p><br></p><p>We talked a bit about <a href="https://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> as well. If you’re interested in learning from other founders and leaders in open source companies, join us at Open Source Founders Summit in Paris! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 02 Jul 2025 02:14:11 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/1f7d83e3/65b3122f.mp3" length="36400091" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2371</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/pruizmuzquiz/">Pablo Ruiz-Muzquiz</a>, CEO and co-founder of <a href="https://penpot.app">Penpot. </a>We started out by talking about the transition from services company to product company, how they decided to pivot to building a product company and when they made the decision to go all-in on the product. </p><p><br></p><p>Perhaps the most interesting part of the conversation is the discussion of the business model. It’s almost like open core in reverse. Penpot open source is fully featured and very flexible; but there’s a separate product available for business stakeholders to control how Penpot is used in their organizations. So when you need gouvernance and control, you should pay for the additional product to control Penpot usage in your organization. But if you don’t need to limit how Penpot is used at all, you (and everyone else in your organization) can use the open source version without the additional controls. </p><p><br></p><p>We also talked about dual audiences. Penpot has to appeal to designers and developers, and building something (and ultimately marketing/selling it) that has to appeal to two very different stakeholders. We talked about how the company manages that balance, and why they want to have more developers using Penpot than designers. </p><p><br></p><p>We talked a bit about <a href="https://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> as well. If you’re interested in learning from other founders and leaders in open source companies, join us at Open Source Founders Summit in Paris! </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Managing community contributors with Alya Abbott</title>
      <itunes:episode>261</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>261</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Managing community contributors with Alya Abbott</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">43b668ad-dd1f-41c9-888a-02ab2d9022f0</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/55286ae2</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I talked with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/alya-abbott/">Alya Abbott</a>, COO of <a href="https://zulip.com">Zulip</a>, about managing community contributors. This is a hot topic for open source companies — and for that matter, open source projects in general, including those that aren’t being monetized in any way. It’s a bit of a third rail in the open source ecosystem to suggest that there’s a downside to community contributions, but there undoubtably is. </p><p><br></p><p>At Zulip, they think about the contribution process as a product. They think about the contributor experience and making it as easy as possible for new contributors to get started. They even did user experience testing on the developer experience for contributors — and made changes as a result. </p><p><br></p><p>And why does this even matter? Because when it’s done right, community contributors can end up increasing your development velocity. Especially on things like integrations, the community contributors can really push things forward. </p><p><br></p><p>There’s much more to this episode, so check it out! And if you’d like more content about open source companies, or if you’re the leader of an open source company, join the mailing list for <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit. </a></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I talked with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/alya-abbott/">Alya Abbott</a>, COO of <a href="https://zulip.com">Zulip</a>, about managing community contributors. This is a hot topic for open source companies — and for that matter, open source projects in general, including those that aren’t being monetized in any way. It’s a bit of a third rail in the open source ecosystem to suggest that there’s a downside to community contributions, but there undoubtably is. </p><p><br></p><p>At Zulip, they think about the contribution process as a product. They think about the contributor experience and making it as easy as possible for new contributors to get started. They even did user experience testing on the developer experience for contributors — and made changes as a result. </p><p><br></p><p>And why does this even matter? Because when it’s done right, community contributors can end up increasing your development velocity. Especially on things like integrations, the community contributors can really push things forward. </p><p><br></p><p>There’s much more to this episode, so check it out! And if you’d like more content about open source companies, or if you’re the leader of an open source company, join the mailing list for <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit. </a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 25 Jun 2025 03:00:16 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/55286ae2/df00269b.mp3" length="29193110" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2183</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I talked with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/alya-abbott/">Alya Abbott</a>, COO of <a href="https://zulip.com">Zulip</a>, about managing community contributors. This is a hot topic for open source companies — and for that matter, open source projects in general, including those that aren’t being monetized in any way. It’s a bit of a third rail in the open source ecosystem to suggest that there’s a downside to community contributions, but there undoubtably is. </p><p><br></p><p>At Zulip, they think about the contribution process as a product. They think about the contributor experience and making it as easy as possible for new contributors to get started. They even did user experience testing on the developer experience for contributors — and made changes as a result. </p><p><br></p><p>And why does this even matter? Because when it’s done right, community contributors can end up increasing your development velocity. Especially on things like integrations, the community contributors can really push things forward. </p><p><br></p><p>There’s much more to this episode, so check it out! And if you’d like more content about open source companies, or if you’re the leader of an open source company, join the mailing list for <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit. </a></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Building a Dual Growth Flywheel at GitLab with Nick Veenhof</title>
      <itunes:episode>260</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>260</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Building a Dual Growth Flywheel at GitLab with Nick Veenhof</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">88381e47-749c-47d1-a255-7fe4776340d9</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/abb31884</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/nickveenhof/">Nick Veenhof,</a> Director of Contributor Success at GitLab. GitLab has probably the most well-articulated open source strategy out there, and we talked about the two main prongs of that strategy, the co-create strategy and the dual flywheel strategy. We also talked about incentivizing individuals versus incentivizing companies and how to build recognition system as part of the way to encourage people to contribute. We also talked about how to make sure that contributing is accessible — thinking about the “time to success” for contributors in a similar way as how you would think about time to value for software users. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>The dual flywheel strategy </strong></p><p><br></p><p>This strategy is based on the idea that as an open source company you want to <a href="https://handbook.gitlab.com/handbook/company/strategy/#dual-flywheels">simultaneously push growth</a> in your open source user base and your customer base, and that the two should reinforce each other.  </p><p><br></p><p><strong>The co-create strategy</strong></p><p><br></p><p>The co-create strategy involves encouraging paying customers to contribute to the open source project. In other words, customers who are already paying are encouraged to also invest engineering resources to improve the product. Nick said that this has obvious benefits for GitLab, but it also has benefits for the customers. They end up with a much better understanding of the product, and end up getting more out of the product then they would otherwise. </p><p><br></p><p>If you want to learn more, I highly recommend having a look at the GitLab Handbook, particularly the <a href="https://handbook.gitlab.com/handbook/company/strategy/">section on strategy. </a></p><p>And if you want more information about working with me, <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">check out the options here. </a></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/nickveenhof/">Nick Veenhof,</a> Director of Contributor Success at GitLab. GitLab has probably the most well-articulated open source strategy out there, and we talked about the two main prongs of that strategy, the co-create strategy and the dual flywheel strategy. We also talked about incentivizing individuals versus incentivizing companies and how to build recognition system as part of the way to encourage people to contribute. We also talked about how to make sure that contributing is accessible — thinking about the “time to success” for contributors in a similar way as how you would think about time to value for software users. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>The dual flywheel strategy </strong></p><p><br></p><p>This strategy is based on the idea that as an open source company you want to <a href="https://handbook.gitlab.com/handbook/company/strategy/#dual-flywheels">simultaneously push growth</a> in your open source user base and your customer base, and that the two should reinforce each other.  </p><p><br></p><p><strong>The co-create strategy</strong></p><p><br></p><p>The co-create strategy involves encouraging paying customers to contribute to the open source project. In other words, customers who are already paying are encouraged to also invest engineering resources to improve the product. Nick said that this has obvious benefits for GitLab, but it also has benefits for the customers. They end up with a much better understanding of the product, and end up getting more out of the product then they would otherwise. </p><p><br></p><p>If you want to learn more, I highly recommend having a look at the GitLab Handbook, particularly the <a href="https://handbook.gitlab.com/handbook/company/strategy/">section on strategy. </a></p><p>And if you want more information about working with me, <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">check out the options here. </a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 18 Jun 2025 02:58:55 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/abb31884/963bc043.mp3" length="27038483" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2177</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/nickveenhof/">Nick Veenhof,</a> Director of Contributor Success at GitLab. GitLab has probably the most well-articulated open source strategy out there, and we talked about the two main prongs of that strategy, the co-create strategy and the dual flywheel strategy. We also talked about incentivizing individuals versus incentivizing companies and how to build recognition system as part of the way to encourage people to contribute. We also talked about how to make sure that contributing is accessible — thinking about the “time to success” for contributors in a similar way as how you would think about time to value for software users. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>The dual flywheel strategy </strong></p><p><br></p><p>This strategy is based on the idea that as an open source company you want to <a href="https://handbook.gitlab.com/handbook/company/strategy/#dual-flywheels">simultaneously push growth</a> in your open source user base and your customer base, and that the two should reinforce each other.  </p><p><br></p><p><strong>The co-create strategy</strong></p><p><br></p><p>The co-create strategy involves encouraging paying customers to contribute to the open source project. In other words, customers who are already paying are encouraged to also invest engineering resources to improve the product. Nick said that this has obvious benefits for GitLab, but it also has benefits for the customers. They end up with a much better understanding of the product, and end up getting more out of the product then they would otherwise. </p><p><br></p><p>If you want to learn more, I highly recommend having a look at the GitLab Handbook, particularly the <a href="https://handbook.gitlab.com/handbook/company/strategy/">section on strategy. </a></p><p>And if you want more information about working with me, <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">check out the options here. </a></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Solving Universal, Persistant Problems with David Aronchick </title>
      <itunes:episode>259</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>259</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Solving Universal, Persistant Problems with David Aronchick </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">2a570206-9561-41ed-9302-97ceb044aed7</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/974967a2</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/aronchick/">David Aronchick</a>, CEO and founder of <a href="https://www.expanso.io">Expanso</a>, about luck and timing, building into universal truths and the reasons for Kubernetes’ success. </p><p><br></p><p>Before David founded Expanso (which is behind the project <a href="https://bacalhau.org">Bacalhau</a>), he was the first non-founding PM on the Kubernetes project, and we kicked off by talking a bit about what made Kubernetes so successful… and you probably can guess that it didn’t have to do with having the most awesome technology. A big part of it was that it was the right time and a number of factors in the larger ecosystem were aligned in favor of making Kubernetes a success. </p><p><br></p><p>It comes down to luck and building to where the puck is going… so how do you know where the puck is going to be a year from now? David talks about selling into basic truths. If you’re pegged to a specific technology, you’re putting yourself at huge risk. But if you are solving a problem that has always been a problem and is likely to continue to be a problem, you are more likely to be successful. </p><p><br></p><p>We also talked about <a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rmhYHzJpkuo&amp;list=PLj6h78yzYM2OBfnicyJbiZFoJUOeeDmgN&amp;index=6">Adam Jacob’s talk on building a business around open source</a> that he gave at KubeCon Salt Lake City, which you should definitely listen to. Adam Jacob also came on this podcast a year ago, and you should also listen to the <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/podcast/adam-jacob">episode he did. </a></p><p><br></p><p>Lastly, we talked about how hard GTM is, and how David would invest way more into GTM, starting much earlier, if he could start over again. </p><p><br></p><p>David was at <a href="https://05f5.com/">Open Source Founders Summit</a> this year, and you should come next year too! </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/aronchick/">David Aronchick</a>, CEO and founder of <a href="https://www.expanso.io">Expanso</a>, about luck and timing, building into universal truths and the reasons for Kubernetes’ success. </p><p><br></p><p>Before David founded Expanso (which is behind the project <a href="https://bacalhau.org">Bacalhau</a>), he was the first non-founding PM on the Kubernetes project, and we kicked off by talking a bit about what made Kubernetes so successful… and you probably can guess that it didn’t have to do with having the most awesome technology. A big part of it was that it was the right time and a number of factors in the larger ecosystem were aligned in favor of making Kubernetes a success. </p><p><br></p><p>It comes down to luck and building to where the puck is going… so how do you know where the puck is going to be a year from now? David talks about selling into basic truths. If you’re pegged to a specific technology, you’re putting yourself at huge risk. But if you are solving a problem that has always been a problem and is likely to continue to be a problem, you are more likely to be successful. </p><p><br></p><p>We also talked about <a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rmhYHzJpkuo&amp;list=PLj6h78yzYM2OBfnicyJbiZFoJUOeeDmgN&amp;index=6">Adam Jacob’s talk on building a business around open source</a> that he gave at KubeCon Salt Lake City, which you should definitely listen to. Adam Jacob also came on this podcast a year ago, and you should also listen to the <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/podcast/adam-jacob">episode he did. </a></p><p><br></p><p>Lastly, we talked about how hard GTM is, and how David would invest way more into GTM, starting much earlier, if he could start over again. </p><p><br></p><p>David was at <a href="https://05f5.com/">Open Source Founders Summit</a> this year, and you should come next year too! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 11 Jun 2025 01:55:02 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/974967a2/74cb5878.mp3" length="30131174" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2747</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/aronchick/">David Aronchick</a>, CEO and founder of <a href="https://www.expanso.io">Expanso</a>, about luck and timing, building into universal truths and the reasons for Kubernetes’ success. </p><p><br></p><p>Before David founded Expanso (which is behind the project <a href="https://bacalhau.org">Bacalhau</a>), he was the first non-founding PM on the Kubernetes project, and we kicked off by talking a bit about what made Kubernetes so successful… and you probably can guess that it didn’t have to do with having the most awesome technology. A big part of it was that it was the right time and a number of factors in the larger ecosystem were aligned in favor of making Kubernetes a success. </p><p><br></p><p>It comes down to luck and building to where the puck is going… so how do you know where the puck is going to be a year from now? David talks about selling into basic truths. If you’re pegged to a specific technology, you’re putting yourself at huge risk. But if you are solving a problem that has always been a problem and is likely to continue to be a problem, you are more likely to be successful. </p><p><br></p><p>We also talked about <a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rmhYHzJpkuo&amp;list=PLj6h78yzYM2OBfnicyJbiZFoJUOeeDmgN&amp;index=6">Adam Jacob’s talk on building a business around open source</a> that he gave at KubeCon Salt Lake City, which you should definitely listen to. Adam Jacob also came on this podcast a year ago, and you should also listen to the <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/podcast/adam-jacob">episode he did. </a></p><p><br></p><p>Lastly, we talked about how hard GTM is, and how David would invest way more into GTM, starting much earlier, if he could start over again. </p><p><br></p><p>David was at <a href="https://05f5.com/">Open Source Founders Summit</a> this year, and you should come next year too! </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>David and Goliath in the CMS Market with Thomas Schedler </title>
      <itunes:episode>258</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>258</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>David and Goliath in the CMS Market with Thomas Schedler </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">d629fbf0-562f-495d-8975-5c020437c5df</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/7f558564</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with Thomas <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/thomasschedler/">Schedler</a>, co-founder and CEO of <a href="https://sulu.io">Sulu</a>. Sulu is a small, bootstrapped company that spun out of an agency; Thomas was recommended by someone to me as a guest, but when I first reached out to him he was skeptical about coming on the show because he wasn’t sure he was a good fit. But there’s a bunch to learn from this episode! </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Spinning out from an agency —&gt; in my experience, one of the most common ways for open source companies to be bootstrapped, or even to be go on to raise venture capital, is to start out as a web development agency that uses a lot of open source tools.</li><li>They are working on moving away from services and getting more revenue from the product; and Thomas talked about the advantages that they get from providing both services and developing a product-based business strategy.</li><li>The CMS market is crowded! And everyone is open source, so being an open source company doesn’t differentiate the product at all. So how does Sulu differentiate itself in the market? Thomas talked about it. </li><li>I loved that Thomas talked about how important opinions and technology choices are in differentiating themselves on the market. </li><li>I also loved that Thomas talked about keeping some things out of the product as a way to differentiate themselves from others. Sometimes more features can deliver less value to users. </li><li>How being small can allow you to move quicker, and that gives Sulu and advantage over the huge players in the CMS market.</li><li>Why differentiation and knowing your niche is so important when you’re a small company competing again large players. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Do you need to differentiate yourself in a crowded market? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with Thomas <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/thomasschedler/">Schedler</a>, co-founder and CEO of <a href="https://sulu.io">Sulu</a>. Sulu is a small, bootstrapped company that spun out of an agency; Thomas was recommended by someone to me as a guest, but when I first reached out to him he was skeptical about coming on the show because he wasn’t sure he was a good fit. But there’s a bunch to learn from this episode! </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Spinning out from an agency —&gt; in my experience, one of the most common ways for open source companies to be bootstrapped, or even to be go on to raise venture capital, is to start out as a web development agency that uses a lot of open source tools.</li><li>They are working on moving away from services and getting more revenue from the product; and Thomas talked about the advantages that they get from providing both services and developing a product-based business strategy.</li><li>The CMS market is crowded! And everyone is open source, so being an open source company doesn’t differentiate the product at all. So how does Sulu differentiate itself in the market? Thomas talked about it. </li><li>I loved that Thomas talked about how important opinions and technology choices are in differentiating themselves on the market. </li><li>I also loved that Thomas talked about keeping some things out of the product as a way to differentiate themselves from others. Sometimes more features can deliver less value to users. </li><li>How being small can allow you to move quicker, and that gives Sulu and advantage over the huge players in the CMS market.</li><li>Why differentiation and knowing your niche is so important when you’re a small company competing again large players. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Do you need to differentiate yourself in a crowded market? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 28 May 2025 02:35:26 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/7f558564/ae2278aa.mp3" length="25926019" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2131</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with Thomas <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/thomasschedler/">Schedler</a>, co-founder and CEO of <a href="https://sulu.io">Sulu</a>. Sulu is a small, bootstrapped company that spun out of an agency; Thomas was recommended by someone to me as a guest, but when I first reached out to him he was skeptical about coming on the show because he wasn’t sure he was a good fit. But there’s a bunch to learn from this episode! </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Spinning out from an agency —&gt; in my experience, one of the most common ways for open source companies to be bootstrapped, or even to be go on to raise venture capital, is to start out as a web development agency that uses a lot of open source tools.</li><li>They are working on moving away from services and getting more revenue from the product; and Thomas talked about the advantages that they get from providing both services and developing a product-based business strategy.</li><li>The CMS market is crowded! And everyone is open source, so being an open source company doesn’t differentiate the product at all. So how does Sulu differentiate itself in the market? Thomas talked about it. </li><li>I loved that Thomas talked about how important opinions and technology choices are in differentiating themselves on the market. </li><li>I also loved that Thomas talked about keeping some things out of the product as a way to differentiate themselves from others. Sometimes more features can deliver less value to users. </li><li>How being small can allow you to move quicker, and that gives Sulu and advantage over the huge players in the CMS market.</li><li>Why differentiation and knowing your niche is so important when you’re a small company competing again large players. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Do you need to differentiate yourself in a crowded market? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Open Source Firmware for EV Charging Stations with Marco Möller</title>
      <itunes:episode>257</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>257</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Open Source Firmware for EV Charging Stations with Marco Möller</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">3e11a34b-269d-4983-856d-00a1656c886d</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/e697435b</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/marco-m%C3%B6ller-049a1724/">Marco Möller</a>, CEO and co-founder of <a href="https://www.pionix.com">Pionix</a>. This was a fabulous conversation about a company that’s in a very different market from the usual open source company: They make firmware for EV charging stations, and are behind the <a href="https://lfenergy.org/projects/everest/">EVerest project,</a> which is part of LF Energy. </p><p><br></p><p>So who is part of the community open source projects that are so connected to hardware? Here’s what we talked about. </p><p><br></p><ul><li>There aren’t many hobbyists in the community — but there are a lot of people who have professional interests in the electric vehicle industry. EVerest doesn’t focus on what Marco considers “personal” or “hobbiest” features. This was a great discussion about how understanding the target market, including for the project, leads to different feature decisions. </li><li>How does Pionix money? It doesn’t yet :), but we talked about various plans the company has for monetization in the future. </li><li>How being involved with the LF Energy has helped build trust, which is very important for a company that is only going to be selling to large companies and governments. </li><li>Why Marco thinks that the huge vision he has for creating firmware for EV charging stations is only possible with open source, and how he makes sure that he’s able to fund the large mission without hurting the community. </li><li>The balancing act with getting investors who specialize in the energy market but who don’t have experience with open source</li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Struggling with positioning your project or figuring out how to best monetize? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/marco-m%C3%B6ller-049a1724/">Marco Möller</a>, CEO and co-founder of <a href="https://www.pionix.com">Pionix</a>. This was a fabulous conversation about a company that’s in a very different market from the usual open source company: They make firmware for EV charging stations, and are behind the <a href="https://lfenergy.org/projects/everest/">EVerest project,</a> which is part of LF Energy. </p><p><br></p><p>So who is part of the community open source projects that are so connected to hardware? Here’s what we talked about. </p><p><br></p><ul><li>There aren’t many hobbyists in the community — but there are a lot of people who have professional interests in the electric vehicle industry. EVerest doesn’t focus on what Marco considers “personal” or “hobbiest” features. This was a great discussion about how understanding the target market, including for the project, leads to different feature decisions. </li><li>How does Pionix money? It doesn’t yet :), but we talked about various plans the company has for monetization in the future. </li><li>How being involved with the LF Energy has helped build trust, which is very important for a company that is only going to be selling to large companies and governments. </li><li>Why Marco thinks that the huge vision he has for creating firmware for EV charging stations is only possible with open source, and how he makes sure that he’s able to fund the large mission without hurting the community. </li><li>The balancing act with getting investors who specialize in the energy market but who don’t have experience with open source</li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Struggling with positioning your project or figuring out how to best monetize? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 14 May 2025 02:51:13 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/e697435b/f2f9c39f.mp3" length="22037917" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2037</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/marco-m%C3%B6ller-049a1724/">Marco Möller</a>, CEO and co-founder of <a href="https://www.pionix.com">Pionix</a>. This was a fabulous conversation about a company that’s in a very different market from the usual open source company: They make firmware for EV charging stations, and are behind the <a href="https://lfenergy.org/projects/everest/">EVerest project,</a> which is part of LF Energy. </p><p><br></p><p>So who is part of the community open source projects that are so connected to hardware? Here’s what we talked about. </p><p><br></p><ul><li>There aren’t many hobbyists in the community — but there are a lot of people who have professional interests in the electric vehicle industry. EVerest doesn’t focus on what Marco considers “personal” or “hobbiest” features. This was a great discussion about how understanding the target market, including for the project, leads to different feature decisions. </li><li>How does Pionix money? It doesn’t yet :), but we talked about various plans the company has for monetization in the future. </li><li>How being involved with the LF Energy has helped build trust, which is very important for a company that is only going to be selling to large companies and governments. </li><li>Why Marco thinks that the huge vision he has for creating firmware for EV charging stations is only possible with open source, and how he makes sure that he’s able to fund the large mission without hurting the community. </li><li>The balancing act with getting investors who specialize in the energy market but who don’t have experience with open source</li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Struggling with positioning your project or figuring out how to best monetize? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>AI-generated Code Copied from Open Source with Julian Coccia</title>
      <itunes:episode>256</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>256</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>AI-generated Code Copied from Open Source with Julian Coccia</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">7811c459-45b0-4328-952e-617c08e38f1d</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/b14953b8</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/juliancoccia/">Julian Coccia</a>, CTO of <a href="https://www.scanoss.com">ScanOSS</a>, about selling access to data while making open source software. Of course, we also talked about being an open source company that is also deep in the open source world, helping companies understand their reliance on open source code and how open source is used in their codebase. </p><p><br></p><p>Several things that we talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>AI and open source code. This is a topic that’s slightly tangential to business, but very interesting to me. If you’re using an AI code generator, you are almost certainly putting verbatim copies of open source code into your codebase, but without realizing you’re doing so and without any understanding of the license requirements. This is a huge compliance risk. </li><li>2% of code generated by AI is a verbatim copy of open source code. </li><li>How the biggest challenges isn’t necessarily monetizing, but getting visibility into the sales funnel. It can feel random and sudden; a company appears out of nowhere ready to sign a contract because they’ve been using the open source project for months. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>This is the last week to get tickets for <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a>, so if you want to join other leaders of open source companies May 19th and 20th in Paris, get your tickets now! </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/juliancoccia/">Julian Coccia</a>, CTO of <a href="https://www.scanoss.com">ScanOSS</a>, about selling access to data while making open source software. Of course, we also talked about being an open source company that is also deep in the open source world, helping companies understand their reliance on open source code and how open source is used in their codebase. </p><p><br></p><p>Several things that we talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>AI and open source code. This is a topic that’s slightly tangential to business, but very interesting to me. If you’re using an AI code generator, you are almost certainly putting verbatim copies of open source code into your codebase, but without realizing you’re doing so and without any understanding of the license requirements. This is a huge compliance risk. </li><li>2% of code generated by AI is a verbatim copy of open source code. </li><li>How the biggest challenges isn’t necessarily monetizing, but getting visibility into the sales funnel. It can feel random and sudden; a company appears out of nowhere ready to sign a contract because they’ve been using the open source project for months. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>This is the last week to get tickets for <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a>, so if you want to join other leaders of open source companies May 19th and 20th in Paris, get your tickets now! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 07 May 2025 02:38:20 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/b14953b8/b5916089.mp3" length="27175056" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2150</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/juliancoccia/">Julian Coccia</a>, CTO of <a href="https://www.scanoss.com">ScanOSS</a>, about selling access to data while making open source software. Of course, we also talked about being an open source company that is also deep in the open source world, helping companies understand their reliance on open source code and how open source is used in their codebase. </p><p><br></p><p>Several things that we talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>AI and open source code. This is a topic that’s slightly tangential to business, but very interesting to me. If you’re using an AI code generator, you are almost certainly putting verbatim copies of open source code into your codebase, but without realizing you’re doing so and without any understanding of the license requirements. This is a huge compliance risk. </li><li>2% of code generated by AI is a verbatim copy of open source code. </li><li>How the biggest challenges isn’t necessarily monetizing, but getting visibility into the sales funnel. It can feel random and sudden; a company appears out of nowhere ready to sign a contract because they’ve been using the open source project for months. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>This is the last week to get tickets for <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a>, so if you want to join other leaders of open source companies May 19th and 20th in Paris, get your tickets now! </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to be Successful when Donating a Project to the CNCF with Liz Rice</title>
      <itunes:episode>255</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>255</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>How to be Successful when Donating a Project to the CNCF with Liz Rice</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">c65313d2-5a0a-468d-88e0-f14473985394</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/96b2d8dc</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on The Business of Open Source I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/lizrice/">Liz Rice</a>, Chief Open Source Officer at <a href="https://isovalent.com">Isovalent</a>, which is now part of Cisco. We addressed two subjects: How to be successful as a company that donates their project to the CNCF, and the story of Isovalent’s acquisition by Cisco and the role open source played in that acquisition. </p><p><br></p><p>We talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Trademarks. This is a very important part of what you donate when you donate a project to the CNCF (or other foundations). We talked about what you can and can not do with the name and logo of “your” project when it becomes part of the CNCF, and what that means for the competitive landscape you’re a part of. </li><li>How to best take advantage of the marketing benefits that being part of the CNCF brings. </li><li>How to create a link between the CNCF project and the company that donated it. </li><li>The role that <a href="https://github.com/cilium">Cilium</a> and <a href="https://ebpf.io">eBPF</a> played in Isovalent’s acquisition by Cisco. </li><li>Why Isovalent’s relationship with open source is valuable to Cisco in and of itself. </li><li>How open source companies can increase the likelihood that they’ll be able to continue investing in open source post-acquisition. </li><li>Why it’s so important to find opportunities for collaboration. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Want help making the link between your CNCF project and your commercial product? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me.</a> </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on The Business of Open Source I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/lizrice/">Liz Rice</a>, Chief Open Source Officer at <a href="https://isovalent.com">Isovalent</a>, which is now part of Cisco. We addressed two subjects: How to be successful as a company that donates their project to the CNCF, and the story of Isovalent’s acquisition by Cisco and the role open source played in that acquisition. </p><p><br></p><p>We talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Trademarks. This is a very important part of what you donate when you donate a project to the CNCF (or other foundations). We talked about what you can and can not do with the name and logo of “your” project when it becomes part of the CNCF, and what that means for the competitive landscape you’re a part of. </li><li>How to best take advantage of the marketing benefits that being part of the CNCF brings. </li><li>How to create a link between the CNCF project and the company that donated it. </li><li>The role that <a href="https://github.com/cilium">Cilium</a> and <a href="https://ebpf.io">eBPF</a> played in Isovalent’s acquisition by Cisco. </li><li>Why Isovalent’s relationship with open source is valuable to Cisco in and of itself. </li><li>How open source companies can increase the likelihood that they’ll be able to continue investing in open source post-acquisition. </li><li>Why it’s so important to find opportunities for collaboration. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Want help making the link between your CNCF project and your commercial product? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me.</a> </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 30 Apr 2025 00:48:01 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/96b2d8dc/25c45e4f.mp3" length="30312557" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2425</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on The Business of Open Source I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/lizrice/">Liz Rice</a>, Chief Open Source Officer at <a href="https://isovalent.com">Isovalent</a>, which is now part of Cisco. We addressed two subjects: How to be successful as a company that donates their project to the CNCF, and the story of Isovalent’s acquisition by Cisco and the role open source played in that acquisition. </p><p><br></p><p>We talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Trademarks. This is a very important part of what you donate when you donate a project to the CNCF (or other foundations). We talked about what you can and can not do with the name and logo of “your” project when it becomes part of the CNCF, and what that means for the competitive landscape you’re a part of. </li><li>How to best take advantage of the marketing benefits that being part of the CNCF brings. </li><li>How to create a link between the CNCF project and the company that donated it. </li><li>The role that <a href="https://github.com/cilium">Cilium</a> and <a href="https://ebpf.io">eBPF</a> played in Isovalent’s acquisition by Cisco. </li><li>Why Isovalent’s relationship with open source is valuable to Cisco in and of itself. </li><li>How open source companies can increase the likelihood that they’ll be able to continue investing in open source post-acquisition. </li><li>Why it’s so important to find opportunities for collaboration. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Want help making the link between your CNCF project and your commercial product? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me.</a> </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Open Source Manifestos with Vincent Untz</title>
      <itunes:episode>254</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>254</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Open Source Manifestos with Vincent Untz</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">455fb49c-4c97-4263-8dac-7ea5b77dd4de</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/ab94a2ce</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I talked about Open Source Manifestos with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/vincentuntz/">Vincent Untz</a>, CTO of <a href="https://www.centreon.com">Centreon</a>. The entire conversation focused on this idea of open source manifestos, which Vincent is going to talk about at <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> — and I had never heard of before. </p><p><br></p><p>The idea to create an open source manifesto came about because internally there was a lot of frustration around Centreon’s relationship with open source. A lot of people, especially those who didn’t come from an engineering background, would routinely ask why the company invested so much in open source. At the same time, there was a feeling among the engineering team that the company’s commitment to open source — and the concrete development time spent on open source — was slipping. </p><p><br></p><p>After creating the manifesto, the doubts about why open source mattered went away immediately — there hasn’t been a single conversation calling into question why open source matters since the manifesto was finished. Now conversations about open source are different. </p><p><br></p><p>Externally, there’s been a huge change in conversations around open source. People say things like “Centreon is back in the game.” </p><p><br></p><p>It’s hard to point to concrete financial results as a result of the manifesto, but there have been differences in relationships with partners for sure, and it has helped get more companies to contribute to the project. </p><p><br></p><p>Want to see what the <a href="https://www.centreon.com/centreon-open-source-manifesto/">Centreon Open Source Manifesto</a> looks like? Check it out here. </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I talked about Open Source Manifestos with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/vincentuntz/">Vincent Untz</a>, CTO of <a href="https://www.centreon.com">Centreon</a>. The entire conversation focused on this idea of open source manifestos, which Vincent is going to talk about at <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> — and I had never heard of before. </p><p><br></p><p>The idea to create an open source manifesto came about because internally there was a lot of frustration around Centreon’s relationship with open source. A lot of people, especially those who didn’t come from an engineering background, would routinely ask why the company invested so much in open source. At the same time, there was a feeling among the engineering team that the company’s commitment to open source — and the concrete development time spent on open source — was slipping. </p><p><br></p><p>After creating the manifesto, the doubts about why open source mattered went away immediately — there hasn’t been a single conversation calling into question why open source matters since the manifesto was finished. Now conversations about open source are different. </p><p><br></p><p>Externally, there’s been a huge change in conversations around open source. People say things like “Centreon is back in the game.” </p><p><br></p><p>It’s hard to point to concrete financial results as a result of the manifesto, but there have been differences in relationships with partners for sure, and it has helped get more companies to contribute to the project. </p><p><br></p><p>Want to see what the <a href="https://www.centreon.com/centreon-open-source-manifesto/">Centreon Open Source Manifesto</a> looks like? Check it out here. </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 02 Apr 2025 02:21:14 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/ab94a2ce/0191913f.mp3" length="28889737" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2384</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I talked about Open Source Manifestos with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/vincentuntz/">Vincent Untz</a>, CTO of <a href="https://www.centreon.com">Centreon</a>. The entire conversation focused on this idea of open source manifestos, which Vincent is going to talk about at <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> — and I had never heard of before. </p><p><br></p><p>The idea to create an open source manifesto came about because internally there was a lot of frustration around Centreon’s relationship with open source. A lot of people, especially those who didn’t come from an engineering background, would routinely ask why the company invested so much in open source. At the same time, there was a feeling among the engineering team that the company’s commitment to open source — and the concrete development time spent on open source — was slipping. </p><p><br></p><p>After creating the manifesto, the doubts about why open source mattered went away immediately — there hasn’t been a single conversation calling into question why open source matters since the manifesto was finished. Now conversations about open source are different. </p><p><br></p><p>Externally, there’s been a huge change in conversations around open source. People say things like “Centreon is back in the game.” </p><p><br></p><p>It’s hard to point to concrete financial results as a result of the manifesto, but there have been differences in relationships with partners for sure, and it has helped get more companies to contribute to the project. </p><p><br></p><p>Want to see what the <a href="https://www.centreon.com/centreon-open-source-manifesto/">Centreon Open Source Manifesto</a> looks like? Check it out here. </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How a Rebrand Increased Sales with Lukas Gentele</title>
      <itunes:episode>253</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>253</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>How a Rebrand Increased Sales with Lukas Gentele</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">a0abcd4a-0a9c-445b-ab8f-d46c25e321c6</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/cab9d865</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/gentele/">Lukas Gentele</a>, the CEO and co-founder of <a href="https://www.loft.sh">LoftLabs. </a></p><p><br></p><p>Here’s some of the things we covered: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>There are many open source projects at LoftLabs. We talked about what the team did differently the second time round, when they’d had the experience of creating the first project under their belt, and why they continued creating additional projects after that. </li><li>How they make roadmap decisions to decide what goes in the OSS versus what goes in the enterprise edition</li><li>How they thought about the benefits to the business from open sourcing vCluster, the second project they released, and whether or not the theory about how it would benefit the business ended up being correct. </li><li>Whether or not open code is necessary for community building, and why. In particular, we talked about the difference in how people feel ‘ownership’ of open source projects when they contribute to them. </li><li>The pros and cons of building different brands around your project, your product and your company; and of having different brands around your different projects. We talked about this a lot; LoftLabs has a different company brand from any of the products or projects, but they discovered that if the project and product do not have the same brand, people get so confused that they ultimately do not buy. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>If you need to figure out how to brand your project and product, you might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a>If you want an opportunity to talk with other founders about branding, community building, and more, you should join us at <a href="http://05f5.com/">Open Source Founders Summit </a>May 19th and 20th in Paris. </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/gentele/">Lukas Gentele</a>, the CEO and co-founder of <a href="https://www.loft.sh">LoftLabs. </a></p><p><br></p><p>Here’s some of the things we covered: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>There are many open source projects at LoftLabs. We talked about what the team did differently the second time round, when they’d had the experience of creating the first project under their belt, and why they continued creating additional projects after that. </li><li>How they make roadmap decisions to decide what goes in the OSS versus what goes in the enterprise edition</li><li>How they thought about the benefits to the business from open sourcing vCluster, the second project they released, and whether or not the theory about how it would benefit the business ended up being correct. </li><li>Whether or not open code is necessary for community building, and why. In particular, we talked about the difference in how people feel ‘ownership’ of open source projects when they contribute to them. </li><li>The pros and cons of building different brands around your project, your product and your company; and of having different brands around your different projects. We talked about this a lot; LoftLabs has a different company brand from any of the products or projects, but they discovered that if the project and product do not have the same brand, people get so confused that they ultimately do not buy. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>If you need to figure out how to brand your project and product, you might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a>If you want an opportunity to talk with other founders about branding, community building, and more, you should join us at <a href="http://05f5.com/">Open Source Founders Summit </a>May 19th and 20th in Paris. </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 26 Mar 2025 02:49:25 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/cab9d865/763ecdbc.mp3" length="33680001" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2522</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/gentele/">Lukas Gentele</a>, the CEO and co-founder of <a href="https://www.loft.sh">LoftLabs. </a></p><p><br></p><p>Here’s some of the things we covered: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>There are many open source projects at LoftLabs. We talked about what the team did differently the second time round, when they’d had the experience of creating the first project under their belt, and why they continued creating additional projects after that. </li><li>How they make roadmap decisions to decide what goes in the OSS versus what goes in the enterprise edition</li><li>How they thought about the benefits to the business from open sourcing vCluster, the second project they released, and whether or not the theory about how it would benefit the business ended up being correct. </li><li>Whether or not open code is necessary for community building, and why. In particular, we talked about the difference in how people feel ‘ownership’ of open source projects when they contribute to them. </li><li>The pros and cons of building different brands around your project, your product and your company; and of having different brands around your different projects. We talked about this a lot; LoftLabs has a different company brand from any of the products or projects, but they discovered that if the project and product do not have the same brand, people get so confused that they ultimately do not buy. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>If you need to figure out how to brand your project and product, you might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a>If you want an opportunity to talk with other founders about branding, community building, and more, you should join us at <a href="http://05f5.com/">Open Source Founders Summit </a>May 19th and 20th in Paris. </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Fundraising and M&amp;A for Open Source Companies with Daniel Jarjoura</title>
      <itunes:episode>252</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>252</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Fundraising and M&amp;A for Open Source Companies with Daniel Jarjoura</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">42f1869c-054b-4abe-874a-42e2a5c742e8</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/4924364f</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on the Business of Open Source I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/danieljarjoura/">Daniel Jarjoura</a>, an investor at Avolta who specializes in developer-facing companies, and who writes a newsletter on developer-facing startups and also collects data on investments in open source companies. We spoke about the overall state of investment for open source companies and specifically the state of investment in open source companies in Europe. </p><p><br></p><p>Here’s what we talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Differences between venture funding for OSS companies in Europe and in NA</li><li>How open source companies were relatively stable in terms of getting venture funding, even as the entire venture funding ecosystem was in free-fall.</li><li>How it might be true that European investors don’t understand open source companies, but on the other hand plenty of North American investors invest in European companies. </li><li>Do developers trust open core companies? We had a discussion about whether or not open source companies have a trust problem…</li><li>How important communication is for open source companies, something that I think is very true — a lot of the problems that open source companies run into when they either adopt an open core model or even when they do a license change. </li><li>How founders can do a better job communicating with their VCs, including how to do a better job targeting appropriate investors. </li><li>What do optimizing for in the VC relationship … and spoiler alert, that is for money. You might want a perfect VC who can make introductions, give you advice, give you money, be nice, etc. But the most important thing is the cash; focus on that. The second most important is the introductions. But advice isn’t something you should count on from VCs, and that really isn’t a VCs job, anyway. </li><li>We finished the conversation with a discussion about M&amp;A for open source companies. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>If you want good advice about your open source company, you might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a>If you want an opportunity to talk with other founders about things like M&amp;A for open source companies, communicating with VCs, and other topics specific to open source companies, you should join us at <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit </a>May 19th and 20th in Paris. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on the Business of Open Source I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/danieljarjoura/">Daniel Jarjoura</a>, an investor at Avolta who specializes in developer-facing companies, and who writes a newsletter on developer-facing startups and also collects data on investments in open source companies. We spoke about the overall state of investment for open source companies and specifically the state of investment in open source companies in Europe. </p><p><br></p><p>Here’s what we talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Differences between venture funding for OSS companies in Europe and in NA</li><li>How open source companies were relatively stable in terms of getting venture funding, even as the entire venture funding ecosystem was in free-fall.</li><li>How it might be true that European investors don’t understand open source companies, but on the other hand plenty of North American investors invest in European companies. </li><li>Do developers trust open core companies? We had a discussion about whether or not open source companies have a trust problem…</li><li>How important communication is for open source companies, something that I think is very true — a lot of the problems that open source companies run into when they either adopt an open core model or even when they do a license change. </li><li>How founders can do a better job communicating with their VCs, including how to do a better job targeting appropriate investors. </li><li>What do optimizing for in the VC relationship … and spoiler alert, that is for money. You might want a perfect VC who can make introductions, give you advice, give you money, be nice, etc. But the most important thing is the cash; focus on that. The second most important is the introductions. But advice isn’t something you should count on from VCs, and that really isn’t a VCs job, anyway. </li><li>We finished the conversation with a discussion about M&amp;A for open source companies. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>If you want good advice about your open source company, you might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a>If you want an opportunity to talk with other founders about things like M&amp;A for open source companies, communicating with VCs, and other topics specific to open source companies, you should join us at <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit </a>May 19th and 20th in Paris. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 19 Mar 2025 03:31:22 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/4924364f/9c34ec60.mp3" length="26178343" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2582</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on the Business of Open Source I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/danieljarjoura/">Daniel Jarjoura</a>, an investor at Avolta who specializes in developer-facing companies, and who writes a newsletter on developer-facing startups and also collects data on investments in open source companies. We spoke about the overall state of investment for open source companies and specifically the state of investment in open source companies in Europe. </p><p><br></p><p>Here’s what we talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Differences between venture funding for OSS companies in Europe and in NA</li><li>How open source companies were relatively stable in terms of getting venture funding, even as the entire venture funding ecosystem was in free-fall.</li><li>How it might be true that European investors don’t understand open source companies, but on the other hand plenty of North American investors invest in European companies. </li><li>Do developers trust open core companies? We had a discussion about whether or not open source companies have a trust problem…</li><li>How important communication is for open source companies, something that I think is very true — a lot of the problems that open source companies run into when they either adopt an open core model or even when they do a license change. </li><li>How founders can do a better job communicating with their VCs, including how to do a better job targeting appropriate investors. </li><li>What do optimizing for in the VC relationship … and spoiler alert, that is for money. You might want a perfect VC who can make introductions, give you advice, give you money, be nice, etc. But the most important thing is the cash; focus on that. The second most important is the introductions. But advice isn’t something you should count on from VCs, and that really isn’t a VCs job, anyway. </li><li>We finished the conversation with a discussion about M&amp;A for open source companies. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>If you want good advice about your open source company, you might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a>If you want an opportunity to talk with other founders about things like M&amp;A for open source companies, communicating with VCs, and other topics specific to open source companies, you should join us at <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit </a>May 19th and 20th in Paris. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Products, consulting, and open source with Andrew Martin</title>
      <itunes:episode>251</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>251</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Products, consulting, and open source with Andrew Martin</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">4cb9df4e-42bd-4ec8-9114-cadeadc11abe</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/4f61d302</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/andr3wmartin/">Andrew Martin</a>, CEO and founder of <a href="https://control-plane.io">Control Plane. </a></p><p><br></p><p>Control Plane is ultimately a consulting company, as Andrew introduced it. But the company also created and maintains <a href="https://kubesec.io">KubeSec</a>, and also has an enterprise version of <a href="https://control-plane.io/enterprise-for-flux-cd/">Flux CD</a> that it licenses. That gives this conversation a slightly different flavor from the usual. </p><p><br></p><p>Here’s some of the things we talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>The business ROI that Andrew expected to get from releasing KubeSec, and whether or not he as actually seen those expected results play out</li><li>The difference between bootstrapping a company by offering services and by offering consulting — specifically what the difference between services and consulting is. </li><li>The problem with “drive-by” feature development in open source projects — when people contribute features but don’t commit to the ongoing maintenance of the project</li><li>Why Control Plane decided to release an enterprise version of FluxCD, and how the enterprise version of Flux is differentiated from the pure open source project. </li><li>Why underinvesting in marketing, especially in marketing for the open source projects, was a mistake</li></ul><p><br></p><p>Join us at <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> if you want more conversations about how companies are built around open source projects, from consultancies to large corporations. </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/andr3wmartin/">Andrew Martin</a>, CEO and founder of <a href="https://control-plane.io">Control Plane. </a></p><p><br></p><p>Control Plane is ultimately a consulting company, as Andrew introduced it. But the company also created and maintains <a href="https://kubesec.io">KubeSec</a>, and also has an enterprise version of <a href="https://control-plane.io/enterprise-for-flux-cd/">Flux CD</a> that it licenses. That gives this conversation a slightly different flavor from the usual. </p><p><br></p><p>Here’s some of the things we talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>The business ROI that Andrew expected to get from releasing KubeSec, and whether or not he as actually seen those expected results play out</li><li>The difference between bootstrapping a company by offering services and by offering consulting — specifically what the difference between services and consulting is. </li><li>The problem with “drive-by” feature development in open source projects — when people contribute features but don’t commit to the ongoing maintenance of the project</li><li>Why Control Plane decided to release an enterprise version of FluxCD, and how the enterprise version of Flux is differentiated from the pure open source project. </li><li>Why underinvesting in marketing, especially in marketing for the open source projects, was a mistake</li></ul><p><br></p><p>Join us at <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> if you want more conversations about how companies are built around open source projects, from consultancies to large corporations. </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 12 Mar 2025 05:18:20 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/4f61d302/cc207e0f.mp3" length="23346306" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2200</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/andr3wmartin/">Andrew Martin</a>, CEO and founder of <a href="https://control-plane.io">Control Plane. </a></p><p><br></p><p>Control Plane is ultimately a consulting company, as Andrew introduced it. But the company also created and maintains <a href="https://kubesec.io">KubeSec</a>, and also has an enterprise version of <a href="https://control-plane.io/enterprise-for-flux-cd/">Flux CD</a> that it licenses. That gives this conversation a slightly different flavor from the usual. </p><p><br></p><p>Here’s some of the things we talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>The business ROI that Andrew expected to get from releasing KubeSec, and whether or not he as actually seen those expected results play out</li><li>The difference between bootstrapping a company by offering services and by offering consulting — specifically what the difference between services and consulting is. </li><li>The problem with “drive-by” feature development in open source projects — when people contribute features but don’t commit to the ongoing maintenance of the project</li><li>Why Control Plane decided to release an enterprise version of FluxCD, and how the enterprise version of Flux is differentiated from the pure open source project. </li><li>Why underinvesting in marketing, especially in marketing for the open source projects, was a mistake</li></ul><p><br></p><p>Join us at <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> if you want more conversations about how companies are built around open source projects, from consultancies to large corporations. </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How Technology Decisions Impact Growth with Misha Bragin</title>
      <itunes:episode>250</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>250</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>How Technology Decisions Impact Growth with Misha Bragin</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">c869fc4d-d6f1-40b8-be79-34467735e2e5</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/aab47f99</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mikhailbragin/">Misha Bragin,</a> co-founder and CEO of <a href="https://netbird.io">NetBird.</a> This was also the first episode I recorded in 2025, which gives you an idea of how far in advance I’m recording episodes. </p><p><br></p><p>NetBird has an interesting origin story — it came out of an original idea to make a hardware product, but as Misha and his co-founder were starting to work out the realities of manufacturing, they realized that they would be better off building a software company. </p><p><br></p><p>Here were some of the take aways from the conversation: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Sometimes your users want to pay you! Misha explained that before there was a commercial offering, some open source users proactively reached out asking for one — because they understood that in order for the company to be viable, it needed to have revenue. </li><li>Just because you get crickets at first doesn’t mean your project sucks. When NetBird’s open source project was first released, it made zero splash.</li><li>The reality of working in a proprietary piece of software, you can do things quick and dirty. *Obviously you shouldn’t, but let’s face it a lot of people do. But when your code is open, it is also a part of your communication strategy! If you push out code that’s not tested or that’s not well done, you risk reputation damage even if the software works exactly as it should. </li><li>Misha talked about how choosing Auth0 as an authentication service was a mistake — not because it is a bad service, but because it was not appropriate for their target audience, who are self-hosting. This is a very good reminder of how sometimes choosing the best technology for the job can backfire; you also have to take into account who the target user is and if they are going to be repelled by the choice you’re making. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Struggling to figure out how to balance your project development with your product development? Need to supercharge your funnel? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a>Want to share your knowledge and learn from your peers who are open source entrepreneurs? You should join us at <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit </a>May 19th and 20th in Paris. </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mikhailbragin/">Misha Bragin,</a> co-founder and CEO of <a href="https://netbird.io">NetBird.</a> This was also the first episode I recorded in 2025, which gives you an idea of how far in advance I’m recording episodes. </p><p><br></p><p>NetBird has an interesting origin story — it came out of an original idea to make a hardware product, but as Misha and his co-founder were starting to work out the realities of manufacturing, they realized that they would be better off building a software company. </p><p><br></p><p>Here were some of the take aways from the conversation: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Sometimes your users want to pay you! Misha explained that before there was a commercial offering, some open source users proactively reached out asking for one — because they understood that in order for the company to be viable, it needed to have revenue. </li><li>Just because you get crickets at first doesn’t mean your project sucks. When NetBird’s open source project was first released, it made zero splash.</li><li>The reality of working in a proprietary piece of software, you can do things quick and dirty. *Obviously you shouldn’t, but let’s face it a lot of people do. But when your code is open, it is also a part of your communication strategy! If you push out code that’s not tested or that’s not well done, you risk reputation damage even if the software works exactly as it should. </li><li>Misha talked about how choosing Auth0 as an authentication service was a mistake — not because it is a bad service, but because it was not appropriate for their target audience, who are self-hosting. This is a very good reminder of how sometimes choosing the best technology for the job can backfire; you also have to take into account who the target user is and if they are going to be repelled by the choice you’re making. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Struggling to figure out how to balance your project development with your product development? Need to supercharge your funnel? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a>Want to share your knowledge and learn from your peers who are open source entrepreneurs? You should join us at <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit </a>May 19th and 20th in Paris. </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 05 Mar 2025 03:11:53 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/aab47f99/41f94da4.mp3" length="17842943" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2142</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mikhailbragin/">Misha Bragin,</a> co-founder and CEO of <a href="https://netbird.io">NetBird.</a> This was also the first episode I recorded in 2025, which gives you an idea of how far in advance I’m recording episodes. </p><p><br></p><p>NetBird has an interesting origin story — it came out of an original idea to make a hardware product, but as Misha and his co-founder were starting to work out the realities of manufacturing, they realized that they would be better off building a software company. </p><p><br></p><p>Here were some of the take aways from the conversation: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Sometimes your users want to pay you! Misha explained that before there was a commercial offering, some open source users proactively reached out asking for one — because they understood that in order for the company to be viable, it needed to have revenue. </li><li>Just because you get crickets at first doesn’t mean your project sucks. When NetBird’s open source project was first released, it made zero splash.</li><li>The reality of working in a proprietary piece of software, you can do things quick and dirty. *Obviously you shouldn’t, but let’s face it a lot of people do. But when your code is open, it is also a part of your communication strategy! If you push out code that’s not tested or that’s not well done, you risk reputation damage even if the software works exactly as it should. </li><li>Misha talked about how choosing Auth0 as an authentication service was a mistake — not because it is a bad service, but because it was not appropriate for their target audience, who are self-hosting. This is a very good reminder of how sometimes choosing the best technology for the job can backfire; you also have to take into account who the target user is and if they are going to be repelled by the choice you’re making. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Struggling to figure out how to balance your project development with your product development? Need to supercharge your funnel? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a>Want to share your knowledge and learn from your peers who are open source entrepreneurs? You should join us at <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit </a>May 19th and 20th in Paris. </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Open Source and AI Coding Assistants with Ty Dunn </title>
      <itunes:episode>249</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>249</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Open Source and AI Coding Assistants with Ty Dunn </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">0dcce329-c0fa-48e3-a076-beb62787d379</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/382f532a</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tylerjdunn/">Ty Dunn</a>, founder of <a href="https://www.continue.dev">Continue.dev</a>, which is an open source AI code assistant. We had a fabulous conversation that touched on both the AI hype wave and why open source. </p><p><br></p><p>The first thing I’d like to touch on is why Continue.dev is open source, in other words, what business rationale Ty has for taking that route. Because he makes some great points about building an ecosystem. If building an ecosystem, and encouraging people in your community to build on top of your software, is something that is important to your for either strategic or philosophical reasons, the absolute best way to accomplish this goal is with an open source project. </p><p><br></p><p>In the case of Continue, being open source, and allowing companies to retain control over their data, is also a differentiation in the market. </p><p><br></p><p>There was also a phrase in the conversation that I wanted to pull out — Ty talked about monetizing “next to” the open source project. This is precisely how many of the most successful open source companies work. They have a successful open source project but monetize it in a way that is adjacent, rather than directly competing with the project. </p><p><br></p><p>Check out the full episode for a discussion about the AI hype wave and how it intersects with open source business models. </p><p><br></p><p>If you want more discussions about open source companies, you shouldn’t miss <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> this May 19th and 20th — it’s the only event specifically designed for leadership in open source companies. </p><p><br></p><p>And if you’re struggling with your open source strategy, you should consider <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">working with me. </a></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tylerjdunn/">Ty Dunn</a>, founder of <a href="https://www.continue.dev">Continue.dev</a>, which is an open source AI code assistant. We had a fabulous conversation that touched on both the AI hype wave and why open source. </p><p><br></p><p>The first thing I’d like to touch on is why Continue.dev is open source, in other words, what business rationale Ty has for taking that route. Because he makes some great points about building an ecosystem. If building an ecosystem, and encouraging people in your community to build on top of your software, is something that is important to your for either strategic or philosophical reasons, the absolute best way to accomplish this goal is with an open source project. </p><p><br></p><p>In the case of Continue, being open source, and allowing companies to retain control over their data, is also a differentiation in the market. </p><p><br></p><p>There was also a phrase in the conversation that I wanted to pull out — Ty talked about monetizing “next to” the open source project. This is precisely how many of the most successful open source companies work. They have a successful open source project but monetize it in a way that is adjacent, rather than directly competing with the project. </p><p><br></p><p>Check out the full episode for a discussion about the AI hype wave and how it intersects with open source business models. </p><p><br></p><p>If you want more discussions about open source companies, you shouldn’t miss <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> this May 19th and 20th — it’s the only event specifically designed for leadership in open source companies. </p><p><br></p><p>And if you’re struggling with your open source strategy, you should consider <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">working with me. </a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 26 Feb 2025 01:57:31 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/382f532a/e1b2edc4.mp3" length="28582791" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2456</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tylerjdunn/">Ty Dunn</a>, founder of <a href="https://www.continue.dev">Continue.dev</a>, which is an open source AI code assistant. We had a fabulous conversation that touched on both the AI hype wave and why open source. </p><p><br></p><p>The first thing I’d like to touch on is why Continue.dev is open source, in other words, what business rationale Ty has for taking that route. Because he makes some great points about building an ecosystem. If building an ecosystem, and encouraging people in your community to build on top of your software, is something that is important to your for either strategic or philosophical reasons, the absolute best way to accomplish this goal is with an open source project. </p><p><br></p><p>In the case of Continue, being open source, and allowing companies to retain control over their data, is also a differentiation in the market. </p><p><br></p><p>There was also a phrase in the conversation that I wanted to pull out — Ty talked about monetizing “next to” the open source project. This is precisely how many of the most successful open source companies work. They have a successful open source project but monetize it in a way that is adjacent, rather than directly competing with the project. </p><p><br></p><p>Check out the full episode for a discussion about the AI hype wave and how it intersects with open source business models. </p><p><br></p><p>If you want more discussions about open source companies, you shouldn’t miss <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> this May 19th and 20th — it’s the only event specifically designed for leadership in open source companies. </p><p><br></p><p>And if you’re struggling with your open source strategy, you should consider <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">working with me. </a></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>The CFO's View of Open Source Companies with Eileen Doody and Karen Walker</title>
      <itunes:episode>248</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>248</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>The CFO's View of Open Source Companies with Eileen Doody and Karen Walker</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">bdc53bcd-4c99-46d5-92ba-e704b723171b</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/eac8e0aa</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I had a slightly different conversation: I spoke with the CFOs of two open source companies, Sysdig and Percona, to better understand what is different (and what is not) about financial management in open source companies. <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/karen-walker-finance-executive/">Karen Walker</a> is the CFO at Sysdig, and <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/eileen-doody-cpa-mba/">Eileen Doody</a> is the CFO at Percona. They both joined me to talk about the CFO role in general and the CFO role in particular at an open source company. </p><p><br></p><p>Why did I do this episode? Many founders I’ve spoken with are a bit unclear on the role of a CFO — whereas I’ve never spoken with a founder who had trouble understanding what their CTO does. Here’s some takeaways from our conversation: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Part of the CFO’s role is about thinking about open source strategically, in terms of how the open source project is going to fit into the company’s overall strategy.</li><li>Because open source is so ingrained in the company, it doesn’t fit into a single budget line item; it’s impossible to break out and say ‘we spend $X on open source’ because it’s so integrated into everything the company does</li><li>How do you measure your ROI on investment in open source? </li><li>At Sysdig, two out of three prospects come to the company because of Falco, their open source project. </li><li>We also talked about the ecosystem effects of having a huge footprint with your open source project; it’s hard to measure the positive influence of having massive brand awareness, but both CFOs are convinced that it is very important to the company. </li><li>Eileen says that many CIOs now have mandates to look for open source solutions when possible, which was not the case a decade ago. That’s changed the dynamic for a company like Percona that’s based around open source. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Another reason I did this episode is because while I usually have founders on the podcast, there are some really important perspectives from other leadership team members. Part of the the role of a CEO is to understand all the other C-level leadership position’s roles and responsibilities, and in my experience the CFO is one of the less well understood roles. In fact, we wrapped up the conversation by talking about how a CFO can be a real strategic partner that’s forward-thinking rather than just the bean-counter that some people expect a CFO to be. </p><p><br></p><p>A couple things to mention. First of all, if you want to learn more about my consulting work with open source companies, you <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">can do so here.</a> Second, if you want to chance to connect with other founders of open source companies, consider joining <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit </a>this May 19th and 20th in Paris. </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I had a slightly different conversation: I spoke with the CFOs of two open source companies, Sysdig and Percona, to better understand what is different (and what is not) about financial management in open source companies. <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/karen-walker-finance-executive/">Karen Walker</a> is the CFO at Sysdig, and <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/eileen-doody-cpa-mba/">Eileen Doody</a> is the CFO at Percona. They both joined me to talk about the CFO role in general and the CFO role in particular at an open source company. </p><p><br></p><p>Why did I do this episode? Many founders I’ve spoken with are a bit unclear on the role of a CFO — whereas I’ve never spoken with a founder who had trouble understanding what their CTO does. Here’s some takeaways from our conversation: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Part of the CFO’s role is about thinking about open source strategically, in terms of how the open source project is going to fit into the company’s overall strategy.</li><li>Because open source is so ingrained in the company, it doesn’t fit into a single budget line item; it’s impossible to break out and say ‘we spend $X on open source’ because it’s so integrated into everything the company does</li><li>How do you measure your ROI on investment in open source? </li><li>At Sysdig, two out of three prospects come to the company because of Falco, their open source project. </li><li>We also talked about the ecosystem effects of having a huge footprint with your open source project; it’s hard to measure the positive influence of having massive brand awareness, but both CFOs are convinced that it is very important to the company. </li><li>Eileen says that many CIOs now have mandates to look for open source solutions when possible, which was not the case a decade ago. That’s changed the dynamic for a company like Percona that’s based around open source. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Another reason I did this episode is because while I usually have founders on the podcast, there are some really important perspectives from other leadership team members. Part of the the role of a CEO is to understand all the other C-level leadership position’s roles and responsibilities, and in my experience the CFO is one of the less well understood roles. In fact, we wrapped up the conversation by talking about how a CFO can be a real strategic partner that’s forward-thinking rather than just the bean-counter that some people expect a CFO to be. </p><p><br></p><p>A couple things to mention. First of all, if you want to learn more about my consulting work with open source companies, you <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">can do so here.</a> Second, if you want to chance to connect with other founders of open source companies, consider joining <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit </a>this May 19th and 20th in Paris. </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 19 Feb 2025 01:51:56 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/eac8e0aa/555fda5f.mp3" length="27672572" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2236</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I had a slightly different conversation: I spoke with the CFOs of two open source companies, Sysdig and Percona, to better understand what is different (and what is not) about financial management in open source companies. <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/karen-walker-finance-executive/">Karen Walker</a> is the CFO at Sysdig, and <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/eileen-doody-cpa-mba/">Eileen Doody</a> is the CFO at Percona. They both joined me to talk about the CFO role in general and the CFO role in particular at an open source company. </p><p><br></p><p>Why did I do this episode? Many founders I’ve spoken with are a bit unclear on the role of a CFO — whereas I’ve never spoken with a founder who had trouble understanding what their CTO does. Here’s some takeaways from our conversation: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Part of the CFO’s role is about thinking about open source strategically, in terms of how the open source project is going to fit into the company’s overall strategy.</li><li>Because open source is so ingrained in the company, it doesn’t fit into a single budget line item; it’s impossible to break out and say ‘we spend $X on open source’ because it’s so integrated into everything the company does</li><li>How do you measure your ROI on investment in open source? </li><li>At Sysdig, two out of three prospects come to the company because of Falco, their open source project. </li><li>We also talked about the ecosystem effects of having a huge footprint with your open source project; it’s hard to measure the positive influence of having massive brand awareness, but both CFOs are convinced that it is very important to the company. </li><li>Eileen says that many CIOs now have mandates to look for open source solutions when possible, which was not the case a decade ago. That’s changed the dynamic for a company like Percona that’s based around open source. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Another reason I did this episode is because while I usually have founders on the podcast, there are some really important perspectives from other leadership team members. Part of the the role of a CEO is to understand all the other C-level leadership position’s roles and responsibilities, and in my experience the CFO is one of the less well understood roles. In fact, we wrapped up the conversation by talking about how a CFO can be a real strategic partner that’s forward-thinking rather than just the bean-counter that some people expect a CFO to be. </p><p><br></p><p>A couple things to mention. First of all, if you want to learn more about my consulting work with open source companies, you <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">can do so here.</a> Second, if you want to chance to connect with other founders of open source companies, consider joining <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit </a>this May 19th and 20th in Paris. </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Thinking Hard about your License Choice with Ivan Burazin </title>
      <itunes:episode>247</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>247</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Thinking Hard about your License Choice with Ivan Burazin </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">6fd6227f-48c7-4c29-b1b0-df5f4c17fbe2</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/f651fa7d</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/ivanburazin/">Ivan Burazin</a>, the CEO and co-founder of <a href="https://www.daytona.io">Daytona</a>. First of all, Daytona was one of the sponsors of the first edition of <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a>, and I had a chance to meet Ivan in person at the event. So a big thank you to him for taking a risk on the first year of the event! </p><p><br></p><p>But let’s get down to business. We talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why Daytona took an open source approach, even though they originally started out with a pure commercial licensed software. </li><li>The thought that went into choosing the license — this was a great discussion, because it is a question a lot of people have. Ivan walked through his thought process in choosing a license and how he thinks about difference licenses. </li><li>The theory about how open source will help Daytona build their business, and the dynamics of how open source adoption leads to commercial success. </li><li>The importance of technical decisions in an open source project’s growth strategy.</li><li>The different stakeholders in the community, as well as in the customer community. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>I really liked the piece when Ivan talked about the individual motivations that people might have for getting involved in a community — instead of thinking about how you get something from the community, think about how others can get something out of the community. For example, you can have someone who wants to get into technical writing who gets that experience by writing documentation for your project. Making it easier for that to happen is in everyone’s best interest. </p><p><br></p><p>Like this episode? Struggling with your messaging or with your conversions from open source project to commercial customers? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me.</a> And if you want to join us at Open Source Founders Summit, apply to <a href="https://pretix.eu/05F5/2025/">join us here. </a></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/ivanburazin/">Ivan Burazin</a>, the CEO and co-founder of <a href="https://www.daytona.io">Daytona</a>. First of all, Daytona was one of the sponsors of the first edition of <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a>, and I had a chance to meet Ivan in person at the event. So a big thank you to him for taking a risk on the first year of the event! </p><p><br></p><p>But let’s get down to business. We talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why Daytona took an open source approach, even though they originally started out with a pure commercial licensed software. </li><li>The thought that went into choosing the license — this was a great discussion, because it is a question a lot of people have. Ivan walked through his thought process in choosing a license and how he thinks about difference licenses. </li><li>The theory about how open source will help Daytona build their business, and the dynamics of how open source adoption leads to commercial success. </li><li>The importance of technical decisions in an open source project’s growth strategy.</li><li>The different stakeholders in the community, as well as in the customer community. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>I really liked the piece when Ivan talked about the individual motivations that people might have for getting involved in a community — instead of thinking about how you get something from the community, think about how others can get something out of the community. For example, you can have someone who wants to get into technical writing who gets that experience by writing documentation for your project. Making it easier for that to happen is in everyone’s best interest. </p><p><br></p><p>Like this episode? Struggling with your messaging or with your conversions from open source project to commercial customers? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me.</a> And if you want to join us at Open Source Founders Summit, apply to <a href="https://pretix.eu/05F5/2025/">join us here. </a></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Thu, 06 Feb 2025 00:45:17 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/f651fa7d/5e30cd46.mp3" length="31612232" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2362</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/ivanburazin/">Ivan Burazin</a>, the CEO and co-founder of <a href="https://www.daytona.io">Daytona</a>. First of all, Daytona was one of the sponsors of the first edition of <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a>, and I had a chance to meet Ivan in person at the event. So a big thank you to him for taking a risk on the first year of the event! </p><p><br></p><p>But let’s get down to business. We talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why Daytona took an open source approach, even though they originally started out with a pure commercial licensed software. </li><li>The thought that went into choosing the license — this was a great discussion, because it is a question a lot of people have. Ivan walked through his thought process in choosing a license and how he thinks about difference licenses. </li><li>The theory about how open source will help Daytona build their business, and the dynamics of how open source adoption leads to commercial success. </li><li>The importance of technical decisions in an open source project’s growth strategy.</li><li>The different stakeholders in the community, as well as in the customer community. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>I really liked the piece when Ivan talked about the individual motivations that people might have for getting involved in a community — instead of thinking about how you get something from the community, think about how others can get something out of the community. For example, you can have someone who wants to get into technical writing who gets that experience by writing documentation for your project. Making it easier for that to happen is in everyone’s best interest. </p><p><br></p><p>Like this episode? Struggling with your messaging or with your conversions from open source project to commercial customers? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me.</a> And if you want to join us at Open Source Founders Summit, apply to <a href="https://pretix.eu/05F5/2025/">join us here. </a></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Bootstrapping an Open Source Company with Ludovic Dubost</title>
      <itunes:episode>246</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>246</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Bootstrapping an Open Source Company with Ludovic Dubost</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">4ce3bc01-7970-49a5-af50-1b5c01e8bd23</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/26bbf111</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I talked with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/ldubost/">Ludovic Dubost</a>, founder and CEO of <a href="https://xwiki.com/en/">XWiki</a> about the long history of XWiki, which he started in 2003. </p><p><br></p><p>This was a wide-ranging conversation… here’s some of the things we covered: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why XWiki is an open source company. Ludovic started out with the explicit goal of creating a company, so why start it as an open source company? </li><li>The reality that starting a software company in Europe means putting yourself at a disadvantage — which doesn’t mean that you shouldn’t do it, but rather that you need to be aware of that fact, and that open source is one tool that European companies can use to  succeed even when they are at a disadvantage. </li><li>How Ludovic bootstrapped the company, including moving from support contracts to recurring revenue from the SaaS and how the transition has happened over the years</li><li>The difficulties that come from being small and bootstrapped</li><li>Managing the balance between distribution and monetization</li><li>Why a community version / enterprise version model did not work for XWiki</li><li>Why it’s so important to pay attention to your competitive landscape, because the only way to get customers is by offering something that is better in some way than your competitors — it’s your comparative strengths that matter. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Did you enjoy this conversation? Find Ludovic and XWiki at Fosdem on Saturday! And/or join us at <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit. </a>Are you also interested in the challenges around product management for open source companies? You might want <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">to work with me. </a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I talked with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/ldubost/">Ludovic Dubost</a>, founder and CEO of <a href="https://xwiki.com/en/">XWiki</a> about the long history of XWiki, which he started in 2003. </p><p><br></p><p>This was a wide-ranging conversation… here’s some of the things we covered: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why XWiki is an open source company. Ludovic started out with the explicit goal of creating a company, so why start it as an open source company? </li><li>The reality that starting a software company in Europe means putting yourself at a disadvantage — which doesn’t mean that you shouldn’t do it, but rather that you need to be aware of that fact, and that open source is one tool that European companies can use to  succeed even when they are at a disadvantage. </li><li>How Ludovic bootstrapped the company, including moving from support contracts to recurring revenue from the SaaS and how the transition has happened over the years</li><li>The difficulties that come from being small and bootstrapped</li><li>Managing the balance between distribution and monetization</li><li>Why a community version / enterprise version model did not work for XWiki</li><li>Why it’s so important to pay attention to your competitive landscape, because the only way to get customers is by offering something that is better in some way than your competitors — it’s your comparative strengths that matter. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Did you enjoy this conversation? Find Ludovic and XWiki at Fosdem on Saturday! And/or join us at <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit. </a>Are you also interested in the challenges around product management for open source companies? You might want <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">to work with me. </a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 29 Jan 2025 01:41:26 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/26bbf111/420cb9c2.mp3" length="40953023" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2781</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I talked with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/ldubost/">Ludovic Dubost</a>, founder and CEO of <a href="https://xwiki.com/en/">XWiki</a> about the long history of XWiki, which he started in 2003. </p><p><br></p><p>This was a wide-ranging conversation… here’s some of the things we covered: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why XWiki is an open source company. Ludovic started out with the explicit goal of creating a company, so why start it as an open source company? </li><li>The reality that starting a software company in Europe means putting yourself at a disadvantage — which doesn’t mean that you shouldn’t do it, but rather that you need to be aware of that fact, and that open source is one tool that European companies can use to  succeed even when they are at a disadvantage. </li><li>How Ludovic bootstrapped the company, including moving from support contracts to recurring revenue from the SaaS and how the transition has happened over the years</li><li>The difficulties that come from being small and bootstrapped</li><li>Managing the balance between distribution and monetization</li><li>Why a community version / enterprise version model did not work for XWiki</li><li>Why it’s so important to pay attention to your competitive landscape, because the only way to get customers is by offering something that is better in some way than your competitors — it’s your comparative strengths that matter. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Did you enjoy this conversation? Find Ludovic and XWiki at Fosdem on Saturday! And/or join us at <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit. </a>Are you also interested in the challenges around product management for open source companies? You might want <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">to work with me. </a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Building an Open Source Company for Long-Term Sustainability with John O'Nolan</title>
      <itunes:episode>245</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>245</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Building an Open Source Company for Long-Term Sustainability with John O'Nolan</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">b160589e-e39a-4c8d-b504-883293354108</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/b15a5e8f</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/johnonolan/">John O’Nolan</a>, the co-founder of <a href="https://ghost.org">ghost.org</a>. Before further ado, John is going to be one of speakers at Open Source Founders Summit 2025, so if you’d like a chance to dive deeper into any of the subjects we talked about on the podcast with him, in person, you should <a href="http://05f5.com">join us in May. </a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>There’s a lot of interesting tidbits to pull out from this conversation. First of all, I think it’s interesting that Ghost came about because Wordpress was moving away from its roots as a pure publishing tool and becoming a website builder. John, who was very involved in the Wordpress community at the time, wondered what it would look like if Wordpress went back to its roots and focused on publishing and only publishing. It’s a lesson for founders that sometimes focusing on the small niches left behind as incumbents expand can be huge opportunity. —&gt; It’s worth noting that we recorded this podcast last fall when the drama between Wordpress and WPEngine was exceptionally hot. </p><p><br></p><p>Ghost is organized as a non-profit, and John also talked about why he made that decision from the beginning. It came down to wanting to make a good salary at a company he had started, but without the goal of becoming fabulously wealthy as a result. </p><p><br></p><p>We also talked about whether or not a venture-backed company can be ‘responsible’ with respect to their community; and what types of companies tend to be able to manage the tensions between the community needs and the fiduciary duty that you have if you take outside funding. </p><p><br></p><p>We also talked about the difference in the market between the product and the project, how Ghost manages to expand in spite of not having a dedicated marketing team. </p><p><br></p><p>We also talked about the difference between building a sustainable business and building a business that gets hockey stick very quickly as well as some of the tension between technology decisions and business decisions. </p><p><br></p><p>If you want to talk more about these issues — and want to talk directly with John — you should come to Open Source Founders Summit May 19th and 20th, 2025. <a href="http://05f5.com">Get your tickets here. </a></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/johnonolan/">John O’Nolan</a>, the co-founder of <a href="https://ghost.org">ghost.org</a>. Before further ado, John is going to be one of speakers at Open Source Founders Summit 2025, so if you’d like a chance to dive deeper into any of the subjects we talked about on the podcast with him, in person, you should <a href="http://05f5.com">join us in May. </a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>There’s a lot of interesting tidbits to pull out from this conversation. First of all, I think it’s interesting that Ghost came about because Wordpress was moving away from its roots as a pure publishing tool and becoming a website builder. John, who was very involved in the Wordpress community at the time, wondered what it would look like if Wordpress went back to its roots and focused on publishing and only publishing. It’s a lesson for founders that sometimes focusing on the small niches left behind as incumbents expand can be huge opportunity. —&gt; It’s worth noting that we recorded this podcast last fall when the drama between Wordpress and WPEngine was exceptionally hot. </p><p><br></p><p>Ghost is organized as a non-profit, and John also talked about why he made that decision from the beginning. It came down to wanting to make a good salary at a company he had started, but without the goal of becoming fabulously wealthy as a result. </p><p><br></p><p>We also talked about whether or not a venture-backed company can be ‘responsible’ with respect to their community; and what types of companies tend to be able to manage the tensions between the community needs and the fiduciary duty that you have if you take outside funding. </p><p><br></p><p>We also talked about the difference in the market between the product and the project, how Ghost manages to expand in spite of not having a dedicated marketing team. </p><p><br></p><p>We also talked about the difference between building a sustainable business and building a business that gets hockey stick very quickly as well as some of the tension between technology decisions and business decisions. </p><p><br></p><p>If you want to talk more about these issues — and want to talk directly with John — you should come to Open Source Founders Summit May 19th and 20th, 2025. <a href="http://05f5.com">Get your tickets here. </a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 22 Jan 2025 03:06:22 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/b15a5e8f/d10d7d56.mp3" length="31965582" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2626</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/johnonolan/">John O’Nolan</a>, the co-founder of <a href="https://ghost.org">ghost.org</a>. Before further ado, John is going to be one of speakers at Open Source Founders Summit 2025, so if you’d like a chance to dive deeper into any of the subjects we talked about on the podcast with him, in person, you should <a href="http://05f5.com">join us in May. </a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>There’s a lot of interesting tidbits to pull out from this conversation. First of all, I think it’s interesting that Ghost came about because Wordpress was moving away from its roots as a pure publishing tool and becoming a website builder. John, who was very involved in the Wordpress community at the time, wondered what it would look like if Wordpress went back to its roots and focused on publishing and only publishing. It’s a lesson for founders that sometimes focusing on the small niches left behind as incumbents expand can be huge opportunity. —&gt; It’s worth noting that we recorded this podcast last fall when the drama between Wordpress and WPEngine was exceptionally hot. </p><p><br></p><p>Ghost is organized as a non-profit, and John also talked about why he made that decision from the beginning. It came down to wanting to make a good salary at a company he had started, but without the goal of becoming fabulously wealthy as a result. </p><p><br></p><p>We also talked about whether or not a venture-backed company can be ‘responsible’ with respect to their community; and what types of companies tend to be able to manage the tensions between the community needs and the fiduciary duty that you have if you take outside funding. </p><p><br></p><p>We also talked about the difference in the market between the product and the project, how Ghost manages to expand in spite of not having a dedicated marketing team. </p><p><br></p><p>We also talked about the difference between building a sustainable business and building a business that gets hockey stick very quickly as well as some of the tension between technology decisions and business decisions. </p><p><br></p><p>If you want to talk more about these issues — and want to talk directly with John — you should come to Open Source Founders Summit May 19th and 20th, 2025. <a href="http://05f5.com">Get your tickets here. </a></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>The Complicated Calculus around Donating a Project to a Foundation with Omri Gazette</title>
      <itunes:episode>244</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>244</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>The Complicated Calculus around Donating a Project to a Foundation with Omri Gazette</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">13622836-32ea-4187-940c-dbefc8eb5a1e</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/b58d5326</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>In the last episode of The Business of Open Source recorded at KubeCon Salt Lake City, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/ogazitt/">Omri Gazitt</a>, co-founder and CEO of <a href="https://www.aserto.com">Aserto. </a></p><p><br></p><p>Aserto has two open source project that it maintains, one of which it donated to the CNCF. In this episode, we talked about the decision to donate a project to the CNCF — both what the process entailed and what is in for Aserto in having a project at the CNCF. </p><p><br></p><p>But of course Aserto also has another project, <a href="https://www.topaz.sh">Topaz</a>, which it has not donated to the CNCF. We also talked about why Topaz wasn’t donated to the CNCF. </p><p><br></p><p>A couple things to pull out of this conversation: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>The complicated calculus of deciding whether to donate a project to a foundation, and how the dynamics of the market change over the years and you have to think very critically about the specifics of your situation before making the decision to donate to a foundation</li><li>How every company has slightly different market pressures — sometimes the market pushed you to donate to a foundation, sometimes the market doesn’t care. </li><li>The importance of thinking not just about market share when you’re open source, but also how you are going to monetize! It’s possible to have vastly smaller market share but make vastly more money. </li><li>Why being an open source company does not have to mean that your paid solution has to be cheaper than your competitors. </li><li>Why you don’t have to start selling into startups — sometimes your best customers will always be either mid-market or enterprise from the very beginning. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>We talked about the panel I moderated at CloudNative StartupFest at KubeCon. If you missed it, here’s the link to see the <a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=PbAIC_piKPI&amp;list=PLj6h78yzYM2OBfnicyJbiZFoJUOeeDmgN&amp;index=8&amp;t=768s">replay. </a>We also talked about Adam Jacob’s talk at the same event, which you <a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rmhYHzJpkuo&amp;list=PLj6h78yzYM2OBfnicyJbiZFoJUOeeDmgN&amp;index=6">can see here. </a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>If you’re building a company around an open source project and aren’t sure how to manage the relationship between the project and product, you might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me</a> or come to <a href="http://05f5.com/">Open Source Founders Summit </a>this May. </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In the last episode of The Business of Open Source recorded at KubeCon Salt Lake City, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/ogazitt/">Omri Gazitt</a>, co-founder and CEO of <a href="https://www.aserto.com">Aserto. </a></p><p><br></p><p>Aserto has two open source project that it maintains, one of which it donated to the CNCF. In this episode, we talked about the decision to donate a project to the CNCF — both what the process entailed and what is in for Aserto in having a project at the CNCF. </p><p><br></p><p>But of course Aserto also has another project, <a href="https://www.topaz.sh">Topaz</a>, which it has not donated to the CNCF. We also talked about why Topaz wasn’t donated to the CNCF. </p><p><br></p><p>A couple things to pull out of this conversation: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>The complicated calculus of deciding whether to donate a project to a foundation, and how the dynamics of the market change over the years and you have to think very critically about the specifics of your situation before making the decision to donate to a foundation</li><li>How every company has slightly different market pressures — sometimes the market pushed you to donate to a foundation, sometimes the market doesn’t care. </li><li>The importance of thinking not just about market share when you’re open source, but also how you are going to monetize! It’s possible to have vastly smaller market share but make vastly more money. </li><li>Why being an open source company does not have to mean that your paid solution has to be cheaper than your competitors. </li><li>Why you don’t have to start selling into startups — sometimes your best customers will always be either mid-market or enterprise from the very beginning. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>We talked about the panel I moderated at CloudNative StartupFest at KubeCon. If you missed it, here’s the link to see the <a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=PbAIC_piKPI&amp;list=PLj6h78yzYM2OBfnicyJbiZFoJUOeeDmgN&amp;index=8&amp;t=768s">replay. </a>We also talked about Adam Jacob’s talk at the same event, which you <a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rmhYHzJpkuo&amp;list=PLj6h78yzYM2OBfnicyJbiZFoJUOeeDmgN&amp;index=6">can see here. </a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>If you’re building a company around an open source project and aren’t sure how to manage the relationship between the project and product, you might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me</a> or come to <a href="http://05f5.com/">Open Source Founders Summit </a>this May. </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 15 Jan 2025 02:00:42 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/b58d5326/c5915725.mp3" length="19383853" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1448</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>In the last episode of The Business of Open Source recorded at KubeCon Salt Lake City, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/ogazitt/">Omri Gazitt</a>, co-founder and CEO of <a href="https://www.aserto.com">Aserto. </a></p><p><br></p><p>Aserto has two open source project that it maintains, one of which it donated to the CNCF. In this episode, we talked about the decision to donate a project to the CNCF — both what the process entailed and what is in for Aserto in having a project at the CNCF. </p><p><br></p><p>But of course Aserto also has another project, <a href="https://www.topaz.sh">Topaz</a>, which it has not donated to the CNCF. We also talked about why Topaz wasn’t donated to the CNCF. </p><p><br></p><p>A couple things to pull out of this conversation: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>The complicated calculus of deciding whether to donate a project to a foundation, and how the dynamics of the market change over the years and you have to think very critically about the specifics of your situation before making the decision to donate to a foundation</li><li>How every company has slightly different market pressures — sometimes the market pushed you to donate to a foundation, sometimes the market doesn’t care. </li><li>The importance of thinking not just about market share when you’re open source, but also how you are going to monetize! It’s possible to have vastly smaller market share but make vastly more money. </li><li>Why being an open source company does not have to mean that your paid solution has to be cheaper than your competitors. </li><li>Why you don’t have to start selling into startups — sometimes your best customers will always be either mid-market or enterprise from the very beginning. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>We talked about the panel I moderated at CloudNative StartupFest at KubeCon. If you missed it, here’s the link to see the <a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=PbAIC_piKPI&amp;list=PLj6h78yzYM2OBfnicyJbiZFoJUOeeDmgN&amp;index=8&amp;t=768s">replay. </a>We also talked about Adam Jacob’s talk at the same event, which you <a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rmhYHzJpkuo&amp;list=PLj6h78yzYM2OBfnicyJbiZFoJUOeeDmgN&amp;index=6">can see here. </a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>If you’re building a company around an open source project and aren’t sure how to manage the relationship between the project and product, you might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me</a> or come to <a href="http://05f5.com/">Open Source Founders Summit </a>this May. </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>A Massive Head Start on Product Development with Open Source with Martin Mao</title>
      <itunes:episode>243</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>243</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>A Massive Head Start on Product Development with Open Source with Martin Mao</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">0dd03bcc-9494-4203-9e61-b683109a2a4d</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/bc69f55d</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This special episode recorded live at KubeCon Salt Lake City last November is with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/martinmao/">Martin Mao</a>, CEO and co-founder at <a href="https://chronosphere.io">Chronosphere.</a></p><p><br></p><p>We talked about how M3 was foundational to the early history of Chronosphere, and how the ability to leverage M3, which Martin and his co-founder had written while they were still working at Uber. One of the most important aspects of this story is that since M3 is the foundation Chronosphere is built on, the fact that it was developed over four years at Uber while they were still on Uber’s payroll meant that when they decided to build a company it allowed them to get to market dramatically faster than would have been possible otherwise. </p><p><br></p><p>Chronosphere’s core platform is a proprietary SaaS product, but still has a significant relationship with two other projects: <a href="https://perses.dev">Perses</a>, which was developed at Chronosphere and donated to the CNCF in 2024; and <a href="https://fluentbit.io">FluentBit</a>, a CNCF graduated project that was originally developed by Calyptia and became part of Chronosphere when it acquired Calyptia. </p><p><br></p><p>We talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>The pros and cons of donating projects to the CNCF, from both the perspectives of the company creating the project and the interests of the community and project itself</li><li>Why Chronosphere’s core platform isn’t open source itself</li><li>How a company can end up getting financial advantages from being the stewards of large open source community, even if the connection doesn’t always seem obvious</li><li>How product roadmaps are managed for the two projects versus how it’s managed for Chronosphere’s proprietary products. </li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>If you’re building a company around an open source project and aren’t sure how to manage the relationship between the project and product, you might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me</a> or come to <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit </a>this May. </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This special episode recorded live at KubeCon Salt Lake City last November is with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/martinmao/">Martin Mao</a>, CEO and co-founder at <a href="https://chronosphere.io">Chronosphere.</a></p><p><br></p><p>We talked about how M3 was foundational to the early history of Chronosphere, and how the ability to leverage M3, which Martin and his co-founder had written while they were still working at Uber. One of the most important aspects of this story is that since M3 is the foundation Chronosphere is built on, the fact that it was developed over four years at Uber while they were still on Uber’s payroll meant that when they decided to build a company it allowed them to get to market dramatically faster than would have been possible otherwise. </p><p><br></p><p>Chronosphere’s core platform is a proprietary SaaS product, but still has a significant relationship with two other projects: <a href="https://perses.dev">Perses</a>, which was developed at Chronosphere and donated to the CNCF in 2024; and <a href="https://fluentbit.io">FluentBit</a>, a CNCF graduated project that was originally developed by Calyptia and became part of Chronosphere when it acquired Calyptia. </p><p><br></p><p>We talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>The pros and cons of donating projects to the CNCF, from both the perspectives of the company creating the project and the interests of the community and project itself</li><li>Why Chronosphere’s core platform isn’t open source itself</li><li>How a company can end up getting financial advantages from being the stewards of large open source community, even if the connection doesn’t always seem obvious</li><li>How product roadmaps are managed for the two projects versus how it’s managed for Chronosphere’s proprietary products. </li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>If you’re building a company around an open source project and aren’t sure how to manage the relationship between the project and product, you might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me</a> or come to <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit </a>this May. </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Fri, 10 Jan 2025 06:41:10 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/bc69f55d/cc7f0707.mp3" length="17338840" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1251</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This special episode recorded live at KubeCon Salt Lake City last November is with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/martinmao/">Martin Mao</a>, CEO and co-founder at <a href="https://chronosphere.io">Chronosphere.</a></p><p><br></p><p>We talked about how M3 was foundational to the early history of Chronosphere, and how the ability to leverage M3, which Martin and his co-founder had written while they were still working at Uber. One of the most important aspects of this story is that since M3 is the foundation Chronosphere is built on, the fact that it was developed over four years at Uber while they were still on Uber’s payroll meant that when they decided to build a company it allowed them to get to market dramatically faster than would have been possible otherwise. </p><p><br></p><p>Chronosphere’s core platform is a proprietary SaaS product, but still has a significant relationship with two other projects: <a href="https://perses.dev">Perses</a>, which was developed at Chronosphere and donated to the CNCF in 2024; and <a href="https://fluentbit.io">FluentBit</a>, a CNCF graduated project that was originally developed by Calyptia and became part of Chronosphere when it acquired Calyptia. </p><p><br></p><p>We talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>The pros and cons of donating projects to the CNCF, from both the perspectives of the company creating the project and the interests of the community and project itself</li><li>Why Chronosphere’s core platform isn’t open source itself</li><li>How a company can end up getting financial advantages from being the stewards of large open source community, even if the connection doesn’t always seem obvious</li><li>How product roadmaps are managed for the two projects versus how it’s managed for Chronosphere’s proprietary products. </li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>If you’re building a company around an open source project and aren’t sure how to manage the relationship between the project and product, you might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me</a> or come to <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit </a>this May. </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Finding Product-Market Fit with Wei Lien Dang </title>
      <itunes:episode>242</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>242</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Finding Product-Market Fit with Wei Lien Dang </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">135f6f05-9ec0-4e44-bcf2-0301a7529331</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/5c24cfa9</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Happy new year everyone! There was a short break for Christmas + New Years the past two weeks, but this week I’m back with a fabulous episode with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/weiliendang/">Wei Lien Dang</a>, General Partner at Unusual Ventures and formerly co-founder of StackRox. I recorded this episode on-site at KubeCon Salt Lake City back in November 2024. </p><p><br></p><p>This episode is particularly fabulous because Wei was willing to give some founder real talk. This is easier once you’ve sold your company, and especially easier when the ‘outcome’ of your company’s trajectory looks like an unmitigated success. And that is precisely why you hear so few founders willing and able to be honest about what the company’s trajectory really looked like — and all the times when things did not look like a chart going up and to the right. </p><p><br></p><p>Wei has also written an open source field guide, which is absolutely worth reading and is <a href="https://www.unusual.vc/tags/open-source">available here. </a></p><p><br></p><p>We talked a lot about product-market fit, how hard it is to find and how important it is. From the risks from just going to your network for feedback to the difference between general, high-level feedback and a very specific idea of how and why your product is used, Wei talked about both recognizing that you have a product-market fit problem and how to fix it. We also talked about empathy as a founder, recovering from building the wrong product, and managing the hearts and minds of your team. </p><p><br></p><p>Are you struggling with product-market fit, or feel like you have project-market fit but can’t translate it into commercial success? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me</a>, and / or come to<a href="http://05f5.com/"> Open Source Founders Summit</a> to chat with other open source founders. </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Happy new year everyone! There was a short break for Christmas + New Years the past two weeks, but this week I’m back with a fabulous episode with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/weiliendang/">Wei Lien Dang</a>, General Partner at Unusual Ventures and formerly co-founder of StackRox. I recorded this episode on-site at KubeCon Salt Lake City back in November 2024. </p><p><br></p><p>This episode is particularly fabulous because Wei was willing to give some founder real talk. This is easier once you’ve sold your company, and especially easier when the ‘outcome’ of your company’s trajectory looks like an unmitigated success. And that is precisely why you hear so few founders willing and able to be honest about what the company’s trajectory really looked like — and all the times when things did not look like a chart going up and to the right. </p><p><br></p><p>Wei has also written an open source field guide, which is absolutely worth reading and is <a href="https://www.unusual.vc/tags/open-source">available here. </a></p><p><br></p><p>We talked a lot about product-market fit, how hard it is to find and how important it is. From the risks from just going to your network for feedback to the difference between general, high-level feedback and a very specific idea of how and why your product is used, Wei talked about both recognizing that you have a product-market fit problem and how to fix it. We also talked about empathy as a founder, recovering from building the wrong product, and managing the hearts and minds of your team. </p><p><br></p><p>Are you struggling with product-market fit, or feel like you have project-market fit but can’t translate it into commercial success? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me</a>, and / or come to<a href="http://05f5.com/"> Open Source Founders Summit</a> to chat with other open source founders. </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Mon, 06 Jan 2025 05:10:27 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/5c24cfa9/fe05cc9a.mp3" length="22854484" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1605</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Happy new year everyone! There was a short break for Christmas + New Years the past two weeks, but this week I’m back with a fabulous episode with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/weiliendang/">Wei Lien Dang</a>, General Partner at Unusual Ventures and formerly co-founder of StackRox. I recorded this episode on-site at KubeCon Salt Lake City back in November 2024. </p><p><br></p><p>This episode is particularly fabulous because Wei was willing to give some founder real talk. This is easier once you’ve sold your company, and especially easier when the ‘outcome’ of your company’s trajectory looks like an unmitigated success. And that is precisely why you hear so few founders willing and able to be honest about what the company’s trajectory really looked like — and all the times when things did not look like a chart going up and to the right. </p><p><br></p><p>Wei has also written an open source field guide, which is absolutely worth reading and is <a href="https://www.unusual.vc/tags/open-source">available here. </a></p><p><br></p><p>We talked a lot about product-market fit, how hard it is to find and how important it is. From the risks from just going to your network for feedback to the difference between general, high-level feedback and a very specific idea of how and why your product is used, Wei talked about both recognizing that you have a product-market fit problem and how to fix it. We also talked about empathy as a founder, recovering from building the wrong product, and managing the hearts and minds of your team. </p><p><br></p><p>Are you struggling with product-market fit, or feel like you have project-market fit but can’t translate it into commercial success? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me</a>, and / or come to<a href="http://05f5.com/"> Open Source Founders Summit</a> to chat with other open source founders. </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Maintaining Control of your Brand with Ramiro Berrelleza</title>
      <itunes:episode>241</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>241</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Maintaining Control of your Brand with Ramiro Berrelleza</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">9bcc9b73-499c-4f2b-9177-998f10b3636f</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/9198162a</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I have a special episode recorded on-site at KubeCon NA this fall, with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/ramiroberrelleza/">Ramiro Berrelleza</a>, the CEO of <a href="https://www.okteto.com">Okteto. </a></p><p><br></p><p>We kicked off the conversation with a discussion about branding. Okteto is the name of the company, the name of the project and the name of the product. We started this conversation because it had been a big part of conversations I had with other founders at KubeCon. Most interesting to me was that while Ramiro explained how that decision was made, he said he was 50% happy with it, 50% not. Which is about the same as what I hear from founders who have made the opposite decision — so maybe there is just no ideal way to approach branding. </p><p><br></p><p>Some other things we discussed: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>What’s the different from fully embracing open source versus just having an OSI-approved license</li><li>Not donating the project to the CNCF specifically because he wanted to maintain control over the brand; a decision he thinks was a correct one. </li><li>The specifics of developer marketing, and especially how sometimes developer marketing can be a mix of B2B marketing and B2C. </li><li>The tensions between the needs and desires of individual users and the needs and desires of their employers. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Ramiro and I are on the same wavelength about a couple of things; I particularly appreciated his distinction between users and customers. </p><p><br></p><p>We ended the conversation with a discussion of the benefits of open source companies — the opportunities that come from being open source that you can’t get any other way. </p><p><br></p><p>Having trouble taking full advantage of your open source project? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me</a>, and / or come to<a href="http://05f5.com"> Open Source Founders Summit</a> to chat with other open source founders. </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I have a special episode recorded on-site at KubeCon NA this fall, with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/ramiroberrelleza/">Ramiro Berrelleza</a>, the CEO of <a href="https://www.okteto.com">Okteto. </a></p><p><br></p><p>We kicked off the conversation with a discussion about branding. Okteto is the name of the company, the name of the project and the name of the product. We started this conversation because it had been a big part of conversations I had with other founders at KubeCon. Most interesting to me was that while Ramiro explained how that decision was made, he said he was 50% happy with it, 50% not. Which is about the same as what I hear from founders who have made the opposite decision — so maybe there is just no ideal way to approach branding. </p><p><br></p><p>Some other things we discussed: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>What’s the different from fully embracing open source versus just having an OSI-approved license</li><li>Not donating the project to the CNCF specifically because he wanted to maintain control over the brand; a decision he thinks was a correct one. </li><li>The specifics of developer marketing, and especially how sometimes developer marketing can be a mix of B2B marketing and B2C. </li><li>The tensions between the needs and desires of individual users and the needs and desires of their employers. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Ramiro and I are on the same wavelength about a couple of things; I particularly appreciated his distinction between users and customers. </p><p><br></p><p>We ended the conversation with a discussion of the benefits of open source companies — the opportunities that come from being open source that you can’t get any other way. </p><p><br></p><p>Having trouble taking full advantage of your open source project? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me</a>, and / or come to<a href="http://05f5.com"> Open Source Founders Summit</a> to chat with other open source founders. </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 18 Dec 2024 00:56:22 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/9198162a/ae9f6296.mp3" length="20221176" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1457</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I have a special episode recorded on-site at KubeCon NA this fall, with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/ramiroberrelleza/">Ramiro Berrelleza</a>, the CEO of <a href="https://www.okteto.com">Okteto. </a></p><p><br></p><p>We kicked off the conversation with a discussion about branding. Okteto is the name of the company, the name of the project and the name of the product. We started this conversation because it had been a big part of conversations I had with other founders at KubeCon. Most interesting to me was that while Ramiro explained how that decision was made, he said he was 50% happy with it, 50% not. Which is about the same as what I hear from founders who have made the opposite decision — so maybe there is just no ideal way to approach branding. </p><p><br></p><p>Some other things we discussed: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>What’s the different from fully embracing open source versus just having an OSI-approved license</li><li>Not donating the project to the CNCF specifically because he wanted to maintain control over the brand; a decision he thinks was a correct one. </li><li>The specifics of developer marketing, and especially how sometimes developer marketing can be a mix of B2B marketing and B2C. </li><li>The tensions between the needs and desires of individual users and the needs and desires of their employers. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Ramiro and I are on the same wavelength about a couple of things; I particularly appreciated his distinction between users and customers. </p><p><br></p><p>We ended the conversation with a discussion of the benefits of open source companies — the opportunities that come from being open source that you can’t get any other way. </p><p><br></p><p>Having trouble taking full advantage of your open source project? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me</a>, and / or come to<a href="http://05f5.com"> Open Source Founders Summit</a> to chat with other open source founders. </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>KubeCon Special Episode: Changing Culture with Software with Cole Kennedy </title>
      <itunes:episode>240</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>240</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>KubeCon Special Episode: Changing Culture with Software with Cole Kennedy </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">47ff59dd-1af4-4b59-bec9-ef573c32d3c3</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/27b0c12f</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on the Business of Open Source, I have an episode recorded on-site at KubeCon SLC last month with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/thecolekennedy/">Cole Kennedy</a>, co-founder of <a href="https://testifysec.com">TestifySec</a>. We kicked off the conversation with a discussion about software development practices in the US Department of Defense and the US government at large — and the challenges involved with deploying quickly and frequently when you have to keep things both compliant and security. </p><p><br></p><p>Here are some of the take aways from the conversation: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why <a href="https://testifysec.com">TestifySec</a> decided to donate <a href="https://github.com/in-toto/archivista">Archivista </a>and <a href="https://github.com/in-toto/witness">Witness</a>, their two open source projects, to the CNCF — in particular, because they don’t see their business model as directly monetizing either. </li><li>How they monetize with a SaaS platform instead</li><li>“Founder-market fit” — Cole used to work as a developer for the Department of Defense, and that gives him a unique perspective on the needs and pain points specific to defense organizations. </li><li>Changing culture with software. During our conversation, it really struck me that a lot of the problems around compliance are organizational culture problems, not just software problems. How do you use software to change culture? </li><li>The main advantage of open source, Cole says, is the feedback loop you get with your users, including people using the software in ways you never thought possible. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Advertisement time! Are you struggling to figure out how your investment in open source translates to revenue? Do you want to figure how to increase the percentage of users who even know the commercial product exists? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p><p><br></p><p>And if you are a founder of an open source company, consider coming to Open Source Founders Summit, the only conference dedicated to building financially successful and sustainable open source companies. Attendance is restricted to founders and leadership in open source companies. Check it <a href="http://05f5.com">out here. </a></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on the Business of Open Source, I have an episode recorded on-site at KubeCon SLC last month with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/thecolekennedy/">Cole Kennedy</a>, co-founder of <a href="https://testifysec.com">TestifySec</a>. We kicked off the conversation with a discussion about software development practices in the US Department of Defense and the US government at large — and the challenges involved with deploying quickly and frequently when you have to keep things both compliant and security. </p><p><br></p><p>Here are some of the take aways from the conversation: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why <a href="https://testifysec.com">TestifySec</a> decided to donate <a href="https://github.com/in-toto/archivista">Archivista </a>and <a href="https://github.com/in-toto/witness">Witness</a>, their two open source projects, to the CNCF — in particular, because they don’t see their business model as directly monetizing either. </li><li>How they monetize with a SaaS platform instead</li><li>“Founder-market fit” — Cole used to work as a developer for the Department of Defense, and that gives him a unique perspective on the needs and pain points specific to defense organizations. </li><li>Changing culture with software. During our conversation, it really struck me that a lot of the problems around compliance are organizational culture problems, not just software problems. How do you use software to change culture? </li><li>The main advantage of open source, Cole says, is the feedback loop you get with your users, including people using the software in ways you never thought possible. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Advertisement time! Are you struggling to figure out how your investment in open source translates to revenue? Do you want to figure how to increase the percentage of users who even know the commercial product exists? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p><p><br></p><p>And if you are a founder of an open source company, consider coming to Open Source Founders Summit, the only conference dedicated to building financially successful and sustainable open source companies. Attendance is restricted to founders and leadership in open source companies. Check it <a href="http://05f5.com">out here. </a></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 11 Dec 2024 01:17:25 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/27b0c12f/2497d37c.mp3" length="14271426" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1072</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on the Business of Open Source, I have an episode recorded on-site at KubeCon SLC last month with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/thecolekennedy/">Cole Kennedy</a>, co-founder of <a href="https://testifysec.com">TestifySec</a>. We kicked off the conversation with a discussion about software development practices in the US Department of Defense and the US government at large — and the challenges involved with deploying quickly and frequently when you have to keep things both compliant and security. </p><p><br></p><p>Here are some of the take aways from the conversation: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why <a href="https://testifysec.com">TestifySec</a> decided to donate <a href="https://github.com/in-toto/archivista">Archivista </a>and <a href="https://github.com/in-toto/witness">Witness</a>, their two open source projects, to the CNCF — in particular, because they don’t see their business model as directly monetizing either. </li><li>How they monetize with a SaaS platform instead</li><li>“Founder-market fit” — Cole used to work as a developer for the Department of Defense, and that gives him a unique perspective on the needs and pain points specific to defense organizations. </li><li>Changing culture with software. During our conversation, it really struck me that a lot of the problems around compliance are organizational culture problems, not just software problems. How do you use software to change culture? </li><li>The main advantage of open source, Cole says, is the feedback loop you get with your users, including people using the software in ways you never thought possible. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Advertisement time! Are you struggling to figure out how your investment in open source translates to revenue? Do you want to figure how to increase the percentage of users who even know the commercial product exists? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p><p><br></p><p>And if you are a founder of an open source company, consider coming to Open Source Founders Summit, the only conference dedicated to building financially successful and sustainable open source companies. Attendance is restricted to founders and leadership in open source companies. Check it <a href="http://05f5.com">out here. </a></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>KubeCon Special Episode: Managing the Tension between Product and Project with Bobby DeSimone </title>
      <itunes:episode>239</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>239</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>KubeCon Special Episode: Managing the Tension between Product and Project with Bobby DeSimone </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">698c7aab-1668-40c9-82be-5e24ed08452b</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/d9454c0c</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Who pays for the future of infrastructure? In this special episode, I spoke to <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/bobby-desimone/">Bobby DeSimone</a>, founder and CEO of <a href="https://www.pomerium.com">Pomerium</a>, about how he feels like infrastructure and security both have to be open source — but then, what does that mean about the future of the financial support for infrastructure and security? </p><p><br></p><p>We talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>The importance for customers, especially early customers, of being able to do code audits early in the buying cycle — and Bobby thought that just a BSL license would not have been enough.</li><li>We talked tension between project and product 😳 my favorite topic. If you’re curious, I did a talk at All Things Open on the subject, one that was sadly not recorded :( but you can reach out if you want the slides. </li><li>How Pomerium manages that tension, both internally and externally. There are open source purists as well as cutthroat capitalists. Bobby describes it as making a bet on the middle. </li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>If managing product-project tension is something you’re struggling with, reach out, you might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p><p><br></p><p>And if you want more conversations about the unique aspects of open source businesses, you should come to <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> this May. Join the mailing list to find out as soon as tickets are available. </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Who pays for the future of infrastructure? In this special episode, I spoke to <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/bobby-desimone/">Bobby DeSimone</a>, founder and CEO of <a href="https://www.pomerium.com">Pomerium</a>, about how he feels like infrastructure and security both have to be open source — but then, what does that mean about the future of the financial support for infrastructure and security? </p><p><br></p><p>We talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>The importance for customers, especially early customers, of being able to do code audits early in the buying cycle — and Bobby thought that just a BSL license would not have been enough.</li><li>We talked tension between project and product 😳 my favorite topic. If you’re curious, I did a talk at All Things Open on the subject, one that was sadly not recorded :( but you can reach out if you want the slides. </li><li>How Pomerium manages that tension, both internally and externally. There are open source purists as well as cutthroat capitalists. Bobby describes it as making a bet on the middle. </li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>If managing product-project tension is something you’re struggling with, reach out, you might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p><p><br></p><p>And if you want more conversations about the unique aspects of open source businesses, you should come to <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> this May. Join the mailing list to find out as soon as tickets are available. </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 04 Dec 2024 01:00:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/d9454c0c/91ac9c96.mp3" length="15476344" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1110</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Who pays for the future of infrastructure? In this special episode, I spoke to <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/bobby-desimone/">Bobby DeSimone</a>, founder and CEO of <a href="https://www.pomerium.com">Pomerium</a>, about how he feels like infrastructure and security both have to be open source — but then, what does that mean about the future of the financial support for infrastructure and security? </p><p><br></p><p>We talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>The importance for customers, especially early customers, of being able to do code audits early in the buying cycle — and Bobby thought that just a BSL license would not have been enough.</li><li>We talked tension between project and product 😳 my favorite topic. If you’re curious, I did a talk at All Things Open on the subject, one that was sadly not recorded :( but you can reach out if you want the slides. </li><li>How Pomerium manages that tension, both internally and externally. There are open source purists as well as cutthroat capitalists. Bobby describes it as making a bet on the middle. </li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>If managing product-project tension is something you’re struggling with, reach out, you might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p><p><br></p><p>And if you want more conversations about the unique aspects of open source businesses, you should come to <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> this May. Join the mailing list to find out as soon as tickets are available. </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>KubeCon NA Special Episode: The Connection Between Community Engagement and Revenue with Mark Fussell </title>
      <itunes:episode>238</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>238</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>KubeCon NA Special Episode: The Connection Between Community Engagement and Revenue with Mark Fussell </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">acf32e71-a156-46d6-b244-5409adde5de3</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/d684cf86</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mfussell/">Mark Fussell</a>, CEO and co-founder of <a href="https://www.diagrid.io">Diagrid</a> and co-creator of <a href="https://dapr.io">Dapr</a>, in a special episode recorded on-site at KubeCon NA in Salt Lake City. </p><p><br></p><p>We kicked off with a discussion of what’s different about running an open source company versus a proprietary software company, and Mark said that a big part of it is that you have to nurture the community. </p><p><br></p><p>But what does that actually mean? I pushed back, and happily Mark was able to go into more specifics about what he means. We also talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why, and how, to build a contributor ladder. —&gt; worth noting here that not all companies even want to encourage outside contributions, so it was interesting to hear Mark go into this dynamic. </li><li>Dapr is now a graduated project at the CNCF, and Mark talked about what changed for Dapr as a result of getting that seal of approval… as well as what changed for Diagrid. And since Diagrid is the primary maintainer of the project, this probably means Diagrid will end up spending more engineering resources on the project. </li><li>The constraints that come from having your open source project hosted by the CNCF — or any other open source foundation, for that matter. </li><li>The delicate balance between the engineering resources you need to put into your open source project and the engineering resources you put into your commercial product. </li><li>Even though Dapr has many (around 4,000) outside contributors, it takes a huge amount of effort (and effort = money) to manage that community, and Mark talked frankly about the investment it requires to make that happen. </li><li>What percentage of the open source users even know that Diagrid exists? 😳 Mark guesses that it’s 5%, and he talks about what he’s tried doing at Diagrid to make that percentage go up. Is 5% good or bad? We talked about how it’s hard to know, actually, how Dapr/Diagrid compares on that. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>###</p><p><br></p><p>Are you struggling to figure out how your investment in open source translates to revenue? Do you want to figure how to increase the percentage of users who even know the commercial product exists? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mfussell/">Mark Fussell</a>, CEO and co-founder of <a href="https://www.diagrid.io">Diagrid</a> and co-creator of <a href="https://dapr.io">Dapr</a>, in a special episode recorded on-site at KubeCon NA in Salt Lake City. </p><p><br></p><p>We kicked off with a discussion of what’s different about running an open source company versus a proprietary software company, and Mark said that a big part of it is that you have to nurture the community. </p><p><br></p><p>But what does that actually mean? I pushed back, and happily Mark was able to go into more specifics about what he means. We also talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why, and how, to build a contributor ladder. —&gt; worth noting here that not all companies even want to encourage outside contributions, so it was interesting to hear Mark go into this dynamic. </li><li>Dapr is now a graduated project at the CNCF, and Mark talked about what changed for Dapr as a result of getting that seal of approval… as well as what changed for Diagrid. And since Diagrid is the primary maintainer of the project, this probably means Diagrid will end up spending more engineering resources on the project. </li><li>The constraints that come from having your open source project hosted by the CNCF — or any other open source foundation, for that matter. </li><li>The delicate balance between the engineering resources you need to put into your open source project and the engineering resources you put into your commercial product. </li><li>Even though Dapr has many (around 4,000) outside contributors, it takes a huge amount of effort (and effort = money) to manage that community, and Mark talked frankly about the investment it requires to make that happen. </li><li>What percentage of the open source users even know that Diagrid exists? 😳 Mark guesses that it’s 5%, and he talks about what he’s tried doing at Diagrid to make that percentage go up. Is 5% good or bad? We talked about how it’s hard to know, actually, how Dapr/Diagrid compares on that. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>###</p><p><br></p><p>Are you struggling to figure out how your investment in open source translates to revenue? Do you want to figure how to increase the percentage of users who even know the commercial product exists? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Thu, 28 Nov 2024 02:01:06 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/d684cf86/5b49e9e4.mp3" length="18868004" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1398</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mfussell/">Mark Fussell</a>, CEO and co-founder of <a href="https://www.diagrid.io">Diagrid</a> and co-creator of <a href="https://dapr.io">Dapr</a>, in a special episode recorded on-site at KubeCon NA in Salt Lake City. </p><p><br></p><p>We kicked off with a discussion of what’s different about running an open source company versus a proprietary software company, and Mark said that a big part of it is that you have to nurture the community. </p><p><br></p><p>But what does that actually mean? I pushed back, and happily Mark was able to go into more specifics about what he means. We also talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why, and how, to build a contributor ladder. —&gt; worth noting here that not all companies even want to encourage outside contributions, so it was interesting to hear Mark go into this dynamic. </li><li>Dapr is now a graduated project at the CNCF, and Mark talked about what changed for Dapr as a result of getting that seal of approval… as well as what changed for Diagrid. And since Diagrid is the primary maintainer of the project, this probably means Diagrid will end up spending more engineering resources on the project. </li><li>The constraints that come from having your open source project hosted by the CNCF — or any other open source foundation, for that matter. </li><li>The delicate balance between the engineering resources you need to put into your open source project and the engineering resources you put into your commercial product. </li><li>Even though Dapr has many (around 4,000) outside contributors, it takes a huge amount of effort (and effort = money) to manage that community, and Mark talked frankly about the investment it requires to make that happen. </li><li>What percentage of the open source users even know that Diagrid exists? 😳 Mark guesses that it’s 5%, and he talks about what he’s tried doing at Diagrid to make that percentage go up. Is 5% good or bad? We talked about how it’s hard to know, actually, how Dapr/Diagrid compares on that. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>###</p><p><br></p><p>Are you struggling to figure out how your investment in open source translates to revenue? Do you want to figure how to increase the percentage of users who even know the commercial product exists? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>ATO Special Episode on Product Strategy with Elias Voelker </title>
      <itunes:episode>237</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>237</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>ATO Special Episode on Product Strategy with Elias Voelker </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">35d0eb77-8b59-4085-a3ef-e7cb7e3929e7</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/e74d8fcb</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this last special episode of The Business of Open Source recorded at All Things Open, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/eliasvoelker/">Elias Voelker</a>, VP North America for <a href="https://checkmk.com">CheckMK</a>. We talked a lot about product strategy; when CheckMK decided that they needed a clear strategy for deciding which feature goes in the open source project and which goes in the commercial version. Elias finished up the conversation by circling back on this issue: As an open source company, if you don't have a big enough difference between the value customers get from project and what they get from the commercial relationship... you won't survive. </p><p><br></p><p>Since Elias works in sales, we also talked about sales for open source companies. He said one of the most important questions in the context of open source is “why now?” Since many customers have been using the open source project successfully for years, this question is really important for uncovering what’s changed and why they are ready to buy at the moment. </p><p><br></p><p>We also talked about some cultural differences between selling in North America and selling in Germany, since while Elias is German (as is CheckMK), he leads sales in North America and therefore has some advice for European companies moving into the North American market. </p><p><br></p><p>###</p><p><br></p><p>If you’re struggling to figure out your product strategy as an open source company, you might want to consider <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">working with me</a>. I help open source companies figure out how to differentiated themselves in the market, how to differentiate the product from the project and how to take advantage of the opportunities specific to being to a open source company. </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this last special episode of The Business of Open Source recorded at All Things Open, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/eliasvoelker/">Elias Voelker</a>, VP North America for <a href="https://checkmk.com">CheckMK</a>. We talked a lot about product strategy; when CheckMK decided that they needed a clear strategy for deciding which feature goes in the open source project and which goes in the commercial version. Elias finished up the conversation by circling back on this issue: As an open source company, if you don't have a big enough difference between the value customers get from project and what they get from the commercial relationship... you won't survive. </p><p><br></p><p>Since Elias works in sales, we also talked about sales for open source companies. He said one of the most important questions in the context of open source is “why now?” Since many customers have been using the open source project successfully for years, this question is really important for uncovering what’s changed and why they are ready to buy at the moment. </p><p><br></p><p>We also talked about some cultural differences between selling in North America and selling in Germany, since while Elias is German (as is CheckMK), he leads sales in North America and therefore has some advice for European companies moving into the North American market. </p><p><br></p><p>###</p><p><br></p><p>If you’re struggling to figure out your product strategy as an open source company, you might want to consider <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">working with me</a>. I help open source companies figure out how to differentiated themselves in the market, how to differentiate the product from the project and how to take advantage of the opportunities specific to being to a open source company. </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Tue, 26 Nov 2024 00:52:57 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/e74d8fcb/d88af4a5.mp3" length="14947453" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1077</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this last special episode of The Business of Open Source recorded at All Things Open, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/eliasvoelker/">Elias Voelker</a>, VP North America for <a href="https://checkmk.com">CheckMK</a>. We talked a lot about product strategy; when CheckMK decided that they needed a clear strategy for deciding which feature goes in the open source project and which goes in the commercial version. Elias finished up the conversation by circling back on this issue: As an open source company, if you don't have a big enough difference between the value customers get from project and what they get from the commercial relationship... you won't survive. </p><p><br></p><p>Since Elias works in sales, we also talked about sales for open source companies. He said one of the most important questions in the context of open source is “why now?” Since many customers have been using the open source project successfully for years, this question is really important for uncovering what’s changed and why they are ready to buy at the moment. </p><p><br></p><p>We also talked about some cultural differences between selling in North America and selling in Germany, since while Elias is German (as is CheckMK), he leads sales in North America and therefore has some advice for European companies moving into the North American market. </p><p><br></p><p>###</p><p><br></p><p>If you’re struggling to figure out your product strategy as an open source company, you might want to consider <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">working with me</a>. I help open source companies figure out how to differentiated themselves in the market, how to differentiate the product from the project and how to take advantage of the opportunities specific to being to a open source company. </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Applying the lessons from Docker with Solomon Hykes </title>
      <itunes:episode>236</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>236</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Applying the lessons from Docker with Solomon Hykes </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">f435ab27-e8d8-499b-8061-c78d492d38e9</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/cd595632</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I have the first episode I recorded on-site at KubeCon Salt Lake City (and the only full-length episode), with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/solomonhykes/">Solomon Hykes</a>, CEO and co-founder of<a href="https://dagger.io"> Dagger,</a> and co-founder of <a href="https://www.docker.com">Docker.</a></p><p><br></p><p>One thing Solomon mentions briefly but that is very important is that there are limits to what can be learned from Docker’s story, simply because the situation was so unique. Docker experienced explosive growth, at least some of which was due to having the right technology at the right time. This kind of explosive growth is very rare, though, and it brought it’s own set of challenges. The point being that while most companies will struggle to get enough adoption, Docker struggled to monetize effectively but got so many chances to try again just because it had a massive community. </p><p><br></p><ul><li>The hypothesis — or actually, lack thereof — behind creating the original Docker open source project. </li><li>How having a massive community does help — but also doesn’t guarantee you’ll be able to build a financially sustainable company</li><li>When you build a massively successful technology or standard, you’ll attract competition — and in the case of Docker, the competitors were savvy companies who’d won the previous cloud wars and ultimately were quicker to figure out how to monetize Docker containers than Docker itself</li><li>What Solomon is doing differently at Dagger compared to Docker, one of which is thinking about monetization much sooner</li><li>The open source movement was founded on such explicitly anti-commercial principles that companies building in the space would often not be intellectually honest about the fact that they were building both a software to give away for free as well as a business that needed revenue. Docker tried too hard to please everyone, including those who felt that open source should be pure and non-commercial — at Dagger, they’re much more transparent and upfront about the fact that it’s a company with commercial ambitions. </li><li>Solomon also talked about the difference between components and product, and how designing products requires control, including the ability to just say no without explaining yourself. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>###</p><p>It was fascinating to hear Solomon talk about the lack of intellectual honesty around who pays for the development and maintenance of a lot of open source projects, because that precise topic was the focus of two panels I moderated at KubeCon, <a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9IhV67Xwy0M">one during the main conference </a>and one during CloudNative StartupFest. </p><p><br></p><p>If you’re struggling to articulate how your product and project are different from each other (and others in the ecosystem) and why someone should pay you, you might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a>Reach out! </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I have the first episode I recorded on-site at KubeCon Salt Lake City (and the only full-length episode), with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/solomonhykes/">Solomon Hykes</a>, CEO and co-founder of<a href="https://dagger.io"> Dagger,</a> and co-founder of <a href="https://www.docker.com">Docker.</a></p><p><br></p><p>One thing Solomon mentions briefly but that is very important is that there are limits to what can be learned from Docker’s story, simply because the situation was so unique. Docker experienced explosive growth, at least some of which was due to having the right technology at the right time. This kind of explosive growth is very rare, though, and it brought it’s own set of challenges. The point being that while most companies will struggle to get enough adoption, Docker struggled to monetize effectively but got so many chances to try again just because it had a massive community. </p><p><br></p><ul><li>The hypothesis — or actually, lack thereof — behind creating the original Docker open source project. </li><li>How having a massive community does help — but also doesn’t guarantee you’ll be able to build a financially sustainable company</li><li>When you build a massively successful technology or standard, you’ll attract competition — and in the case of Docker, the competitors were savvy companies who’d won the previous cloud wars and ultimately were quicker to figure out how to monetize Docker containers than Docker itself</li><li>What Solomon is doing differently at Dagger compared to Docker, one of which is thinking about monetization much sooner</li><li>The open source movement was founded on such explicitly anti-commercial principles that companies building in the space would often not be intellectually honest about the fact that they were building both a software to give away for free as well as a business that needed revenue. Docker tried too hard to please everyone, including those who felt that open source should be pure and non-commercial — at Dagger, they’re much more transparent and upfront about the fact that it’s a company with commercial ambitions. </li><li>Solomon also talked about the difference between components and product, and how designing products requires control, including the ability to just say no without explaining yourself. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>###</p><p>It was fascinating to hear Solomon talk about the lack of intellectual honesty around who pays for the development and maintenance of a lot of open source projects, because that precise topic was the focus of two panels I moderated at KubeCon, <a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9IhV67Xwy0M">one during the main conference </a>and one during CloudNative StartupFest. </p><p><br></p><p>If you’re struggling to articulate how your product and project are different from each other (and others in the ecosystem) and why someone should pay you, you might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a>Reach out! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 20 Nov 2024 01:31:24 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/cd595632/f3730cb3.mp3" length="31883442" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2346</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I have the first episode I recorded on-site at KubeCon Salt Lake City (and the only full-length episode), with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/solomonhykes/">Solomon Hykes</a>, CEO and co-founder of<a href="https://dagger.io"> Dagger,</a> and co-founder of <a href="https://www.docker.com">Docker.</a></p><p><br></p><p>One thing Solomon mentions briefly but that is very important is that there are limits to what can be learned from Docker’s story, simply because the situation was so unique. Docker experienced explosive growth, at least some of which was due to having the right technology at the right time. This kind of explosive growth is very rare, though, and it brought it’s own set of challenges. The point being that while most companies will struggle to get enough adoption, Docker struggled to monetize effectively but got so many chances to try again just because it had a massive community. </p><p><br></p><ul><li>The hypothesis — or actually, lack thereof — behind creating the original Docker open source project. </li><li>How having a massive community does help — but also doesn’t guarantee you’ll be able to build a financially sustainable company</li><li>When you build a massively successful technology or standard, you’ll attract competition — and in the case of Docker, the competitors were savvy companies who’d won the previous cloud wars and ultimately were quicker to figure out how to monetize Docker containers than Docker itself</li><li>What Solomon is doing differently at Dagger compared to Docker, one of which is thinking about monetization much sooner</li><li>The open source movement was founded on such explicitly anti-commercial principles that companies building in the space would often not be intellectually honest about the fact that they were building both a software to give away for free as well as a business that needed revenue. Docker tried too hard to please everyone, including those who felt that open source should be pure and non-commercial — at Dagger, they’re much more transparent and upfront about the fact that it’s a company with commercial ambitions. </li><li>Solomon also talked about the difference between components and product, and how designing products requires control, including the ability to just say no without explaining yourself. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>###</p><p>It was fascinating to hear Solomon talk about the lack of intellectual honesty around who pays for the development and maintenance of a lot of open source projects, because that precise topic was the focus of two panels I moderated at KubeCon, <a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9IhV67Xwy0M">one during the main conference </a>and one during CloudNative StartupFest. </p><p><br></p><p>If you’re struggling to articulate how your product and project are different from each other (and others in the ecosystem) and why someone should pay you, you might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a>Reach out! </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>ATO Special Episode with Nithya Ruff</title>
      <itunes:episode>235</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>235</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>ATO Special Episode with Nithya Ruff</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">45ab207e-7000-4221-98c1-a60e24cfe8ca</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/c66720d1</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this special episode of The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/nithyaruff/">Nithya Ruff</a>, director of Amazon’s Open Source Program Office (often referred to as an OSPO). We started out talking a little about what exactly an OSPO is and what they do in companies — something I’m guess not everyone understands. </p><p><br></p><p>It boils down to managing the company’s open source strategy — something that is relevant to pretty much any company that writes software of any kind. There are a lot of components to an open source strategy, and there are different ‘models’ for an open source strategy, depending not just on the company’s size, but also whether or not open source is core to what the company sells. Nithya previously led the OSPO at Comcast, and talked a bit about the difference between running an OSPO for the a company like Comcast and a place like AWS, because their products are different. </p><p><br></p><p>And why do open source strategies matter for startups? Even if you’re not an open source company, if you can’t prove you’re in compliance with open source licenses for projects you depend on, or if there are security concerns related to your open source use, it can sabotage acquisitions. </p><p><br></p><p>By the way, helping startups figure out their open source strategy is what I do as a consultant. If you’re figuring out how to balance your open source project and your product strategy, and how to manage the risks and opportunities associated with open source projects, you might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me.  </a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this special episode of The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/nithyaruff/">Nithya Ruff</a>, director of Amazon’s Open Source Program Office (often referred to as an OSPO). We started out talking a little about what exactly an OSPO is and what they do in companies — something I’m guess not everyone understands. </p><p><br></p><p>It boils down to managing the company’s open source strategy — something that is relevant to pretty much any company that writes software of any kind. There are a lot of components to an open source strategy, and there are different ‘models’ for an open source strategy, depending not just on the company’s size, but also whether or not open source is core to what the company sells. Nithya previously led the OSPO at Comcast, and talked a bit about the difference between running an OSPO for the a company like Comcast and a place like AWS, because their products are different. </p><p><br></p><p>And why do open source strategies matter for startups? Even if you’re not an open source company, if you can’t prove you’re in compliance with open source licenses for projects you depend on, or if there are security concerns related to your open source use, it can sabotage acquisitions. </p><p><br></p><p>By the way, helping startups figure out their open source strategy is what I do as a consultant. If you’re figuring out how to balance your open source project and your product strategy, and how to manage the risks and opportunities associated with open source projects, you might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me.  </a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 13 Nov 2024 09:41:08 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/c66720d1/76d1a231.mp3" length="11366244" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>931</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this special episode of The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/nithyaruff/">Nithya Ruff</a>, director of Amazon’s Open Source Program Office (often referred to as an OSPO). We started out talking a little about what exactly an OSPO is and what they do in companies — something I’m guess not everyone understands. </p><p><br></p><p>It boils down to managing the company’s open source strategy — something that is relevant to pretty much any company that writes software of any kind. There are a lot of components to an open source strategy, and there are different ‘models’ for an open source strategy, depending not just on the company’s size, but also whether or not open source is core to what the company sells. Nithya previously led the OSPO at Comcast, and talked a bit about the difference between running an OSPO for the a company like Comcast and a place like AWS, because their products are different. </p><p><br></p><p>And why do open source strategies matter for startups? Even if you’re not an open source company, if you can’t prove you’re in compliance with open source licenses for projects you depend on, or if there are security concerns related to your open source use, it can sabotage acquisitions. </p><p><br></p><p>By the way, helping startups figure out their open source strategy is what I do as a consultant. If you’re figuring out how to balance your open source project and your product strategy, and how to manage the risks and opportunities associated with open source projects, you might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me.  </a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>ATO special episode with Peter Farkas</title>
      <itunes:episode>234</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>234</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>ATO special episode with Peter Farkas</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">4fd77b5f-93c8-48df-b3fb-0170a7e08d3e</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/a353bafb</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this special episode recorded at <a href="https://2024.allthingsopen.org">All Things Open</a>, I talk with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/farkasp/">Peter Farkas</a>, CEO and co-founder of <a href="https://www.ferretdb.com">FerretDB</a>. We talked about about MongoDB and the license change fiasco and why Peter wanted to build an open source company and never considered building a non-open source company. </p><p><br></p><p>The biggest 🤯 in this episode was about enforcing what it means to be open source; in particular, FerretDB positions itself as a truly open source alternative to MongoDB, and has received threatening letters from MongoDB as a result. How do you enforce it when a company claims to be open source but does not use an OSI-approved license? How well do the average users actually understand the license implications, and if a big company says they have an open source license even though it’s source-available, not open source, how much will people understand the difference? </p><p><br></p><p>If you want another perspective on the enforcement of advertising around open source licenses, listen to the <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/podcast/behind-the-scenes-of-the-open-source-ai-definition-with-stefano-maffulli">episode I recorded</a> with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/maffulli/">Stefano Maffulli</a>, also at All Things Open. </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this special episode recorded at <a href="https://2024.allthingsopen.org">All Things Open</a>, I talk with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/farkasp/">Peter Farkas</a>, CEO and co-founder of <a href="https://www.ferretdb.com">FerretDB</a>. We talked about about MongoDB and the license change fiasco and why Peter wanted to build an open source company and never considered building a non-open source company. </p><p><br></p><p>The biggest 🤯 in this episode was about enforcing what it means to be open source; in particular, FerretDB positions itself as a truly open source alternative to MongoDB, and has received threatening letters from MongoDB as a result. How do you enforce it when a company claims to be open source but does not use an OSI-approved license? How well do the average users actually understand the license implications, and if a big company says they have an open source license even though it’s source-available, not open source, how much will people understand the difference? </p><p><br></p><p>If you want another perspective on the enforcement of advertising around open source licenses, listen to the <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/podcast/behind-the-scenes-of-the-open-source-ai-definition-with-stefano-maffulli">episode I recorded</a> with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/maffulli/">Stefano Maffulli</a>, also at All Things Open. </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Tue, 12 Nov 2024 08:40:02 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/a353bafb/63e0554b.mp3" length="13590699" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>989</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this special episode recorded at <a href="https://2024.allthingsopen.org">All Things Open</a>, I talk with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/farkasp/">Peter Farkas</a>, CEO and co-founder of <a href="https://www.ferretdb.com">FerretDB</a>. We talked about about MongoDB and the license change fiasco and why Peter wanted to build an open source company and never considered building a non-open source company. </p><p><br></p><p>The biggest 🤯 in this episode was about enforcing what it means to be open source; in particular, FerretDB positions itself as a truly open source alternative to MongoDB, and has received threatening letters from MongoDB as a result. How do you enforce it when a company claims to be open source but does not use an OSI-approved license? How well do the average users actually understand the license implications, and if a big company says they have an open source license even though it’s source-available, not open source, how much will people understand the difference? </p><p><br></p><p>If you want another perspective on the enforcement of advertising around open source licenses, listen to the <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/podcast/behind-the-scenes-of-the-open-source-ai-definition-with-stefano-maffulli">episode I recorded</a> with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/maffulli/">Stefano Maffulli</a>, also at All Things Open. </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Selling Peace of Mind with Bhaskar from YottaDB</title>
      <itunes:episode>233</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>233</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Selling Peace of Mind with Bhaskar from YottaDB</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">1075ecbf-bb55-453c-8c70-8d5b6883ab17</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/f82a91a6</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week’s full-length episode is with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/bhaskar/">Bhaskar</a>, founder of <a href="https://yottadb.com">YottaDB</a>. This episode was recorded on-site at All Things Open last week, and we covered a wide range of topics. Including:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>How the open source ecosystem, and the open source business ecosystem, has changed over the past 30+ years.</li><li>Who can responsibly self-support an open source database, and who really needs to have someone to call if things go wrong. </li><li>The spectrum of professionalism among open source developers </li><li>How YottaDB started out as a project developed inside a larger company that was in financial services; and Bhaskar decided to spin it out as it’s own company.</li><li>The challenge articulating the value of support contracts, especially for software that is reliable. Bhaskar says he is selling peace of mind more than anything else; and he works with customers to avoid incidents — because ultimately avoiding an incident is a better outcome for everyone than a quick recovery from an incident. </li><li>How to convince people that they are actually not as good at managing open source databases as they think they are. </li><li>We also talked about conference strategies: according to Bhaskar, the way he’s decided which conferences to exhibit at is a series of trial and error — and by the way, this is something I’ve heard from many people. Yes, you have to think about where your customers are, not where your friends are, but sometimes you don’t know ahead of time which conferences are going to have the best ROI. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>I’m working with YottaDB right now on how to differentiate themselves in the crowded database market — and we talk about that process a bit right now. If you’re having trouble standing out in a crowded market, you might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week’s full-length episode is with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/bhaskar/">Bhaskar</a>, founder of <a href="https://yottadb.com">YottaDB</a>. This episode was recorded on-site at All Things Open last week, and we covered a wide range of topics. Including:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>How the open source ecosystem, and the open source business ecosystem, has changed over the past 30+ years.</li><li>Who can responsibly self-support an open source database, and who really needs to have someone to call if things go wrong. </li><li>The spectrum of professionalism among open source developers </li><li>How YottaDB started out as a project developed inside a larger company that was in financial services; and Bhaskar decided to spin it out as it’s own company.</li><li>The challenge articulating the value of support contracts, especially for software that is reliable. Bhaskar says he is selling peace of mind more than anything else; and he works with customers to avoid incidents — because ultimately avoiding an incident is a better outcome for everyone than a quick recovery from an incident. </li><li>How to convince people that they are actually not as good at managing open source databases as they think they are. </li><li>We also talked about conference strategies: according to Bhaskar, the way he’s decided which conferences to exhibit at is a series of trial and error — and by the way, this is something I’ve heard from many people. Yes, you have to think about where your customers are, not where your friends are, but sometimes you don’t know ahead of time which conferences are going to have the best ROI. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>I’m working with YottaDB right now on how to differentiate themselves in the crowded database market — and we talk about that process a bit right now. If you’re having trouble standing out in a crowded market, you might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 06 Nov 2024 03:02:31 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/f82a91a6/3bffd471.mp3" length="20437237" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1746</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week’s full-length episode is with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/bhaskar/">Bhaskar</a>, founder of <a href="https://yottadb.com">YottaDB</a>. This episode was recorded on-site at All Things Open last week, and we covered a wide range of topics. Including:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>How the open source ecosystem, and the open source business ecosystem, has changed over the past 30+ years.</li><li>Who can responsibly self-support an open source database, and who really needs to have someone to call if things go wrong. </li><li>The spectrum of professionalism among open source developers </li><li>How YottaDB started out as a project developed inside a larger company that was in financial services; and Bhaskar decided to spin it out as it’s own company.</li><li>The challenge articulating the value of support contracts, especially for software that is reliable. Bhaskar says he is selling peace of mind more than anything else; and he works with customers to avoid incidents — because ultimately avoiding an incident is a better outcome for everyone than a quick recovery from an incident. </li><li>How to convince people that they are actually not as good at managing open source databases as they think they are. </li><li>We also talked about conference strategies: according to Bhaskar, the way he’s decided which conferences to exhibit at is a series of trial and error — and by the way, this is something I’ve heard from many people. Yes, you have to think about where your customers are, not where your friends are, but sometimes you don’t know ahead of time which conferences are going to have the best ROI. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>I’m working with YottaDB right now on how to differentiate themselves in the crowded database market — and we talk about that process a bit right now. If you’re having trouble standing out in a crowded market, you might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>ATO Special Episode with Tatiana Krupenya of DBeaver</title>
      <itunes:episode>232</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>232</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>ATO Special Episode with Tatiana Krupenya of DBeaver</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">4d75fdfa-d631-4578-b04f-af9bf995b658</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/981148e4</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This special episode of The Business of Open Source with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tatiana-krupenya/">Tatiana Krupenya</a>, CEO of <a href="https://dbeaver.com">DBeaver</a>, was recorded on site at All Things Open 2024. </p><p><br></p><p>It’s a short conversation, so we addressed one main question: What is the difference between running an open source company versus as proprietary software company? Tatiana says the difference is big — and it’s complicated. </p><p><br></p><p>The bottom line: Your OSS can be your main competitor, and your customers have to really see the value in your commercial offering if you want to make sales. </p><p>## </p><p>If you aren't sure how to talk to your potential customers are about why they should use your commercial offering, you might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This special episode of The Business of Open Source with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tatiana-krupenya/">Tatiana Krupenya</a>, CEO of <a href="https://dbeaver.com">DBeaver</a>, was recorded on site at All Things Open 2024. </p><p><br></p><p>It’s a short conversation, so we addressed one main question: What is the difference between running an open source company versus as proprietary software company? Tatiana says the difference is big — and it’s complicated. </p><p><br></p><p>The bottom line: Your OSS can be your main competitor, and your customers have to really see the value in your commercial offering if you want to make sales. </p><p>## </p><p>If you aren't sure how to talk to your potential customers are about why they should use your commercial offering, you might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Tue, 05 Nov 2024 01:19:33 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/981148e4/f700bf8b.mp3" length="9746973" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>791</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This special episode of The Business of Open Source with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tatiana-krupenya/">Tatiana Krupenya</a>, CEO of <a href="https://dbeaver.com">DBeaver</a>, was recorded on site at All Things Open 2024. </p><p><br></p><p>It’s a short conversation, so we addressed one main question: What is the difference between running an open source company versus as proprietary software company? Tatiana says the difference is big — and it’s complicated. </p><p><br></p><p>The bottom line: Your OSS can be your main competitor, and your customers have to really see the value in your commercial offering if you want to make sales. </p><p>## </p><p>If you aren't sure how to talk to your potential customers are about why they should use your commercial offering, you might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Behind the Scenes of the Open Source AI Definition with Stefano Maffulli</title>
      <itunes:episode>231</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>231</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Behind the Scenes of the Open Source AI Definition with Stefano Maffulli</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">cfc46ed2-9790-4167-9486-d7c3516c25a0</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/e7f2b1e9</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/maffulli/">Stefano Maffulli</a>, Executive Director of the <a href="https://opensource.org">Open Source Initiative</a>, about the definition of open source and… the definition of open source AI. We recorded this episode on-site at All Things Open, so there’s a little bit of background noise. </p><p><br></p><p>We talked about why OSI felt like it needed to develop a definition of open source AI, how “open source” is enforced, and the thought process behind the definition that the OSI ultimately published. </p><p><br></p><p>We talked about open data quite a bit — different kinds of data, what kind of information and data is important to researchers and professionals in the AI space, and if there’s a way to include AI models that are trained on proprietary data in the definition of open source AI. </p><p><br></p><p>If you are interested in open source AI, definitely check out this behind-the-scenes discussion of how, and why, this definition was published — and what the future likely holds for defining open source AI. </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/maffulli/">Stefano Maffulli</a>, Executive Director of the <a href="https://opensource.org">Open Source Initiative</a>, about the definition of open source and… the definition of open source AI. We recorded this episode on-site at All Things Open, so there’s a little bit of background noise. </p><p><br></p><p>We talked about why OSI felt like it needed to develop a definition of open source AI, how “open source” is enforced, and the thought process behind the definition that the OSI ultimately published. </p><p><br></p><p>We talked about open data quite a bit — different kinds of data, what kind of information and data is important to researchers and professionals in the AI space, and if there’s a way to include AI models that are trained on proprietary data in the definition of open source AI. </p><p><br></p><p>If you are interested in open source AI, definitely check out this behind-the-scenes discussion of how, and why, this definition was published — and what the future likely holds for defining open source AI. </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 30 Oct 2024 00:00:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/e7f2b1e9/f50ecc3a.mp3" length="26626049" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1934</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/maffulli/">Stefano Maffulli</a>, Executive Director of the <a href="https://opensource.org">Open Source Initiative</a>, about the definition of open source and… the definition of open source AI. We recorded this episode on-site at All Things Open, so there’s a little bit of background noise. </p><p><br></p><p>We talked about why OSI felt like it needed to develop a definition of open source AI, how “open source” is enforced, and the thought process behind the definition that the OSI ultimately published. </p><p><br></p><p>We talked about open data quite a bit — different kinds of data, what kind of information and data is important to researchers and professionals in the AI space, and if there’s a way to include AI models that are trained on proprietary data in the definition of open source AI. </p><p><br></p><p>If you are interested in open source AI, definitely check out this behind-the-scenes discussion of how, and why, this definition was published — and what the future likely holds for defining open source AI. </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Price Anchors of Zero Dollars with Anais Concepcion and Paul Fitzpatrick</title>
      <itunes:episode>230</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>230</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Price Anchors of Zero Dollars with Anais Concepcion and Paul Fitzpatrick</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">bb3b5c3a-b581-43f6-a3bf-172a1457f759</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/09bb8825</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/anaisconce/">Anais Concepcion</a> and <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/paul-fitzpatrick-65a1406/">Paul Fitzpatrick </a>, the co-CEO of Grist Labs and CTO of Grist Labs. We talked about managing growth of users versus growth of revenue, moving to an open source approach for technical, not technical, reasons, and open-source related product management questions for open source companies. </p><p><br></p><p>Some really interesting themes we talked about:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>Moving from a SaaS first approach to also focusing on enterprise sales. Why they did that, what other sales channels that opened and what questions it also forced the company to address</li><li>User personas versus buyer personas</li><li>The situations in which Grist is the best option — which incidentally I could not understand from the website or the project documentation</li><li>The relationship between the open source project and both enterprise sales and SaaS sign-ups. </li><li>How open source has been critical for a strategic relationship Grist has with the French government, which has been important for increasing product development velocity</li><li>Giving up ‘darlings’ or features that they really want to develop but that they don’t think would drive revenue</li><li>The difference Anais sees between running Grist and running non-open-source companies — one of the most interesting differences is that users often have a sense of ownership over the project that you just wouldn’t see in a fully proprietary </li><li>How open source true believers often work in large companies and control budgets, and should not be underestimated. </li><li>Why trying to sell based on features — including telling yourself that if you just had one more feature, you’d unlock all the sales — was a big mistake. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Are you struggling with price anchors fixed around zero dollars, or can’t figure out how to manage the push and pull of developing open source and building a business? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/anaisconce/">Anais Concepcion</a> and <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/paul-fitzpatrick-65a1406/">Paul Fitzpatrick </a>, the co-CEO of Grist Labs and CTO of Grist Labs. We talked about managing growth of users versus growth of revenue, moving to an open source approach for technical, not technical, reasons, and open-source related product management questions for open source companies. </p><p><br></p><p>Some really interesting themes we talked about:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>Moving from a SaaS first approach to also focusing on enterprise sales. Why they did that, what other sales channels that opened and what questions it also forced the company to address</li><li>User personas versus buyer personas</li><li>The situations in which Grist is the best option — which incidentally I could not understand from the website or the project documentation</li><li>The relationship between the open source project and both enterprise sales and SaaS sign-ups. </li><li>How open source has been critical for a strategic relationship Grist has with the French government, which has been important for increasing product development velocity</li><li>Giving up ‘darlings’ or features that they really want to develop but that they don’t think would drive revenue</li><li>The difference Anais sees between running Grist and running non-open-source companies — one of the most interesting differences is that users often have a sense of ownership over the project that you just wouldn’t see in a fully proprietary </li><li>How open source true believers often work in large companies and control budgets, and should not be underestimated. </li><li>Why trying to sell based on features — including telling yourself that if you just had one more feature, you’d unlock all the sales — was a big mistake. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Are you struggling with price anchors fixed around zero dollars, or can’t figure out how to manage the push and pull of developing open source and building a business? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 23 Oct 2024 02:00:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/09bb8825/dcd6621c.mp3" length="32339449" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2529</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/anaisconce/">Anais Concepcion</a> and <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/paul-fitzpatrick-65a1406/">Paul Fitzpatrick </a>, the co-CEO of Grist Labs and CTO of Grist Labs. We talked about managing growth of users versus growth of revenue, moving to an open source approach for technical, not technical, reasons, and open-source related product management questions for open source companies. </p><p><br></p><p>Some really interesting themes we talked about:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>Moving from a SaaS first approach to also focusing on enterprise sales. Why they did that, what other sales channels that opened and what questions it also forced the company to address</li><li>User personas versus buyer personas</li><li>The situations in which Grist is the best option — which incidentally I could not understand from the website or the project documentation</li><li>The relationship between the open source project and both enterprise sales and SaaS sign-ups. </li><li>How open source has been critical for a strategic relationship Grist has with the French government, which has been important for increasing product development velocity</li><li>Giving up ‘darlings’ or features that they really want to develop but that they don’t think would drive revenue</li><li>The difference Anais sees between running Grist and running non-open-source companies — one of the most interesting differences is that users often have a sense of ownership over the project that you just wouldn’t see in a fully proprietary </li><li>How open source true believers often work in large companies and control budgets, and should not be underestimated. </li><li>Why trying to sell based on features — including telling yourself that if you just had one more feature, you’d unlock all the sales — was a big mistake. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Are you struggling with price anchors fixed around zero dollars, or can’t figure out how to manage the push and pull of developing open source and building a business? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Getting people to use the features you already have with Eric Holscher</title>
      <itunes:episode>229</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>229</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Getting people to use the features you already have with Eric Holscher</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">008e00d5-bdc8-4314-baca-e6f3d4c7e45d</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/1f0df3fb</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/eric-holscher/">Eric Holscher,</a> co-founder of <a href="https://about.readthedocs.com">Read the Docs</a>. We had a really far-ranging conversation that included talking about why documentation is often so bad, why documentation should be a priority, but also Eric’s experience building Read the Docs and <a href="https://www.writethedocs.org">Write the Docs</a>. This episode was interesting because it’s both about building an open source company and also about the importance documentation for software projects in general and open source projects. </p><p><br></p><p>Some things we covered included: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>What is documentation? Is it a marketing effort, is it a part of the project itself? Eric talks about how good documentation for an open source project is a clear signal of a level of seriousness for the project. </li><li>How Read the Docs was really started to support open source projects, and that is part of why there’s no enterprise installs — either you use the open source code on your own, or you use the hosted product.</li><li>How Eric sees building in the open as a way to help other people become better software engineers, but that ‘helping companies use Read the Docs for free’ is not the reason he wanted to build an open source company, and he’s still not sure how to feel about the fact that this happens. </li><li>You don’t get bonus points for being open source or bonus points for being bootstrapped — it won’t prevent a potential customer from using a competitive product because it has a feature that Read the Docs doesn’t have. </li><li>How open source in general — and even documentation in general — can help build brand value, but it is super hard to quantify and put in a slide in a board meeting to justify an investment in open source. </li><li>The decision to build Read the Docs as a business stemmed from the pressure that Eric got from having a successful open source project. </li><li>How they tried very hard to avoid accepting advertisements, but they should have started doing so much sooner because it turned out advertisements is well-aligned with the things they want to be working on. </li><li>The difference in risk between being open source for a database company versus an app-level open source project like Read the Docs; for Read the Docs one of the risks is the brand damage associated with people running the OSS on-prem and doing a bad job. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Are you the founder of an open source company and struggling with figuring out how to manage the relationship between the project and product? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p><p><br></p><p>Enjoy the show? Help it reach more people by leaving a review and sharing with your friends. </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/eric-holscher/">Eric Holscher,</a> co-founder of <a href="https://about.readthedocs.com">Read the Docs</a>. We had a really far-ranging conversation that included talking about why documentation is often so bad, why documentation should be a priority, but also Eric’s experience building Read the Docs and <a href="https://www.writethedocs.org">Write the Docs</a>. This episode was interesting because it’s both about building an open source company and also about the importance documentation for software projects in general and open source projects. </p><p><br></p><p>Some things we covered included: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>What is documentation? Is it a marketing effort, is it a part of the project itself? Eric talks about how good documentation for an open source project is a clear signal of a level of seriousness for the project. </li><li>How Read the Docs was really started to support open source projects, and that is part of why there’s no enterprise installs — either you use the open source code on your own, or you use the hosted product.</li><li>How Eric sees building in the open as a way to help other people become better software engineers, but that ‘helping companies use Read the Docs for free’ is not the reason he wanted to build an open source company, and he’s still not sure how to feel about the fact that this happens. </li><li>You don’t get bonus points for being open source or bonus points for being bootstrapped — it won’t prevent a potential customer from using a competitive product because it has a feature that Read the Docs doesn’t have. </li><li>How open source in general — and even documentation in general — can help build brand value, but it is super hard to quantify and put in a slide in a board meeting to justify an investment in open source. </li><li>The decision to build Read the Docs as a business stemmed from the pressure that Eric got from having a successful open source project. </li><li>How they tried very hard to avoid accepting advertisements, but they should have started doing so much sooner because it turned out advertisements is well-aligned with the things they want to be working on. </li><li>The difference in risk between being open source for a database company versus an app-level open source project like Read the Docs; for Read the Docs one of the risks is the brand damage associated with people running the OSS on-prem and doing a bad job. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Are you the founder of an open source company and struggling with figuring out how to manage the relationship between the project and product? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p><p><br></p><p>Enjoy the show? Help it reach more people by leaving a review and sharing with your friends. </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 16 Oct 2024 02:09:44 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/1f0df3fb/3c11b5bd.mp3" length="42465040" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2737</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/eric-holscher/">Eric Holscher,</a> co-founder of <a href="https://about.readthedocs.com">Read the Docs</a>. We had a really far-ranging conversation that included talking about why documentation is often so bad, why documentation should be a priority, but also Eric’s experience building Read the Docs and <a href="https://www.writethedocs.org">Write the Docs</a>. This episode was interesting because it’s both about building an open source company and also about the importance documentation for software projects in general and open source projects. </p><p><br></p><p>Some things we covered included: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>What is documentation? Is it a marketing effort, is it a part of the project itself? Eric talks about how good documentation for an open source project is a clear signal of a level of seriousness for the project. </li><li>How Read the Docs was really started to support open source projects, and that is part of why there’s no enterprise installs — either you use the open source code on your own, or you use the hosted product.</li><li>How Eric sees building in the open as a way to help other people become better software engineers, but that ‘helping companies use Read the Docs for free’ is not the reason he wanted to build an open source company, and he’s still not sure how to feel about the fact that this happens. </li><li>You don’t get bonus points for being open source or bonus points for being bootstrapped — it won’t prevent a potential customer from using a competitive product because it has a feature that Read the Docs doesn’t have. </li><li>How open source in general — and even documentation in general — can help build brand value, but it is super hard to quantify and put in a slide in a board meeting to justify an investment in open source. </li><li>The decision to build Read the Docs as a business stemmed from the pressure that Eric got from having a successful open source project. </li><li>How they tried very hard to avoid accepting advertisements, but they should have started doing so much sooner because it turned out advertisements is well-aligned with the things they want to be working on. </li><li>The difference in risk between being open source for a database company versus an app-level open source project like Read the Docs; for Read the Docs one of the risks is the brand damage associated with people running the OSS on-prem and doing a bad job. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Are you the founder of an open source company and struggling with figuring out how to manage the relationship between the project and product? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p><p><br></p><p>Enjoy the show? Help it reach more people by leaving a review and sharing with your friends. </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Open source companies' reputation problem with Chris Holmes</title>
      <itunes:episode>228</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>228</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Open source companies' reputation problem with Chris Holmes</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">c9fda5ce-0e3d-47d7-bcb3-072098c99ad8</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/ed9f2e01</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/chris-m-holmes/">Chris Holmes</a>, co-founder and CEO of <a href="https://greymatter.io">Greymatter.</a> Greymatter is deeply involved in the open source ecosystem and maintains the Go Envoy Control Plane, but Chris is adamant that it is not an open source company. We had a great discussion about why that is, what it means for the company and the conversations he ends up having around open source with his customers and partner companies. </p><p><br></p><p>Some particularly interesting points that came up:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>Customers worry that buying Greymatter could force them to buy enterprise versions of open source software — and Chris thinks that this could be a symptom of the fact that many users expect that they’ll end up being forced to pay for something they don’t want to pay for</li><li>How open source companies, and open source projects in general, can be viewed as risky if they are only backed by one company</li><li>Who is gonna pay for open source? How if you are going to get away from open source projects being aggressively monetized, big companies have to put their money where their mouth is and pay for open source development directly</li><li>Why and how to get started selling to governments. Yes, the sales cycles are longer but the deals tend to be very sticky once you get in — and why Chris actually finds it easier to sell to the military than to large enterprises. </li><li>What benefits Greymatter gets from being a maintainer of the Go Envoy Control Plane. </li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Struggling with how to get your product strategy right, and find the right balance between your open source project and your commercial offering? Not sure how your user audience and customer market relate to each other? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/chris-m-holmes/">Chris Holmes</a>, co-founder and CEO of <a href="https://greymatter.io">Greymatter.</a> Greymatter is deeply involved in the open source ecosystem and maintains the Go Envoy Control Plane, but Chris is adamant that it is not an open source company. We had a great discussion about why that is, what it means for the company and the conversations he ends up having around open source with his customers and partner companies. </p><p><br></p><p>Some particularly interesting points that came up:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>Customers worry that buying Greymatter could force them to buy enterprise versions of open source software — and Chris thinks that this could be a symptom of the fact that many users expect that they’ll end up being forced to pay for something they don’t want to pay for</li><li>How open source companies, and open source projects in general, can be viewed as risky if they are only backed by one company</li><li>Who is gonna pay for open source? How if you are going to get away from open source projects being aggressively monetized, big companies have to put their money where their mouth is and pay for open source development directly</li><li>Why and how to get started selling to governments. Yes, the sales cycles are longer but the deals tend to be very sticky once you get in — and why Chris actually finds it easier to sell to the military than to large enterprises. </li><li>What benefits Greymatter gets from being a maintainer of the Go Envoy Control Plane. </li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Struggling with how to get your product strategy right, and find the right balance between your open source project and your commercial offering? Not sure how your user audience and customer market relate to each other? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 09 Oct 2024 01:29:52 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/ed9f2e01/85aa1e43.mp3" length="30592666" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2665</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/chris-m-holmes/">Chris Holmes</a>, co-founder and CEO of <a href="https://greymatter.io">Greymatter.</a> Greymatter is deeply involved in the open source ecosystem and maintains the Go Envoy Control Plane, but Chris is adamant that it is not an open source company. We had a great discussion about why that is, what it means for the company and the conversations he ends up having around open source with his customers and partner companies. </p><p><br></p><p>Some particularly interesting points that came up:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>Customers worry that buying Greymatter could force them to buy enterprise versions of open source software — and Chris thinks that this could be a symptom of the fact that many users expect that they’ll end up being forced to pay for something they don’t want to pay for</li><li>How open source companies, and open source projects in general, can be viewed as risky if they are only backed by one company</li><li>Who is gonna pay for open source? How if you are going to get away from open source projects being aggressively monetized, big companies have to put their money where their mouth is and pay for open source development directly</li><li>Why and how to get started selling to governments. Yes, the sales cycles are longer but the deals tend to be very sticky once you get in — and why Chris actually finds it easier to sell to the military than to large enterprises. </li><li>What benefits Greymatter gets from being a maintainer of the Go Envoy Control Plane. </li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Struggling with how to get your product strategy right, and find the right balance between your open source project and your commercial offering? Not sure how your user audience and customer market relate to each other? You might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Building your product with your customers with David Höck</title>
      <itunes:episode>227</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>227</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Building your product with your customers with David Höck</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">bd8cfcb5-6d8d-431e-aac4-d7b4ae45727d</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/434f3a82</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on the Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/davidhoeck/">David Höck,</a> co-founder of <a href="https://vendure.io">Vendure.</a> We talked about switching licenses from MIT to GPL, the ways that Vendure is different from it’s competitors and how architectural decisions can be a powerful differentiator for an open source company. </p><p><br></p><p>Favorite quote: “You need to build your product together with your clients.” </p><p><br></p><p>Some specifics we talked about that you should pay attention to: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why they switched to GPL in order to encourage more people to reach out to them and get more visibility into who was using their open source project</li><li>On the other hand, they wanted to make sure that big companies building commercial platforms on top of Vendure’s platform are forced to pay for a commercial license. </li><li>They also wanted to choose a less-permissive license, but something that was still well-known and wouldn’t cause a lot of confusion among users or potential customers</li><li>The difference between being happy with people using your software for free, and being happy with competitors using your software to build a competitive product, without offering any support to the underlying software. </li><li>Do your customers care about whether you are VC-backed or bootstrapped? We had an interesting conversation about this, because Vendure is bootstrapped. I think we settled on a real important nugget — if your technology is really critical to the company, they will care about your long-term sustainability. Being bootstrapped can help convince potential customers that you are independent and will be sustainable for the long term. </li><li>The top advantage of open source, David says, is the ability to get fast product feedback from a community. —&gt; I just was talking with someone yesterday about this advantage of an open source strategy, I think it is under-discussed but extremely important. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>If you’re the founder of an open source company struggling with your product strategy — uncertain how to differentiate between project or product or how to differentiate the entire company in the ecosystem; don’t know what your project is supposed to do for your business; aren’t clear on the target market for your project or product — you might want to work with me. Find out <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">more here. </a></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on the Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/davidhoeck/">David Höck,</a> co-founder of <a href="https://vendure.io">Vendure.</a> We talked about switching licenses from MIT to GPL, the ways that Vendure is different from it’s competitors and how architectural decisions can be a powerful differentiator for an open source company. </p><p><br></p><p>Favorite quote: “You need to build your product together with your clients.” </p><p><br></p><p>Some specifics we talked about that you should pay attention to: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why they switched to GPL in order to encourage more people to reach out to them and get more visibility into who was using their open source project</li><li>On the other hand, they wanted to make sure that big companies building commercial platforms on top of Vendure’s platform are forced to pay for a commercial license. </li><li>They also wanted to choose a less-permissive license, but something that was still well-known and wouldn’t cause a lot of confusion among users or potential customers</li><li>The difference between being happy with people using your software for free, and being happy with competitors using your software to build a competitive product, without offering any support to the underlying software. </li><li>Do your customers care about whether you are VC-backed or bootstrapped? We had an interesting conversation about this, because Vendure is bootstrapped. I think we settled on a real important nugget — if your technology is really critical to the company, they will care about your long-term sustainability. Being bootstrapped can help convince potential customers that you are independent and will be sustainable for the long term. </li><li>The top advantage of open source, David says, is the ability to get fast product feedback from a community. —&gt; I just was talking with someone yesterday about this advantage of an open source strategy, I think it is under-discussed but extremely important. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>If you’re the founder of an open source company struggling with your product strategy — uncertain how to differentiate between project or product or how to differentiate the entire company in the ecosystem; don’t know what your project is supposed to do for your business; aren’t clear on the target market for your project or product — you might want to work with me. Find out <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">more here. </a></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 02 Oct 2024 02:52:17 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/434f3a82/a493cf70.mp3" length="25430839" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2431</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on the Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/davidhoeck/">David Höck,</a> co-founder of <a href="https://vendure.io">Vendure.</a> We talked about switching licenses from MIT to GPL, the ways that Vendure is different from it’s competitors and how architectural decisions can be a powerful differentiator for an open source company. </p><p><br></p><p>Favorite quote: “You need to build your product together with your clients.” </p><p><br></p><p>Some specifics we talked about that you should pay attention to: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why they switched to GPL in order to encourage more people to reach out to them and get more visibility into who was using their open source project</li><li>On the other hand, they wanted to make sure that big companies building commercial platforms on top of Vendure’s platform are forced to pay for a commercial license. </li><li>They also wanted to choose a less-permissive license, but something that was still well-known and wouldn’t cause a lot of confusion among users or potential customers</li><li>The difference between being happy with people using your software for free, and being happy with competitors using your software to build a competitive product, without offering any support to the underlying software. </li><li>Do your customers care about whether you are VC-backed or bootstrapped? We had an interesting conversation about this, because Vendure is bootstrapped. I think we settled on a real important nugget — if your technology is really critical to the company, they will care about your long-term sustainability. Being bootstrapped can help convince potential customers that you are independent and will be sustainable for the long term. </li><li>The top advantage of open source, David says, is the ability to get fast product feedback from a community. —&gt; I just was talking with someone yesterday about this advantage of an open source strategy, I think it is under-discussed but extremely important. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>If you’re the founder of an open source company struggling with your product strategy — uncertain how to differentiate between project or product or how to differentiate the entire company in the ecosystem; don’t know what your project is supposed to do for your business; aren’t clear on the target market for your project or product — you might want to work with me. Find out <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">more here. </a></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Finding and losing product-market fit with Allard Buijze </title>
      <itunes:episode>226</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>226</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Finding and losing product-market fit with Allard Buijze </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">8626aaec-eec6-4062-bbbc-46bdf1a80a29</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/57d420d7</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I talked with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/abuijze/">Allard Buijze,</a> the CTO and founder at <a href="https://www.axoniq.io">AxonIQ</a>. We talked a lot about the importance of open source for getting feedback on your product and validating your idea — or not. </p><p><br></p><p>One of the things we talked about was how the beginning of AxonIQ was tied to the same consultancy that developed Spring Source; Rod Johnson, the founder and CEO of Spring Source was on the podcast a couple months ago and you can listen to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/podcast/aligning-with-user-needs-with-rod-johnson">that episode here. </a></p><p><br></p><p>We talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Spinning the company out of the an established company, and in particular how Allard ended up becoming co-founders with his former boss, and got buy-in from their previous employer to found the company after the open source project took open. </li><li>How they underestimated some elements of human psychology around sunk costs and how it would impact people’s willingness to move from the open source project to the paid product</li><li>Why they originally had two products, and then decided to merge them into one single product</li><li>How the key turning point for the company was when a new salesperson joined the company and convinced them to quadruple the prices; the result was both an increase in revenue per customer but also an increase in the number of customers. </li><li>How they evaluated the success of the decision to consolidate the two products into one. </li><li>How product market fit is a journey, not a destination. </li><li>How each individual hire can impact the way your product and project is perceived in the world; and it’s important to get alignment on what people are saying. </li><li>The importance the avoiding confusion among potential customers</li></ul><p><br></p><p>***</p><p><br></p><p>Are you leading an open source company and struggling with product strategy? I will help you improve the quality of your conversations, so people understand your product sooner, remain more engaged in the conversation and understand the relationship between your product and project. <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/product-strategy">Learn more here. </a></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I talked with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/abuijze/">Allard Buijze,</a> the CTO and founder at <a href="https://www.axoniq.io">AxonIQ</a>. We talked a lot about the importance of open source for getting feedback on your product and validating your idea — or not. </p><p><br></p><p>One of the things we talked about was how the beginning of AxonIQ was tied to the same consultancy that developed Spring Source; Rod Johnson, the founder and CEO of Spring Source was on the podcast a couple months ago and you can listen to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/podcast/aligning-with-user-needs-with-rod-johnson">that episode here. </a></p><p><br></p><p>We talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Spinning the company out of the an established company, and in particular how Allard ended up becoming co-founders with his former boss, and got buy-in from their previous employer to found the company after the open source project took open. </li><li>How they underestimated some elements of human psychology around sunk costs and how it would impact people’s willingness to move from the open source project to the paid product</li><li>Why they originally had two products, and then decided to merge them into one single product</li><li>How the key turning point for the company was when a new salesperson joined the company and convinced them to quadruple the prices; the result was both an increase in revenue per customer but also an increase in the number of customers. </li><li>How they evaluated the success of the decision to consolidate the two products into one. </li><li>How product market fit is a journey, not a destination. </li><li>How each individual hire can impact the way your product and project is perceived in the world; and it’s important to get alignment on what people are saying. </li><li>The importance the avoiding confusion among potential customers</li></ul><p><br></p><p>***</p><p><br></p><p>Are you leading an open source company and struggling with product strategy? I will help you improve the quality of your conversations, so people understand your product sooner, remain more engaged in the conversation and understand the relationship between your product and project. <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/product-strategy">Learn more here. </a></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 25 Sep 2024 01:37:26 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/57d420d7/186d0b89.mp3" length="41379473" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2699</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I talked with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/abuijze/">Allard Buijze,</a> the CTO and founder at <a href="https://www.axoniq.io">AxonIQ</a>. We talked a lot about the importance of open source for getting feedback on your product and validating your idea — or not. </p><p><br></p><p>One of the things we talked about was how the beginning of AxonIQ was tied to the same consultancy that developed Spring Source; Rod Johnson, the founder and CEO of Spring Source was on the podcast a couple months ago and you can listen to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/podcast/aligning-with-user-needs-with-rod-johnson">that episode here. </a></p><p><br></p><p>We talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Spinning the company out of the an established company, and in particular how Allard ended up becoming co-founders with his former boss, and got buy-in from their previous employer to found the company after the open source project took open. </li><li>How they underestimated some elements of human psychology around sunk costs and how it would impact people’s willingness to move from the open source project to the paid product</li><li>Why they originally had two products, and then decided to merge them into one single product</li><li>How the key turning point for the company was when a new salesperson joined the company and convinced them to quadruple the prices; the result was both an increase in revenue per customer but also an increase in the number of customers. </li><li>How they evaluated the success of the decision to consolidate the two products into one. </li><li>How product market fit is a journey, not a destination. </li><li>How each individual hire can impact the way your product and project is perceived in the world; and it’s important to get alignment on what people are saying. </li><li>The importance the avoiding confusion among potential customers</li></ul><p><br></p><p>***</p><p><br></p><p>Are you leading an open source company and struggling with product strategy? I will help you improve the quality of your conversations, so people understand your product sooner, remain more engaged in the conversation and understand the relationship between your product and project. <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/product-strategy">Learn more here. </a></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Friendly Competition within the ClickHouse Ecosystem with Robert Hodges</title>
      <itunes:episode>225</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>225</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Friendly Competition within the ClickHouse Ecosystem with Robert Hodges</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">0e575438-1c92-40be-a077-f97acf892e61</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/f70df4ee</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/berkeleybob2105/">Robert Hodges</a>, CEO of <a href="https://altinity.com">Altinity. </a>This is a great example of an open source company that is built on top of an open source project, ClickHouse, that they did not create and still do not have direct control over. Altinity has created and maintains other open source projects in the ClickHouse ecosystem as well, but </p><p><br></p><p>So many things to unpack with this episode, but a couple I want to call attention to in particular. </p><p><br></p><ol><li>The origin story of how Altinity’s founder discovered Clickhouse (he did not create it!). I love how Robert specifies that <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/alexander-zaitsev-5774a91/">Alexander Zaitsev</a>, one of the Altinity co-founders, discovered ClickHouse because he wasn’t happy with how the database he was using scaled — and by the way, it had nothing to do with how much the database cost. Great example of an open source project winning because it provided superior value, not because it was/is free. </li><li>Making product strategy decisions based on who the ideal user and the ideal customer is. Robert talked about how Altinity didn’t contribute a particular high-security feature back to open source ClickHouse because while it’s something that very security-conscious organizations would want, for an open source users who doesn’t have major security and compliance requirements it would be confusing and create a worse user experience. </li><li>Working in friendly competition with the 10 or so other companies that are building around ClickHouse, and how this is one of the unique things about working around open source</li><li>How Altinity’s customers tend to value the four freedoms of open source</li></ol><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Are you a leader of an open source company and you’re struggling to prioritize your product roadmap in a way that reinforces your differentiated value… <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/product-strategy">reach out. </a>I help companies figure out the differentiated value of their product and product, where to put the line between the two, and how to use that information to prioritize your roadmap, build a sales narrative and communicate with your market. </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/berkeleybob2105/">Robert Hodges</a>, CEO of <a href="https://altinity.com">Altinity. </a>This is a great example of an open source company that is built on top of an open source project, ClickHouse, that they did not create and still do not have direct control over. Altinity has created and maintains other open source projects in the ClickHouse ecosystem as well, but </p><p><br></p><p>So many things to unpack with this episode, but a couple I want to call attention to in particular. </p><p><br></p><ol><li>The origin story of how Altinity’s founder discovered Clickhouse (he did not create it!). I love how Robert specifies that <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/alexander-zaitsev-5774a91/">Alexander Zaitsev</a>, one of the Altinity co-founders, discovered ClickHouse because he wasn’t happy with how the database he was using scaled — and by the way, it had nothing to do with how much the database cost. Great example of an open source project winning because it provided superior value, not because it was/is free. </li><li>Making product strategy decisions based on who the ideal user and the ideal customer is. Robert talked about how Altinity didn’t contribute a particular high-security feature back to open source ClickHouse because while it’s something that very security-conscious organizations would want, for an open source users who doesn’t have major security and compliance requirements it would be confusing and create a worse user experience. </li><li>Working in friendly competition with the 10 or so other companies that are building around ClickHouse, and how this is one of the unique things about working around open source</li><li>How Altinity’s customers tend to value the four freedoms of open source</li></ol><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Are you a leader of an open source company and you’re struggling to prioritize your product roadmap in a way that reinforces your differentiated value… <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/product-strategy">reach out. </a>I help companies figure out the differentiated value of their product and product, where to put the line between the two, and how to use that information to prioritize your roadmap, build a sales narrative and communicate with your market. </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 18 Sep 2024 00:00:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/f70df4ee/acfe59ee.mp3" length="26219713" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2571</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/berkeleybob2105/">Robert Hodges</a>, CEO of <a href="https://altinity.com">Altinity. </a>This is a great example of an open source company that is built on top of an open source project, ClickHouse, that they did not create and still do not have direct control over. Altinity has created and maintains other open source projects in the ClickHouse ecosystem as well, but </p><p><br></p><p>So many things to unpack with this episode, but a couple I want to call attention to in particular. </p><p><br></p><ol><li>The origin story of how Altinity’s founder discovered Clickhouse (he did not create it!). I love how Robert specifies that <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/alexander-zaitsev-5774a91/">Alexander Zaitsev</a>, one of the Altinity co-founders, discovered ClickHouse because he wasn’t happy with how the database he was using scaled — and by the way, it had nothing to do with how much the database cost. Great example of an open source project winning because it provided superior value, not because it was/is free. </li><li>Making product strategy decisions based on who the ideal user and the ideal customer is. Robert talked about how Altinity didn’t contribute a particular high-security feature back to open source ClickHouse because while it’s something that very security-conscious organizations would want, for an open source users who doesn’t have major security and compliance requirements it would be confusing and create a worse user experience. </li><li>Working in friendly competition with the 10 or so other companies that are building around ClickHouse, and how this is one of the unique things about working around open source</li><li>How Altinity’s customers tend to value the four freedoms of open source</li></ol><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Are you a leader of an open source company and you’re struggling to prioritize your product roadmap in a way that reinforces your differentiated value… <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/product-strategy">reach out. </a>I help companies figure out the differentiated value of their product and product, where to put the line between the two, and how to use that information to prioritize your roadmap, build a sales narrative and communicate with your market. </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Feature prioritization and customers' perceived value with Brad Micklea and Jesse Williams</title>
      <itunes:episode>224</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>224</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Feature prioritization and customers' perceived value with Brad Micklea and Jesse Williams</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">60c74b02-aef1-4324-a017-980a68afa694</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/c6969dff</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/jessewilliams1/">Jesse Williams</a> and <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/bradmicklea/">Brad Micklea</a>, co-founders of <a href="https://jozu.com">Jozu</a> and each with a long history of experience in various open source companies behind them. Even though Jozu is young, there was a lot to learn from these two and their experience in both open source and non-open source businesses. We talked about open source and not open source from CodeEnvy, Red Hat, AWS and Docker. </p><p><br></p><p>“It’s very hard to get a sustainable open source project if you don’t have a company behind it paying those developers to work on it.” </p><p><br></p><p>Some things we talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why it’s important to focus on ‘what people get” instead of ‘what you give people.’ This is a fundamental component of effective product strategy and understanding your value prop: You can’t just talk about about the features you’re delivering; you have to connect that and focus on the value that people get from using the product. </li><li>Jesse talked about the wizard behind the curtain that makes open source projects drive commercial adoption and revenue. </li><li>You must be able to communicate the additional value of the commercial product; otherwise you will run the company into the group.</li><li>Many open source companies get taken hostage by the open source community and end up having trouble monetizing because they make give away value in a way that is not sustainable.</li><li>Users — and especially customers — are often unwilling to commit to a project if they are not convinced that the business behind it is healthy and has a sustainable business model. </li><li>Open source, open standards and open governance — the relationship between the three and why we should all talk more about open standards and open governance in the open source ecosystem. </li><li>The importance of really thinking through why you are open sourcing something, something that many companies don’t think through. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>We wrapped up the conversation talking about how difficult it is to figure out which features to prioritize — and that this is a really hard decision for any startup. This is a big part of my shift to focusing on product strategy in my consulting. If you’re an open source startup struggling with product prioritization and strategy, check out my<a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/product-strategy"> product strategy offering. </a></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/jessewilliams1/">Jesse Williams</a> and <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/bradmicklea/">Brad Micklea</a>, co-founders of <a href="https://jozu.com">Jozu</a> and each with a long history of experience in various open source companies behind them. Even though Jozu is young, there was a lot to learn from these two and their experience in both open source and non-open source businesses. We talked about open source and not open source from CodeEnvy, Red Hat, AWS and Docker. </p><p><br></p><p>“It’s very hard to get a sustainable open source project if you don’t have a company behind it paying those developers to work on it.” </p><p><br></p><p>Some things we talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why it’s important to focus on ‘what people get” instead of ‘what you give people.’ This is a fundamental component of effective product strategy and understanding your value prop: You can’t just talk about about the features you’re delivering; you have to connect that and focus on the value that people get from using the product. </li><li>Jesse talked about the wizard behind the curtain that makes open source projects drive commercial adoption and revenue. </li><li>You must be able to communicate the additional value of the commercial product; otherwise you will run the company into the group.</li><li>Many open source companies get taken hostage by the open source community and end up having trouble monetizing because they make give away value in a way that is not sustainable.</li><li>Users — and especially customers — are often unwilling to commit to a project if they are not convinced that the business behind it is healthy and has a sustainable business model. </li><li>Open source, open standards and open governance — the relationship between the three and why we should all talk more about open standards and open governance in the open source ecosystem. </li><li>The importance of really thinking through why you are open sourcing something, something that many companies don’t think through. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>We wrapped up the conversation talking about how difficult it is to figure out which features to prioritize — and that this is a really hard decision for any startup. This is a big part of my shift to focusing on product strategy in my consulting. If you’re an open source startup struggling with product prioritization and strategy, check out my<a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/product-strategy"> product strategy offering. </a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 11 Sep 2024 01:54:36 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/c6969dff/f2be45ac.mp3" length="32924269" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2715</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/jessewilliams1/">Jesse Williams</a> and <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/bradmicklea/">Brad Micklea</a>, co-founders of <a href="https://jozu.com">Jozu</a> and each with a long history of experience in various open source companies behind them. Even though Jozu is young, there was a lot to learn from these two and their experience in both open source and non-open source businesses. We talked about open source and not open source from CodeEnvy, Red Hat, AWS and Docker. </p><p><br></p><p>“It’s very hard to get a sustainable open source project if you don’t have a company behind it paying those developers to work on it.” </p><p><br></p><p>Some things we talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why it’s important to focus on ‘what people get” instead of ‘what you give people.’ This is a fundamental component of effective product strategy and understanding your value prop: You can’t just talk about about the features you’re delivering; you have to connect that and focus on the value that people get from using the product. </li><li>Jesse talked about the wizard behind the curtain that makes open source projects drive commercial adoption and revenue. </li><li>You must be able to communicate the additional value of the commercial product; otherwise you will run the company into the group.</li><li>Many open source companies get taken hostage by the open source community and end up having trouble monetizing because they make give away value in a way that is not sustainable.</li><li>Users — and especially customers — are often unwilling to commit to a project if they are not convinced that the business behind it is healthy and has a sustainable business model. </li><li>Open source, open standards and open governance — the relationship between the three and why we should all talk more about open standards and open governance in the open source ecosystem. </li><li>The importance of really thinking through why you are open sourcing something, something that many companies don’t think through. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>We wrapped up the conversation talking about how difficult it is to figure out which features to prioritize — and that this is a really hard decision for any startup. This is a big part of my shift to focusing on product strategy in my consulting. If you’re an open source startup struggling with product prioritization and strategy, check out my<a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/product-strategy"> product strategy offering. </a></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>The Importance of Clear Frameworks for Product vs Project with Jimmy Zelinskie</title>
      <itunes:episode>223</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>223</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>The Importance of Clear Frameworks for Product vs Project with Jimmy Zelinskie</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">7a9e24ed-8763-452b-a01e-703d2e5eae7b</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/e2e86f5b</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/jzelinskie/">Jimmy Zelinskie</a>, co-founder and CPO of <a href="https://authzed.com">Authzed</a>, which is behind <a href="https://github.com/authzed/spicedb">SpiceDB. </a></p><p><br></p><p>We kicked off the discussion with a really interesting discussion about whether or not SpiceDB is a database and whether or not Authzed is a database company. At first they didn’t see it that way, but as soon as they started leaning in on describing the product as a database, the more successful they were at getting people in their community to quickly understand what they did and how to use it. But it wasn’t just important for adoption: Once the team realized they were a database company, the business model they should follow seemed obvious, and they could make product decisions without stepping on anyone’s toes. </p><p><br></p><p>Some topics we covered: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>How positioning SpiceDB as a database, and Authzed as a database company, helped everything else fall into place, from growth to product strategy</li><li>Why people often do want to avoid self-managing critical infrastructure</li><li>The difference in ideal user profile and ideal customer profiles</li><li>How transparency is the biggest benefit that Authzed gets from having an open source project. </li><li>How the decision to release an open source project was a direct consequence of positioning the technology as a database.</li><li>Why it is extremely important to have a decision-making framework for deciding what features will go into the open source or the proprietary features, that is communicated throughout the company</li><li>Why open source companies need to consider the open source users and communities as one of their stakeholders that needs to be represented in strategic discussions</li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>If you’re the founder of an open source company — or you know anyone who is — and you <em>don’t</em> have a good framework for making product decisions or struggle to communicate internally and externally what the difference between project and product is, I can help you figure that out. <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/product-strategy">Here’s more information. </a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/jzelinskie/">Jimmy Zelinskie</a>, co-founder and CPO of <a href="https://authzed.com">Authzed</a>, which is behind <a href="https://github.com/authzed/spicedb">SpiceDB. </a></p><p><br></p><p>We kicked off the discussion with a really interesting discussion about whether or not SpiceDB is a database and whether or not Authzed is a database company. At first they didn’t see it that way, but as soon as they started leaning in on describing the product as a database, the more successful they were at getting people in their community to quickly understand what they did and how to use it. But it wasn’t just important for adoption: Once the team realized they were a database company, the business model they should follow seemed obvious, and they could make product decisions without stepping on anyone’s toes. </p><p><br></p><p>Some topics we covered: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>How positioning SpiceDB as a database, and Authzed as a database company, helped everything else fall into place, from growth to product strategy</li><li>Why people often do want to avoid self-managing critical infrastructure</li><li>The difference in ideal user profile and ideal customer profiles</li><li>How transparency is the biggest benefit that Authzed gets from having an open source project. </li><li>How the decision to release an open source project was a direct consequence of positioning the technology as a database.</li><li>Why it is extremely important to have a decision-making framework for deciding what features will go into the open source or the proprietary features, that is communicated throughout the company</li><li>Why open source companies need to consider the open source users and communities as one of their stakeholders that needs to be represented in strategic discussions</li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>If you’re the founder of an open source company — or you know anyone who is — and you <em>don’t</em> have a good framework for making product decisions or struggle to communicate internally and externally what the difference between project and product is, I can help you figure that out. <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/product-strategy">Here’s more information. </a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 04 Sep 2024 03:01:04 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/e2e86f5b/2f2eed55.mp3" length="33404644" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2687</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/jzelinskie/">Jimmy Zelinskie</a>, co-founder and CPO of <a href="https://authzed.com">Authzed</a>, which is behind <a href="https://github.com/authzed/spicedb">SpiceDB. </a></p><p><br></p><p>We kicked off the discussion with a really interesting discussion about whether or not SpiceDB is a database and whether or not Authzed is a database company. At first they didn’t see it that way, but as soon as they started leaning in on describing the product as a database, the more successful they were at getting people in their community to quickly understand what they did and how to use it. But it wasn’t just important for adoption: Once the team realized they were a database company, the business model they should follow seemed obvious, and they could make product decisions without stepping on anyone’s toes. </p><p><br></p><p>Some topics we covered: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>How positioning SpiceDB as a database, and Authzed as a database company, helped everything else fall into place, from growth to product strategy</li><li>Why people often do want to avoid self-managing critical infrastructure</li><li>The difference in ideal user profile and ideal customer profiles</li><li>How transparency is the biggest benefit that Authzed gets from having an open source project. </li><li>How the decision to release an open source project was a direct consequence of positioning the technology as a database.</li><li>Why it is extremely important to have a decision-making framework for deciding what features will go into the open source or the proprietary features, that is communicated throughout the company</li><li>Why open source companies need to consider the open source users and communities as one of their stakeholders that needs to be represented in strategic discussions</li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>If you’re the founder of an open source company — or you know anyone who is — and you <em>don’t</em> have a good framework for making product decisions or struggle to communicate internally and externally what the difference between project and product is, I can help you figure that out. <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/product-strategy">Here’s more information. </a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Product market fit for project and product with Galeal Zino </title>
      <itunes:episode>222</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>222</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Product market fit for project and product with Galeal Zino </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">f5f87e7b-ea89-471f-b2d9-f94968998aae</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/4039e447</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on the Business of Open Source I had <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/gzino/">Galeal Zino</a>, CEO and founder of <a href="https://netfoundry.io">NetFoundry</a>, which creates <a href="https://openziti.io">OpenZiti. </a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>One of the most interesting things about the this conversation was the conversation about how to balance whether you’re promoting the product or the project. I talk to a lot of founders who assume that because you have both, you have to promote both. The same goes for SaaS and onprem options — some people think that just because you offer both, you have to build a go to market function for both. This topic came up in the conversation with <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/podcast/thoughtful-open-source-strategies-and-nailing-the-ossproduct-relationship-with-joe-duffy">Joe Duffy</a> as well — in their case, it was the opposite, though. Pulumi started with both open source and commercial product, but put all the emphasis on the open source project for the first two years. </p><p><br></p><p>Some of the interesting takeaways from this episode: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Even though there was no “GTM” focus on the open source project at the beginning, it still had business benefits to NetFoundry, because it made prospects more comfortable that they wouldn’t disappear overnight</li><li>How building an open source company is more difficult, because you end up supporting multiple products. But it also can build a flywheel of innovation that you just can’t get any other way. </li><li>Do you have to get product market fit twice? We had a long conversation about whether or not you have to get product market fit twice in open source companies. </li><li>We also talked about testing ideas and business models in the actual market, and how lessons learned in other businesses can influence how you approach you take even with open source companies. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! </p><p><br></p><p>PS: I’m changing my consulting offerings slightly, to focus on product strategy instead of positioning. And I’m looking for beta clients while I figure out exactly what the offering looks like. So if you’re an open source company and you’re looking for a clear product vision, a better understanding of how your product + project are differentiated and how to build that into your roadmap, <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/contact">reach out. </a></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on the Business of Open Source I had <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/gzino/">Galeal Zino</a>, CEO and founder of <a href="https://netfoundry.io">NetFoundry</a>, which creates <a href="https://openziti.io">OpenZiti. </a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>One of the most interesting things about the this conversation was the conversation about how to balance whether you’re promoting the product or the project. I talk to a lot of founders who assume that because you have both, you have to promote both. The same goes for SaaS and onprem options — some people think that just because you offer both, you have to build a go to market function for both. This topic came up in the conversation with <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/podcast/thoughtful-open-source-strategies-and-nailing-the-ossproduct-relationship-with-joe-duffy">Joe Duffy</a> as well — in their case, it was the opposite, though. Pulumi started with both open source and commercial product, but put all the emphasis on the open source project for the first two years. </p><p><br></p><p>Some of the interesting takeaways from this episode: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Even though there was no “GTM” focus on the open source project at the beginning, it still had business benefits to NetFoundry, because it made prospects more comfortable that they wouldn’t disappear overnight</li><li>How building an open source company is more difficult, because you end up supporting multiple products. But it also can build a flywheel of innovation that you just can’t get any other way. </li><li>Do you have to get product market fit twice? We had a long conversation about whether or not you have to get product market fit twice in open source companies. </li><li>We also talked about testing ideas and business models in the actual market, and how lessons learned in other businesses can influence how you approach you take even with open source companies. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! </p><p><br></p><p>PS: I’m changing my consulting offerings slightly, to focus on product strategy instead of positioning. And I’m looking for beta clients while I figure out exactly what the offering looks like. So if you’re an open source company and you’re looking for a clear product vision, a better understanding of how your product + project are differentiated and how to build that into your roadmap, <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/contact">reach out. </a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Tue, 27 Aug 2024 23:35:56 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/4039e447/dcfe147c.mp3" length="25704910" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2254</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on the Business of Open Source I had <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/gzino/">Galeal Zino</a>, CEO and founder of <a href="https://netfoundry.io">NetFoundry</a>, which creates <a href="https://openziti.io">OpenZiti. </a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>One of the most interesting things about the this conversation was the conversation about how to balance whether you’re promoting the product or the project. I talk to a lot of founders who assume that because you have both, you have to promote both. The same goes for SaaS and onprem options — some people think that just because you offer both, you have to build a go to market function for both. This topic came up in the conversation with <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/podcast/thoughtful-open-source-strategies-and-nailing-the-ossproduct-relationship-with-joe-duffy">Joe Duffy</a> as well — in their case, it was the opposite, though. Pulumi started with both open source and commercial product, but put all the emphasis on the open source project for the first two years. </p><p><br></p><p>Some of the interesting takeaways from this episode: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Even though there was no “GTM” focus on the open source project at the beginning, it still had business benefits to NetFoundry, because it made prospects more comfortable that they wouldn’t disappear overnight</li><li>How building an open source company is more difficult, because you end up supporting multiple products. But it also can build a flywheel of innovation that you just can’t get any other way. </li><li>Do you have to get product market fit twice? We had a long conversation about whether or not you have to get product market fit twice in open source companies. </li><li>We also talked about testing ideas and business models in the actual market, and how lessons learned in other businesses can influence how you approach you take even with open source companies. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Thank you for listening! </p><p><br></p><p>PS: I’m changing my consulting offerings slightly, to focus on product strategy instead of positioning. And I’m looking for beta clients while I figure out exactly what the offering looks like. So if you’re an open source company and you’re looking for a clear product vision, a better understanding of how your product + project are differentiated and how to build that into your roadmap, <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/contact">reach out. </a></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Complicated pricing and competition against the big players with Raphael Michel</title>
      <itunes:episode>221</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>221</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Complicated pricing and competition against the big players with Raphael Michel</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">78bce0db-e4d3-4a9b-8f01-0267e50a42f0</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/b85e18e1</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p><a href="https://pretix.eu/about/en/">Pretix</a> founder and CEO <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/raphael-michel/">Raphael Michel</a> has a completely different philosophy about what he is building compared to the big players in the event / ticketing platform space. We had a great conversation this week about Pretix, how Pretix is positioned compared to big players, and who care about the fact that Pretix is an open source company. </p><p><br></p><p>Some takeaways: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Pretix is a small company, but Raphael feels like it is able to have a much broader feature set than the big players like Eventbrite</li><li>I think of Pretix and Eventbrite as competitors, but Raphael was able to very easily tell me the difference between Pretix and Eventbrite, how that stems from a different philosophical stance about what they are building</li><li>It took five years for Pretix to hire one person, about 10 years after starting Pretix there’s about 20 people on the team</li><li>About 20% of people care about the fact that Pretix is open source, and 80% don’t care. But those who do care, care a lot. Figuring out who cares about open source and who doesn’t depends on the target market and can be trickier than you would expect. </li><li>Even though SaaS is the main business model for Pretix, they have an on-prem offer — and they have on-prem customer.</li><li>How growth is a huge challenge, both for the company growing and for the customers and partners, because it becomes more challenging to get support.</li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Notice how clear Raphael was about Pretix’s positioning, and how it was different from the big players in the event space. Are you that clear on how your software is different from competitors? Do you have a clear point of view, like Raphael, that sets you apart from the rest of the eocsystem? If not, you might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p><a href="https://pretix.eu/about/en/">Pretix</a> founder and CEO <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/raphael-michel/">Raphael Michel</a> has a completely different philosophy about what he is building compared to the big players in the event / ticketing platform space. We had a great conversation this week about Pretix, how Pretix is positioned compared to big players, and who care about the fact that Pretix is an open source company. </p><p><br></p><p>Some takeaways: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Pretix is a small company, but Raphael feels like it is able to have a much broader feature set than the big players like Eventbrite</li><li>I think of Pretix and Eventbrite as competitors, but Raphael was able to very easily tell me the difference between Pretix and Eventbrite, how that stems from a different philosophical stance about what they are building</li><li>It took five years for Pretix to hire one person, about 10 years after starting Pretix there’s about 20 people on the team</li><li>About 20% of people care about the fact that Pretix is open source, and 80% don’t care. But those who do care, care a lot. Figuring out who cares about open source and who doesn’t depends on the target market and can be trickier than you would expect. </li><li>Even though SaaS is the main business model for Pretix, they have an on-prem offer — and they have on-prem customer.</li><li>How growth is a huge challenge, both for the company growing and for the customers and partners, because it becomes more challenging to get support.</li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Notice how clear Raphael was about Pretix’s positioning, and how it was different from the big players in the event space. Are you that clear on how your software is different from competitors? Do you have a clear point of view, like Raphael, that sets you apart from the rest of the eocsystem? If not, you might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 21 Aug 2024 01:21:37 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/b85e18e1/fbf8face.mp3" length="23770769" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2408</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p><a href="https://pretix.eu/about/en/">Pretix</a> founder and CEO <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/raphael-michel/">Raphael Michel</a> has a completely different philosophy about what he is building compared to the big players in the event / ticketing platform space. We had a great conversation this week about Pretix, how Pretix is positioned compared to big players, and who care about the fact that Pretix is an open source company. </p><p><br></p><p>Some takeaways: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Pretix is a small company, but Raphael feels like it is able to have a much broader feature set than the big players like Eventbrite</li><li>I think of Pretix and Eventbrite as competitors, but Raphael was able to very easily tell me the difference between Pretix and Eventbrite, how that stems from a different philosophical stance about what they are building</li><li>It took five years for Pretix to hire one person, about 10 years after starting Pretix there’s about 20 people on the team</li><li>About 20% of people care about the fact that Pretix is open source, and 80% don’t care. But those who do care, care a lot. Figuring out who cares about open source and who doesn’t depends on the target market and can be trickier than you would expect. </li><li>Even though SaaS is the main business model for Pretix, they have an on-prem offer — and they have on-prem customer.</li><li>How growth is a huge challenge, both for the company growing and for the customers and partners, because it becomes more challenging to get support.</li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Notice how clear Raphael was about Pretix’s positioning, and how it was different from the big players in the event space. Are you that clear on how your software is different from competitors? Do you have a clear point of view, like Raphael, that sets you apart from the rest of the eocsystem? If not, you might want to <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me">work with me. </a></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Creating an ecosystem with Ashraf Samhouri </title>
      <itunes:episode>220</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>220</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Creating an ecosystem with Ashraf Samhouri </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">d9d6150f-56f4-4790-8dc0-c6b51a57907d</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/69fd59c7</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on the The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/ashrafsam/">Ashraf Samhouri</a>, the CEO and co-founder of <a href="https://www.activepieces.com">Activepieces. </a></p><p><br></p><p>Activepieces didn’t start as an open source company — and we started out the conversation by talking about why it was important to take an open source route because Activepieces is building an ecosystem. </p><p><br></p><p>Some other highlights from the episode: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Making software that is both for technical users (engineers love Activepieces!) and non-technical users (who also love Activepieces, because the UI is good)</li><li>Understanding the different user types, and marketing to them separately and specifically. </li><li>I challenged Ashraf to tell my why Activepieces is better than Zapier even without the open source piece — it was a challenge, but he made a good argument about having a simpler interface as well as that Activepieces allows you to run on-prem</li><li>We talked about product led growth and how there is an obvious starting point for promoting an open source project</li><li>Why lead qualification is so important</li></ul><p><br></p><p>If you’re the founder of an open source company and you’re struggling with your open source strategy, with your positioning of your product or project in the ecosystem or with communicating that value of your product and project, <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/">reach out </a>— that’s what I help companies with. </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on the The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/ashrafsam/">Ashraf Samhouri</a>, the CEO and co-founder of <a href="https://www.activepieces.com">Activepieces. </a></p><p><br></p><p>Activepieces didn’t start as an open source company — and we started out the conversation by talking about why it was important to take an open source route because Activepieces is building an ecosystem. </p><p><br></p><p>Some other highlights from the episode: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Making software that is both for technical users (engineers love Activepieces!) and non-technical users (who also love Activepieces, because the UI is good)</li><li>Understanding the different user types, and marketing to them separately and specifically. </li><li>I challenged Ashraf to tell my why Activepieces is better than Zapier even without the open source piece — it was a challenge, but he made a good argument about having a simpler interface as well as that Activepieces allows you to run on-prem</li><li>We talked about product led growth and how there is an obvious starting point for promoting an open source project</li><li>Why lead qualification is so important</li></ul><p><br></p><p>If you’re the founder of an open source company and you’re struggling with your open source strategy, with your positioning of your product or project in the ecosystem or with communicating that value of your product and project, <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/">reach out </a>— that’s what I help companies with. </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 14 Aug 2024 03:37:56 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/69fd59c7/4f580de2.mp3" length="28293204" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2116</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on the The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/ashrafsam/">Ashraf Samhouri</a>, the CEO and co-founder of <a href="https://www.activepieces.com">Activepieces. </a></p><p><br></p><p>Activepieces didn’t start as an open source company — and we started out the conversation by talking about why it was important to take an open source route because Activepieces is building an ecosystem. </p><p><br></p><p>Some other highlights from the episode: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Making software that is both for technical users (engineers love Activepieces!) and non-technical users (who also love Activepieces, because the UI is good)</li><li>Understanding the different user types, and marketing to them separately and specifically. </li><li>I challenged Ashraf to tell my why Activepieces is better than Zapier even without the open source piece — it was a challenge, but he made a good argument about having a simpler interface as well as that Activepieces allows you to run on-prem</li><li>We talked about product led growth and how there is an obvious starting point for promoting an open source project</li><li>Why lead qualification is so important</li></ul><p><br></p><p>If you’re the founder of an open source company and you’re struggling with your open source strategy, with your positioning of your product or project in the ecosystem or with communicating that value of your product and project, <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/">reach out </a>— that’s what I help companies with. </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Testing 17 different income streams with Per Ploug Krogslund</title>
      <itunes:episode>219</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>219</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Testing 17 different income streams with Per Ploug Krogslund</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">02b6de0d-a3b5-444a-9fa7-e64e094a6520</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/2a2f3924</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/per-ploug-krogslund/">Per Ploug Krogslund</a>, who is currently  senior director of developer programs at Docker, and who previously had a number of experiences at the intersection of open source and business. He founded and ran an open source company, <a href="https://umbraco.com">Umbraco</a>, for many years, and also led the Open Source Program Office at Spotify. </p><p><br></p><p>We had a wide-ranging conversation about open source businesses. Some of the topics we covered:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>What is the right size for an open source business? How do we make space in the conversation about open source businesses for the companies that will never become billion dollar unicorns? </li><li>The tension, both internal and external, around building open source software and building a company. We talked about this in the context of Umbraco and in the context of Docker — most fascinating to me was that Per felt like as soon as Umbraco had figured this out, it wasn’t as interesting for him to keep working on the company. </li><li>Why hasn’t there been an “enterprise Backstage” company to spin out of Spotify? </li><li>We also revisited the question of Microsoft and open source, because Umbraco is an open source company built on a Microsoft stack at a time when Microsoft was publicly hostile to open source. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>What should you take away from this conversation? </p><p><br></p><ul><li>There are plenty of opportunities to build small-to-medium size companies around open source</li><li>You might have to try a lot of different ways to monetize. Per said he felt like Umbraco tested 17 different income streams</li><li>There will be a tension, both internally and externally, about how much to open source. This is part of the game; you have to figure out how to manage this tension but might never feel like you get it perfect. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>If you’re listening and want help on your open source strategy, finding the right balance between open source and income streams and figuring out what those income streams should be, reach out to see if it might be a good fit for<a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me"> us to work together. </a></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/per-ploug-krogslund/">Per Ploug Krogslund</a>, who is currently  senior director of developer programs at Docker, and who previously had a number of experiences at the intersection of open source and business. He founded and ran an open source company, <a href="https://umbraco.com">Umbraco</a>, for many years, and also led the Open Source Program Office at Spotify. </p><p><br></p><p>We had a wide-ranging conversation about open source businesses. Some of the topics we covered:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>What is the right size for an open source business? How do we make space in the conversation about open source businesses for the companies that will never become billion dollar unicorns? </li><li>The tension, both internal and external, around building open source software and building a company. We talked about this in the context of Umbraco and in the context of Docker — most fascinating to me was that Per felt like as soon as Umbraco had figured this out, it wasn’t as interesting for him to keep working on the company. </li><li>Why hasn’t there been an “enterprise Backstage” company to spin out of Spotify? </li><li>We also revisited the question of Microsoft and open source, because Umbraco is an open source company built on a Microsoft stack at a time when Microsoft was publicly hostile to open source. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>What should you take away from this conversation? </p><p><br></p><ul><li>There are plenty of opportunities to build small-to-medium size companies around open source</li><li>You might have to try a lot of different ways to monetize. Per said he felt like Umbraco tested 17 different income streams</li><li>There will be a tension, both internally and externally, about how much to open source. This is part of the game; you have to figure out how to manage this tension but might never feel like you get it perfect. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>If you’re listening and want help on your open source strategy, finding the right balance between open source and income streams and figuring out what those income streams should be, reach out to see if it might be a good fit for<a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me"> us to work together. </a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 07 Aug 2024 00:00:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/2a2f3924/e527d736.mp3" length="31111776" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2563</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/per-ploug-krogslund/">Per Ploug Krogslund</a>, who is currently  senior director of developer programs at Docker, and who previously had a number of experiences at the intersection of open source and business. He founded and ran an open source company, <a href="https://umbraco.com">Umbraco</a>, for many years, and also led the Open Source Program Office at Spotify. </p><p><br></p><p>We had a wide-ranging conversation about open source businesses. Some of the topics we covered:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>What is the right size for an open source business? How do we make space in the conversation about open source businesses for the companies that will never become billion dollar unicorns? </li><li>The tension, both internal and external, around building open source software and building a company. We talked about this in the context of Umbraco and in the context of Docker — most fascinating to me was that Per felt like as soon as Umbraco had figured this out, it wasn’t as interesting for him to keep working on the company. </li><li>Why hasn’t there been an “enterprise Backstage” company to spin out of Spotify? </li><li>We also revisited the question of Microsoft and open source, because Umbraco is an open source company built on a Microsoft stack at a time when Microsoft was publicly hostile to open source. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>What should you take away from this conversation? </p><p><br></p><ul><li>There are plenty of opportunities to build small-to-medium size companies around open source</li><li>You might have to try a lot of different ways to monetize. Per said he felt like Umbraco tested 17 different income streams</li><li>There will be a tension, both internally and externally, about how much to open source. This is part of the game; you have to figure out how to manage this tension but might never feel like you get it perfect. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>If you’re listening and want help on your open source strategy, finding the right balance between open source and income streams and figuring out what those income streams should be, reach out to see if it might be a good fit for<a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/work-with-me"> us to work together. </a></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Open source as a privilege of successful businesses with Tom Wilkie </title>
      <itunes:episode>218</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>218</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Open source as a privilege of successful businesses with Tom Wilkie </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">d494d7ee-7d27-43c7-a3e7-5742297cde9d</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/5ca6d883</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I talked with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tomwilkie/">Tom Wilkie</a>, CTO at <a href="https://grafana.com/">Grafana Labs</a>. We talked about how he had a 10-month run building a startup before ultimately joining Grafana in an acquisition — why he thought that was the right move at the time and how it’s developed since then. But Tom has also had a long career in open source businesses, and we had plenty to talk about. </p><p><br></p><p>My favorite quote: “I’ve always seen open source as a privilege of successful businesses, so I want to be a successful business.” </p><p><br></p><p>At Kausal, Tom’s first startup, the focus was on financial sustainability from the beginning, and they had $100k in revenue in 10 months before the acquisition by Grafana. At Grafana Labs, everything is done with an eye on revenue — yes, there are tons of open source projects and tons of investment in those projects, but it has to be tied to revenue. </p><p><br></p><p>Some other things we talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Starting an open source company with the explicit goal of being a successful business, which is not what Tom sees all open source companies doing</li><li>Why you should probably start with open source code at the beginning if you intend to open source at all, because otherwise your code will get messy and you’ll be too embarrassed to open it</li><li>How integrations are the secret sauce that Grafana Labs monetizes — why that it, and how it allows so much code to stay open source without threatening Grafana’s financial success</li><li>Choosing a SaaS strategy versus choosing an enterprise on-prem strategy — and how you need to be aware of what your competitors are doing when choosing which is right for you. </li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Thanks for listening! I’m Emily Omier, a consultant who works with company on open source strategy related to positioning and product management. If you’re struggling with your strategy around open source — whether you’re unsure how to differentiate in the ecosystem or not sure what to open source — I can help. <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/">Learn more here.</a> </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I talked with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tomwilkie/">Tom Wilkie</a>, CTO at <a href="https://grafana.com/">Grafana Labs</a>. We talked about how he had a 10-month run building a startup before ultimately joining Grafana in an acquisition — why he thought that was the right move at the time and how it’s developed since then. But Tom has also had a long career in open source businesses, and we had plenty to talk about. </p><p><br></p><p>My favorite quote: “I’ve always seen open source as a privilege of successful businesses, so I want to be a successful business.” </p><p><br></p><p>At Kausal, Tom’s first startup, the focus was on financial sustainability from the beginning, and they had $100k in revenue in 10 months before the acquisition by Grafana. At Grafana Labs, everything is done with an eye on revenue — yes, there are tons of open source projects and tons of investment in those projects, but it has to be tied to revenue. </p><p><br></p><p>Some other things we talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Starting an open source company with the explicit goal of being a successful business, which is not what Tom sees all open source companies doing</li><li>Why you should probably start with open source code at the beginning if you intend to open source at all, because otherwise your code will get messy and you’ll be too embarrassed to open it</li><li>How integrations are the secret sauce that Grafana Labs monetizes — why that it, and how it allows so much code to stay open source without threatening Grafana’s financial success</li><li>Choosing a SaaS strategy versus choosing an enterprise on-prem strategy — and how you need to be aware of what your competitors are doing when choosing which is right for you. </li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Thanks for listening! I’m Emily Omier, a consultant who works with company on open source strategy related to positioning and product management. If you’re struggling with your strategy around open source — whether you’re unsure how to differentiate in the ecosystem or not sure what to open source — I can help. <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/">Learn more here.</a> </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 31 Jul 2024 00:00:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/5ca6d883/e570a37f.mp3" length="33864860" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2695</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I talked with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tomwilkie/">Tom Wilkie</a>, CTO at <a href="https://grafana.com/">Grafana Labs</a>. We talked about how he had a 10-month run building a startup before ultimately joining Grafana in an acquisition — why he thought that was the right move at the time and how it’s developed since then. But Tom has also had a long career in open source businesses, and we had plenty to talk about. </p><p><br></p><p>My favorite quote: “I’ve always seen open source as a privilege of successful businesses, so I want to be a successful business.” </p><p><br></p><p>At Kausal, Tom’s first startup, the focus was on financial sustainability from the beginning, and they had $100k in revenue in 10 months before the acquisition by Grafana. At Grafana Labs, everything is done with an eye on revenue — yes, there are tons of open source projects and tons of investment in those projects, but it has to be tied to revenue. </p><p><br></p><p>Some other things we talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Starting an open source company with the explicit goal of being a successful business, which is not what Tom sees all open source companies doing</li><li>Why you should probably start with open source code at the beginning if you intend to open source at all, because otherwise your code will get messy and you’ll be too embarrassed to open it</li><li>How integrations are the secret sauce that Grafana Labs monetizes — why that it, and how it allows so much code to stay open source without threatening Grafana’s financial success</li><li>Choosing a SaaS strategy versus choosing an enterprise on-prem strategy — and how you need to be aware of what your competitors are doing when choosing which is right for you. </li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Thanks for listening! I’m Emily Omier, a consultant who works with company on open source strategy related to positioning and product management. If you’re struggling with your strategy around open source — whether you’re unsure how to differentiate in the ecosystem or not sure what to open source — I can help. <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/">Learn more here.</a> </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Realistic pros and cons of working with foundations with Mike Milinkovich</title>
      <itunes:episode>217</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>217</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Realistic pros and cons of working with foundations with Mike Milinkovich</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">9767b70c-f892-484f-a6e3-1ec4345365df</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/8b26af21</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mikemilinkovich/">Mike Milinkovich</a>, executive director at the <a href="https://www.eclipse.org">Eclipse Foundation</a>. We had a wide-ranging conversation about the role of open source foundations in the open source ecosystem, especially as related to open source businesses. </p><p><br></p><p>The existence of open source foundations, and how companies decide to engage (or not) with them, is one of the aspects of open source businesses that is truly unique. Perhaps one of the key things to keep in mind from this conversation is that a foundation’s priority is project sustainability — and that is not always aligned with the goal of increasing profits for a company. On the other hand, there are a lot of advantages to contributing a project to a foundation. But founders should be aware of both the advantages and the constraints that working with a foundation entails. </p><p><br></p><p>Here are some of the things that stood out from our conversation: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Investors want a successful business more than they want a successful project; foundations’ priorities are opposite. </li><li>You have to take into account commercial/financial interests if you’re thinking about sustainability of a project, because you have to put food on the table; projects take time to maintain.</li><li>The only community you get around an open source project is the one you build — contributing a project to a foundation is not a magic community pill, and building a community takes work. </li><li>Running a foundation is not free, so if you’re going to contribute a project to a foundation seriously consider supporting that foundation financially.</li><li>Your customers should also become sponsors or members of the foundation(s) that your project(s) are hosted under, and you should actively encourage them to do so. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Listen to the entire episode for even more insights! </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mikemilinkovich/">Mike Milinkovich</a>, executive director at the <a href="https://www.eclipse.org">Eclipse Foundation</a>. We had a wide-ranging conversation about the role of open source foundations in the open source ecosystem, especially as related to open source businesses. </p><p><br></p><p>The existence of open source foundations, and how companies decide to engage (or not) with them, is one of the aspects of open source businesses that is truly unique. Perhaps one of the key things to keep in mind from this conversation is that a foundation’s priority is project sustainability — and that is not always aligned with the goal of increasing profits for a company. On the other hand, there are a lot of advantages to contributing a project to a foundation. But founders should be aware of both the advantages and the constraints that working with a foundation entails. </p><p><br></p><p>Here are some of the things that stood out from our conversation: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Investors want a successful business more than they want a successful project; foundations’ priorities are opposite. </li><li>You have to take into account commercial/financial interests if you’re thinking about sustainability of a project, because you have to put food on the table; projects take time to maintain.</li><li>The only community you get around an open source project is the one you build — contributing a project to a foundation is not a magic community pill, and building a community takes work. </li><li>Running a foundation is not free, so if you’re going to contribute a project to a foundation seriously consider supporting that foundation financially.</li><li>Your customers should also become sponsors or members of the foundation(s) that your project(s) are hosted under, and you should actively encourage them to do so. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Listen to the entire episode for even more insights! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 24 Jul 2024 05:46:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/8b26af21/1c2969b9.mp3" length="28781234" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2401</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mikemilinkovich/">Mike Milinkovich</a>, executive director at the <a href="https://www.eclipse.org">Eclipse Foundation</a>. We had a wide-ranging conversation about the role of open source foundations in the open source ecosystem, especially as related to open source businesses. </p><p><br></p><p>The existence of open source foundations, and how companies decide to engage (or not) with them, is one of the aspects of open source businesses that is truly unique. Perhaps one of the key things to keep in mind from this conversation is that a foundation’s priority is project sustainability — and that is not always aligned with the goal of increasing profits for a company. On the other hand, there are a lot of advantages to contributing a project to a foundation. But founders should be aware of both the advantages and the constraints that working with a foundation entails. </p><p><br></p><p>Here are some of the things that stood out from our conversation: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Investors want a successful business more than they want a successful project; foundations’ priorities are opposite. </li><li>You have to take into account commercial/financial interests if you’re thinking about sustainability of a project, because you have to put food on the table; projects take time to maintain.</li><li>The only community you get around an open source project is the one you build — contributing a project to a foundation is not a magic community pill, and building a community takes work. </li><li>Running a foundation is not free, so if you’re going to contribute a project to a foundation seriously consider supporting that foundation financially.</li><li>Your customers should also become sponsors or members of the foundation(s) that your project(s) are hosted under, and you should actively encourage them to do so. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Listen to the entire episode for even more insights! </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Controlling your own narrative in a hot market with Vinoth Chandar, founder of Onehouse</title>
      <itunes:episode>216</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>216</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Controlling your own narrative in a hot market with Vinoth Chandar, founder of Onehouse</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">2e3938ea-26d4-4f46-a5f5-4794ecd0670a</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/63d04597</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/vinothchandar/">Vinoth Chandar</a>, the founder and CEO of <a href="https://www.onehouse.ai">Onehouse</a> and the creator of <a href="https://hudi.apache.org">Apache Hudi. </a>We took a pretty deep dive into the relationship between Onehouse and Hudi, a topic that for me is at the heart of building a company on top of an open source project. In fact, whether or not Onehouse is an ‘open source company’ could be debatable; Hudi is an Apache project — it’s not owned by Onehouse in anyway — and Onehouse is not a ‘managed Hudi’ or ‘enterprise Hudi.’ Onehouse solves a problem that is fundamentally not the same problem that Hudi solves. </p><p><br></p><p>Here’s some other take aways from my conversation with Vinoth: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>There were both technical and business reasons for the relationship between Onehouse and Hudi; Hudi is a library, and you can’t offer a library as a service. Also, Onehouse does way, way more than Hudi.</li><li>Out of Hudi’s 16 project management committee members, 5 are from Onehouse. Which means both that Onehouse has a significant presence, but also that it can’t completely control the project. </li><li>The disadvantage of being in a ‘hot’ market, which means there are lots of big players trying to define the narrative around data lakehouses.</li><li>Starting Onehouse two and a half too late… or was it actually too early? We had a discussion about timing of starting the company, and Vinoth had arguments for why they started the company too late, but also why it might have been too early. </li><li>Are you giving away too much? The Onehouse board sometimes thinks so; but what Vinoth thinks was a mistake was not spending enough time educating both Hudi users and the larger community about just how much Hudi can do, instead of letting external players define the narrative about what Hudi does. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Check out the full episode for more wisdom from Vinoth! </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/vinothchandar/">Vinoth Chandar</a>, the founder and CEO of <a href="https://www.onehouse.ai">Onehouse</a> and the creator of <a href="https://hudi.apache.org">Apache Hudi. </a>We took a pretty deep dive into the relationship between Onehouse and Hudi, a topic that for me is at the heart of building a company on top of an open source project. In fact, whether or not Onehouse is an ‘open source company’ could be debatable; Hudi is an Apache project — it’s not owned by Onehouse in anyway — and Onehouse is not a ‘managed Hudi’ or ‘enterprise Hudi.’ Onehouse solves a problem that is fundamentally not the same problem that Hudi solves. </p><p><br></p><p>Here’s some other take aways from my conversation with Vinoth: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>There were both technical and business reasons for the relationship between Onehouse and Hudi; Hudi is a library, and you can’t offer a library as a service. Also, Onehouse does way, way more than Hudi.</li><li>Out of Hudi’s 16 project management committee members, 5 are from Onehouse. Which means both that Onehouse has a significant presence, but also that it can’t completely control the project. </li><li>The disadvantage of being in a ‘hot’ market, which means there are lots of big players trying to define the narrative around data lakehouses.</li><li>Starting Onehouse two and a half too late… or was it actually too early? We had a discussion about timing of starting the company, and Vinoth had arguments for why they started the company too late, but also why it might have been too early. </li><li>Are you giving away too much? The Onehouse board sometimes thinks so; but what Vinoth thinks was a mistake was not spending enough time educating both Hudi users and the larger community about just how much Hudi can do, instead of letting external players define the narrative about what Hudi does. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Check out the full episode for more wisdom from Vinoth! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 17 Jul 2024 02:20:05 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/63d04597/cf559711.mp3" length="26120543" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2526</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/vinothchandar/">Vinoth Chandar</a>, the founder and CEO of <a href="https://www.onehouse.ai">Onehouse</a> and the creator of <a href="https://hudi.apache.org">Apache Hudi. </a>We took a pretty deep dive into the relationship between Onehouse and Hudi, a topic that for me is at the heart of building a company on top of an open source project. In fact, whether or not Onehouse is an ‘open source company’ could be debatable; Hudi is an Apache project — it’s not owned by Onehouse in anyway — and Onehouse is not a ‘managed Hudi’ or ‘enterprise Hudi.’ Onehouse solves a problem that is fundamentally not the same problem that Hudi solves. </p><p><br></p><p>Here’s some other take aways from my conversation with Vinoth: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>There were both technical and business reasons for the relationship between Onehouse and Hudi; Hudi is a library, and you can’t offer a library as a service. Also, Onehouse does way, way more than Hudi.</li><li>Out of Hudi’s 16 project management committee members, 5 are from Onehouse. Which means both that Onehouse has a significant presence, but also that it can’t completely control the project. </li><li>The disadvantage of being in a ‘hot’ market, which means there are lots of big players trying to define the narrative around data lakehouses.</li><li>Starting Onehouse two and a half too late… or was it actually too early? We had a discussion about timing of starting the company, and Vinoth had arguments for why they started the company too late, but also why it might have been too early. </li><li>Are you giving away too much? The Onehouse board sometimes thinks so; but what Vinoth thinks was a mistake was not spending enough time educating both Hudi users and the larger community about just how much Hudi can do, instead of letting external players define the narrative about what Hudi does. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Check out the full episode for more wisdom from Vinoth! </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Thoughtful open source strategies and nailing the OSS/product relationship with Joe Duffy</title>
      <itunes:episode>215</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>215</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Thoughtful open source strategies and nailing the OSS/product relationship with Joe Duffy</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">cb961632-c811-4074-9841-89752caee423</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/60d95189</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/joejduffy/">Joe Duffy</a>, co-founder and CEO of <a href="https://www.pulumi.com">Pulumi.</a></p><p><br></p><p>We kicked off the conversation by talking about why Pulumi is open source in the first place — a mix of Joe’s long-standing interest in open source and a feeling like a developer tool like Pulumi just has to be open source in order to be taken seriously. But there was another reason, too: Pulumi’s founders weren’t just in it to build a company, they wanted to transform their industry and build a lasting community, and felt like open source was the best way to do that. </p><p><br></p><p>Lots of good take aways in this episode, like: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Learning from open source legends... uh, actually, learning from Microsoft. Microsoft is an open source giant, right? It’s interesting to hear Joe talk about learning about open source business strategy from Microsoft, precisely because Microsoft does not make money directly from VSCode, and also does not invest millions of dollars into R&amp;D just to be nice. “If you’re going to try to build a business with open source, you need to be very thoughtful and very strategic about it.” </li></ul><p><br></p><ul><li>The founding team at Pulumi <em>sort of</em> iterated on figuring out the business model, but to a large extent they just thought about it until they had an Aha! moment. On the other hand, they didn’t go public until they thought they had a winning strategy for building an open source business. </li></ul><p><br></p><ul><li>In the case of Pulumi, there’s a client side and a server side, so it made sense to build in a natural division between the two. This also made it so users were less likely to feel like Pulumi was holding back essential features in order to drive sales. </li></ul><p><br></p><ul><li>“The way I always view it is the thing you’re selling has to stand on its own” </li></ul><p><br></p><ul><li>Pulumi started a company, an open source project and a commercial product at the same time. Joe’s not sure he would recommend that approach, but it worked for them. “Figuring out the relationship was importnat, but actually the most important thing was to have a successful open source technology.” </li></ul><p><br></p><ul><li>One thing I wanted to pull out: Even though Pulumi launched the open source project and commercial product at the same time, they focused all their efforts in the first two to three years on getting the open source project off the ground. Many founders I talk to think that once the commercial product is out there, you are forced to build a GTM team… but you don’t have to. In fact, I think the strategy of having the possibility to buy the commercial product while focusing the company’s energy on the open source software in the beginning is brilliant. Result: “We were able to create this immense funnel of inbound commercial interest, even when that wasn’t really the top level focus.” </li></ul><p><br></p><ul><li>Even if you’re primarily a SaaS company, you can still offer an enterprise on-prem version for customers with hard requirements to host themselves, like air-gapped environments. Just because that option exists doesn’t mean you must build GTM motion for it, though. </li></ul><p><br></p><ul><li>The business value Pulumi gets from the open source project is: generating leads, building the company’s brand, and also recruiting top-level talent. </li></ul><p><br></p><ul><li>The fact that developers building the tool are so close to developers in the community is also a huge advantage. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Listen to the full episode, it has a huge amount of great insights!</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/joejduffy/">Joe Duffy</a>, co-founder and CEO of <a href="https://www.pulumi.com">Pulumi.</a></p><p><br></p><p>We kicked off the conversation by talking about why Pulumi is open source in the first place — a mix of Joe’s long-standing interest in open source and a feeling like a developer tool like Pulumi just has to be open source in order to be taken seriously. But there was another reason, too: Pulumi’s founders weren’t just in it to build a company, they wanted to transform their industry and build a lasting community, and felt like open source was the best way to do that. </p><p><br></p><p>Lots of good take aways in this episode, like: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Learning from open source legends... uh, actually, learning from Microsoft. Microsoft is an open source giant, right? It’s interesting to hear Joe talk about learning about open source business strategy from Microsoft, precisely because Microsoft does not make money directly from VSCode, and also does not invest millions of dollars into R&amp;D just to be nice. “If you’re going to try to build a business with open source, you need to be very thoughtful and very strategic about it.” </li></ul><p><br></p><ul><li>The founding team at Pulumi <em>sort of</em> iterated on figuring out the business model, but to a large extent they just thought about it until they had an Aha! moment. On the other hand, they didn’t go public until they thought they had a winning strategy for building an open source business. </li></ul><p><br></p><ul><li>In the case of Pulumi, there’s a client side and a server side, so it made sense to build in a natural division between the two. This also made it so users were less likely to feel like Pulumi was holding back essential features in order to drive sales. </li></ul><p><br></p><ul><li>“The way I always view it is the thing you’re selling has to stand on its own” </li></ul><p><br></p><ul><li>Pulumi started a company, an open source project and a commercial product at the same time. Joe’s not sure he would recommend that approach, but it worked for them. “Figuring out the relationship was importnat, but actually the most important thing was to have a successful open source technology.” </li></ul><p><br></p><ul><li>One thing I wanted to pull out: Even though Pulumi launched the open source project and commercial product at the same time, they focused all their efforts in the first two to three years on getting the open source project off the ground. Many founders I talk to think that once the commercial product is out there, you are forced to build a GTM team… but you don’t have to. In fact, I think the strategy of having the possibility to buy the commercial product while focusing the company’s energy on the open source software in the beginning is brilliant. Result: “We were able to create this immense funnel of inbound commercial interest, even when that wasn’t really the top level focus.” </li></ul><p><br></p><ul><li>Even if you’re primarily a SaaS company, you can still offer an enterprise on-prem version for customers with hard requirements to host themselves, like air-gapped environments. Just because that option exists doesn’t mean you must build GTM motion for it, though. </li></ul><p><br></p><ul><li>The business value Pulumi gets from the open source project is: generating leads, building the company’s brand, and also recruiting top-level talent. </li></ul><p><br></p><ul><li>The fact that developers building the tool are so close to developers in the community is also a huge advantage. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Listen to the full episode, it has a huge amount of great insights!</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 10 Jul 2024 00:00:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/60d95189/2cd0e89d.mp3" length="32673257" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2386</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/joejduffy/">Joe Duffy</a>, co-founder and CEO of <a href="https://www.pulumi.com">Pulumi.</a></p><p><br></p><p>We kicked off the conversation by talking about why Pulumi is open source in the first place — a mix of Joe’s long-standing interest in open source and a feeling like a developer tool like Pulumi just has to be open source in order to be taken seriously. But there was another reason, too: Pulumi’s founders weren’t just in it to build a company, they wanted to transform their industry and build a lasting community, and felt like open source was the best way to do that. </p><p><br></p><p>Lots of good take aways in this episode, like: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Learning from open source legends... uh, actually, learning from Microsoft. Microsoft is an open source giant, right? It’s interesting to hear Joe talk about learning about open source business strategy from Microsoft, precisely because Microsoft does not make money directly from VSCode, and also does not invest millions of dollars into R&amp;D just to be nice. “If you’re going to try to build a business with open source, you need to be very thoughtful and very strategic about it.” </li></ul><p><br></p><ul><li>The founding team at Pulumi <em>sort of</em> iterated on figuring out the business model, but to a large extent they just thought about it until they had an Aha! moment. On the other hand, they didn’t go public until they thought they had a winning strategy for building an open source business. </li></ul><p><br></p><ul><li>In the case of Pulumi, there’s a client side and a server side, so it made sense to build in a natural division between the two. This also made it so users were less likely to feel like Pulumi was holding back essential features in order to drive sales. </li></ul><p><br></p><ul><li>“The way I always view it is the thing you’re selling has to stand on its own” </li></ul><p><br></p><ul><li>Pulumi started a company, an open source project and a commercial product at the same time. Joe’s not sure he would recommend that approach, but it worked for them. “Figuring out the relationship was importnat, but actually the most important thing was to have a successful open source technology.” </li></ul><p><br></p><ul><li>One thing I wanted to pull out: Even though Pulumi launched the open source project and commercial product at the same time, they focused all their efforts in the first two to three years on getting the open source project off the ground. Many founders I talk to think that once the commercial product is out there, you are forced to build a GTM team… but you don’t have to. In fact, I think the strategy of having the possibility to buy the commercial product while focusing the company’s energy on the open source software in the beginning is brilliant. Result: “We were able to create this immense funnel of inbound commercial interest, even when that wasn’t really the top level focus.” </li></ul><p><br></p><ul><li>Even if you’re primarily a SaaS company, you can still offer an enterprise on-prem version for customers with hard requirements to host themselves, like air-gapped environments. Just because that option exists doesn’t mean you must build GTM motion for it, though. </li></ul><p><br></p><ul><li>The business value Pulumi gets from the open source project is: generating leads, building the company’s brand, and also recruiting top-level talent. </li></ul><p><br></p><ul><li>The fact that developers building the tool are so close to developers in the community is also a huge advantage. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Listen to the full episode, it has a huge amount of great insights!</p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to save your company with a license change with Tyler Jewell</title>
      <itunes:episode>214</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>214</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>How to save your company with a license change with Tyler Jewell</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">1a62ecd8-e4f4-4ffe-818e-41445ea1a13d</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/a149f2d0</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with Tyler Jewell — for the second time, now. Last time I spoke with Tyler, he was an investor at <a href="https://www.delltechnologiescapital.com/">Dell Technologies Capital</a>, he’s since taken over as CEO of<a href="https://www.lightbend.com/"> Lightbend. </a></p><p><br></p><p>We talked about a lot, but there was a definite theme to our conversation: License changes. Lightbend had been running an open core model, with the open core using a permissive Apache license. The company’s open source project, Akka, is massively popular. Lightben had about $13 million in ARR. But it was spending over $20 million per year, mostly of on R&amp;D and then GTM. And they had a churn problem; and the churn problem was that customers would stop buying Lightbend’s product, but they would stay with Akka, because it was good enough. </p><p><br></p><p>Why did this happen? The added proprietary features weren’t valuable enough for companies to pay for, especially in the face of budget cuts. And because the community was quite mature, it often started to duplicate these capabilities. And then the company faced a near-death experience in 2021. At the same time, usage of Akka was only growing, while the company was facing potential bankruptcy. Investors saw the potential and didn’t want to give up on the company, but it was clear to the board of directors that something needed to change — and that the thing that wasn’t working was the business model. </p><p><br></p><p>So they changed it. </p><p><br></p><p>There’s a couple things I hope people can take away from this. </p><p><br></p><ul><li>If the difference in value between your commercial product and your open source project isn’t big enough, you’ll have a rough time building a profitable company. </li><li>Sometimes the alternative to changing a license is bankruptcy; bankruptcy ultimately is not in anyone’s best interest, not the company, not the community’s, not the customer’s. </li><li>Offering a cloud option can work, but it’s an entirely different business, and trying to build it up while the company is in a crisis and expecting it to save the company is only realistic if there’s a good overlap between the market for the cloud offering and the open source project; in this case, there wasn’t good overlap. </li><li>The license options open to you depend on what the actual software does. And if you’re going to enforce the license at all, you need to have some visibility into where it’s installed, which, again, can be challenging depending on what kind of software you’re dealing with. </li><li>Changing an open source project’s license is not a trivial undertaking. You have to hold copyright to the code, and you better hope that you’re structured your contributor license agreements correctly. You also have to do the change on a new release — and it’s more likely to work if the new version is different enough from the previous one that people really want to update. </li><li>If you’re going to make a license change, you might get backlash, but if being transparent and honest can go a long way towards minimizing the PR disaster. </li><li>So what happened? Churn went down, revenue is nearly doubled and Tyler projects that this year will be cashflow positive. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>This summary doesn’t do it full justice, though, so check out the full episode!! </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with Tyler Jewell — for the second time, now. Last time I spoke with Tyler, he was an investor at <a href="https://www.delltechnologiescapital.com/">Dell Technologies Capital</a>, he’s since taken over as CEO of<a href="https://www.lightbend.com/"> Lightbend. </a></p><p><br></p><p>We talked about a lot, but there was a definite theme to our conversation: License changes. Lightbend had been running an open core model, with the open core using a permissive Apache license. The company’s open source project, Akka, is massively popular. Lightben had about $13 million in ARR. But it was spending over $20 million per year, mostly of on R&amp;D and then GTM. And they had a churn problem; and the churn problem was that customers would stop buying Lightbend’s product, but they would stay with Akka, because it was good enough. </p><p><br></p><p>Why did this happen? The added proprietary features weren’t valuable enough for companies to pay for, especially in the face of budget cuts. And because the community was quite mature, it often started to duplicate these capabilities. And then the company faced a near-death experience in 2021. At the same time, usage of Akka was only growing, while the company was facing potential bankruptcy. Investors saw the potential and didn’t want to give up on the company, but it was clear to the board of directors that something needed to change — and that the thing that wasn’t working was the business model. </p><p><br></p><p>So they changed it. </p><p><br></p><p>There’s a couple things I hope people can take away from this. </p><p><br></p><ul><li>If the difference in value between your commercial product and your open source project isn’t big enough, you’ll have a rough time building a profitable company. </li><li>Sometimes the alternative to changing a license is bankruptcy; bankruptcy ultimately is not in anyone’s best interest, not the company, not the community’s, not the customer’s. </li><li>Offering a cloud option can work, but it’s an entirely different business, and trying to build it up while the company is in a crisis and expecting it to save the company is only realistic if there’s a good overlap between the market for the cloud offering and the open source project; in this case, there wasn’t good overlap. </li><li>The license options open to you depend on what the actual software does. And if you’re going to enforce the license at all, you need to have some visibility into where it’s installed, which, again, can be challenging depending on what kind of software you’re dealing with. </li><li>Changing an open source project’s license is not a trivial undertaking. You have to hold copyright to the code, and you better hope that you’re structured your contributor license agreements correctly. You also have to do the change on a new release — and it’s more likely to work if the new version is different enough from the previous one that people really want to update. </li><li>If you’re going to make a license change, you might get backlash, but if being transparent and honest can go a long way towards minimizing the PR disaster. </li><li>So what happened? Churn went down, revenue is nearly doubled and Tyler projects that this year will be cashflow positive. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>This summary doesn’t do it full justice, though, so check out the full episode!! </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 03 Jul 2024 01:39:29 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/a149f2d0/82297b5a.mp3" length="38962943" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>3133</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with Tyler Jewell — for the second time, now. Last time I spoke with Tyler, he was an investor at <a href="https://www.delltechnologiescapital.com/">Dell Technologies Capital</a>, he’s since taken over as CEO of<a href="https://www.lightbend.com/"> Lightbend. </a></p><p><br></p><p>We talked about a lot, but there was a definite theme to our conversation: License changes. Lightbend had been running an open core model, with the open core using a permissive Apache license. The company’s open source project, Akka, is massively popular. Lightben had about $13 million in ARR. But it was spending over $20 million per year, mostly of on R&amp;D and then GTM. And they had a churn problem; and the churn problem was that customers would stop buying Lightbend’s product, but they would stay with Akka, because it was good enough. </p><p><br></p><p>Why did this happen? The added proprietary features weren’t valuable enough for companies to pay for, especially in the face of budget cuts. And because the community was quite mature, it often started to duplicate these capabilities. And then the company faced a near-death experience in 2021. At the same time, usage of Akka was only growing, while the company was facing potential bankruptcy. Investors saw the potential and didn’t want to give up on the company, but it was clear to the board of directors that something needed to change — and that the thing that wasn’t working was the business model. </p><p><br></p><p>So they changed it. </p><p><br></p><p>There’s a couple things I hope people can take away from this. </p><p><br></p><ul><li>If the difference in value between your commercial product and your open source project isn’t big enough, you’ll have a rough time building a profitable company. </li><li>Sometimes the alternative to changing a license is bankruptcy; bankruptcy ultimately is not in anyone’s best interest, not the company, not the community’s, not the customer’s. </li><li>Offering a cloud option can work, but it’s an entirely different business, and trying to build it up while the company is in a crisis and expecting it to save the company is only realistic if there’s a good overlap between the market for the cloud offering and the open source project; in this case, there wasn’t good overlap. </li><li>The license options open to you depend on what the actual software does. And if you’re going to enforce the license at all, you need to have some visibility into where it’s installed, which, again, can be challenging depending on what kind of software you’re dealing with. </li><li>Changing an open source project’s license is not a trivial undertaking. You have to hold copyright to the code, and you better hope that you’re structured your contributor license agreements correctly. You also have to do the change on a new release — and it’s more likely to work if the new version is different enough from the previous one that people really want to update. </li><li>If you’re going to make a license change, you might get backlash, but if being transparent and honest can go a long way towards minimizing the PR disaster. </li><li>So what happened? Churn went down, revenue is nearly doubled and Tyler projects that this year will be cashflow positive. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>This summary doesn’t do it full justice, though, so check out the full episode!! </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Complementary Projects and Products with Justin Cormack</title>
      <itunes:episode>213</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>213</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Complementary Projects and Products with Justin Cormack</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">bf4eb4e6-cd80-4edb-bb87-63fb817caff4</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/419cd5a5</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I have an episode I recorded on site at AI-Dev in Paris with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/justincormack/">Justin Cormack</a>, CTO of <a href="https://www.docker.com">Docker</a>. We finally get around to talking about AI at the very end of the episode, but otherwise we talked business and open source and how Docker manages both. Here’s some of the take aways from the episode:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>There are upsides and downsides to being an open source company, and you should absolutely make sure you are leveraging the upsides. Because they don’t necessarily translate into business value automatically, you have to be intentional to make that happen. </li><li>It’s often a good idea for open source businesses to create a commercial product that is complementary to their project, so that if usage of one goes up usage / adoption of the other goes up, too. This is in contrast to an open core model, where the open source project can easily end up being crippled so that people are incentivized to buy the closed source license. </li><li>If you want to get to $100million ARR, you can either sell $10 subscriptions to 10 million people or you can sell $100,000 subscriptions to 1,000 people. Both get you to the same revenue number, but the business model is very different. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>We also talked AI and open source, given the event we were at. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I have an episode I recorded on site at AI-Dev in Paris with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/justincormack/">Justin Cormack</a>, CTO of <a href="https://www.docker.com">Docker</a>. We finally get around to talking about AI at the very end of the episode, but otherwise we talked business and open source and how Docker manages both. Here’s some of the take aways from the episode:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>There are upsides and downsides to being an open source company, and you should absolutely make sure you are leveraging the upsides. Because they don’t necessarily translate into business value automatically, you have to be intentional to make that happen. </li><li>It’s often a good idea for open source businesses to create a commercial product that is complementary to their project, so that if usage of one goes up usage / adoption of the other goes up, too. This is in contrast to an open core model, where the open source project can easily end up being crippled so that people are incentivized to buy the closed source license. </li><li>If you want to get to $100million ARR, you can either sell $10 subscriptions to 10 million people or you can sell $100,000 subscriptions to 1,000 people. Both get you to the same revenue number, but the business model is very different. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>We also talked AI and open source, given the event we were at. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 26 Jun 2024 00:00:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/419cd5a5/9ec0dfa2.mp3" length="41168116" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2914</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I have an episode I recorded on site at AI-Dev in Paris with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/justincormack/">Justin Cormack</a>, CTO of <a href="https://www.docker.com">Docker</a>. We finally get around to talking about AI at the very end of the episode, but otherwise we talked business and open source and how Docker manages both. Here’s some of the take aways from the episode:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>There are upsides and downsides to being an open source company, and you should absolutely make sure you are leveraging the upsides. Because they don’t necessarily translate into business value automatically, you have to be intentional to make that happen. </li><li>It’s often a good idea for open source businesses to create a commercial product that is complementary to their project, so that if usage of one goes up usage / adoption of the other goes up, too. This is in contrast to an open core model, where the open source project can easily end up being crippled so that people are incentivized to buy the closed source license. </li><li>If you want to get to $100million ARR, you can either sell $10 subscriptions to 10 million people or you can sell $100,000 subscriptions to 1,000 people. Both get you to the same revenue number, but the business model is very different. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>We also talked AI and open source, given the event we were at. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Excellent Open Source User Experiences with Karthik Ranganathan</title>
      <itunes:episode>212</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>212</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Excellent Open Source User Experiences with Karthik Ranganathan</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">54482909-34b8-4f65-a98c-ababaea5dc52</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/307f0b55</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/kranganathan/">Karthik Ranganathan</a>, founder and co-CEO of <a href="https://www.yugabyte.com">Yugabyte.</a> This is the second time Karthik has been on the podcast, but since three years had passed I thought it’d be a good idea to catch up and see what’s changed at Yugabyte and how his perspective on the open source commercial ecosystem has changed. </p><p><br></p><p>Some really cool topics came up in this conversation. For example: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why engineers don’t choose databases based on features (and how this is related to why so many databases are open source<br> <ul><li>This was super interesting, because I’ve seen a lot of conversations in the developer tools space about how developers choose their tools based on the features the tool has, and you should therefore market/sell based on features (unlike marketing/selling to any other market). I think this is bullshit and based on a misunderstanding about the difference between a feature and a benefit. Going back to the database market, we talked about how ultimately database users need to develop an intuition around when a particular database is the best choice, and that it takes time to do so. </li></ul></li><li>Choosing a database is about choosing what to prioritize for a particular application, and in a way Yugabyte presents its users/customers with a way to prioritize what’s important, simplicity or flexibility. Companies that want more simplicity get something that’s fully managed (and pay for it) companies that prioritize flexibility above all else are a better fit for the open source. </li><li>The database is the same, regardless of whether someone is using the pure open source version or the fully managed service — and it’s important to Yugabyte that everyone gets the same core functionality. </li><li>How the role of open source and it’s value for Yugabyte as a company has changed as the company has matured, and in particular how it’s a way for people to try out Yugabyte first, and then reach out. </li><li>Why Yugabyte has invested in making sure the open source user experience is excellent — because they want users to get value out of the project immediately; no one has time to spend four days figuring out how a new database works. This is part of why they think the open source project has become a lead engine. </li><li>The importance of messaging in helping people understand quickly what to expect from the project and minimizing the amount of time it takes for them to get value out of it. </li><li>Whether or not Yugabyte was a bit early to the cloud native party, and the pros and cons of being early. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>And much more! </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/kranganathan/">Karthik Ranganathan</a>, founder and co-CEO of <a href="https://www.yugabyte.com">Yugabyte.</a> This is the second time Karthik has been on the podcast, but since three years had passed I thought it’d be a good idea to catch up and see what’s changed at Yugabyte and how his perspective on the open source commercial ecosystem has changed. </p><p><br></p><p>Some really cool topics came up in this conversation. For example: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why engineers don’t choose databases based on features (and how this is related to why so many databases are open source<br> <ul><li>This was super interesting, because I’ve seen a lot of conversations in the developer tools space about how developers choose their tools based on the features the tool has, and you should therefore market/sell based on features (unlike marketing/selling to any other market). I think this is bullshit and based on a misunderstanding about the difference between a feature and a benefit. Going back to the database market, we talked about how ultimately database users need to develop an intuition around when a particular database is the best choice, and that it takes time to do so. </li></ul></li><li>Choosing a database is about choosing what to prioritize for a particular application, and in a way Yugabyte presents its users/customers with a way to prioritize what’s important, simplicity or flexibility. Companies that want more simplicity get something that’s fully managed (and pay for it) companies that prioritize flexibility above all else are a better fit for the open source. </li><li>The database is the same, regardless of whether someone is using the pure open source version or the fully managed service — and it’s important to Yugabyte that everyone gets the same core functionality. </li><li>How the role of open source and it’s value for Yugabyte as a company has changed as the company has matured, and in particular how it’s a way for people to try out Yugabyte first, and then reach out. </li><li>Why Yugabyte has invested in making sure the open source user experience is excellent — because they want users to get value out of the project immediately; no one has time to spend four days figuring out how a new database works. This is part of why they think the open source project has become a lead engine. </li><li>The importance of messaging in helping people understand quickly what to expect from the project and minimizing the amount of time it takes for them to get value out of it. </li><li>Whether or not Yugabyte was a bit early to the cloud native party, and the pros and cons of being early. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>And much more! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 19 Jun 2024 02:41:17 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/307f0b55/e37059a1.mp3" length="37413630" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2853</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/kranganathan/">Karthik Ranganathan</a>, founder and co-CEO of <a href="https://www.yugabyte.com">Yugabyte.</a> This is the second time Karthik has been on the podcast, but since three years had passed I thought it’d be a good idea to catch up and see what’s changed at Yugabyte and how his perspective on the open source commercial ecosystem has changed. </p><p><br></p><p>Some really cool topics came up in this conversation. For example: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why engineers don’t choose databases based on features (and how this is related to why so many databases are open source<br> <ul><li>This was super interesting, because I’ve seen a lot of conversations in the developer tools space about how developers choose their tools based on the features the tool has, and you should therefore market/sell based on features (unlike marketing/selling to any other market). I think this is bullshit and based on a misunderstanding about the difference between a feature and a benefit. Going back to the database market, we talked about how ultimately database users need to develop an intuition around when a particular database is the best choice, and that it takes time to do so. </li></ul></li><li>Choosing a database is about choosing what to prioritize for a particular application, and in a way Yugabyte presents its users/customers with a way to prioritize what’s important, simplicity or flexibility. Companies that want more simplicity get something that’s fully managed (and pay for it) companies that prioritize flexibility above all else are a better fit for the open source. </li><li>The database is the same, regardless of whether someone is using the pure open source version or the fully managed service — and it’s important to Yugabyte that everyone gets the same core functionality. </li><li>How the role of open source and it’s value for Yugabyte as a company has changed as the company has matured, and in particular how it’s a way for people to try out Yugabyte first, and then reach out. </li><li>Why Yugabyte has invested in making sure the open source user experience is excellent — because they want users to get value out of the project immediately; no one has time to spend four days figuring out how a new database works. This is part of why they think the open source project has become a lead engine. </li><li>The importance of messaging in helping people understand quickly what to expect from the project and minimizing the amount of time it takes for them to get value out of it. </li><li>Whether or not Yugabyte was a bit early to the cloud native party, and the pros and cons of being early. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>And much more! </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Ensuring the Difference in Value between Project and Product is Big Enough with André Eriksson </title>
      <itunes:episode>211</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>211</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Ensuring the Difference in Value between Project and Product is Big Enough with André Eriksson </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">4a342b34-b80c-4843-a34c-a70038c80bf3</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/29d61d82</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/erikssonandre/">André Eriksson</a>, founder and CEO at <a href="https://encore.dev">Encore. </a>We talked about how open source develops trust, something I also discussed in the episode I recorded with <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/podcast/using-open-source-for-trust-not-growth-with-reshma-khilnani">Reshma Khilnani</a>. For Encore, it’s subtly different, though. In the case of Medplum, open source is a differentiator in a market that’s used to black boxes, for Encore, open source is tablestakes in a market that won’t adopt a completely proprietary software. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>We talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Launching with a cloud platform from day one — not the open source project. </li><li>On the other hand, open source is also important because often users and customers have to modify things to get it exactly right; the flexibility is a critical part of the platform’s draw. </li><li>The challenge getting contributions, which André doesn’t find surprising, especially because it’s a project/product that solves problems for companies, not hobby projects. </li><li>Having one brand for the open source project and the product, which can make it hard to communicate the difference between them. </li><li>Ensuring that the open source project and all of the features in it are useable without being dependent on the commercial product — which is not always easy. Finding the right balance between avoiding crippleware and still having enough of a difference in value between the open source and the commercial product to sell it is a core challenge. </li><li>The biggest risks from open source, which André kicked off by talking about the difference between what you perceive as a big risk and what objectively is — this is a distinction that I think is super important to understand in life and business. Ultimately he settled on a big risk just being that you build something that isn’t valuable or differentiated enough for people to pay for. </li><li>Communicating the value proposition clearly is their top challenge at the moment. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Check out the full episode for some serious insights into what’s working and what’s a struggle at Encore. </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/erikssonandre/">André Eriksson</a>, founder and CEO at <a href="https://encore.dev">Encore. </a>We talked about how open source develops trust, something I also discussed in the episode I recorded with <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/podcast/using-open-source-for-trust-not-growth-with-reshma-khilnani">Reshma Khilnani</a>. For Encore, it’s subtly different, though. In the case of Medplum, open source is a differentiator in a market that’s used to black boxes, for Encore, open source is tablestakes in a market that won’t adopt a completely proprietary software. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>We talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Launching with a cloud platform from day one — not the open source project. </li><li>On the other hand, open source is also important because often users and customers have to modify things to get it exactly right; the flexibility is a critical part of the platform’s draw. </li><li>The challenge getting contributions, which André doesn’t find surprising, especially because it’s a project/product that solves problems for companies, not hobby projects. </li><li>Having one brand for the open source project and the product, which can make it hard to communicate the difference between them. </li><li>Ensuring that the open source project and all of the features in it are useable without being dependent on the commercial product — which is not always easy. Finding the right balance between avoiding crippleware and still having enough of a difference in value between the open source and the commercial product to sell it is a core challenge. </li><li>The biggest risks from open source, which André kicked off by talking about the difference between what you perceive as a big risk and what objectively is — this is a distinction that I think is super important to understand in life and business. Ultimately he settled on a big risk just being that you build something that isn’t valuable or differentiated enough for people to pay for. </li><li>Communicating the value proposition clearly is their top challenge at the moment. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Check out the full episode for some serious insights into what’s working and what’s a struggle at Encore. </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 12 Jun 2024 01:51:55 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/29d61d82/6b029eaf.mp3" length="33407713" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2498</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/erikssonandre/">André Eriksson</a>, founder and CEO at <a href="https://encore.dev">Encore. </a>We talked about how open source develops trust, something I also discussed in the episode I recorded with <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/podcast/using-open-source-for-trust-not-growth-with-reshma-khilnani">Reshma Khilnani</a>. For Encore, it’s subtly different, though. In the case of Medplum, open source is a differentiator in a market that’s used to black boxes, for Encore, open source is tablestakes in a market that won’t adopt a completely proprietary software. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>We talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Launching with a cloud platform from day one — not the open source project. </li><li>On the other hand, open source is also important because often users and customers have to modify things to get it exactly right; the flexibility is a critical part of the platform’s draw. </li><li>The challenge getting contributions, which André doesn’t find surprising, especially because it’s a project/product that solves problems for companies, not hobby projects. </li><li>Having one brand for the open source project and the product, which can make it hard to communicate the difference between them. </li><li>Ensuring that the open source project and all of the features in it are useable without being dependent on the commercial product — which is not always easy. Finding the right balance between avoiding crippleware and still having enough of a difference in value between the open source and the commercial product to sell it is a core challenge. </li><li>The biggest risks from open source, which André kicked off by talking about the difference between what you perceive as a big risk and what objectively is — this is a distinction that I think is super important to understand in life and business. Ultimately he settled on a big risk just being that you build something that isn’t valuable or differentiated enough for people to pay for. </li><li>Communicating the value proposition clearly is their top challenge at the moment. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Check out the full episode for some serious insights into what’s working and what’s a struggle at Encore. </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Open Source Internal Startups with Saurav Pathak</title>
      <itunes:episode>210</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>210</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Open Source Internal Startups with Saurav Pathak</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">eebc6a5e-ae9a-4c4f-98de-d8e2fd1bb279</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/7080cd1e</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/saurav-pathak/">Saurav Pathak</a>, chief product officier at <a href="https://bagisto.com/en/">Bagisto</a>, about a very different kind of business relationship with open source — and open source software incubated in a larger company. There were tons of interesting nuggets in this episode, but some things I wanted to call out are:</p><p><br></p><p><br></p><ul><li>For open source projects, the tech stack that the project is built with can in fact be a differentiating feature. This is unique to open source (and has come up before, both in my consulting work and in podcast interviews). Users might want to choose a project because it’s written in the language they are familiar with, even if the functionality is exactly the same as a competing project</li><li>The difference in needs between the merchants (who just want to get their ecommerce store up and running) and developers building ecommerce platforms, who was worried about being able to build extensions </li><li>How an open source company like Bagisto fits into the larger commercial strategy for the parent company. </li><li>Build a community of developers versus building a community of merchants, and why both are important for a project like Bagisto</li><li>How Saurav manages the tension between adding features that people want and not building an overly bloated product, including how to manage this tension when someone wants to contribute a feature that the core team may or may not want. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>It’s always interesting to me to see different models for open source companies, and Bagisto certainly is a different model. Especially after last week’s episode with <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/podcast/improving-your-value-prop-exponentially-with-tanmai-gopal">Tanmai Gopal</a>, which had a much more classic story. </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/saurav-pathak/">Saurav Pathak</a>, chief product officier at <a href="https://bagisto.com/en/">Bagisto</a>, about a very different kind of business relationship with open source — and open source software incubated in a larger company. There were tons of interesting nuggets in this episode, but some things I wanted to call out are:</p><p><br></p><p><br></p><ul><li>For open source projects, the tech stack that the project is built with can in fact be a differentiating feature. This is unique to open source (and has come up before, both in my consulting work and in podcast interviews). Users might want to choose a project because it’s written in the language they are familiar with, even if the functionality is exactly the same as a competing project</li><li>The difference in needs between the merchants (who just want to get their ecommerce store up and running) and developers building ecommerce platforms, who was worried about being able to build extensions </li><li>How an open source company like Bagisto fits into the larger commercial strategy for the parent company. </li><li>Build a community of developers versus building a community of merchants, and why both are important for a project like Bagisto</li><li>How Saurav manages the tension between adding features that people want and not building an overly bloated product, including how to manage this tension when someone wants to contribute a feature that the core team may or may not want. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>It’s always interesting to me to see different models for open source companies, and Bagisto certainly is a different model. Especially after last week’s episode with <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/podcast/improving-your-value-prop-exponentially-with-tanmai-gopal">Tanmai Gopal</a>, which had a much more classic story. </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 05 Jun 2024 00:00:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/7080cd1e/a60cade7.mp3" length="27752316" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2280</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/saurav-pathak/">Saurav Pathak</a>, chief product officier at <a href="https://bagisto.com/en/">Bagisto</a>, about a very different kind of business relationship with open source — and open source software incubated in a larger company. There were tons of interesting nuggets in this episode, but some things I wanted to call out are:</p><p><br></p><p><br></p><ul><li>For open source projects, the tech stack that the project is built with can in fact be a differentiating feature. This is unique to open source (and has come up before, both in my consulting work and in podcast interviews). Users might want to choose a project because it’s written in the language they are familiar with, even if the functionality is exactly the same as a competing project</li><li>The difference in needs between the merchants (who just want to get their ecommerce store up and running) and developers building ecommerce platforms, who was worried about being able to build extensions </li><li>How an open source company like Bagisto fits into the larger commercial strategy for the parent company. </li><li>Build a community of developers versus building a community of merchants, and why both are important for a project like Bagisto</li><li>How Saurav manages the tension between adding features that people want and not building an overly bloated product, including how to manage this tension when someone wants to contribute a feature that the core team may or may not want. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>It’s always interesting to me to see different models for open source companies, and Bagisto certainly is a different model. Especially after last week’s episode with <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/podcast/improving-your-value-prop-exponentially-with-tanmai-gopal">Tanmai Gopal</a>, which had a much more classic story. </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Improving Your Value Prop Exponentially with Tanmai Gopal </title>
      <itunes:episode>209</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>209</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Improving Your Value Prop Exponentially with Tanmai Gopal </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">abd4cfc3-82bf-4f57-8d9f-0486d2d3d72b</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/881a0f26</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tanmaig/">Tanmai Gopal,</a> co-founder of <a href="https://hasura.io">Hasura.</a> We talked about how Hasura grew out of Tanmai’s previous company, which was a consulting company. I like to call out examples of really novel open source businesses, but in fact the thing that stuck with me from the conversation with Tanmai was that Hasura is going the ‘classic’ route… and it’s working. </p><p><br></p><p>What does the ‘classic’ route look like to me? It’s an open source project that targets individual developers and a commercial product that targets teams and teams of teams. It’s having additional network security features in the commercial options. It’s using the open source project as a growth engine and getting leads from companies that depend on it. It’s also using the open source project as a way to get feedback on the product roadmap. </p><p><br></p><p>Here were some of the takeaways from our conversation: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>It’s a lot easier to sell a product if your customers see it as mission-critical. One of Hasura’s first inbound leads was from a Fortune 100 company who said they’d be unable to ship any software for two weeks if Hasura went down — and so they wanted to make sure the team behind Hasura was serious and also wanted to pay them to make sure they didn’t go down. </li><li>For Hasura, the first clear difference between open source project and commercial product was that the open source project is for individual developers but the commercial product is aimed at the team level.</li><li>Even for the cloud hosted edition, the product with ‘developer-level’ focus is free. In fact, if you go to the Hasura CE product page, the CTA asks you to use for free on the cloud. Tanmai said this is an intentional choice because they want to reduce friction for people to test it out, and the fastest way to get up and running will always be to use the cloud version, not the open source. </li><li>We talked a lot about the control plane versus the data plane — all the editions have the same functionality at the data plane level. But the control plane, where people are collaborating — that is commercial only. </li><li>The open source project can be a great way to stay close to your users / customers and use their feedback to constantly refine your product roadmap. In fact, this can be a main advantage of being open source, because it is the only way you stay close to your users and get their feedback — otherwise you would often only talk to the buyer, who is likely an exec with a big budget but not using the technology on a daily basis. </li><li>This doesn’t mean open source doesn’t create liabilities for Hasura — it does, and those liabilities have to be managed. And Tanmai is frank about the fact that creating enough value on top of the open source project without crippling the growth engine is a tough balancing act. </li><li>Pay attention to what your best customers are doing! That has informed some really important product decisions for Hasura — and it took them way to long to figure out the unique way their happiest customers were getting more value out of Hasura than other users. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Definitely check out the full episode for more insights from Tanmai! </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tanmaig/">Tanmai Gopal,</a> co-founder of <a href="https://hasura.io">Hasura.</a> We talked about how Hasura grew out of Tanmai’s previous company, which was a consulting company. I like to call out examples of really novel open source businesses, but in fact the thing that stuck with me from the conversation with Tanmai was that Hasura is going the ‘classic’ route… and it’s working. </p><p><br></p><p>What does the ‘classic’ route look like to me? It’s an open source project that targets individual developers and a commercial product that targets teams and teams of teams. It’s having additional network security features in the commercial options. It’s using the open source project as a growth engine and getting leads from companies that depend on it. It’s also using the open source project as a way to get feedback on the product roadmap. </p><p><br></p><p>Here were some of the takeaways from our conversation: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>It’s a lot easier to sell a product if your customers see it as mission-critical. One of Hasura’s first inbound leads was from a Fortune 100 company who said they’d be unable to ship any software for two weeks if Hasura went down — and so they wanted to make sure the team behind Hasura was serious and also wanted to pay them to make sure they didn’t go down. </li><li>For Hasura, the first clear difference between open source project and commercial product was that the open source project is for individual developers but the commercial product is aimed at the team level.</li><li>Even for the cloud hosted edition, the product with ‘developer-level’ focus is free. In fact, if you go to the Hasura CE product page, the CTA asks you to use for free on the cloud. Tanmai said this is an intentional choice because they want to reduce friction for people to test it out, and the fastest way to get up and running will always be to use the cloud version, not the open source. </li><li>We talked a lot about the control plane versus the data plane — all the editions have the same functionality at the data plane level. But the control plane, where people are collaborating — that is commercial only. </li><li>The open source project can be a great way to stay close to your users / customers and use their feedback to constantly refine your product roadmap. In fact, this can be a main advantage of being open source, because it is the only way you stay close to your users and get their feedback — otherwise you would often only talk to the buyer, who is likely an exec with a big budget but not using the technology on a daily basis. </li><li>This doesn’t mean open source doesn’t create liabilities for Hasura — it does, and those liabilities have to be managed. And Tanmai is frank about the fact that creating enough value on top of the open source project without crippling the growth engine is a tough balancing act. </li><li>Pay attention to what your best customers are doing! That has informed some really important product decisions for Hasura — and it took them way to long to figure out the unique way their happiest customers were getting more value out of Hasura than other users. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Definitely check out the full episode for more insights from Tanmai! </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 29 May 2024 00:00:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/881a0f26/98ae4db2.mp3" length="35123279" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2707</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tanmaig/">Tanmai Gopal,</a> co-founder of <a href="https://hasura.io">Hasura.</a> We talked about how Hasura grew out of Tanmai’s previous company, which was a consulting company. I like to call out examples of really novel open source businesses, but in fact the thing that stuck with me from the conversation with Tanmai was that Hasura is going the ‘classic’ route… and it’s working. </p><p><br></p><p>What does the ‘classic’ route look like to me? It’s an open source project that targets individual developers and a commercial product that targets teams and teams of teams. It’s having additional network security features in the commercial options. It’s using the open source project as a growth engine and getting leads from companies that depend on it. It’s also using the open source project as a way to get feedback on the product roadmap. </p><p><br></p><p>Here were some of the takeaways from our conversation: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>It’s a lot easier to sell a product if your customers see it as mission-critical. One of Hasura’s first inbound leads was from a Fortune 100 company who said they’d be unable to ship any software for two weeks if Hasura went down — and so they wanted to make sure the team behind Hasura was serious and also wanted to pay them to make sure they didn’t go down. </li><li>For Hasura, the first clear difference between open source project and commercial product was that the open source project is for individual developers but the commercial product is aimed at the team level.</li><li>Even for the cloud hosted edition, the product with ‘developer-level’ focus is free. In fact, if you go to the Hasura CE product page, the CTA asks you to use for free on the cloud. Tanmai said this is an intentional choice because they want to reduce friction for people to test it out, and the fastest way to get up and running will always be to use the cloud version, not the open source. </li><li>We talked a lot about the control plane versus the data plane — all the editions have the same functionality at the data plane level. But the control plane, where people are collaborating — that is commercial only. </li><li>The open source project can be a great way to stay close to your users / customers and use their feedback to constantly refine your product roadmap. In fact, this can be a main advantage of being open source, because it is the only way you stay close to your users and get their feedback — otherwise you would often only talk to the buyer, who is likely an exec with a big budget but not using the technology on a daily basis. </li><li>This doesn’t mean open source doesn’t create liabilities for Hasura — it does, and those liabilities have to be managed. And Tanmai is frank about the fact that creating enough value on top of the open source project without crippling the growth engine is a tough balancing act. </li><li>Pay attention to what your best customers are doing! That has informed some really important product decisions for Hasura — and it took them way to long to figure out the unique way their happiest customers were getting more value out of Hasura than other users. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Definitely check out the full episode for more insights from Tanmai! </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Using Open Source for Trust, not Growth, with Reshma Khilnani</title>
      <itunes:episode>208</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>208</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Using Open Source for Trust, not Growth, with Reshma Khilnani</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">aa24a4cb-be12-488e-9806-2ab058b74752</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/5d8a8877</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/reshmakhilnani/">Reshma Khilnani</a>, CEO and founder of <a href="https://www.medplum.com">Medplum. </a>Medplum is an open source electronic health record development platform, and one of the things I loved about this conversation is that Reshma is so focused on the healthcare industry — a level of focus that I find relatively rare in open source companies. And not only that, when I asked her if she thought the company’s focus was too narrow, she responded that actually she often worries that it’s too broad. </p><p><br></p><p>Another thing I really liked about this episode is that open source, for Medplum, is about trust and transparency, not growth. Medplum’s customers, Reshma said, just don’t mess around with free software that doesn’t come with compliance certificates and some kind of support guarantees. It’s a great episode to come on the heels of the episode with <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/podcast/adam-jacob">Adam Jacob</a>, who talked about the difference between code, software and a product — that is a distinction that Medplum has clearly nailed. </p><p><br></p><p>Other takeaways if you’re running an open source company: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Reshma is clearly really passionate not just about developing software, but about building software for the healthcare industry. She can also clearly articulate why her customers are not well served by the standard, off the shelf development platforms that can be used by any industry. This industry-specific expertise is really powerful, and quite frankly something I don’t encounter very often. </li><li>Even though there are different legal regimes in different countries, the underlying needs are pretty similar, so even for something as specific as healthcare companies it’s not particularly challenging to provide a solution that meets the needs of customers around the world</li><li>Medplum is Reshma’s third company, but her first open source company. She talked about how one of the key differences between building an open source company and a her previous companies that that the company has to pay incredible attention to the implementation details that at any other company no one would care about. </li><li>Yes, you’re building a product company… but that doesn’t mean you should never sell professional services. Reshma says that one mistake she made was being too rigid about not selling any professional services at all, and ultimately they ended up offering packages of services to help customers get their implementations running. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>One last bit of info: Reshma compared the conversation around open source startups now with “internet startups’ in 2013. Will all startups be open source startups in 10 years? I guess we’ll see. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/reshmakhilnani/">Reshma Khilnani</a>, CEO and founder of <a href="https://www.medplum.com">Medplum. </a>Medplum is an open source electronic health record development platform, and one of the things I loved about this conversation is that Reshma is so focused on the healthcare industry — a level of focus that I find relatively rare in open source companies. And not only that, when I asked her if she thought the company’s focus was too narrow, she responded that actually she often worries that it’s too broad. </p><p><br></p><p>Another thing I really liked about this episode is that open source, for Medplum, is about trust and transparency, not growth. Medplum’s customers, Reshma said, just don’t mess around with free software that doesn’t come with compliance certificates and some kind of support guarantees. It’s a great episode to come on the heels of the episode with <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/podcast/adam-jacob">Adam Jacob</a>, who talked about the difference between code, software and a product — that is a distinction that Medplum has clearly nailed. </p><p><br></p><p>Other takeaways if you’re running an open source company: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Reshma is clearly really passionate not just about developing software, but about building software for the healthcare industry. She can also clearly articulate why her customers are not well served by the standard, off the shelf development platforms that can be used by any industry. This industry-specific expertise is really powerful, and quite frankly something I don’t encounter very often. </li><li>Even though there are different legal regimes in different countries, the underlying needs are pretty similar, so even for something as specific as healthcare companies it’s not particularly challenging to provide a solution that meets the needs of customers around the world</li><li>Medplum is Reshma’s third company, but her first open source company. She talked about how one of the key differences between building an open source company and a her previous companies that that the company has to pay incredible attention to the implementation details that at any other company no one would care about. </li><li>Yes, you’re building a product company… but that doesn’t mean you should never sell professional services. Reshma says that one mistake she made was being too rigid about not selling any professional services at all, and ultimately they ended up offering packages of services to help customers get their implementations running. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>One last bit of info: Reshma compared the conversation around open source startups now with “internet startups’ in 2013. Will all startups be open source startups in 10 years? I guess we’ll see. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 22 May 2024 00:00:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/5d8a8877/0a7c10b0.mp3" length="30860933" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2390</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/reshmakhilnani/">Reshma Khilnani</a>, CEO and founder of <a href="https://www.medplum.com">Medplum. </a>Medplum is an open source electronic health record development platform, and one of the things I loved about this conversation is that Reshma is so focused on the healthcare industry — a level of focus that I find relatively rare in open source companies. And not only that, when I asked her if she thought the company’s focus was too narrow, she responded that actually she often worries that it’s too broad. </p><p><br></p><p>Another thing I really liked about this episode is that open source, for Medplum, is about trust and transparency, not growth. Medplum’s customers, Reshma said, just don’t mess around with free software that doesn’t come with compliance certificates and some kind of support guarantees. It’s a great episode to come on the heels of the episode with <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/podcast/adam-jacob">Adam Jacob</a>, who talked about the difference between code, software and a product — that is a distinction that Medplum has clearly nailed. </p><p><br></p><p>Other takeaways if you’re running an open source company: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Reshma is clearly really passionate not just about developing software, but about building software for the healthcare industry. She can also clearly articulate why her customers are not well served by the standard, off the shelf development platforms that can be used by any industry. This industry-specific expertise is really powerful, and quite frankly something I don’t encounter very often. </li><li>Even though there are different legal regimes in different countries, the underlying needs are pretty similar, so even for something as specific as healthcare companies it’s not particularly challenging to provide a solution that meets the needs of customers around the world</li><li>Medplum is Reshma’s third company, but her first open source company. She talked about how one of the key differences between building an open source company and a her previous companies that that the company has to pay incredible attention to the implementation details that at any other company no one would care about. </li><li>Yes, you’re building a product company… but that doesn’t mean you should never sell professional services. Reshma says that one mistake she made was being too rigid about not selling any professional services at all, and ultimately they ended up offering packages of services to help customers get their implementations running. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>One last bit of info: Reshma compared the conversation around open source startups now with “internet startups’ in 2013. Will all startups be open source startups in 10 years? I guess we’ll see. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>The Difference between Code and Product with Adam Jacob </title>
      <itunes:episode>207</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>207</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>The Difference between Code and Product with Adam Jacob </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">cdb1fd1e-1709-404a-80b1-437de7b2220e</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/1de9d627</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/adamjacob/">Adam Jacob</a>, founder and CEO of <a href="https://www.systeminit.com">System Initiative</a> and formerly the CTO and co-founder at <a href="https://www.chef.io">Chef.</a> We had a wide-ranging conversation that at times veered into the philosophical (what is the meaning for ‘strategy’?) but also has plenty of concrete, practical insights. </p><p><br></p><p>We talked about:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>The difference between being the CTO and being the CEO of a startup, even if you’re a founder in both cases (and why Adam wanted to try out the CEO role this time)</li><li>How Chef started out open source primarily because Adam and his co-founder really believed in open source values </li><li>How they figured out a business model for Chef, but that it really felt like they were just making it up was they went along — and how he suspects that’s what most people do</li><li>Getting disrupted four times, and trying out many different business models along the way</li><li>We also talked a lot about total addressable markets, serviceable available market and serviceable obtainable market in the context of open source companies. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Three key takeaways: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>The software is not the product. A product is the entire experience of using the software, including how it is installed, how the team is onboarded, what compliance certifications you have, what happens if you have a problem, etc. As a vendor of open source software, you need to focus on creating and selling a whole product and take the focus away from the code. </li><li>You can have 100% open source code and still sell a product, because they want to have a complete experience with support and compliance paperwork etc — and because they value buying those things from the same people who are writing the code. </li><li>The way to calculate TAM is to multiply the number of people who want to buy a product by the average selling price of the product. When you phrase it this way, it becomes obvious that the TAM for any open source software is zero, because the average selling price is zero. </li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>If you enjoy this podcast, please share with other founders and leadership in open source companies! </p><p><br></p><p>And if you like the idea of open source lawyer trading cards, reach out to Adam and he’ll start a physical product company next :). </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/adamjacob/">Adam Jacob</a>, founder and CEO of <a href="https://www.systeminit.com">System Initiative</a> and formerly the CTO and co-founder at <a href="https://www.chef.io">Chef.</a> We had a wide-ranging conversation that at times veered into the philosophical (what is the meaning for ‘strategy’?) but also has plenty of concrete, practical insights. </p><p><br></p><p>We talked about:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>The difference between being the CTO and being the CEO of a startup, even if you’re a founder in both cases (and why Adam wanted to try out the CEO role this time)</li><li>How Chef started out open source primarily because Adam and his co-founder really believed in open source values </li><li>How they figured out a business model for Chef, but that it really felt like they were just making it up was they went along — and how he suspects that’s what most people do</li><li>Getting disrupted four times, and trying out many different business models along the way</li><li>We also talked a lot about total addressable markets, serviceable available market and serviceable obtainable market in the context of open source companies. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Three key takeaways: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>The software is not the product. A product is the entire experience of using the software, including how it is installed, how the team is onboarded, what compliance certifications you have, what happens if you have a problem, etc. As a vendor of open source software, you need to focus on creating and selling a whole product and take the focus away from the code. </li><li>You can have 100% open source code and still sell a product, because they want to have a complete experience with support and compliance paperwork etc — and because they value buying those things from the same people who are writing the code. </li><li>The way to calculate TAM is to multiply the number of people who want to buy a product by the average selling price of the product. When you phrase it this way, it becomes obvious that the TAM for any open source software is zero, because the average selling price is zero. </li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>If you enjoy this podcast, please share with other founders and leadership in open source companies! </p><p><br></p><p>And if you like the idea of open source lawyer trading cards, reach out to Adam and he’ll start a physical product company next :). </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 15 May 2024 00:00:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/1de9d627/d8bcb35b.mp3" length="42598940" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2838</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/adamjacob/">Adam Jacob</a>, founder and CEO of <a href="https://www.systeminit.com">System Initiative</a> and formerly the CTO and co-founder at <a href="https://www.chef.io">Chef.</a> We had a wide-ranging conversation that at times veered into the philosophical (what is the meaning for ‘strategy’?) but also has plenty of concrete, practical insights. </p><p><br></p><p>We talked about:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>The difference between being the CTO and being the CEO of a startup, even if you’re a founder in both cases (and why Adam wanted to try out the CEO role this time)</li><li>How Chef started out open source primarily because Adam and his co-founder really believed in open source values </li><li>How they figured out a business model for Chef, but that it really felt like they were just making it up was they went along — and how he suspects that’s what most people do</li><li>Getting disrupted four times, and trying out many different business models along the way</li><li>We also talked a lot about total addressable markets, serviceable available market and serviceable obtainable market in the context of open source companies. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Three key takeaways: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>The software is not the product. A product is the entire experience of using the software, including how it is installed, how the team is onboarded, what compliance certifications you have, what happens if you have a problem, etc. As a vendor of open source software, you need to focus on creating and selling a whole product and take the focus away from the code. </li><li>You can have 100% open source code and still sell a product, because they want to have a complete experience with support and compliance paperwork etc — and because they value buying those things from the same people who are writing the code. </li><li>The way to calculate TAM is to multiply the number of people who want to buy a product by the average selling price of the product. When you phrase it this way, it becomes obvious that the TAM for any open source software is zero, because the average selling price is zero. </li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>If you enjoy this podcast, please share with other founders and leadership in open source companies! </p><p><br></p><p>And if you like the idea of open source lawyer trading cards, reach out to Adam and he’ll start a physical product company next :). </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>A Buyer's View of Open Source Companies with Mark Boost</title>
      <itunes:episode>206</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>206</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>A Buyer's View of Open Source Companies with Mark Boost</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">a07ed461-be81-4847-baf5-257644216f4a</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/3e569182</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I had a very different sort of guest — <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/markboost/">Mark Boost</a>, the CEO and founder of <a href="https://www.civo.com">Civo</a>. We talked not only about Mark’s history as an entrepreneur, but also Civo’s recent acquisition of KubeFirst. This topic caught my eye because it’s not often I get an offer to talk with an acquirer of open source companies, and I wanted to take him up on it. (Though if you missed it, I also talked to <a href="https://open.spotify.com/episode/2AQD0qMfu1sY7vQJyqYkTq">Thomas di Giacomo</a> about this topic, and it was fabulous). The that is different about this case is that Suse is fundamentally an open source company, but Civo is not, and this was the first time that Civo had acquired an open source company. </p><p><br></p><p>We talked about:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>How the relationship started long before anyone was thinking about an acquisition</li><li>What the 1 + 1 = 3 equation looked like in this particular case</li><li>How it makes sense for an infrastructure company to acquire a complementary software company </li><li>What it means to hire a pre-revenue open source company</li><li>It’s a relatively new acquisition, so we did a pre-mortem on it together, and Mark talked about what could go wrong — a super interesting process. </li><li>Lastly, we talked about Civo’s open source projects and what business value the company gets out of it’s relationship with open source in general</li></ul><p><br></p><p>Come join me at<a href="http://05f5.com"> Open Source Founders Summit </a>if you want more conversations about building open source companies! </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I had a very different sort of guest — <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/markboost/">Mark Boost</a>, the CEO and founder of <a href="https://www.civo.com">Civo</a>. We talked not only about Mark’s history as an entrepreneur, but also Civo’s recent acquisition of KubeFirst. This topic caught my eye because it’s not often I get an offer to talk with an acquirer of open source companies, and I wanted to take him up on it. (Though if you missed it, I also talked to <a href="https://open.spotify.com/episode/2AQD0qMfu1sY7vQJyqYkTq">Thomas di Giacomo</a> about this topic, and it was fabulous). The that is different about this case is that Suse is fundamentally an open source company, but Civo is not, and this was the first time that Civo had acquired an open source company. </p><p><br></p><p>We talked about:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>How the relationship started long before anyone was thinking about an acquisition</li><li>What the 1 + 1 = 3 equation looked like in this particular case</li><li>How it makes sense for an infrastructure company to acquire a complementary software company </li><li>What it means to hire a pre-revenue open source company</li><li>It’s a relatively new acquisition, so we did a pre-mortem on it together, and Mark talked about what could go wrong — a super interesting process. </li><li>Lastly, we talked about Civo’s open source projects and what business value the company gets out of it’s relationship with open source in general</li></ul><p><br></p><p>Come join me at<a href="http://05f5.com"> Open Source Founders Summit </a>if you want more conversations about building open source companies! </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Tue, 07 May 2024 23:50:54 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/3e569182/eae78487.mp3" length="22058314" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1695</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I had a very different sort of guest — <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/markboost/">Mark Boost</a>, the CEO and founder of <a href="https://www.civo.com">Civo</a>. We talked not only about Mark’s history as an entrepreneur, but also Civo’s recent acquisition of KubeFirst. This topic caught my eye because it’s not often I get an offer to talk with an acquirer of open source companies, and I wanted to take him up on it. (Though if you missed it, I also talked to <a href="https://open.spotify.com/episode/2AQD0qMfu1sY7vQJyqYkTq">Thomas di Giacomo</a> about this topic, and it was fabulous). The that is different about this case is that Suse is fundamentally an open source company, but Civo is not, and this was the first time that Civo had acquired an open source company. </p><p><br></p><p>We talked about:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>How the relationship started long before anyone was thinking about an acquisition</li><li>What the 1 + 1 = 3 equation looked like in this particular case</li><li>How it makes sense for an infrastructure company to acquire a complementary software company </li><li>What it means to hire a pre-revenue open source company</li><li>It’s a relatively new acquisition, so we did a pre-mortem on it together, and Mark talked about what could go wrong — a super interesting process. </li><li>Lastly, we talked about Civo’s open source projects and what business value the company gets out of it’s relationship with open source in general</li></ul><p><br></p><p>Come join me at<a href="http://05f5.com"> Open Source Founders Summit </a>if you want more conversations about building open source companies! </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Trying All the Open Source Business Models with Brian Fox </title>
      <itunes:episode>205</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>205</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Trying All the Open Source Business Models with Brian Fox </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">650008c0-98ce-4c4f-a398-4276a40cf837</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/405566b4</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/brianefox/">Brian Fox</a>, co-founder and CTO of <a href="https://www.sonatype.com">Sonatype</a>. In addition to having a really interesting discussion about the usual topic of how to build a business around open source software, we also had a good conversation about security — it was hard to avoid, because we recorded this right after the xz backdoor discovery, and software supply chain security is kind of Brian’s thing. </p><p><br></p><p>Business-wise, though, we also covered some really cool topics. Including: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>The tension between an open source project that’s “too good” and yet the need for the sales team to close deals</li><li>In some ways, the fully commercial, closed-source products in Sonatype’s product line are more straightforward… but there are challenges that go along with a pure closed-source approach, too, especially for a DevTool company. </li><li>Choosing your relationship with open source depending on who your target user / target buyer is</li><li>Pivoting to a top-down sales motion because the bottoms-up motion just didn’t work; and how that means the features that sell aren’t always the features that get used</li><li>What Sonatype gets out of it’s relationship with Apache Maven and open source Nexus</li><li>How do we solve real problems, and how do we solve them for real? Keeping in mind that no one buys what they need; they only buy what they want. </li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Check out the full episode, and come to <a href="https://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> if you want more opportunities to talk about about business and open source. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/brianefox/">Brian Fox</a>, co-founder and CTO of <a href="https://www.sonatype.com">Sonatype</a>. In addition to having a really interesting discussion about the usual topic of how to build a business around open source software, we also had a good conversation about security — it was hard to avoid, because we recorded this right after the xz backdoor discovery, and software supply chain security is kind of Brian’s thing. </p><p><br></p><p>Business-wise, though, we also covered some really cool topics. Including: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>The tension between an open source project that’s “too good” and yet the need for the sales team to close deals</li><li>In some ways, the fully commercial, closed-source products in Sonatype’s product line are more straightforward… but there are challenges that go along with a pure closed-source approach, too, especially for a DevTool company. </li><li>Choosing your relationship with open source depending on who your target user / target buyer is</li><li>Pivoting to a top-down sales motion because the bottoms-up motion just didn’t work; and how that means the features that sell aren’t always the features that get used</li><li>What Sonatype gets out of it’s relationship with Apache Maven and open source Nexus</li><li>How do we solve real problems, and how do we solve them for real? Keeping in mind that no one buys what they need; they only buy what they want. </li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Check out the full episode, and come to <a href="https://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> if you want more opportunities to talk about about business and open source. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 01 May 2024 00:00:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/405566b4/c2540733.mp3" length="35860687" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2710</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/brianefox/">Brian Fox</a>, co-founder and CTO of <a href="https://www.sonatype.com">Sonatype</a>. In addition to having a really interesting discussion about the usual topic of how to build a business around open source software, we also had a good conversation about security — it was hard to avoid, because we recorded this right after the xz backdoor discovery, and software supply chain security is kind of Brian’s thing. </p><p><br></p><p>Business-wise, though, we also covered some really cool topics. Including: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>The tension between an open source project that’s “too good” and yet the need for the sales team to close deals</li><li>In some ways, the fully commercial, closed-source products in Sonatype’s product line are more straightforward… but there are challenges that go along with a pure closed-source approach, too, especially for a DevTool company. </li><li>Choosing your relationship with open source depending on who your target user / target buyer is</li><li>Pivoting to a top-down sales motion because the bottoms-up motion just didn’t work; and how that means the features that sell aren’t always the features that get used</li><li>What Sonatype gets out of it’s relationship with Apache Maven and open source Nexus</li><li>How do we solve real problems, and how do we solve them for real? Keeping in mind that no one buys what they need; they only buy what they want. </li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Check out the full episode, and come to <a href="https://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> if you want more opportunities to talk about about business and open source. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Aligning with User + Customer Needs with Rod Johnson </title>
      <itunes:episode>204</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>204</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Aligning with User + Customer Needs with Rod Johnson </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">f76ae58e-2951-4fb6-b120-ada1be79a2dd</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/64cf098d</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I had <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/johnsonroda/">Rod Johnson</a>, founder/CEO of <a href="https://spring.io/">Spring Source</a> and creator of the Spring Framework (as well as board member of many other open source companies) on to talk about Spring, monetizing open source and what’s changed in the open source ecosystem since 2008. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Key takeaways:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>Consulting was burning the entire team out, and that threatened the health not just of the consulting business, but of the open source project as well</li><li>An amazing salesperson can often sell anything, but that doesn’t mean that you’ll be able scale, because your entire sales team is not likely to be incredibly brilliant </li><li>Spring Source ended up not monetizing Spring at all — but rather worked on monetizing with products that were complementary to Spring. “We monetized Spring by not monetizing Spring, by using it to open the door” </li><li>The moment that the company really started to see success as a product company was when the team stopped thinking about what they wanted to build and instead focused on what customers where telling them that they wanted.</li><li>The risk of having a bunch of very good engineers on your team is that they’re excited about solving hard technical problems — but your customers might want something that is not very technically challenging or interesting. </li><li>A major part of the job of a company leader is to talk to your team and get them on board with your plans </li><li>The environment around monetizing open source projects has changed — there are things that worked in 2008 that wouldn’t work today, and things that didn’t work then that would be fine now</li><li>If you love (insert your favorite open source project here), it has to have a sustainable economic model</li><li>It’s really critical to have a rationale behind what functionality goes in your product and what goes into your open source project</li></ul><p><br></p><p>At the end we talked briefly about <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a>, a conference for leaders in open source businesses happening this May 27th and 28th in Paris. </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I had <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/johnsonroda/">Rod Johnson</a>, founder/CEO of <a href="https://spring.io/">Spring Source</a> and creator of the Spring Framework (as well as board member of many other open source companies) on to talk about Spring, monetizing open source and what’s changed in the open source ecosystem since 2008. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Key takeaways:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>Consulting was burning the entire team out, and that threatened the health not just of the consulting business, but of the open source project as well</li><li>An amazing salesperson can often sell anything, but that doesn’t mean that you’ll be able scale, because your entire sales team is not likely to be incredibly brilliant </li><li>Spring Source ended up not monetizing Spring at all — but rather worked on monetizing with products that were complementary to Spring. “We monetized Spring by not monetizing Spring, by using it to open the door” </li><li>The moment that the company really started to see success as a product company was when the team stopped thinking about what they wanted to build and instead focused on what customers where telling them that they wanted.</li><li>The risk of having a bunch of very good engineers on your team is that they’re excited about solving hard technical problems — but your customers might want something that is not very technically challenging or interesting. </li><li>A major part of the job of a company leader is to talk to your team and get them on board with your plans </li><li>The environment around monetizing open source projects has changed — there are things that worked in 2008 that wouldn’t work today, and things that didn’t work then that would be fine now</li><li>If you love (insert your favorite open source project here), it has to have a sustainable economic model</li><li>It’s really critical to have a rationale behind what functionality goes in your product and what goes into your open source project</li></ul><p><br></p><p>At the end we talked briefly about <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a>, a conference for leaders in open source businesses happening this May 27th and 28th in Paris. </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 24 Apr 2024 02:56:44 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/64cf098d/c5961765.mp3" length="32803007" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2808</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I had <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/johnsonroda/">Rod Johnson</a>, founder/CEO of <a href="https://spring.io/">Spring Source</a> and creator of the Spring Framework (as well as board member of many other open source companies) on to talk about Spring, monetizing open source and what’s changed in the open source ecosystem since 2008. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Key takeaways:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>Consulting was burning the entire team out, and that threatened the health not just of the consulting business, but of the open source project as well</li><li>An amazing salesperson can often sell anything, but that doesn’t mean that you’ll be able scale, because your entire sales team is not likely to be incredibly brilliant </li><li>Spring Source ended up not monetizing Spring at all — but rather worked on monetizing with products that were complementary to Spring. “We monetized Spring by not monetizing Spring, by using it to open the door” </li><li>The moment that the company really started to see success as a product company was when the team stopped thinking about what they wanted to build and instead focused on what customers where telling them that they wanted.</li><li>The risk of having a bunch of very good engineers on your team is that they’re excited about solving hard technical problems — but your customers might want something that is not very technically challenging or interesting. </li><li>A major part of the job of a company leader is to talk to your team and get them on board with your plans </li><li>The environment around monetizing open source projects has changed — there are things that worked in 2008 that wouldn’t work today, and things that didn’t work then that would be fine now</li><li>If you love (insert your favorite open source project here), it has to have a sustainable economic model</li><li>It’s really critical to have a rationale behind what functionality goes in your product and what goes into your open source project</li></ul><p><br></p><p>At the end we talked briefly about <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a>, a conference for leaders in open source businesses happening this May 27th and 28th in Paris. </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Taking a hard look at what community means and if every OSS company needs one with Deepak Prabhakara</title>
      <itunes:episode>203</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>203</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Taking a hard look at what community means and if every OSS company needs one with Deepak Prabhakara</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">1e0a9362-b4b0-445e-87ad-d7656dfaab4e</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/f6168a18</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://boxyhq.com">BoxyHQ</a> co-founder and CEO <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/deepakp/">Deepak Prabhakara</a>. We talked about a number of things, from BoxyHQ’s relationship with its open source project, called SAML Jackson to how to build a growth flywheel and how that flywheel does and does not depend on a community. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><ul><li>Is BoxyHQ a security company? Does it matter either way? </li><li>Starting the <a href="https://github.com/boxyhq/jackson">open source project </a>at the same time as the company, and why they did it that way</li><li>The relationship between the user community and the customer community</li><li>BoxyHQ as the anti-platform — instead of trying to build a platform, which is the default goal for a lot of companies I speak with — they are explicitly trying to build a more a la carte experience for users</li><li>The challenges of community building around a project that isn’t sexy and how to build community that isn’t project-focused, but rather that’s focused around a problem space</li><li>Making the mistake of assuming your startup is completely unique and unlike any others! </li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>We talked about much more as well, and it’s definitely an episode you should check out. </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://boxyhq.com">BoxyHQ</a> co-founder and CEO <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/deepakp/">Deepak Prabhakara</a>. We talked about a number of things, from BoxyHQ’s relationship with its open source project, called SAML Jackson to how to build a growth flywheel and how that flywheel does and does not depend on a community. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><ul><li>Is BoxyHQ a security company? Does it matter either way? </li><li>Starting the <a href="https://github.com/boxyhq/jackson">open source project </a>at the same time as the company, and why they did it that way</li><li>The relationship between the user community and the customer community</li><li>BoxyHQ as the anti-platform — instead of trying to build a platform, which is the default goal for a lot of companies I speak with — they are explicitly trying to build a more a la carte experience for users</li><li>The challenges of community building around a project that isn’t sexy and how to build community that isn’t project-focused, but rather that’s focused around a problem space</li><li>Making the mistake of assuming your startup is completely unique and unlike any others! </li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>We talked about much more as well, and it’s definitely an episode you should check out. </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 17 Apr 2024 01:48:52 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/f6168a18/b68e7dc4.mp3" length="30336759" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2152</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://boxyhq.com">BoxyHQ</a> co-founder and CEO <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/deepakp/">Deepak Prabhakara</a>. We talked about a number of things, from BoxyHQ’s relationship with its open source project, called SAML Jackson to how to build a growth flywheel and how that flywheel does and does not depend on a community. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><ul><li>Is BoxyHQ a security company? Does it matter either way? </li><li>Starting the <a href="https://github.com/boxyhq/jackson">open source project </a>at the same time as the company, and why they did it that way</li><li>The relationship between the user community and the customer community</li><li>BoxyHQ as the anti-platform — instead of trying to build a platform, which is the default goal for a lot of companies I speak with — they are explicitly trying to build a more a la carte experience for users</li><li>The challenges of community building around a project that isn’t sexy and how to build community that isn’t project-focused, but rather that’s focused around a problem space</li><li>Making the mistake of assuming your startup is completely unique and unlike any others! </li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>We talked about much more as well, and it’s definitely an episode you should check out. </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Getting Your Pricing Model Right-ish with Alex Olivier </title>
      <itunes:episode>202</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>202</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Getting Your Pricing Model Right-ish with Alex Olivier </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">d7724d17-3908-4f9b-b538-8751cf4befe9</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/7bc6448f</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>In the second episode that I recorded on-site at KubeCon EU in Paris, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/alexolivier/">Alex Olivier</a>, CPO and co-founder of <a href="https://www.cerbos.dev">Cerbos</a>. This was not a general discussion: It was focused on the process that Cerbos went through to figure out pricing. </p><p><br></p><p>Here’s what we talked about:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>The first step of figuring out your pricing is not the number, but rather what you’re charging for. Is it API calls, or amount of data you’re processing, or monthly active users, or monthly active principles… that last one is what Cerbos is charging for</li><li>Why it’s important to have a pricing system that allows potential users to be able to roughly estimate for themselves how much using your software is going to cost them</li><li>You also want to avoid pricing models that encourage people to look for ways to hack around to find ways to lower their monthly costs</li><li>Why your pricing model should be about the value you’re providing, not about how much it costs you to run your system</li><li>Discovering what your price anchors are / what your customers are comparing you to</li></ul><p><br></p><p>Check out the full episode for more details! </p><p><br></p><p>And join us at <a href="https://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit </a>for more discussions about the specifics of pricing for open source companies. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In the second episode that I recorded on-site at KubeCon EU in Paris, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/alexolivier/">Alex Olivier</a>, CPO and co-founder of <a href="https://www.cerbos.dev">Cerbos</a>. This was not a general discussion: It was focused on the process that Cerbos went through to figure out pricing. </p><p><br></p><p>Here’s what we talked about:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>The first step of figuring out your pricing is not the number, but rather what you’re charging for. Is it API calls, or amount of data you’re processing, or monthly active users, or monthly active principles… that last one is what Cerbos is charging for</li><li>Why it’s important to have a pricing system that allows potential users to be able to roughly estimate for themselves how much using your software is going to cost them</li><li>You also want to avoid pricing models that encourage people to look for ways to hack around to find ways to lower their monthly costs</li><li>Why your pricing model should be about the value you’re providing, not about how much it costs you to run your system</li><li>Discovering what your price anchors are / what your customers are comparing you to</li></ul><p><br></p><p>Check out the full episode for more details! </p><p><br></p><p>And join us at <a href="https://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit </a>for more discussions about the specifics of pricing for open source companies. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 10 Apr 2024 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/7bc6448f/74760d98.mp3" length="21185069" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1520</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>In the second episode that I recorded on-site at KubeCon EU in Paris, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/alexolivier/">Alex Olivier</a>, CPO and co-founder of <a href="https://www.cerbos.dev">Cerbos</a>. This was not a general discussion: It was focused on the process that Cerbos went through to figure out pricing. </p><p><br></p><p>Here’s what we talked about:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>The first step of figuring out your pricing is not the number, but rather what you’re charging for. Is it API calls, or amount of data you’re processing, or monthly active users, or monthly active principles… that last one is what Cerbos is charging for</li><li>Why it’s important to have a pricing system that allows potential users to be able to roughly estimate for themselves how much using your software is going to cost them</li><li>You also want to avoid pricing models that encourage people to look for ways to hack around to find ways to lower their monthly costs</li><li>Why your pricing model should be about the value you’re providing, not about how much it costs you to run your system</li><li>Discovering what your price anchors are / what your customers are comparing you to</li></ul><p><br></p><p>Check out the full episode for more details! </p><p><br></p><p>And join us at <a href="https://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit </a>for more discussions about the specifics of pricing for open source companies. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Nailing Customer Acquisition with Patrick Backman of MariaDB and OpenOcean </title>
      <itunes:episode>201</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>201</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Nailing Customer Acquisition with Patrick Backman of MariaDB and OpenOcean </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">e53b413d-5c43-4121-9289-56330f4d4fd6</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/1c7246f8</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week, I had a dilemma: should I prioritize the episode where I spoke with one of the MariaDB co-founders, in which we discuss setting up a foundation as a way to ensure that the project continues to be open source in the future, no matter what (relevant given the Redis announcement); or should I prioritize the conversation with one of the founders of Sonatype, one of the oldest companies in the software supply chain security space, in which we talk about the xz debacle. </p><p><br></p><p>I went with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/patrikbackman/">Patrick Backman</a>, general partner at OpenOcean and co-founder of MariaDB, because it’s a little more in my lane. (The conversation with Brian Fox will have to wait for next week!). </p><p><br></p><p>One of the main things we discussed was the relationship between the MariaDB foundation and the MariaDB company. Including: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why they decided to put MariaDB open source in a foundation, and why they created a separate foundation instead of putting it in an existing foundation </li><li>The relationship between MariaDB foundation and company today, including the financial relationship</li></ul><p><br></p><p>MariaDB was founded by the founders (and some key employees) at MySQL; we also discussed the lessons learned at MySQL that the team then applied at MariaDB. And we talked about customer acquisition, one of the things that Patrick thinks the team had learned at MySQL and therefore had pretty well figured it out at MariaDB. </p><p><br></p><p>Patrick’s co-founder <a href="https://05f5.com/participants/michael-widenius">Monty Widenius</a> is one of the speakers at <a href="https://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit </a>— if you want to go into more details on with the lessons from MySQL and MariaDB, as well as lessons from being an investor at OpenOcean, join us in Paris May 27th and 28th at Open source Founders Summit. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week, I had a dilemma: should I prioritize the episode where I spoke with one of the MariaDB co-founders, in which we discuss setting up a foundation as a way to ensure that the project continues to be open source in the future, no matter what (relevant given the Redis announcement); or should I prioritize the conversation with one of the founders of Sonatype, one of the oldest companies in the software supply chain security space, in which we talk about the xz debacle. </p><p><br></p><p>I went with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/patrikbackman/">Patrick Backman</a>, general partner at OpenOcean and co-founder of MariaDB, because it’s a little more in my lane. (The conversation with Brian Fox will have to wait for next week!). </p><p><br></p><p>One of the main things we discussed was the relationship between the MariaDB foundation and the MariaDB company. Including: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why they decided to put MariaDB open source in a foundation, and why they created a separate foundation instead of putting it in an existing foundation </li><li>The relationship between MariaDB foundation and company today, including the financial relationship</li></ul><p><br></p><p>MariaDB was founded by the founders (and some key employees) at MySQL; we also discussed the lessons learned at MySQL that the team then applied at MariaDB. And we talked about customer acquisition, one of the things that Patrick thinks the team had learned at MySQL and therefore had pretty well figured it out at MariaDB. </p><p><br></p><p>Patrick’s co-founder <a href="https://05f5.com/participants/michael-widenius">Monty Widenius</a> is one of the speakers at <a href="https://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit </a>— if you want to go into more details on with the lessons from MySQL and MariaDB, as well as lessons from being an investor at OpenOcean, join us in Paris May 27th and 28th at Open source Founders Summit. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 03 Apr 2024 00:00:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/1c7246f8/0a495dce.mp3" length="20770124" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2177</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week, I had a dilemma: should I prioritize the episode where I spoke with one of the MariaDB co-founders, in which we discuss setting up a foundation as a way to ensure that the project continues to be open source in the future, no matter what (relevant given the Redis announcement); or should I prioritize the conversation with one of the founders of Sonatype, one of the oldest companies in the software supply chain security space, in which we talk about the xz debacle. </p><p><br></p><p>I went with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/patrikbackman/">Patrick Backman</a>, general partner at OpenOcean and co-founder of MariaDB, because it’s a little more in my lane. (The conversation with Brian Fox will have to wait for next week!). </p><p><br></p><p>One of the main things we discussed was the relationship between the MariaDB foundation and the MariaDB company. Including: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why they decided to put MariaDB open source in a foundation, and why they created a separate foundation instead of putting it in an existing foundation </li><li>The relationship between MariaDB foundation and company today, including the financial relationship</li></ul><p><br></p><p>MariaDB was founded by the founders (and some key employees) at MySQL; we also discussed the lessons learned at MySQL that the team then applied at MariaDB. And we talked about customer acquisition, one of the things that Patrick thinks the team had learned at MySQL and therefore had pretty well figured it out at MariaDB. </p><p><br></p><p>Patrick’s co-founder <a href="https://05f5.com/participants/michael-widenius">Monty Widenius</a> is one of the speakers at <a href="https://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit </a>— if you want to go into more details on with the lessons from MySQL and MariaDB, as well as lessons from being an investor at OpenOcean, join us in Paris May 27th and 28th at Open source Founders Summit. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Ensuring a Project's Long-Term Survival with William Morgan</title>
      <itunes:episode>200</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>200</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Ensuring a Project's Long-Term Survival with William Morgan</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">7550a546-8a96-4291-9ac1-e161ad34ccfc</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/ba2e7414</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I have an episode recorded on site at KubeCon EU in Paris with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/wmorgan/">William Morgan</a>, CEO of <a href="https://buoyant.io">Buoyant.</a> We had a fabulous conversation, which touched on some touchy subjects, including Buoyant’s slightly changing relationship with <a href="https://linkerd.io">Linkerd</a>. But we talked about:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>Being an open source mercenary, but also being dedicated to making Linkerd a ‘proper’ open source project</li><li>Feeling like open source was table stakes for a company in the space Buoyant plays in. This is an under-appreciated reason for being an open source company — you feel like it’s just expected in the market you play in, so you do. </li><li>Waiting too long (or is it too long?) to commercialize</li><li>Starting out by selling support, but the problem with that because Linkerd worked well and people kept saying that they didn’t need support because they never had problems</li><li>Competing against Istio, which was backed by the Google engine and how that made Linkerd / Buoyant an underdog (or cockroach). </li><li>For those of you who haven’t been following Linkerd / Buoyant… Buoyant recently announced that they would be doing edge releases for Linkerd, but not stable releases. We talked about why they made this change and how the ecosystem responded. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Check out the full episode! </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I have an episode recorded on site at KubeCon EU in Paris with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/wmorgan/">William Morgan</a>, CEO of <a href="https://buoyant.io">Buoyant.</a> We had a fabulous conversation, which touched on some touchy subjects, including Buoyant’s slightly changing relationship with <a href="https://linkerd.io">Linkerd</a>. But we talked about:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>Being an open source mercenary, but also being dedicated to making Linkerd a ‘proper’ open source project</li><li>Feeling like open source was table stakes for a company in the space Buoyant plays in. This is an under-appreciated reason for being an open source company — you feel like it’s just expected in the market you play in, so you do. </li><li>Waiting too long (or is it too long?) to commercialize</li><li>Starting out by selling support, but the problem with that because Linkerd worked well and people kept saying that they didn’t need support because they never had problems</li><li>Competing against Istio, which was backed by the Google engine and how that made Linkerd / Buoyant an underdog (or cockroach). </li><li>For those of you who haven’t been following Linkerd / Buoyant… Buoyant recently announced that they would be doing edge releases for Linkerd, but not stable releases. We talked about why they made this change and how the ecosystem responded. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Check out the full episode! </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Tue, 26 Mar 2024 23:00:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/ba2e7414/8eb2035a.mp3" length="31111420" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2113</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I have an episode recorded on site at KubeCon EU in Paris with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/wmorgan/">William Morgan</a>, CEO of <a href="https://buoyant.io">Buoyant.</a> We had a fabulous conversation, which touched on some touchy subjects, including Buoyant’s slightly changing relationship with <a href="https://linkerd.io">Linkerd</a>. But we talked about:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>Being an open source mercenary, but also being dedicated to making Linkerd a ‘proper’ open source project</li><li>Feeling like open source was table stakes for a company in the space Buoyant plays in. This is an under-appreciated reason for being an open source company — you feel like it’s just expected in the market you play in, so you do. </li><li>Waiting too long (or is it too long?) to commercialize</li><li>Starting out by selling support, but the problem with that because Linkerd worked well and people kept saying that they didn’t need support because they never had problems</li><li>Competing against Istio, which was backed by the Google engine and how that made Linkerd / Buoyant an underdog (or cockroach). </li><li>For those of you who haven’t been following Linkerd / Buoyant… Buoyant recently announced that they would be doing edge releases for Linkerd, but not stable releases. We talked about why they made this change and how the ecosystem responded. </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Check out the full episode! </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>From Project to Profit with Heather Meeker</title>
      <itunes:episode>199</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>199</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>From Project to Profit with Heather Meeker</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">c25dffdf-ef16-480c-91d2-cb4456f19fcd</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/99ddceb3</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I talked to <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/heathermeeker/">Heather Meeker</a>, General Partner of OSS Capital and author of From Project to Profit, How to Build a Business around your Open Source Project. We talked about some things that I entirely agree with, and then there were some points I challenged Heather on — all in all, it was fabulous conversation. </p><p><br></p><p>Here’s what we covered:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why you should think of your project and product as two different products so you avoid thinking of your open source project as a loss leader and get your incentives right</li><li>The differences between supplementary and complementary products, and how the relationship between project and product is often complementary, even in situations where that relationship is non-obvious</li><li>We disagreed about pricing — should COSS businesses have cheaper products than closed-source companies? </li><li>Why cares about your being open source? </li><li>Are open source companies more capital efficient? Heather says so, but I’m not convinced. </li><li>Heather also talked about how they select companies to invest in</li><li>Do open source companies by definition do a better job at paying attention to user / customer demand? </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Check out the episode, and check out more about Heather Meeker here: </p><p><br></p><p><a href="http://www.apple.com">Personal website</a></p><p><a href="http://www.apple.com">OSS Capital</a></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/heathermeeker/">LinkedIn</a></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I talked to <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/heathermeeker/">Heather Meeker</a>, General Partner of OSS Capital and author of From Project to Profit, How to Build a Business around your Open Source Project. We talked about some things that I entirely agree with, and then there were some points I challenged Heather on — all in all, it was fabulous conversation. </p><p><br></p><p>Here’s what we covered:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why you should think of your project and product as two different products so you avoid thinking of your open source project as a loss leader and get your incentives right</li><li>The differences between supplementary and complementary products, and how the relationship between project and product is often complementary, even in situations where that relationship is non-obvious</li><li>We disagreed about pricing — should COSS businesses have cheaper products than closed-source companies? </li><li>Why cares about your being open source? </li><li>Are open source companies more capital efficient? Heather says so, but I’m not convinced. </li><li>Heather also talked about how they select companies to invest in</li><li>Do open source companies by definition do a better job at paying attention to user / customer demand? </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Check out the episode, and check out more about Heather Meeker here: </p><p><br></p><p><a href="http://www.apple.com">Personal website</a></p><p><a href="http://www.apple.com">OSS Capital</a></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/heathermeeker/">LinkedIn</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 20 Mar 2024 00:00:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/99ddceb3/85b2ae44.mp3" length="71337910" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2228</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I talked to <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/heathermeeker/">Heather Meeker</a>, General Partner of OSS Capital and author of From Project to Profit, How to Build a Business around your Open Source Project. We talked about some things that I entirely agree with, and then there were some points I challenged Heather on — all in all, it was fabulous conversation. </p><p><br></p><p>Here’s what we covered:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why you should think of your project and product as two different products so you avoid thinking of your open source project as a loss leader and get your incentives right</li><li>The differences between supplementary and complementary products, and how the relationship between project and product is often complementary, even in situations where that relationship is non-obvious</li><li>We disagreed about pricing — should COSS businesses have cheaper products than closed-source companies? </li><li>Why cares about your being open source? </li><li>Are open source companies more capital efficient? Heather says so, but I’m not convinced. </li><li>Heather also talked about how they select companies to invest in</li><li>Do open source companies by definition do a better job at paying attention to user / customer demand? </li></ul><p><br></p><p>Check out the episode, and check out more about Heather Meeker here: </p><p><br></p><p><a href="http://www.apple.com">Personal website</a></p><p><a href="http://www.apple.com">OSS Capital</a></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/heathermeeker/">LinkedIn</a></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Delivering Value Quickly in the Observability Space with Pranay Prateek</title>
      <itunes:episode>198</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>198</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Delivering Value Quickly in the Observability Space with Pranay Prateek</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">0ce39201-b543-46ad-bbfe-ab3c6dbaa785</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/0fe0fe8b</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/pranay01/">Pranay Prateek</a>, co-founder of <a href="https://signoz.io">SigNoz</a>. Pranay talked about why open source is important to SigNoz's business, why it's super important to deliver value quickly, even for an observability product, and why founders shouldn't think of open source just as a distribution model. </p><p><br></p><p>We also covered: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>How SigNoz is differentiated in the crowded observability market</li><li>Why Pranay thinks being open source makes it much easier for developers to play around with the project and get to know it; so for them it made intuitive sense that the company that they’d build an open source company </li><li>Why Pranay also thinks open source enables much deeper integrations, which is critically important for an observability company like SigNoz</li><li>How one of their first lessons / mistakes was releasing an open source project that didn’t work well on an individual developer’s laptop, because it used too much resources</li><li>The GTM market, and the challenge delivering value within 30 minutes of trying out the project/product for an observability tool that provides maximum value during an incident — but no one is going to be trying out a new tool during an incident situation </li><li>Why their first commercial product was a cloud offering</li></ul><p><br></p><p>And much more! </p><p><br></p><p>And if you’re interested in more discussions of open source businesses, make sure to join us at <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> this May. </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/pranay01/">Pranay Prateek</a>, co-founder of <a href="https://signoz.io">SigNoz</a>. Pranay talked about why open source is important to SigNoz's business, why it's super important to deliver value quickly, even for an observability product, and why founders shouldn't think of open source just as a distribution model. </p><p><br></p><p>We also covered: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>How SigNoz is differentiated in the crowded observability market</li><li>Why Pranay thinks being open source makes it much easier for developers to play around with the project and get to know it; so for them it made intuitive sense that the company that they’d build an open source company </li><li>Why Pranay also thinks open source enables much deeper integrations, which is critically important for an observability company like SigNoz</li><li>How one of their first lessons / mistakes was releasing an open source project that didn’t work well on an individual developer’s laptop, because it used too much resources</li><li>The GTM market, and the challenge delivering value within 30 minutes of trying out the project/product for an observability tool that provides maximum value during an incident — but no one is going to be trying out a new tool during an incident situation </li><li>Why their first commercial product was a cloud offering</li></ul><p><br></p><p>And much more! </p><p><br></p><p>And if you’re interested in more discussions of open source businesses, make sure to join us at <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> this May. </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 13 Mar 2024 02:34:20 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/0fe0fe8b/880fd36f.mp3" length="33394470" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2350</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/pranay01/">Pranay Prateek</a>, co-founder of <a href="https://signoz.io">SigNoz</a>. Pranay talked about why open source is important to SigNoz's business, why it's super important to deliver value quickly, even for an observability product, and why founders shouldn't think of open source just as a distribution model. </p><p><br></p><p>We also covered: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>How SigNoz is differentiated in the crowded observability market</li><li>Why Pranay thinks being open source makes it much easier for developers to play around with the project and get to know it; so for them it made intuitive sense that the company that they’d build an open source company </li><li>Why Pranay also thinks open source enables much deeper integrations, which is critically important for an observability company like SigNoz</li><li>How one of their first lessons / mistakes was releasing an open source project that didn’t work well on an individual developer’s laptop, because it used too much resources</li><li>The GTM market, and the challenge delivering value within 30 minutes of trying out the project/product for an observability tool that provides maximum value during an incident — but no one is going to be trying out a new tool during an incident situation </li><li>Why their first commercial product was a cloud offering</li></ul><p><br></p><p>And much more! </p><p><br></p><p>And if you’re interested in more discussions of open source businesses, make sure to join us at <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> this May. </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>OSFS Special Episode: Being a Strategic Acquisition Target as an OSS Company with Thomas Di Giacomo</title>
      <itunes:episode>197</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>197</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>OSFS Special Episode: Being a Strategic Acquisition Target as an OSS Company with Thomas Di Giacomo</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">dcec5433-6dba-4e4a-a0ad-983e171d3b28</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/075de53e</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this special episode to promote <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a>, I went deep with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/thomasdigiacomo/">Thomas di Giacomo</a> about how open source companies can position themselves as attractive acquisition targets for strategic buyers. </p><p><br></p><p>If you are the founder of an open source company and you have the idea of being acquired even in the back of your mind, this is a must-listen episode. Whether or not you plan to join us May 27th and 28th in Paris, though of course we hope you do join us. </p><p><br></p><p>By the way, at <a href="https://05f5.com/participants/thomas-di-giacomo">OSFS Thomas</a> is going to lead a workshop on the topic of <a href="https://05f5.com/schedule/open-source-merger-and-acquisition">being an acquisition target for open source companies.</a> It will be interactive, which means you can ASK QUESTIONS. </p><p><br></p><p>In this podcast episode, he talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Exits 101. You probably know that strategic buyers usually pay more for companies than other types of acquirers, but we talked about different exit strategies and what they entail</li><li>Why strategic buyers acquire businesses (in general) but also why you, as the business seller, need to understand every specific potential acquirer’s story and goals so you can see how your company fits into their strategic plan</li><li>Strategic acquisitions are about 1+1=3… so you have to know what your buyer’s “3” is</li><li>Why it’s important to be self-aware and know your own goals before you sign any acquisition paperwork</li></ul><p><br></p><p>And tons more… </p><p><br></p><p>If you want the chance to ask Thomas about strategic acquisitions for OSS companies — as well as to talk about sales strategies, lead generation and more — join us at OSFS 24 in Paris this May 27th and 28th. —&gt; <a href="https://05f5.com/request-invite">Get your invite here</a>. </p><p><br></p><p>PS the audio was a little quiet, but so if you’re having trouble hearing turn up the volume, it’s worth it. </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this special episode to promote <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a>, I went deep with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/thomasdigiacomo/">Thomas di Giacomo</a> about how open source companies can position themselves as attractive acquisition targets for strategic buyers. </p><p><br></p><p>If you are the founder of an open source company and you have the idea of being acquired even in the back of your mind, this is a must-listen episode. Whether or not you plan to join us May 27th and 28th in Paris, though of course we hope you do join us. </p><p><br></p><p>By the way, at <a href="https://05f5.com/participants/thomas-di-giacomo">OSFS Thomas</a> is going to lead a workshop on the topic of <a href="https://05f5.com/schedule/open-source-merger-and-acquisition">being an acquisition target for open source companies.</a> It will be interactive, which means you can ASK QUESTIONS. </p><p><br></p><p>In this podcast episode, he talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Exits 101. You probably know that strategic buyers usually pay more for companies than other types of acquirers, but we talked about different exit strategies and what they entail</li><li>Why strategic buyers acquire businesses (in general) but also why you, as the business seller, need to understand every specific potential acquirer’s story and goals so you can see how your company fits into their strategic plan</li><li>Strategic acquisitions are about 1+1=3… so you have to know what your buyer’s “3” is</li><li>Why it’s important to be self-aware and know your own goals before you sign any acquisition paperwork</li></ul><p><br></p><p>And tons more… </p><p><br></p><p>If you want the chance to ask Thomas about strategic acquisitions for OSS companies — as well as to talk about sales strategies, lead generation and more — join us at OSFS 24 in Paris this May 27th and 28th. —&gt; <a href="https://05f5.com/request-invite">Get your invite here</a>. </p><p><br></p><p>PS the audio was a little quiet, but so if you’re having trouble hearing turn up the volume, it’s worth it. </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Tue, 12 Mar 2024 04:56:49 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/075de53e/b136ece3.mp3" length="26975674" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://img.transistorcdn.com/g645SmrqTwyi6ZjqG0aqLJyFDhdqTOXSSYnU18BuBfY/rs:fill:0:0:1/w:1400/h:1400/q:60/mb:500000/aHR0cHM6Ly9pbWct/dXBsb2FkLXByb2R1/Y3Rpb24udHJhbnNp/c3Rvci5mbS9lcGlz/b2RlLzE3ODYzMjEv/MTcxMDI0NDYwOS1h/cnR3b3JrLmpwZw.jpg"/>
      <itunes:duration>1969</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this special episode to promote <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a>, I went deep with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/thomasdigiacomo/">Thomas di Giacomo</a> about how open source companies can position themselves as attractive acquisition targets for strategic buyers. </p><p><br></p><p>If you are the founder of an open source company and you have the idea of being acquired even in the back of your mind, this is a must-listen episode. Whether or not you plan to join us May 27th and 28th in Paris, though of course we hope you do join us. </p><p><br></p><p>By the way, at <a href="https://05f5.com/participants/thomas-di-giacomo">OSFS Thomas</a> is going to lead a workshop on the topic of <a href="https://05f5.com/schedule/open-source-merger-and-acquisition">being an acquisition target for open source companies.</a> It will be interactive, which means you can ASK QUESTIONS. </p><p><br></p><p>In this podcast episode, he talked about: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Exits 101. You probably know that strategic buyers usually pay more for companies than other types of acquirers, but we talked about different exit strategies and what they entail</li><li>Why strategic buyers acquire businesses (in general) but also why you, as the business seller, need to understand every specific potential acquirer’s story and goals so you can see how your company fits into their strategic plan</li><li>Strategic acquisitions are about 1+1=3… so you have to know what your buyer’s “3” is</li><li>Why it’s important to be self-aware and know your own goals before you sign any acquisition paperwork</li></ul><p><br></p><p>And tons more… </p><p><br></p><p>If you want the chance to ask Thomas about strategic acquisitions for OSS companies — as well as to talk about sales strategies, lead generation and more — join us at OSFS 24 in Paris this May 27th and 28th. —&gt; <a href="https://05f5.com/request-invite">Get your invite here</a>. </p><p><br></p><p>PS the audio was a little quiet, but so if you’re having trouble hearing turn up the volume, it’s worth it. </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Buyer-Based Open Core with Zach Wasserman </title>
      <itunes:episode>196</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>196</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Buyer-Based Open Core with Zach Wasserman </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">9c639ba2-ce5f-4010-805d-e259f4d62142</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/f6c64ecd</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/zacharywasserman/">Zach Wasserman</a>, co-founder and CTO of <a href="https://fleetdm.com">Fleet</a>. This was a fabulous episode for many reasons, but then again I never do crappy episodes, right? </p><p><br></p><p>The first thing I wanted to call your attention to is that Zach talked about how he’s building an open core business because building an open source business is what he wants to do. When his previous company turned away from open source, Zach left to do consulting around <a href="https://osquery.io">OSquery</a> and Fleet (the project). I always like to talk about how companies / founders need a solid reason for building an open source company… and “this is the kind of company I want to build” is a very good reason. (“Everyone else is doing it” on the other hand, is not a good reason). Everyone puts constraints around the type of company the want to build, and as long as you are intentionally about the decisions, there is nothing wrong about this, business-wise.</p><p><br></p><p>Second, we talked about the tension that exists between making a great project and still leaving room for a commercial product that people will pay for, and Zach talked through how Fleet uses a buyer-based open core strategy to decide which functionality to put in the enterprise version or in the open core. </p><p><br></p><p>We also talked about:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>Leaving his first company, <a href="https://www.kolide.com/?utm_campaign=device_trust_home&amp;utm_source=google_ppc&amp;utm_medium=paid_ad&amp;utm_content=search_branded&amp;utm_term=kolide&amp;gad_source=1&amp;gclid=CjwKCAiAxaCvBhBaEiwAvsLmWI2MTatz2CfkjnXSer9z_jkuwTxDs5mvLGXQyXY_czpGHytFTBQBmRoCzNEQAvD_BwE">Kolide</a>, when the founders had divergent visions about where the company should go</li><li>How his investor arranged a ‘co-founder marriage’ for Zach and his co-founder <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mikermcneil/">Mike McNeil</a></li><li>How the transparency aspect of open source can be extremely important, especially for anything in the security space</li></ul><p><br></p><p>Lastly, Fleet happens to be a former client of mine. You can check out what Mike, Zach’s co-founder, said about working <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/testimonials">with me here. </a></p><p><br></p><p>And if you’re interested in more conversations like this… but in person!!! you should come to <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> May 27th and 28th in Paris. </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/zacharywasserman/">Zach Wasserman</a>, co-founder and CTO of <a href="https://fleetdm.com">Fleet</a>. This was a fabulous episode for many reasons, but then again I never do crappy episodes, right? </p><p><br></p><p>The first thing I wanted to call your attention to is that Zach talked about how he’s building an open core business because building an open source business is what he wants to do. When his previous company turned away from open source, Zach left to do consulting around <a href="https://osquery.io">OSquery</a> and Fleet (the project). I always like to talk about how companies / founders need a solid reason for building an open source company… and “this is the kind of company I want to build” is a very good reason. (“Everyone else is doing it” on the other hand, is not a good reason). Everyone puts constraints around the type of company the want to build, and as long as you are intentionally about the decisions, there is nothing wrong about this, business-wise.</p><p><br></p><p>Second, we talked about the tension that exists between making a great project and still leaving room for a commercial product that people will pay for, and Zach talked through how Fleet uses a buyer-based open core strategy to decide which functionality to put in the enterprise version or in the open core. </p><p><br></p><p>We also talked about:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>Leaving his first company, <a href="https://www.kolide.com/?utm_campaign=device_trust_home&amp;utm_source=google_ppc&amp;utm_medium=paid_ad&amp;utm_content=search_branded&amp;utm_term=kolide&amp;gad_source=1&amp;gclid=CjwKCAiAxaCvBhBaEiwAvsLmWI2MTatz2CfkjnXSer9z_jkuwTxDs5mvLGXQyXY_czpGHytFTBQBmRoCzNEQAvD_BwE">Kolide</a>, when the founders had divergent visions about where the company should go</li><li>How his investor arranged a ‘co-founder marriage’ for Zach and his co-founder <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mikermcneil/">Mike McNeil</a></li><li>How the transparency aspect of open source can be extremely important, especially for anything in the security space</li></ul><p><br></p><p>Lastly, Fleet happens to be a former client of mine. You can check out what Mike, Zach’s co-founder, said about working <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/testimonials">with me here. </a></p><p><br></p><p>And if you’re interested in more conversations like this… but in person!!! you should come to <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> May 27th and 28th in Paris. </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 06 Mar 2024 01:47:36 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/f6c64ecd/a011d28a.mp3" length="72669528" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2270</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/zacharywasserman/">Zach Wasserman</a>, co-founder and CTO of <a href="https://fleetdm.com">Fleet</a>. This was a fabulous episode for many reasons, but then again I never do crappy episodes, right? </p><p><br></p><p>The first thing I wanted to call your attention to is that Zach talked about how he’s building an open core business because building an open source business is what he wants to do. When his previous company turned away from open source, Zach left to do consulting around <a href="https://osquery.io">OSquery</a> and Fleet (the project). I always like to talk about how companies / founders need a solid reason for building an open source company… and “this is the kind of company I want to build” is a very good reason. (“Everyone else is doing it” on the other hand, is not a good reason). Everyone puts constraints around the type of company the want to build, and as long as you are intentionally about the decisions, there is nothing wrong about this, business-wise.</p><p><br></p><p>Second, we talked about the tension that exists between making a great project and still leaving room for a commercial product that people will pay for, and Zach talked through how Fleet uses a buyer-based open core strategy to decide which functionality to put in the enterprise version or in the open core. </p><p><br></p><p>We also talked about:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>Leaving his first company, <a href="https://www.kolide.com/?utm_campaign=device_trust_home&amp;utm_source=google_ppc&amp;utm_medium=paid_ad&amp;utm_content=search_branded&amp;utm_term=kolide&amp;gad_source=1&amp;gclid=CjwKCAiAxaCvBhBaEiwAvsLmWI2MTatz2CfkjnXSer9z_jkuwTxDs5mvLGXQyXY_czpGHytFTBQBmRoCzNEQAvD_BwE">Kolide</a>, when the founders had divergent visions about where the company should go</li><li>How his investor arranged a ‘co-founder marriage’ for Zach and his co-founder <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mikermcneil/">Mike McNeil</a></li><li>How the transparency aspect of open source can be extremely important, especially for anything in the security space</li></ul><p><br></p><p>Lastly, Fleet happens to be a former client of mine. You can check out what Mike, Zach’s co-founder, said about working <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/testimonials">with me here. </a></p><p><br></p><p>And if you’re interested in more conversations like this… but in person!!! you should come to <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> May 27th and 28th in Paris. </p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>The Evolving Relationship between Apache Cassandra and DataStax</title>
      <itunes:episode>195</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>195</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>The Evolving Relationship between Apache Cassandra and DataStax</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">b6dd67a6-fb0a-4b8f-85d1-2d35e758e8b8</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/f7bd89b5</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Slightly different The Business of Open Source episode today! I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/patrick-mcfadin-53a8046/">Patrick McFadin</a> and <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mick-semb-wever-91748720/">Mick Semb Wever</a> about the relationship between Apache Cassandra and DataStax — how it was at the beginning and how the relationship has evolved over the years. </p><p><br></p><p>We talked about:</p><p><br></p><p>— How there was a dynamic around Cassandra where many of the many of the contributors ended up being sucked into the DataStax orbit, simply because it allowed those contributors to work on on Cassandra full-time</p><p><br></p><p>— How there can be tensions between different stakeholders simply because everyone involved ultimately has their own interests at heart, and those interests are not always aligned. </p><p><br></p><p>— How it is actually hard to really have open discussions about new features, and how often there can be a new feature dropped in a project that clearly had been developed behind closed doors for some time, and sometimes that created tension in the community</p><p><br></p><p>— Some open source projects are just too complex to be hobby projects — Cassandra is so complex that you won’t become a code contributor unless you’re working full-time on Cassandra, because that’s the level of skill you need to keep up. </p><p><br></p><p>— How the relationship between a company and a project often changes as the technology matures. </p><p><br></p><p>— The importance of addressing tensions between company and community head-on, as adults, when they occur — as well as why you need to remember to treat people as humans and remember that they have good days, bad days, goals and interests. </p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/patrick-mcfadin-53a8046/">Patrick on LinkedIn</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mick-semb-wever-91748720/">Mick on LinkedIn</a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Slightly different The Business of Open Source episode today! I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/patrick-mcfadin-53a8046/">Patrick McFadin</a> and <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mick-semb-wever-91748720/">Mick Semb Wever</a> about the relationship between Apache Cassandra and DataStax — how it was at the beginning and how the relationship has evolved over the years. </p><p><br></p><p>We talked about:</p><p><br></p><p>— How there was a dynamic around Cassandra where many of the many of the contributors ended up being sucked into the DataStax orbit, simply because it allowed those contributors to work on on Cassandra full-time</p><p><br></p><p>— How there can be tensions between different stakeholders simply because everyone involved ultimately has their own interests at heart, and those interests are not always aligned. </p><p><br></p><p>— How it is actually hard to really have open discussions about new features, and how often there can be a new feature dropped in a project that clearly had been developed behind closed doors for some time, and sometimes that created tension in the community</p><p><br></p><p>— Some open source projects are just too complex to be hobby projects — Cassandra is so complex that you won’t become a code contributor unless you’re working full-time on Cassandra, because that’s the level of skill you need to keep up. </p><p><br></p><p>— How the relationship between a company and a project often changes as the technology matures. </p><p><br></p><p>— The importance of addressing tensions between company and community head-on, as adults, when they occur — as well as why you need to remember to treat people as humans and remember that they have good days, bad days, goals and interests. </p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/patrick-mcfadin-53a8046/">Patrick on LinkedIn</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mick-semb-wever-91748720/">Mick on LinkedIn</a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 28 Feb 2024 01:10:59 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/f7bd89b5/d5e0897e.mp3" length="77662483" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2426</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Slightly different The Business of Open Source episode today! I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/patrick-mcfadin-53a8046/">Patrick McFadin</a> and <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mick-semb-wever-91748720/">Mick Semb Wever</a> about the relationship between Apache Cassandra and DataStax — how it was at the beginning and how the relationship has evolved over the years. </p><p><br></p><p>We talked about:</p><p><br></p><p>— How there was a dynamic around Cassandra where many of the many of the contributors ended up being sucked into the DataStax orbit, simply because it allowed those contributors to work on on Cassandra full-time</p><p><br></p><p>— How there can be tensions between different stakeholders simply because everyone involved ultimately has their own interests at heart, and those interests are not always aligned. </p><p><br></p><p>— How it is actually hard to really have open discussions about new features, and how often there can be a new feature dropped in a project that clearly had been developed behind closed doors for some time, and sometimes that created tension in the community</p><p><br></p><p>— Some open source projects are just too complex to be hobby projects — Cassandra is so complex that you won’t become a code contributor unless you’re working full-time on Cassandra, because that’s the level of skill you need to keep up. </p><p><br></p><p>— How the relationship between a company and a project often changes as the technology matures. </p><p><br></p><p>— The importance of addressing tensions between company and community head-on, as adults, when they occur — as well as why you need to remember to treat people as humans and remember that they have good days, bad days, goals and interests. </p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/patrick-mcfadin-53a8046/">Patrick on LinkedIn</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mick-semb-wever-91748720/">Mick on LinkedIn</a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>OSFS Special Episode: A Deep Dive into GTM with Frank Karlitschek</title>
      <itunes:episode>194</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>194</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>OSFS Special Episode: A Deep Dive into GTM with Frank Karlitschek</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">bf7fbffb-a045-46c0-896b-f1fa1ba84502</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/c2304d41</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode of the Open Source Founders Podcast, I talked with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/frankkarlitschek/">Frank Karlitschek</a>, CEO and founder of <a href="https://nextcloud.com">Nextcloud</a>. Frank is going to be talking specifically about lead generation at <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a>, but in this episode we took a slightly wider view and talked about go to market, for open source companies in general and specifically for Frank’s experience at Nextcloud. </p><p><br></p><p>A couple other things to pull out as takeaways. </p><p><br></p><p>First of all, Frank talks about how he originally planned to target big companies who wanted to keep their data private — but as it turned out, most big companies don’t really care deeply about keeping their data private. On the other hand, the public sector and universities really do care, and those have ended up being a huge part of Nextcloud’s customers. </p><p><br></p><p>Frank also talked about the rather obvious differences in needs between home users and big organizations. Nextcloud has some customers with millions of users — their needs are different from a home user. And as far as home users go, Frank says these users are obviously never going to pay Nextcloud anything. On the other hand, they have built mechanisms into the software to nudge open source instances with over 1,000 users to get in touch to talk about a commercial relationship. </p><p><br></p><p>He also talked specifically about the importance of really talking with your customers and your users — and incorporating their feedback into your product roadmap. For open source companies, you have so much more information and feedback than proprietary companies, and you should take advantage of that to inform your go to market strategy. </p><p><br></p><p>We also talked about how the millions of home users who will never pay Nextcloud are still extremely valuable to the company — and why Frank think it’s really wrong to think of pure open source users as just leads to be converted. </p><p><br></p><p>And much, much more. </p><p><br></p><p>If you’re the founder or leader at an open source company, and you want to be a part of more discussions like this, join us at <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> May 27th and 28th in Paris! </p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode of the Open Source Founders Podcast, I talked with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/frankkarlitschek/">Frank Karlitschek</a>, CEO and founder of <a href="https://nextcloud.com">Nextcloud</a>. Frank is going to be talking specifically about lead generation at <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a>, but in this episode we took a slightly wider view and talked about go to market, for open source companies in general and specifically for Frank’s experience at Nextcloud. </p><p><br></p><p>A couple other things to pull out as takeaways. </p><p><br></p><p>First of all, Frank talks about how he originally planned to target big companies who wanted to keep their data private — but as it turned out, most big companies don’t really care deeply about keeping their data private. On the other hand, the public sector and universities really do care, and those have ended up being a huge part of Nextcloud’s customers. </p><p><br></p><p>Frank also talked about the rather obvious differences in needs between home users and big organizations. Nextcloud has some customers with millions of users — their needs are different from a home user. And as far as home users go, Frank says these users are obviously never going to pay Nextcloud anything. On the other hand, they have built mechanisms into the software to nudge open source instances with over 1,000 users to get in touch to talk about a commercial relationship. </p><p><br></p><p>He also talked specifically about the importance of really talking with your customers and your users — and incorporating their feedback into your product roadmap. For open source companies, you have so much more information and feedback than proprietary companies, and you should take advantage of that to inform your go to market strategy. </p><p><br></p><p>We also talked about how the millions of home users who will never pay Nextcloud are still extremely valuable to the company — and why Frank think it’s really wrong to think of pure open source users as just leads to be converted. </p><p><br></p><p>And much, much more. </p><p><br></p><p>If you’re the founder or leader at an open source company, and you want to be a part of more discussions like this, join us at <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> May 27th and 28th in Paris! </p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Thu, 22 Feb 2024 01:37:17 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/c2304d41/d63a2f02.mp3" length="57800679" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://img.transistorcdn.com/r37zRnJszl-WOD55H1_fY78DVFDwrgUV2nxBFKoQ3rk/rs:fill:0:0:1/w:1400/h:1400/q:60/mb:500000/aHR0cHM6Ly9pbWct/dXBsb2FkLXByb2R1/Y3Rpb24udHJhbnNp/c3Rvci5mbS9lcGlz/b2RlLzE3NDc3OTgv/MTcwODU5NDYzNy1h/cnR3b3JrLmpwZw.jpg"/>
      <itunes:duration>1806</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode of the Open Source Founders Podcast, I talked with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/frankkarlitschek/">Frank Karlitschek</a>, CEO and founder of <a href="https://nextcloud.com">Nextcloud</a>. Frank is going to be talking specifically about lead generation at <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a>, but in this episode we took a slightly wider view and talked about go to market, for open source companies in general and specifically for Frank’s experience at Nextcloud. </p><p><br></p><p>A couple other things to pull out as takeaways. </p><p><br></p><p>First of all, Frank talks about how he originally planned to target big companies who wanted to keep their data private — but as it turned out, most big companies don’t really care deeply about keeping their data private. On the other hand, the public sector and universities really do care, and those have ended up being a huge part of Nextcloud’s customers. </p><p><br></p><p>Frank also talked about the rather obvious differences in needs between home users and big organizations. Nextcloud has some customers with millions of users — their needs are different from a home user. And as far as home users go, Frank says these users are obviously never going to pay Nextcloud anything. On the other hand, they have built mechanisms into the software to nudge open source instances with over 1,000 users to get in touch to talk about a commercial relationship. </p><p><br></p><p>He also talked specifically about the importance of really talking with your customers and your users — and incorporating their feedback into your product roadmap. For open source companies, you have so much more information and feedback than proprietary companies, and you should take advantage of that to inform your go to market strategy. </p><p><br></p><p>We also talked about how the millions of home users who will never pay Nextcloud are still extremely valuable to the company — and why Frank think it’s really wrong to think of pure open source users as just leads to be converted. </p><p><br></p><p>And much, much more. </p><p><br></p><p>If you’re the founder or leader at an open source company, and you want to be a part of more discussions like this, join us at <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a> May 27th and 28th in Paris! </p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Staying Completely Open Source with Ann Schlemmer, CEO of Percona </title>
      <itunes:episode>193</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>193</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Staying Completely Open Source with Ann Schlemmer, CEO of Percona </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">9d804a78-ddee-48cd-999e-cd2e6c1eb874</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/7575cd76</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with Percona CEO Ann Schlemmer. This episode was recorded on site at State of Open Con in London, outside in a van! </p><p><br></p><p>There’s a ton of great info in this episode, too. First of all, Ann talked about being a ‘suit’ in a geek’s world and her career trajectory that led her to lead Percona. She also set the stage around the constraints that Percona has chosen for itself: To be completely open source and only sell services, and to be completely bootstrapped. And what the ramifications of those decisions are for the business. </p><p><br></p><p>Here’s some concrete takeaways:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>The key to thinking about managing the tension between creating a project that’s high quality and still being able to sell services on top of that is to ensure that the services really create value</li><li>There’s a difference in profile between happy anonymous users and happy customers — often customers are operating at scale or are working in companies that simply always have to have support for critical software. But just as importantly, customers are often not database experts —they just need a database that works, and can turn to Percona to be their database experts. </li><li>Founders are often more emotionally attached to aspects of the company that a non-founder CEOs like Ann can sometimes be more analytical about what’s working and what isn’t</li><li>Collaboration isn’t automatic, and how to make it actually happen</li><li>How Ann decides what problems to collaborate with others on, what they don’t collaborate on and when in the project / feature lifecycle they look for collaboration</li></ul><p><br></p><p>We also had a bit of a random conversation about controlling status in relationships — the book we talked is <a href="https://www.thriftbooks.com/w/impro-improvisation-and-the-theatre_keith-johnstone/252896/?resultid=c66bc31c-b75a-4757-bc4d-1e1ad89af25d#edition=702846&amp;idiq=4216829">Impro: Improvisation and the Theatre</a>. And talked about how founders who are ready to step down as CEO can find a replacement and manage the transition. </p><p><br></p><p>Ann’s links:</p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/ann-schlemmer-9103449/">LinkedIn</a></p><p><a href="https://www.percona.com">Percona </a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with Percona CEO Ann Schlemmer. This episode was recorded on site at State of Open Con in London, outside in a van! </p><p><br></p><p>There’s a ton of great info in this episode, too. First of all, Ann talked about being a ‘suit’ in a geek’s world and her career trajectory that led her to lead Percona. She also set the stage around the constraints that Percona has chosen for itself: To be completely open source and only sell services, and to be completely bootstrapped. And what the ramifications of those decisions are for the business. </p><p><br></p><p>Here’s some concrete takeaways:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>The key to thinking about managing the tension between creating a project that’s high quality and still being able to sell services on top of that is to ensure that the services really create value</li><li>There’s a difference in profile between happy anonymous users and happy customers — often customers are operating at scale or are working in companies that simply always have to have support for critical software. But just as importantly, customers are often not database experts —they just need a database that works, and can turn to Percona to be their database experts. </li><li>Founders are often more emotionally attached to aspects of the company that a non-founder CEOs like Ann can sometimes be more analytical about what’s working and what isn’t</li><li>Collaboration isn’t automatic, and how to make it actually happen</li><li>How Ann decides what problems to collaborate with others on, what they don’t collaborate on and when in the project / feature lifecycle they look for collaboration</li></ul><p><br></p><p>We also had a bit of a random conversation about controlling status in relationships — the book we talked is <a href="https://www.thriftbooks.com/w/impro-improvisation-and-the-theatre_keith-johnstone/252896/?resultid=c66bc31c-b75a-4757-bc4d-1e1ad89af25d#edition=702846&amp;idiq=4216829">Impro: Improvisation and the Theatre</a>. And talked about how founders who are ready to step down as CEO can find a replacement and manage the transition. </p><p><br></p><p>Ann’s links:</p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/ann-schlemmer-9103449/">LinkedIn</a></p><p><a href="https://www.percona.com">Percona </a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 21 Feb 2024 01:16:15 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/7575cd76/78aa531d.mp3" length="59258913" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1851</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Open Source, I spoke with Percona CEO Ann Schlemmer. This episode was recorded on site at State of Open Con in London, outside in a van! </p><p><br></p><p>There’s a ton of great info in this episode, too. First of all, Ann talked about being a ‘suit’ in a geek’s world and her career trajectory that led her to lead Percona. She also set the stage around the constraints that Percona has chosen for itself: To be completely open source and only sell services, and to be completely bootstrapped. And what the ramifications of those decisions are for the business. </p><p><br></p><p>Here’s some concrete takeaways:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>The key to thinking about managing the tension between creating a project that’s high quality and still being able to sell services on top of that is to ensure that the services really create value</li><li>There’s a difference in profile between happy anonymous users and happy customers — often customers are operating at scale or are working in companies that simply always have to have support for critical software. But just as importantly, customers are often not database experts —they just need a database that works, and can turn to Percona to be their database experts. </li><li>Founders are often more emotionally attached to aspects of the company that a non-founder CEOs like Ann can sometimes be more analytical about what’s working and what isn’t</li><li>Collaboration isn’t automatic, and how to make it actually happen</li><li>How Ann decides what problems to collaborate with others on, what they don’t collaborate on and when in the project / feature lifecycle they look for collaboration</li></ul><p><br></p><p>We also had a bit of a random conversation about controlling status in relationships — the book we talked is <a href="https://www.thriftbooks.com/w/impro-improvisation-and-the-theatre_keith-johnstone/252896/?resultid=c66bc31c-b75a-4757-bc4d-1e1ad89af25d#edition=702846&amp;idiq=4216829">Impro: Improvisation and the Theatre</a>. And talked about how founders who are ready to step down as CEO can find a replacement and manage the transition. </p><p><br></p><p>Ann’s links:</p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/ann-schlemmer-9103449/">LinkedIn</a></p><p><a href="https://www.percona.com">Percona </a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How to decide what goes into project and product with Mike Schwartz of Gluu </title>
      <itunes:episode>192</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>192</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>How to decide what goes into project and product with Mike Schwartz of Gluu </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">5a33b3c1-873e-4f6f-8201-adafeabd63f3</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/9058523a</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode of The Business of Open Source, I talked with four-time entrepreneur <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/nynymike/">Mike Schwartz</a>, CEO and founder of <a href="https://gluu.org">Gluu</a> as well as the host of <a href="https://opensourceunderdogs.com">Open Source Underdogs </a>podcast, about his long career in entrepreneurship. Here’s some particularly interesting things to take out of this episode:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>“Beware an entrepreneur’s second company.” — Mike says his second company was a disaster because he tried to apply the lessons from the first company in the second, and often those lessons aren’t right for the new business</li><li>Going all in on being a product company — the toughest year in Gluu’s history was when they decided to stop consulting and make it or break it as a product company</li><li>Why it’s a good idea to look at the market analytically and start a company in a market you’ll be able to compete in without a huge number of features</li><li>Why Gluu actually has more features in the open source version than the enterprise edition — because the open source distribution gets features that are in beta whereas the enterprise customers need a product that is 100% fully baked. </li><li>Why Mike doesn’t believe in making the enterprise product more ‘scaleable’ — the open source project should be just as scaleable as the enterprise product</li></ul><p><br></p><p>This episode was recorded on site at <a href="https://stateofopencon.com">State of Open Con 24</a>, outside in a media van! </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode of The Business of Open Source, I talked with four-time entrepreneur <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/nynymike/">Mike Schwartz</a>, CEO and founder of <a href="https://gluu.org">Gluu</a> as well as the host of <a href="https://opensourceunderdogs.com">Open Source Underdogs </a>podcast, about his long career in entrepreneurship. Here’s some particularly interesting things to take out of this episode:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>“Beware an entrepreneur’s second company.” — Mike says his second company was a disaster because he tried to apply the lessons from the first company in the second, and often those lessons aren’t right for the new business</li><li>Going all in on being a product company — the toughest year in Gluu’s history was when they decided to stop consulting and make it or break it as a product company</li><li>Why it’s a good idea to look at the market analytically and start a company in a market you’ll be able to compete in without a huge number of features</li><li>Why Gluu actually has more features in the open source version than the enterprise edition — because the open source distribution gets features that are in beta whereas the enterprise customers need a product that is 100% fully baked. </li><li>Why Mike doesn’t believe in making the enterprise product more ‘scaleable’ — the open source project should be just as scaleable as the enterprise product</li></ul><p><br></p><p>This episode was recorded on site at <a href="https://stateofopencon.com">State of Open Con 24</a>, outside in a media van! </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 14 Feb 2024 01:17:52 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/9058523a/195f2eb2.mp3" length="67058042" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2094</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode of The Business of Open Source, I talked with four-time entrepreneur <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/nynymike/">Mike Schwartz</a>, CEO and founder of <a href="https://gluu.org">Gluu</a> as well as the host of <a href="https://opensourceunderdogs.com">Open Source Underdogs </a>podcast, about his long career in entrepreneurship. Here’s some particularly interesting things to take out of this episode:</p><p><br></p><ul><li>“Beware an entrepreneur’s second company.” — Mike says his second company was a disaster because he tried to apply the lessons from the first company in the second, and often those lessons aren’t right for the new business</li><li>Going all in on being a product company — the toughest year in Gluu’s history was when they decided to stop consulting and make it or break it as a product company</li><li>Why it’s a good idea to look at the market analytically and start a company in a market you’ll be able to compete in without a huge number of features</li><li>Why Gluu actually has more features in the open source version than the enterprise edition — because the open source distribution gets features that are in beta whereas the enterprise customers need a product that is 100% fully baked. </li><li>Why Mike doesn’t believe in making the enterprise product more ‘scaleable’ — the open source project should be just as scaleable as the enterprise product</li></ul><p><br></p><p>This episode was recorded on site at <a href="https://stateofopencon.com">State of Open Con 24</a>, outside in a media van! </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>OSFS Special Episode: Peter Zaitsev Talks Sales </title>
      <itunes:episode>191</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>191</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>OSFS Special Episode: Peter Zaitsev Talks Sales </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">6ed45205-cd12-4238-8d99-ea0064d0ff90</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/dc85c208</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>As part of the preparation for <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a>, I’m interviewing both our speakers and our attendees for a special podcast that’s hyper focused on one thing. In this episode I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/peterzaitsev/">Peter Zaitsev</a>, founder of <a href="https://www.percona.com">Percona</a>, about sales. We talked about the specifics of sales as a bootstrapped company — which means sales are exceptionally critical from the beginning, and how sales changed as the company moved from a consulting model to a support model on the open source software that Percona creates. </p><p><br></p><p>Also, this episode was recorded on site at OpenUK’s <a href="https://stateofopencon.com">State of Open Con! </a></p><p><br></p><p>Here’s the concrete takeaways from this episode: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Even before starting the company, Peter had built up a personal brand as a MySql expert — this is what made it possible for him to get consulting gigs pretty much immediately</li><li>Peter’s personal brand wasn’t just around MySql in general, but was very specifically focused on MySql performance optimization</li><li>How a growing team meant that the sales process had to get much more disciplined — and deal sizes had to get bigger so that it’s worth the sales team’s time </li><li>How to align sales incentives with your business goals — how it’s important to adjust sales quotas and incentives so that sales people don’t oversell, which can hurt your reputation long-term, and don’t sell long-term agreements at too much of a discount. </li><li>Why it’s important to separate out your revenue that comes from new customers and your revenue that comes from customer renewals, and how to do so in the organization</li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>If you want more opportunities to go in-depth on sales for open source companies — and to discuss sales and other aspects of business development with other founders, join us May 27th and 28th in Paris at <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit.</a> </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>As part of the preparation for <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a>, I’m interviewing both our speakers and our attendees for a special podcast that’s hyper focused on one thing. In this episode I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/peterzaitsev/">Peter Zaitsev</a>, founder of <a href="https://www.percona.com">Percona</a>, about sales. We talked about the specifics of sales as a bootstrapped company — which means sales are exceptionally critical from the beginning, and how sales changed as the company moved from a consulting model to a support model on the open source software that Percona creates. </p><p><br></p><p>Also, this episode was recorded on site at OpenUK’s <a href="https://stateofopencon.com">State of Open Con! </a></p><p><br></p><p>Here’s the concrete takeaways from this episode: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Even before starting the company, Peter had built up a personal brand as a MySql expert — this is what made it possible for him to get consulting gigs pretty much immediately</li><li>Peter’s personal brand wasn’t just around MySql in general, but was very specifically focused on MySql performance optimization</li><li>How a growing team meant that the sales process had to get much more disciplined — and deal sizes had to get bigger so that it’s worth the sales team’s time </li><li>How to align sales incentives with your business goals — how it’s important to adjust sales quotas and incentives so that sales people don’t oversell, which can hurt your reputation long-term, and don’t sell long-term agreements at too much of a discount. </li><li>Why it’s important to separate out your revenue that comes from new customers and your revenue that comes from customer renewals, and how to do so in the organization</li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>If you want more opportunities to go in-depth on sales for open source companies — and to discuss sales and other aspects of business development with other founders, join us May 27th and 28th in Paris at <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit.</a> </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Mon, 12 Feb 2024 01:52:46 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/dc85c208/d25a6f9a.mp3" length="64886742" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://img.transistorcdn.com/sq14QBEE_Yxsy_DVAM4EkA2zhPwuAEAK3LFzECKtTbE/rs:fill:0:0:1/w:1400/h:1400/q:60/mb:500000/aHR0cHM6Ly9pbWct/dXBsb2FkLXByb2R1/Y3Rpb24udHJhbnNp/c3Rvci5mbS9lcGlz/b2RlLzE3Mjc5OTUv/MTcwNzczMTU2Ni1h/cnR3b3JrLmpwZw.jpg"/>
      <itunes:duration>2028</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>As part of the preparation for <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a>, I’m interviewing both our speakers and our attendees for a special podcast that’s hyper focused on one thing. In this episode I spoke with <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/peterzaitsev/">Peter Zaitsev</a>, founder of <a href="https://www.percona.com">Percona</a>, about sales. We talked about the specifics of sales as a bootstrapped company — which means sales are exceptionally critical from the beginning, and how sales changed as the company moved from a consulting model to a support model on the open source software that Percona creates. </p><p><br></p><p>Also, this episode was recorded on site at OpenUK’s <a href="https://stateofopencon.com">State of Open Con! </a></p><p><br></p><p>Here’s the concrete takeaways from this episode: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Even before starting the company, Peter had built up a personal brand as a MySql expert — this is what made it possible for him to get consulting gigs pretty much immediately</li><li>Peter’s personal brand wasn’t just around MySql in general, but was very specifically focused on MySql performance optimization</li><li>How a growing team meant that the sales process had to get much more disciplined — and deal sizes had to get bigger so that it’s worth the sales team’s time </li><li>How to align sales incentives with your business goals — how it’s important to adjust sales quotas and incentives so that sales people don’t oversell, which can hurt your reputation long-term, and don’t sell long-term agreements at too much of a discount. </li><li>Why it’s important to separate out your revenue that comes from new customers and your revenue that comes from customer renewals, and how to do so in the organization</li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>If you want more opportunities to go in-depth on sales for open source companies — and to discuss sales and other aspects of business development with other founders, join us May 27th and 28th in Paris at <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit.</a> </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Staying True to Your Community and Your Bottom Line with Garima Kapoor</title>
      <itunes:episode>190</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>190</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Staying True to Your Community and Your Bottom Line with Garima Kapoor</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">5f7c0a2c-bb12-4cd0-9cd9-06f0805e78d4</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/de30cd69</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Garima Kapoor, COO and co-founder of MinIO, joins me to share her journey from investor and advisor to co-founder of MinIO and the wealth of knowledge she’s amassed along the way. </p><p>In this episode, Garima explains how her experience in finance and belief in the power of open source helped MinIO to break into the data storage market. She also reviews the challenges she faced as a first-time founder and what others can learn from her mistakes and take away from some of their own. Since Garima started her journey with MinIO as CFO, she outlines that role for me and explains how she thinks a CFO should operate in an open source company. In reviewing mistakes she’s seen from other founders, Garima states some principles that create the “foundation for any open source business.”  - “You should always be very honest to your community. You should always be very transparent to the community”</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Garima introduces herself and explains why she and her co-founders started <a href="http://Min.io">MinIO</a> (1:31)</li><li>Garima describes how the <a href="http://Min.io">MinIO</a> founders honed in on a problem they wanted to solve (3:55)</li><li>How the MinIO founders used open source crack the market (6:37)</li><li>What triggers a user to purchase a commercial license for the product (10:33)</li><li>Garima explains why she and her cofounders were set on their open source strategy from day one (11:35)</li><li>Garima explores the differences between being an investor and advisor for other companies and starting her own. (13:25)</li><li>Garima shares go-to-market advice for other founders (15:21)</li><li>Garima outlines her strategy for building on small successes (18:38)</li><li>Garima explains why she started as CFO for MinIO and breaks down the role a CFO can play in a new company (21:46)</li><li>Why Garima thinks a CFO’s role remains the same in an open source company as compared to a proprietary company (27:17)</li><li>How to avoid competing with your open source product when you also have a commercial offering (34:06)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Garima</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/garimakap/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/garimakap/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/garimakap">https://twitter.com/garimakap</a></li><li>Company: <a href="http://min.io">min.io</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Garima Kapoor, COO and co-founder of MinIO, joins me to share her journey from investor and advisor to co-founder of MinIO and the wealth of knowledge she’s amassed along the way. </p><p>In this episode, Garima explains how her experience in finance and belief in the power of open source helped MinIO to break into the data storage market. She also reviews the challenges she faced as a first-time founder and what others can learn from her mistakes and take away from some of their own. Since Garima started her journey with MinIO as CFO, she outlines that role for me and explains how she thinks a CFO should operate in an open source company. In reviewing mistakes she’s seen from other founders, Garima states some principles that create the “foundation for any open source business.”  - “You should always be very honest to your community. You should always be very transparent to the community”</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Garima introduces herself and explains why she and her co-founders started <a href="http://Min.io">MinIO</a> (1:31)</li><li>Garima describes how the <a href="http://Min.io">MinIO</a> founders honed in on a problem they wanted to solve (3:55)</li><li>How the MinIO founders used open source crack the market (6:37)</li><li>What triggers a user to purchase a commercial license for the product (10:33)</li><li>Garima explains why she and her cofounders were set on their open source strategy from day one (11:35)</li><li>Garima explores the differences between being an investor and advisor for other companies and starting her own. (13:25)</li><li>Garima shares go-to-market advice for other founders (15:21)</li><li>Garima outlines her strategy for building on small successes (18:38)</li><li>Garima explains why she started as CFO for MinIO and breaks down the role a CFO can play in a new company (21:46)</li><li>Why Garima thinks a CFO’s role remains the same in an open source company as compared to a proprietary company (27:17)</li><li>How to avoid competing with your open source product when you also have a commercial offering (34:06)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Garima</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/garimakap/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/garimakap/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/garimakap">https://twitter.com/garimakap</a></li><li>Company: <a href="http://min.io">min.io</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 07 Feb 2024 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/de30cd69/f936e793.mp3" length="32964595" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2349</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Garima Kapoor, COO and co-founder of MinIO, joins me to share her journey from investor and advisor to co-founder of MinIO and the wealth of knowledge she’s amassed along the way. </p><p>In this episode, Garima explains how her experience in finance and belief in the power of open source helped MinIO to break into the data storage market. She also reviews the challenges she faced as a first-time founder and what others can learn from her mistakes and take away from some of their own. Since Garima started her journey with MinIO as CFO, she outlines that role for me and explains how she thinks a CFO should operate in an open source company. In reviewing mistakes she’s seen from other founders, Garima states some principles that create the “foundation for any open source business.”  - “You should always be very honest to your community. You should always be very transparent to the community”</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Garima introduces herself and explains why she and her co-founders started <a href="http://Min.io">MinIO</a> (1:31)</li><li>Garima describes how the <a href="http://Min.io">MinIO</a> founders honed in on a problem they wanted to solve (3:55)</li><li>How the MinIO founders used open source crack the market (6:37)</li><li>What triggers a user to purchase a commercial license for the product (10:33)</li><li>Garima explains why she and her cofounders were set on their open source strategy from day one (11:35)</li><li>Garima explores the differences between being an investor and advisor for other companies and starting her own. (13:25)</li><li>Garima shares go-to-market advice for other founders (15:21)</li><li>Garima outlines her strategy for building on small successes (18:38)</li><li>Garima explains why she started as CFO for MinIO and breaks down the role a CFO can play in a new company (21:46)</li><li>Why Garima thinks a CFO’s role remains the same in an open source company as compared to a proprietary company (27:17)</li><li>How to avoid competing with your open source product when you also have a commercial offering (34:06)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Garima</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/garimakap/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/garimakap/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/garimakap">https://twitter.com/garimakap</a></li><li>Company: <a href="http://min.io">min.io</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Making the Critical Pivot from Closed to Open Source with Federico Wengi</title>
      <itunes:episode>188</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>188</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Making the Critical Pivot from Closed to Open Source with Federico Wengi</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">6b9666db-5cb7-41c3-813a-d78dce81ce91</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/33e7b5fa</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I’m joined by Federico Wengi, who is a Partner at SquareOne VC. In this conversation, Federico sheds light on the conversations he’s had with many companies who consider making the pivot from a closed-source business strategy to an open-source strategy. Federico explains why it’s so uncommon for businesses to make that pivot, and lays out the challenges businesses face when they consider taking on such a change. Federico also gives a great example of a company that did successfully complete the pivot to open source, and the choices they made that led to their success. Federico and I discuss why this is one pivot you can’t take back, and also why it won’t solve all your problems. Despite all that, Federico shares his optimism for the value of open source and the importance of at least considering this strategy when you need to make a change. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Intro (00:00)</li><li>I introduce Federico, who is a Partner at SquareOne (00:59)</li><li>Federico describes his role at SquareOne and the areas of investment they focus on (01:28)</li><li>What Federico typically sees when companies move from closed source to open source (04:42)</li><li>How important conversations come up about business strategy and open source versus closed source (07:40)</li><li>Why many companies end up not pursuing an open-source strategy (11:17)</li><li>Federico tells the story of a company he worked with that made the leap from closed source to open source (15:03)</li><li>The most critical things businesses have to do in order to utilize an open-source strategy (16:23)</li><li>What decisions led to success in the company Federico helped shift from closed source to open source (18:09)</li><li>The psychological challenges leaders face when considering making a pivot to open source (23:54)</li><li>Federico shares the advice he would give to a founder who’s considering an open-source strategy (26:40)</li><li>How you can connect with Federico (31:40)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Federico</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/federicowengi/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/federicowengi/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/federicowengi">https://twitter.com/federicowengi</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://squareone.vc/">https://squareone.vc/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I’m joined by Federico Wengi, who is a Partner at SquareOne VC. In this conversation, Federico sheds light on the conversations he’s had with many companies who consider making the pivot from a closed-source business strategy to an open-source strategy. Federico explains why it’s so uncommon for businesses to make that pivot, and lays out the challenges businesses face when they consider taking on such a change. Federico also gives a great example of a company that did successfully complete the pivot to open source, and the choices they made that led to their success. Federico and I discuss why this is one pivot you can’t take back, and also why it won’t solve all your problems. Despite all that, Federico shares his optimism for the value of open source and the importance of at least considering this strategy when you need to make a change. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Intro (00:00)</li><li>I introduce Federico, who is a Partner at SquareOne (00:59)</li><li>Federico describes his role at SquareOne and the areas of investment they focus on (01:28)</li><li>What Federico typically sees when companies move from closed source to open source (04:42)</li><li>How important conversations come up about business strategy and open source versus closed source (07:40)</li><li>Why many companies end up not pursuing an open-source strategy (11:17)</li><li>Federico tells the story of a company he worked with that made the leap from closed source to open source (15:03)</li><li>The most critical things businesses have to do in order to utilize an open-source strategy (16:23)</li><li>What decisions led to success in the company Federico helped shift from closed source to open source (18:09)</li><li>The psychological challenges leaders face when considering making a pivot to open source (23:54)</li><li>Federico shares the advice he would give to a founder who’s considering an open-source strategy (26:40)</li><li>How you can connect with Federico (31:40)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Federico</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/federicowengi/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/federicowengi/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/federicowengi">https://twitter.com/federicowengi</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://squareone.vc/">https://squareone.vc/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 31 Jan 2024 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/33e7b5fa/fb1e8c80.mp3" length="27617634" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1967</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I’m joined by Federico Wengi, who is a Partner at SquareOne VC. In this conversation, Federico sheds light on the conversations he’s had with many companies who consider making the pivot from a closed-source business strategy to an open-source strategy. Federico explains why it’s so uncommon for businesses to make that pivot, and lays out the challenges businesses face when they consider taking on such a change. Federico also gives a great example of a company that did successfully complete the pivot to open source, and the choices they made that led to their success. Federico and I discuss why this is one pivot you can’t take back, and also why it won’t solve all your problems. Despite all that, Federico shares his optimism for the value of open source and the importance of at least considering this strategy when you need to make a change. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Intro (00:00)</li><li>I introduce Federico, who is a Partner at SquareOne (00:59)</li><li>Federico describes his role at SquareOne and the areas of investment they focus on (01:28)</li><li>What Federico typically sees when companies move from closed source to open source (04:42)</li><li>How important conversations come up about business strategy and open source versus closed source (07:40)</li><li>Why many companies end up not pursuing an open-source strategy (11:17)</li><li>Federico tells the story of a company he worked with that made the leap from closed source to open source (15:03)</li><li>The most critical things businesses have to do in order to utilize an open-source strategy (16:23)</li><li>What decisions led to success in the company Federico helped shift from closed source to open source (18:09)</li><li>The psychological challenges leaders face when considering making a pivot to open source (23:54)</li><li>Federico shares the advice he would give to a founder who’s considering an open-source strategy (26:40)</li><li>How you can connect with Federico (31:40)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Federico</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/federicowengi/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/federicowengi/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/federicowengi">https://twitter.com/federicowengi</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://squareone.vc/">https://squareone.vc/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Emily Omier and Remy Bertot Talk About Open Source Founders Summit</title>
      <itunes:episode>189</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>189</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Emily Omier and Remy Bertot Talk About Open Source Founders Summit</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>bonus</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">1fd471f8-66e2-431c-a5fa-9c8af24b96be</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/7142973c</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>How can we get founders of open source companies together to share ideas, share strategies and tactics and build a community not just of open source practitioners, but of open source business owners? We create a conference/summit/retreat to bring them together to learn and to work on their businesses together. At least that is the bet that Remy Bertot and I are making</p><p>In this episode, I talked with Remy about <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a>, a summit they're organizing on May 27th and 28th, 2024 in Paris, France — we each shared our motivations for organizing the event, and talked about why we think it's important for people to come together in person. </p><p>You should listen to the episode, but if you don't want to, the bottom line is that we think there needs to be a space for all open source founders (not just the DevTools, not just the VC-backed) can come together to share <strong>business</strong> ideas — a place where business, not tech, is the focus. </p><p>Listen to the episode, and join us in May! <br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>How can we get founders of open source companies together to share ideas, share strategies and tactics and build a community not just of open source practitioners, but of open source business owners? We create a conference/summit/retreat to bring them together to learn and to work on their businesses together. At least that is the bet that Remy Bertot and I are making</p><p>In this episode, I talked with Remy about <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a>, a summit they're organizing on May 27th and 28th, 2024 in Paris, France — we each shared our motivations for organizing the event, and talked about why we think it's important for people to come together in person. </p><p>You should listen to the episode, but if you don't want to, the bottom line is that we think there needs to be a space for all open source founders (not just the DevTools, not just the VC-backed) can come together to share <strong>business</strong> ideas — a place where business, not tech, is the focus. </p><p>Listen to the episode, and join us in May! <br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Mon, 29 Jan 2024 01:03:43 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/7142973c/fbb64341.mp3" length="17819120" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:image href="https://img.transistorcdn.com/CLpSOro9VYKN_CaP30EL1F7hY8Ea6fsviMpHqqi_5E4/rs:fill:0:0:1/w:1400/h:1400/q:60/mb:500000/aHR0cHM6Ly9pbWct/dXBsb2FkLXByb2R1/Y3Rpb24udHJhbnNp/c3Rvci5mbS9lcGlz/b2RlLzE3MDc1NTEv/MTcwNjUxOTAyMy1h/cnR3b3JrLmpwZw.jpg"/>
      <itunes:duration>742</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>How can we get founders of open source companies together to share ideas, share strategies and tactics and build a community not just of open source practitioners, but of open source business owners? We create a conference/summit/retreat to bring them together to learn and to work on their businesses together. At least that is the bet that Remy Bertot and I are making</p><p>In this episode, I talked with Remy about <a href="http://05f5.com">Open Source Founders Summit</a>, a summit they're organizing on May 27th and 28th, 2024 in Paris, France — we each shared our motivations for organizing the event, and talked about why we think it's important for people to come together in person. </p><p>You should listen to the episode, but if you don't want to, the bottom line is that we think there needs to be a space for all open source founders (not just the DevTools, not just the VC-backed) can come together to share <strong>business</strong> ideas — a place where business, not tech, is the focus. </p><p>Listen to the episode, and join us in May! <br></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>Yes</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Timing the Evolution of a Successful Open-Source Project with Ben Haynes</title>
      <itunes:episode>187</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>187</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Timing the Evolution of a Successful Open-Source Project with Ben Haynes</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">710c7f9e-0475-4fc0-ae85-e6989386e16a</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/4b9dbedf</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ben Haynes, the Founder and CEO of Directus, created an open-source project while working at his own agency in 2004. In this episode, we explore how he went from maintaining an open-source project to building an open-source company with a solid product-led growth strategy, and how he’s achieved success in the enterprise segment even as a small organization. Ben expands on how he feels open-source is the best way to start a business, and also reveals why timing and transparency can be both your greatest assets and the areas where you have the most regrets if not done right. We also discuss the value of optimizing you product and business for working with government agencies as an open-source company. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Intro (00:00)</li><li>I introduce Ben Haynes, who is the CEO and Founder of Directus (00:59)</li><li>How the Directus platform has evolved over time (02:33)</li><li>Ben tells the story of what happened after the initial release of the Directus project in 2004 (06:06)</li><li>The strategy Directus has used to land enterprise customers as a small company (10:20)</li><li>Ben and I discuss the importance of early-stage open-source companies optimizing to work with government agencies (13:59)</li><li>Ben describes the SaaS business model that he chose for Directus (16:38)</li><li>Why Ben feels that open-source is the best strategy for starting a company (25:19)</li><li>How Ben landed on a product-led growth strategy for Directus (27:39)</li><li>What Ben learned about mistakes he made in timing his product and company (31:23)</li><li>The advice Ben would give to another open-source founder (33:52)</li><li>How listeners can learn more about Directus and connect with Ben (39:32)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Ben</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/contactbenhaynes/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/contactbenhaynes/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/benhaynes">https://twitter.com/benhaynes</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://directus.io/">https://directus.io/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ben Haynes, the Founder and CEO of Directus, created an open-source project while working at his own agency in 2004. In this episode, we explore how he went from maintaining an open-source project to building an open-source company with a solid product-led growth strategy, and how he’s achieved success in the enterprise segment even as a small organization. Ben expands on how he feels open-source is the best way to start a business, and also reveals why timing and transparency can be both your greatest assets and the areas where you have the most regrets if not done right. We also discuss the value of optimizing you product and business for working with government agencies as an open-source company. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Intro (00:00)</li><li>I introduce Ben Haynes, who is the CEO and Founder of Directus (00:59)</li><li>How the Directus platform has evolved over time (02:33)</li><li>Ben tells the story of what happened after the initial release of the Directus project in 2004 (06:06)</li><li>The strategy Directus has used to land enterprise customers as a small company (10:20)</li><li>Ben and I discuss the importance of early-stage open-source companies optimizing to work with government agencies (13:59)</li><li>Ben describes the SaaS business model that he chose for Directus (16:38)</li><li>Why Ben feels that open-source is the best strategy for starting a company (25:19)</li><li>How Ben landed on a product-led growth strategy for Directus (27:39)</li><li>What Ben learned about mistakes he made in timing his product and company (31:23)</li><li>The advice Ben would give to another open-source founder (33:52)</li><li>How listeners can learn more about Directus and connect with Ben (39:32)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Ben</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/contactbenhaynes/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/contactbenhaynes/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/benhaynes">https://twitter.com/benhaynes</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://directus.io/">https://directus.io/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 24 Jan 2024 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/4b9dbedf/49fea205.mp3" length="34234360" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2440</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ben Haynes, the Founder and CEO of Directus, created an open-source project while working at his own agency in 2004. In this episode, we explore how he went from maintaining an open-source project to building an open-source company with a solid product-led growth strategy, and how he’s achieved success in the enterprise segment even as a small organization. Ben expands on how he feels open-source is the best way to start a business, and also reveals why timing and transparency can be both your greatest assets and the areas where you have the most regrets if not done right. We also discuss the value of optimizing you product and business for working with government agencies as an open-source company. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Intro (00:00)</li><li>I introduce Ben Haynes, who is the CEO and Founder of Directus (00:59)</li><li>How the Directus platform has evolved over time (02:33)</li><li>Ben tells the story of what happened after the initial release of the Directus project in 2004 (06:06)</li><li>The strategy Directus has used to land enterprise customers as a small company (10:20)</li><li>Ben and I discuss the importance of early-stage open-source companies optimizing to work with government agencies (13:59)</li><li>Ben describes the SaaS business model that he chose for Directus (16:38)</li><li>Why Ben feels that open-source is the best strategy for starting a company (25:19)</li><li>How Ben landed on a product-led growth strategy for Directus (27:39)</li><li>What Ben learned about mistakes he made in timing his product and company (31:23)</li><li>The advice Ben would give to another open-source founder (33:52)</li><li>How listeners can learn more about Directus and connect with Ben (39:32)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Ben</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/contactbenhaynes/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/contactbenhaynes/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/benhaynes">https://twitter.com/benhaynes</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://directus.io/">https://directus.io/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>The Human Cost of Increasing Freemium Users with Peer Richelsen</title>
      <itunes:episode>186</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>186</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>The Human Cost of Increasing Freemium Users with Peer Richelsen</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">6c27c278-8417-49e6-b9d2-12081fffbea0</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/0d4b6f50</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Peer Richelsen is the Co-founder of Cal.com, an open-source calendar scheduling tool. This week, Peer and I discuss his personal experience with needing a customizable scheduling tool, the big leap from taking donations to running a profitable business, and the thought process behind seeking VC funding. Peer also talks about the major advantage of starting with only a paid version of the product in order to build a small community of super users. Lastly, I pick Peer’s brain about how he feels being constantly compared to non open-source scheduling products.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Intro (00:00) </li><li>I introduce Peer Richelsen, the Co-founder of Cal.com, and he discusses the company and its calendar scheduling tool (00:59)</li><li>Does Peer think about <a href="http://Cal.com">Cal.com</a> as a dev tool (2:09)</li><li>What is Cal.com’s business model (03:57)</li><li>The lack of customizability in the scheduling tool marketplace (06:15)</li><li>Switching from accepting donations to selling a profitable product (09:48)</li><li>Launching without a free version (12:50)</li><li>The human cost of freemium usage (16:20)</li><li>The decision to raise VC funds (17:41)</li><li>What business value being open source brings to the company (20:48)</li><li>How <a href="http://Cal.com">Cal.com</a> positions itself in the market (24:13)</li><li>Interesting mistakes Peer has made as an entrepreneur (28:22)</li><li>How “free” is the software (30:57)</li><li>Peer’s parting words (32:27)</li><li>Where listeners can connect with Peer and learn more about Cal.com (33:04)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Peer</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/peer-richelsen-221233138/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/peer-richelsen-221233138/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="http://x.com/peer_rich">@peer_rich</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://cal.com/">https://cal.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Peer Richelsen is the Co-founder of Cal.com, an open-source calendar scheduling tool. This week, Peer and I discuss his personal experience with needing a customizable scheduling tool, the big leap from taking donations to running a profitable business, and the thought process behind seeking VC funding. Peer also talks about the major advantage of starting with only a paid version of the product in order to build a small community of super users. Lastly, I pick Peer’s brain about how he feels being constantly compared to non open-source scheduling products.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Intro (00:00) </li><li>I introduce Peer Richelsen, the Co-founder of Cal.com, and he discusses the company and its calendar scheduling tool (00:59)</li><li>Does Peer think about <a href="http://Cal.com">Cal.com</a> as a dev tool (2:09)</li><li>What is Cal.com’s business model (03:57)</li><li>The lack of customizability in the scheduling tool marketplace (06:15)</li><li>Switching from accepting donations to selling a profitable product (09:48)</li><li>Launching without a free version (12:50)</li><li>The human cost of freemium usage (16:20)</li><li>The decision to raise VC funds (17:41)</li><li>What business value being open source brings to the company (20:48)</li><li>How <a href="http://Cal.com">Cal.com</a> positions itself in the market (24:13)</li><li>Interesting mistakes Peer has made as an entrepreneur (28:22)</li><li>How “free” is the software (30:57)</li><li>Peer’s parting words (32:27)</li><li>Where listeners can connect with Peer and learn more about Cal.com (33:04)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Peer</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/peer-richelsen-221233138/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/peer-richelsen-221233138/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="http://x.com/peer_rich">@peer_rich</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://cal.com/">https://cal.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 17 Jan 2024 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/0d4b6f50/7f355bb2.mp3" length="28941388" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2062</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Peer Richelsen is the Co-founder of Cal.com, an open-source calendar scheduling tool. This week, Peer and I discuss his personal experience with needing a customizable scheduling tool, the big leap from taking donations to running a profitable business, and the thought process behind seeking VC funding. Peer also talks about the major advantage of starting with only a paid version of the product in order to build a small community of super users. Lastly, I pick Peer’s brain about how he feels being constantly compared to non open-source scheduling products.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Intro (00:00) </li><li>I introduce Peer Richelsen, the Co-founder of Cal.com, and he discusses the company and its calendar scheduling tool (00:59)</li><li>Does Peer think about <a href="http://Cal.com">Cal.com</a> as a dev tool (2:09)</li><li>What is Cal.com’s business model (03:57)</li><li>The lack of customizability in the scheduling tool marketplace (06:15)</li><li>Switching from accepting donations to selling a profitable product (09:48)</li><li>Launching without a free version (12:50)</li><li>The human cost of freemium usage (16:20)</li><li>The decision to raise VC funds (17:41)</li><li>What business value being open source brings to the company (20:48)</li><li>How <a href="http://Cal.com">Cal.com</a> positions itself in the market (24:13)</li><li>Interesting mistakes Peer has made as an entrepreneur (28:22)</li><li>How “free” is the software (30:57)</li><li>Peer’s parting words (32:27)</li><li>Where listeners can connect with Peer and learn more about Cal.com (33:04)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Peer</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/peer-richelsen-221233138/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/peer-richelsen-221233138/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="http://x.com/peer_rich">@peer_rich</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://cal.com/">https://cal.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>Yes</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Balancing Community and Monetization in Open Source with Birthe Lindenthal</title>
      <itunes:episode>185</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>185</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Balancing Community and Monetization in Open Source with Birthe Lindenthal</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">b2e46874-dcc9-491a-8cf2-521915e50df5</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/5e56a11c</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Birthe Lindenthal is the Co-founder and CMO of OpenProject, a web-based project management system. On this episode, Birthe and I discuss the inception of the company, how being open source directly benefits both the business and its customers, and why the connection to their community is so strong. Plus, Birthe talks about the motivation she feels when contributing to something larger than herself, including the joy of knowing NGOs use her product for free. We also discuss the unique challenges of marketing an open-source product. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Intro (00:00)</li><li>I introduce Birthe Lindenthal, the Co-founder and CMO of OpenProject, and she gives us her background along with the company’s history (00:59)</li><li>How OpenProject used custom developments to fund the business (02:42)</li><li>The pros and cons of not taking VC funding (04:15)</li><li>Ways in which being open source benefit the business and the customers (06:09)</li><li>How OpenProject was able to monetize the user base (08:34)</li><li>The division of revenue and users between on-prem and cloud versions of the software (10:24)</li><li>Who are OpenProject’s customers and users (13:57)</li><li>The most interesting mistakes Birthe made along the way (16:44)</li><li>Merging branding between the free and paid versions (18:52)</li><li>Why Birthe got involved with open source (22:38)</li><li>Marketing challenges and strategies specific to an open-source product (24:47)</li><li>The surprising difficulty of creating a glossary of company terminology (29:11)</li><li>Birthe’s advice for founders of open-source companies (31:02)</li><li>Where listeners can connect with Birthe and learn more about OpenProject (32:05)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Birthe</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/birthe-lindenthal/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/birthe-lindenthal/</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.openproject.org/">https://www.openproject.org/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Birthe Lindenthal is the Co-founder and CMO of OpenProject, a web-based project management system. On this episode, Birthe and I discuss the inception of the company, how being open source directly benefits both the business and its customers, and why the connection to their community is so strong. Plus, Birthe talks about the motivation she feels when contributing to something larger than herself, including the joy of knowing NGOs use her product for free. We also discuss the unique challenges of marketing an open-source product. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Intro (00:00)</li><li>I introduce Birthe Lindenthal, the Co-founder and CMO of OpenProject, and she gives us her background along with the company’s history (00:59)</li><li>How OpenProject used custom developments to fund the business (02:42)</li><li>The pros and cons of not taking VC funding (04:15)</li><li>Ways in which being open source benefit the business and the customers (06:09)</li><li>How OpenProject was able to monetize the user base (08:34)</li><li>The division of revenue and users between on-prem and cloud versions of the software (10:24)</li><li>Who are OpenProject’s customers and users (13:57)</li><li>The most interesting mistakes Birthe made along the way (16:44)</li><li>Merging branding between the free and paid versions (18:52)</li><li>Why Birthe got involved with open source (22:38)</li><li>Marketing challenges and strategies specific to an open-source product (24:47)</li><li>The surprising difficulty of creating a glossary of company terminology (29:11)</li><li>Birthe’s advice for founders of open-source companies (31:02)</li><li>Where listeners can connect with Birthe and learn more about OpenProject (32:05)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Birthe</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/birthe-lindenthal/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/birthe-lindenthal/</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.openproject.org/">https://www.openproject.org/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 10 Jan 2024 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/5e56a11c/c57571dd.mp3" length="28047831" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1998</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Birthe Lindenthal is the Co-founder and CMO of OpenProject, a web-based project management system. On this episode, Birthe and I discuss the inception of the company, how being open source directly benefits both the business and its customers, and why the connection to their community is so strong. Plus, Birthe talks about the motivation she feels when contributing to something larger than herself, including the joy of knowing NGOs use her product for free. We also discuss the unique challenges of marketing an open-source product. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Intro (00:00)</li><li>I introduce Birthe Lindenthal, the Co-founder and CMO of OpenProject, and she gives us her background along with the company’s history (00:59)</li><li>How OpenProject used custom developments to fund the business (02:42)</li><li>The pros and cons of not taking VC funding (04:15)</li><li>Ways in which being open source benefit the business and the customers (06:09)</li><li>How OpenProject was able to monetize the user base (08:34)</li><li>The division of revenue and users between on-prem and cloud versions of the software (10:24)</li><li>Who are OpenProject’s customers and users (13:57)</li><li>The most interesting mistakes Birthe made along the way (16:44)</li><li>Merging branding between the free and paid versions (18:52)</li><li>Why Birthe got involved with open source (22:38)</li><li>Marketing challenges and strategies specific to an open-source product (24:47)</li><li>The surprising difficulty of creating a glossary of company terminology (29:11)</li><li>Birthe’s advice for founders of open-source companies (31:02)</li><li>Where listeners can connect with Birthe and learn more about OpenProject (32:05)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Birthe</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/birthe-lindenthal/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/birthe-lindenthal/</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.openproject.org/">https://www.openproject.org/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>From 4,000 GitHub Stars to a Successful Open Source Business with Didier Lopes of OpenBB</title>
      <itunes:episode>184</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>184</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>From 4,000 GitHub Stars to a Successful Open Source Business with Didier Lopes of OpenBB</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">cee0ecf6-fab6-4dc6-8f12-e4494e137991</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/fc5b7823</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Didier Lopes, Co-founder and CEO of OpenBB, joins me to share the story of how OpenBB went from receiving 4000 GitHub stars in the first 24 hours of the project to a fully funded company launching new monetization initiatives. </p><p>Didier and I chat about his background, what led him to start OpenBB in his spare time, and his vision for the company's future. He shares the story of teaming up with his co-founder, why he loves working in the open source ecosystem, and how his team continues contributing to OpenBB's success. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Didier introduces himself and recounts his background and what led him to start OpenBB (1:20)</li><li>Why Didier didn't know OpenBB would become a business when he started the project (6:47)</li><li>Didier affirms my thought that part of what makes OpneBB's origin interesting is that the idea was unrelated to his day job. (10:13)</li><li>Didier tells the story of how his co-founder, James, came on board once the project went viral (16:36)</li><li>How OpenBB has changed since the project began (19:16)</li><li>How open source has shaped the development of OpenBB (21:35)</li><li>Didier outlines the current monetization plans for OpenBB (24:44)</li><li>Didier's vision for the future of OpenBB and the democratization of investment research (26:30)</li><li>What Didier learned from his most interesting mistake - believing users know what they want. (29:45)</li><li>Didier emphasizes the importance of building a cohesive team with shared values (32:58)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Didier</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/didier-lopes/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/didier-lopes/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/didier_lopes">@didier_lopes</a></li><li>Company: <a href="http://openbb.co">http://openbb.co</a></li><li>Personal Site: <a href="https://didierlopes.com">https://didierlopes.com</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Didier Lopes, Co-founder and CEO of OpenBB, joins me to share the story of how OpenBB went from receiving 4000 GitHub stars in the first 24 hours of the project to a fully funded company launching new monetization initiatives. </p><p>Didier and I chat about his background, what led him to start OpenBB in his spare time, and his vision for the company's future. He shares the story of teaming up with his co-founder, why he loves working in the open source ecosystem, and how his team continues contributing to OpenBB's success. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Didier introduces himself and recounts his background and what led him to start OpenBB (1:20)</li><li>Why Didier didn't know OpenBB would become a business when he started the project (6:47)</li><li>Didier affirms my thought that part of what makes OpneBB's origin interesting is that the idea was unrelated to his day job. (10:13)</li><li>Didier tells the story of how his co-founder, James, came on board once the project went viral (16:36)</li><li>How OpenBB has changed since the project began (19:16)</li><li>How open source has shaped the development of OpenBB (21:35)</li><li>Didier outlines the current monetization plans for OpenBB (24:44)</li><li>Didier's vision for the future of OpenBB and the democratization of investment research (26:30)</li><li>What Didier learned from his most interesting mistake - believing users know what they want. (29:45)</li><li>Didier emphasizes the importance of building a cohesive team with shared values (32:58)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Didier</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/didier-lopes/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/didier-lopes/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/didier_lopes">@didier_lopes</a></li><li>Company: <a href="http://openbb.co">http://openbb.co</a></li><li>Personal Site: <a href="https://didierlopes.com">https://didierlopes.com</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 03 Jan 2024 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/fc5b7823/1ce61ef6.mp3" length="30211632" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2153</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Didier Lopes, Co-founder and CEO of OpenBB, joins me to share the story of how OpenBB went from receiving 4000 GitHub stars in the first 24 hours of the project to a fully funded company launching new monetization initiatives. </p><p>Didier and I chat about his background, what led him to start OpenBB in his spare time, and his vision for the company's future. He shares the story of teaming up with his co-founder, why he loves working in the open source ecosystem, and how his team continues contributing to OpenBB's success. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Didier introduces himself and recounts his background and what led him to start OpenBB (1:20)</li><li>Why Didier didn't know OpenBB would become a business when he started the project (6:47)</li><li>Didier affirms my thought that part of what makes OpneBB's origin interesting is that the idea was unrelated to his day job. (10:13)</li><li>Didier tells the story of how his co-founder, James, came on board once the project went viral (16:36)</li><li>How OpenBB has changed since the project began (19:16)</li><li>How open source has shaped the development of OpenBB (21:35)</li><li>Didier outlines the current monetization plans for OpenBB (24:44)</li><li>Didier's vision for the future of OpenBB and the democratization of investment research (26:30)</li><li>What Didier learned from his most interesting mistake - believing users know what they want. (29:45)</li><li>Didier emphasizes the importance of building a cohesive team with shared values (32:58)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Didier</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/didier-lopes/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/didier-lopes/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/didier_lopes">@didier_lopes</a></li><li>Company: <a href="http://openbb.co">http://openbb.co</a></li><li>Personal Site: <a href="https://didierlopes.com">https://didierlopes.com</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>Yes</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How Useful Tools Create Brand Identity and Community with Loris Degioanni</title>
      <itunes:episode>183</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>183</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>How Useful Tools Create Brand Identity and Community with Loris Degioanni</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">65a0001a-112e-4860-ad55-b45de5876dd2</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/754aae56</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Loris Degioanni is the CEO and Founder of Sysdig, an open-source company working to make cloud deployment more secure through the use of runtime insights. Loris and I sit down to discuss the bet Sysdig is making to position itself as a leader in cloud security, how Loris leverages the power of a useful tool to create a brand, and the framework he uses to decide what should be open source and what should be paid for. Loris also shares an in-depth history of his previous company, Wireshark, and his excitement for building open source projects that outlast their business and creators.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Intro (00:00)</li><li>I introduce Loris Degioanni who is the CEO and Founder of Sysdig, and he provides a little bit of context about himself and his company (01:00)</li><li>Loris gives an overview of his previous company, Wireshark (01:57)</li><li>Ways in which Loris was able to commercialize Wireshark as a tool for open-source end-users (04:30)</li><li>How Loris used open-source as a marketing tool to create a profitable business model (07:28)</li><li>The difference between Sysdig and Wireshark in their relationship to open-source (08:57)</li><li>The bet that Sysdig is making and how that positions the company to become a leader in cloud security (12:36)</li><li>Loris and I discuss Wireshark’s continued longevity (15:14)</li><li>Where the inspiration for Sysdig came from and its journey from open-source project to commercial product (19:41)</li><li>How building something useful replaces the need for a sales and marketing team (24:22)</li><li>Closing the gap between the Sysdig project and the Sysdig platform (27:52)</li><li>The framework for deciding what is offered open-source and what needs to be paid for (30:21)</li><li>Loris’s most interesting mistakes in entrepreneurship and building Sysdig (33:20)</li><li>How listeners can connect with Loris and learn more about Falco and Sysdig (36:31)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:<br></strong><br></p><p>Loris</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/degio/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/degio/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/lorisdegio">https://twitter.com/lorisdegio</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://sysdig.com/">https://sysdig.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Loris Degioanni is the CEO and Founder of Sysdig, an open-source company working to make cloud deployment more secure through the use of runtime insights. Loris and I sit down to discuss the bet Sysdig is making to position itself as a leader in cloud security, how Loris leverages the power of a useful tool to create a brand, and the framework he uses to decide what should be open source and what should be paid for. Loris also shares an in-depth history of his previous company, Wireshark, and his excitement for building open source projects that outlast their business and creators.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Intro (00:00)</li><li>I introduce Loris Degioanni who is the CEO and Founder of Sysdig, and he provides a little bit of context about himself and his company (01:00)</li><li>Loris gives an overview of his previous company, Wireshark (01:57)</li><li>Ways in which Loris was able to commercialize Wireshark as a tool for open-source end-users (04:30)</li><li>How Loris used open-source as a marketing tool to create a profitable business model (07:28)</li><li>The difference between Sysdig and Wireshark in their relationship to open-source (08:57)</li><li>The bet that Sysdig is making and how that positions the company to become a leader in cloud security (12:36)</li><li>Loris and I discuss Wireshark’s continued longevity (15:14)</li><li>Where the inspiration for Sysdig came from and its journey from open-source project to commercial product (19:41)</li><li>How building something useful replaces the need for a sales and marketing team (24:22)</li><li>Closing the gap between the Sysdig project and the Sysdig platform (27:52)</li><li>The framework for deciding what is offered open-source and what needs to be paid for (30:21)</li><li>Loris’s most interesting mistakes in entrepreneurship and building Sysdig (33:20)</li><li>How listeners can connect with Loris and learn more about Falco and Sysdig (36:31)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:<br></strong><br></p><p>Loris</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/degio/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/degio/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/lorisdegio">https://twitter.com/lorisdegio</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://sysdig.com/">https://sysdig.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 27 Dec 2023 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/754aae56/8ae4d592.mp3" length="31775814" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2265</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Loris Degioanni is the CEO and Founder of Sysdig, an open-source company working to make cloud deployment more secure through the use of runtime insights. Loris and I sit down to discuss the bet Sysdig is making to position itself as a leader in cloud security, how Loris leverages the power of a useful tool to create a brand, and the framework he uses to decide what should be open source and what should be paid for. Loris also shares an in-depth history of his previous company, Wireshark, and his excitement for building open source projects that outlast their business and creators.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Intro (00:00)</li><li>I introduce Loris Degioanni who is the CEO and Founder of Sysdig, and he provides a little bit of context about himself and his company (01:00)</li><li>Loris gives an overview of his previous company, Wireshark (01:57)</li><li>Ways in which Loris was able to commercialize Wireshark as a tool for open-source end-users (04:30)</li><li>How Loris used open-source as a marketing tool to create a profitable business model (07:28)</li><li>The difference between Sysdig and Wireshark in their relationship to open-source (08:57)</li><li>The bet that Sysdig is making and how that positions the company to become a leader in cloud security (12:36)</li><li>Loris and I discuss Wireshark’s continued longevity (15:14)</li><li>Where the inspiration for Sysdig came from and its journey from open-source project to commercial product (19:41)</li><li>How building something useful replaces the need for a sales and marketing team (24:22)</li><li>Closing the gap between the Sysdig project and the Sysdig platform (27:52)</li><li>The framework for deciding what is offered open-source and what needs to be paid for (30:21)</li><li>Loris’s most interesting mistakes in entrepreneurship and building Sysdig (33:20)</li><li>How listeners can connect with Loris and learn more about Falco and Sysdig (36:31)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:<br></strong><br></p><p>Loris</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/degio/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/degio/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/lorisdegio">https://twitter.com/lorisdegio</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://sysdig.com/">https://sysdig.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>The Common Catch-22s of Open-Source Startups with Bob van Luijt</title>
      <itunes:episode>182</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>182</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>The Common Catch-22s of Open-Source Startups with Bob van Luijt</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">0c84afcd-1cca-4d04-a980-85e732bd6c3a</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/690a6ac0</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Bob van Luijt is the CEO and Founder of Weaviate, an open-source vector database company that helps contribute to the advancement of AI technology. Throughout this episode, Bob and I discuss the complexities of moving from an open-source project to building an open-source company, and the challenges that come with monetization strategies. Bob shares insightful anecdotes around why it’s important to be careful that you’re measuring the right things for the right reasons, and also emphasizes the importance of determining the best approach to profitability.  </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Intro (00:00)</li><li>I introduce Bob van Luijt who is the CEO and Founder of Weaviate, and he provides a little bit of context about himself and his company (01:00)</li><li>Bob gives us the run-down on Weaviate’s operations, including fundraising, staffing, and monetization data (02:04)</li><li>How the Weaviate project became the company it is today (04:03)</li><li>The value that open-source brings to Weaviate’s business model (11:21)</li><li>Bob and I discuss the disadvantages to building a company around an open-source project (17:55)</li><li>The complexities of having an open-source project that is used within other companies and products/projects (20:19)</li><li>How Bob and Weaviate have approached monetization (22:18)</li><li>The most interesting mistakes Bob feels he’s made along the way in his journey to build Weaviate (24:37)</li><li>Bob tells us more about his decision to shift from professional services to a product-led approach (25:50)</li><li>Bob and I discuss the complex catch-22 of focusing on either profitability or growth as an open-source founder (28:39)</li><li>How Bob filtered through product feedback and feature requests when first shifting to a product-led approach (32:19)</li><li>Bob’s advice to people who want to be a part of the open-source ecosystem (37:54)</li><li>How listeners can connect with Bob and learn more about Weaviate (39:13)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Bob</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/bobvanluijt/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/bobvanluijt/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/bobvanluijt">https://twitter.com/bobvanluijt</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://weaviate.io/">https://weaviate.io/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Bob van Luijt is the CEO and Founder of Weaviate, an open-source vector database company that helps contribute to the advancement of AI technology. Throughout this episode, Bob and I discuss the complexities of moving from an open-source project to building an open-source company, and the challenges that come with monetization strategies. Bob shares insightful anecdotes around why it’s important to be careful that you’re measuring the right things for the right reasons, and also emphasizes the importance of determining the best approach to profitability.  </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Intro (00:00)</li><li>I introduce Bob van Luijt who is the CEO and Founder of Weaviate, and he provides a little bit of context about himself and his company (01:00)</li><li>Bob gives us the run-down on Weaviate’s operations, including fundraising, staffing, and monetization data (02:04)</li><li>How the Weaviate project became the company it is today (04:03)</li><li>The value that open-source brings to Weaviate’s business model (11:21)</li><li>Bob and I discuss the disadvantages to building a company around an open-source project (17:55)</li><li>The complexities of having an open-source project that is used within other companies and products/projects (20:19)</li><li>How Bob and Weaviate have approached monetization (22:18)</li><li>The most interesting mistakes Bob feels he’s made along the way in his journey to build Weaviate (24:37)</li><li>Bob tells us more about his decision to shift from professional services to a product-led approach (25:50)</li><li>Bob and I discuss the complex catch-22 of focusing on either profitability or growth as an open-source founder (28:39)</li><li>How Bob filtered through product feedback and feature requests when first shifting to a product-led approach (32:19)</li><li>Bob’s advice to people who want to be a part of the open-source ecosystem (37:54)</li><li>How listeners can connect with Bob and learn more about Weaviate (39:13)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Bob</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/bobvanluijt/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/bobvanluijt/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/bobvanluijt">https://twitter.com/bobvanluijt</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://weaviate.io/">https://weaviate.io/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 20 Dec 2023 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/690a6ac0/a9c19ed4.mp3" length="33896620" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2416</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Bob van Luijt is the CEO and Founder of Weaviate, an open-source vector database company that helps contribute to the advancement of AI technology. Throughout this episode, Bob and I discuss the complexities of moving from an open-source project to building an open-source company, and the challenges that come with monetization strategies. Bob shares insightful anecdotes around why it’s important to be careful that you’re measuring the right things for the right reasons, and also emphasizes the importance of determining the best approach to profitability.  </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Intro (00:00)</li><li>I introduce Bob van Luijt who is the CEO and Founder of Weaviate, and he provides a little bit of context about himself and his company (01:00)</li><li>Bob gives us the run-down on Weaviate’s operations, including fundraising, staffing, and monetization data (02:04)</li><li>How the Weaviate project became the company it is today (04:03)</li><li>The value that open-source brings to Weaviate’s business model (11:21)</li><li>Bob and I discuss the disadvantages to building a company around an open-source project (17:55)</li><li>The complexities of having an open-source project that is used within other companies and products/projects (20:19)</li><li>How Bob and Weaviate have approached monetization (22:18)</li><li>The most interesting mistakes Bob feels he’s made along the way in his journey to build Weaviate (24:37)</li><li>Bob tells us more about his decision to shift from professional services to a product-led approach (25:50)</li><li>Bob and I discuss the complex catch-22 of focusing on either profitability or growth as an open-source founder (28:39)</li><li>How Bob filtered through product feedback and feature requests when first shifting to a product-led approach (32:19)</li><li>Bob’s advice to people who want to be a part of the open-source ecosystem (37:54)</li><li>How listeners can connect with Bob and learn more about Weaviate (39:13)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Bob</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/bobvanluijt/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/bobvanluijt/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/bobvanluijt">https://twitter.com/bobvanluijt</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://weaviate.io/">https://weaviate.io/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>From Open-Source Side Project to Enterprise SaaS Solution with Ben Rometsch</title>
      <itunes:episode>181</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>181</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>From Open-Source Side Project to Enterprise SaaS Solution with Ben Rometsch</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">394a0963-9a83-43e1-b406-d179ce29f469</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/75c3f60d</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ben Rometsch is the CEO and Founder of Flagsmith, an open-source feature flagging platform. In this conversation, we explore how he landed on the idea to develop an open-source feature flagging project and how that has snowballed into running a full-time SaaS company. Ben describes the challenges of creating a SaaS company from the ground up, especially when it comes to pricing and monetizing. We also discuss the importance of understanding and choosing the right licensing for your product. </p><p><br><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>Intro (00:00)</li><li>I introduce Ben Rometsch, who is the CEO of Flagsmith, a commercial open-source feature flagging and remote conflict platform (01:00)</li><li>What made Ben want to build an open-source feature flagging project (01:29)</li><li>How the open-source project Ben started led to building a company around Flagsmith (03:39)</li><li>Why Ben feels licenses are so important and how he learned that through early licensing choices at Flagsmith (09:10)</li><li>When Ben started to monetize Flagsmith (13:24)</li><li>How Ben’s understanding of what features users wanted to pay for has evolved (15:36)</li><li>Why caring about the developer experience has set Flagsmith apart for enterprise customers (20:51)</li><li>When revenue started to take off and why it took external expertise (23:12)</li><li>Why pricing can be such a frustrating challenge to get right (26:47)</li><li>How Flagsmith is currently remotely structured (28:57)</li><li>Ben shares his thoughts on how open source contributes to his business (33:04)</li><li>How listeners can connect with Ben and learn more about Flagsmith (38:05)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Ben</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/benrometsch/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/benrometsch/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/ben_rometsch">https://twitter.com/ben_rometsch</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.flagsmith.com/">https://www.flagsmith.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ben Rometsch is the CEO and Founder of Flagsmith, an open-source feature flagging platform. In this conversation, we explore how he landed on the idea to develop an open-source feature flagging project and how that has snowballed into running a full-time SaaS company. Ben describes the challenges of creating a SaaS company from the ground up, especially when it comes to pricing and monetizing. We also discuss the importance of understanding and choosing the right licensing for your product. </p><p><br><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>Intro (00:00)</li><li>I introduce Ben Rometsch, who is the CEO of Flagsmith, a commercial open-source feature flagging and remote conflict platform (01:00)</li><li>What made Ben want to build an open-source feature flagging project (01:29)</li><li>How the open-source project Ben started led to building a company around Flagsmith (03:39)</li><li>Why Ben feels licenses are so important and how he learned that through early licensing choices at Flagsmith (09:10)</li><li>When Ben started to monetize Flagsmith (13:24)</li><li>How Ben’s understanding of what features users wanted to pay for has evolved (15:36)</li><li>Why caring about the developer experience has set Flagsmith apart for enterprise customers (20:51)</li><li>When revenue started to take off and why it took external expertise (23:12)</li><li>Why pricing can be such a frustrating challenge to get right (26:47)</li><li>How Flagsmith is currently remotely structured (28:57)</li><li>Ben shares his thoughts on how open source contributes to his business (33:04)</li><li>How listeners can connect with Ben and learn more about Flagsmith (38:05)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Ben</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/benrometsch/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/benrometsch/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/ben_rometsch">https://twitter.com/ben_rometsch</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.flagsmith.com/">https://www.flagsmith.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 13 Dec 2023 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/75c3f60d/d3c3ff35.mp3" length="33543052" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2391</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ben Rometsch is the CEO and Founder of Flagsmith, an open-source feature flagging platform. In this conversation, we explore how he landed on the idea to develop an open-source feature flagging project and how that has snowballed into running a full-time SaaS company. Ben describes the challenges of creating a SaaS company from the ground up, especially when it comes to pricing and monetizing. We also discuss the importance of understanding and choosing the right licensing for your product. </p><p><br><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>Intro (00:00)</li><li>I introduce Ben Rometsch, who is the CEO of Flagsmith, a commercial open-source feature flagging and remote conflict platform (01:00)</li><li>What made Ben want to build an open-source feature flagging project (01:29)</li><li>How the open-source project Ben started led to building a company around Flagsmith (03:39)</li><li>Why Ben feels licenses are so important and how he learned that through early licensing choices at Flagsmith (09:10)</li><li>When Ben started to monetize Flagsmith (13:24)</li><li>How Ben’s understanding of what features users wanted to pay for has evolved (15:36)</li><li>Why caring about the developer experience has set Flagsmith apart for enterprise customers (20:51)</li><li>When revenue started to take off and why it took external expertise (23:12)</li><li>Why pricing can be such a frustrating challenge to get right (26:47)</li><li>How Flagsmith is currently remotely structured (28:57)</li><li>Ben shares his thoughts on how open source contributes to his business (33:04)</li><li>How listeners can connect with Ben and learn more about Flagsmith (38:05)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Ben</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/benrometsch/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/benrometsch/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/ben_rometsch">https://twitter.com/ben_rometsch</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.flagsmith.com/">https://www.flagsmith.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Monetizing Open-Source Contributions Through Crypto with Max Howell</title>
      <itunes:episode>180</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>180</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Monetizing Open-Source Contributions Through Crypto with Max Howell</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">d801ea0a-712a-46b7-beff-671c9f703c8f</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/493f8448</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Max Howell is the CEO of Tea, a revolutionary open-source project that is seeking to help open-source contributors get paid for their work through crypto. Throughout our conversation, Max explains how he’s created some prolific open-source projects but was still unable to monetize them to the point where open source could be his full-time job, and how that provided the inspiration for Tea. Max and I discuss the importance of re-framing open-source projects in business terms of value, and not simply referring to supporting projects as charity work, and Max also shares valuable insights into the world of open-source crypto development.  </p><p><br><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>Intro (00:00)</li><li>I introduce Max, the CEO of <a href="http://tea.xyz">tea.xyz</a>, and he explains his career background and how he started Tea (01:00)</li><li>Max and I discuss the shift that open source needs to make from relying on charity to speaking in business and value terms (09:39)</li><li>Max describes how Tea is representing the existing value of open source and translating it into monetary form (12:32)</li><li>The administrative challenges of paying for open-source tools that are business-critical and how Tea helps solve them (14:36)</li><li>Tea’s business strategy for monetizing their own open-source project (18:05)</li><li>How Max’s goal of being able to work on the open-source projects he loves full time has played out with Tea (24:06)</li><li>Max describes how he successfully pitched Tea to investors (25:21)</li><li>Tea’s relationship with the rest of the crypto industry (27:32)</li><li>The biggest challenge Max and his team are working on at the moment (29:06)</li><li>What Max wishes he would have done differently and what he’s learned from the mistakes he’s made (31:59)</li><li>Where you can go to learn more about Tea and connect with Max (38:53)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Max</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mxcl/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/mxcl/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/mxcl">https://twitter.com/mxcl</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://tea.xyz/">https://tea.xyz/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Max Howell is the CEO of Tea, a revolutionary open-source project that is seeking to help open-source contributors get paid for their work through crypto. Throughout our conversation, Max explains how he’s created some prolific open-source projects but was still unable to monetize them to the point where open source could be his full-time job, and how that provided the inspiration for Tea. Max and I discuss the importance of re-framing open-source projects in business terms of value, and not simply referring to supporting projects as charity work, and Max also shares valuable insights into the world of open-source crypto development.  </p><p><br><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>Intro (00:00)</li><li>I introduce Max, the CEO of <a href="http://tea.xyz">tea.xyz</a>, and he explains his career background and how he started Tea (01:00)</li><li>Max and I discuss the shift that open source needs to make from relying on charity to speaking in business and value terms (09:39)</li><li>Max describes how Tea is representing the existing value of open source and translating it into monetary form (12:32)</li><li>The administrative challenges of paying for open-source tools that are business-critical and how Tea helps solve them (14:36)</li><li>Tea’s business strategy for monetizing their own open-source project (18:05)</li><li>How Max’s goal of being able to work on the open-source projects he loves full time has played out with Tea (24:06)</li><li>Max describes how he successfully pitched Tea to investors (25:21)</li><li>Tea’s relationship with the rest of the crypto industry (27:32)</li><li>The biggest challenge Max and his team are working on at the moment (29:06)</li><li>What Max wishes he would have done differently and what he’s learned from the mistakes he’s made (31:59)</li><li>Where you can go to learn more about Tea and connect with Max (38:53)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Max</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mxcl/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/mxcl/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/mxcl">https://twitter.com/mxcl</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://tea.xyz/">https://tea.xyz/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 06 Dec 2023 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/493f8448/906da9fe.mp3" length="58281661" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2391</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Max Howell is the CEO of Tea, a revolutionary open-source project that is seeking to help open-source contributors get paid for their work through crypto. Throughout our conversation, Max explains how he’s created some prolific open-source projects but was still unable to monetize them to the point where open source could be his full-time job, and how that provided the inspiration for Tea. Max and I discuss the importance of re-framing open-source projects in business terms of value, and not simply referring to supporting projects as charity work, and Max also shares valuable insights into the world of open-source crypto development.  </p><p><br><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>Intro (00:00)</li><li>I introduce Max, the CEO of <a href="http://tea.xyz">tea.xyz</a>, and he explains his career background and how he started Tea (01:00)</li><li>Max and I discuss the shift that open source needs to make from relying on charity to speaking in business and value terms (09:39)</li><li>Max describes how Tea is representing the existing value of open source and translating it into monetary form (12:32)</li><li>The administrative challenges of paying for open-source tools that are business-critical and how Tea helps solve them (14:36)</li><li>Tea’s business strategy for monetizing their own open-source project (18:05)</li><li>How Max’s goal of being able to work on the open-source projects he loves full time has played out with Tea (24:06)</li><li>Max describes how he successfully pitched Tea to investors (25:21)</li><li>Tea’s relationship with the rest of the crypto industry (27:32)</li><li>The biggest challenge Max and his team are working on at the moment (29:06)</li><li>What Max wishes he would have done differently and what he’s learned from the mistakes he’s made (31:59)</li><li>Where you can go to learn more about Tea and connect with Max (38:53)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Max</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mxcl/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/mxcl/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/mxcl">https://twitter.com/mxcl</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://tea.xyz/">https://tea.xyz/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Creating a Greener World Through Open-Source Software with Nicolas Höning</title>
      <itunes:episode>179</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>179</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Creating a Greener World Through Open-Source Software with Nicolas Höning</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">266b616f-82f0-40f6-b83e-26b6a459dfa3</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/977e860c</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Nicolas Höning is the Co-Founder and CEO of Seita, an open-source energy optimization and digitalization company. Nicolas took an unconventional path to founding an open-source startup, and throughout this episode he describes how creating a greener world through open-source software is more than a business endeavor for him - it’s a personal mission. Nicolas describes perfectly the challenges that open-source founders face, and is transparent on the decisions he’s still weighing when it comes to choosing an open-source product model and the benefits and challenges of being a boot-strapped startup. I was particularly interested to learn how his company’s project, V2G Liberty, helps individuals who are looking for a greener way to optimize the charging of their electric vehicles, and why Nicolas doesn’t market his other products to individual users. </p><p><br><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>I introduce Nicolas Höning, who is the Co-Founder and CEO of Seita, an open-source energy digitalization company (01:00)</li><li>Nicolas describes the unique nature of building open-source software for the energy sector (03:34)</li><li>How Nicolas wound up developing software for the energy sector (05:30)</li><li>The mission at Seita and how it’s also reflected personally in Nicolas’ life mission (06:57)</li><li>Why open-source was an important part of the delivery of Seita’s mission (09:25)</li><li>Nicolas describes the challenge of identifying his users and customers (11:28)</li><li>Why Nicolas doesn’t focus on individual users (14:36)</li><li>Nicolas describes his project V2G Liberty, which helps individuals optimize their EV charging (17:42)</li><li>How Nicolas initially funded Seita and his commercial strategy moving forward (19:51)</li><li>Why Seita launched a commercial product before launching an open-source project (23:30)</li><li>What Nicolas has been considering when deciding between an open core and open source product model (26:35)</li><li>The biggest challenge Nicolas is facing right now at Seita (32:43)</li><li>How listeners can connect with Nicolas and learn more (33:57)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Nicolas</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/nhoening/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/nhoening/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/nhoening">https://twitter.com/nhoening</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://seita.nl/">https://seita.nl/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Nicolas Höning is the Co-Founder and CEO of Seita, an open-source energy optimization and digitalization company. Nicolas took an unconventional path to founding an open-source startup, and throughout this episode he describes how creating a greener world through open-source software is more than a business endeavor for him - it’s a personal mission. Nicolas describes perfectly the challenges that open-source founders face, and is transparent on the decisions he’s still weighing when it comes to choosing an open-source product model and the benefits and challenges of being a boot-strapped startup. I was particularly interested to learn how his company’s project, V2G Liberty, helps individuals who are looking for a greener way to optimize the charging of their electric vehicles, and why Nicolas doesn’t market his other products to individual users. </p><p><br><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>I introduce Nicolas Höning, who is the Co-Founder and CEO of Seita, an open-source energy digitalization company (01:00)</li><li>Nicolas describes the unique nature of building open-source software for the energy sector (03:34)</li><li>How Nicolas wound up developing software for the energy sector (05:30)</li><li>The mission at Seita and how it’s also reflected personally in Nicolas’ life mission (06:57)</li><li>Why open-source was an important part of the delivery of Seita’s mission (09:25)</li><li>Nicolas describes the challenge of identifying his users and customers (11:28)</li><li>Why Nicolas doesn’t focus on individual users (14:36)</li><li>Nicolas describes his project V2G Liberty, which helps individuals optimize their EV charging (17:42)</li><li>How Nicolas initially funded Seita and his commercial strategy moving forward (19:51)</li><li>Why Seita launched a commercial product before launching an open-source project (23:30)</li><li>What Nicolas has been considering when deciding between an open core and open source product model (26:35)</li><li>The biggest challenge Nicolas is facing right now at Seita (32:43)</li><li>How listeners can connect with Nicolas and learn more (33:57)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Nicolas</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/nhoening/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/nhoening/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/nhoening">https://twitter.com/nhoening</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://seita.nl/">https://seita.nl/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 29 Nov 2023 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/977e860c/7ea0bd91.mp3" length="29921884" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2132</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Nicolas Höning is the Co-Founder and CEO of Seita, an open-source energy optimization and digitalization company. Nicolas took an unconventional path to founding an open-source startup, and throughout this episode he describes how creating a greener world through open-source software is more than a business endeavor for him - it’s a personal mission. Nicolas describes perfectly the challenges that open-source founders face, and is transparent on the decisions he’s still weighing when it comes to choosing an open-source product model and the benefits and challenges of being a boot-strapped startup. I was particularly interested to learn how his company’s project, V2G Liberty, helps individuals who are looking for a greener way to optimize the charging of their electric vehicles, and why Nicolas doesn’t market his other products to individual users. </p><p><br><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>I introduce Nicolas Höning, who is the Co-Founder and CEO of Seita, an open-source energy digitalization company (01:00)</li><li>Nicolas describes the unique nature of building open-source software for the energy sector (03:34)</li><li>How Nicolas wound up developing software for the energy sector (05:30)</li><li>The mission at Seita and how it’s also reflected personally in Nicolas’ life mission (06:57)</li><li>Why open-source was an important part of the delivery of Seita’s mission (09:25)</li><li>Nicolas describes the challenge of identifying his users and customers (11:28)</li><li>Why Nicolas doesn’t focus on individual users (14:36)</li><li>Nicolas describes his project V2G Liberty, which helps individuals optimize their EV charging (17:42)</li><li>How Nicolas initially funded Seita and his commercial strategy moving forward (19:51)</li><li>Why Seita launched a commercial product before launching an open-source project (23:30)</li><li>What Nicolas has been considering when deciding between an open core and open source product model (26:35)</li><li>The biggest challenge Nicolas is facing right now at Seita (32:43)</li><li>How listeners can connect with Nicolas and learn more (33:57)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Nicolas</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/nhoening/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/nhoening/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/nhoening">https://twitter.com/nhoening</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://seita.nl/">https://seita.nl/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Creating a Movement through Community with Jono Bacon</title>
      <itunes:episode>178</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>178</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Creating a Movement through Community with Jono Bacon</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">7c350620-b142-4afb-a39d-567b7a347837</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/70de4b79</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Jono Bacon’s passion for building communities has been a driving force in a career taken him from Canonical to GitHub to founding the Community Leadership Core community accelerator. In this episode, Jono shares his definition of <em>community</em>, how a community can create a <em>movement</em> and the differences between the two. We also get a bit of insight into how he developed his passion for building communities and why he continues helping companies build and support theirs through the Community Leadership Core. When Jono speaks about communities he is involved with, he uses “we” instead of “I” to describe their achievements, so I had him dig into that a bit more as we explored the power dynamics that have a huge influence on the success of a community or movement. <br></p><p><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>I introduce Jono, who is the founder of Community Leadership Core (0:28)</li><li>Jono shares more about his passion for building communities and why he started Community Leadership Core (0:51)</li><li>Jono goes into his background, discovering how Linux was created, and finding connection to others through open source (2:47)</li><li>Jono reflects on his time at Canonical and what he learned (10:46)</li><li>How Jono defines and thinks about “community” (13:10)</li><li>The difference between building a community and creating a movement (15:50)</li><li>Using “we” vs “I” in communities to encourage collaboration (18:05)</li><li>Where Jono sees companies missing the mark in community building (20:03)</li><li>Jono explains what delivery looks like in the context of community (22:31)</li><li>Jono shares examples of successful communities (27:05)</li><li>Communities Jono enjoys participating in (28:44)</li><li>How to start a community from scratch (31:22)</li><li>A quick summary of the Community Leadership Core (32:40)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Jono</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/jonobacon">https://www.linkedin.com/in/jonobacon</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/jonobacon">https://twitter.com/jonobacon</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://communityleadershipcore.com">communityleadershipcore.com</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Jono Bacon’s passion for building communities has been a driving force in a career taken him from Canonical to GitHub to founding the Community Leadership Core community accelerator. In this episode, Jono shares his definition of <em>community</em>, how a community can create a <em>movement</em> and the differences between the two. We also get a bit of insight into how he developed his passion for building communities and why he continues helping companies build and support theirs through the Community Leadership Core. When Jono speaks about communities he is involved with, he uses “we” instead of “I” to describe their achievements, so I had him dig into that a bit more as we explored the power dynamics that have a huge influence on the success of a community or movement. <br></p><p><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>I introduce Jono, who is the founder of Community Leadership Core (0:28)</li><li>Jono shares more about his passion for building communities and why he started Community Leadership Core (0:51)</li><li>Jono goes into his background, discovering how Linux was created, and finding connection to others through open source (2:47)</li><li>Jono reflects on his time at Canonical and what he learned (10:46)</li><li>How Jono defines and thinks about “community” (13:10)</li><li>The difference between building a community and creating a movement (15:50)</li><li>Using “we” vs “I” in communities to encourage collaboration (18:05)</li><li>Where Jono sees companies missing the mark in community building (20:03)</li><li>Jono explains what delivery looks like in the context of community (22:31)</li><li>Jono shares examples of successful communities (27:05)</li><li>Communities Jono enjoys participating in (28:44)</li><li>How to start a community from scratch (31:22)</li><li>A quick summary of the Community Leadership Core (32:40)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Jono</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/jonobacon">https://www.linkedin.com/in/jonobacon</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/jonobacon">https://twitter.com/jonobacon</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://communityleadershipcore.com">communityleadershipcore.com</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 22 Nov 2023 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/70de4b79/cb7f0129.mp3" length="56669365" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2359</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Jono Bacon’s passion for building communities has been a driving force in a career taken him from Canonical to GitHub to founding the Community Leadership Core community accelerator. In this episode, Jono shares his definition of <em>community</em>, how a community can create a <em>movement</em> and the differences between the two. We also get a bit of insight into how he developed his passion for building communities and why he continues helping companies build and support theirs through the Community Leadership Core. When Jono speaks about communities he is involved with, he uses “we” instead of “I” to describe their achievements, so I had him dig into that a bit more as we explored the power dynamics that have a huge influence on the success of a community or movement. <br></p><p><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>I introduce Jono, who is the founder of Community Leadership Core (0:28)</li><li>Jono shares more about his passion for building communities and why he started Community Leadership Core (0:51)</li><li>Jono goes into his background, discovering how Linux was created, and finding connection to others through open source (2:47)</li><li>Jono reflects on his time at Canonical and what he learned (10:46)</li><li>How Jono defines and thinks about “community” (13:10)</li><li>The difference between building a community and creating a movement (15:50)</li><li>Using “we” vs “I” in communities to encourage collaboration (18:05)</li><li>Where Jono sees companies missing the mark in community building (20:03)</li><li>Jono explains what delivery looks like in the context of community (22:31)</li><li>Jono shares examples of successful communities (27:05)</li><li>Communities Jono enjoys participating in (28:44)</li><li>How to start a community from scratch (31:22)</li><li>A quick summary of the Community Leadership Core (32:40)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Jono</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/jonobacon">https://www.linkedin.com/in/jonobacon</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/jonobacon">https://twitter.com/jonobacon</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://communityleadershipcore.com">communityleadershipcore.com</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>Yes</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Mitigating the Risks of an Acquisition with Michael Cheng</title>
      <itunes:episode>177</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>177</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Mitigating the Risks of an Acquisition with Michael Cheng</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">b41e1a12-7521-4708-bbc4-c2055e335322</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/ab6e0625</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Michael Cheng is an M&amp;A Specialist who has had an extensive career that includes a former stint at Facebook as a Product Manager and his current role as a Lawyer. In this episode, Michael returns to the show to have an in-depth discussion around acquisitions. Michael shares his thoughts on why most acquisitions leave everyone involved feeling unsatisfied, and what he thinks should be done by both parties to mitigate the high failure rate of acquisitions. We also chat about the common grievances founders have after going through an acquisition, and the approach Michael recommends to mitigate those regrets. Michael also shares insights on why it’s harder on an open-source company to be successfully acquired if they are in between being a purely services-based or SaaS company. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>I introduce returning guest Michael Cheng, whose illustrious career spans roles as a Product Manager for Facebook, a Lawyer, and an M&amp;A Specialist (00:22)</li><li>Michael gives some background on his career history and why he’s pursued so many different roles (01:00)</li><li>Michael and I discuss the bird’s eye view of the steps it takes to get acquired (02:23)</li><li>Why most acquisitions fail (06:11) </li><li>The common grievances that sellers have after going through an acquisition (08:11)</li><li>Michael’s thoughts on the likely outcomes for acquisitions of open-source companies (10:28)</li><li>What open-source founders can do to favor a successful outcome when approaching an acquisition (13:32)</li><li>How Michael thinks success should be measured when evaluating the outcome of an acquisition (17:56)</li><li>Why looking at the open-source community of companies being acquired is so crucial and often overlooked (22:13)</li><li>How the due diligence process is different for an open-source startup versus a SaaS company (25:20)</li><li>Michael describes how each core function in a company is affected by an acquisition (28:12)</li><li>The advice Michael would give to founders to help them make peace with the outcome of an acquisition (33:42)</li><li>How you can connect with Michael to learn more (37:02)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Michael</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/priorart/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/priorart/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/SYOTFS">https://twitter.com/SYOTFS</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.aalyria.com/">https://www.aalyria.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Michael Cheng is an M&amp;A Specialist who has had an extensive career that includes a former stint at Facebook as a Product Manager and his current role as a Lawyer. In this episode, Michael returns to the show to have an in-depth discussion around acquisitions. Michael shares his thoughts on why most acquisitions leave everyone involved feeling unsatisfied, and what he thinks should be done by both parties to mitigate the high failure rate of acquisitions. We also chat about the common grievances founders have after going through an acquisition, and the approach Michael recommends to mitigate those regrets. Michael also shares insights on why it’s harder on an open-source company to be successfully acquired if they are in between being a purely services-based or SaaS company. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>I introduce returning guest Michael Cheng, whose illustrious career spans roles as a Product Manager for Facebook, a Lawyer, and an M&amp;A Specialist (00:22)</li><li>Michael gives some background on his career history and why he’s pursued so many different roles (01:00)</li><li>Michael and I discuss the bird’s eye view of the steps it takes to get acquired (02:23)</li><li>Why most acquisitions fail (06:11) </li><li>The common grievances that sellers have after going through an acquisition (08:11)</li><li>Michael’s thoughts on the likely outcomes for acquisitions of open-source companies (10:28)</li><li>What open-source founders can do to favor a successful outcome when approaching an acquisition (13:32)</li><li>How Michael thinks success should be measured when evaluating the outcome of an acquisition (17:56)</li><li>Why looking at the open-source community of companies being acquired is so crucial and often overlooked (22:13)</li><li>How the due diligence process is different for an open-source startup versus a SaaS company (25:20)</li><li>Michael describes how each core function in a company is affected by an acquisition (28:12)</li><li>The advice Michael would give to founders to help them make peace with the outcome of an acquisition (33:42)</li><li>How you can connect with Michael to learn more (37:02)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Michael</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/priorart/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/priorart/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/SYOTFS">https://twitter.com/SYOTFS</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.aalyria.com/">https://www.aalyria.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 15 Nov 2023 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/ab6e0625/f86d6279.mp3" length="31784857" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2265</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Michael Cheng is an M&amp;A Specialist who has had an extensive career that includes a former stint at Facebook as a Product Manager and his current role as a Lawyer. In this episode, Michael returns to the show to have an in-depth discussion around acquisitions. Michael shares his thoughts on why most acquisitions leave everyone involved feeling unsatisfied, and what he thinks should be done by both parties to mitigate the high failure rate of acquisitions. We also chat about the common grievances founders have after going through an acquisition, and the approach Michael recommends to mitigate those regrets. Michael also shares insights on why it’s harder on an open-source company to be successfully acquired if they are in between being a purely services-based or SaaS company. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>I introduce returning guest Michael Cheng, whose illustrious career spans roles as a Product Manager for Facebook, a Lawyer, and an M&amp;A Specialist (00:22)</li><li>Michael gives some background on his career history and why he’s pursued so many different roles (01:00)</li><li>Michael and I discuss the bird’s eye view of the steps it takes to get acquired (02:23)</li><li>Why most acquisitions fail (06:11) </li><li>The common grievances that sellers have after going through an acquisition (08:11)</li><li>Michael’s thoughts on the likely outcomes for acquisitions of open-source companies (10:28)</li><li>What open-source founders can do to favor a successful outcome when approaching an acquisition (13:32)</li><li>How Michael thinks success should be measured when evaluating the outcome of an acquisition (17:56)</li><li>Why looking at the open-source community of companies being acquired is so crucial and often overlooked (22:13)</li><li>How the due diligence process is different for an open-source startup versus a SaaS company (25:20)</li><li>Michael describes how each core function in a company is affected by an acquisition (28:12)</li><li>The advice Michael would give to founders to help them make peace with the outcome of an acquisition (33:42)</li><li>How you can connect with Michael to learn more (37:02)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Michael</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/priorart/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/priorart/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/SYOTFS">https://twitter.com/SYOTFS</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.aalyria.com/">https://www.aalyria.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>A Second-Time Founder’s First Foray Into Open Source with Lars Kamp</title>
      <itunes:episode>176</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>176</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>A Second-Time Founder’s First Foray Into Open Source with Lars Kamp</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">9939dbd0-9d1d-4400-adea-e6bd24c16e0a</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/f508504e</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Lars Kamp is the Co-Founder and CEO of Some Engineering, the makers of Resoto. In this episode, Lars describes what he’s learned from founding and working at multiple start-ups, as well as the main differentiators he’s experienced founding his first open-source startup. Lars describes his though process when it comes to selecting co-founders, and illustrates why it’s even more important to be discerning when selecting investors. Lars and I also discuss the advantages that open-source gives to founders who are focused on the distribution strategy for their product, and Lars reveals why he is a big proponent of having docs be a part of your product-led growth strategy. Throughout our conversation, Lars’ insights create a detailed picture of what second-time founders think about and how SaaS startup experience relates to open-source business strategy. </p><p><br><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>I introduce Lars, who is the CEO and Founder of Some Engineering (00:23)</li><li>Lars describes what he does at Resoto and the user groups they work with (00:47)</li><li>How a tweet by Jeff Barr inspired Lars and his co-founders to start working on Resoto (01:37)</li><li>What it was like for Lars to start a company with co-founders he didn’t know very well (05:03)</li><li>Why Lars went from working with closed-source SaaS companies to founding an open-source company (07:26)</li><li>The main differences Lars has found between founding a SaaS startup and an open-source company (09:24)</li><li>Lars describes the value he sees in investing in really good docs (10:44)</li><li>Why Lars focuses more on distribution than product as a second-time founder (13:19)</li><li>What third time founders think about and what they don’t (16:18)</li><li>Lars’ advice to founders (18:40)</li><li>Why Lars sees a big advantage in open-source business models, especially when it comes to distribution (20:09)</li><li>The advice Lars would give himself if he could go back in time to the early days of Resoto(28:31)</li><li>How to get in touch with Lars (32:23)</li></ul><p><br><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Lars</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/larskamp/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/larskamp/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/l1rs">https://twitter.com/l1rs</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://some.engineering/">https://some.engineering/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Lars Kamp is the Co-Founder and CEO of Some Engineering, the makers of Resoto. In this episode, Lars describes what he’s learned from founding and working at multiple start-ups, as well as the main differentiators he’s experienced founding his first open-source startup. Lars describes his though process when it comes to selecting co-founders, and illustrates why it’s even more important to be discerning when selecting investors. Lars and I also discuss the advantages that open-source gives to founders who are focused on the distribution strategy for their product, and Lars reveals why he is a big proponent of having docs be a part of your product-led growth strategy. Throughout our conversation, Lars’ insights create a detailed picture of what second-time founders think about and how SaaS startup experience relates to open-source business strategy. </p><p><br><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>I introduce Lars, who is the CEO and Founder of Some Engineering (00:23)</li><li>Lars describes what he does at Resoto and the user groups they work with (00:47)</li><li>How a tweet by Jeff Barr inspired Lars and his co-founders to start working on Resoto (01:37)</li><li>What it was like for Lars to start a company with co-founders he didn’t know very well (05:03)</li><li>Why Lars went from working with closed-source SaaS companies to founding an open-source company (07:26)</li><li>The main differences Lars has found between founding a SaaS startup and an open-source company (09:24)</li><li>Lars describes the value he sees in investing in really good docs (10:44)</li><li>Why Lars focuses more on distribution than product as a second-time founder (13:19)</li><li>What third time founders think about and what they don’t (16:18)</li><li>Lars’ advice to founders (18:40)</li><li>Why Lars sees a big advantage in open-source business models, especially when it comes to distribution (20:09)</li><li>The advice Lars would give himself if he could go back in time to the early days of Resoto(28:31)</li><li>How to get in touch with Lars (32:23)</li></ul><p><br><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Lars</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/larskamp/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/larskamp/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/l1rs">https://twitter.com/l1rs</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://some.engineering/">https://some.engineering/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 08 Nov 2023 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/f508504e/9466e9f3.mp3" length="28348876" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2020</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Lars Kamp is the Co-Founder and CEO of Some Engineering, the makers of Resoto. In this episode, Lars describes what he’s learned from founding and working at multiple start-ups, as well as the main differentiators he’s experienced founding his first open-source startup. Lars describes his though process when it comes to selecting co-founders, and illustrates why it’s even more important to be discerning when selecting investors. Lars and I also discuss the advantages that open-source gives to founders who are focused on the distribution strategy for their product, and Lars reveals why he is a big proponent of having docs be a part of your product-led growth strategy. Throughout our conversation, Lars’ insights create a detailed picture of what second-time founders think about and how SaaS startup experience relates to open-source business strategy. </p><p><br><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>I introduce Lars, who is the CEO and Founder of Some Engineering (00:23)</li><li>Lars describes what he does at Resoto and the user groups they work with (00:47)</li><li>How a tweet by Jeff Barr inspired Lars and his co-founders to start working on Resoto (01:37)</li><li>What it was like for Lars to start a company with co-founders he didn’t know very well (05:03)</li><li>Why Lars went from working with closed-source SaaS companies to founding an open-source company (07:26)</li><li>The main differences Lars has found between founding a SaaS startup and an open-source company (09:24)</li><li>Lars describes the value he sees in investing in really good docs (10:44)</li><li>Why Lars focuses more on distribution than product as a second-time founder (13:19)</li><li>What third time founders think about and what they don’t (16:18)</li><li>Lars’ advice to founders (18:40)</li><li>Why Lars sees a big advantage in open-source business models, especially when it comes to distribution (20:09)</li><li>The advice Lars would give himself if he could go back in time to the early days of Resoto(28:31)</li><li>How to get in touch with Lars (32:23)</li></ul><p><br><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Lars</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/larskamp/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/larskamp/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/l1rs">https://twitter.com/l1rs</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://some.engineering/">https://some.engineering/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Advice for Open-Source Founders from a Seed-Stage VC with Amanda “Robby” Robson</title>
      <itunes:episode>175</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>175</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Advice for Open-Source Founders from a Seed-Stage VC with Amanda “Robby” Robson</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">0a950a80-8628-46a7-8fcf-c683be43219c</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/fe54a71a</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Amanda “Robby” Robson is a Partner at Cowboy Ventures and the co-host of the Open Source Startup Podcast. In this episode, Robby shares insights on what she’s looking for in open-source founders to potentially invest in, including the importance of being able to manage both your community and your paid model simultaneously. Robby and I also discuss the importance and pitfalls of choosing a monetization strategy, as well as the dangers of having too many monetization models too soon. Throughout our conversation, Robby highlights the specific challenges that open-source founders face, and how she’s seen successful founders either avoid or overcome them. </p><p><br><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>I introduce Robby, who is a Partner at Cowboy Ventures and the co-host of the Open Source Startup Podcast (00:22)</li><li>Robby gives some insight into how she evaluates startups from an investment perspective, and the peculiarities that go into evaluating an open-source startup (00:45)</li><li>The nuances of evaluating the market opportunity for an open-source company (05:20)</li><li>A common mistake Robby seeks early stage founders make when evaluating their market size (08:06)</li><li>Robby shares what she’s learned about best practices for seed-stage startups who are looking to determine their monetization strategy (10:02)</li><li>The dangers of having too many monetization models as an early stage startup (13:22)</li><li>Traits that Robby feels are most valuable for an open-source founder to possess (14:48)</li><li>Robby reveals the common traps that open-source founders fall into (17:13)</li><li>Why Robby feels that successfully monetizing an open-source company has more to do with resources than timing (19:46)</li><li>Robby’s thoughts on whether she would ever found an open-source company and how she would approach it (21:18)</li><li>How Robby’s thoughts have changed on whether open source projects need to intentionally become a company or vice versa (23:44)</li><li>What it’s like to advice against the open-source business model as a venture capitalist (29:10)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Robby</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/amanda-robson-7227685b/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/amanda-robson-7227685b/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/amanda_robs">https://twitter.com/amanda_robs</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.cowboy.vc/">https://www.cowboy.vc/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Amanda “Robby” Robson is a Partner at Cowboy Ventures and the co-host of the Open Source Startup Podcast. In this episode, Robby shares insights on what she’s looking for in open-source founders to potentially invest in, including the importance of being able to manage both your community and your paid model simultaneously. Robby and I also discuss the importance and pitfalls of choosing a monetization strategy, as well as the dangers of having too many monetization models too soon. Throughout our conversation, Robby highlights the specific challenges that open-source founders face, and how she’s seen successful founders either avoid or overcome them. </p><p><br><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>I introduce Robby, who is a Partner at Cowboy Ventures and the co-host of the Open Source Startup Podcast (00:22)</li><li>Robby gives some insight into how she evaluates startups from an investment perspective, and the peculiarities that go into evaluating an open-source startup (00:45)</li><li>The nuances of evaluating the market opportunity for an open-source company (05:20)</li><li>A common mistake Robby seeks early stage founders make when evaluating their market size (08:06)</li><li>Robby shares what she’s learned about best practices for seed-stage startups who are looking to determine their monetization strategy (10:02)</li><li>The dangers of having too many monetization models as an early stage startup (13:22)</li><li>Traits that Robby feels are most valuable for an open-source founder to possess (14:48)</li><li>Robby reveals the common traps that open-source founders fall into (17:13)</li><li>Why Robby feels that successfully monetizing an open-source company has more to do with resources than timing (19:46)</li><li>Robby’s thoughts on whether she would ever found an open-source company and how she would approach it (21:18)</li><li>How Robby’s thoughts have changed on whether open source projects need to intentionally become a company or vice versa (23:44)</li><li>What it’s like to advice against the open-source business model as a venture capitalist (29:10)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Robby</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/amanda-robson-7227685b/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/amanda-robson-7227685b/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/amanda_robs">https://twitter.com/amanda_robs</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.cowboy.vc/">https://www.cowboy.vc/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 01 Nov 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/fe54a71a/fb069718.mp3" length="27529822" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1962</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Amanda “Robby” Robson is a Partner at Cowboy Ventures and the co-host of the Open Source Startup Podcast. In this episode, Robby shares insights on what she’s looking for in open-source founders to potentially invest in, including the importance of being able to manage both your community and your paid model simultaneously. Robby and I also discuss the importance and pitfalls of choosing a monetization strategy, as well as the dangers of having too many monetization models too soon. Throughout our conversation, Robby highlights the specific challenges that open-source founders face, and how she’s seen successful founders either avoid or overcome them. </p><p><br><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>I introduce Robby, who is a Partner at Cowboy Ventures and the co-host of the Open Source Startup Podcast (00:22)</li><li>Robby gives some insight into how she evaluates startups from an investment perspective, and the peculiarities that go into evaluating an open-source startup (00:45)</li><li>The nuances of evaluating the market opportunity for an open-source company (05:20)</li><li>A common mistake Robby seeks early stage founders make when evaluating their market size (08:06)</li><li>Robby shares what she’s learned about best practices for seed-stage startups who are looking to determine their monetization strategy (10:02)</li><li>The dangers of having too many monetization models as an early stage startup (13:22)</li><li>Traits that Robby feels are most valuable for an open-source founder to possess (14:48)</li><li>Robby reveals the common traps that open-source founders fall into (17:13)</li><li>Why Robby feels that successfully monetizing an open-source company has more to do with resources than timing (19:46)</li><li>Robby’s thoughts on whether she would ever found an open-source company and how she would approach it (21:18)</li><li>How Robby’s thoughts have changed on whether open source projects need to intentionally become a company or vice versa (23:44)</li><li>What it’s like to advice against the open-source business model as a venture capitalist (29:10)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Robby</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/amanda-robson-7227685b/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/amanda-robson-7227685b/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/amanda_robs">https://twitter.com/amanda_robs</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.cowboy.vc/">https://www.cowboy.vc/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Bridging the Knowledge Gap on Community Data with Daniel Izquierdo</title>
      <itunes:episode>174</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>174</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Bridging the Knowledge Gap on Community Data with Daniel Izquierdo</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">30c56efb-f19e-4dcc-bce5-8abe3e2f320b</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/9c16d993</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Daniel Izquierdo is the Co-Founder and CEO at Bitergia, an open-source company that provides software development data and analytics. In this episode, we connect at the Open Source Summit in Bilbao to discuss how he went from working in academia to co-founding an open-source company. Throughout our conversation, Daniel shares interesting anecdotes on the unique journey he’s taken to build Bitergia, including why they haven’t focused on growing fast so much as they have focused on growing in a way that supports their employees and customers. He also shares insights into how to measure an open-source community, and the knowledge gaps that he sees in people who can’t contextualize the data they’re getting on their community. Daniel also walks us through the other open-source business models Bitergia tried before discovering what worked for them.</p><p><br><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>I introduce Daniel, who is the Co-Founder and CEO at Bitergia, as he joins me at the Open Source Summit in Bilbao (00:24)</li><li>Daniel describes the work that he does at Bitergia (00:41)</li><li>The story of why Daniel helped to co-found Bitergia during the finalizing of his PhD (01:38)</li><li>How Daniel and his co-founders got by as they transitioned from academia to founding an open-source company, and what the first year of running Bitergia was like (03:28)</li><li>Daniel explains how Bitergia makes money as an open-source company (06:04)</li><li>The main types of customers that Bitergia works with (07:50)</li><li>The metrics that Daniel feels are critical when measuring an open-source community (08:50)</li><li>Daniel describes the knowledge gap he observes in clients who can’t contextualize the data they get on their community (11:16)</li><li>The story of how Bitergia tried other open-source business models before finding what worked for them (13:41)</li><li>Why Daniel feels it is a disadvantage to have his company based in Spain (16:07)</li><li>Daniel shares his growth philosophy for Bitergia (18:47)</li><li>The challenges facing Daniel and his team at the moment (20:21)</li><li>Daniel’s advice to aspiring open-source founders (21:53)</li><li>The most interesting mistake Daniel feels he made in building Bitergia (23:57)</li><li>Daniel shares what he feels is the main difference between starting a company with and without an open-source component (25:33)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Daniel</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/dicortazar/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/dicortazar/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/dizquierdo">https://twitter.com/dizquierdo</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://bitergia.com/">https://bitergia.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Daniel Izquierdo is the Co-Founder and CEO at Bitergia, an open-source company that provides software development data and analytics. In this episode, we connect at the Open Source Summit in Bilbao to discuss how he went from working in academia to co-founding an open-source company. Throughout our conversation, Daniel shares interesting anecdotes on the unique journey he’s taken to build Bitergia, including why they haven’t focused on growing fast so much as they have focused on growing in a way that supports their employees and customers. He also shares insights into how to measure an open-source community, and the knowledge gaps that he sees in people who can’t contextualize the data they’re getting on their community. Daniel also walks us through the other open-source business models Bitergia tried before discovering what worked for them.</p><p><br><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>I introduce Daniel, who is the Co-Founder and CEO at Bitergia, as he joins me at the Open Source Summit in Bilbao (00:24)</li><li>Daniel describes the work that he does at Bitergia (00:41)</li><li>The story of why Daniel helped to co-found Bitergia during the finalizing of his PhD (01:38)</li><li>How Daniel and his co-founders got by as they transitioned from academia to founding an open-source company, and what the first year of running Bitergia was like (03:28)</li><li>Daniel explains how Bitergia makes money as an open-source company (06:04)</li><li>The main types of customers that Bitergia works with (07:50)</li><li>The metrics that Daniel feels are critical when measuring an open-source community (08:50)</li><li>Daniel describes the knowledge gap he observes in clients who can’t contextualize the data they get on their community (11:16)</li><li>The story of how Bitergia tried other open-source business models before finding what worked for them (13:41)</li><li>Why Daniel feels it is a disadvantage to have his company based in Spain (16:07)</li><li>Daniel shares his growth philosophy for Bitergia (18:47)</li><li>The challenges facing Daniel and his team at the moment (20:21)</li><li>Daniel’s advice to aspiring open-source founders (21:53)</li><li>The most interesting mistake Daniel feels he made in building Bitergia (23:57)</li><li>Daniel shares what he feels is the main difference between starting a company with and without an open-source component (25:33)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Daniel</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/dicortazar/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/dicortazar/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/dizquierdo">https://twitter.com/dizquierdo</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://bitergia.com/">https://bitergia.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 25 Oct 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/9c16d993/aedae3cb.mp3" length="43267625" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1772</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Daniel Izquierdo is the Co-Founder and CEO at Bitergia, an open-source company that provides software development data and analytics. In this episode, we connect at the Open Source Summit in Bilbao to discuss how he went from working in academia to co-founding an open-source company. Throughout our conversation, Daniel shares interesting anecdotes on the unique journey he’s taken to build Bitergia, including why they haven’t focused on growing fast so much as they have focused on growing in a way that supports their employees and customers. He also shares insights into how to measure an open-source community, and the knowledge gaps that he sees in people who can’t contextualize the data they’re getting on their community. Daniel also walks us through the other open-source business models Bitergia tried before discovering what worked for them.</p><p><br><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>I introduce Daniel, who is the Co-Founder and CEO at Bitergia, as he joins me at the Open Source Summit in Bilbao (00:24)</li><li>Daniel describes the work that he does at Bitergia (00:41)</li><li>The story of why Daniel helped to co-found Bitergia during the finalizing of his PhD (01:38)</li><li>How Daniel and his co-founders got by as they transitioned from academia to founding an open-source company, and what the first year of running Bitergia was like (03:28)</li><li>Daniel explains how Bitergia makes money as an open-source company (06:04)</li><li>The main types of customers that Bitergia works with (07:50)</li><li>The metrics that Daniel feels are critical when measuring an open-source community (08:50)</li><li>Daniel describes the knowledge gap he observes in clients who can’t contextualize the data they get on their community (11:16)</li><li>The story of how Bitergia tried other open-source business models before finding what worked for them (13:41)</li><li>Why Daniel feels it is a disadvantage to have his company based in Spain (16:07)</li><li>Daniel shares his growth philosophy for Bitergia (18:47)</li><li>The challenges facing Daniel and his team at the moment (20:21)</li><li>Daniel’s advice to aspiring open-source founders (21:53)</li><li>The most interesting mistake Daniel feels he made in building Bitergia (23:57)</li><li>Daniel shares what he feels is the main difference between starting a company with and without an open-source component (25:33)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Daniel</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/dicortazar/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/dicortazar/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/dizquierdo">https://twitter.com/dizquierdo</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://bitergia.com/">https://bitergia.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How Not to Make Open Source with Leszek Manicki</title>
      <itunes:episode>173</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>173</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>How Not to Make Open Source with Leszek Manicki</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">08237cb7-3149-4b5d-8989-c7512a61ef5a</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/41f8ca4e</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Leszek Manicki is the Engineering Manager at Wikimedia Germany. In this episode, we connect at the Open Source Summit in Bilbao to discuss what he has learned being a part of Wikimedia movement and how that inspired his talk at the summit, How Not To Make Open Source. Throughout our conversation, Leszek describes the challenges Wikimedia has experienced in trying to get more contributors to their projects while also having a high security standard and a complex architecture. He also describes what he has learned from these challenges, and gives recommendations for other organizations to consider as they look to get more contributors to their own projects. Leszek also shares his experience representing a non-profit organization that seeks to offer free knowledge at an event that features more commercialized open-source offerings, and how he hopes this will bring about a positive socio-economic change.</p><p><strong><br>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>I introduce Leszek, who is the Engineering Manager at Wikimedia Germany as he joins me at the Open Source Summit in Bilbao (00:23)</li><li>Leszek describes his role at Wikimedia movement and what brings him to the Open Source Summit as a speaker (00:39)</li><li>The number one thing that Leszek believes open-source organizations shouldn’t do (03:41)</li><li>How Wikimedia has attempted to get more external contributors to their projects and what they learned from their successes and failures there (07:17)</li><li>Leszek describes the relationship between the creation of knowledge and the creation of software in the Wikimedia organization (12:57)</li><li>How Leszek and his team are increasing collaboration with external sources to build software (15:43)</li><li>Why Leszek advocates for simple architecture when you’re building a project that will seek external contributors (17:38)</li><li>The inherent value that Leszek sees in having a community of contributors on a project (18:52)</li><li>Leszek reflects on his experience attending the Open Source Summit and his hopes for the future (20:20)<p></p></li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Leszek</p><ul><li>LinkedIn:<a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/leszek-manicki"> https://www.linkedin.com/in/leszek-manicki</a></li><li>Company:<a href="https://www.wikimedia.org/"> https://www.wikimedia.org/<br></a><br></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Leszek Manicki is the Engineering Manager at Wikimedia Germany. In this episode, we connect at the Open Source Summit in Bilbao to discuss what he has learned being a part of Wikimedia movement and how that inspired his talk at the summit, How Not To Make Open Source. Throughout our conversation, Leszek describes the challenges Wikimedia has experienced in trying to get more contributors to their projects while also having a high security standard and a complex architecture. He also describes what he has learned from these challenges, and gives recommendations for other organizations to consider as they look to get more contributors to their own projects. Leszek also shares his experience representing a non-profit organization that seeks to offer free knowledge at an event that features more commercialized open-source offerings, and how he hopes this will bring about a positive socio-economic change.</p><p><strong><br>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>I introduce Leszek, who is the Engineering Manager at Wikimedia Germany as he joins me at the Open Source Summit in Bilbao (00:23)</li><li>Leszek describes his role at Wikimedia movement and what brings him to the Open Source Summit as a speaker (00:39)</li><li>The number one thing that Leszek believes open-source organizations shouldn’t do (03:41)</li><li>How Wikimedia has attempted to get more external contributors to their projects and what they learned from their successes and failures there (07:17)</li><li>Leszek describes the relationship between the creation of knowledge and the creation of software in the Wikimedia organization (12:57)</li><li>How Leszek and his team are increasing collaboration with external sources to build software (15:43)</li><li>Why Leszek advocates for simple architecture when you’re building a project that will seek external contributors (17:38)</li><li>The inherent value that Leszek sees in having a community of contributors on a project (18:52)</li><li>Leszek reflects on his experience attending the Open Source Summit and his hopes for the future (20:20)<p></p></li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Leszek</p><ul><li>LinkedIn:<a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/leszek-manicki"> https://www.linkedin.com/in/leszek-manicki</a></li><li>Company:<a href="https://www.wikimedia.org/"> https://www.wikimedia.org/<br></a><br></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 18 Oct 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/41f8ca4e/4413dbcc.mp3" length="32621318" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1334</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Leszek Manicki is the Engineering Manager at Wikimedia Germany. In this episode, we connect at the Open Source Summit in Bilbao to discuss what he has learned being a part of Wikimedia movement and how that inspired his talk at the summit, How Not To Make Open Source. Throughout our conversation, Leszek describes the challenges Wikimedia has experienced in trying to get more contributors to their projects while also having a high security standard and a complex architecture. He also describes what he has learned from these challenges, and gives recommendations for other organizations to consider as they look to get more contributors to their own projects. Leszek also shares his experience representing a non-profit organization that seeks to offer free knowledge at an event that features more commercialized open-source offerings, and how he hopes this will bring about a positive socio-economic change.</p><p><strong><br>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>I introduce Leszek, who is the Engineering Manager at Wikimedia Germany as he joins me at the Open Source Summit in Bilbao (00:23)</li><li>Leszek describes his role at Wikimedia movement and what brings him to the Open Source Summit as a speaker (00:39)</li><li>The number one thing that Leszek believes open-source organizations shouldn’t do (03:41)</li><li>How Wikimedia has attempted to get more external contributors to their projects and what they learned from their successes and failures there (07:17)</li><li>Leszek describes the relationship between the creation of knowledge and the creation of software in the Wikimedia organization (12:57)</li><li>How Leszek and his team are increasing collaboration with external sources to build software (15:43)</li><li>Why Leszek advocates for simple architecture when you’re building a project that will seek external contributors (17:38)</li><li>The inherent value that Leszek sees in having a community of contributors on a project (18:52)</li><li>Leszek reflects on his experience attending the Open Source Summit and his hopes for the future (20:20)<p></p></li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Leszek</p><ul><li>LinkedIn:<a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/leszek-manicki"> https://www.linkedin.com/in/leszek-manicki</a></li><li>Company:<a href="https://www.wikimedia.org/"> https://www.wikimedia.org/<br></a><br></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Getting The Most Out of Open-Source Events with Brian Proffitt</title>
      <itunes:episode>172</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>172</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Getting The Most Out of Open-Source Events with Brian Proffitt</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">d7ffdf88-08e7-43b9-b34b-a31b9915cb6f</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/93c1c74a</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Brian Proffitt is the Senior Manager of Community Outreach at Red Hat’s OSPO. In this episode, we connect at the Open Source Summit EU to discuss how Brian uses events to drive both lead generation and community-building efforts. Throughout our conversation, Brian describes how measuring the ROI of an event can be tricky and why it’s important to look at events as a long game strategy. We also discuss why events provide some of the most valuable feedback when testing your positioning and messaging, and what can be done to increase the odds that your events are successful and produce good outcomes.</p><p><br>Highlights:</p><ul><li>I introduce Brian, who is the Senior Manager of Community Outreach at Red Hat’s OSPO as he joins me at the Open Source Summit EU (00:28)</li><li>How Brian categorizes the different types of events he attends and hosts (01:55)</li><li>The primary metric and objective for lead gen events, and what can be done to increase the odds that your lead gen events bear fruit (05:18)</li><li>Why events are such a valuable part of testing your positioning and messaging (09:14)</li><li>Brian delves into the value of community events and what the ROI for those looks like (12:50)</li><li>The strategy Brian employs for getting the most out of community events when ROI can be difficult to measure (15:40)</li><li>Brian shares why he feels that events are more of a long game strategy (23:24)</li><li>The advice that Brian would give to an open-source founder or start-up that is looking to get the most out of their events strategy (25:28)</li><li>The best ways to learn more and connect with Brian (31:34)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Brian</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/brianproffitt/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/brianproffitt/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/TheTechScribe">https://twitter.com/TheTechScribe</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.redhat.com/en/blog/channel/red-hat-open-source-program-office">https://www.redhat.com/en/blog/channel/red-hat-open-source-program-office</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Brian Proffitt is the Senior Manager of Community Outreach at Red Hat’s OSPO. In this episode, we connect at the Open Source Summit EU to discuss how Brian uses events to drive both lead generation and community-building efforts. Throughout our conversation, Brian describes how measuring the ROI of an event can be tricky and why it’s important to look at events as a long game strategy. We also discuss why events provide some of the most valuable feedback when testing your positioning and messaging, and what can be done to increase the odds that your events are successful and produce good outcomes.</p><p><br>Highlights:</p><ul><li>I introduce Brian, who is the Senior Manager of Community Outreach at Red Hat’s OSPO as he joins me at the Open Source Summit EU (00:28)</li><li>How Brian categorizes the different types of events he attends and hosts (01:55)</li><li>The primary metric and objective for lead gen events, and what can be done to increase the odds that your lead gen events bear fruit (05:18)</li><li>Why events are such a valuable part of testing your positioning and messaging (09:14)</li><li>Brian delves into the value of community events and what the ROI for those looks like (12:50)</li><li>The strategy Brian employs for getting the most out of community events when ROI can be difficult to measure (15:40)</li><li>Brian shares why he feels that events are more of a long game strategy (23:24)</li><li>The advice that Brian would give to an open-source founder or start-up that is looking to get the most out of their events strategy (25:28)</li><li>The best ways to learn more and connect with Brian (31:34)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Brian</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/brianproffitt/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/brianproffitt/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/TheTechScribe">https://twitter.com/TheTechScribe</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.redhat.com/en/blog/channel/red-hat-open-source-program-office">https://www.redhat.com/en/blog/channel/red-hat-open-source-program-office</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 11 Oct 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/93c1c74a/71470811.mp3" length="47499152" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1960</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Brian Proffitt is the Senior Manager of Community Outreach at Red Hat’s OSPO. In this episode, we connect at the Open Source Summit EU to discuss how Brian uses events to drive both lead generation and community-building efforts. Throughout our conversation, Brian describes how measuring the ROI of an event can be tricky and why it’s important to look at events as a long game strategy. We also discuss why events provide some of the most valuable feedback when testing your positioning and messaging, and what can be done to increase the odds that your events are successful and produce good outcomes.</p><p><br>Highlights:</p><ul><li>I introduce Brian, who is the Senior Manager of Community Outreach at Red Hat’s OSPO as he joins me at the Open Source Summit EU (00:28)</li><li>How Brian categorizes the different types of events he attends and hosts (01:55)</li><li>The primary metric and objective for lead gen events, and what can be done to increase the odds that your lead gen events bear fruit (05:18)</li><li>Why events are such a valuable part of testing your positioning and messaging (09:14)</li><li>Brian delves into the value of community events and what the ROI for those looks like (12:50)</li><li>The strategy Brian employs for getting the most out of community events when ROI can be difficult to measure (15:40)</li><li>Brian shares why he feels that events are more of a long game strategy (23:24)</li><li>The advice that Brian would give to an open-source founder or start-up that is looking to get the most out of their events strategy (25:28)</li><li>The best ways to learn more and connect with Brian (31:34)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Brian</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/brianproffitt/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/brianproffitt/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/TheTechScribe">https://twitter.com/TheTechScribe</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.redhat.com/en/blog/channel/red-hat-open-source-program-office">https://www.redhat.com/en/blog/channel/red-hat-open-source-program-office</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Embracing Product-Led Growth in Open Source with Kim McMahon</title>
      <itunes:episode>171</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>171</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Embracing Product-Led Growth in Open Source with Kim McMahon</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">99053cd1-f22d-4d4a-8666-2877f4a2fa0c</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/67cc9f9d</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Kim McMahon is the leader of Open Source Marketing &amp; Community at Outshift by Cisco, which is Cisco’s emerging technologies and innovation unit. We recorded this episode at Open Source Summit EU, and talked about Kim’s strategies and tactics related to helping guide users to the correct edition of your product — ie, decide whether the open source option or a commercial option is best for them.</p><p>Kim talked about the tricky balance open-source companies must strike between embracing open-source principles and driving revenue as a business, Kim’s tactics for community building and why it’s so important to be clear on why you want to build a community and the outcomes you expect from your investment in community building. </p><p><strong><br>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>I introduce Kim, who is the leader of Open Source Marketing &amp; Community at Outshift by Cisco, as she joins me at the Open Source Summit EU in Bilbao (00:25)</li><li>Kim gives an overview of the talk she is giving at the Open Source Summit, which is on the topic of self-identifying when to shift to a managed version of open-source products (01:35)</li><li>Kim and I discuss the different personas of open-source software users, and the role that product-led growth plays for open-source companies (03:07)</li><li>Why Kim feels it’s critical to not treat your community as a sales database but rather to provide educational content to drive sales of open-source products (09:10)</li><li>Kim and I discuss the challenges of marketing an open-source project and whether positioning truly falls under marketing (10:49)</li><li>How Kim created a feedback loop on her team between sales, marketing, and product to ensure alignment when bringing open-source products to market (13:31)</li><li>Kim walks through her thought process for community building from scratch (17:23)</li><li>How Kim evaluates if a community-building strategy is working or not (24:34)</li><li>What Kim learned about being a part of a community by being a member of a food co-op (28:09)</li><li>Where to connect with Kim and learn more about her work (34:44)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:<br></strong><br></p><p>Kim</p><ul><li>LinkedIn:<a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/kimmcmahonco/"> https://www.linkedin.com/in/kimmcmahonco/</a></li><li>Twitter:<a href="https://twitter.com/kamcmahon"> https://twitter.com/kamcmahon</a></li><li>Company:<a href="https://eti.cisco.com/"> https://eti.cisco.com/<br></a><br></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Kim McMahon is the leader of Open Source Marketing &amp; Community at Outshift by Cisco, which is Cisco’s emerging technologies and innovation unit. We recorded this episode at Open Source Summit EU, and talked about Kim’s strategies and tactics related to helping guide users to the correct edition of your product — ie, decide whether the open source option or a commercial option is best for them.</p><p>Kim talked about the tricky balance open-source companies must strike between embracing open-source principles and driving revenue as a business, Kim’s tactics for community building and why it’s so important to be clear on why you want to build a community and the outcomes you expect from your investment in community building. </p><p><strong><br>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>I introduce Kim, who is the leader of Open Source Marketing &amp; Community at Outshift by Cisco, as she joins me at the Open Source Summit EU in Bilbao (00:25)</li><li>Kim gives an overview of the talk she is giving at the Open Source Summit, which is on the topic of self-identifying when to shift to a managed version of open-source products (01:35)</li><li>Kim and I discuss the different personas of open-source software users, and the role that product-led growth plays for open-source companies (03:07)</li><li>Why Kim feels it’s critical to not treat your community as a sales database but rather to provide educational content to drive sales of open-source products (09:10)</li><li>Kim and I discuss the challenges of marketing an open-source project and whether positioning truly falls under marketing (10:49)</li><li>How Kim created a feedback loop on her team between sales, marketing, and product to ensure alignment when bringing open-source products to market (13:31)</li><li>Kim walks through her thought process for community building from scratch (17:23)</li><li>How Kim evaluates if a community-building strategy is working or not (24:34)</li><li>What Kim learned about being a part of a community by being a member of a food co-op (28:09)</li><li>Where to connect with Kim and learn more about her work (34:44)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:<br></strong><br></p><p>Kim</p><ul><li>LinkedIn:<a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/kimmcmahonco/"> https://www.linkedin.com/in/kimmcmahonco/</a></li><li>Twitter:<a href="https://twitter.com/kamcmahon"> https://twitter.com/kamcmahon</a></li><li>Company:<a href="https://eti.cisco.com/"> https://eti.cisco.com/<br></a><br></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 04 Oct 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/67cc9f9d/cb9a5714.mp3" length="52211321" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2162</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Kim McMahon is the leader of Open Source Marketing &amp; Community at Outshift by Cisco, which is Cisco’s emerging technologies and innovation unit. We recorded this episode at Open Source Summit EU, and talked about Kim’s strategies and tactics related to helping guide users to the correct edition of your product — ie, decide whether the open source option or a commercial option is best for them.</p><p>Kim talked about the tricky balance open-source companies must strike between embracing open-source principles and driving revenue as a business, Kim’s tactics for community building and why it’s so important to be clear on why you want to build a community and the outcomes you expect from your investment in community building. </p><p><strong><br>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>I introduce Kim, who is the leader of Open Source Marketing &amp; Community at Outshift by Cisco, as she joins me at the Open Source Summit EU in Bilbao (00:25)</li><li>Kim gives an overview of the talk she is giving at the Open Source Summit, which is on the topic of self-identifying when to shift to a managed version of open-source products (01:35)</li><li>Kim and I discuss the different personas of open-source software users, and the role that product-led growth plays for open-source companies (03:07)</li><li>Why Kim feels it’s critical to not treat your community as a sales database but rather to provide educational content to drive sales of open-source products (09:10)</li><li>Kim and I discuss the challenges of marketing an open-source project and whether positioning truly falls under marketing (10:49)</li><li>How Kim created a feedback loop on her team between sales, marketing, and product to ensure alignment when bringing open-source products to market (13:31)</li><li>Kim walks through her thought process for community building from scratch (17:23)</li><li>How Kim evaluates if a community-building strategy is working or not (24:34)</li><li>What Kim learned about being a part of a community by being a member of a food co-op (28:09)</li><li>Where to connect with Kim and learn more about her work (34:44)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:<br></strong><br></p><p>Kim</p><ul><li>LinkedIn:<a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/kimmcmahonco/"> https://www.linkedin.com/in/kimmcmahonco/</a></li><li>Twitter:<a href="https://twitter.com/kamcmahon"> https://twitter.com/kamcmahon</a></li><li>Company:<a href="https://eti.cisco.com/"> https://eti.cisco.com/<br></a><br></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Shifting a Go-To-Market Strategy from Services to Product-Led with Alexander Krüger</title>
      <itunes:episode>170</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>170</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Shifting a Go-To-Market Strategy from Services to Product-Led with Alexander Krüger</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">dea5b8ce-f27e-4cf7-829c-60167af0f4b2</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/dd0fe7a3</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Alexander Krüger is the Co-Founder and CEO of United Manufacturing Hub, an open-source company that develops software for the manufacturing industry. Throughout our conversation, Alexander describes the unusual path he took in going from a services-based consulting company to a product-led company. He also describes the opportunities and challenges of selling open-source software to an industry that has historically been slow to adopt new technology, as well as his choice to hone a go-to-market strategy before exploring fundraising. </p><p><br><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>I introduce Alexander, and he gives some background on his company United Manufacturing Hub (00:22)</li><li>How Alexander decided to develop open-source software for manufacturers (01:39)</li><li>Alexander describes the early days of launching United Manufacturing Hub and how he got his first customers (04:06)</li><li>How long it took to go from a consulting firm to a product-based company (06:57)</li><li>Why it’s important to Alexander that United Manufacturing Hub is an open-source company (08:20)</li><li>Alexander describes the go-to-market strategy at United Manufacturing Hub and how it impacts their fundraising efforts  as well as their monetization model (11:06) </li><li>Alexander describes an interesting mistake he made and what he learned from it (19:10)</li><li>How different it is to sell open-source software in the manufacturing space versus other industries (21:31) </li><li>The biggest challenges facing United Manufacturing Hub today (22:35)</li><li>Alexander describes the pros and cons of going from a services company to a product company (25:44)</li><li>Where people can go to learn more about United Manufacturing Hub and connect with Alexander (29:38)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Alexander</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/alexander-krueger/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/alexander-krueger/</a></li><li>Twitter:</li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.umh.app/">https://www.umh.app/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Alexander Krüger is the Co-Founder and CEO of United Manufacturing Hub, an open-source company that develops software for the manufacturing industry. Throughout our conversation, Alexander describes the unusual path he took in going from a services-based consulting company to a product-led company. He also describes the opportunities and challenges of selling open-source software to an industry that has historically been slow to adopt new technology, as well as his choice to hone a go-to-market strategy before exploring fundraising. </p><p><br><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>I introduce Alexander, and he gives some background on his company United Manufacturing Hub (00:22)</li><li>How Alexander decided to develop open-source software for manufacturers (01:39)</li><li>Alexander describes the early days of launching United Manufacturing Hub and how he got his first customers (04:06)</li><li>How long it took to go from a consulting firm to a product-based company (06:57)</li><li>Why it’s important to Alexander that United Manufacturing Hub is an open-source company (08:20)</li><li>Alexander describes the go-to-market strategy at United Manufacturing Hub and how it impacts their fundraising efforts  as well as their monetization model (11:06) </li><li>Alexander describes an interesting mistake he made and what he learned from it (19:10)</li><li>How different it is to sell open-source software in the manufacturing space versus other industries (21:31) </li><li>The biggest challenges facing United Manufacturing Hub today (22:35)</li><li>Alexander describes the pros and cons of going from a services company to a product company (25:44)</li><li>Where people can go to learn more about United Manufacturing Hub and connect with Alexander (29:38)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Alexander</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/alexander-krueger/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/alexander-krueger/</a></li><li>Twitter:</li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.umh.app/">https://www.umh.app/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 27 Sep 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/dd0fe7a3/8ef15acc.mp3" length="25930692" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1848</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Alexander Krüger is the Co-Founder and CEO of United Manufacturing Hub, an open-source company that develops software for the manufacturing industry. Throughout our conversation, Alexander describes the unusual path he took in going from a services-based consulting company to a product-led company. He also describes the opportunities and challenges of selling open-source software to an industry that has historically been slow to adopt new technology, as well as his choice to hone a go-to-market strategy before exploring fundraising. </p><p><br><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>I introduce Alexander, and he gives some background on his company United Manufacturing Hub (00:22)</li><li>How Alexander decided to develop open-source software for manufacturers (01:39)</li><li>Alexander describes the early days of launching United Manufacturing Hub and how he got his first customers (04:06)</li><li>How long it took to go from a consulting firm to a product-based company (06:57)</li><li>Why it’s important to Alexander that United Manufacturing Hub is an open-source company (08:20)</li><li>Alexander describes the go-to-market strategy at United Manufacturing Hub and how it impacts their fundraising efforts  as well as their monetization model (11:06) </li><li>Alexander describes an interesting mistake he made and what he learned from it (19:10)</li><li>How different it is to sell open-source software in the manufacturing space versus other industries (21:31) </li><li>The biggest challenges facing United Manufacturing Hub today (22:35)</li><li>Alexander describes the pros and cons of going from a services company to a product company (25:44)</li><li>Where people can go to learn more about United Manufacturing Hub and connect with Alexander (29:38)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Alexander</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/alexander-krueger/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/alexander-krueger/</a></li><li>Twitter:</li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.umh.app/">https://www.umh.app/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>A Case Against Starting Your SaaS as an Open-Source Company with Steven Renwick</title>
      <itunes:episode>169</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>169</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>A Case Against Starting Your SaaS as an Open-Source Company with Steven Renwick</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">baa7dd7d-8da1-4709-b493-ba6a69fd4d37</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/5a77d473</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week I’m chatting with Steven Renwick, CEO of Tilores. As you’ll hear in the episode, we connected when I mistook Tilores for an open-source company. Steven graciously agreed to come on the show to discuss why they decided against making the product open source — which is actually a conversation worth having, and one that open source founders should probably have more often. </p><p>There are a few options for companies building SaaS tools to solve problems for engineers and enterprises, from open source and open core all the way to completely closed source. In this episode, Steven and I discuss some of these options and why his company decided that going closed source would be the option that provided them the greatest opportunity for growth. Steven himself thought they would start the company as an open-source company, but upon further examination, realized they weren’t leaning in that direction for the right reasons. Listen to hear the journey from the beginning of their search for funding, to heading into the end of their second year in business as a closed-source company.</p><p><br><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>I introduce Steven, tell the story of how we met, and he fills us in on the origin of Tilores. (0:32)</li><li>Steven delves deeper into how Tilores started and why they decided against open source. (1:47)</li><li>Steven and I discuss how companies sometimes get into open source before they fully understand all of the licensing options and how it will effect their business. (6:05)</li><li>I point out that transparency is a commonly appreciated value in open source projects and Steven agrees that while it hasn’t been an issue so far, that is something that may push Tilores to open source in the future. (8:58)</li><li>In seeking funding for Tilores, Steven found investors hesitant to buy into an open source company, so he explains why he thinks that is. (10:37)</li><li>Steven and I discuss the many reasons going closed source keeps things simple. (14:27)</li><li>Steven and I debate the idea that being open source implies a grander vision or hope of becoming the standard of service. (16:01)</li><li>I mention that companies have gone from open source to closed source, which leads us to how open source can make it difficult for a company to become profitable. (19:43)</li><li>We then dive into what the difference in vision between making boatloads of money, hoping to become the standard of service, and hoping to serve a particular niche. (21:06)</li><li>If you don’t have a really good reason to go open source, maybe you shouldn’t. (24:15)</li><li>Steven recalls a mistake in the early development of Tilores. (27:12)</li><li>Steven shares his advice for folks making a product for engineers. (29:22)</li><li>Steven reviews Tilores’s biggest challenge now. (30:58)</li><li>Steven shares some final thoughts on open source. (34:07)</li></ul><p><br><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Steven</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/stevenrenwick/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/stevenrenwick/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/Major_Grooves">@Major_Grooves</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://tilores.io/">tilores.io/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week I’m chatting with Steven Renwick, CEO of Tilores. As you’ll hear in the episode, we connected when I mistook Tilores for an open-source company. Steven graciously agreed to come on the show to discuss why they decided against making the product open source — which is actually a conversation worth having, and one that open source founders should probably have more often. </p><p>There are a few options for companies building SaaS tools to solve problems for engineers and enterprises, from open source and open core all the way to completely closed source. In this episode, Steven and I discuss some of these options and why his company decided that going closed source would be the option that provided them the greatest opportunity for growth. Steven himself thought they would start the company as an open-source company, but upon further examination, realized they weren’t leaning in that direction for the right reasons. Listen to hear the journey from the beginning of their search for funding, to heading into the end of their second year in business as a closed-source company.</p><p><br><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>I introduce Steven, tell the story of how we met, and he fills us in on the origin of Tilores. (0:32)</li><li>Steven delves deeper into how Tilores started and why they decided against open source. (1:47)</li><li>Steven and I discuss how companies sometimes get into open source before they fully understand all of the licensing options and how it will effect their business. (6:05)</li><li>I point out that transparency is a commonly appreciated value in open source projects and Steven agrees that while it hasn’t been an issue so far, that is something that may push Tilores to open source in the future. (8:58)</li><li>In seeking funding for Tilores, Steven found investors hesitant to buy into an open source company, so he explains why he thinks that is. (10:37)</li><li>Steven and I discuss the many reasons going closed source keeps things simple. (14:27)</li><li>Steven and I debate the idea that being open source implies a grander vision or hope of becoming the standard of service. (16:01)</li><li>I mention that companies have gone from open source to closed source, which leads us to how open source can make it difficult for a company to become profitable. (19:43)</li><li>We then dive into what the difference in vision between making boatloads of money, hoping to become the standard of service, and hoping to serve a particular niche. (21:06)</li><li>If you don’t have a really good reason to go open source, maybe you shouldn’t. (24:15)</li><li>Steven recalls a mistake in the early development of Tilores. (27:12)</li><li>Steven shares his advice for folks making a product for engineers. (29:22)</li><li>Steven reviews Tilores’s biggest challenge now. (30:58)</li><li>Steven shares some final thoughts on open source. (34:07)</li></ul><p><br><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Steven</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/stevenrenwick/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/stevenrenwick/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/Major_Grooves">@Major_Grooves</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://tilores.io/">tilores.io/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 20 Sep 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/5a77d473/2d034051.mp3" length="52163418" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2165</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week I’m chatting with Steven Renwick, CEO of Tilores. As you’ll hear in the episode, we connected when I mistook Tilores for an open-source company. Steven graciously agreed to come on the show to discuss why they decided against making the product open source — which is actually a conversation worth having, and one that open source founders should probably have more often. </p><p>There are a few options for companies building SaaS tools to solve problems for engineers and enterprises, from open source and open core all the way to completely closed source. In this episode, Steven and I discuss some of these options and why his company decided that going closed source would be the option that provided them the greatest opportunity for growth. Steven himself thought they would start the company as an open-source company, but upon further examination, realized they weren’t leaning in that direction for the right reasons. Listen to hear the journey from the beginning of their search for funding, to heading into the end of their second year in business as a closed-source company.</p><p><br><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>I introduce Steven, tell the story of how we met, and he fills us in on the origin of Tilores. (0:32)</li><li>Steven delves deeper into how Tilores started and why they decided against open source. (1:47)</li><li>Steven and I discuss how companies sometimes get into open source before they fully understand all of the licensing options and how it will effect their business. (6:05)</li><li>I point out that transparency is a commonly appreciated value in open source projects and Steven agrees that while it hasn’t been an issue so far, that is something that may push Tilores to open source in the future. (8:58)</li><li>In seeking funding for Tilores, Steven found investors hesitant to buy into an open source company, so he explains why he thinks that is. (10:37)</li><li>Steven and I discuss the many reasons going closed source keeps things simple. (14:27)</li><li>Steven and I debate the idea that being open source implies a grander vision or hope of becoming the standard of service. (16:01)</li><li>I mention that companies have gone from open source to closed source, which leads us to how open source can make it difficult for a company to become profitable. (19:43)</li><li>We then dive into what the difference in vision between making boatloads of money, hoping to become the standard of service, and hoping to serve a particular niche. (21:06)</li><li>If you don’t have a really good reason to go open source, maybe you shouldn’t. (24:15)</li><li>Steven recalls a mistake in the early development of Tilores. (27:12)</li><li>Steven shares his advice for folks making a product for engineers. (29:22)</li><li>Steven reviews Tilores’s biggest challenge now. (30:58)</li><li>Steven shares some final thoughts on open source. (34:07)</li></ul><p><br><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Steven</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/stevenrenwick/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/stevenrenwick/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/Major_Grooves">@Major_Grooves</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://tilores.io/">tilores.io/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Philippe Humeau on Creating Fair Exchanges in Open-Source Business Models</title>
      <itunes:episode>168</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>168</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Philippe Humeau on Creating Fair Exchanges in Open-Source Business Models</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">bf2d18bf-f9b2-4864-bb98-c8bba3ba4cd1</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/a8c86b4b</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Philippe Humeau is the CEO and Co-Founder of CrowdSec, an open-source security company with a very unique business model that doesn’t fit the usual open source patterns. Philippe talked about how to focus on providing a fair exchange of value between maintainers / open source companies and users, and how to monetize a project that is providing value for free.</p><p>Philippe also talked about why he thinks open-source founders are under more pressure to get their business model right at the start, tips on making the right hiring decisions, and how to communicate with the community in an effective and transparent way. I also liked Philippe’s cynicism: why he views open source as primarily a pragmatic choice for his business, given the type of company he wanted to build. </p><p>Philippe also shares the logic behind his uncommon view that only making certain features available to paying customers isn’t a truly open-source business strategy. </p><p><br><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>I introduce Philippe, who gives some background on his career journey and what he does at CrowdSec (00:22)</li><li>Philippe explains why it seems that security companies are underrepresented in the open-source space (03:19)</li><li>The most common mistake Philippe sees when people start an open-source business (05:03)</li><li>Why Philippe believes that open-source companies are under more pressure to get their business model right the first time (09:26)</li><li>How Philippe came up with Crowdsec’s unique business model (16:15)</li><li>The pushback that Philippe got when he presented his business model initially (19:33)</li><li>Why Philippe views open source as a means to an end, and how that has affected his choices at CrowdSec (25:10)</li><li>The most interesting mistake Philippe has made since starting CrowdSec (27:28)</li><li>Why Philippe believes open source business models are more promising than closed source (31:19)</li><li>The advice that Philippe would give to an open source founder who is looking to build a successful company (34:11)</li><li>Why Philippe feels that having certain features behind a paywall is not a truly open-source business model (35:53)</li><li>Where you can learn more about Philippe and connect with CrowdSec (40:11)</li></ul><p><strong><br>Links:</strong></p><p>Philippe</p><ul><li>LinkedIn:<a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/philippehumeau/"> https://www.linkedin.com/in/philippehumeau/</a></li><li>Twitter:<a href="https://twitter.com/philippe_humeau"> https://twitter.com/philippe_humeau</a></li><li>Company:<a href="https://www.crowdsec.net/"> https://www.crowdsec.net/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Philippe Humeau is the CEO and Co-Founder of CrowdSec, an open-source security company with a very unique business model that doesn’t fit the usual open source patterns. Philippe talked about how to focus on providing a fair exchange of value between maintainers / open source companies and users, and how to monetize a project that is providing value for free.</p><p>Philippe also talked about why he thinks open-source founders are under more pressure to get their business model right at the start, tips on making the right hiring decisions, and how to communicate with the community in an effective and transparent way. I also liked Philippe’s cynicism: why he views open source as primarily a pragmatic choice for his business, given the type of company he wanted to build. </p><p>Philippe also shares the logic behind his uncommon view that only making certain features available to paying customers isn’t a truly open-source business strategy. </p><p><br><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>I introduce Philippe, who gives some background on his career journey and what he does at CrowdSec (00:22)</li><li>Philippe explains why it seems that security companies are underrepresented in the open-source space (03:19)</li><li>The most common mistake Philippe sees when people start an open-source business (05:03)</li><li>Why Philippe believes that open-source companies are under more pressure to get their business model right the first time (09:26)</li><li>How Philippe came up with Crowdsec’s unique business model (16:15)</li><li>The pushback that Philippe got when he presented his business model initially (19:33)</li><li>Why Philippe views open source as a means to an end, and how that has affected his choices at CrowdSec (25:10)</li><li>The most interesting mistake Philippe has made since starting CrowdSec (27:28)</li><li>Why Philippe believes open source business models are more promising than closed source (31:19)</li><li>The advice that Philippe would give to an open source founder who is looking to build a successful company (34:11)</li><li>Why Philippe feels that having certain features behind a paywall is not a truly open-source business model (35:53)</li><li>Where you can learn more about Philippe and connect with CrowdSec (40:11)</li></ul><p><strong><br>Links:</strong></p><p>Philippe</p><ul><li>LinkedIn:<a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/philippehumeau/"> https://www.linkedin.com/in/philippehumeau/</a></li><li>Twitter:<a href="https://twitter.com/philippe_humeau"> https://twitter.com/philippe_humeau</a></li><li>Company:<a href="https://www.crowdsec.net/"> https://www.crowdsec.net/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 13 Sep 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/a8c86b4b/1e85c6d1.mp3" length="34068018" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2429</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Philippe Humeau is the CEO and Co-Founder of CrowdSec, an open-source security company with a very unique business model that doesn’t fit the usual open source patterns. Philippe talked about how to focus on providing a fair exchange of value between maintainers / open source companies and users, and how to monetize a project that is providing value for free.</p><p>Philippe also talked about why he thinks open-source founders are under more pressure to get their business model right at the start, tips on making the right hiring decisions, and how to communicate with the community in an effective and transparent way. I also liked Philippe’s cynicism: why he views open source as primarily a pragmatic choice for his business, given the type of company he wanted to build. </p><p>Philippe also shares the logic behind his uncommon view that only making certain features available to paying customers isn’t a truly open-source business strategy. </p><p><br><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>I introduce Philippe, who gives some background on his career journey and what he does at CrowdSec (00:22)</li><li>Philippe explains why it seems that security companies are underrepresented in the open-source space (03:19)</li><li>The most common mistake Philippe sees when people start an open-source business (05:03)</li><li>Why Philippe believes that open-source companies are under more pressure to get their business model right the first time (09:26)</li><li>How Philippe came up with Crowdsec’s unique business model (16:15)</li><li>The pushback that Philippe got when he presented his business model initially (19:33)</li><li>Why Philippe views open source as a means to an end, and how that has affected his choices at CrowdSec (25:10)</li><li>The most interesting mistake Philippe has made since starting CrowdSec (27:28)</li><li>Why Philippe believes open source business models are more promising than closed source (31:19)</li><li>The advice that Philippe would give to an open source founder who is looking to build a successful company (34:11)</li><li>Why Philippe feels that having certain features behind a paywall is not a truly open-source business model (35:53)</li><li>Where you can learn more about Philippe and connect with CrowdSec (40:11)</li></ul><p><strong><br>Links:</strong></p><p>Philippe</p><ul><li>LinkedIn:<a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/philippehumeau/"> https://www.linkedin.com/in/philippehumeau/</a></li><li>Twitter:<a href="https://twitter.com/philippe_humeau"> https://twitter.com/philippe_humeau</a></li><li>Company:<a href="https://www.crowdsec.net/"> https://www.crowdsec.net/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Samuel Stroschein on the Challenges and Opportunities of Localization</title>
      <itunes:episode>167</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>167</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Samuel Stroschein on the Challenges and Opportunities of Localization</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">c32968c8-aaa3-4488-89f5-7eeb866171d7</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/6b8fcf8d</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Samuel Stroschein is the CEO and Founder of inlang, an open-source company that is looking to not only make localization easy for developers, but also to help companies achieve revenue growth through localization. </p><p>I was particularly excited to talk to Samuel because, back in my way back past, I was a translator, so I’m always interested in solutions that exist to facilitate translation; but also because localizing software is a good example of the intersection between business problems and technical problems. Inlang also strikes me as a company that could see its primary market as developers, or could see its market as CMOs — because of the way localization is both a technical and business problem. And Samuel is clear about this: He says “What we're basically saying is if you want to make more money, you've got to localize.”</p><p>Lastly, another thing that stuck out to me about our conversation was that, as we talked about Inlang’s future monetization strategy, Samuel said he thinks that it will likely be around services — which I hadn’t heard from anyone before. His reason: That the software will ultimately become commoditized.  </p><p>Listen in to learn why localization is such a challenge for developers, what impact it has on revenue growth, and how Samuel took inlang from an open-source project to an open-source company.</p><p><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>Samuel introduces himself, describes his background and explains what inlang is solving for (00:37)</li><li>Why localization is such a challenge and how it led Samuel to create inlang (01:21)</li><li>The circumstances that pushed Samuel to turn inlang into an open-source project (04:30)</li><li>Why Samuel decided to take inlang from an open-source project to an open-source company (05:43)</li><li>Samuel explains how localization is a growth opportunity, and how that impacts inlang’s market (09:00)</li><li>The way Samuel and his team are thinking about monetizing inlang (13:22)</li><li>Why being an open-source company is important to Samuel (15:15)</li><li>The collaboration that open-source brings and why it’s so valuable to Samuel (19:00)</li><li>How financial stability, problem-solving, and the nature of building software all contribute to the success of open source in tech (26:06)</li><li>Samuel explains how he views mistakes as stepping stones to positive outcomes (28:41)</li><li>The learnings that Samuel has gathered when hiring for inlang (30:13)</li><li>How you can connect with Samuel and learn more about inlang (31:22)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Samuel</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/samuelstroschein">https://www.linkedin.com/in/samuelstroschein</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/samuelstros">https://twitter.com/samuelstros</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://inlang.com/">https://inlang.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Samuel Stroschein is the CEO and Founder of inlang, an open-source company that is looking to not only make localization easy for developers, but also to help companies achieve revenue growth through localization. </p><p>I was particularly excited to talk to Samuel because, back in my way back past, I was a translator, so I’m always interested in solutions that exist to facilitate translation; but also because localizing software is a good example of the intersection between business problems and technical problems. Inlang also strikes me as a company that could see its primary market as developers, or could see its market as CMOs — because of the way localization is both a technical and business problem. And Samuel is clear about this: He says “What we're basically saying is if you want to make more money, you've got to localize.”</p><p>Lastly, another thing that stuck out to me about our conversation was that, as we talked about Inlang’s future monetization strategy, Samuel said he thinks that it will likely be around services — which I hadn’t heard from anyone before. His reason: That the software will ultimately become commoditized.  </p><p>Listen in to learn why localization is such a challenge for developers, what impact it has on revenue growth, and how Samuel took inlang from an open-source project to an open-source company.</p><p><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>Samuel introduces himself, describes his background and explains what inlang is solving for (00:37)</li><li>Why localization is such a challenge and how it led Samuel to create inlang (01:21)</li><li>The circumstances that pushed Samuel to turn inlang into an open-source project (04:30)</li><li>Why Samuel decided to take inlang from an open-source project to an open-source company (05:43)</li><li>Samuel explains how localization is a growth opportunity, and how that impacts inlang’s market (09:00)</li><li>The way Samuel and his team are thinking about monetizing inlang (13:22)</li><li>Why being an open-source company is important to Samuel (15:15)</li><li>The collaboration that open-source brings and why it’s so valuable to Samuel (19:00)</li><li>How financial stability, problem-solving, and the nature of building software all contribute to the success of open source in tech (26:06)</li><li>Samuel explains how he views mistakes as stepping stones to positive outcomes (28:41)</li><li>The learnings that Samuel has gathered when hiring for inlang (30:13)</li><li>How you can connect with Samuel and learn more about inlang (31:22)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Samuel</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/samuelstroschein">https://www.linkedin.com/in/samuelstroschein</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/samuelstros">https://twitter.com/samuelstros</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://inlang.com/">https://inlang.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 06 Sep 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/6b8fcf8d/c4ae1a90.mp3" length="48441430" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1938</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Samuel Stroschein is the CEO and Founder of inlang, an open-source company that is looking to not only make localization easy for developers, but also to help companies achieve revenue growth through localization. </p><p>I was particularly excited to talk to Samuel because, back in my way back past, I was a translator, so I’m always interested in solutions that exist to facilitate translation; but also because localizing software is a good example of the intersection between business problems and technical problems. Inlang also strikes me as a company that could see its primary market as developers, or could see its market as CMOs — because of the way localization is both a technical and business problem. And Samuel is clear about this: He says “What we're basically saying is if you want to make more money, you've got to localize.”</p><p>Lastly, another thing that stuck out to me about our conversation was that, as we talked about Inlang’s future monetization strategy, Samuel said he thinks that it will likely be around services — which I hadn’t heard from anyone before. His reason: That the software will ultimately become commoditized.  </p><p>Listen in to learn why localization is such a challenge for developers, what impact it has on revenue growth, and how Samuel took inlang from an open-source project to an open-source company.</p><p><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>Samuel introduces himself, describes his background and explains what inlang is solving for (00:37)</li><li>Why localization is such a challenge and how it led Samuel to create inlang (01:21)</li><li>The circumstances that pushed Samuel to turn inlang into an open-source project (04:30)</li><li>Why Samuel decided to take inlang from an open-source project to an open-source company (05:43)</li><li>Samuel explains how localization is a growth opportunity, and how that impacts inlang’s market (09:00)</li><li>The way Samuel and his team are thinking about monetizing inlang (13:22)</li><li>Why being an open-source company is important to Samuel (15:15)</li><li>The collaboration that open-source brings and why it’s so valuable to Samuel (19:00)</li><li>How financial stability, problem-solving, and the nature of building software all contribute to the success of open source in tech (26:06)</li><li>Samuel explains how he views mistakes as stepping stones to positive outcomes (28:41)</li><li>The learnings that Samuel has gathered when hiring for inlang (30:13)</li><li>How you can connect with Samuel and learn more about inlang (31:22)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Samuel</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/samuelstroschein">https://www.linkedin.com/in/samuelstroschein</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/samuelstros">https://twitter.com/samuelstros</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://inlang.com/">https://inlang.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Kevin Muller on Seeking Out Harsh Feedback and Commercializing too Soon</title>
      <itunes:episode>166</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>166</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Kevin Muller on Seeking Out Harsh Feedback and Commercializing too Soon</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">fd719653-6308-4b0f-8333-0eb5b2c6b037</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/fba94808</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Kevin Muller is the CEO and co-founder of Passbolt, a security-first, open-source password manager, and he joined me to talk about the risks of having too much time and money, the value of getting trashed on social media and why he values in-person interactions with the team. </p><p>There were a lot of interesting pieces to pick apart from this episode. First of all, Kevin talked about the importance of not commercializing too early. I think he's the only founder I've ever heard say something along those lines, but he makes a good argument. (Also, <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/podcast/tim-chen">Tim Chen</a> and I talked about the timing of commercialization last week, my takeaway is that no one feels like they commercialized at precisely the right moment). Second, we had a good discussion about how the different priorities of European versus American investors can push companies to make different decisions. The subtext that we didn't address directly is <em>make sure you are aware that your investors priorities are going to influence how your company evolves, choose your investors with that in mind</em>. (and check out the episode with Markus <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/podcast/markus-dttman">Düttmann</a> if you want more on the EU vs US investment environment for open source startups). Lastly, password managers have been in the news, and not in a good way — and how to best react to a super embarrassing situation for a competitor is not always obvious. So we talked about how Passbolt has tried to steer the conversation about password management in light of recent high-profile hacks in the ecosystem. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Kevin introduces himself and describes his work at Passbolt (00:26)</li><li>How Kevin got the idea for Passbolt and the story of how he brought his idea to life (01:07)</li><li>The mistakes that Kevin and his co-founders made when launching Passbolt (05:03)</li><li>What happened when Kevin and his co-founders officially launched Passbolt in 2016 (08:12)</li><li>How Kevin and his co-founders decided to move from a purely open-source product to a commercialized product (09:32)</li><li>Why Passbolt is a hybrid company and the value Kevin sees in having employees spend time in the office (12:41)</li><li>Kevin describes why it was so important for Passbolt to be an open-source company (15:58)</li><li>Why Kevin feels it’s important not to commercialize an open-source product too quickly (19:07)</li><li>The different priorities of European VCs versus U.S. VCs (21:58)</li><li>Why honest feedback is so valuable and how Kevin and his team evaluated the feedback they got at the launch of Passbolt (24:26)</li><li>Kevin’s reaction to data breaches that happen to other password management solutions (27:09)</li><li>The biggest challenges that Kevin and the team at Passbolt are working on currently (31:09)</li><li>Kevin’s advice to open-source founders (32:47)</li></ul><p>Links:</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/kevinmuller80/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/kevinmuller80/</a></li><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/company/passbolt/">https://www.linkedin.com/company/passbolt/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/passbolt">https://twitter.com/passbolt</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.passbolt.com">https://www.passbolt.com</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Kevin Muller is the CEO and co-founder of Passbolt, a security-first, open-source password manager, and he joined me to talk about the risks of having too much time and money, the value of getting trashed on social media and why he values in-person interactions with the team. </p><p>There were a lot of interesting pieces to pick apart from this episode. First of all, Kevin talked about the importance of not commercializing too early. I think he's the only founder I've ever heard say something along those lines, but he makes a good argument. (Also, <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/podcast/tim-chen">Tim Chen</a> and I talked about the timing of commercialization last week, my takeaway is that no one feels like they commercialized at precisely the right moment). Second, we had a good discussion about how the different priorities of European versus American investors can push companies to make different decisions. The subtext that we didn't address directly is <em>make sure you are aware that your investors priorities are going to influence how your company evolves, choose your investors with that in mind</em>. (and check out the episode with Markus <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/podcast/markus-dttman">Düttmann</a> if you want more on the EU vs US investment environment for open source startups). Lastly, password managers have been in the news, and not in a good way — and how to best react to a super embarrassing situation for a competitor is not always obvious. So we talked about how Passbolt has tried to steer the conversation about password management in light of recent high-profile hacks in the ecosystem. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Kevin introduces himself and describes his work at Passbolt (00:26)</li><li>How Kevin got the idea for Passbolt and the story of how he brought his idea to life (01:07)</li><li>The mistakes that Kevin and his co-founders made when launching Passbolt (05:03)</li><li>What happened when Kevin and his co-founders officially launched Passbolt in 2016 (08:12)</li><li>How Kevin and his co-founders decided to move from a purely open-source product to a commercialized product (09:32)</li><li>Why Passbolt is a hybrid company and the value Kevin sees in having employees spend time in the office (12:41)</li><li>Kevin describes why it was so important for Passbolt to be an open-source company (15:58)</li><li>Why Kevin feels it’s important not to commercialize an open-source product too quickly (19:07)</li><li>The different priorities of European VCs versus U.S. VCs (21:58)</li><li>Why honest feedback is so valuable and how Kevin and his team evaluated the feedback they got at the launch of Passbolt (24:26)</li><li>Kevin’s reaction to data breaches that happen to other password management solutions (27:09)</li><li>The biggest challenges that Kevin and the team at Passbolt are working on currently (31:09)</li><li>Kevin’s advice to open-source founders (32:47)</li></ul><p>Links:</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/kevinmuller80/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/kevinmuller80/</a></li><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/company/passbolt/">https://www.linkedin.com/company/passbolt/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/passbolt">https://twitter.com/passbolt</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.passbolt.com">https://www.passbolt.com</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 30 Aug 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/fba94808/ed1ea63a.mp3" length="29569114" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2108</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Kevin Muller is the CEO and co-founder of Passbolt, a security-first, open-source password manager, and he joined me to talk about the risks of having too much time and money, the value of getting trashed on social media and why he values in-person interactions with the team. </p><p>There were a lot of interesting pieces to pick apart from this episode. First of all, Kevin talked about the importance of not commercializing too early. I think he's the only founder I've ever heard say something along those lines, but he makes a good argument. (Also, <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/podcast/tim-chen">Tim Chen</a> and I talked about the timing of commercialization last week, my takeaway is that no one feels like they commercialized at precisely the right moment). Second, we had a good discussion about how the different priorities of European versus American investors can push companies to make different decisions. The subtext that we didn't address directly is <em>make sure you are aware that your investors priorities are going to influence how your company evolves, choose your investors with that in mind</em>. (and check out the episode with Markus <a href="https://www.emilyomier.com/podcast/markus-dttman">Düttmann</a> if you want more on the EU vs US investment environment for open source startups). Lastly, password managers have been in the news, and not in a good way — and how to best react to a super embarrassing situation for a competitor is not always obvious. So we talked about how Passbolt has tried to steer the conversation about password management in light of recent high-profile hacks in the ecosystem. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Kevin introduces himself and describes his work at Passbolt (00:26)</li><li>How Kevin got the idea for Passbolt and the story of how he brought his idea to life (01:07)</li><li>The mistakes that Kevin and his co-founders made when launching Passbolt (05:03)</li><li>What happened when Kevin and his co-founders officially launched Passbolt in 2016 (08:12)</li><li>How Kevin and his co-founders decided to move from a purely open-source product to a commercialized product (09:32)</li><li>Why Passbolt is a hybrid company and the value Kevin sees in having employees spend time in the office (12:41)</li><li>Kevin describes why it was so important for Passbolt to be an open-source company (15:58)</li><li>Why Kevin feels it’s important not to commercialize an open-source product too quickly (19:07)</li><li>The different priorities of European VCs versus U.S. VCs (21:58)</li><li>Why honest feedback is so valuable and how Kevin and his team evaluated the feedback they got at the launch of Passbolt (24:26)</li><li>Kevin’s reaction to data breaches that happen to other password management solutions (27:09)</li><li>The biggest challenges that Kevin and the team at Passbolt are working on currently (31:09)</li><li>Kevin’s advice to open-source founders (32:47)</li></ul><p>Links:</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/kevinmuller80/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/kevinmuller80/</a></li><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/company/passbolt/">https://www.linkedin.com/company/passbolt/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/passbolt">https://twitter.com/passbolt</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.passbolt.com">https://www.passbolt.com</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Venture Capitalist Tim Chen on the Nuances of Founding an Open Source Startup</title>
      <itunes:episode>165</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>165</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Venture Capitalist Tim Chen on the Nuances of Founding an Open Source Startup</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">1f60e414-5693-469d-9148-e2d47d13c7af</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/4394ff38</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Tim Chen is a Partner at Essence VC and also the Co-Host of the Open Source Startup Podcast. Through these channels, he has the opportunity to speak with a broad variety of open source startups. Throughout our conversation, we explore the patterns that Tim sees in the open source startup space. Tim talked about how too many founders take the decision to build an open source company too lightly and the path that he would take if he were to start a venture-backed open source startup tomorrow. We also discuss the different monetization models of open-source startups and the true business value of an open source project. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Tim introduces himself and describes his role at Essence VC as well as his work as Co-Host of the Open Source Startup Podcast (00:22)</li><li>The common patterns that Tim sees having worked with so many open source startups (02:25)</li><li>Tim describes the landscape of open source and how it varies from open source projects to venture-backed, open source companies (06:48)</li><li>What path Tim would take if he were to start a venture-backed, open source startup tomorrow (09:31)</li><li>How Tim views different monetization models and their potential profitability (17:29)</li><li>Tim’s views on the pros and cons of an open-core model (20:34)</li><li>The business value of an open source project according to Tim (24:47)</li><li>How Tim’s evaluation and investing tactics have changed as he’s worked with more open source startups (31:58)</li><li>Where listeners can find more information about Tim and learn more about his work (37:47)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Tim</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/timchen">https://www.linkedin.com/in/timchen</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/tnachen">https://twitter.com/tnachen</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.essencevc.fund/">https://www.essencevc.fund/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Tim Chen is a Partner at Essence VC and also the Co-Host of the Open Source Startup Podcast. Through these channels, he has the opportunity to speak with a broad variety of open source startups. Throughout our conversation, we explore the patterns that Tim sees in the open source startup space. Tim talked about how too many founders take the decision to build an open source company too lightly and the path that he would take if he were to start a venture-backed open source startup tomorrow. We also discuss the different monetization models of open-source startups and the true business value of an open source project. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Tim introduces himself and describes his role at Essence VC as well as his work as Co-Host of the Open Source Startup Podcast (00:22)</li><li>The common patterns that Tim sees having worked with so many open source startups (02:25)</li><li>Tim describes the landscape of open source and how it varies from open source projects to venture-backed, open source companies (06:48)</li><li>What path Tim would take if he were to start a venture-backed, open source startup tomorrow (09:31)</li><li>How Tim views different monetization models and their potential profitability (17:29)</li><li>Tim’s views on the pros and cons of an open-core model (20:34)</li><li>The business value of an open source project according to Tim (24:47)</li><li>How Tim’s evaluation and investing tactics have changed as he’s worked with more open source startups (31:58)</li><li>Where listeners can find more information about Tim and learn more about his work (37:47)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Tim</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/timchen">https://www.linkedin.com/in/timchen</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/tnachen">https://twitter.com/tnachen</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.essencevc.fund/">https://www.essencevc.fund/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 23 Aug 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/4394ff38/bafaca98.mp3" length="32800057" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2338</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Tim Chen is a Partner at Essence VC and also the Co-Host of the Open Source Startup Podcast. Through these channels, he has the opportunity to speak with a broad variety of open source startups. Throughout our conversation, we explore the patterns that Tim sees in the open source startup space. Tim talked about how too many founders take the decision to build an open source company too lightly and the path that he would take if he were to start a venture-backed open source startup tomorrow. We also discuss the different monetization models of open-source startups and the true business value of an open source project. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Tim introduces himself and describes his role at Essence VC as well as his work as Co-Host of the Open Source Startup Podcast (00:22)</li><li>The common patterns that Tim sees having worked with so many open source startups (02:25)</li><li>Tim describes the landscape of open source and how it varies from open source projects to venture-backed, open source companies (06:48)</li><li>What path Tim would take if he were to start a venture-backed, open source startup tomorrow (09:31)</li><li>How Tim views different monetization models and their potential profitability (17:29)</li><li>Tim’s views on the pros and cons of an open-core model (20:34)</li><li>The business value of an open source project according to Tim (24:47)</li><li>How Tim’s evaluation and investing tactics have changed as he’s worked with more open source startups (31:58)</li><li>Where listeners can find more information about Tim and learn more about his work (37:47)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Tim</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/timchen">https://www.linkedin.com/in/timchen</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/tnachen">https://twitter.com/tnachen</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.essencevc.fund/">https://www.essencevc.fund/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>CEO Franz Karlsberger on Joining an Open-Source Start-Up to Scale Growth</title>
      <itunes:episode>164</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>164</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>CEO Franz Karlsberger on Joining an Open-Source Start-Up to Scale Growth</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">4c042dc1-1d2b-470a-9d19-3e782b8ba72d</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/f78f954b</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Franz Karlsberger is the CEO of Amazee.io, an open-source platform that seeks to make developers’ lives easier by abstracting their day-to-day workload. Throughout our conversation, we explore what it means to join an open-source start-up as an external CEO, and why Franz put so much emphasis on go-to-market strategy. Franz also walks through the importance of knowing what open-source business model your company will follow, and how to measure the success of an open-source project.</p><p>Listen in as Franz shares some of his most interesting mistakes, what he’d do differently if he could start over, and why Franz feels open-source is more than just a type of software, it’s a company ethos that affects everything down to the team culture. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Franz introduces himself and his company Amazee.io, which is a ZeroOps application delivery platform (00:50)</li><li>How <a href="http://Amazee.io">Amazee.io</a> went from being a point solution to a platform solution (06:20)</li><li>Why Franz was brought in as an external CEO for <a href="http://Amazee.io">Amazee.io</a> to accelerate growth (10:03)</li><li>How Franz adjusted to working at an open-source start-up and what that learning curve was like for him (11:47)</li><li>The importance of open-source at <a href="http://Amazee.io">Amazee.io</a> and why it is baked into their core values and ethos as a company (15:30)</li><li>How the go-to-market model differs for Amazee.io’s cloud offering versus their managed offering (17:51)</li><li>Franz describes some of the most interesting mistakes he’s made and what he’s learned from them (23:25)</li><li>Franz’s views on measuring the success of an open-source project (26:29)</li><li>How listeners can connect with Franz and learn more about <a href="http://Amazee.io">Amazee.io</a> (32:37)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Franz</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/franzkarlsberger/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/franzkarlsberger/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/fkarlsberger">https://twitter.com/fkarlsberger</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.amazee.io/">https://www.amazee.io/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Franz Karlsberger is the CEO of Amazee.io, an open-source platform that seeks to make developers’ lives easier by abstracting their day-to-day workload. Throughout our conversation, we explore what it means to join an open-source start-up as an external CEO, and why Franz put so much emphasis on go-to-market strategy. Franz also walks through the importance of knowing what open-source business model your company will follow, and how to measure the success of an open-source project.</p><p>Listen in as Franz shares some of his most interesting mistakes, what he’d do differently if he could start over, and why Franz feels open-source is more than just a type of software, it’s a company ethos that affects everything down to the team culture. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Franz introduces himself and his company Amazee.io, which is a ZeroOps application delivery platform (00:50)</li><li>How <a href="http://Amazee.io">Amazee.io</a> went from being a point solution to a platform solution (06:20)</li><li>Why Franz was brought in as an external CEO for <a href="http://Amazee.io">Amazee.io</a> to accelerate growth (10:03)</li><li>How Franz adjusted to working at an open-source start-up and what that learning curve was like for him (11:47)</li><li>The importance of open-source at <a href="http://Amazee.io">Amazee.io</a> and why it is baked into their core values and ethos as a company (15:30)</li><li>How the go-to-market model differs for Amazee.io’s cloud offering versus their managed offering (17:51)</li><li>Franz describes some of the most interesting mistakes he’s made and what he’s learned from them (23:25)</li><li>Franz’s views on measuring the success of an open-source project (26:29)</li><li>How listeners can connect with Franz and learn more about <a href="http://Amazee.io">Amazee.io</a> (32:37)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Franz</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/franzkarlsberger/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/franzkarlsberger/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/fkarlsberger">https://twitter.com/fkarlsberger</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.amazee.io/">https://www.amazee.io/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 16 Aug 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/f78f954b/1396698f.mp3" length="50579019" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2027</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Franz Karlsberger is the CEO of Amazee.io, an open-source platform that seeks to make developers’ lives easier by abstracting their day-to-day workload. Throughout our conversation, we explore what it means to join an open-source start-up as an external CEO, and why Franz put so much emphasis on go-to-market strategy. Franz also walks through the importance of knowing what open-source business model your company will follow, and how to measure the success of an open-source project.</p><p>Listen in as Franz shares some of his most interesting mistakes, what he’d do differently if he could start over, and why Franz feels open-source is more than just a type of software, it’s a company ethos that affects everything down to the team culture. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Franz introduces himself and his company Amazee.io, which is a ZeroOps application delivery platform (00:50)</li><li>How <a href="http://Amazee.io">Amazee.io</a> went from being a point solution to a platform solution (06:20)</li><li>Why Franz was brought in as an external CEO for <a href="http://Amazee.io">Amazee.io</a> to accelerate growth (10:03)</li><li>How Franz adjusted to working at an open-source start-up and what that learning curve was like for him (11:47)</li><li>The importance of open-source at <a href="http://Amazee.io">Amazee.io</a> and why it is baked into their core values and ethos as a company (15:30)</li><li>How the go-to-market model differs for Amazee.io’s cloud offering versus their managed offering (17:51)</li><li>Franz describes some of the most interesting mistakes he’s made and what he’s learned from them (23:25)</li><li>Franz’s views on measuring the success of an open-source project (26:29)</li><li>How listeners can connect with Franz and learn more about <a href="http://Amazee.io">Amazee.io</a> (32:37)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Franz</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/franzkarlsberger/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/franzkarlsberger/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/fkarlsberger">https://twitter.com/fkarlsberger</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.amazee.io/">https://www.amazee.io/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Two-time founder Vlad A. Ionescu on finding success after repeated entrepreneurial failures</title>
      <itunes:episode>163</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>163</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Two-time founder Vlad A. Ionescu on finding success after repeated entrepreneurial failures</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">dc777b9d-4fed-45e6-9e29-c3359fc4d9bf</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/7bf78eb5</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>It’s kind of a cliche, Vlad A. Ionescu, founder and CEO of <a href="https://earthly.dev/">Earthly</a>, says, but his first attempts to build something really awesome focused on amazing technology. With hindsight, he doesn’t think it’s so surprising that those efforts weren’t successful. It’s not that passion doesn’t matter, but rather that he had to learn to build things that inspired passion from both the market and the builders. We also talked about:</p><ul><li>Leaving a job, blowing through his savings, going back to a job before finding entrepreneurial success</li><li>Realizing that if he wanted to have the kind of impact on the world that he wanted to, he had to figure out a way to make it as an entrepreneur, because the alternative was climbing the corporate ladder and that didn’t sound like fun</li><li>Why it’s important to be brutally honest with yourself and what you suck at</li><li>How Vlad finally found success at Shift Left (now Quiet.ai)</li></ul><p>I also really liked his ideas about cutting corners — that startups will always have to cut some corners, it’s just up to you to decide which ones to cut. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Vlad recounts lessons learned from early entrepreneurial failures. (2:31)</li><li>Taking failure personally to overcome weaknesses (5:19)</li><li>Vlad explains what led to his first success with Shift Left (7:40)</li><li>Vlad shares his journey from Shift Left to Earthly (13:40)</li><li>Why open source? (17:03)</li><li>How Vlad and his team built Earthly based on what he learned from building Shift Left (25:07)</li><li>Breaking a product down to its components to find more value (31:38)</li><li>The Startup Hierarchy of Needs (34:02)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Vlad</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/vladalexandruionescu/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/VladAIonescu">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://earthly.dev/">Earthly</a></li><li><a href="https://qwiet.ai/">Qwiet.ai</a></li><li><a href="https://vladaionescu.com/">Personal Site</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>It’s kind of a cliche, Vlad A. Ionescu, founder and CEO of <a href="https://earthly.dev/">Earthly</a>, says, but his first attempts to build something really awesome focused on amazing technology. With hindsight, he doesn’t think it’s so surprising that those efforts weren’t successful. It’s not that passion doesn’t matter, but rather that he had to learn to build things that inspired passion from both the market and the builders. We also talked about:</p><ul><li>Leaving a job, blowing through his savings, going back to a job before finding entrepreneurial success</li><li>Realizing that if he wanted to have the kind of impact on the world that he wanted to, he had to figure out a way to make it as an entrepreneur, because the alternative was climbing the corporate ladder and that didn’t sound like fun</li><li>Why it’s important to be brutally honest with yourself and what you suck at</li><li>How Vlad finally found success at Shift Left (now Quiet.ai)</li></ul><p>I also really liked his ideas about cutting corners — that startups will always have to cut some corners, it’s just up to you to decide which ones to cut. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Vlad recounts lessons learned from early entrepreneurial failures. (2:31)</li><li>Taking failure personally to overcome weaknesses (5:19)</li><li>Vlad explains what led to his first success with Shift Left (7:40)</li><li>Vlad shares his journey from Shift Left to Earthly (13:40)</li><li>Why open source? (17:03)</li><li>How Vlad and his team built Earthly based on what he learned from building Shift Left (25:07)</li><li>Breaking a product down to its components to find more value (31:38)</li><li>The Startup Hierarchy of Needs (34:02)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Vlad</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/vladalexandruionescu/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/VladAIonescu">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://earthly.dev/">Earthly</a></li><li><a href="https://qwiet.ai/">Qwiet.ai</a></li><li><a href="https://vladaionescu.com/">Personal Site</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 09 Aug 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/7bf78eb5/084deed7.mp3" length="35855764" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2557</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>It’s kind of a cliche, Vlad A. Ionescu, founder and CEO of <a href="https://earthly.dev/">Earthly</a>, says, but his first attempts to build something really awesome focused on amazing technology. With hindsight, he doesn’t think it’s so surprising that those efforts weren’t successful. It’s not that passion doesn’t matter, but rather that he had to learn to build things that inspired passion from both the market and the builders. We also talked about:</p><ul><li>Leaving a job, blowing through his savings, going back to a job before finding entrepreneurial success</li><li>Realizing that if he wanted to have the kind of impact on the world that he wanted to, he had to figure out a way to make it as an entrepreneur, because the alternative was climbing the corporate ladder and that didn’t sound like fun</li><li>Why it’s important to be brutally honest with yourself and what you suck at</li><li>How Vlad finally found success at Shift Left (now Quiet.ai)</li></ul><p>I also really liked his ideas about cutting corners — that startups will always have to cut some corners, it’s just up to you to decide which ones to cut. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Vlad recounts lessons learned from early entrepreneurial failures. (2:31)</li><li>Taking failure personally to overcome weaknesses (5:19)</li><li>Vlad explains what led to his first success with Shift Left (7:40)</li><li>Vlad shares his journey from Shift Left to Earthly (13:40)</li><li>Why open source? (17:03)</li><li>How Vlad and his team built Earthly based on what he learned from building Shift Left (25:07)</li><li>Breaking a product down to its components to find more value (31:38)</li><li>The Startup Hierarchy of Needs (34:02)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Vlad</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/vladalexandruionescu/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/VladAIonescu">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://earthly.dev/">Earthly</a></li><li><a href="https://qwiet.ai/">Qwiet.ai</a></li><li><a href="https://vladaionescu.com/">Personal Site</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Exploring the European Open Source Ecosystem with Markus Düttmann</title>
      <itunes:episode>162</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>162</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Exploring the European Open Source Ecosystem with Markus Düttmann</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">c23d91c3-b76e-4d56-83ab-4d96790b47d6</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/761e575c</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Markus Düttmann, a former Principal at <a href="https://nautacapital.com/">Nauta Capital</a>, is steeped in the European open source scene. From his beginnings in theoretical physics, Düttmann’s hard pivot into venture capital funding granted him a spot in the developing tech world as a connoisseur of the culture and a champion for start-ups. He even contributed to Nauta Capital’s <a href="https://nautacapital.com/insight/open-source-weathers-the-fundingstorm/">European Open Source Report</a> detailing the state of the ecosystem as of October 2022.</p><p>On this episode of the Business of Open Source, listen to his insight into the European markets, the various business models generally used for open source start-ups, and what he looks for in an open source start-up.</p><p>Note: Markus has since left Nauta and is on paternity leave. He also asked me to add a follow-up to the episode: After thinking more about the biggest danger to open source companies, he thinks most of them will fail from problems like not building the right team, failure to find product market fit and/or failure to monetize. Hyperscalers are a danger, but probably won’t be what causes most startups to fail. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>The unique qualities of the European open source ecosystem (2:20)</li><li>European market vs. the American Market in terms of funding (3:45)</li><li>Advantages and disadvantages of a European open source company (4:40)</li><li>Navigating the use of different business models within a business (8:14)</li><li>How Markus evaluates open source start-ups (11:46)</li><li>Don't be the open source version of an existing enterprise company (16:14)</li><li>Signs of a company worth investing in (16:45)</li><li>Potential risks to the open source ecosystem in the coming years (19:24)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Markus</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/markusduettmann/?originalSubdomain=de">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/duettmann?lang=en">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://nautacapital.com/">Nauta Capital</a></li><li><a href="https://nautacapital.com/insight/open-source-weathers-the-fundingstorm/">European Open Source Report</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Markus Düttmann, a former Principal at <a href="https://nautacapital.com/">Nauta Capital</a>, is steeped in the European open source scene. From his beginnings in theoretical physics, Düttmann’s hard pivot into venture capital funding granted him a spot in the developing tech world as a connoisseur of the culture and a champion for start-ups. He even contributed to Nauta Capital’s <a href="https://nautacapital.com/insight/open-source-weathers-the-fundingstorm/">European Open Source Report</a> detailing the state of the ecosystem as of October 2022.</p><p>On this episode of the Business of Open Source, listen to his insight into the European markets, the various business models generally used for open source start-ups, and what he looks for in an open source start-up.</p><p>Note: Markus has since left Nauta and is on paternity leave. He also asked me to add a follow-up to the episode: After thinking more about the biggest danger to open source companies, he thinks most of them will fail from problems like not building the right team, failure to find product market fit and/or failure to monetize. Hyperscalers are a danger, but probably won’t be what causes most startups to fail. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>The unique qualities of the European open source ecosystem (2:20)</li><li>European market vs. the American Market in terms of funding (3:45)</li><li>Advantages and disadvantages of a European open source company (4:40)</li><li>Navigating the use of different business models within a business (8:14)</li><li>How Markus evaluates open source start-ups (11:46)</li><li>Don't be the open source version of an existing enterprise company (16:14)</li><li>Signs of a company worth investing in (16:45)</li><li>Potential risks to the open source ecosystem in the coming years (19:24)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Markus</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/markusduettmann/?originalSubdomain=de">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/duettmann?lang=en">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://nautacapital.com/">Nauta Capital</a></li><li><a href="https://nautacapital.com/insight/open-source-weathers-the-fundingstorm/">European Open Source Report</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 02 Aug 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/761e575c/c1b84575.mp3" length="36306027" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1432</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Markus Düttmann, a former Principal at <a href="https://nautacapital.com/">Nauta Capital</a>, is steeped in the European open source scene. From his beginnings in theoretical physics, Düttmann’s hard pivot into venture capital funding granted him a spot in the developing tech world as a connoisseur of the culture and a champion for start-ups. He even contributed to Nauta Capital’s <a href="https://nautacapital.com/insight/open-source-weathers-the-fundingstorm/">European Open Source Report</a> detailing the state of the ecosystem as of October 2022.</p><p>On this episode of the Business of Open Source, listen to his insight into the European markets, the various business models generally used for open source start-ups, and what he looks for in an open source start-up.</p><p>Note: Markus has since left Nauta and is on paternity leave. He also asked me to add a follow-up to the episode: After thinking more about the biggest danger to open source companies, he thinks most of them will fail from problems like not building the right team, failure to find product market fit and/or failure to monetize. Hyperscalers are a danger, but probably won’t be what causes most startups to fail. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>The unique qualities of the European open source ecosystem (2:20)</li><li>European market vs. the American Market in terms of funding (3:45)</li><li>Advantages and disadvantages of a European open source company (4:40)</li><li>Navigating the use of different business models within a business (8:14)</li><li>How Markus evaluates open source start-ups (11:46)</li><li>Don't be the open source version of an existing enterprise company (16:14)</li><li>Signs of a company worth investing in (16:45)</li><li>Potential risks to the open source ecosystem in the coming years (19:24)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Markus</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/markusduettmann/?originalSubdomain=de">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/duettmann?lang=en">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://nautacapital.com/">Nauta Capital</a></li><li><a href="https://nautacapital.com/insight/open-source-weathers-the-fundingstorm/">European Open Source Report</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Demystifying Code Bases with Shanea Leven of CodeSee</title>
      <itunes:episode>161</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>161</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Demystifying Code Bases with Shanea Leven of CodeSee</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">775057ef-1576-484b-810d-f8d5ae4cfbf8</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/c94e1a94</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week Shanea Leven, CEO and Co-Founder of <a href="https://www.codesee.io/">CodeSee</a>, joins me to chat about demystifying code bases and building an effective team.</p><p>In this episode of The Business of Open Source, Shanea and I discuss the origins of her company, CodeSee, how it morphed from a training course to a SaaS product, and how they contribute to open source even though CodeSee is not an open source company. Shanea also shares valuable insight into working closely with your spouse, the importance of communication and empathy in building an effective team, and how she’s evolved as a leader. Listen to hear all of her insight and advice, and find out how the CodeSee SaaS offering helps companies understand their code bases and make critical decisions faster.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>How Shanea’s experience at Docker influenced her decision about whether or not to make CodeSee open source (1:51)</li><li>Origin and history of CodeSee (6:58)</li><li>How CodeSee progressed from a training course to a SaaS product (10:41)</li><li>Shanea’s advice for other entrepreneurs interested in founding a startup with their spouse (14:36)</li><li>Lessons Shanea has learned from the challenges of building a team (17:18)</li><li>The importance of face time with customers (23:08)</li><li>How CodeSee works (26:31)</li><li>How CodeSee contributes to open source without being open source (30:14)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Shanea</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/shaneak/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/ShaneaLeven">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://www.codesee.io/">CodeSee</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week Shanea Leven, CEO and Co-Founder of <a href="https://www.codesee.io/">CodeSee</a>, joins me to chat about demystifying code bases and building an effective team.</p><p>In this episode of The Business of Open Source, Shanea and I discuss the origins of her company, CodeSee, how it morphed from a training course to a SaaS product, and how they contribute to open source even though CodeSee is not an open source company. Shanea also shares valuable insight into working closely with your spouse, the importance of communication and empathy in building an effective team, and how she’s evolved as a leader. Listen to hear all of her insight and advice, and find out how the CodeSee SaaS offering helps companies understand their code bases and make critical decisions faster.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>How Shanea’s experience at Docker influenced her decision about whether or not to make CodeSee open source (1:51)</li><li>Origin and history of CodeSee (6:58)</li><li>How CodeSee progressed from a training course to a SaaS product (10:41)</li><li>Shanea’s advice for other entrepreneurs interested in founding a startup with their spouse (14:36)</li><li>Lessons Shanea has learned from the challenges of building a team (17:18)</li><li>The importance of face time with customers (23:08)</li><li>How CodeSee works (26:31)</li><li>How CodeSee contributes to open source without being open source (30:14)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Shanea</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/shaneak/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/ShaneaLeven">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://www.codesee.io/">CodeSee</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 26 Jul 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/c94e1a94/e4830c5b.mp3" length="50143843" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2010</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week Shanea Leven, CEO and Co-Founder of <a href="https://www.codesee.io/">CodeSee</a>, joins me to chat about demystifying code bases and building an effective team.</p><p>In this episode of The Business of Open Source, Shanea and I discuss the origins of her company, CodeSee, how it morphed from a training course to a SaaS product, and how they contribute to open source even though CodeSee is not an open source company. Shanea also shares valuable insight into working closely with your spouse, the importance of communication and empathy in building an effective team, and how she’s evolved as a leader. Listen to hear all of her insight and advice, and find out how the CodeSee SaaS offering helps companies understand their code bases and make critical decisions faster.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>How Shanea’s experience at Docker influenced her decision about whether or not to make CodeSee open source (1:51)</li><li>Origin and history of CodeSee (6:58)</li><li>How CodeSee progressed from a training course to a SaaS product (10:41)</li><li>Shanea’s advice for other entrepreneurs interested in founding a startup with their spouse (14:36)</li><li>Lessons Shanea has learned from the challenges of building a team (17:18)</li><li>The importance of face time with customers (23:08)</li><li>How CodeSee works (26:31)</li><li>How CodeSee contributes to open source without being open source (30:14)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Shanea</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/shaneak/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/ShaneaLeven">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://www.codesee.io/">CodeSee</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Building and Maintaining a Global Open Source Data Platform with Heikki Nousiainen</title>
      <itunes:episode>160</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>160</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Building and Maintaining a Global Open Source Data Platform with Heikki Nousiainen</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">447505ce-3de0-45f2-ac32-7a6b53d19fe2</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/38af1bb3</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week Heikki Nousiainen, CTO and Co-founder of <a href="https://aiven.io/">Aiven</a>, joins me to chat about building the business, his passion for open source and entrepreneurship, and his hopes for the future of open source in the public sector. </p><p>In this episode, Heikki and I explore the successes and challenges he and his three co-founders encountered in creating and maintaining their global open source data platform. We discuss how they choose technologies to support, the importance of customer demand, how founders can learn to work together, and when to “kill your darlings.” </p><p><br>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Origins of Aiven (1:40)</li><li>Pros and cons of being headquartered in Helsinki (4:41)</li><li>Aiven’s relationship to the open source community (6:02)</li><li>How Aiven has evolved since its inception (7:34)</li><li>How Aiven chooses technologies to incorporate into their service offerings (9:21)</li><li>One thing that has been very successful for Aiven (12:51)</li><li>Why Aiven chose their business model (16:33)</li><li>The biggest challenge Aiven is currently facing (17:37)</li><li>The <a href="https://stateofopencon.com/">State of Open Con</a> and giving back to the Community (20:17)</li><li>Barriers to more open source adoption in the public sector (21:24)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Heikki</p><ul><li><a href="http://linkedin.com/in/heikki-nousiainen/">LinkedIn</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/hnousiainen">@hnousiainen</a></li><li><a href="https://aiven.io/">Aiven</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week Heikki Nousiainen, CTO and Co-founder of <a href="https://aiven.io/">Aiven</a>, joins me to chat about building the business, his passion for open source and entrepreneurship, and his hopes for the future of open source in the public sector. </p><p>In this episode, Heikki and I explore the successes and challenges he and his three co-founders encountered in creating and maintaining their global open source data platform. We discuss how they choose technologies to support, the importance of customer demand, how founders can learn to work together, and when to “kill your darlings.” </p><p><br>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Origins of Aiven (1:40)</li><li>Pros and cons of being headquartered in Helsinki (4:41)</li><li>Aiven’s relationship to the open source community (6:02)</li><li>How Aiven has evolved since its inception (7:34)</li><li>How Aiven chooses technologies to incorporate into their service offerings (9:21)</li><li>One thing that has been very successful for Aiven (12:51)</li><li>Why Aiven chose their business model (16:33)</li><li>The biggest challenge Aiven is currently facing (17:37)</li><li>The <a href="https://stateofopencon.com/">State of Open Con</a> and giving back to the Community (20:17)</li><li>Barriers to more open source adoption in the public sector (21:24)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Heikki</p><ul><li><a href="http://linkedin.com/in/heikki-nousiainen/">LinkedIn</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/hnousiainen">@hnousiainen</a></li><li><a href="https://aiven.io/">Aiven</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 19 Jul 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/38af1bb3/ae34d6de.mp3" length="36340548" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1433</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week Heikki Nousiainen, CTO and Co-founder of <a href="https://aiven.io/">Aiven</a>, joins me to chat about building the business, his passion for open source and entrepreneurship, and his hopes for the future of open source in the public sector. </p><p>In this episode, Heikki and I explore the successes and challenges he and his three co-founders encountered in creating and maintaining their global open source data platform. We discuss how they choose technologies to support, the importance of customer demand, how founders can learn to work together, and when to “kill your darlings.” </p><p><br>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Origins of Aiven (1:40)</li><li>Pros and cons of being headquartered in Helsinki (4:41)</li><li>Aiven’s relationship to the open source community (6:02)</li><li>How Aiven has evolved since its inception (7:34)</li><li>How Aiven chooses technologies to incorporate into their service offerings (9:21)</li><li>One thing that has been very successful for Aiven (12:51)</li><li>Why Aiven chose their business model (16:33)</li><li>The biggest challenge Aiven is currently facing (17:37)</li><li>The <a href="https://stateofopencon.com/">State of Open Con</a> and giving back to the Community (20:17)</li><li>Barriers to more open source adoption in the public sector (21:24)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Heikki</p><ul><li><a href="http://linkedin.com/in/heikki-nousiainen/">LinkedIn</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/hnousiainen">@hnousiainen</a></li><li><a href="https://aiven.io/">Aiven</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Open Source in a Large Organization with Michael Cheng</title>
      <itunes:episode>159</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>159</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Open Source in a Large Organization with Michael Cheng</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">42f7afcc-44a9-4e42-b09c-f31c8bf83c52</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/967ddc14</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Michael Cheng, Chief Legal Officer at Aalyria Technologies, is a master at strategy and execution for open-source products and companies. From his humble beginning spearheading the open source team at Meta (formerly Facebook), Cheng has honed his knowledge about the interworking of open source and utilizes it to its fullest potential.</p><p>In this episode of The Business of Open Source, Cheng talks about his time as Meta's lead in open source as well as what it's like to be an individual working for a large company. He also explains what happens in mergers and acquisitions with open source projects and the legality of being a small fish in a large pond!</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>A little insight into Meta's open source (2:06)</li><li>Detractors on a project (4:25)</li><li>It's hard running a large company open source (7:47)</li><li>Is it a problem to be individually driven? (9:45)</li><li>Creating projects while working for large companies in open source (13:25)</li><li> Do they have a right to reprimand? (16:16)</li><li>What happens in a merger for an open source company (17:53]</li><li>Recommendations to an inquirer (21:47)</li><li>Personality-deprived communities (24:48)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Michael</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/priorart/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://www.aalyria.com/">Aalyria</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Michael Cheng, Chief Legal Officer at Aalyria Technologies, is a master at strategy and execution for open-source products and companies. From his humble beginning spearheading the open source team at Meta (formerly Facebook), Cheng has honed his knowledge about the interworking of open source and utilizes it to its fullest potential.</p><p>In this episode of The Business of Open Source, Cheng talks about his time as Meta's lead in open source as well as what it's like to be an individual working for a large company. He also explains what happens in mergers and acquisitions with open source projects and the legality of being a small fish in a large pond!</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>A little insight into Meta's open source (2:06)</li><li>Detractors on a project (4:25)</li><li>It's hard running a large company open source (7:47)</li><li>Is it a problem to be individually driven? (9:45)</li><li>Creating projects while working for large companies in open source (13:25)</li><li> Do they have a right to reprimand? (16:16)</li><li>What happens in a merger for an open source company (17:53]</li><li>Recommendations to an inquirer (21:47)</li><li>Personality-deprived communities (24:48)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Michael</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/priorart/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://www.aalyria.com/">Aalyria</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 12 Jul 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/967ddc14/dfe9dd82.mp3" length="55059589" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1719</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Michael Cheng, Chief Legal Officer at Aalyria Technologies, is a master at strategy and execution for open-source products and companies. From his humble beginning spearheading the open source team at Meta (formerly Facebook), Cheng has honed his knowledge about the interworking of open source and utilizes it to its fullest potential.</p><p>In this episode of The Business of Open Source, Cheng talks about his time as Meta's lead in open source as well as what it's like to be an individual working for a large company. He also explains what happens in mergers and acquisitions with open source projects and the legality of being a small fish in a large pond!</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>A little insight into Meta's open source (2:06)</li><li>Detractors on a project (4:25)</li><li>It's hard running a large company open source (7:47)</li><li>Is it a problem to be individually driven? (9:45)</li><li>Creating projects while working for large companies in open source (13:25)</li><li> Do they have a right to reprimand? (16:16)</li><li>What happens in a merger for an open source company (17:53]</li><li>Recommendations to an inquirer (21:47)</li><li>Personality-deprived communities (24:48)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Michael</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/priorart/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://www.aalyria.com/">Aalyria</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Finding the Right Co-Founder With Tanis Jorge</title>
      <itunes:episode>158</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>158</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Finding the Right Co-Founder With Tanis Jorge</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">459799e6-654c-4973-95a7-db2951f521a6</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/b74899cb</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Are you struggling to find a co-founder? Having trouble navigating a relationship with your partners? These are all questions Tanis Jorge, CEO of <a href="https://thecofoundershub.com/">The Co-founder's Hub</a>, tackles daily in her work. A serial tech entrepreneur and a leading entrepreneur advisor, it is no wonder Jorge has founded and built many businesses, such as <a href="https://www.trulioo.com/">Trulioo</a> and IQuiri Inc.</p><p>On this episode of The Business Of Open Source, I ask Jorge about finding the right co-founder, why legal frameworks are so important, and the hi's and lows of collaboration. We also discuss warning signs, life stages, and why everyone is a janitor!</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>The right co-founder (2:25)</li><li>Life stages are important (4:31)</li><li>The uncomfortable task (5:50)</li><li>The legal framework (8:00)</li><li>Everybody's the janitor (10:05)</li><li>The hi's and lows of collaboration (14:46)</li><li>Navigating problems and relationships(18:45)</li><li>No one is talking about this (23:24)</li><li>Meeting a bad partner (24:35)</li><li>Multiple founder relationships (26:10)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Tanis</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tanisjorge/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/tanisjorge?lang=en">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://thecofoundershub.com/">The Cofounder's Hub</a></li><li><a href="https://www.trulioo.com/">Trulioo</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Are you struggling to find a co-founder? Having trouble navigating a relationship with your partners? These are all questions Tanis Jorge, CEO of <a href="https://thecofoundershub.com/">The Co-founder's Hub</a>, tackles daily in her work. A serial tech entrepreneur and a leading entrepreneur advisor, it is no wonder Jorge has founded and built many businesses, such as <a href="https://www.trulioo.com/">Trulioo</a> and IQuiri Inc.</p><p>On this episode of The Business Of Open Source, I ask Jorge about finding the right co-founder, why legal frameworks are so important, and the hi's and lows of collaboration. We also discuss warning signs, life stages, and why everyone is a janitor!</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>The right co-founder (2:25)</li><li>Life stages are important (4:31)</li><li>The uncomfortable task (5:50)</li><li>The legal framework (8:00)</li><li>Everybody's the janitor (10:05)</li><li>The hi's and lows of collaboration (14:46)</li><li>Navigating problems and relationships(18:45)</li><li>No one is talking about this (23:24)</li><li>Meeting a bad partner (24:35)</li><li>Multiple founder relationships (26:10)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Tanis</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tanisjorge/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/tanisjorge?lang=en">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://thecofoundershub.com/">The Cofounder's Hub</a></li><li><a href="https://www.trulioo.com/">Trulioo</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 05 Jul 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/b74899cb/5a0ed6da.mp3" length="60884259" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1901</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Are you struggling to find a co-founder? Having trouble navigating a relationship with your partners? These are all questions Tanis Jorge, CEO of <a href="https://thecofoundershub.com/">The Co-founder's Hub</a>, tackles daily in her work. A serial tech entrepreneur and a leading entrepreneur advisor, it is no wonder Jorge has founded and built many businesses, such as <a href="https://www.trulioo.com/">Trulioo</a> and IQuiri Inc.</p><p>On this episode of The Business Of Open Source, I ask Jorge about finding the right co-founder, why legal frameworks are so important, and the hi's and lows of collaboration. We also discuss warning signs, life stages, and why everyone is a janitor!</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>The right co-founder (2:25)</li><li>Life stages are important (4:31)</li><li>The uncomfortable task (5:50)</li><li>The legal framework (8:00)</li><li>Everybody's the janitor (10:05)</li><li>The hi's and lows of collaboration (14:46)</li><li>Navigating problems and relationships(18:45)</li><li>No one is talking about this (23:24)</li><li>Meeting a bad partner (24:35)</li><li>Multiple founder relationships (26:10)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Tanis</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tanisjorge/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/tanisjorge?lang=en">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://thecofoundershub.com/">The Cofounder's Hub</a></li><li><a href="https://www.trulioo.com/">Trulioo</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Striving for a Frictionless Developer Experience through AI Workflows with Kyle Campbell</title>
      <itunes:episode>157</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>157</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Striving for a Frictionless Developer Experience through AI Workflows with Kyle Campbell</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">0ab655a5-5f69-45da-8dc3-73796dc6f237</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/24df3f44</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>From college dropout to developer efficiency guru, Kyle Campbell knows his way around workflow integrations for software companies. He is a fierce proponent of efficient workflows and hopes to spread his experience to any company that can benefit from it. </p><p>In this episode of the Business of Open Source, Campbell discusses the origins of his Company <a href="https://cto.ai/">CTO.ai</a>, its revenue model, and why he created this AI companion for developers. He also talks about being a consultant, running a start up, and when it is time to shift gears to building a revenue-focused company.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Workflows.sh (4:10)</li><li>The creations of CTO.ai (5:06)</li><li>Can being a consultant be a boon for a company (8:48)</li><li>Revenue models of CTO.ai (11:32)</li><li>The tipping point of in building a business (15:35)</li><li>Examples of escape patches (18:20)</li><li>What is the right amount of money to raise? (20:45)</li><li>The pricing model of CTO.ai (24:06)</li><li>Is not having an open-source project limiting? (27:24)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Kyle</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/kc-dot-io/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/kc_dot_io?lang=en">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://cto.ai/">CTO.ai</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>From college dropout to developer efficiency guru, Kyle Campbell knows his way around workflow integrations for software companies. He is a fierce proponent of efficient workflows and hopes to spread his experience to any company that can benefit from it. </p><p>In this episode of the Business of Open Source, Campbell discusses the origins of his Company <a href="https://cto.ai/">CTO.ai</a>, its revenue model, and why he created this AI companion for developers. He also talks about being a consultant, running a start up, and when it is time to shift gears to building a revenue-focused company.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Workflows.sh (4:10)</li><li>The creations of CTO.ai (5:06)</li><li>Can being a consultant be a boon for a company (8:48)</li><li>Revenue models of CTO.ai (11:32)</li><li>The tipping point of in building a business (15:35)</li><li>Examples of escape patches (18:20)</li><li>What is the right amount of money to raise? (20:45)</li><li>The pricing model of CTO.ai (24:06)</li><li>Is not having an open-source project limiting? (27:24)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Kyle</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/kc-dot-io/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/kc_dot_io?lang=en">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://cto.ai/">CTO.ai</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 28 Jun 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/24df3f44/4d97de76.mp3" length="48548821" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1944</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>From college dropout to developer efficiency guru, Kyle Campbell knows his way around workflow integrations for software companies. He is a fierce proponent of efficient workflows and hopes to spread his experience to any company that can benefit from it. </p><p>In this episode of the Business of Open Source, Campbell discusses the origins of his Company <a href="https://cto.ai/">CTO.ai</a>, its revenue model, and why he created this AI companion for developers. He also talks about being a consultant, running a start up, and when it is time to shift gears to building a revenue-focused company.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Workflows.sh (4:10)</li><li>The creations of CTO.ai (5:06)</li><li>Can being a consultant be a boon for a company (8:48)</li><li>Revenue models of CTO.ai (11:32)</li><li>The tipping point of in building a business (15:35)</li><li>Examples of escape patches (18:20)</li><li>What is the right amount of money to raise? (20:45)</li><li>The pricing model of CTO.ai (24:06)</li><li>Is not having an open-source project limiting? (27:24)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Kyle</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/kc-dot-io/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/kc_dot_io?lang=en">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://cto.ai/">CTO.ai</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Ethics In Open Source With Matt Butcher</title>
      <itunes:episode>156</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>156</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Ethics In Open Source With Matt Butcher</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">90a67d75-fede-4c5f-be58-f3dcd1cee6e4</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/5e32f98a</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Matt Butcher is no stranger to the ways of ethical philosophy. With a Ph.D. in Religion and Computer Science, he enjoys philosophical conversations of ethical dilemmas. Butcher passionately debates wild theories and paradoxical situations against those not afraid to question reality in pursuit of knowledge.</p><p><br></p><p>In this episode of The Business of Open Source, Hear how Butcher discusses ethics in the open source world, the grey areas in being an ethical company, and the moral nature of work/life balance. Butcher also details how some of the greatest philosophical minds shaped his own view of ethics and the pursuit of "that middle road."</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Ethics and Computer Science vs. AI (1:30)</li><li>Ph.D. in religion and… computer science? (3:05)</li><li>Ethical claims in open source (4:52)</li><li>Is it ethical to build a company like yours? (8:50)</li><li>Interacting with people to see the value (13:45)</li><li>Understanding balancing creativity with reality(17:52)</li><li>What does it mean to build an ethical company(19:42)</li><li>"Complex is such an interesting choice here" (24:43)</li><li>Finding that middle road (28:29)</li><li>Common unethical source practices (29:30)</li><li>Have you changed your ethic since becoming a CEO? (31:50)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Matt</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mattbutcher/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/technosophos?lang=en">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://www.fermyon.com/">Fermyon</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Matt Butcher is no stranger to the ways of ethical philosophy. With a Ph.D. in Religion and Computer Science, he enjoys philosophical conversations of ethical dilemmas. Butcher passionately debates wild theories and paradoxical situations against those not afraid to question reality in pursuit of knowledge.</p><p><br></p><p>In this episode of The Business of Open Source, Hear how Butcher discusses ethics in the open source world, the grey areas in being an ethical company, and the moral nature of work/life balance. Butcher also details how some of the greatest philosophical minds shaped his own view of ethics and the pursuit of "that middle road."</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Ethics and Computer Science vs. AI (1:30)</li><li>Ph.D. in religion and… computer science? (3:05)</li><li>Ethical claims in open source (4:52)</li><li>Is it ethical to build a company like yours? (8:50)</li><li>Interacting with people to see the value (13:45)</li><li>Understanding balancing creativity with reality(17:52)</li><li>What does it mean to build an ethical company(19:42)</li><li>"Complex is such an interesting choice here" (24:43)</li><li>Finding that middle road (28:29)</li><li>Common unethical source practices (29:30)</li><li>Have you changed your ethic since becoming a CEO? (31:50)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Matt</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mattbutcher/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/technosophos?lang=en">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://www.fermyon.com/">Fermyon</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 21 Jun 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/5e32f98a/49f23e17.mp3" length="55547822" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2235</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Matt Butcher is no stranger to the ways of ethical philosophy. With a Ph.D. in Religion and Computer Science, he enjoys philosophical conversations of ethical dilemmas. Butcher passionately debates wild theories and paradoxical situations against those not afraid to question reality in pursuit of knowledge.</p><p><br></p><p>In this episode of The Business of Open Source, Hear how Butcher discusses ethics in the open source world, the grey areas in being an ethical company, and the moral nature of work/life balance. Butcher also details how some of the greatest philosophical minds shaped his own view of ethics and the pursuit of "that middle road."</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Ethics and Computer Science vs. AI (1:30)</li><li>Ph.D. in religion and… computer science? (3:05)</li><li>Ethical claims in open source (4:52)</li><li>Is it ethical to build a company like yours? (8:50)</li><li>Interacting with people to see the value (13:45)</li><li>Understanding balancing creativity with reality(17:52)</li><li>What does it mean to build an ethical company(19:42)</li><li>"Complex is such an interesting choice here" (24:43)</li><li>Finding that middle road (28:29)</li><li>Common unethical source practices (29:30)</li><li>Have you changed your ethic since becoming a CEO? (31:50)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Matt</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mattbutcher/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/technosophos?lang=en">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://www.fermyon.com/">Fermyon</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Enhancing Your Contributor Growth Strategy With Dawn Foster</title>
      <itunes:episode>155</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>155</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Enhancing Your Contributor Growth Strategy With Dawn Foster</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">a0755b5c-24a0-403b-89c0-638adb1fa98f</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/14c8adc7</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Dawn Foster, Director of Open Source Community Strategy at VMware, is a champion of community strategy and development. A doctor of Philosophy, Foster is well-versed in the understanding of collaboration and leverages her mountain of knowledge to fight for the health of maintainers in open-source projects.</p><p>In this episode of The Business of Open Source, Dawn Foster joins me from the Open Source Summit North America to tackle community strategy and contribution growth methods. Foster also touches on the differences between open contributions and what project leads should do to help grow their maintainers.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Why is it essential to have a contributor growth strategy? (1:46)</li><li>Loss of control (3:10)</li><li>How to be proactive for project growth (4:24)</li><li>Proactive communication to foster a relationship (7:15)</li><li>Non-code contributions are just as crucial as maintainers (9:47)</li><li>Is it a mistake to have no contributor growth strategy (12:20)</li><li>One tactic when being a single maintainer (13:33)</li><li>Replacing your maintainers (16:02)</li><li>Don't get arrested (18:10)</li><li>Improving your skills in maintaining  (19:17)</li><li>Navigating contributions to a project (21:29)</li><li>Increasing the number of contributions per person (24:13)</li><li>Example of a good growth strategy (27:07)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Dawn </p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/dawnfoster/?originalSubdomain=uk">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/geekygirldawn?lang=en">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://blogs.vmware.com/opensource/author/dawn-foster/">VMware</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Dawn Foster, Director of Open Source Community Strategy at VMware, is a champion of community strategy and development. A doctor of Philosophy, Foster is well-versed in the understanding of collaboration and leverages her mountain of knowledge to fight for the health of maintainers in open-source projects.</p><p>In this episode of The Business of Open Source, Dawn Foster joins me from the Open Source Summit North America to tackle community strategy and contribution growth methods. Foster also touches on the differences between open contributions and what project leads should do to help grow their maintainers.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Why is it essential to have a contributor growth strategy? (1:46)</li><li>Loss of control (3:10)</li><li>How to be proactive for project growth (4:24)</li><li>Proactive communication to foster a relationship (7:15)</li><li>Non-code contributions are just as crucial as maintainers (9:47)</li><li>Is it a mistake to have no contributor growth strategy (12:20)</li><li>One tactic when being a single maintainer (13:33)</li><li>Replacing your maintainers (16:02)</li><li>Don't get arrested (18:10)</li><li>Improving your skills in maintaining  (19:17)</li><li>Navigating contributions to a project (21:29)</li><li>Increasing the number of contributions per person (24:13)</li><li>Example of a good growth strategy (27:07)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Dawn </p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/dawnfoster/?originalSubdomain=uk">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/geekygirldawn?lang=en">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://blogs.vmware.com/opensource/author/dawn-foster/">VMware</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 14 Jun 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/14c8adc7/7890b2f5.mp3" length="43559785" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1797</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Dawn Foster, Director of Open Source Community Strategy at VMware, is a champion of community strategy and development. A doctor of Philosophy, Foster is well-versed in the understanding of collaboration and leverages her mountain of knowledge to fight for the health of maintainers in open-source projects.</p><p>In this episode of The Business of Open Source, Dawn Foster joins me from the Open Source Summit North America to tackle community strategy and contribution growth methods. Foster also touches on the differences between open contributions and what project leads should do to help grow their maintainers.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Why is it essential to have a contributor growth strategy? (1:46)</li><li>Loss of control (3:10)</li><li>How to be proactive for project growth (4:24)</li><li>Proactive communication to foster a relationship (7:15)</li><li>Non-code contributions are just as crucial as maintainers (9:47)</li><li>Is it a mistake to have no contributor growth strategy (12:20)</li><li>One tactic when being a single maintainer (13:33)</li><li>Replacing your maintainers (16:02)</li><li>Don't get arrested (18:10)</li><li>Improving your skills in maintaining  (19:17)</li><li>Navigating contributions to a project (21:29)</li><li>Increasing the number of contributions per person (24:13)</li><li>Example of a good growth strategy (27:07)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Dawn </p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/dawnfoster/?originalSubdomain=uk">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/geekygirldawn?lang=en">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://blogs.vmware.com/opensource/author/dawn-foster/">VMware</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Developing Your Public Speaking Skills with Bart Farrell</title>
      <itunes:episode>154</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>154</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Developing Your Public Speaking Skills with Bart Farrell</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">f9af8026-ea44-4d99-a900-965d749f4f56</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/2ac74b11</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Bart Farrell is a content creator and community leader in the public speaking world. Based in Spain, he has developed a massively popular platform through podcasting and consulting as a nontechnical person in a technical space.</p><p><br></p><p>In this episode, Farrell breaks down the ins and outs of public speaking. He also discusses the art form of speaking offline rather than online, what to expect when talking to an audience, and what it takes to deliver the gift of gab. Farrell also goes into his struggles in becoming a public speaker and his favorite influence on his craft—all this and more in this episode of The Business of Open Source.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>The Fear of public speaking (2:00)</li><li>Not a life or death situation (5:10)</li><li>Be comfortable while speaking(8:40)</li><li>You only get one start (9:57)</li><li>A I D A (11:22)</li><li>Online is not offline (15:03)</li><li>How to get into public speaking (17:00)</li><li>Basic building blocks (19:00)</li><li>How to improve in public speaking (23:35)</li><li>A favorite public speaker (26:55)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Bart</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/bart-farrell/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/birthmarkbart/">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://bartfarrell.com/">bartfarrell.com</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Bart Farrell is a content creator and community leader in the public speaking world. Based in Spain, he has developed a massively popular platform through podcasting and consulting as a nontechnical person in a technical space.</p><p><br></p><p>In this episode, Farrell breaks down the ins and outs of public speaking. He also discusses the art form of speaking offline rather than online, what to expect when talking to an audience, and what it takes to deliver the gift of gab. Farrell also goes into his struggles in becoming a public speaker and his favorite influence on his craft—all this and more in this episode of The Business of Open Source.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>The Fear of public speaking (2:00)</li><li>Not a life or death situation (5:10)</li><li>Be comfortable while speaking(8:40)</li><li>You only get one start (9:57)</li><li>A I D A (11:22)</li><li>Online is not offline (15:03)</li><li>How to get into public speaking (17:00)</li><li>Basic building blocks (19:00)</li><li>How to improve in public speaking (23:35)</li><li>A favorite public speaker (26:55)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Bart</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/bart-farrell/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/birthmarkbart/">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://bartfarrell.com/">bartfarrell.com</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 07 Jun 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/2ac74b11/7f52b0c1.mp3" length="49096377" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1966</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Bart Farrell is a content creator and community leader in the public speaking world. Based in Spain, he has developed a massively popular platform through podcasting and consulting as a nontechnical person in a technical space.</p><p><br></p><p>In this episode, Farrell breaks down the ins and outs of public speaking. He also discusses the art form of speaking offline rather than online, what to expect when talking to an audience, and what it takes to deliver the gift of gab. Farrell also goes into his struggles in becoming a public speaker and his favorite influence on his craft—all this and more in this episode of The Business of Open Source.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>The Fear of public speaking (2:00)</li><li>Not a life or death situation (5:10)</li><li>Be comfortable while speaking(8:40)</li><li>You only get one start (9:57)</li><li>A I D A (11:22)</li><li>Online is not offline (15:03)</li><li>How to get into public speaking (17:00)</li><li>Basic building blocks (19:00)</li><li>How to improve in public speaking (23:35)</li><li>A favorite public speaker (26:55)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Bart</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/bart-farrell/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/birthmarkbart/">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://bartfarrell.com/">bartfarrell.com</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Open Source Feature Management with Ivar Østhus</title>
      <itunes:episode>153</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>153</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Open Source Feature Management with Ivar Østhus</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">40253906-cd5c-4ef9-80b0-62c7de885efc</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/4dbdfd9a</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ivar Østhus, The CTO and creator of Unleashed, is a revolutionary in shipping feature management tools and rollouts for companies worldwide. Through hardships, Østhus came into his own in the open source world by relieving the pressure on developers bringing new creations to light in their projects.</p><p>On this episode of The Business of Open Source, Hear how Østhus discusses the inception of Unleashed and the struggles he overcame in the early stages. He also talks about being a European company in the tech industry and why he prefers to be called a "Creator" rather than a Founder.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Creator but not a Founder(1:48)</li><li>Why Unleash? (2:33)</li><li>Why open source (6:20)</li><li>Taking the plunge with unleash (9:38)</li><li>Being a European company(15:25)</li><li>Early mistakes in Unleash (17:40)</li><li>Long-term support open source user(19:40)</li><li>The biggest challenge (25:20)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Ivar</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/ivarconr/?originalSubdomain=no">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/ivarconr?ref_src=twsrc%5Egoogle%7Ctwcamp%5Eserp%7Ctwgr%5Eauthor">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://www.getunleash.io/">Unleash</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ivar Østhus, The CTO and creator of Unleashed, is a revolutionary in shipping feature management tools and rollouts for companies worldwide. Through hardships, Østhus came into his own in the open source world by relieving the pressure on developers bringing new creations to light in their projects.</p><p>On this episode of The Business of Open Source, Hear how Østhus discusses the inception of Unleashed and the struggles he overcame in the early stages. He also talks about being a European company in the tech industry and why he prefers to be called a "Creator" rather than a Founder.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Creator but not a Founder(1:48)</li><li>Why Unleash? (2:33)</li><li>Why open source (6:20)</li><li>Taking the plunge with unleash (9:38)</li><li>Being a European company(15:25)</li><li>Early mistakes in Unleash (17:40)</li><li>Long-term support open source user(19:40)</li><li>The biggest challenge (25:20)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Ivar</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/ivarconr/?originalSubdomain=no">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/ivarconr?ref_src=twsrc%5Egoogle%7Ctwcamp%5Eserp%7Ctwgr%5Eauthor">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://www.getunleash.io/">Unleash</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 31 May 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/4dbdfd9a/7387f1a9.mp3" length="42378956" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1686</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ivar Østhus, The CTO and creator of Unleashed, is a revolutionary in shipping feature management tools and rollouts for companies worldwide. Through hardships, Østhus came into his own in the open source world by relieving the pressure on developers bringing new creations to light in their projects.</p><p>On this episode of The Business of Open Source, Hear how Østhus discusses the inception of Unleashed and the struggles he overcame in the early stages. He also talks about being a European company in the tech industry and why he prefers to be called a "Creator" rather than a Founder.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Creator but not a Founder(1:48)</li><li>Why Unleash? (2:33)</li><li>Why open source (6:20)</li><li>Taking the plunge with unleash (9:38)</li><li>Being a European company(15:25)</li><li>Early mistakes in Unleash (17:40)</li><li>Long-term support open source user(19:40)</li><li>The biggest challenge (25:20)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Ivar</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/ivarconr/?originalSubdomain=no">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/ivarconr?ref_src=twsrc%5Egoogle%7Ctwcamp%5Eserp%7Ctwgr%5Eauthor">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://www.getunleash.io/">Unleash</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>WebOps and Community Relations with Josh Koenig</title>
      <itunes:episode>152</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>152</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>WebOps and Community Relations with Josh Koenig</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">b2690b44-6d21-439e-a92a-3f90e6b28bd7</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/abd73d15</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Josh Koenig, Chief Strategy Officer and Co-Founder of Pantheon, is a WebOps aficionado focused on creating first-class platforms and delivering results. Recognized as a <a href="https://pantheon.io/josh-koenig-top-25-software-products-executive-2021">Top 25 Software Products Executive</a> by The Software Report, it is no wonder he is passionate about his ability to discuss and understand the developer experience while fostering relationships with users.</p><p>On this episode of the Business of Open Source, Koenig discusses the art of fostering opposing community relations and his ideals of the developer experience. He also talks about the niche that is WebOps and his journey of creating Pantheon.</p><p><br>Highlights:</p><ul><li>What is Pantheon? (0:55)</li><li>Pantheon's role in communities (3:50)</li><li>Teamwork makes the dream work (7:20)</li><li>Challenges with a no-control work model (9:00)</li><li>Balancing control and elevation in open source (11:10)</li><li>Squarespace, but not really (13:10)</li><li>Mistakes in building Pantheon(15:06)</li><li>Connecting with a community (16:55)</li><li>The difference between WordPress and Drupal (19:30)</li><li>Community involvement (21:35)</li><li>Pleasant surprises (23:40)</li><li>Top challenge (25:40)</li><li>Last remarks (28:50)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Josh</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/joshkoenig/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/outlandishjosh">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://pantheon.io/">Company</a></li><li><a href="https://www.drupal.org/">Drupal</a></li><li><a href="https://wordpress.com/">WordPress</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Josh Koenig, Chief Strategy Officer and Co-Founder of Pantheon, is a WebOps aficionado focused on creating first-class platforms and delivering results. Recognized as a <a href="https://pantheon.io/josh-koenig-top-25-software-products-executive-2021">Top 25 Software Products Executive</a> by The Software Report, it is no wonder he is passionate about his ability to discuss and understand the developer experience while fostering relationships with users.</p><p>On this episode of the Business of Open Source, Koenig discusses the art of fostering opposing community relations and his ideals of the developer experience. He also talks about the niche that is WebOps and his journey of creating Pantheon.</p><p><br>Highlights:</p><ul><li>What is Pantheon? (0:55)</li><li>Pantheon's role in communities (3:50)</li><li>Teamwork makes the dream work (7:20)</li><li>Challenges with a no-control work model (9:00)</li><li>Balancing control and elevation in open source (11:10)</li><li>Squarespace, but not really (13:10)</li><li>Mistakes in building Pantheon(15:06)</li><li>Connecting with a community (16:55)</li><li>The difference between WordPress and Drupal (19:30)</li><li>Community involvement (21:35)</li><li>Pleasant surprises (23:40)</li><li>Top challenge (25:40)</li><li>Last remarks (28:50)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Josh</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/joshkoenig/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/outlandishjosh">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://pantheon.io/">Company</a></li><li><a href="https://www.drupal.org/">Drupal</a></li><li><a href="https://wordpress.com/">WordPress</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 24 May 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/abd73d15/20050d07.mp3" length="47376229" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1894</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Josh Koenig, Chief Strategy Officer and Co-Founder of Pantheon, is a WebOps aficionado focused on creating first-class platforms and delivering results. Recognized as a <a href="https://pantheon.io/josh-koenig-top-25-software-products-executive-2021">Top 25 Software Products Executive</a> by The Software Report, it is no wonder he is passionate about his ability to discuss and understand the developer experience while fostering relationships with users.</p><p>On this episode of the Business of Open Source, Koenig discusses the art of fostering opposing community relations and his ideals of the developer experience. He also talks about the niche that is WebOps and his journey of creating Pantheon.</p><p><br>Highlights:</p><ul><li>What is Pantheon? (0:55)</li><li>Pantheon's role in communities (3:50)</li><li>Teamwork makes the dream work (7:20)</li><li>Challenges with a no-control work model (9:00)</li><li>Balancing control and elevation in open source (11:10)</li><li>Squarespace, but not really (13:10)</li><li>Mistakes in building Pantheon(15:06)</li><li>Connecting with a community (16:55)</li><li>The difference between WordPress and Drupal (19:30)</li><li>Community involvement (21:35)</li><li>Pleasant surprises (23:40)</li><li>Top challenge (25:40)</li><li>Last remarks (28:50)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Josh</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/joshkoenig/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/outlandishjosh">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://pantheon.io/">Company</a></li><li><a href="https://www.drupal.org/">Drupal</a></li><li><a href="https://wordpress.com/">WordPress</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Developing Open Source Coding Tools with Daniel Loreto</title>
      <itunes:episode>151</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>151</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Developing Open Source Coding Tools with Daniel Loreto</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">2af22629-0ce5-4dcb-ab7a-77ecb6a7d795</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/bc57eb28</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Daniel Loreto, the founder of Jetpack.io, is a massive believer in transforming how engineers scale their backend for cloud-based platforms. Deeply rooted in the tech industry, Loretto takes great pride in building tools to large usage scales and utilizing them to attend to the needs of his users and community.</p><p>On this episode of the Business of Open Source, Hear about the inner workings of jetpack.io and its challenges in its history. Also, listen to Loreto's tips for success for a startup, his navigation of open source and proprietary coding, and why Loreto is not an open source purist.</p><p><br>Highlights:</p><ul><li>The history of jetpack.io (3:31)</li><li>Pursuing the open source model (4:53)</li><li>Got to move fast as a startup (6:38)</li><li>Re-integrating feedback into your work (7:43)</li><li>Why an open source project (8:48)</li><li>Open source code vs. proprietary code (10:55)</li><li>Unexpected challenges ( 12:15)</li><li>Not an open-source purist (14:54)</li><li>Challenges in selling open source products (16:47)</li><li>Developing guidelines for jetpack.io (17:42)</li><li>Success does not mean success (20:01)</li><li>Lessons from building a company (23:13)</li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Daniel Loreto, the founder of Jetpack.io, is a massive believer in transforming how engineers scale their backend for cloud-based platforms. Deeply rooted in the tech industry, Loretto takes great pride in building tools to large usage scales and utilizing them to attend to the needs of his users and community.</p><p>On this episode of the Business of Open Source, Hear about the inner workings of jetpack.io and its challenges in its history. Also, listen to Loreto's tips for success for a startup, his navigation of open source and proprietary coding, and why Loreto is not an open source purist.</p><p><br>Highlights:</p><ul><li>The history of jetpack.io (3:31)</li><li>Pursuing the open source model (4:53)</li><li>Got to move fast as a startup (6:38)</li><li>Re-integrating feedback into your work (7:43)</li><li>Why an open source project (8:48)</li><li>Open source code vs. proprietary code (10:55)</li><li>Unexpected challenges ( 12:15)</li><li>Not an open-source purist (14:54)</li><li>Challenges in selling open source products (16:47)</li><li>Developing guidelines for jetpack.io (17:42)</li><li>Success does not mean success (20:01)</li><li>Lessons from building a company (23:13)</li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 17 May 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/bc57eb28/e5854177.mp3" length="31286594" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1562</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Daniel Loreto, the founder of Jetpack.io, is a massive believer in transforming how engineers scale their backend for cloud-based platforms. Deeply rooted in the tech industry, Loretto takes great pride in building tools to large usage scales and utilizing them to attend to the needs of his users and community.</p><p>On this episode of the Business of Open Source, Hear about the inner workings of jetpack.io and its challenges in its history. Also, listen to Loreto's tips for success for a startup, his navigation of open source and proprietary coding, and why Loreto is not an open source purist.</p><p><br>Highlights:</p><ul><li>The history of jetpack.io (3:31)</li><li>Pursuing the open source model (4:53)</li><li>Got to move fast as a startup (6:38)</li><li>Re-integrating feedback into your work (7:43)</li><li>Why an open source project (8:48)</li><li>Open source code vs. proprietary code (10:55)</li><li>Unexpected challenges ( 12:15)</li><li>Not an open-source purist (14:54)</li><li>Challenges in selling open source products (16:47)</li><li>Developing guidelines for jetpack.io (17:42)</li><li>Success does not mean success (20:01)</li><li>Lessons from building a company (23:13)</li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Building a Sustainable Platform With Abigail Cabunoc Mayes</title>
      <itunes:episode>150</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>150</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Building a Sustainable Platform With Abigail Cabunoc Mayes</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">e57b3a12-c1f5-4d50-b97e-4432d4379364</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/e593ac46</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>"Fueling a culture of openness in innovation and research." That slogan is well known to Abigail Cabunoc Mayes, a leader in GitHub's open-source maintainer program. With a background in open science, Mayes felt right at home when jumping to open source and mentoring many developers at the Cloud-based Hosting service.</p><p>On this episode of The Business of Open Source, listen to Mayes speak on sustainability and resilience in building a platform for developers and what makes a robust and sustainable environment. Mayes also talks about financial stability and models in the open source world and what it truly means to break from a main backer and build on your own.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Supporting "maintainers" (3:02)</li><li>Succession planning (3:38)</li><li>Being resilient in sustainability (5:40)</li><li>Building financially without company backing (6:29)</li><li>GitHub experimentation (10:42)</li><li>Strategies for critical projects that are lower in the stack (11:55)</li><li>Technical sustainability (13:47)</li><li>Hypothetical financial models (19:33)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Abigail</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/abbycabs/?originalSubdomain=ca">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/abbycabs?ref_src=twsrc%5Egoogle%7Ctwcamp%5Eserp%7Ctwgr%5Eauthor">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://github.com/">GitHub</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>"Fueling a culture of openness in innovation and research." That slogan is well known to Abigail Cabunoc Mayes, a leader in GitHub's open-source maintainer program. With a background in open science, Mayes felt right at home when jumping to open source and mentoring many developers at the Cloud-based Hosting service.</p><p>On this episode of The Business of Open Source, listen to Mayes speak on sustainability and resilience in building a platform for developers and what makes a robust and sustainable environment. Mayes also talks about financial stability and models in the open source world and what it truly means to break from a main backer and build on your own.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Supporting "maintainers" (3:02)</li><li>Succession planning (3:38)</li><li>Being resilient in sustainability (5:40)</li><li>Building financially without company backing (6:29)</li><li>GitHub experimentation (10:42)</li><li>Strategies for critical projects that are lower in the stack (11:55)</li><li>Technical sustainability (13:47)</li><li>Hypothetical financial models (19:33)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Abigail</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/abbycabs/?originalSubdomain=ca">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/abbycabs?ref_src=twsrc%5Egoogle%7Ctwcamp%5Eserp%7Ctwgr%5Eauthor">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://github.com/">GitHub</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 10 May 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/e593ac46/c6fca0c5.mp3" length="36440330" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1438</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>"Fueling a culture of openness in innovation and research." That slogan is well known to Abigail Cabunoc Mayes, a leader in GitHub's open-source maintainer program. With a background in open science, Mayes felt right at home when jumping to open source and mentoring many developers at the Cloud-based Hosting service.</p><p>On this episode of The Business of Open Source, listen to Mayes speak on sustainability and resilience in building a platform for developers and what makes a robust and sustainable environment. Mayes also talks about financial stability and models in the open source world and what it truly means to break from a main backer and build on your own.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Supporting "maintainers" (3:02)</li><li>Succession planning (3:38)</li><li>Being resilient in sustainability (5:40)</li><li>Building financially without company backing (6:29)</li><li>GitHub experimentation (10:42)</li><li>Strategies for critical projects that are lower in the stack (11:55)</li><li>Technical sustainability (13:47)</li><li>Hypothetical financial models (19:33)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Abigail</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/abbycabs/?originalSubdomain=ca">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/abbycabs?ref_src=twsrc%5Egoogle%7Ctwcamp%5Eserp%7Ctwgr%5Eauthor">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://github.com/">GitHub</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Investing and Monetizing a Start-up With Akriti Dokania</title>
      <itunes:episode>149</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>149</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Investing and Monetizing a Start-up With Akriti Dokania</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">6729a4a5-42b8-49b0-a39a-9ba91958dba8</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/6dca507b</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Akriti Dokania, a heavyweight in the venture capital business, is a partner at Ridge Ventures. With a background in computer sciences and building a B2B company from the ground up, it is no wonder Dokania is an expert in the complexities of developing software and understanding the lifecycle of a start-up.</p><p>On this week's episodes of the Business of Open Source, Dokania shows her wealth of knowledge in investing in open source start-ups. She also explains what founders should look for in an investor and the struggles of monetization for an open source start-up. Lastly, Dokania gives the secrets to working towards a revenue model and scaling a start-up to a fully fleshed-out company.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Open source vs. non-open source companies(from an investor's eye) (2:07)</li><li>The go to market for open source (4:03)</li><li>Disadvantages of an open source start-up (5:29)</li><li>Too deep into open source to monetize (7:53)</li><li>Red flags a founder should look out for in an investor (14:24)</li><li>Common mistakes for open source companies looking to monetize (16:24)</li><li>Unique business strategies in open source (19:24)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Akriti </p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/akritidokania/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/akritidokania">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://ridge.vc/">Company</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Akriti Dokania, a heavyweight in the venture capital business, is a partner at Ridge Ventures. With a background in computer sciences and building a B2B company from the ground up, it is no wonder Dokania is an expert in the complexities of developing software and understanding the lifecycle of a start-up.</p><p>On this week's episodes of the Business of Open Source, Dokania shows her wealth of knowledge in investing in open source start-ups. She also explains what founders should look for in an investor and the struggles of monetization for an open source start-up. Lastly, Dokania gives the secrets to working towards a revenue model and scaling a start-up to a fully fleshed-out company.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Open source vs. non-open source companies(from an investor's eye) (2:07)</li><li>The go to market for open source (4:03)</li><li>Disadvantages of an open source start-up (5:29)</li><li>Too deep into open source to monetize (7:53)</li><li>Red flags a founder should look out for in an investor (14:24)</li><li>Common mistakes for open source companies looking to monetize (16:24)</li><li>Unique business strategies in open source (19:24)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Akriti </p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/akritidokania/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/akritidokania">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://ridge.vc/">Company</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 03 May 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/6dca507b/1720016b.mp3" length="35593922" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1403</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Akriti Dokania, a heavyweight in the venture capital business, is a partner at Ridge Ventures. With a background in computer sciences and building a B2B company from the ground up, it is no wonder Dokania is an expert in the complexities of developing software and understanding the lifecycle of a start-up.</p><p>On this week's episodes of the Business of Open Source, Dokania shows her wealth of knowledge in investing in open source start-ups. She also explains what founders should look for in an investor and the struggles of monetization for an open source start-up. Lastly, Dokania gives the secrets to working towards a revenue model and scaling a start-up to a fully fleshed-out company.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Open source vs. non-open source companies(from an investor's eye) (2:07)</li><li>The go to market for open source (4:03)</li><li>Disadvantages of an open source start-up (5:29)</li><li>Too deep into open source to monetize (7:53)</li><li>Red flags a founder should look out for in an investor (14:24)</li><li>Common mistakes for open source companies looking to monetize (16:24)</li><li>Unique business strategies in open source (19:24)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Akriti </p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/akritidokania/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/akritidokania">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://ridge.vc/">Company</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Cultivating an Active Community With Stefan Avram</title>
      <itunes:episode>148</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>148</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Cultivating an Active Community With Stefan Avram</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">63318d35-0264-4cc8-bb97-b3022e14141f</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/789a4bdf</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Stefan Avram, Co-Founder and Head of Growth at <a href="https://wundergraph.com/">WunderGraph</a>, is taking the open source world by storm. With his company specializing in full stack and workflows through API composition, it is no wonder he has fostered a vast community of developers around WunderGraph.</p><p><br>On today's episode, Avram delves into the story and creation of WunderGraph. He also recounts how he organized a massive discord community to foster healthy feedback for growth. Lastly, Avram speaks on the hardships of building a start-up company and what it takes to flourish—all this and more on this episode of The Business of Open Source.</p><p><br>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Taking a leap of faith (3:40)</li><li>Engineer to Handler of Marketing (5:04)</li><li>Navigating becoming a Co-Founder (7:03)</li><li>The primary benefit of open source in WunderGraph (11:44)</li><li>Building a community space for feedback (14:23)</li><li>Top 3 mistakes in start-ups (18:25)</li><li>Advice to your past self (22:38)</li></ul><p><br><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Stefan</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/stefan-avram-62696713a/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/StefanTMD">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://wundergraph.com/">WunderGraph</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Stefan Avram, Co-Founder and Head of Growth at <a href="https://wundergraph.com/">WunderGraph</a>, is taking the open source world by storm. With his company specializing in full stack and workflows through API composition, it is no wonder he has fostered a vast community of developers around WunderGraph.</p><p><br>On today's episode, Avram delves into the story and creation of WunderGraph. He also recounts how he organized a massive discord community to foster healthy feedback for growth. Lastly, Avram speaks on the hardships of building a start-up company and what it takes to flourish—all this and more on this episode of The Business of Open Source.</p><p><br>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Taking a leap of faith (3:40)</li><li>Engineer to Handler of Marketing (5:04)</li><li>Navigating becoming a Co-Founder (7:03)</li><li>The primary benefit of open source in WunderGraph (11:44)</li><li>Building a community space for feedback (14:23)</li><li>Top 3 mistakes in start-ups (18:25)</li><li>Advice to your past self (22:38)</li></ul><p><br><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Stefan</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/stefan-avram-62696713a/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/StefanTMD">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://wundergraph.com/">WunderGraph</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 26 Apr 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/789a4bdf/f3626d90.mp3" length="40354030" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1602</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Stefan Avram, Co-Founder and Head of Growth at <a href="https://wundergraph.com/">WunderGraph</a>, is taking the open source world by storm. With his company specializing in full stack and workflows through API composition, it is no wonder he has fostered a vast community of developers around WunderGraph.</p><p><br>On today's episode, Avram delves into the story and creation of WunderGraph. He also recounts how he organized a massive discord community to foster healthy feedback for growth. Lastly, Avram speaks on the hardships of building a start-up company and what it takes to flourish—all this and more on this episode of The Business of Open Source.</p><p><br>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Taking a leap of faith (3:40)</li><li>Engineer to Handler of Marketing (5:04)</li><li>Navigating becoming a Co-Founder (7:03)</li><li>The primary benefit of open source in WunderGraph (11:44)</li><li>Building a community space for feedback (14:23)</li><li>Top 3 mistakes in start-ups (18:25)</li><li>Advice to your past self (22:38)</li></ul><p><br><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Stefan</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/stefan-avram-62696713a/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/StefanTMD">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://wundergraph.com/">WunderGraph</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Simplifying Authorization With Emre Baran</title>
      <itunes:episode>147</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>147</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Simplifying Authorization With Emre Baran</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">fb533445-d7bc-48d3-bd25-e95776da7d83</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/a0b4498f</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Emre Baran is a man on a mission to simplify authorization protocols for software developers. With his company Cerbos, Baran has put in years of dedication to easy authorization and helping build the authorization databases of over one hundred EU companies.</p><p>In this episode of The Business of Open Source, Emre Baran goes through the history of his company Cerbos. He also talks about telemetry challenges, monetization strategies, and the challenges that made him who he is today. Find out more in this episode!</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>The right time to take the plunge (4:48)</li><li>Monetization strategy (6:21)</li><li>The most interesting mistake (9:31)</li><li>Overcoming telemetry challenges (12:10)</li><li>The importance of open source for Cerbos (15:48)</li><li>Selling shoes to shoemakers (17:47)</li><li>Helping people through Cerbos (25:11)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Emre</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/emrebaran/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/emrebaran/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/emre">@emre</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://cerbos.dev/">Cerbos.dev</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Emre Baran is a man on a mission to simplify authorization protocols for software developers. With his company Cerbos, Baran has put in years of dedication to easy authorization and helping build the authorization databases of over one hundred EU companies.</p><p>In this episode of The Business of Open Source, Emre Baran goes through the history of his company Cerbos. He also talks about telemetry challenges, monetization strategies, and the challenges that made him who he is today. Find out more in this episode!</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>The right time to take the plunge (4:48)</li><li>Monetization strategy (6:21)</li><li>The most interesting mistake (9:31)</li><li>Overcoming telemetry challenges (12:10)</li><li>The importance of open source for Cerbos (15:48)</li><li>Selling shoes to shoemakers (17:47)</li><li>Helping people through Cerbos (25:11)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Emre</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/emrebaran/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/emrebaran/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/emre">@emre</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://cerbos.dev/">Cerbos.dev</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 19 Apr 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/a0b4498f/dd02b93a.mp3" length="46978135" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1877</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Emre Baran is a man on a mission to simplify authorization protocols for software developers. With his company Cerbos, Baran has put in years of dedication to easy authorization and helping build the authorization databases of over one hundred EU companies.</p><p>In this episode of The Business of Open Source, Emre Baran goes through the history of his company Cerbos. He also talks about telemetry challenges, monetization strategies, and the challenges that made him who he is today. Find out more in this episode!</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>The right time to take the plunge (4:48)</li><li>Monetization strategy (6:21)</li><li>The most interesting mistake (9:31)</li><li>Overcoming telemetry challenges (12:10)</li><li>The importance of open source for Cerbos (15:48)</li><li>Selling shoes to shoemakers (17:47)</li><li>Helping people through Cerbos (25:11)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Emre</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/emrebaran/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/emrebaran/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/emre">@emre</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://cerbos.dev/">Cerbos.dev</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Open Source Business Strategy With Tyler Jewell</title>
      <itunes:episode>146</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>146</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Open Source Business Strategy With Tyler Jewell</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">fb9ccbf2-de6c-4e92-98eb-905c42d6c2d4</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/5c2cf5c6</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Tyler Jewell is an enterprise technology investor and managing director of <a href="https://www.delltechnologiescapital.com">Dell Technologies Capital</a>, with a hand in many open source companies. A returning guest to the podcast, Jewell shares with us his foresight and knowledge about the past and current history of the open source landscape.</p><p>Hear about the inner workings of <a href="https://www.lightbend.com/">Lightbend</a> and how far <a href="https://www.lightbend.com/akka">Akka</a> open source projects have evolved over the years. Also, listen to Jewell discuss business strategy for open source companies and the common mistakes of running open source. Jewell also shares a little about the resiliency of open source businesses in the economic market.</p><p><br>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Akka projects over the years (4:00)</li><li>When companies should have open source licenses vs. when they should not (11:35)</li><li>Eclipse Che open source (13:20)</li><li>Is it better to be open source as a company? (14:30)</li><li>Open source as a development strategy rather than a business strategy (19:10)</li><li>Common mistakes in open source companies (21:25)</li><li>Are open source companies resilient economically? (23:14)</li></ul><p><br><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Tyler</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tylerjewell/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://mobile.twitter.com/tylerjewell">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://www.delltechnologiescapital.com">Dell Technologies Capital</a></li><li><a href="https://www.lightbend.com/">Lightbend</a></li><li><a href="https://www.eclipse.org/che/">Eclipse Che</a></li><li><a href="https://wso2.com/">WSO2</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Tyler Jewell is an enterprise technology investor and managing director of <a href="https://www.delltechnologiescapital.com">Dell Technologies Capital</a>, with a hand in many open source companies. A returning guest to the podcast, Jewell shares with us his foresight and knowledge about the past and current history of the open source landscape.</p><p>Hear about the inner workings of <a href="https://www.lightbend.com/">Lightbend</a> and how far <a href="https://www.lightbend.com/akka">Akka</a> open source projects have evolved over the years. Also, listen to Jewell discuss business strategy for open source companies and the common mistakes of running open source. Jewell also shares a little about the resiliency of open source businesses in the economic market.</p><p><br>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Akka projects over the years (4:00)</li><li>When companies should have open source licenses vs. when they should not (11:35)</li><li>Eclipse Che open source (13:20)</li><li>Is it better to be open source as a company? (14:30)</li><li>Open source as a development strategy rather than a business strategy (19:10)</li><li>Common mistakes in open source companies (21:25)</li><li>Are open source companies resilient economically? (23:14)</li></ul><p><br><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Tyler</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tylerjewell/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://mobile.twitter.com/tylerjewell">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://www.delltechnologiescapital.com">Dell Technologies Capital</a></li><li><a href="https://www.lightbend.com/">Lightbend</a></li><li><a href="https://www.eclipse.org/che/">Eclipse Che</a></li><li><a href="https://wso2.com/">WSO2</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 12 Apr 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/5c2cf5c6/c0f11054.mp3" length="39098682" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1550</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Tyler Jewell is an enterprise technology investor and managing director of <a href="https://www.delltechnologiescapital.com">Dell Technologies Capital</a>, with a hand in many open source companies. A returning guest to the podcast, Jewell shares with us his foresight and knowledge about the past and current history of the open source landscape.</p><p>Hear about the inner workings of <a href="https://www.lightbend.com/">Lightbend</a> and how far <a href="https://www.lightbend.com/akka">Akka</a> open source projects have evolved over the years. Also, listen to Jewell discuss business strategy for open source companies and the common mistakes of running open source. Jewell also shares a little about the resiliency of open source businesses in the economic market.</p><p><br>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Akka projects over the years (4:00)</li><li>When companies should have open source licenses vs. when they should not (11:35)</li><li>Eclipse Che open source (13:20)</li><li>Is it better to be open source as a company? (14:30)</li><li>Open source as a development strategy rather than a business strategy (19:10)</li><li>Common mistakes in open source companies (21:25)</li><li>Are open source companies resilient economically? (23:14)</li></ul><p><br><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Tyler</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tylerjewell/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://mobile.twitter.com/tylerjewell">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://www.delltechnologiescapital.com">Dell Technologies Capital</a></li><li><a href="https://www.lightbend.com/">Lightbend</a></li><li><a href="https://www.eclipse.org/che/">Eclipse Che</a></li><li><a href="https://wso2.com/">WSO2</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Pushing Boundaries and Removing Barriers with Ron Efroni</title>
      <itunes:episode>145</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>145</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Pushing Boundaries and Removing Barriers with Ron Efroni</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">44b53215-6d1d-47ed-9ccd-5d290d505248</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/096258a8</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>From software engineer to leading developer products at Facebook, Ron Efroni was familiar with the challenges facing developers. His co-founder recognized the power of Nix to remove the boundaries of development, and together they started Flox to reduce the barriers to the adoption of Nix.</p><p>In our final episode from the State of Open Con in London, Ron Efroni, CEO and Co-founder of Flox, joins me to discuss the future of Flox and Nix, the amazing community that keeps Nix moving forward, and advice for his former self as well as anyone interested in building an open source company. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Ron introduces himself, Flox, and Nix (0:50)</li><li>Ron recounts the origins of Flox (3:32)</li><li>Ron reviews the value add Flox provides (7:04)</li><li>Leaving the control of the Nix roadmap to the community (10:30)</li><li>Ron shares advice for himself 1.5 years ago (13:33) and...</li><li>Advice for other open source founders (14:40)</li><li>Why Nix is happy to have feedback and excitement from the community (17:56)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Ron</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/ronefroni/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/ronefroni/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/ronefroni">https://twitter.com/ronefroni</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://floxdev.com/">https://floxdev.com/</a></li><li>Nix: <a href="https://nixos.org/">https://nixos.org/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>From software engineer to leading developer products at Facebook, Ron Efroni was familiar with the challenges facing developers. His co-founder recognized the power of Nix to remove the boundaries of development, and together they started Flox to reduce the barriers to the adoption of Nix.</p><p>In our final episode from the State of Open Con in London, Ron Efroni, CEO and Co-founder of Flox, joins me to discuss the future of Flox and Nix, the amazing community that keeps Nix moving forward, and advice for his former self as well as anyone interested in building an open source company. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Ron introduces himself, Flox, and Nix (0:50)</li><li>Ron recounts the origins of Flox (3:32)</li><li>Ron reviews the value add Flox provides (7:04)</li><li>Leaving the control of the Nix roadmap to the community (10:30)</li><li>Ron shares advice for himself 1.5 years ago (13:33) and...</li><li>Advice for other open source founders (14:40)</li><li>Why Nix is happy to have feedback and excitement from the community (17:56)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Ron</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/ronefroni/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/ronefroni/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/ronefroni">https://twitter.com/ronefroni</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://floxdev.com/">https://floxdev.com/</a></li><li>Nix: <a href="https://nixos.org/">https://nixos.org/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 05 Apr 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/096258a8/50a97dd2.mp3" length="33717018" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1326</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>From software engineer to leading developer products at Facebook, Ron Efroni was familiar with the challenges facing developers. His co-founder recognized the power of Nix to remove the boundaries of development, and together they started Flox to reduce the barriers to the adoption of Nix.</p><p>In our final episode from the State of Open Con in London, Ron Efroni, CEO and Co-founder of Flox, joins me to discuss the future of Flox and Nix, the amazing community that keeps Nix moving forward, and advice for his former self as well as anyone interested in building an open source company. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Ron introduces himself, Flox, and Nix (0:50)</li><li>Ron recounts the origins of Flox (3:32)</li><li>Ron reviews the value add Flox provides (7:04)</li><li>Leaving the control of the Nix roadmap to the community (10:30)</li><li>Ron shares advice for himself 1.5 years ago (13:33) and...</li><li>Advice for other open source founders (14:40)</li><li>Why Nix is happy to have feedback and excitement from the community (17:56)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Ron</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/ronefroni/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/ronefroni/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/ronefroni">https://twitter.com/ronefroni</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://floxdev.com/">https://floxdev.com/</a></li><li>Nix: <a href="https://nixos.org/">https://nixos.org/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Demanding Something Better with Gael Duval</title>
      <itunes:episode>144</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>144</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Demanding Something Better with Gael Duval</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">bed554e5-9699-4f79-aeb1-f5861dcc2747</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/e8efd23b</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Sometimes it seems like our devices can read our minds. While that can occasionally be helpful, it can raise concerns about how much of our personal data is collected. Gael Duval, CEO of Murena, noticed this issue in 2017 and has been working on solutions ever since. </p><p>In this episode, Gael joins me at the State of Open Con in London to discuss the origins of Murena and how you can protect your data. He also shares lessons he’s learned as an entrepreneur and advice for aspiring founders in the open source space. Listen to hear his unique perspective as an open source B2C founder. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Gael introduces himself and outlines why he started Murena (0:51)</li><li>Murena’s relationships with hardware (3:43)</li><li>Gael reflects on Murena being a rare B2C co, as opposed to most open source B2B companies (6:04)</li><li>The value of being open source for Murena was building on existing technologies (9:16)</li><li>Gael shares advice for his younger self (11:58)</li><li>Gael recalls his most significant challenges at Murena (14:36)</li><li>How views on privacy differ between Europe and the US (15:43)</li><li>Gael shares advice for starting a B2C open source company (17:06)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Gael</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/gaelduval/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/gaelduval">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://murena.com/">Murena</a></li><li><a href="https://e.foundation/">E Foundation</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Sometimes it seems like our devices can read our minds. While that can occasionally be helpful, it can raise concerns about how much of our personal data is collected. Gael Duval, CEO of Murena, noticed this issue in 2017 and has been working on solutions ever since. </p><p>In this episode, Gael joins me at the State of Open Con in London to discuss the origins of Murena and how you can protect your data. He also shares lessons he’s learned as an entrepreneur and advice for aspiring founders in the open source space. Listen to hear his unique perspective as an open source B2C founder. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Gael introduces himself and outlines why he started Murena (0:51)</li><li>Murena’s relationships with hardware (3:43)</li><li>Gael reflects on Murena being a rare B2C co, as opposed to most open source B2B companies (6:04)</li><li>The value of being open source for Murena was building on existing technologies (9:16)</li><li>Gael shares advice for his younger self (11:58)</li><li>Gael recalls his most significant challenges at Murena (14:36)</li><li>How views on privacy differ between Europe and the US (15:43)</li><li>Gael shares advice for starting a B2C open source company (17:06)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Gael</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/gaelduval/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/gaelduval">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://murena.com/">Murena</a></li><li><a href="https://e.foundation/">E Foundation</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 29 Mar 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/e8efd23b/67252095.mp3" length="29150747" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1135</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Sometimes it seems like our devices can read our minds. While that can occasionally be helpful, it can raise concerns about how much of our personal data is collected. Gael Duval, CEO of Murena, noticed this issue in 2017 and has been working on solutions ever since. </p><p>In this episode, Gael joins me at the State of Open Con in London to discuss the origins of Murena and how you can protect your data. He also shares lessons he’s learned as an entrepreneur and advice for aspiring founders in the open source space. Listen to hear his unique perspective as an open source B2C founder. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Gael introduces himself and outlines why he started Murena (0:51)</li><li>Murena’s relationships with hardware (3:43)</li><li>Gael reflects on Murena being a rare B2C co, as opposed to most open source B2B companies (6:04)</li><li>The value of being open source for Murena was building on existing technologies (9:16)</li><li>Gael shares advice for his younger self (11:58)</li><li>Gael recalls his most significant challenges at Murena (14:36)</li><li>How views on privacy differ between Europe and the US (15:43)</li><li>Gael shares advice for starting a B2C open source company (17:06)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Gael</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/gaelduval/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/gaelduval">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://murena.com/">Murena</a></li><li><a href="https://e.foundation/">E Foundation</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Challenging Yourself Through Open Source with Peter Zaitsev of Percona</title>
      <itunes:episode>143</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>143</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Challenging Yourself Through Open Source with Peter Zaitsev of Percona</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">c60f2308-2bd1-4143-984d-edc017bd8ece</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/bec2bfe3</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Peter Zaitzev, the founder of Percona, is an expert on open source strategy and database optimization. With his level of experience in the world of open source, Peter enjoys challenging himself and going against the grain in order to come out on top.</p><p>On this episode of The Business of Open Source, Peter breaks down his thought process on how he approaches open source for businesses as a consultant and dives into the inner workings of Percona from how they generate revenue to customer retention. We also discuss how anyone new to the space can get into open source and make a career out of it.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>The differentiator between Percona and Oracle (3:11)</li><li>Challenging yourself (6:02)</li><li>How Percona generates revenue (9:43)</li><li>Tough moments for Percona (13:07)</li><li>Getting into open source as a businessman (15:09)</li><li>Looking ahead for Percona (18:23)</li><li>Advice for Peter’s past self (19:42)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Peter</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/peterzaitsev/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/peterzaitsev/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/PeterZaitsev">https://twitter.com/PeterZaitsev</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.percona.com/">percona.com</a></li><li><a href="https://www.renegadeunderdogs.com/">Renegade Underdogs</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Peter Zaitzev, the founder of Percona, is an expert on open source strategy and database optimization. With his level of experience in the world of open source, Peter enjoys challenging himself and going against the grain in order to come out on top.</p><p>On this episode of The Business of Open Source, Peter breaks down his thought process on how he approaches open source for businesses as a consultant and dives into the inner workings of Percona from how they generate revenue to customer retention. We also discuss how anyone new to the space can get into open source and make a career out of it.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>The differentiator between Percona and Oracle (3:11)</li><li>Challenging yourself (6:02)</li><li>How Percona generates revenue (9:43)</li><li>Tough moments for Percona (13:07)</li><li>Getting into open source as a businessman (15:09)</li><li>Looking ahead for Percona (18:23)</li><li>Advice for Peter’s past self (19:42)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Peter</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/peterzaitsev/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/peterzaitsev/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/PeterZaitsev">https://twitter.com/PeterZaitsev</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.percona.com/">percona.com</a></li><li><a href="https://www.renegadeunderdogs.com/">Renegade Underdogs</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 22 Mar 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/bec2bfe3/5d9a649f.mp3" length="39036856" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1547</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Peter Zaitzev, the founder of Percona, is an expert on open source strategy and database optimization. With his level of experience in the world of open source, Peter enjoys challenging himself and going against the grain in order to come out on top.</p><p>On this episode of The Business of Open Source, Peter breaks down his thought process on how he approaches open source for businesses as a consultant and dives into the inner workings of Percona from how they generate revenue to customer retention. We also discuss how anyone new to the space can get into open source and make a career out of it.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>The differentiator between Percona and Oracle (3:11)</li><li>Challenging yourself (6:02)</li><li>How Percona generates revenue (9:43)</li><li>Tough moments for Percona (13:07)</li><li>Getting into open source as a businessman (15:09)</li><li>Looking ahead for Percona (18:23)</li><li>Advice for Peter’s past self (19:42)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Peter</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/peterzaitsev/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/peterzaitsev/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/PeterZaitsev">https://twitter.com/PeterZaitsev</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.percona.com/">percona.com</a></li><li><a href="https://www.renegadeunderdogs.com/">Renegade Underdogs</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Changing the World through Open Source with Frank Karlitschek</title>
      <itunes:episode>142</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>142</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Changing the World through Open Source with Frank Karlitschek</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">898524dc-7fdc-4125-af60-326ca0dd232e</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/5d55860e</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Frank Karlitschek has worked in the open source software space since the late 90s when he contributed to KDE. Since then, he’s managed multiple teams and start ups and used his influence to make the internet a better, more secure place. </p><p>In this episode, Frank joins me at The State of Open Con to share his passion for open source and improving the internet. We discuss his early involvement in open source and how he started his own company. He also shares advice for new founders and encouragement for anyone hoping to make a positive impact on the world.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Frank introduces himself and Nextcloud and shares his initial excitement around open source (0:50)</li><li>Frank shares some details about his open source business model and how the company came together (2:51)</li><li>Frank recalls mistakes he made early on in his career and what he's learned (6:43)</li><li>Current projects/ processes in the “trial and error” phase of development (8:10)</li><li>The value of being open source (10:41)</li><li>Frank shares the advice he’d give his younger self and someone starting an open source company now (13:03)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Frank</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/frankkarlitschek/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/frankkarlitschek/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/fkarlitschek">https://twitter.com/fkarlitschek</a></li><li>Mastadon: <a href="https://t.co/hBzBvtL8rQ">https://mastodon.social/@Karlitschek</a></li><li>Website: <a href="https://t.co/fCXQwXpQYH">karlitschek.de</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://nextcloud.com/">https://nextcloud.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Frank Karlitschek has worked in the open source software space since the late 90s when he contributed to KDE. Since then, he’s managed multiple teams and start ups and used his influence to make the internet a better, more secure place. </p><p>In this episode, Frank joins me at The State of Open Con to share his passion for open source and improving the internet. We discuss his early involvement in open source and how he started his own company. He also shares advice for new founders and encouragement for anyone hoping to make a positive impact on the world.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Frank introduces himself and Nextcloud and shares his initial excitement around open source (0:50)</li><li>Frank shares some details about his open source business model and how the company came together (2:51)</li><li>Frank recalls mistakes he made early on in his career and what he's learned (6:43)</li><li>Current projects/ processes in the “trial and error” phase of development (8:10)</li><li>The value of being open source (10:41)</li><li>Frank shares the advice he’d give his younger self and someone starting an open source company now (13:03)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Frank</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/frankkarlitschek/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/frankkarlitschek/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/fkarlitschek">https://twitter.com/fkarlitschek</a></li><li>Mastadon: <a href="https://t.co/hBzBvtL8rQ">https://mastodon.social/@Karlitschek</a></li><li>Website: <a href="https://t.co/fCXQwXpQYH">karlitschek.de</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://nextcloud.com/">https://nextcloud.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 15 Mar 2023 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/5d55860e/63c77248.mp3" length="26069712" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1007</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Frank Karlitschek has worked in the open source software space since the late 90s when he contributed to KDE. Since then, he’s managed multiple teams and start ups and used his influence to make the internet a better, more secure place. </p><p>In this episode, Frank joins me at The State of Open Con to share his passion for open source and improving the internet. We discuss his early involvement in open source and how he started his own company. He also shares advice for new founders and encouragement for anyone hoping to make a positive impact on the world.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Frank introduces himself and Nextcloud and shares his initial excitement around open source (0:50)</li><li>Frank shares some details about his open source business model and how the company came together (2:51)</li><li>Frank recalls mistakes he made early on in his career and what he's learned (6:43)</li><li>Current projects/ processes in the “trial and error” phase of development (8:10)</li><li>The value of being open source (10:41)</li><li>Frank shares the advice he’d give his younger self and someone starting an open source company now (13:03)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Frank</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/frankkarlitschek/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/frankkarlitschek/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/fkarlitschek">https://twitter.com/fkarlitschek</a></li><li>Mastadon: <a href="https://t.co/hBzBvtL8rQ">https://mastodon.social/@Karlitschek</a></li><li>Website: <a href="https://t.co/fCXQwXpQYH">karlitschek.de</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://nextcloud.com/">https://nextcloud.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Bootstrapping an Open Source Company with Matt Barker of Jetstack</title>
      <itunes:episode>141</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>141</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Bootstrapping an Open Source Company with Matt Barker of Jetstack</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">2a2ca979-523c-4ab4-a944-68033227bc01</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/ff64393e</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Matt Barker, President and co-founder of <a href="https://www.jetstack.io/">Jetstack</a>, has been involved in open source and Kubernetes since the early days of its development. With a long list of open source projects behind him, he decided to hone in on <a href="https://www.jetstack.io/">Jestack</a> and with its success, share the knowledge he’s gained over the years as an OpenUK Entrepreneur in Residence.</p><p>In this episode of The Business of Open Source, Matt joins me from the State of Open Con and shares his initial vision for <a href="https://www.jetstack.io/">Jestack</a> and reviews the projects that helped him get the company to where it is today. As <a href="https://www.jetstack.io/">Jestack</a> is a fully bootstrapped company, Matt shares his perspective on how that impacts a founder’s decisions. We also discuss the importance of sharing your knowledge with the next generation of founders through mentorship as Matt does with <a href="https://openuk.uk/">OpenUK</a>. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Matt introduces himself and <a href="https://www.jetstack.io/">Jestack</a> (0:48)</li><li>Matt’s open source projects (3:39)</li><li>Choosing one project to focus on (8:24)</li><li>Matt explains why it seems easier for bootstrapped companies to niche down (10:42)</li><li>Matt reflects on his early mistakes as an entrepreneur and what he’s learned from them (16:40)</li><li>Matt explains his role as OpenUK Entrepreneur in Residence (19:30)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Matt</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mattbarks/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/mattbarks/</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.jetstack.io/">https://www.jetstack.io/</a></li><li>OpenUK: <a href="https://openuk.uk/">https://openuk.uk/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Matt Barker, President and co-founder of <a href="https://www.jetstack.io/">Jetstack</a>, has been involved in open source and Kubernetes since the early days of its development. With a long list of open source projects behind him, he decided to hone in on <a href="https://www.jetstack.io/">Jestack</a> and with its success, share the knowledge he’s gained over the years as an OpenUK Entrepreneur in Residence.</p><p>In this episode of The Business of Open Source, Matt joins me from the State of Open Con and shares his initial vision for <a href="https://www.jetstack.io/">Jestack</a> and reviews the projects that helped him get the company to where it is today. As <a href="https://www.jetstack.io/">Jestack</a> is a fully bootstrapped company, Matt shares his perspective on how that impacts a founder’s decisions. We also discuss the importance of sharing your knowledge with the next generation of founders through mentorship as Matt does with <a href="https://openuk.uk/">OpenUK</a>. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Matt introduces himself and <a href="https://www.jetstack.io/">Jestack</a> (0:48)</li><li>Matt’s open source projects (3:39)</li><li>Choosing one project to focus on (8:24)</li><li>Matt explains why it seems easier for bootstrapped companies to niche down (10:42)</li><li>Matt reflects on his early mistakes as an entrepreneur and what he’s learned from them (16:40)</li><li>Matt explains his role as OpenUK Entrepreneur in Residence (19:30)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Matt</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mattbarks/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/mattbarks/</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.jetstack.io/">https://www.jetstack.io/</a></li><li>OpenUK: <a href="https://openuk.uk/">https://openuk.uk/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 08 Mar 2023 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/ff64393e/78fa553c.mp3" length="33236995" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1306</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Matt Barker, President and co-founder of <a href="https://www.jetstack.io/">Jetstack</a>, has been involved in open source and Kubernetes since the early days of its development. With a long list of open source projects behind him, he decided to hone in on <a href="https://www.jetstack.io/">Jestack</a> and with its success, share the knowledge he’s gained over the years as an OpenUK Entrepreneur in Residence.</p><p>In this episode of The Business of Open Source, Matt joins me from the State of Open Con and shares his initial vision for <a href="https://www.jetstack.io/">Jestack</a> and reviews the projects that helped him get the company to where it is today. As <a href="https://www.jetstack.io/">Jestack</a> is a fully bootstrapped company, Matt shares his perspective on how that impacts a founder’s decisions. We also discuss the importance of sharing your knowledge with the next generation of founders through mentorship as Matt does with <a href="https://openuk.uk/">OpenUK</a>. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Matt introduces himself and <a href="https://www.jetstack.io/">Jestack</a> (0:48)</li><li>Matt’s open source projects (3:39)</li><li>Choosing one project to focus on (8:24)</li><li>Matt explains why it seems easier for bootstrapped companies to niche down (10:42)</li><li>Matt reflects on his early mistakes as an entrepreneur and what he’s learned from them (16:40)</li><li>Matt explains his role as OpenUK Entrepreneur in Residence (19:30)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Matt</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mattbarks/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/mattbarks/</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.jetstack.io/">https://www.jetstack.io/</a></li><li>OpenUK: <a href="https://openuk.uk/">https://openuk.uk/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Bringing Hardware Design to The Software Space at The State of Open Con with Rob Taylor of ChipFlow</title>
      <itunes:episode>140</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>140</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Bringing Hardware Design to The Software Space at The State of Open Con with Rob Taylor of ChipFlow</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">ede46ce3-510f-4f10-8615-a7eb4f11ac3a</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/bbc9f90f</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>In the first of my series of interviews from the State of Open Con in London, I’m chatting with Rob Taylor, CEO of <a href="https://www.chipflow.io/">ChipFlow</a>, about the intersection between open source software design and hardware design, bringing community into the hardware space, and how geopolitics could shape the future of open source. </p><p>In this episode, Rob shares his fascinating hardware and software design background, including his first job working on lighting desks for theaters. Then we delve into his other companies before discovering the impetus for starting ChipFlow, how and why they do what they do, and some plans for the future. We also chat briefly about monetization, touch on the impact geopolitics could have on tech, and share our favorite parts of conferences like the State of Open Con. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Rob introduces himself and shares a bit of his background in software and open source (0:43)</li><li>Rob recounts the origins of <a href="https://www.chipflow.io/">ChipFlow</a> (4:08)</li><li>Rob explains how hardware and software design are similar and where they diverge (7:30)</li><li>How ChipFlow helps companies create custom chip designs for their products (9:38)</li><li>How changes in open source software correlate to the hardware space (12:11)</li><li>How Rob and his team encourage community in the hardware space (15:02)</li><li>Rob’s final thoughts on the future of open source look to geopolitics (17:53)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Rob</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/robtaylor78/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/robtaylor78/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/robtaylor78">@robtaylor78</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.chipflow.io/">https://www.chipflow.io/</a></li></ul><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In the first of my series of interviews from the State of Open Con in London, I’m chatting with Rob Taylor, CEO of <a href="https://www.chipflow.io/">ChipFlow</a>, about the intersection between open source software design and hardware design, bringing community into the hardware space, and how geopolitics could shape the future of open source. </p><p>In this episode, Rob shares his fascinating hardware and software design background, including his first job working on lighting desks for theaters. Then we delve into his other companies before discovering the impetus for starting ChipFlow, how and why they do what they do, and some plans for the future. We also chat briefly about monetization, touch on the impact geopolitics could have on tech, and share our favorite parts of conferences like the State of Open Con. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Rob introduces himself and shares a bit of his background in software and open source (0:43)</li><li>Rob recounts the origins of <a href="https://www.chipflow.io/">ChipFlow</a> (4:08)</li><li>Rob explains how hardware and software design are similar and where they diverge (7:30)</li><li>How ChipFlow helps companies create custom chip designs for their products (9:38)</li><li>How changes in open source software correlate to the hardware space (12:11)</li><li>How Rob and his team encourage community in the hardware space (15:02)</li><li>Rob’s final thoughts on the future of open source look to geopolitics (17:53)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Rob</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/robtaylor78/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/robtaylor78/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/robtaylor78">@robtaylor78</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.chipflow.io/">https://www.chipflow.io/</a></li></ul><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 01 Mar 2023 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/bbc9f90f/c4750ede.mp3" length="32137298" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1260</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>In the first of my series of interviews from the State of Open Con in London, I’m chatting with Rob Taylor, CEO of <a href="https://www.chipflow.io/">ChipFlow</a>, about the intersection between open source software design and hardware design, bringing community into the hardware space, and how geopolitics could shape the future of open source. </p><p>In this episode, Rob shares his fascinating hardware and software design background, including his first job working on lighting desks for theaters. Then we delve into his other companies before discovering the impetus for starting ChipFlow, how and why they do what they do, and some plans for the future. We also chat briefly about monetization, touch on the impact geopolitics could have on tech, and share our favorite parts of conferences like the State of Open Con. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Rob introduces himself and shares a bit of his background in software and open source (0:43)</li><li>Rob recounts the origins of <a href="https://www.chipflow.io/">ChipFlow</a> (4:08)</li><li>Rob explains how hardware and software design are similar and where they diverge (7:30)</li><li>How ChipFlow helps companies create custom chip designs for their products (9:38)</li><li>How changes in open source software correlate to the hardware space (12:11)</li><li>How Rob and his team encourage community in the hardware space (15:02)</li><li>Rob’s final thoughts on the future of open source look to geopolitics (17:53)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Rob</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/robtaylor78/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/robtaylor78/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/robtaylor78">@robtaylor78</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.chipflow.io/">https://www.chipflow.io/</a></li></ul><p><br></p>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>From Navy Seal to Entrepreneur with Josh Thurman</title>
      <itunes:episode>139</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>139</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>From Navy Seal to Entrepreneur with Josh Thurman</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">6d20987c-b986-4e80-b81b-8ec8ee870735</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/e27ebfd7</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Josh Thurman, Co-founder and Head of DevRel at Uffizzi, joins me to chat about his journey from Navy Seal to tech startup Co-founder.</p><p>In this episode, Josh and I discuss his background as a Navy Seal, how he dove into tech and started Uffizzi, and the mistakes and failures he overcame along the way. We also dig into open source as a development model, creating vs. capturing value, and the importance of compatibility with software users are already implementing. Listen to find out what Josh considers his biggest failure, how he and Uffizzi overcame it, and how companies are using the product now. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Josh introduces himself and Uffizzi (0:45)</li><li>Josh recounts early failures at Uffizzi (3:55)</li><li>How Josh and Uffizzi settled on open source (6:28)</li><li>Open source as a development model (9:33)</li><li>Creating vs. Capturing value (10:50)</li><li>Josh discusses the importance of modularity and compatibility with other software (13:36)</li><li>Why Uffizzi decided to focus on Kubernetes (15:54) </li><li>Why Josh as a founder, chose the role of Head of DevRel (17:25)</li><li>How Josh and Uffizzi pivoted to recover from the failures he discussed earlier (20:33)</li><li>Uffizzi case studies (27:01)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Josh</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/joshua-p-thurman/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/joshua-p-thurman/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/JoshThurman19">https://twitter.com/JoshThurman19</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://uffizzi.com">https://uffizzi.com</a></li><li>Uffizzi Slack community: <a href="https://uffizzi.slack.com/join/shared_invite/zt-ffr4o3x0-J~0yVT6qgFV~wmGm19Ux9A#/shared-invite/email">https://uffizzi.slack.com/join/shared_invite/zt-ffr4o3x0-J~0yVT6qgFV~wmGm19Ux9A#/shared-invite/email</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Josh Thurman, Co-founder and Head of DevRel at Uffizzi, joins me to chat about his journey from Navy Seal to tech startup Co-founder.</p><p>In this episode, Josh and I discuss his background as a Navy Seal, how he dove into tech and started Uffizzi, and the mistakes and failures he overcame along the way. We also dig into open source as a development model, creating vs. capturing value, and the importance of compatibility with software users are already implementing. Listen to find out what Josh considers his biggest failure, how he and Uffizzi overcame it, and how companies are using the product now. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Josh introduces himself and Uffizzi (0:45)</li><li>Josh recounts early failures at Uffizzi (3:55)</li><li>How Josh and Uffizzi settled on open source (6:28)</li><li>Open source as a development model (9:33)</li><li>Creating vs. Capturing value (10:50)</li><li>Josh discusses the importance of modularity and compatibility with other software (13:36)</li><li>Why Uffizzi decided to focus on Kubernetes (15:54) </li><li>Why Josh as a founder, chose the role of Head of DevRel (17:25)</li><li>How Josh and Uffizzi pivoted to recover from the failures he discussed earlier (20:33)</li><li>Uffizzi case studies (27:01)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Josh</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/joshua-p-thurman/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/joshua-p-thurman/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/JoshThurman19">https://twitter.com/JoshThurman19</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://uffizzi.com">https://uffizzi.com</a></li><li>Uffizzi Slack community: <a href="https://uffizzi.slack.com/join/shared_invite/zt-ffr4o3x0-J~0yVT6qgFV~wmGm19Ux9A#/shared-invite/email">https://uffizzi.slack.com/join/shared_invite/zt-ffr4o3x0-J~0yVT6qgFV~wmGm19Ux9A#/shared-invite/email</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 22 Feb 2023 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/e27ebfd7/58578ac9.mp3" length="44824591" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1788</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Josh Thurman, Co-founder and Head of DevRel at Uffizzi, joins me to chat about his journey from Navy Seal to tech startup Co-founder.</p><p>In this episode, Josh and I discuss his background as a Navy Seal, how he dove into tech and started Uffizzi, and the mistakes and failures he overcame along the way. We also dig into open source as a development model, creating vs. capturing value, and the importance of compatibility with software users are already implementing. Listen to find out what Josh considers his biggest failure, how he and Uffizzi overcame it, and how companies are using the product now. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Josh introduces himself and Uffizzi (0:45)</li><li>Josh recounts early failures at Uffizzi (3:55)</li><li>How Josh and Uffizzi settled on open source (6:28)</li><li>Open source as a development model (9:33)</li><li>Creating vs. Capturing value (10:50)</li><li>Josh discusses the importance of modularity and compatibility with other software (13:36)</li><li>Why Uffizzi decided to focus on Kubernetes (15:54) </li><li>Why Josh as a founder, chose the role of Head of DevRel (17:25)</li><li>How Josh and Uffizzi pivoted to recover from the failures he discussed earlier (20:33)</li><li>Uffizzi case studies (27:01)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Josh</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/joshua-p-thurman/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/joshua-p-thurman/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/JoshThurman19">https://twitter.com/JoshThurman19</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://uffizzi.com">https://uffizzi.com</a></li><li>Uffizzi Slack community: <a href="https://uffizzi.slack.com/join/shared_invite/zt-ffr4o3x0-J~0yVT6qgFV~wmGm19Ux9A#/shared-invite/email">https://uffizzi.slack.com/join/shared_invite/zt-ffr4o3x0-J~0yVT6qgFV~wmGm19Ux9A#/shared-invite/email</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Gaining Trust through Transparency with Nikhil Nandagopal</title>
      <itunes:episode>138</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>138</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Gaining Trust through Transparency with Nikhil Nandagopal</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">fd20d704-9fea-433d-aae5-f8ecc4778b8b</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/b83ef11f</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Nikhil Nandagopal, Founder and CPO of <a href="https://www.appsmith.com/">Appsmith</a>, joins me to chat about building trust, the importance of starting as an open source offering, and how the community continues to shape the future of Appsmith.</p><p>In this episode, Nikhil and I discuss the origins of Appsmith, building a business edition as well as a community one, and the challenges he and his team encountered along the way. We compare the community and business editions, discuss the importance of community and an educational, product-led approach to marketing, and even touch on the stigma of the “low code” label with which Appsmith has chosen to align. Listen to learn Nikhil’s views and insight on open source, community, education, developer relations, and more. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Nikhil introduces himself and <a href="https://www.appsmith.com/">Appsmith</a> (0:49)</li><li>Why open source? (2:37)</li><li>Lessons learned by starting with an open source approach (4:57)</li><li>Appsmith community edition vs. business edition (6:33)</li><li>Nikhil recounts his most significant mistakes in creating Appsmith (9:59)</li><li>Nikhil shares Appsmith’s marketing strategy (12:20)</li><li>The importance of nurturing your community in open source (16:01)</li><li>Unexpected challenges Nikhil encountered in the early days of Appsmith (18:03)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Nikhil</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/nikhil-nandagopal-05534241/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/nikhil-nandagopal-05534241/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/NikilNandagopal">@NikilNandagopal</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.appsmith.com/">https://www.appsmith.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Nikhil Nandagopal, Founder and CPO of <a href="https://www.appsmith.com/">Appsmith</a>, joins me to chat about building trust, the importance of starting as an open source offering, and how the community continues to shape the future of Appsmith.</p><p>In this episode, Nikhil and I discuss the origins of Appsmith, building a business edition as well as a community one, and the challenges he and his team encountered along the way. We compare the community and business editions, discuss the importance of community and an educational, product-led approach to marketing, and even touch on the stigma of the “low code” label with which Appsmith has chosen to align. Listen to learn Nikhil’s views and insight on open source, community, education, developer relations, and more. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Nikhil introduces himself and <a href="https://www.appsmith.com/">Appsmith</a> (0:49)</li><li>Why open source? (2:37)</li><li>Lessons learned by starting with an open source approach (4:57)</li><li>Appsmith community edition vs. business edition (6:33)</li><li>Nikhil recounts his most significant mistakes in creating Appsmith (9:59)</li><li>Nikhil shares Appsmith’s marketing strategy (12:20)</li><li>The importance of nurturing your community in open source (16:01)</li><li>Unexpected challenges Nikhil encountered in the early days of Appsmith (18:03)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Nikhil</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/nikhil-nandagopal-05534241/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/nikhil-nandagopal-05534241/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/NikilNandagopal">@NikilNandagopal</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.appsmith.com/">https://www.appsmith.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 15 Feb 2023 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/b83ef11f/c7624de5.mp3" length="30642310" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1197</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Nikhil Nandagopal, Founder and CPO of <a href="https://www.appsmith.com/">Appsmith</a>, joins me to chat about building trust, the importance of starting as an open source offering, and how the community continues to shape the future of Appsmith.</p><p>In this episode, Nikhil and I discuss the origins of Appsmith, building a business edition as well as a community one, and the challenges he and his team encountered along the way. We compare the community and business editions, discuss the importance of community and an educational, product-led approach to marketing, and even touch on the stigma of the “low code” label with which Appsmith has chosen to align. Listen to learn Nikhil’s views and insight on open source, community, education, developer relations, and more. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Nikhil introduces himself and <a href="https://www.appsmith.com/">Appsmith</a> (0:49)</li><li>Why open source? (2:37)</li><li>Lessons learned by starting with an open source approach (4:57)</li><li>Appsmith community edition vs. business edition (6:33)</li><li>Nikhil recounts his most significant mistakes in creating Appsmith (9:59)</li><li>Nikhil shares Appsmith’s marketing strategy (12:20)</li><li>The importance of nurturing your community in open source (16:01)</li><li>Unexpected challenges Nikhil encountered in the early days of Appsmith (18:03)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Nikhil</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/nikhil-nandagopal-05534241/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/nikhil-nandagopal-05534241/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/NikilNandagopal">@NikilNandagopal</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.appsmith.com/">https://www.appsmith.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>From Closed Source to Open Source with Adi Gelvan of Speedb</title>
      <itunes:episode>137</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>137</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>From Closed Source to Open Source with Adi Gelvan of Speedb</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">19426455-dea6-4359-acc1-bf04ff560fec</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/2a4c9428</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Adi Gelvan, Co-founder and CEO of <a href="http://speedb.io/">Speedb</a>, joins me to share his experience in moving Speedb from a closed source proprietary company to open source with an enterprise offering. </p><p>In this episode, Adi and I explore moving from a proprietary to an open source strategy. From pros and cons, pushback from team members, and mistakes along the way, listen to hear how Adi and his team handled those challenges and more.</p><p><br>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Adi introduces himself and <a href="http://speedb.io">Speedb</a> (0:47)</li><li>Why speedb decided to switch to open source and the changes they made to do it (2:28)</li><li>Adi reviews the pros and cons of open source for Speedb (8:34)</li><li>How Adi and his team handled the pushback on the decision to move to open source (12:43)</li><li>Adi’s top two mistakes in making the transition to open source (15:04)</li><li>Surprises Adi encountered in switching to an open source strategy (16:38)</li><li>Adi shares his advice for someone thinking about switching from closed source to open source (19:22)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Adi</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/adi-gelvan/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/adi-gelvan/</a></li><li>Company: <a href="http://speedb.io">speedb.io</a> <ul><li>Open Source site: <a href="http://speedb.dev">speedb.dev</a></li><li>Discord: <a href="https://discord.com/invite/5fVUUtM2cG">https://discord.com/invite/5fVUUtM2cG</a></li></ul></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Adi Gelvan, Co-founder and CEO of <a href="http://speedb.io/">Speedb</a>, joins me to share his experience in moving Speedb from a closed source proprietary company to open source with an enterprise offering. </p><p>In this episode, Adi and I explore moving from a proprietary to an open source strategy. From pros and cons, pushback from team members, and mistakes along the way, listen to hear how Adi and his team handled those challenges and more.</p><p><br>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Adi introduces himself and <a href="http://speedb.io">Speedb</a> (0:47)</li><li>Why speedb decided to switch to open source and the changes they made to do it (2:28)</li><li>Adi reviews the pros and cons of open source for Speedb (8:34)</li><li>How Adi and his team handled the pushback on the decision to move to open source (12:43)</li><li>Adi’s top two mistakes in making the transition to open source (15:04)</li><li>Surprises Adi encountered in switching to an open source strategy (16:38)</li><li>Adi shares his advice for someone thinking about switching from closed source to open source (19:22)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Adi</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/adi-gelvan/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/adi-gelvan/</a></li><li>Company: <a href="http://speedb.io">speedb.io</a> <ul><li>Open Source site: <a href="http://speedb.dev">speedb.dev</a></li><li>Discord: <a href="https://discord.com/invite/5fVUUtM2cG">https://discord.com/invite/5fVUUtM2cG</a></li></ul></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 08 Feb 2023 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/2a4c9428/0dc85198.mp3" length="36099065" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1425</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>
        <![CDATA[<p>Adi Gelvan, Co-founder and CEO of <a href="http://speedb.io/">Speedb</a>, joins me to share his experience in moving Speedb from a closed source proprietary company to open source with an enterprise offering. </p><p>In this episode, Adi and I explore moving from a proprietary to an open source strategy. From pros and cons, pushback from team members, and mistakes along the way, listen to hear how Adi and his team handled those challenges and more.</p><p><br>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Adi introduces himself and <a href="http://speedb.io">Speedb</a> (0:47)</li><li>Why speedb decided to switch to open source and the changes they made to do it (2:28)</li><li>Adi reviews the pros and cons of open source for Speedb (8:34)</li><li>How Adi and his team handled the pushback on the decision to move to open source (12:43)</li><li>Adi’s top two mistakes in making the transition to open source (15:04)</li><li>Surprises Adi encountered in switching to an open source strategy (16:38)</li><li>Adi shares his advice for someone thinking about switching from closed source to open source (19:22)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Adi</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/adi-gelvan/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/adi-gelvan/</a></li><li>Company: <a href="http://speedb.io">speedb.io</a> <ul><li>Open Source site: <a href="http://speedb.dev">speedb.dev</a></li><li>Discord: <a href="https://discord.com/invite/5fVUUtM2cG">https://discord.com/invite/5fVUUtM2cG</a></li></ul></li></ul>]]>
      </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Understanding the Legal Side of Open Source with Heather Meeker</title>
      <itunes:episode>136</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>136</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Understanding the Legal Side of Open Source with Heather Meeker</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">48623177-264e-4a3e-9425-26f9f063fc3a</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/bace8502</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Heather Meeker, General Partner at OSS Capital, joins me to discuss the legal elements of open source, including options for licensing and business structure.</p><p>In this episode, Heather and I explore the intersection of law and open source by reviewing licensing options, challenges, and common mistakes startups make early on. We also get into less common licensing and business models and what might be in store for the future of licensing in open source.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Heather introduces herself and reviews her background in open source (0:50)</li><li>Legal issues startups can run into early on (2:02)</li><li>Common licensing paradigms in open source (6:00)</li><li>Less common licensing options (10:40)</li><li>The model Heather would use if she were starting a new business (15:21)</li><li>How the challenges commercial open source startups face are different from those proprietary software companies face (16:58)</li><li>Heather shares her idea of the number one mistake new startups make (26:37)</li><li>Heather shares her thoughts on the future of open source startups (27:28)</li></ul><p><br><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Heather</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/heathermeeker/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/heathermeeker/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/HeatherMeeker4">@HeatherMeeker4</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://oss.capital/">https://oss.capital/</a></li><li>Website: <a href="http://HeatherMeeker.com">HeatherMeeker.com</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Heather Meeker, General Partner at OSS Capital, joins me to discuss the legal elements of open source, including options for licensing and business structure.</p><p>In this episode, Heather and I explore the intersection of law and open source by reviewing licensing options, challenges, and common mistakes startups make early on. We also get into less common licensing and business models and what might be in store for the future of licensing in open source.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Heather introduces herself and reviews her background in open source (0:50)</li><li>Legal issues startups can run into early on (2:02)</li><li>Common licensing paradigms in open source (6:00)</li><li>Less common licensing options (10:40)</li><li>The model Heather would use if she were starting a new business (15:21)</li><li>How the challenges commercial open source startups face are different from those proprietary software companies face (16:58)</li><li>Heather shares her idea of the number one mistake new startups make (26:37)</li><li>Heather shares her thoughts on the future of open source startups (27:28)</li></ul><p><br><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Heather</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/heathermeeker/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/heathermeeker/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/HeatherMeeker4">@HeatherMeeker4</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://oss.capital/">https://oss.capital/</a></li><li>Website: <a href="http://HeatherMeeker.com">HeatherMeeker.com</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 01 Feb 2023 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/bace8502/11fd1f31.mp3" length="48864764" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1957</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Heather Meeker, General Partner at OSS Capital, joins me to discuss the legal elements of open source, including options for licensing and business structure.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Heather Meeker, General Partner at OSS Capital, joins me to discuss the legal elements of open source, including options for licensing and business structure.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Exploring the World of Product-Led Growth with Sam Richard</title>
      <itunes:episode>135</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>135</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Exploring the World of Product-Led Growth with Sam Richard</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">3ef34e5d-1f77-4c8c-b7b4-ff4a015c1dde</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/48ac70c9</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Sam Richard, Head of Growth at ngrok, joins me to talk about product-led growth in open source and ngrok’s history in open source.</p><p>In this episode, Sam and I discuss product-led growth - how it differs from a traditional sales model, what metrics founders can use to track their development, and how to find your activation metrics. We also review what kind of companies would benefit from a product-led approach, who might not, and how companies can avoid mistakes others have made in implementing the strategy. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Sam introduces herself and shares her definition of product-led growth (0:45)</li><li>Traditional metrics vs. product-led metrics (8:53)</li><li>How product-led growth evolves once a company moves past the early stages (13:12)</li><li>What kind of companies or founders product led growth is appropriate for (14:54)</li><li>Sam and Emily explore questions about products that buyers love, but users hate (19:53)</li><li>Moving from product-led growth to a sales-led model (21:15)</li><li>Sam reviews ngrok’s moves from open source to closed source and back (23:57)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Sam</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/sam-crowell-richard/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/sam-crowell-richard/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/SamCRichard">https://twitter.com/SamCRichard</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://ngrok.com/">https://ngrok.com/</a></li><li><a href="http://productbenchmarks.com">productbenchmarks.com</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Sam Richard, Head of Growth at ngrok, joins me to talk about product-led growth in open source and ngrok’s history in open source.</p><p>In this episode, Sam and I discuss product-led growth - how it differs from a traditional sales model, what metrics founders can use to track their development, and how to find your activation metrics. We also review what kind of companies would benefit from a product-led approach, who might not, and how companies can avoid mistakes others have made in implementing the strategy. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Sam introduces herself and shares her definition of product-led growth (0:45)</li><li>Traditional metrics vs. product-led metrics (8:53)</li><li>How product-led growth evolves once a company moves past the early stages (13:12)</li><li>What kind of companies or founders product led growth is appropriate for (14:54)</li><li>Sam and Emily explore questions about products that buyers love, but users hate (19:53)</li><li>Moving from product-led growth to a sales-led model (21:15)</li><li>Sam reviews ngrok’s moves from open source to closed source and back (23:57)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Sam</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/sam-crowell-richard/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/sam-crowell-richard/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/SamCRichard">https://twitter.com/SamCRichard</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://ngrok.com/">https://ngrok.com/</a></li><li><a href="http://productbenchmarks.com">productbenchmarks.com</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 25 Jan 2023 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/48ac70c9/d0c34222.mp3" length="41575940" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1653</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Sam Richard, Head of Growth at ngrok, joins me to talk about product-led growth in open source and ngrok’s history in open source.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Sam Richard, Head of Growth at ngrok, joins me to talk about product-led growth in open source and ngrok’s history in open source.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Bridging The Gaps Between Policy, Community, and Commerce in Open Source with Amanda Brock</title>
      <itunes:episode>134</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>134</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Bridging The Gaps Between Policy, Community, and Commerce in Open Source with Amanda Brock</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">7110a859-4869-4cb8-b64a-94a501267628</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/c6a131ac</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p> </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p> </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 18 Jan 2023 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/c6a131ac/8bbd60cb.mp3" length="43269452" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1723</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Amanda Brock, CEO of Open UK, joins me to chat about the State of Open Con and bringing varying roles and viewpoints into the conversation around the future of open source. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Amanda Brock, CEO of Open UK, joins me to chat about the State of Open Con and bringing varying roles and viewpoints into the conversation around the future of open source. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Using Metrics to Keep Your Open Source Community Healthy with Georg Link</title>
      <itunes:episode>133</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>133</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Using Metrics to Keep Your Open Source Community Healthy with Georg Link</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">fdcb44ad-67c9-421c-a88b-8759ebe81f97</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/06fde050</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Georg Link, Director of Sales at <a href="https://bitergia.com/">Bitergia</a>, joins me to chat about how open source startups can use metrics to keep their communities healthy, why he approaches his role as an educator first, and how a company’s culture impacts the way they sell for open source. </p><p>In this episode, Georg and I discuss how he started the CHAOSS (Community Health Analysis Open Source Software) project to evaluate the health of open source communities and how to use metrics to gain that understanding. We also get some insight into Georg’s passion for open source, his views on sales, and Bitergia’s company culture.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Georg introduces himself and <a href="https://bitergia.com/">Bitergia</a> (0:48)</li><li>What metrics are helpful for an open source startup to track? (4:33)</li><li>How Georg approaches his role as Director of Sales primarily as an educator (11:48)</li><li>How Biturgia’s company culture impacts the way they sell for open source (17:41)</li><li>Ideal use cases for open source metrics (24:15)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Georg</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/georglink/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/georglink/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/georglink">@georglink</a></li><li>Email: georglink@bitergia.com</li><li>Company: <a href="https://bitergia.com/">https://bitergia.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Georg Link, Director of Sales at <a href="https://bitergia.com/">Bitergia</a>, joins me to chat about how open source startups can use metrics to keep their communities healthy, why he approaches his role as an educator first, and how a company’s culture impacts the way they sell for open source. </p><p>In this episode, Georg and I discuss how he started the CHAOSS (Community Health Analysis Open Source Software) project to evaluate the health of open source communities and how to use metrics to gain that understanding. We also get some insight into Georg’s passion for open source, his views on sales, and Bitergia’s company culture.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Georg introduces himself and <a href="https://bitergia.com/">Bitergia</a> (0:48)</li><li>What metrics are helpful for an open source startup to track? (4:33)</li><li>How Georg approaches his role as Director of Sales primarily as an educator (11:48)</li><li>How Biturgia’s company culture impacts the way they sell for open source (17:41)</li><li>Ideal use cases for open source metrics (24:15)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Georg</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/georglink/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/georglink/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/georglink">@georglink</a></li><li>Email: georglink@bitergia.com</li><li>Company: <a href="https://bitergia.com/">https://bitergia.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 11 Jan 2023 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/06fde050/877c0372.mp3" length="45355662" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1810</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Georg Link, Director of Sales at Bitergia, joins me to chat about how open source startups can use metrics to keep their communities healthy, why he approaches his role as an educator first, and how a company’s culture impacts the way they sell for open source. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Georg Link, Director of Sales at Bitergia, joins me to chat about how open source startups can use metrics to keep their communities healthy, why he approaches his role as an educator first, and how a company’s culture impacts the way they sell for open s</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Reaping the Benefits of Community-Led Growth with Jonathan Reimer</title>
      <itunes:episode>132</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>132</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Reaping the Benefits of Community-Led Growth with Jonathan Reimer</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">e4b88134-96ca-4e8e-87b9-b0496150f064</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/67ff59b6</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Jonathan Reimer, CEO &amp; Co-Founder at <a href="http://Crowd.dev">Crowd.dev</a>, joins me to chat about community-led growth and cultivating a community around an open source startup.</p><p>In this episode, Jonathan and I discuss the differences between community-led growth and product-led growth, review the meaning of community, and explore the challenges of building a community around an open source startup. We also get into how community-led growth can benefit a company, the biggest mistakes startups make around community building, and the origins and operations of Jonathan’s company, <a href="http://Crowd.dev">Crowd.dev</a>.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Jonathan introduces himself, and his definition of community-led growth (0:45)</li><li>The motivation behind community-led growth strategies (3:04)</li><li>Gauging the health of a community (8:14)</li><li>The origins of <a href="http://Crowd.dev">Crowd.dev</a> and how it works to make community building easier (12:47)</li><li>Common pain points in community building and how to keep cultivating a healthy one (16:17)</li><li>Jonathan’s path to starting his own company (18:08)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Jonathan</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/jonathimer/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/jonathimer/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/jonathimer">https://twitter.com/jonathimer</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.crowd.dev/">https://www.crowd.dev/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Jonathan Reimer, CEO &amp; Co-Founder at <a href="http://Crowd.dev">Crowd.dev</a>, joins me to chat about community-led growth and cultivating a community around an open source startup.</p><p>In this episode, Jonathan and I discuss the differences between community-led growth and product-led growth, review the meaning of community, and explore the challenges of building a community around an open source startup. We also get into how community-led growth can benefit a company, the biggest mistakes startups make around community building, and the origins and operations of Jonathan’s company, <a href="http://Crowd.dev">Crowd.dev</a>.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Jonathan introduces himself, and his definition of community-led growth (0:45)</li><li>The motivation behind community-led growth strategies (3:04)</li><li>Gauging the health of a community (8:14)</li><li>The origins of <a href="http://Crowd.dev">Crowd.dev</a> and how it works to make community building easier (12:47)</li><li>Common pain points in community building and how to keep cultivating a healthy one (16:17)</li><li>Jonathan’s path to starting his own company (18:08)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Jonathan</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/jonathimer/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/jonathimer/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/jonathimer">https://twitter.com/jonathimer</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.crowd.dev/">https://www.crowd.dev/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 04 Jan 2023 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/67ff59b6/5a15ab94.mp3" length="35164414" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1385</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Jonathan Reimer, CEO &amp;amp; Co-Founder at Crowd.dev, joins me to chat about community-led growth and cultivating a community around an open source startup.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Jonathan Reimer, CEO &amp;amp; Co-Founder at Crowd.dev, joins me to chat about community-led growth and cultivating a community around an open source startup.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Verbs Not Nouns: Writing Effective Documentation with Brian MacDonald</title>
      <itunes:episode>131</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>131</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Verbs Not Nouns: Writing Effective Documentation with Brian MacDonald</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">39d8e0db-23b2-4816-8553-f5a887ef8f25</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/8c680c4e</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Brian MacDonald, Manager of Technical Editing at <a href="https://www.digitalocean.com/">DigitalOcean</a> joins me to discuss the importance of writing efficient documentation for any product.</p><p>In this episode, Brian and I chat about his talk at All Things Open entitled <a href="https://archive.org/details/verbs-not-nouns-ato-2022">Verbs Not Nouns</a> and covering the importance of writing documentation that instructs your users on how to use your product to solve the problem it intends to solve for them. We also cover common mistakes in writing documentation and tips for ensuring yours is effective. Listen to hear Brian's advice and resources to improve your documentation. </p><p><br>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Brian introduces himself and his role at DigitalOcean (0:47)</li><li>Why does documentation matter? (3:29)</li><li>The most common mistake people make with documentation (7:07)</li><li>Why are docs frequently neglected? (11:37)</li><li>Who should write the docs? (15:47)</li><li>How to ensure your docs are efficient (20:21)</li><li>When should you start writing your documentation? (24:32)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Brian</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/macdonaldeditorial/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/macdonaldeditorial/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/bmac_editor">https://twitter.com/bmac_editor</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.digitalocean.com/">https://www.digitalocean.com/</a></li><li>Resources: <ul><li>Verbs Not Nouns Slides: <a href="https://archive.org/details/verbs-not-nouns-ato-2022">https://archive.org/details/verbs-not-nouns-ato-2022</a></li><li>Write The Docs Community: <a href="https://www.writethedocs.org/">https://www.writethedocs.org/</a></li></ul></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Brian MacDonald, Manager of Technical Editing at <a href="https://www.digitalocean.com/">DigitalOcean</a> joins me to discuss the importance of writing efficient documentation for any product.</p><p>In this episode, Brian and I chat about his talk at All Things Open entitled <a href="https://archive.org/details/verbs-not-nouns-ato-2022">Verbs Not Nouns</a> and covering the importance of writing documentation that instructs your users on how to use your product to solve the problem it intends to solve for them. We also cover common mistakes in writing documentation and tips for ensuring yours is effective. Listen to hear Brian's advice and resources to improve your documentation. </p><p><br>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Brian introduces himself and his role at DigitalOcean (0:47)</li><li>Why does documentation matter? (3:29)</li><li>The most common mistake people make with documentation (7:07)</li><li>Why are docs frequently neglected? (11:37)</li><li>Who should write the docs? (15:47)</li><li>How to ensure your docs are efficient (20:21)</li><li>When should you start writing your documentation? (24:32)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Brian</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/macdonaldeditorial/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/macdonaldeditorial/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/bmac_editor">https://twitter.com/bmac_editor</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.digitalocean.com/">https://www.digitalocean.com/</a></li><li>Resources: <ul><li>Verbs Not Nouns Slides: <a href="https://archive.org/details/verbs-not-nouns-ato-2022">https://archive.org/details/verbs-not-nouns-ato-2022</a></li><li>Write The Docs Community: <a href="https://www.writethedocs.org/">https://www.writethedocs.org/</a></li></ul></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 28 Dec 2022 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/8c680c4e/88aaba9d.mp3" length="43647343" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1739</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Brian MacDonald, Manager of Technical Editing at DigitalOcean joins me to discuss the importance of writing efficient documentation for any product.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Brian MacDonald, Manager of Technical Editing at DigitalOcean joins me to discuss the importance of writing efficient documentation for any product.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Developing Commercial Open Source Companies with Joseph Jacks</title>
      <itunes:episode>130</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>130</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Developing Commercial Open Source Companies with Joseph Jacks</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">a0e84b4b-c4a1-49c7-b610-c3011be5e17c</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/3cc0f6fc</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Joseph Jacks joins me to share his enthusiasm for Open Source and what he calls Commercial Open Source Companies, how the idea of Open Source is changing with new technologies, and what that means for the definition of Open Source.</p><p>In this episode, Joseph gets specific about the definition of Open Source and new technologies building on the original concept while sharing his excitement about the developments in and around the Open Source community. We also discuss the pros and cons of building an Open Source company and his philosophy on investing in Open Source Startups.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Joseph introduces himself and discusses his background and how he started OSS Capital (0:48)</li><li>How open source is beneficial and critical to any business (6:12)</li><li>The origins and definition of open source and how to differentiate new technologies that expand on the concept (7:58)</li><li>What most people think of when they say "Open Source Company" and Joseph's suggestion for a more accurate name (11:31)</li><li>Why Commercial Open Source Companies are awesome (13:21)</li><li>The challenges of building a Commercial Open Source Company (17:21)</li><li>The importance of differentiating between your users and your customers (19:57)</li><li>Freemium vs. Open Source (22:04)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Joseph </p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/josephjacks/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/josephjacks/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/JosephJacks_">https://twitter.com/JosephJacks_</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://oss.capital/">https://oss.capital/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Joseph Jacks joins me to share his enthusiasm for Open Source and what he calls Commercial Open Source Companies, how the idea of Open Source is changing with new technologies, and what that means for the definition of Open Source.</p><p>In this episode, Joseph gets specific about the definition of Open Source and new technologies building on the original concept while sharing his excitement about the developments in and around the Open Source community. We also discuss the pros and cons of building an Open Source company and his philosophy on investing in Open Source Startups.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Joseph introduces himself and discusses his background and how he started OSS Capital (0:48)</li><li>How open source is beneficial and critical to any business (6:12)</li><li>The origins and definition of open source and how to differentiate new technologies that expand on the concept (7:58)</li><li>What most people think of when they say "Open Source Company" and Joseph's suggestion for a more accurate name (11:31)</li><li>Why Commercial Open Source Companies are awesome (13:21)</li><li>The challenges of building a Commercial Open Source Company (17:21)</li><li>The importance of differentiating between your users and your customers (19:57)</li><li>Freemium vs. Open Source (22:04)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Joseph </p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/josephjacks/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/josephjacks/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/JosephJacks_">https://twitter.com/JosephJacks_</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://oss.capital/">https://oss.capital/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 21 Dec 2022 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/3cc0f6fc/127fef01.mp3" length="47890155" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1916</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Joseph Jacks joins me to share his enthusiasm for Open Source and what he calls Commercial Open Source Companies, how the idea of Open Source is changing with new technologies, and what that means for the definition of Open Source.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Joseph Jacks joins me to share his enthusiasm for Open Source and what he calls Commercial Open Source Companies, how the idea of Open Source is changing with new technologies, and what that means for the definition of Open Source.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Investing in The Next Generation of Developers</title>
      <itunes:episode>129</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>129</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Investing in The Next Generation of Developers</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">c2df7b34-acce-45f8-8a34-81a94f642bae</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/c59655ea</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Jon Gottfried, Co-founder of <a href="https://mlh.io/">Major League Hacking</a>, joins me to chat about community building, open source as a career accelerator, and how Major League Hacking began.</p><p>In this episode, Jon and I discuss the role of open source in Major League Hacking and the lessons maintainers can learn from new developers and vice versa. Jon also shares his thoughts on community, sharing responsibilities, and tips for ensuring the future of open source. Listen to hear his perspective and learn how Major League Hacking came to be. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Jon introduces himself and Major League Hacking (0:42)</li><li>How Open Source fits into the work MLH does with developers entering the industry (1:44)</li><li>How to be a successful open source contributor (3:20)</li><li>Lessons maintainers can learn from the new developer experience (6:07)</li><li>Jon shares his thoughts on community building (13:06)</li><li>Jon shares his views on meeting in person vs. virtually (15:40)</li><li>Sharing responsibilities in a business vs. an open source project (18:03)</li><li>How contributing to an open source project can accelerate a career trajectory (21:48)</li><li>How Major League Hacking began (24:01)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Jon</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/jonmarkgo/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/jonmarkgo/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/jonmarkgo">https://twitter.com/jonmarkgo</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://mlh.io/">https://mlh.io/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Jon Gottfried, Co-founder of <a href="https://mlh.io/">Major League Hacking</a>, joins me to chat about community building, open source as a career accelerator, and how Major League Hacking began.</p><p>In this episode, Jon and I discuss the role of open source in Major League Hacking and the lessons maintainers can learn from new developers and vice versa. Jon also shares his thoughts on community, sharing responsibilities, and tips for ensuring the future of open source. Listen to hear his perspective and learn how Major League Hacking came to be. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Jon introduces himself and Major League Hacking (0:42)</li><li>How Open Source fits into the work MLH does with developers entering the industry (1:44)</li><li>How to be a successful open source contributor (3:20)</li><li>Lessons maintainers can learn from the new developer experience (6:07)</li><li>Jon shares his thoughts on community building (13:06)</li><li>Jon shares his views on meeting in person vs. virtually (15:40)</li><li>Sharing responsibilities in a business vs. an open source project (18:03)</li><li>How contributing to an open source project can accelerate a career trajectory (21:48)</li><li>How Major League Hacking began (24:01)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Jon</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/jonmarkgo/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/jonmarkgo/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/jonmarkgo">https://twitter.com/jonmarkgo</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://mlh.io/">https://mlh.io/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 14 Dec 2022 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/c59655ea/d24508ec.mp3" length="42539016" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1693</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Jon Gottfried, Co-founder of Major League Hacking, joins me to chat about community building, open source as a career accelerator, and how Major League Hacking began.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Jon Gottfried, Co-founder of Major League Hacking, joins me to chat about community building, open source as a career accelerator, and how Major League Hacking began.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Telling Fair Stories with a Full Perspective on Open Source with Brian Douglas</title>
      <itunes:episode>128</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>128</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Telling Fair Stories with a Full Perspective on Open Source with Brian Douglas</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">a1b1b6f8-478d-45da-9de2-c8ae63e7e116</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/372ce5dc</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Brian Douglas, CEO of OpenSauced, joins me to discuss insights - how they’ve been provided in the past, how OpenSauced is different, and how he hopes to contribute to the future of open source. </p><p>In this episode, Brian and I explore the origins and future of OpenSauced, including his hopes for how providing different insights can help contributors find worthy projects and maintainers find worthy contributors to hire. We also discuss the importance of community and telling fairer and fuller stories of open source projects. Listen to hear Brian’s unique perspective on the business of open source.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Brian introduces himself and OpenSauced (0:45)</li><li>Brian describes his ideal OpenSauced users (4:42)</li><li>How OpenSauced began and why Brian chose and stuck with the pizza theme (8:29)</li><li>Why OpenSauced focuses on the contributor first (15:01)</li><li>Using data to tell the full story of an open source project (18:44)</li><li>Brian describes his target company size and use case (20:42)</li><li>The value of the open source community (22:38)</li><li>What companies get wrong when working with open source (24:42)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Brian</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/brianldouglas">https://www.linkedin.com/in/brianldouglas</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/bdougieYO">https://twitter.com/bdougieYO</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://opensauced.pizza/">https://opensauced.pizza/</a></li><li>The Secret Sauce Podcast<ul><li>Audio: <a href="https://thesecretsauce.transistor.fm/">https://thesecretsauce.transistor.fm/</a></li><li>YouTube: <a href="https://youtube.com/playlist?list=PLHyZ0Wz_A44VR4BXl_JOWSecQeWcZ-kS3">https://youtube.com/playlist?list=PLHyZ0Wz_A44VR4BXl_JOWSecQeWcZ-kS3</a></li></ul></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Brian Douglas, CEO of OpenSauced, joins me to discuss insights - how they’ve been provided in the past, how OpenSauced is different, and how he hopes to contribute to the future of open source. </p><p>In this episode, Brian and I explore the origins and future of OpenSauced, including his hopes for how providing different insights can help contributors find worthy projects and maintainers find worthy contributors to hire. We also discuss the importance of community and telling fairer and fuller stories of open source projects. Listen to hear Brian’s unique perspective on the business of open source.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Brian introduces himself and OpenSauced (0:45)</li><li>Brian describes his ideal OpenSauced users (4:42)</li><li>How OpenSauced began and why Brian chose and stuck with the pizza theme (8:29)</li><li>Why OpenSauced focuses on the contributor first (15:01)</li><li>Using data to tell the full story of an open source project (18:44)</li><li>Brian describes his target company size and use case (20:42)</li><li>The value of the open source community (22:38)</li><li>What companies get wrong when working with open source (24:42)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Brian</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/brianldouglas">https://www.linkedin.com/in/brianldouglas</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/bdougieYO">https://twitter.com/bdougieYO</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://opensauced.pizza/">https://opensauced.pizza/</a></li><li>The Secret Sauce Podcast<ul><li>Audio: <a href="https://thesecretsauce.transistor.fm/">https://thesecretsauce.transistor.fm/</a></li><li>YouTube: <a href="https://youtube.com/playlist?list=PLHyZ0Wz_A44VR4BXl_JOWSecQeWcZ-kS3">https://youtube.com/playlist?list=PLHyZ0Wz_A44VR4BXl_JOWSecQeWcZ-kS3</a></li></ul></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 07 Dec 2022 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/372ce5dc/021e859f.mp3" length="46904196" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1875</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Brian Douglas, CEO of OpenSauced, joins me to discuss insights - how they’ve been provided in the past, how OpenSauced is different, and how he hopes to contribute to the future of open source. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Brian Douglas, CEO of OpenSauced, joins me to discuss insights - how they’ve been provided in the past, how OpenSauced is different, and how he hopes to contribute to the future of open source. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Building a Healthy Company with Matt Butcher of Fermyon</title>
      <itunes:episode>127</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>127</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Building a Healthy Company with Matt Butcher of Fermyon</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">51328fae-f779-4610-8736-e0453645e4ed</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/d522683c</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Matt Butcher, CEO of Fermyon, joins me to discuss the ethics of open source and how to keep your company's health in mind when growing your business.</p><p><br>In this episode, Matt and I dig into the ethics of open source and how his background in philosophy influences the decisions he makes as a CEO. We also cover how you can intentionally create and maintain your company values and culture. Finally, Matt reveals his top mistakes as a CEO and how he's overcome them to improve his business. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Matt introduces himself and his background in open source and philosophy (0:47)</li><li>How Matt's background in philosophy changed his perspective on the ethics of open source (3:14)</li><li>How that background influences how they began and continue to run Fermyon (8:58)</li><li>How to establish values for a new company and stick to them (15:16)</li><li>Why Matt started Fermyon when he did and with the focus on web assembly (21:59)</li><li>Matt reviews the top mistakes he made as a founder and how addressing them has helped him improve the company culture (26:44)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Matt</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mattbutcher/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/mattbutcher/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/technosophos">https://twitter.com/technosophos</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.fermyon.com/">https://www.fermyon.com/</a></li><li>Fermyon Discord: <a href="https://discord.com/invite/AAFNfS7NGf">https://discord.com/invite/AAFNfS7NGf</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Matt Butcher, CEO of Fermyon, joins me to discuss the ethics of open source and how to keep your company's health in mind when growing your business.</p><p><br>In this episode, Matt and I dig into the ethics of open source and how his background in philosophy influences the decisions he makes as a CEO. We also cover how you can intentionally create and maintain your company values and culture. Finally, Matt reveals his top mistakes as a CEO and how he's overcome them to improve his business. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Matt introduces himself and his background in open source and philosophy (0:47)</li><li>How Matt's background in philosophy changed his perspective on the ethics of open source (3:14)</li><li>How that background influences how they began and continue to run Fermyon (8:58)</li><li>How to establish values for a new company and stick to them (15:16)</li><li>Why Matt started Fermyon when he did and with the focus on web assembly (21:59)</li><li>Matt reviews the top mistakes he made as a founder and how addressing them has helped him improve the company culture (26:44)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Matt</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mattbutcher/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/mattbutcher/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/technosophos">https://twitter.com/technosophos</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.fermyon.com/">https://www.fermyon.com/</a></li><li>Fermyon Discord: <a href="https://discord.com/invite/AAFNfS7NGf">https://discord.com/invite/AAFNfS7NGf</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 30 Nov 2022 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/d522683c/c83855cf.mp3" length="54181907" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2178</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Matt Butcher, CEO of Fermyon, joins me to discuss the ethics of open source and how to keep your company's health in mind when growing your business.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Matt Butcher, CEO of Fermyon, joins me to discuss the ethics of open source and how to keep your company's health in mind when growing your business.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>The Trifecta of a Successful Startup </title>
      <itunes:episode>126</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>126</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>The Trifecta of a Successful Startup </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">b3f119bd-3852-4374-84e2-09089ace6bb7</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/83770cc9</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Henrik Rosendahl, CEO of <a href="https://www.spiio.com/">Spiio</a>, joins me to chat about his experience as an entrepreneur and what he’s learned about building successful companies. </p><p><br></p><p>In this episode, Henrik and I cover the many aspects of building startups. From the top mistakes new founders make to the best way to monetize your open source business. Listen to learn Henrik’s thoughts on entrepreneurship, including monetization, the three things you need to build a successful startup, and whether or not founding a startup should always feel like a struggle. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Henrik introduces himself and gives a brief overview of his experience as an entrepreneur. (0:43)</li><li>The top mistakes entrepreneurs make building their first startup. (2:25)</li><li>Monetization and valuable feedback from customers (9:05)</li><li>How the relationship between the user and the buyer impacts startups. (14:27)</li><li>Focusing on enterprise vs. a mid-market segment. (16:57)</li><li>What’s next for Henrik (19:34)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Henrik</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/hrosendahl">https://www.linkedin.com/in/hrosendahl</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/hrosendahl">https://twitter.com/hrosendahl</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.spiio.com/">https://www.spiio.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Henrik Rosendahl, CEO of <a href="https://www.spiio.com/">Spiio</a>, joins me to chat about his experience as an entrepreneur and what he’s learned about building successful companies. </p><p><br></p><p>In this episode, Henrik and I cover the many aspects of building startups. From the top mistakes new founders make to the best way to monetize your open source business. Listen to learn Henrik’s thoughts on entrepreneurship, including monetization, the three things you need to build a successful startup, and whether or not founding a startup should always feel like a struggle. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Henrik introduces himself and gives a brief overview of his experience as an entrepreneur. (0:43)</li><li>The top mistakes entrepreneurs make building their first startup. (2:25)</li><li>Monetization and valuable feedback from customers (9:05)</li><li>How the relationship between the user and the buyer impacts startups. (14:27)</li><li>Focusing on enterprise vs. a mid-market segment. (16:57)</li><li>What’s next for Henrik (19:34)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Henrik</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/hrosendahl">https://www.linkedin.com/in/hrosendahl</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/hrosendahl">https://twitter.com/hrosendahl</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.spiio.com/">https://www.spiio.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 23 Nov 2022 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/83770cc9/0e5e89ad.mp3" length="36126024" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1426</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Henrik Rosendahl, CEO of Spiio joins me to chat about his experience as an entrepreneur and what he’s learned about building successful companies. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Henrik Rosendahl, CEO of Spiio joins me to chat about his experience as an entrepreneur and what he’s learned about building successful companies. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Open Source is About the Masses with Fabien Pinckaers of Odoo</title>
      <itunes:episode>125</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>125</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Open Source is About the Masses with Fabien Pinckaers of Odoo</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">4b0c1744-a058-4247-a492-a2c0fa785d1c</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/407c2f84</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I’m talking with Fabian Pinckaers, CEO and Founder of <a href="https://www.odoo.com/">Odoo</a>, a suite of business apps to manage all of a business’s activities, about his passion for open source and knowing how and when to pivot as a start-up.</p><p><br></p><p>In this episode, Fabien and I discuss the highs and lows of running a start-up as he details his history with Odoo. From its inception as a service offering for auction houses to its current state as an open core software vendor with a cloud offering, Odoo has challenged its founder to continue innovating the product and pivoting the business model to find success. Listen in to discover the lessons Fabien has learned in his journey as a founder and CEO.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Fabien introduces himself and explains how his passion for open source led him to start <a href="https://www.odoo.com/">Odoo</a> (0:49)</li><li>Why Fabien agrees with other founders that open source is a development model, not a business model (5:09)</li><li>How to keep going forward when your business is struggling. (9:53)</li><li>Why Fabien believes that “product is everything,” and how that philosophy relates to his passion for open source (10:51)</li><li>“Open source is about the masses” (14:06)</li><li>Odoo’s three pivots (19:47)</li><li>How pivoting to open core has allowed Odoo to contribute even more (24:17)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Fabien</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://be.linkedin.com/in/fpodoo">https://be.linkedin.com/in/fpodoo</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/fpodoo">https://twitter.com/fpodoo</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.odoo.com/">https://www.odoo.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I’m talking with Fabian Pinckaers, CEO and Founder of <a href="https://www.odoo.com/">Odoo</a>, a suite of business apps to manage all of a business’s activities, about his passion for open source and knowing how and when to pivot as a start-up.</p><p><br></p><p>In this episode, Fabien and I discuss the highs and lows of running a start-up as he details his history with Odoo. From its inception as a service offering for auction houses to its current state as an open core software vendor with a cloud offering, Odoo has challenged its founder to continue innovating the product and pivoting the business model to find success. Listen in to discover the lessons Fabien has learned in his journey as a founder and CEO.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Fabien introduces himself and explains how his passion for open source led him to start <a href="https://www.odoo.com/">Odoo</a> (0:49)</li><li>Why Fabien agrees with other founders that open source is a development model, not a business model (5:09)</li><li>How to keep going forward when your business is struggling. (9:53)</li><li>Why Fabien believes that “product is everything,” and how that philosophy relates to his passion for open source (10:51)</li><li>“Open source is about the masses” (14:06)</li><li>Odoo’s three pivots (19:47)</li><li>How pivoting to open core has allowed Odoo to contribute even more (24:17)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Fabien</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://be.linkedin.com/in/fpodoo">https://be.linkedin.com/in/fpodoo</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/fpodoo">https://twitter.com/fpodoo</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.odoo.com/">https://www.odoo.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 16 Nov 2022 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/407c2f84/1e0195cf.mp3" length="40012566" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1588</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Today I’m talking with Fabian Pinckaers, CEO and Founder of Odoo, a suite of business apps to manage all of a business’s activities, about his passion for open source and knowing how and when to pivot as a start-up.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today I’m talking with Fabian Pinckaers, CEO and Founder of Odoo, a suite of business apps to manage all of a business’s activities, about his passion for open source and knowing how and when to pivot as a start-up.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How Medusa is Becoming More Than an Open Source Shopify Alternative with Co-Founder Nicklas Gellner</title>
      <itunes:episode>124</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>124</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>How Medusa is Becoming More Than an Open Source Shopify Alternative with Co-Founder Nicklas Gellner</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">d3c43def-b535-4a87-9033-2518eb34529d</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/a041ca82</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I’m chatting with Nicklas Gellner, co-founder  of <a href="https://medusajs.com/">Medusa</a>, “the open source Shopify alternative” about why he started the company, why open source, and his vision for the future.</p><p>In this episode, Nicklas details the original inspiration for Medusa as well as why they chose the name. We also review the switch from an agency to a product focused company.  When I mention the buzz around a relatively young company like Medusa, Nicklas emphasizes Medusa’s developer-first approach and explains how that encourages community development.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Nicklas introduces himself and <a href="https://medusajs.com/">Medusa</a> (0:46)</li><li>Nicklas explains the original inspiration for Medusa’s creation (2:09)</li><li>How Medusa differs from Shopify beyond being open source and its real value for developers (10:48)</li><li>How and why Nicklas switched from and agency to a product focused company with Medusa (14:46)</li><li>The buzz around Medusa (20:44)</li><li>How Medusa’s developer-first approach encourages community development (22:53)</li><li>Nicklas’s vision for Medusa’s growth in the coming years. (24:09)</li><li>How they decided on the name “Medusa” (26:17)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Nicklas</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://dk.linkedin.com/in/ngellner">https://dk.linkedin.com/in/ngellner</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/nicklasgellner?lang=en">https://twitter.com/nicklasgellner?lang=en</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://medusajs.com/">https://medusajs.com/</a></li><li>Medusa Community Discord: <a href="https://discord.com/invite/medusajs">https://discord.com/invite/medusajs</a></li></ul><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I’m chatting with Nicklas Gellner, co-founder  of <a href="https://medusajs.com/">Medusa</a>, “the open source Shopify alternative” about why he started the company, why open source, and his vision for the future.</p><p>In this episode, Nicklas details the original inspiration for Medusa as well as why they chose the name. We also review the switch from an agency to a product focused company.  When I mention the buzz around a relatively young company like Medusa, Nicklas emphasizes Medusa’s developer-first approach and explains how that encourages community development.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Nicklas introduces himself and <a href="https://medusajs.com/">Medusa</a> (0:46)</li><li>Nicklas explains the original inspiration for Medusa’s creation (2:09)</li><li>How Medusa differs from Shopify beyond being open source and its real value for developers (10:48)</li><li>How and why Nicklas switched from and agency to a product focused company with Medusa (14:46)</li><li>The buzz around Medusa (20:44)</li><li>How Medusa’s developer-first approach encourages community development (22:53)</li><li>Nicklas’s vision for Medusa’s growth in the coming years. (24:09)</li><li>How they decided on the name “Medusa” (26:17)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Nicklas</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://dk.linkedin.com/in/ngellner">https://dk.linkedin.com/in/ngellner</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/nicklasgellner?lang=en">https://twitter.com/nicklasgellner?lang=en</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://medusajs.com/">https://medusajs.com/</a></li><li>Medusa Community Discord: <a href="https://discord.com/invite/medusajs">https://discord.com/invite/medusajs</a></li></ul><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 09 Nov 2022 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/a041ca82/8506d746.mp3" length="48273764" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1932</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Today I’m chatting with Nicklas Gellner, co-founder of Medusa, “the open source Shopify alternative” about why he started the company, why open source, and his vision for the future.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today I’m chatting with Nicklas Gellner, co-founder of Medusa, “the open source Shopify alternative” about why he started the company, why open source, and his vision for the future.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Relating Tech to People through Technical Marketing with Michael Chenetz</title>
      <itunes:episode>123</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>123</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Relating Tech to People through Technical Marketing with Michael Chenetz</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">dc829215-8932-4ced-9005-0316052654a7</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/0c5ca2ad</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Michael Chenetz, Head of Technical Marketing at Portainer.io, joins me to discuss why technical marketing is so much more effective for open source companies and also why it’s a hard role to fill. </p><p>In this episode, Michael and I discuss his unique background that lead him to technical marketing in the open source space, and the importance of relating tech to people. Michael explains the differences between traditional marketing and technical marketing, as well as the impact technical marketing has on a company’s trajectory. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Michael introduces himself and his role at <a href="http://Portainer.io">Portainer.io</a> (00:52)</li><li>The difference in perception and practice for technical marketing versus traditional marketing (02:39)</li><li>Michael’s path to becoming a technical marketer (05:59)</li><li>The open source behind Portainer and Michael’s learnings marketing an open source company (08:43)</li><li>What Michael sees as the relationship between cloud native and open source (13:06)</li><li>The different impacts technical marketing can have based on company size (18:44)</li><li>Some of the biggest mistakes founders of open source companies make, according to Michael (21:36)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Michael</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mchenetz/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/mchenetz/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/mchenetz">https://twitter.com/mchenetz</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://portainer.io">https://portainer.io</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Michael Chenetz, Head of Technical Marketing at Portainer.io, joins me to discuss why technical marketing is so much more effective for open source companies and also why it’s a hard role to fill. </p><p>In this episode, Michael and I discuss his unique background that lead him to technical marketing in the open source space, and the importance of relating tech to people. Michael explains the differences between traditional marketing and technical marketing, as well as the impact technical marketing has on a company’s trajectory. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Michael introduces himself and his role at <a href="http://Portainer.io">Portainer.io</a> (00:52)</li><li>The difference in perception and practice for technical marketing versus traditional marketing (02:39)</li><li>Michael’s path to becoming a technical marketer (05:59)</li><li>The open source behind Portainer and Michael’s learnings marketing an open source company (08:43)</li><li>What Michael sees as the relationship between cloud native and open source (13:06)</li><li>The different impacts technical marketing can have based on company size (18:44)</li><li>Some of the biggest mistakes founders of open source companies make, according to Michael (21:36)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Michael</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mchenetz/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/mchenetz/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/mchenetz">https://twitter.com/mchenetz</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://portainer.io">https://portainer.io</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 02 Nov 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/0c5ca2ad/0904e40a.mp3" length="43588564" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1737</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Michael Chenetz, Head of Technical Marketing at Portainer.io, joins me to discuss why technical marketing is so much more effective for open source companies and also why it’s a hard role to fill. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Michael Chenetz, Head of Technical Marketing at Portainer.io, joins me to discuss why technical marketing is so much more effective for open source companies and also why it’s a hard role to fill. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>The Gratification of Contributing to Open Source with Liz Rice</title>
      <itunes:episode>122</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>122</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>The Gratification of Contributing to Open Source with Liz Rice</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">76d9e49f-6949-4601-b57c-60b32ce5d435</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/41f535b6</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Liz Rice, Chief Open Source Officer at <a href="https://isovalent.com/">Isovalent</a>, joins me to discuss the business model behind Cilium and the enjoyment she has found working in open source. </p><p>In this episode, Liz and I discuss why <a href="https://isovalent.com/">Isovalent</a> decided to donate <a href="http://www.cilium.io">Cilium</a> to CNCF, and the additional decisions behind developing for Cilium open source versus Cilium for Enterprise. Tune into this episode to hear how entrepreneurship taught Liz what she didn’t enjoy doing so she could focus on work she enjoys, and what she finds most rewarding about working in open source.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Liz introduces herself and describes her role as Chief Open Source Officer at Isovalent (00:55)</li><li>Why Isovalent decided to donate Cilium to CNCF (02:11)</li><li>What Liz sees as the relationship between cloud native and open source (07:43)</li><li>Liz’s past experiences as an entrepreneur and how it led her to to where she is now (10:05)</li><li>How Isovalent has evolved and grown into a company with enterprise product offerings (17:17)</li><li>How decisions are made differently when developing the open-source version of Cilium versus the enterprise version (22:12)</li><li>The gratification and value Liz has found working in open source (25:58)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/lizrice">https://www.linkedin.com/in/lizrice</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/lizrice">https://twitter.com/lizrice</a></li><li>Github: <a href="https://github.com/lizrice">https://github.com/lizrice</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://isovalent.com/">https://isovalent.com/</a></li><li>Cilium: <a href="http://www.cilium.io">www.cilium.io</a></li><li>eBPF: <a href="http://www.eBPF.io">www.eBPF.io</a> </li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Liz Rice, Chief Open Source Officer at <a href="https://isovalent.com/">Isovalent</a>, joins me to discuss the business model behind Cilium and the enjoyment she has found working in open source. </p><p>In this episode, Liz and I discuss why <a href="https://isovalent.com/">Isovalent</a> decided to donate <a href="http://www.cilium.io">Cilium</a> to CNCF, and the additional decisions behind developing for Cilium open source versus Cilium for Enterprise. Tune into this episode to hear how entrepreneurship taught Liz what she didn’t enjoy doing so she could focus on work she enjoys, and what she finds most rewarding about working in open source.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Liz introduces herself and describes her role as Chief Open Source Officer at Isovalent (00:55)</li><li>Why Isovalent decided to donate Cilium to CNCF (02:11)</li><li>What Liz sees as the relationship between cloud native and open source (07:43)</li><li>Liz’s past experiences as an entrepreneur and how it led her to to where she is now (10:05)</li><li>How Isovalent has evolved and grown into a company with enterprise product offerings (17:17)</li><li>How decisions are made differently when developing the open-source version of Cilium versus the enterprise version (22:12)</li><li>The gratification and value Liz has found working in open source (25:58)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/lizrice">https://www.linkedin.com/in/lizrice</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/lizrice">https://twitter.com/lizrice</a></li><li>Github: <a href="https://github.com/lizrice">https://github.com/lizrice</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://isovalent.com/">https://isovalent.com/</a></li><li>Cilium: <a href="http://www.cilium.io">www.cilium.io</a></li><li>eBPF: <a href="http://www.eBPF.io">www.eBPF.io</a> </li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 26 Oct 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/41f535b6/1f4bfc8e.mp3" length="43246864" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1723</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Liz Rice, Chief Open Source Officer at Isovalent, joins me to discuss the business model behind Cilium and the enjoyment she has found working in open source. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Liz Rice, Chief Open Source Officer at Isovalent, joins me to discuss the business model behind Cilium and the enjoyment she has found working in open source. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Building Open-Source Strategy for Enterprise Organizations with Andrew Aitken</title>
      <itunes:episode>121</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>121</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Building Open-Source Strategy for Enterprise Organizations with Andrew Aitken</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">87ef7ac2-67c1-4bd5-bf09-e85289a5a8b7</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/06b82a62</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Andrew Aitken, Global Open Source Leader at Wipro, joins me to discuss the benefits and challenges that come with adopting open source as a large-scale enterprise organization. </p><p>In this episode, Andrew and I discuss the three stages of open source maturity from curiosity to full-scale adoption and mastery. Tune into this episode to learn more about the trigger events that cause large-scale enterprises to explore open source, as well as the barriers and legal challenges they must overcome to effectively adopt it, and most importantly - why Andrew feels it’s so important that every large-scale enterprise goes through this process. </p><p><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>Andrew introduces Wipro and explains what it means to be a Global Open Source Leader (00:52)</li><li>The challenges Andrew helps his clients solve in the world of open source (03:16)</li><li>How Andrew sees high-security companies like banks view and approach open source (04:28)</li><li>Do Andrew’s clients view open source software as being more, less, or just as secure as closed source software? (07:41)</li><li>The three different open-source maturity stages Andrew sees at large companies (10:47)</li><li>Why Andrew feels most large enterprises would benefit from reaching full maturation in their open-source strategy (14:52)</li><li>The biggest barriers Andrew sees companies run into when considering moving towards open-source maturity (17:53)</li><li>Is being enterprise-ready truly a requirement for an open-source start-up? (20:52)</li><li>The legalities of adopting open source as a large-scale enterprise (25:24)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/opensourcestrategy/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/opensourcestrategy/</a></li><li>Email: <a href="andrew.aitken@wipro.com">andrew.aitken@wipro.com</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.wipro.com/">https://www.wipro.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Andrew Aitken, Global Open Source Leader at Wipro, joins me to discuss the benefits and challenges that come with adopting open source as a large-scale enterprise organization. </p><p>In this episode, Andrew and I discuss the three stages of open source maturity from curiosity to full-scale adoption and mastery. Tune into this episode to learn more about the trigger events that cause large-scale enterprises to explore open source, as well as the barriers and legal challenges they must overcome to effectively adopt it, and most importantly - why Andrew feels it’s so important that every large-scale enterprise goes through this process. </p><p><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>Andrew introduces Wipro and explains what it means to be a Global Open Source Leader (00:52)</li><li>The challenges Andrew helps his clients solve in the world of open source (03:16)</li><li>How Andrew sees high-security companies like banks view and approach open source (04:28)</li><li>Do Andrew’s clients view open source software as being more, less, or just as secure as closed source software? (07:41)</li><li>The three different open-source maturity stages Andrew sees at large companies (10:47)</li><li>Why Andrew feels most large enterprises would benefit from reaching full maturation in their open-source strategy (14:52)</li><li>The biggest barriers Andrew sees companies run into when considering moving towards open-source maturity (17:53)</li><li>Is being enterprise-ready truly a requirement for an open-source start-up? (20:52)</li><li>The legalities of adopting open source as a large-scale enterprise (25:24)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/opensourcestrategy/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/opensourcestrategy/</a></li><li>Email: <a href="andrew.aitken@wipro.com">andrew.aitken@wipro.com</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.wipro.com/">https://www.wipro.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 19 Oct 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/06b82a62/cbbadea9.mp3" length="47429786" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1897</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Andrew Aitken, Global Open Source Leader at Wipro, joins me to discuss the benefits and challenges that come with adopting open source as a large-scale enterprise organization.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Andrew Aitken, Global Open Source Leader at Wipro, joins me to discuss the benefits and challenges that come with adopting open source as a large-scale enterprise organization.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>The Relationship Between Open Source and Cloud Native with Randy Abernethy</title>
      <itunes:episode>120</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>120</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>The Relationship Between Open Source and Cloud Native with Randy Abernethy</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">572fcced-7813-452f-8632-97abc82c9f7d</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/290a210b</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Randy Abernethy, Managing Director at RX-M, joins me for a chat about the relationship between open source and cloud native.<br> </p><p>In this episode, Randy and I discuss how the clients he works with at RX-M are looking to cloud-native as part of their forward-thinking strategies. Tune into this episode to learn how Randy sees the C-Suite viewing open source, how he sees clients evaluate risk in open-source projects, and his views on the relationship between open source and cloud native. </p><p><br><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>Randy introduces himself and his company, RX-M (00:46)</li><li>Why do companies come to RX-M for help when evaluating and implementing cloud native? (03:44)</li><li>How do RX-M clients approach open source? (9:35)</li><li>What are the C-Suite’s views open source (16:19)</li><li>How Randy’s clients evaluate risk in open-source projects (23:34)</li><li>The role CNCF plays in how companies evaluate and implement cloud-native solutions (30:31)</li><li>Randy’s view on the relationship between open source and cloud native (32:39)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/randyabernethy/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/randyabernethy/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/randyabernethy">@randyabernethy</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://rx-m.com/">www.rx-m.com</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Randy Abernethy, Managing Director at RX-M, joins me for a chat about the relationship between open source and cloud native.<br> </p><p>In this episode, Randy and I discuss how the clients he works with at RX-M are looking to cloud-native as part of their forward-thinking strategies. Tune into this episode to learn how Randy sees the C-Suite viewing open source, how he sees clients evaluate risk in open-source projects, and his views on the relationship between open source and cloud native. </p><p><br><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>Randy introduces himself and his company, RX-M (00:46)</li><li>Why do companies come to RX-M for help when evaluating and implementing cloud native? (03:44)</li><li>How do RX-M clients approach open source? (9:35)</li><li>What are the C-Suite’s views open source (16:19)</li><li>How Randy’s clients evaluate risk in open-source projects (23:34)</li><li>The role CNCF plays in how companies evaluate and implement cloud-native solutions (30:31)</li><li>Randy’s view on the relationship between open source and cloud native (32:39)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/randyabernethy/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/randyabernethy/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/randyabernethy">@randyabernethy</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://rx-m.com/">www.rx-m.com</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 12 Oct 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/290a210b/74c5ec07.mp3" length="56600342" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2279</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Randy Abernethy, Managing Director at RX-M, joins me for a chat about the relationship between open source and cloud native. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Randy Abernethy, Managing Director at RX-M, joins me for a chat about the relationship between open source and cloud native. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Finding Unexpected Product-Market Fit with Ian Tien</title>
      <itunes:episode>119</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>119</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Finding Unexpected Product-Market Fit with Ian Tien</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">dc1bb962-cd3a-4ca2-a832-12bb7b8864c1</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/fedd69bb</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ian Tien, CEO and Co-Founder of Mattermost, joins me to talk about how Mattermost went from being a video game company to an open-source messaging platform that provides collaboration for developers and other mission-critical teams. <br></p><p>In this episode, Ian and I discuss the reality of product-led growth in open-source companies, Ian’s perspective on open source moving towards platform-based solutions, and the advice he would give to other open-source founders.  </p><p><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>Ian introduces himself and the Mattermost open-source project (00:45)</li><li>The use cases Ian sees for Mattermost (05:17)</li><li>Ian takes us through the origin story of Mattermost and how it went from being a video game company to an open-source messaging solution (08:59)</li><li>The role open source played in the success of Mattermost (15:07)</li><li>Ian’s perspective on open source moving towards platform based solutions (20:22)</li><li>Does Ian think the product-led growth model of “If you build it, they will come” is realistic, and how can that mentality lead to success? (27:34)</li><li>The advice Ian would give other open-source founders (28:33)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Ian</p><ul><li>Twitter: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/iantien/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/iantien/</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.mattermost.com">https://www.mattermost.com</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ian Tien, CEO and Co-Founder of Mattermost, joins me to talk about how Mattermost went from being a video game company to an open-source messaging platform that provides collaboration for developers and other mission-critical teams. <br></p><p>In this episode, Ian and I discuss the reality of product-led growth in open-source companies, Ian’s perspective on open source moving towards platform-based solutions, and the advice he would give to other open-source founders.  </p><p><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>Ian introduces himself and the Mattermost open-source project (00:45)</li><li>The use cases Ian sees for Mattermost (05:17)</li><li>Ian takes us through the origin story of Mattermost and how it went from being a video game company to an open-source messaging solution (08:59)</li><li>The role open source played in the success of Mattermost (15:07)</li><li>Ian’s perspective on open source moving towards platform based solutions (20:22)</li><li>Does Ian think the product-led growth model of “If you build it, they will come” is realistic, and how can that mentality lead to success? (27:34)</li><li>The advice Ian would give other open-source founders (28:33)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Ian</p><ul><li>Twitter: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/iantien/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/iantien/</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.mattermost.com">https://www.mattermost.com</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 05 Oct 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/fedd69bb/57edf566.mp3" length="46673384" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1866</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Ian Tien, CEO and Co-Founder of Mattermost, joins me to talk about how Mattermost went from being a video game company to an open-source messaging platform that provides collaboration for developers and other mission-critical teams. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Ian Tien, CEO and Co-Founder of Mattermost, joins me to talk about how Mattermost went from being a video game company to an open-source messaging platform that provides collaboration for developers and other mission-critical teams. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Best Practices for Founding an Open-Source Company with Amanda Brock</title>
      <itunes:episode>118</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>118</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Best Practices for Founding an Open-Source Company with Amanda Brock</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">0db64e06-6a08-4256-967d-e79136616a87</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/f14ea0f8</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Amanda Brock, CEO of Open UK, joins me for an engaging conversation on best practices in founding an open-source company. <br></p><p>In this episode, Amanda and I chat about the various business models available for building a company around open-source technology, the common pitfalls and crossroads open-source founders find themselves facing, and how to do open-source in a way that leads to long-term success and profitability. </p><p><br><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>What is Open UK? (00:40)</li><li>The various business models for building a company around open-source technology (04:09)</li><li>Which business models Amanda feels work best and why (08:07)</li><li>The importance of founders prioritizing open-source communities (14:07)</li><li>How and why to do open-source the right way (17:04)</li><li>What is the true cost of founding an open-source company compared to traditional business models? (26:44)</li><li>Who are you building for, and how do you get to profitability? (30:35)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/amandabrocktech/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/amandabrocktech/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="http://www.twitter.com/amandabrocktech">www.twitter.com/amandabrocktech</a></li><li>Open UK <a href="http://www.twitter.com/openuk_uk">www.twitter.com/openuk_uk</a></li><li>Company: <a href="http://www.openuk.uk">www.openuk.uk</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Amanda Brock, CEO of Open UK, joins me for an engaging conversation on best practices in founding an open-source company. <br></p><p>In this episode, Amanda and I chat about the various business models available for building a company around open-source technology, the common pitfalls and crossroads open-source founders find themselves facing, and how to do open-source in a way that leads to long-term success and profitability. </p><p><br><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>What is Open UK? (00:40)</li><li>The various business models for building a company around open-source technology (04:09)</li><li>Which business models Amanda feels work best and why (08:07)</li><li>The importance of founders prioritizing open-source communities (14:07)</li><li>How and why to do open-source the right way (17:04)</li><li>What is the true cost of founding an open-source company compared to traditional business models? (26:44)</li><li>Who are you building for, and how do you get to profitability? (30:35)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/amandabrocktech/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/amandabrocktech/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="http://www.twitter.com/amandabrocktech">www.twitter.com/amandabrocktech</a></li><li>Open UK <a href="http://www.twitter.com/openuk_uk">www.twitter.com/openuk_uk</a></li><li>Company: <a href="http://www.openuk.uk">www.openuk.uk</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 28 Sep 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/f14ea0f8/3c585aee.mp3" length="50755140" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2036</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Amanda Brock, CEO of Open UK, joins me for an engaging conversation on best practices in founding an open-source company.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Amanda Brock, CEO of Open UK, joins me for an engaging conversation on best practices in founding an open-source company.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>The Open-Source Evolution of Python with Wes McKinney</title>
      <itunes:episode>117</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>117</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>The Open-Source Evolution of Python with Wes McKinney</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">264ad83b-d8e6-4ee6-9c89-9f9f181df08b</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/bc110194</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Wes McKinney, CTO &amp; Co-Founder of Voltron Data, joins me for an in-depth conversation on how his quest to develop Python as an open-source programming language led him to creating the pandas project and founding four companies. </p><p>In this episode, Wes and I dive into his unique background as the founder of the pandas project and he describes his perspective on the early days of Python, his journey into the world of open-source start-ups, and the risks and benefits of paying developers to work on open-source projects. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Wes introduces himself and describes his role (00:46)</li><li>Wes’ role in elevating Python to a mainstream programming language (02:15)</li><li>How working with Python led Wes to co-founding his first two companies (09:01)</li><li>Apache Arrow’s critical role at Voltron Data and their focus on accelerating Arrow adoption (12:52)</li><li>How did the team at Voltron Data decide on an open-source business model? (18:54)</li><li>Wes speaks to the risk that can come from having developers work on an open-source project (22:31)</li><li>Wes’ perspective on the real-world applications and benefits of paying developers to work on open-source projects (27:44)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Wes</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/wesmckinn/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/wesmckinn/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/wesmckinn">https://twitter.com/wesmckinn</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://voltrondata.com/">https://voltrondata.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Wes McKinney, CTO &amp; Co-Founder of Voltron Data, joins me for an in-depth conversation on how his quest to develop Python as an open-source programming language led him to creating the pandas project and founding four companies. </p><p>In this episode, Wes and I dive into his unique background as the founder of the pandas project and he describes his perspective on the early days of Python, his journey into the world of open-source start-ups, and the risks and benefits of paying developers to work on open-source projects. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Wes introduces himself and describes his role (00:46)</li><li>Wes’ role in elevating Python to a mainstream programming language (02:15)</li><li>How working with Python led Wes to co-founding his first two companies (09:01)</li><li>Apache Arrow’s critical role at Voltron Data and their focus on accelerating Arrow adoption (12:52)</li><li>How did the team at Voltron Data decide on an open-source business model? (18:54)</li><li>Wes speaks to the risk that can come from having developers work on an open-source project (22:31)</li><li>Wes’ perspective on the real-world applications and benefits of paying developers to work on open-source projects (27:44)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Wes</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/wesmckinn/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/wesmckinn/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/wesmckinn">https://twitter.com/wesmckinn</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://voltrondata.com/">https://voltrondata.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 21 Sep 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/bc110194/57e2f28a.mp3" length="49888174" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2000</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Wes McKinney, CTO &amp;amp; Co-Founder of Voltron Data, joins me for an in-depth conversation on how his quest to develop Python as an open-source programming language led him to creating the pandas project and founding four companies. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Wes McKinney, CTO &amp;amp; Co-Founder of Voltron Data, joins me for an in-depth conversation on how his quest to develop Python as an open-source programming language led him to creating the pandas project and founding four companies. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Making AI Accessible to All with Braden Hancock</title>
      <itunes:episode>116</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>116</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Making AI Accessible to All with Braden Hancock</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">93549520-ec57-4c12-82d4-cd00529114e3</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/1d67f03e</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Braden Hancock, Co-founder and Head of Technology at Snorkel AI, joins me to talk about his path from academia to start-up co-founder and his vision to make AI more accessible to both traditional and no-code development. </p><p>In this episode, Braden and I explore the journey he and his co-founders took to go from having an interesting idea to forming a company and the strategic business decisions they made along the way, such as why they opted not to use an open-source business model and the educational marketing strategy they’ve adopted. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Braden discusses his role as co-founder of Snorkel AI. (00:25)</li><li>An introduction to Snorkel Flow, Snorkel AI’s data-centric AI development program and the challenges they solve for. (01:49)</li><li>Snorkel AI’s relationship with open source. (06:30)</li><li>Why Snorkel AI decided not to use an open-source business model in order to lower the barrier to entry. (09:01)</li><li>Snorkel AI’s trajectory coming from academia to the world of start-ups. (12:50)</li><li>The unexpected challenges of building Snorkel AI. (17:50)</li><li>Taking an educational approach to the marketing at Snorkel AI. (22:27)</li><li>Braden discusses the meaningful applications of AI as well as where he sees AI being used as more of a buzzword. (27:27)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Braden</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/bradenhancock/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/bradenhancock/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/bradenjhancock">https://twitter.com/bradenjhancock</a></li><li>Company: <a href="http://snorkel.ai">snorkel.ai</a>  </li><li>Snorkel AI Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/SnorkelAI">https://twitter.com/SnorkelAI</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Braden Hancock, Co-founder and Head of Technology at Snorkel AI, joins me to talk about his path from academia to start-up co-founder and his vision to make AI more accessible to both traditional and no-code development. </p><p>In this episode, Braden and I explore the journey he and his co-founders took to go from having an interesting idea to forming a company and the strategic business decisions they made along the way, such as why they opted not to use an open-source business model and the educational marketing strategy they’ve adopted. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Braden discusses his role as co-founder of Snorkel AI. (00:25)</li><li>An introduction to Snorkel Flow, Snorkel AI’s data-centric AI development program and the challenges they solve for. (01:49)</li><li>Snorkel AI’s relationship with open source. (06:30)</li><li>Why Snorkel AI decided not to use an open-source business model in order to lower the barrier to entry. (09:01)</li><li>Snorkel AI’s trajectory coming from academia to the world of start-ups. (12:50)</li><li>The unexpected challenges of building Snorkel AI. (17:50)</li><li>Taking an educational approach to the marketing at Snorkel AI. (22:27)</li><li>Braden discusses the meaningful applications of AI as well as where he sees AI being used as more of a buzzword. (27:27)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Braden</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/bradenhancock/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/bradenhancock/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/bradenjhancock">https://twitter.com/bradenjhancock</a></li><li>Company: <a href="http://snorkel.ai">snorkel.ai</a>  </li><li>Snorkel AI Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/SnorkelAI">https://twitter.com/SnorkelAI</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 14 Sep 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/1d67f03e/7c93f65d.mp3" length="49380367" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1978</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Braden Hancock, Co-founder and Head of Technology at Snorkel AI, joins me to talk about his path from academia to start-up co-founder and his vision to make AI more accessible to both traditional and no-code development. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Braden Hancock, Co-founder and Head of Technology at Snorkel AI, joins me to talk about his path from academia to start-up co-founder and his vision to make AI more accessible to both traditional and no-code development. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Building Open Source Communities at DBT Labs with Anna Filippova</title>
      <itunes:episode>115</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>115</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Building Open Source Communities at DBT Labs with Anna Filippova</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">b94d95b6-9f6e-4778-999e-70061423bd2f</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/0eb27c54</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Anna Filippova, Director of Community &amp; Data at DBT Labs, joins me to chat about the fundamental role community plays in the world of open source and her role helping to create a thriving community. </p><p>In this episode, Anna and I dive into the concept of a community: why it’s essential for open-source development, how to create business value through community, and how to track community health above and beyond user count. </p><p><br>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Why community is mission critical at DBT Labs (02:07)</li><li>The fundamental role open source played in creating DBT Labs as its known today (05:57)</li><li>The approach DBT Labs uses to create business value through community (08:13)</li><li>Anna’s framework for the three buckets of communities (09:42)</li><li>Why measuring and tracking community health is a more valuable metric than just user count (11:34)</li><li>What do people get out of communities, and why are they so valuable?  (19:06)</li><li>Common misconceptions around building communities as a business strategy (24:19)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>Anna<ul><li> LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/annafilippova/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/annafilippova/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/anna_fil">https://twitter.com/anna_fil</a></li></ul></li><li>DBT Labs: <a href="http://getdbt.com/community">getdbt.com/community</a></li><li>Coalesce Conference: <a href="https://coalesce.getdbt.com/">https://coalesce.getdbt.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Anna Filippova, Director of Community &amp; Data at DBT Labs, joins me to chat about the fundamental role community plays in the world of open source and her role helping to create a thriving community. </p><p>In this episode, Anna and I dive into the concept of a community: why it’s essential for open-source development, how to create business value through community, and how to track community health above and beyond user count. </p><p><br>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Why community is mission critical at DBT Labs (02:07)</li><li>The fundamental role open source played in creating DBT Labs as its known today (05:57)</li><li>The approach DBT Labs uses to create business value through community (08:13)</li><li>Anna’s framework for the three buckets of communities (09:42)</li><li>Why measuring and tracking community health is a more valuable metric than just user count (11:34)</li><li>What do people get out of communities, and why are they so valuable?  (19:06)</li><li>Common misconceptions around building communities as a business strategy (24:19)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>Anna<ul><li> LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/annafilippova/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/annafilippova/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/anna_fil">https://twitter.com/anna_fil</a></li></ul></li><li>DBT Labs: <a href="http://getdbt.com/community">getdbt.com/community</a></li><li>Coalesce Conference: <a href="https://coalesce.getdbt.com/">https://coalesce.getdbt.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 07 Sep 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/0eb27c54/03ab3d18.mp3" length="47840167" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1910</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Anna Filippova, Director of Community &amp;amp; Data at DBT Labs, joins me to chat about the fundamental role community plays in the world of open source and her role helping to create a thriving community. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Anna Filippova, Director of Community &amp;amp; Data at DBT Labs, joins me to chat about the fundamental role community plays in the world of open source and her role helping to create a thriving community. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How the Department of Defense Uses Open Source with Rob Slaughter</title>
      <itunes:episode>114</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>114</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>How the Department of Defense Uses Open Source with Rob Slaughter</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">209ec9b3-3f8d-47c9-9bcf-0225c5ea09f2</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/37366c4c</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Open source software at the department of defense (1:36)</li><li>Is there risk associated with using open source software in the department of defense? (5:30)</li><li>Does the public sector contribute to and participate in open source communities? (9:13)</li><li>Rob’s background and work experience (14:25)</li><li>What led Rob to found Defense Unicorns (16:35)</li><li>Rob’s focus on a specific niche in the founding of his company (17:33)</li><li>How working with a fixed budget affects an open source company (19:33)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Rob</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/robertcslaughter/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/robertcslaughter/</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.defenseunicorns.com/">https://www.defenseunicorns.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Open source software at the department of defense (1:36)</li><li>Is there risk associated with using open source software in the department of defense? (5:30)</li><li>Does the public sector contribute to and participate in open source communities? (9:13)</li><li>Rob’s background and work experience (14:25)</li><li>What led Rob to found Defense Unicorns (16:35)</li><li>Rob’s focus on a specific niche in the founding of his company (17:33)</li><li>How working with a fixed budget affects an open source company (19:33)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Rob</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/robertcslaughter/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/robertcslaughter/</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.defenseunicorns.com/">https://www.defenseunicorns.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 31 Aug 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/37366c4c/69b97ba8.mp3" length="43575874" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1735</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Today I’m at the Open Source Summit in Austin and I’m chatting with Rob Slaughter, CEO of Defense Unicorns. He explains the mission of Defense Unicorns, which is making secure software delivery easier for secure infrastructure providers. We talk about the unique use of open source software by the Department of Defense and discuss the government’s relationship with the open source community. Rob shares some of his background and motivation for founding Defense Unicorns, and we wrap up by talking about the importance of finding a niche problem when founding your company and the challenges of working with a fixed budget as an open source company. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today I’m at the Open Source Summit in Austin and I’m chatting with Rob Slaughter, CEO of Defense Unicorns. He explains the mission of Defense Unicorns, which is making secure software delivery easier for secure infrastructure providers. We talk about the</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How Pantacor Fits into the Edge Continuum with Ricardo Mendoza</title>
      <itunes:episode>113</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>113</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>How Pantacor Fits into the Edge Continuum with Ricardo Mendoza</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">1f8f1fa5-fefc-45a1-843b-eb11789c01d6</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/08e791c1</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ricardo Mendoza, founder and CEO of Pantacor, joins me for a chat at the Open Source Summit in Austin. Ricardo shares why he started Pantacor and describes the differences between IoT, edge, connected, and embedded devices. I ask him how Pantacor fits into the edge continuum, and he explains how Pantacor helps bring embedded devices into the future. Ricardo talks about the open source arm of Pantacor’s strategy, we discuss Pantacor’s unique interest in hardware versus primarily dealing with software, and Ricardo wraps up by sharing his advice for aspiring business owners! </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Why Ricardo started Pantacor (1:19)</li><li>Difference between IOT edge devices, connected devices, and embedded devices (2:17)</li><li>How Pantacor fits into the edge continuum (4:49)</li><li>Why are embedded systems lagging behind and how does that manifest? (6:22)</li><li>How open source is part of Pantacor’s strategy (9:40)</li><li>How aware are manufacturers of their operating systems and how Pantacor could help them? (13:35)</li><li>Pantacor’s relationship with hardware  (16:45)</li><li>What was the inspiration for the founding of Pantacor? (20:11)</li><li>The difference between cloud developers and their relationship with open source versus the relationship between embedded devices and open source (22:46)</li><li>Is there a disadvantage to being based in Europe? (24:51)</li><li>Advice for someone who wants to start a company or work with embedded devices (26:28)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Pantacor</p><ul><li><a href="https://pantacor.com/">https://pantacor.com/</a></li><li><a href="https://pantavisor.io/">https://pantavisor.io/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/pantahub">@pantahub</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ricardo Mendoza, founder and CEO of Pantacor, joins me for a chat at the Open Source Summit in Austin. Ricardo shares why he started Pantacor and describes the differences between IoT, edge, connected, and embedded devices. I ask him how Pantacor fits into the edge continuum, and he explains how Pantacor helps bring embedded devices into the future. Ricardo talks about the open source arm of Pantacor’s strategy, we discuss Pantacor’s unique interest in hardware versus primarily dealing with software, and Ricardo wraps up by sharing his advice for aspiring business owners! </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Why Ricardo started Pantacor (1:19)</li><li>Difference between IOT edge devices, connected devices, and embedded devices (2:17)</li><li>How Pantacor fits into the edge continuum (4:49)</li><li>Why are embedded systems lagging behind and how does that manifest? (6:22)</li><li>How open source is part of Pantacor’s strategy (9:40)</li><li>How aware are manufacturers of their operating systems and how Pantacor could help them? (13:35)</li><li>Pantacor’s relationship with hardware  (16:45)</li><li>What was the inspiration for the founding of Pantacor? (20:11)</li><li>The difference between cloud developers and their relationship with open source versus the relationship between embedded devices and open source (22:46)</li><li>Is there a disadvantage to being based in Europe? (24:51)</li><li>Advice for someone who wants to start a company or work with embedded devices (26:28)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Pantacor</p><ul><li><a href="https://pantacor.com/">https://pantacor.com/</a></li><li><a href="https://pantavisor.io/">https://pantavisor.io/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/pantahub">@pantahub</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 24 Aug 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/08e791c1/ed584cfa.mp3" length="44347294" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1766</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Ricardo Mendoza, founder and CEO of Pantacor, joins me at the Open Source Summit in Austin to chat about innovations in computing for devices in our homes, including IoT and edge devices, why he started Pantacor, and what advice he has for entrepreneurs in open source. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Ricardo Mendoza, founder and CEO of Pantacor, joins me at the Open Source Summit in Austin to chat about innovations in computing for devices in our homes, including IoT and edge devices, why he started Pantacor, and what advice he has for entrepreneurs i</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Open Source Licensing with Jeff Shapiro</title>
      <itunes:episode>112</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>112</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Open Source Licensing with Jeff Shapiro</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">16d398f5-2b36-454a-af38-5d9a234bb266</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/76bbfb6c</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Live from the Open Source Summit in Austin, I sit down with Jeff Shapiro, the License Scanning Manager for the Linux Foundation. Jeff begins by explaining what he does at the Linux Foundation, including ensuring that open source licenses are compatible and compliant. We discuss what license issues start-ups should be aware of, how to educate yourself on open source licensing, and when you should consult an expert. Jeff clarifies some confusion around dual licenses and explains the challenges of changing licenses on an open source project. Finally, we discuss the possibilities of disallowing specific uses through licensing and who can write a license. </p><p><br></p><p><br>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Jeff talks about the legal and business risks of non-compliant open source licenses (3:09)</li><li>License issues start-ups should be aware of (7:16)</li><li>DCO (Developer certificate of origin) and understanding where code comes from (12:10)</li><li>Educating yourself and others about open source licenses (13:04)</li><li>Jeff talks about when you need to consult an expert (15:36)</li><li>Jeff explains how he got into licensing as an engineer (17:23)</li><li>Jeff discusses dual licenses (18:18)</li><li>How hard is it to change licenses on an open source project (20:23)</li><li>Jeff explains if it’s possible to disallow specific uses with your license (23:39)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p><br>Jeff</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/jeffcshapiro/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/jeffcshapiro/</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.linuxfoundation.org/">https://www.linuxfoundation.org/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Live from the Open Source Summit in Austin, I sit down with Jeff Shapiro, the License Scanning Manager for the Linux Foundation. Jeff begins by explaining what he does at the Linux Foundation, including ensuring that open source licenses are compatible and compliant. We discuss what license issues start-ups should be aware of, how to educate yourself on open source licensing, and when you should consult an expert. Jeff clarifies some confusion around dual licenses and explains the challenges of changing licenses on an open source project. Finally, we discuss the possibilities of disallowing specific uses through licensing and who can write a license. </p><p><br></p><p><br>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Jeff talks about the legal and business risks of non-compliant open source licenses (3:09)</li><li>License issues start-ups should be aware of (7:16)</li><li>DCO (Developer certificate of origin) and understanding where code comes from (12:10)</li><li>Educating yourself and others about open source licenses (13:04)</li><li>Jeff talks about when you need to consult an expert (15:36)</li><li>Jeff explains how he got into licensing as an engineer (17:23)</li><li>Jeff discusses dual licenses (18:18)</li><li>How hard is it to change licenses on an open source project (20:23)</li><li>Jeff explains if it’s possible to disallow specific uses with your license (23:39)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p><br>Jeff</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/jeffcshapiro/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/jeffcshapiro/</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.linuxfoundation.org/">https://www.linuxfoundation.org/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 17 Aug 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/76bbfb6c/77269436.mp3" length="40521036" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1607</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Live from the Open Source Summit in Austin, I sit down with Jeff Shapiro, the License Scanning Manager for the Linux Foundation to take a deep dive into licensing for open source and commercial projects.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Live from the Open Source Summit in Austin, I sit down with Jeff Shapiro, the License Scanning Manager for the Linux Foundation to take a deep dive into licensing for open source and commercial projects.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>From Open Source Project to Commercial Product with Webb Brown of Kubecost</title>
      <itunes:episode>111</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>111</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>From Open Source Project to Commercial Product with Webb Brown of Kubecost</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">ef32761b-cbdb-4d33-bc86-3ff6842c2e10</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/85aa648b</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I sit down with Webb Brown, CEO and cofounder of Kubecost. Kubecost provides real-time cost visibility and insights for teams using Kubernetes. Webb tells the story of building Kubecost, starting with the pain points that inspired the open source tool. He talks about the transition from an open source project to becoming a commercial company, and explains the decision to build a company with the same name and branding as the open source tool. Webb talks about Kubecost’s newest initiative, OpenCost, and concludes by offering some lessons and advice for anyone in the early days of an open source startup. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Webb explains what Kubernetes cost is (1:27)</li><li>How the pain points addressed by Kubecost usually manifest (3:04)</li><li>What the impetus was for building the Kubecost open source tool (5:30)</li><li>The transition from open source to commercial (6:54)</li><li>The relationship between a cost-cutting tool and open source (10:48)</li><li>Kubecost’s new initiative, OpenCost (13:40)</li><li>The decision to have a company with the same name as the open source project (18:55)</li><li>Pros and cons that are unique to building an open source company (22:08)</li><li>Advice for anyone in the early stages of an open source startup (25:22)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Webb</p><ul><li>Email: <a href="webb@kubecost.com">webb@kubecost.com</a> </li><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/webbbrown/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/webbbrown/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/webb_brown">https://twitter.com/webb_brown</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.kubecost.com/">https://www.kubecost.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I sit down with Webb Brown, CEO and cofounder of Kubecost. Kubecost provides real-time cost visibility and insights for teams using Kubernetes. Webb tells the story of building Kubecost, starting with the pain points that inspired the open source tool. He talks about the transition from an open source project to becoming a commercial company, and explains the decision to build a company with the same name and branding as the open source tool. Webb talks about Kubecost’s newest initiative, OpenCost, and concludes by offering some lessons and advice for anyone in the early days of an open source startup. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Webb explains what Kubernetes cost is (1:27)</li><li>How the pain points addressed by Kubecost usually manifest (3:04)</li><li>What the impetus was for building the Kubecost open source tool (5:30)</li><li>The transition from open source to commercial (6:54)</li><li>The relationship between a cost-cutting tool and open source (10:48)</li><li>Kubecost’s new initiative, OpenCost (13:40)</li><li>The decision to have a company with the same name as the open source project (18:55)</li><li>Pros and cons that are unique to building an open source company (22:08)</li><li>Advice for anyone in the early stages of an open source startup (25:22)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Webb</p><ul><li>Email: <a href="webb@kubecost.com">webb@kubecost.com</a> </li><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/webbbrown/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/webbbrown/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/webb_brown">https://twitter.com/webb_brown</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.kubecost.com/">https://www.kubecost.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 10 Aug 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/85aa648b/732ae20c.mp3" length="42689674" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1698</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Today I sit down with Webb Brown, CEO and cofounder of Kubecost. Webb tells the story of building Kubecost, starting with the pain points that inspired the open source tool, and talks about the transition from an open source project to becoming a commercial company.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today I sit down with Webb Brown, CEO and cofounder of Kubecost. Webb tells the story of building Kubecost, starting with the pain points that inspired the open source tool, and talks about the transition from an open source project to becoming a commerci</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Security and Freedom with Ev Kontsevoy of Teleport</title>
      <itunes:episode>110</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>110</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Security and Freedom with Ev Kontsevoy of Teleport</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">11df894a-c552-4dc6-9a77-8ad4277dbc5b</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/73f38f82</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I sit down with Ev Kontsevoy, the CEO and co-founder of Teleport, a software company that began as an open source project. Teleport is an identity aware multi protocol access proxy that Ev was inspired to create because of the inherent frustrations with security he experienced in his career. Ev talks about how Teleport began as an open source tool and then grew into enterprise. I ask Ev what things he has done differently from his first start-up, Gravity, and we discuss how the open source community culture has bled into the company culture at Teleport. We end by talking about the SaaS version of Teleport and the ways in which the open source version funnels business into the commercial version. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Security frustrations that led to the founding of Teleport (1:17)</li><li>Ev talks about Teleport’s vision and how it began as an open source project (6:33)</li><li>Ev talks about Teleport’s first customer and a separate open source project, Gravity (12:09)</li><li>How Ev’s experience with a prior start-up changed his approach to Teleport (18:24)</li><li>Ev discusses the culture and community at Teleport (21:16)</li><li>How Teleport chooses which features to keep open source and which ones to offer as commercial (24:38)</li><li>The SaaS version of Teleport (26:55)</li><li>The different audiences for the different iterations of Teleport (28:08)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:<br></strong><br></p><p>Ev Kontsevoy</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/kontsevoy/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/kontsevoy/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/kontsevoy">https://twitter.com/kontsevoy</a></li><li>Company: <a href="http://goteleport.com">goteleport.com</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I sit down with Ev Kontsevoy, the CEO and co-founder of Teleport, a software company that began as an open source project. Teleport is an identity aware multi protocol access proxy that Ev was inspired to create because of the inherent frustrations with security he experienced in his career. Ev talks about how Teleport began as an open source tool and then grew into enterprise. I ask Ev what things he has done differently from his first start-up, Gravity, and we discuss how the open source community culture has bled into the company culture at Teleport. We end by talking about the SaaS version of Teleport and the ways in which the open source version funnels business into the commercial version. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Security frustrations that led to the founding of Teleport (1:17)</li><li>Ev talks about Teleport’s vision and how it began as an open source project (6:33)</li><li>Ev talks about Teleport’s first customer and a separate open source project, Gravity (12:09)</li><li>How Ev’s experience with a prior start-up changed his approach to Teleport (18:24)</li><li>Ev discusses the culture and community at Teleport (21:16)</li><li>How Teleport chooses which features to keep open source and which ones to offer as commercial (24:38)</li><li>The SaaS version of Teleport (26:55)</li><li>The different audiences for the different iterations of Teleport (28:08)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:<br></strong><br></p><p>Ev Kontsevoy</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/kontsevoy/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/kontsevoy/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/kontsevoy">https://twitter.com/kontsevoy</a></li><li>Company: <a href="http://goteleport.com">goteleport.com</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 03 Aug 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/73f38f82/acec9bf4.mp3" length="49450987" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1979</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Today I sit down with Ev Kontsevoy, the CEO and co-founder of Teleport, a software company that began as an open source project. Teleport is an identity aware multi protocol access proxy that Ev was inspired to create because of the inherent frustrations with security he experienced in his career.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today I sit down with Ev Kontsevoy, the CEO and co-founder of Teleport, a software company that began as an open source project. Teleport is an identity aware multi protocol access proxy that Ev was inspired to create because of the inherent frustrations </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>The Ethics of Privacy with Cillian Kieran of Ethyca</title>
      <itunes:episode>109</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>109</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>The Ethics of Privacy with Cillian Kieran of Ethyca</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">2883d4da-85fb-43bd-8fbc-a98924f03fb4</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/2dcfbf3e</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I’m joined by Cillian Kieran, the CEO and co-founder of Ethyca, to talk about the privacy challenges that served as the impetus to found Ethyca. In our chat, he explains the overarching goals of the privacy engineering platform. We discuss the decision to begin Ethyca as an open source tool and why that was critical to the mission. Then we talk about the decision to move to a commercial product and how to decide which features to offer as paid versus free. Cillian reviews the differences in his process between his two start-ups, discusses lessons he learned from prior mistakes, and provides advice for aspiring founders of open source start-ups. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>How Cillian decided to found Ethyca (00:50)</li><li>Awareness of developers and engineers around privacy issues (3:46)</li><li>Cillian talks about why he went the open source route (8:15)</li><li>Moving from open source to commercial product (14:02)</li><li>Privacy as a human right and how that influences development of features (16:32)</li><li>How Ethyca manages relationships between engineer and legal teams (19:40)</li><li>What Cillian did differently at his two start-ups (21:58)</li><li>We discuss open source start-up success and whether it’s necessary to have a larger world-changing vision (24:52)</li><li>Cillian discusses mistakes he has learned from (27:56)</li><li>Cillian offers advice to aspiring founders in the open source community (30:49)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>Fides open source platform: <a href="http://fid.es">fid.es</a></li></ul><p>Cillian</p><ul><li>Twitter: <a href="http://twitter.com/cillian">@Cillian</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://ethyca.com/">https://ethyca.com/</a></li></ul><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I’m joined by Cillian Kieran, the CEO and co-founder of Ethyca, to talk about the privacy challenges that served as the impetus to found Ethyca. In our chat, he explains the overarching goals of the privacy engineering platform. We discuss the decision to begin Ethyca as an open source tool and why that was critical to the mission. Then we talk about the decision to move to a commercial product and how to decide which features to offer as paid versus free. Cillian reviews the differences in his process between his two start-ups, discusses lessons he learned from prior mistakes, and provides advice for aspiring founders of open source start-ups. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>How Cillian decided to found Ethyca (00:50)</li><li>Awareness of developers and engineers around privacy issues (3:46)</li><li>Cillian talks about why he went the open source route (8:15)</li><li>Moving from open source to commercial product (14:02)</li><li>Privacy as a human right and how that influences development of features (16:32)</li><li>How Ethyca manages relationships between engineer and legal teams (19:40)</li><li>What Cillian did differently at his two start-ups (21:58)</li><li>We discuss open source start-up success and whether it’s necessary to have a larger world-changing vision (24:52)</li><li>Cillian discusses mistakes he has learned from (27:56)</li><li>Cillian offers advice to aspiring founders in the open source community (30:49)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>Fides open source platform: <a href="http://fid.es">fid.es</a></li></ul><p>Cillian</p><ul><li>Twitter: <a href="http://twitter.com/cillian">@Cillian</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://ethyca.com/">https://ethyca.com/</a></li></ul><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 27 Jul 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/2dcfbf3e/6baed8f5.mp3" length="50075148" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2005</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Today I’m joined by Cillian Kieran, the CEO and cofounder of Ethyca to talk about the privacy challenges that served as the impetus to found Ethyca.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today I’m joined by Cillian Kieran, the CEO and cofounder of Ethyca to talk about the privacy challenges that served as the impetus to found Ethyca.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Global Tech and Selling to Enterprise with André Christ</title>
      <itunes:episode>108</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>108</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Global Tech and Selling to Enterprise with André Christ</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">04a276f2-202a-436a-b059-deda2c7e78e6</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/e7f4c550</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I’m joined by CEO and founder of <a href="https://www.leanix.net">LeanIX</a>, André Christ. André begins by describing his business, and then explains how his experiences working in large enterprise inspired him to build a product that would help businesses catalogue their software and optimize their portfolios. André offers advice for companies desiring to sell primarily to enterprise and expounds on the his experience with the differences between traditional enterprise and large enterprise. We discuss LeanIX’s transition to become a global company based in Europe, and conclude our talk with some advice from André to potential founders. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>André describes his his company LeanIX (00:48)</li><li>The experiences that led André to found LeanIX (2:50)</li><li>LeanIX’s decision to focus on enterprise customers (7:45)</li><li>Advice for companies that want to focus on selling to enterprise (9:47)</li><li>The difference between traditional enterprise and very large enterprise like Amazon (15:19)</li><li>Transitioning to becoming a global company based in Europe (19:49)</li><li>The surprisingly fragmented world of global tech (24:50)</li><li>LeanIX’s decision to expand into other products (26:30)</li><li>André’s advice for anyone considering starting a company (27:57)</li><li>André shares about scaling mistakes and how LeanIX has learned from them (31:48)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:<br></strong><br></p><p>André</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/andrechrist/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/andrechrist/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/christ_andre">https://twitter.com/christ_andre</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.leanix.net/">https://www.leanix.net/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I’m joined by CEO and founder of <a href="https://www.leanix.net">LeanIX</a>, André Christ. André begins by describing his business, and then explains how his experiences working in large enterprise inspired him to build a product that would help businesses catalogue their software and optimize their portfolios. André offers advice for companies desiring to sell primarily to enterprise and expounds on the his experience with the differences between traditional enterprise and large enterprise. We discuss LeanIX’s transition to become a global company based in Europe, and conclude our talk with some advice from André to potential founders. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>André describes his his company LeanIX (00:48)</li><li>The experiences that led André to found LeanIX (2:50)</li><li>LeanIX’s decision to focus on enterprise customers (7:45)</li><li>Advice for companies that want to focus on selling to enterprise (9:47)</li><li>The difference between traditional enterprise and very large enterprise like Amazon (15:19)</li><li>Transitioning to becoming a global company based in Europe (19:49)</li><li>The surprisingly fragmented world of global tech (24:50)</li><li>LeanIX’s decision to expand into other products (26:30)</li><li>André’s advice for anyone considering starting a company (27:57)</li><li>André shares about scaling mistakes and how LeanIX has learned from them (31:48)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:<br></strong><br></p><p>André</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/andrechrist/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/andrechrist/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/christ_andre">https://twitter.com/christ_andre</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.leanix.net/">https://www.leanix.net/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 20 Jul 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/e7f4c550/99202d20.mp3" length="51482701" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2142</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Today I’m joined by CEO and founder of LeanIX, André Christ. André begins by describing his business, and then explains how his experiences working in large enterprise inspired him to build a product that would help businesses catalogue their software and optimize their portfolios.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today I’m joined by CEO and founder of LeanIX, André Christ. André begins by describing his business, and then explains how his experiences working in large enterprise inspired him to build a product that would help businesses catalogue their software and</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Edge Native and Customer Satisfaction with Keith Basil</title>
      <itunes:episode>107</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>107</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Edge Native and Customer Satisfaction with Keith Basil</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">0111a5ec-c0d5-473a-91e2-a4affaa138f1</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/26d69a6c</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I chat with Keith Basil, GM of Edge Computing at SUSE. We begin by reviewing the definition of edge: Keith explains how SUSE breaks edge computing down into 3 categories, and then talks about the shared understanding of edge by the industry at large. I ask Keith about the overlap of edge products with non-edge products, and then we discuss the maturity of the edge landscape and Keith explains how SUSE helps clients with infrastructure. We wrap up by talking about managing feature bloat and SUSE’s decision to have their entire code base be open sourced. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Keith breaks down the 3 categories of “edge” as defined at SUSE (1:14)</li><li>We discuss the industry understanding of edge technology (5:34)</li><li>Keith defines “edge watching” (8:44)</li><li>We discuss the relationship between cloud native and edge native (10:22)</li><li>The overlap of edge products and non-edge products (14:25)</li><li>The maturity of the edge landscape and how SUSE help clients with infrastructure (17:04)</li><li>How SUSE manages feature bloat (23:37)</li><li>SUSE’s decision to have their entire code base be open sourced (26:15)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Keith</p><ul><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/noslzzp">@noslzzp</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.suse.com/">https://www.suse.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I chat with Keith Basil, GM of Edge Computing at SUSE. We begin by reviewing the definition of edge: Keith explains how SUSE breaks edge computing down into 3 categories, and then talks about the shared understanding of edge by the industry at large. I ask Keith about the overlap of edge products with non-edge products, and then we discuss the maturity of the edge landscape and Keith explains how SUSE helps clients with infrastructure. We wrap up by talking about managing feature bloat and SUSE’s decision to have their entire code base be open sourced. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Keith breaks down the 3 categories of “edge” as defined at SUSE (1:14)</li><li>We discuss the industry understanding of edge technology (5:34)</li><li>Keith defines “edge watching” (8:44)</li><li>We discuss the relationship between cloud native and edge native (10:22)</li><li>The overlap of edge products and non-edge products (14:25)</li><li>The maturity of the edge landscape and how SUSE help clients with infrastructure (17:04)</li><li>How SUSE manages feature bloat (23:37)</li><li>SUSE’s decision to have their entire code base be open sourced (26:15)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Keith</p><ul><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/noslzzp">@noslzzp</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.suse.com/">https://www.suse.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 13 Jul 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/26d69a6c/d58413b3.mp3" length="49025997" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2028</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Today I chat with Keith Basil, GM of Edge Computing at SUSE, about the definition of edge and the shared understanding of edge by the industry at large.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today I chat with Keith Basil, GM of Edge Computing at SUSE, about the definition of edge and the shared understanding of edge by the industry at large.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Merging Docker and Mirantis and Partnering with Customers with Shaun O’Meara</title>
      <itunes:episode>106</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>106</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Merging Docker and Mirantis and Partnering with Customers with Shaun O’Meara</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">f688cc17-6f60-4a6d-af99-36ebc51dc1b6</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/17f34aee</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I talk with Shaun O’Meara, the global field CTO at <a href="https://www.mirantis.com/">Mirantis</a>. We begin by discussing the integration of Docker Enterprises with Mirantis approximately three years ago. We discuss the challenges of integrating companies, including incorporating new technology, processes, and customers and merging two very different work cultures. Shaun offers his advice for anyone considering selling to enterprises and emphasizes the role of partnering with customers and becoming part of their process. Shaun talks about the expectations and realities of merging Docker and Mirantis, including the challenges of a licensing model change. We conclude our time by discussing the differences between selling to small companies versus selling to enterprises. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>How integrating Docker Enterprises with Mirantis affected Shaun’s role as CTO (1:09)</li><li>How incorporating Docker technology helped Mirantis build different value for customers (3:39)</li><li>We talk about the effects of combining the work cultures of Docker and Mirantis (5:40)</li><li>Shaun offers advice for people considering start ups or selling to enterprise, including the importance of partnering with customers (8:47)</li><li>Shaun talks about his expectations of merging Docker and Mirantis versus reality (12:56)</li><li>We talk about the licensing model change through the transition (14:34)</li><li>Shaun talks about outsourcing versus what Mirantis does in augmenting and supporting teams (17:55)</li><li>We discuss the differences between selling to small companies and enterprise (20:06)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Shaun</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/shaun-omeara/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/shaun-omeara/</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.mirantis.com/">https://www.mirantis.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I talk with Shaun O’Meara, the global field CTO at <a href="https://www.mirantis.com/">Mirantis</a>. We begin by discussing the integration of Docker Enterprises with Mirantis approximately three years ago. We discuss the challenges of integrating companies, including incorporating new technology, processes, and customers and merging two very different work cultures. Shaun offers his advice for anyone considering selling to enterprises and emphasizes the role of partnering with customers and becoming part of their process. Shaun talks about the expectations and realities of merging Docker and Mirantis, including the challenges of a licensing model change. We conclude our time by discussing the differences between selling to small companies versus selling to enterprises. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>How integrating Docker Enterprises with Mirantis affected Shaun’s role as CTO (1:09)</li><li>How incorporating Docker technology helped Mirantis build different value for customers (3:39)</li><li>We talk about the effects of combining the work cultures of Docker and Mirantis (5:40)</li><li>Shaun offers advice for people considering start ups or selling to enterprise, including the importance of partnering with customers (8:47)</li><li>Shaun talks about his expectations of merging Docker and Mirantis versus reality (12:56)</li><li>We talk about the licensing model change through the transition (14:34)</li><li>Shaun talks about outsourcing versus what Mirantis does in augmenting and supporting teams (17:55)</li><li>We discuss the differences between selling to small companies and enterprise (20:06)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Shaun</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/shaun-omeara/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/shaun-omeara/</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.mirantis.com/">https://www.mirantis.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 06 Jul 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/17f34aee/8c2da76a.mp3" length="35031907" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1445</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Today I talk with Shaun O’Meara, the global field CTO at Mirantis, about the challenges of integrating companies, including incorporating new technology, processes, and customers and merging two very different work cultures.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today I talk with Shaun O’Meara, the global field CTO at Mirantis, about the challenges of integrating companies, including incorporating new technology, processes, and customers and merging two very different work cultures.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Exploring the Risks of Single Maintainer Dependencies with John McBride</title>
      <itunes:episode>105</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>105</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Exploring the Risks of Single Maintainer Dependencies with John McBride</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">83e4c401-0280-494e-b83b-d641a3f1c086</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/51727ee9</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I sit down and chat with John McBride, senior software engineer at VMware. We begin by talking about John’s address at KubeCon, “Risks of Single Maintainer Dependencies and How to Mitigate Those Risks.” We discuss the definition of security and then John identifies some of the other non-security risks posed by single maintainer dependency. We talk a little bit about mitigating the risks and about building trust and community around single maintainer projects. We conclude our time by speculating on the extinction of single maintainer dependencies. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>John introduces himself and talks about his interest in mitigating the risks of single maintainer dependencies (00:55)</li><li>We have a conversation about the definition of security (4:54)</li><li>John talks about the other, non-security risks of single maintainer dependency (10:00)</li><li>We discuss how to mitigate the risks of single maintainer dependency (12:04)</li><li>John talks about building trust and building community around single maintainer projects (16:48)</li><li>John answers my question “Do you think being a single maintainer is ultimately an anti-pattern, a non best practice?” (23:56)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>John</p><ul><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/johncodezzz">@johncodezzz</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.vmware.com">https://www.vmware.com</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I sit down and chat with John McBride, senior software engineer at VMware. We begin by talking about John’s address at KubeCon, “Risks of Single Maintainer Dependencies and How to Mitigate Those Risks.” We discuss the definition of security and then John identifies some of the other non-security risks posed by single maintainer dependency. We talk a little bit about mitigating the risks and about building trust and community around single maintainer projects. We conclude our time by speculating on the extinction of single maintainer dependencies. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>John introduces himself and talks about his interest in mitigating the risks of single maintainer dependencies (00:55)</li><li>We have a conversation about the definition of security (4:54)</li><li>John talks about the other, non-security risks of single maintainer dependency (10:00)</li><li>We discuss how to mitigate the risks of single maintainer dependency (12:04)</li><li>John talks about building trust and building community around single maintainer projects (16:48)</li><li>John answers my question “Do you think being a single maintainer is ultimately an anti-pattern, a non best practice?” (23:56)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>John</p><ul><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/johncodezzz">@johncodezzz</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.vmware.com">https://www.vmware.com</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 29 Jun 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/51727ee9/0383ab71.mp3" length="46902856" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1941</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Today I sit down and chat with John McBride, senior software engineer at VMware, about his address at KubeCon, “Risks of Single Maintainer Dependencies and How to Mitigate Those Risks.” </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today I sit down and chat with John McBride, senior software engineer at VMware, about his address at KubeCon, “Risks of Single Maintainer Dependencies and How to Mitigate Those Risks.” </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>The Cloud Native Glossary and Linkerd with Catherine Paganini</title>
      <itunes:episode>104</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>104</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>The Cloud Native Glossary and Linkerd with Catherine Paganini</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">5dec33c7-2b52-4299-ab7b-9ff54c92be39</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/a9ca5901</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I talk with Catherine Paganini, Head of Marketing and Community at <a href="https://buoyant.io/">Buoyant</a>. We begin by discussing the <a href="https://glossary.cncf.io/">Cloud Native Glossary</a> and how it is helping to make cloud native concepts more accessible for people around the world. Catherine talks about nurturing community in open source projects, and about the function of documentation. Catherine and I discuss pitfalls in building open source communities, and Catherine talks about her strategy for recovering from mistakes. Catherine concludes the conversation by talking about balancing her roles as head of marketing and community at Buoyant.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Catherine talks about how the Cloud Native Glossary started, how it has grown, and how it helps to make education about the cloud accessible and easy to understand  (1:00)</li><li>Catherine discusses about how the Cloud Native Glossary is being used (5:47)</li><li>Catherine and I talk about nurturing community in an open source project (8:22)</li><li>Catherine discusses empowering end users through efforts like the <a href="https://linkerd.io/community/anchor/">Linkerd Anchor Program</a> (11:28)</li><li>Catherine talks about the function of documentation (14:05)</li><li>I ask Catherine, “What do you see people getting wrong when it comes to nurturing community?” (15:29)</li><li>Catherine talks about recovering from mistakes (18:49)</li><li>Catherine discusses walking the line between being head of marketing and head of community (23:47)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Cloud Native Glossary: <a href="https://glossary.cncf.io/">https://glossary.cncf.io/</a></p><p>Linkerd: <a href="https://linkerd.io/">https://linkerd.io/</a></p><p>Linkerd Anchor Program: <a href="https://linkerd.io/community/anchor/">https://linkerd.io/community/anchor/</a></p><p><br></p><p>Catherine</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/catherinepaganini/">Catherine Paganini</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="http://twitter.com/cathpaga">@cathpaga</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.buoyant.io">https://www.buoyant.io</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I talk with Catherine Paganini, Head of Marketing and Community at <a href="https://buoyant.io/">Buoyant</a>. We begin by discussing the <a href="https://glossary.cncf.io/">Cloud Native Glossary</a> and how it is helping to make cloud native concepts more accessible for people around the world. Catherine talks about nurturing community in open source projects, and about the function of documentation. Catherine and I discuss pitfalls in building open source communities, and Catherine talks about her strategy for recovering from mistakes. Catherine concludes the conversation by talking about balancing her roles as head of marketing and community at Buoyant.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Catherine talks about how the Cloud Native Glossary started, how it has grown, and how it helps to make education about the cloud accessible and easy to understand  (1:00)</li><li>Catherine discusses about how the Cloud Native Glossary is being used (5:47)</li><li>Catherine and I talk about nurturing community in an open source project (8:22)</li><li>Catherine discusses empowering end users through efforts like the <a href="https://linkerd.io/community/anchor/">Linkerd Anchor Program</a> (11:28)</li><li>Catherine talks about the function of documentation (14:05)</li><li>I ask Catherine, “What do you see people getting wrong when it comes to nurturing community?” (15:29)</li><li>Catherine talks about recovering from mistakes (18:49)</li><li>Catherine discusses walking the line between being head of marketing and head of community (23:47)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Cloud Native Glossary: <a href="https://glossary.cncf.io/">https://glossary.cncf.io/</a></p><p>Linkerd: <a href="https://linkerd.io/">https://linkerd.io/</a></p><p>Linkerd Anchor Program: <a href="https://linkerd.io/community/anchor/">https://linkerd.io/community/anchor/</a></p><p><br></p><p>Catherine</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/catherinepaganini/">Catherine Paganini</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="http://twitter.com/cathpaga">@cathpaga</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.buoyant.io">https://www.buoyant.io</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 22 Jun 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/a9ca5901/311732b9.mp3" length="39549730" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1635</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Today I talk with Catherine Paganini, Head of Marketing and Community at Buoyant about the Cloud Native Glossary and how it is helping to make cloud native concepts more accessible for people around the world.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today I talk with Catherine Paganini, Head of Marketing and Community at Buoyant about the Cloud Native Glossary and how it is helping to make cloud native concepts more accessible for people around the world.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Serverless, Cloud Native, and Koyeb with Yann Léger</title>
      <itunes:episode>103</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>103</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Serverless, Cloud Native, and Koyeb with Yann Léger</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">c42e061b-0e76-40d5-b0f2-b0ea05865c7b</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/27b60074</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I talk with Yann Léger, CEO of Koyeb, the serverless developer platform that allows businesses to safely and easily deploy applications. We begin by talking about Yann’s decision to base the company on serverless, and the true meaning of cloud native. Yann then discusses Koyeb’s relationship with Kuma, and Koyeb’s posture towards open source projects. The conversation concludes with Yann sharing mistakes he’s learned from in the process of building Koyeb and offering advice to other potential technical founders. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Yann talks about the decision to leave his position at Scaleway and start his own company (1:44)</li><li>Yann discusses choosing to base his company on serverless (3:14)</li><li>Emily and Yann talk about the meaning of cloud native (6:00)</li><li>Yann talks about Koyeb’s relationship with Kuma (9:40)</li><li>Yann discusses Koyeb’s open source projects (11:46)</li><li>Yann shares mistakes he has learned from in the process of building Koyeb (15:25)</li><li>Yann answers the question “What are the disadvantages of being a technical founder?” (18:06)</li><li>Emily and Yann discuss the challenges of remote working (22:00)</li><li>Yann’s advice for anyone considering becoming a technical founder (23:15)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Yann</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/yannleger/">Yann Léger</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/yann_eu">@yann_eu</a>, <a href="https://twitter.com/gokoyeb">@gokoyeb</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.koyeb.com/">https://www.koyeb.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I talk with Yann Léger, CEO of Koyeb, the serverless developer platform that allows businesses to safely and easily deploy applications. We begin by talking about Yann’s decision to base the company on serverless, and the true meaning of cloud native. Yann then discusses Koyeb’s relationship with Kuma, and Koyeb’s posture towards open source projects. The conversation concludes with Yann sharing mistakes he’s learned from in the process of building Koyeb and offering advice to other potential technical founders. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Yann talks about the decision to leave his position at Scaleway and start his own company (1:44)</li><li>Yann discusses choosing to base his company on serverless (3:14)</li><li>Emily and Yann talk about the meaning of cloud native (6:00)</li><li>Yann talks about Koyeb’s relationship with Kuma (9:40)</li><li>Yann discusses Koyeb’s open source projects (11:46)</li><li>Yann shares mistakes he has learned from in the process of building Koyeb (15:25)</li><li>Yann answers the question “What are the disadvantages of being a technical founder?” (18:06)</li><li>Emily and Yann discuss the challenges of remote working (22:00)</li><li>Yann’s advice for anyone considering becoming a technical founder (23:15)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Yann</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/yannleger/">Yann Léger</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/yann_eu">@yann_eu</a>, <a href="https://twitter.com/gokoyeb">@gokoyeb</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.koyeb.com/">https://www.koyeb.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 15 Jun 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/27b60074/7f8538b6.mp3" length="38452148" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1595</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Today I talk with Yann Léger, CEO of Koyeb, the serverless developer platform that allows businesses to safely and easily deploy applications.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today I talk with Yann Léger, CEO of Koyeb, the serverless developer platform that allows businesses to safely and easily deploy applications.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Dirk Hohndel and Open Source Ecosystems</title>
      <itunes:episode>102</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>102</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Dirk Hohndel and Open Source Ecosystems</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">fa8e8594-264f-4e6b-9496-2c0b75491181</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/600f2aae</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I chatted with Dirk Hohndel, chief open source officer at the Cardano foundation. We begin by defining an open source ecosystem, and then talk about what different open source ecosystems might look like and how they are maintained. Dirk talks about best practices for steering an open source ecosystem, and then we discuss the role of foundations in open source projects. I ask “how do you define success for an open source project” and we end with a discussion on the best practices for running open source project foundations.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>We talk about the meaning and maintenance of an open source ecosystem (1:31)</li><li>The differences between an open source ecosystem and a community (11:06)</li><li>Dirk talks about best practices for steering an open source ecosystem (13:00)</li><li>The role of a foundation in an open source project (18:04)</li><li>Dirk discusses other iterations of open source projects that can be successful (22:19)</li><li>Dirk answers the question “how do you define success for an open source project?” (24:43)</li><li>We discuss best practices for running an open source project foundation (27:49)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Dirk </p><ul><li>Twitter: @_dirkh</li><li>Company: <a href="https://cardanofoundation.org/">cardanofoundation.org</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I chatted with Dirk Hohndel, chief open source officer at the Cardano foundation. We begin by defining an open source ecosystem, and then talk about what different open source ecosystems might look like and how they are maintained. Dirk talks about best practices for steering an open source ecosystem, and then we discuss the role of foundations in open source projects. I ask “how do you define success for an open source project” and we end with a discussion on the best practices for running open source project foundations.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>We talk about the meaning and maintenance of an open source ecosystem (1:31)</li><li>The differences between an open source ecosystem and a community (11:06)</li><li>Dirk talks about best practices for steering an open source ecosystem (13:00)</li><li>The role of a foundation in an open source project (18:04)</li><li>Dirk discusses other iterations of open source projects that can be successful (22:19)</li><li>Dirk answers the question “how do you define success for an open source project?” (24:43)</li><li>We discuss best practices for running an open source project foundation (27:49)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Dirk </p><ul><li>Twitter: @_dirkh</li><li>Company: <a href="https://cardanofoundation.org/">cardanofoundation.org</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 08 Jun 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/600f2aae/29c0441c.mp3" length="48753960" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1953</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Dirk Hohndel, chief open source officer at the Cardano foundation defines an open source ecosystem, and what different open source ecosystems might look like and how they are maintained.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Dirk Hohndel, chief open source officer at the Cardano foundation defines an open source ecosystem, and what different open source ecosystems might look like and how they are maintained.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Passion, Marketing, and Communication with Romaric Philogène</title>
      <itunes:episode>101</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>101</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Passion, Marketing, and Communication with Romaric Philogène</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">c6692ed8-2499-4eb9-84ba-9df95da682b5</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/b3949368</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I sit down with Romaric Philogène, CEO and founder of Qovery, a platform that helps developers build, deploy, run, and scale applications.  Romaric begins by talking about his first two start-ups, both social networks, and then we discuss the difference between creating consumer-facing products and products for developers. We then talk about marketing in the US as it compares to the global market. We discuss Qovary’s relationship to open source and the idea of fostering community around a company’s culture. Romaric concludes by offering advice to developers on the value of being a skilled communicator. </p><p><br></p><p>Full Description / Show Notes</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Romaric talks about his first two startups that preceded Qovery (3:26)</li><li>The differences between building a consumer facing product and creating a product for developers (5:55)</li><li>Romaric talks marketing in the US vs marketing in Europe  (11:50)</li><li>Romaric answers the question “what are things you’re doing differently now that you’ve learned from previous efforts?” (17:00)</li><li>The value of community building in marketing to developers (19:28)</li><li>Qovary’s relationship with open source (20:46)</li><li>Building community around your company vs just a product (25:00)</li><li>The importance of communication as an engineer (28:47)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Romaric</p><p><br></p><ul><li>Twitter:<a href="https://twitter.com/rophilogene">@rophilogene</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.qovery.com/">https://www.qovery.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I sit down with Romaric Philogène, CEO and founder of Qovery, a platform that helps developers build, deploy, run, and scale applications.  Romaric begins by talking about his first two start-ups, both social networks, and then we discuss the difference between creating consumer-facing products and products for developers. We then talk about marketing in the US as it compares to the global market. We discuss Qovary’s relationship to open source and the idea of fostering community around a company’s culture. Romaric concludes by offering advice to developers on the value of being a skilled communicator. </p><p><br></p><p>Full Description / Show Notes</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Romaric talks about his first two startups that preceded Qovery (3:26)</li><li>The differences between building a consumer facing product and creating a product for developers (5:55)</li><li>Romaric talks marketing in the US vs marketing in Europe  (11:50)</li><li>Romaric answers the question “what are things you’re doing differently now that you’ve learned from previous efforts?” (17:00)</li><li>The value of community building in marketing to developers (19:28)</li><li>Qovary’s relationship with open source (20:46)</li><li>Building community around your company vs just a product (25:00)</li><li>The importance of communication as an engineer (28:47)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Romaric</p><p><br></p><ul><li>Twitter:<a href="https://twitter.com/rophilogene">@rophilogene</a></li><li>Company: <a href="https://www.qovery.com/">https://www.qovery.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 01 Jun 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/b3949368/70b8f4fe.mp3" length="47691637" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1912</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Today I sit down with Romaric Philogène, CEO and founder of Qovery, a platform that helps developers build, deploy, run, and scale applications.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today I sit down with Romaric Philogène, CEO and founder of Qovery, a platform that helps developers build, deploy, run, and scale applications.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Tailscale and Market Segmentation with Avery Pennarun</title>
      <itunes:episode>100</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>100</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Tailscale and Market Segmentation with Avery Pennarun</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">c1e84e68-94b7-458d-a738-619ace8a35be</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/291a8803</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I’m chatting with Avery Pennarun, CEO of Tailscale. Tailscale is a VPN service that makes devices and applications accessible anywhere in the world by enabling encrypted point-to-point connections using the open source <a href="https://www.wireguard.com/">WireGuard</a> protocol. Avery begins by talking about his experience building a start-up while he was a college student and how things have changed as he leads his current start-up. Avery recommends the book “Crossing the Chasm” and we discuss market segmentation as it relates to creating a successful start-up. Avery explains how Tailscale has been successful in implementing market segmentation strategies. We conclude our conversation by talking about goal setting and the importance of quality.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Avery talks about his first start-up experience as a college student (1:10)</li><li>Avery recommends “Crossing the Chasm” and discusses how it influenced his start-ups (7:54)</li><li>We discuss market segmentation strategy (13:29)</li><li>Specific marketing strategies used at Tailscale (18:41)</li><li>Avery talks about mistakes he’s made while building his start-ups (22:24)</li><li>Goal setting in start-ups (24:42)</li><li>We talk about the importance of quality in building word of mouth success (29:49)</li><li>Avery answers the question “How do you maintain an identity as an engineer when you are also a serial entrepreneur?” (33:23)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Avery</p><ul><li>Twitter: @apenwarr @tailscale</li><li>Company: https://www.tailscale.com</li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I’m chatting with Avery Pennarun, CEO of Tailscale. Tailscale is a VPN service that makes devices and applications accessible anywhere in the world by enabling encrypted point-to-point connections using the open source <a href="https://www.wireguard.com/">WireGuard</a> protocol. Avery begins by talking about his experience building a start-up while he was a college student and how things have changed as he leads his current start-up. Avery recommends the book “Crossing the Chasm” and we discuss market segmentation as it relates to creating a successful start-up. Avery explains how Tailscale has been successful in implementing market segmentation strategies. We conclude our conversation by talking about goal setting and the importance of quality.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Avery talks about his first start-up experience as a college student (1:10)</li><li>Avery recommends “Crossing the Chasm” and discusses how it influenced his start-ups (7:54)</li><li>We discuss market segmentation strategy (13:29)</li><li>Specific marketing strategies used at Tailscale (18:41)</li><li>Avery talks about mistakes he’s made while building his start-ups (22:24)</li><li>Goal setting in start-ups (24:42)</li><li>We talk about the importance of quality in building word of mouth success (29:49)</li><li>Avery answers the question “How do you maintain an identity as an engineer when you are also a serial entrepreneur?” (33:23)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Avery</p><ul><li>Twitter: @apenwarr @tailscale</li><li>Company: https://www.tailscale.com</li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 25 May 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/291a8803/08e58ce9.mp3" length="53514937" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2159</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Today I’m chatting with Avery Pennarun, CEO of Tailscale, a VPN service that makes devices and applications accessible anywhere in the world.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today I’m chatting with Avery Pennarun, CEO of Tailscale, a VPN service that makes devices and applications accessible anywhere in the world.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Marketing and Open Source with Kiersten Gaffney</title>
      <itunes:episode>99</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>99</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Marketing and Open Source with Kiersten Gaffney</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">16a11c9e-7e9a-4117-b5f6-e2cb4bec74ef</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/e805e3c8</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I chat with Kiersten Gaffney, CMO of Codefresh, a software delivery platform. Kiersten begins by defining her role as CMO. We then discuss the unique challenges of product strategy with open source projects. Kiersten talks about the importance of maintaining both a top-down and bottom-up approach when taking a project from open source to enterprise, and then explains some of the most common mistakes she’s seen when companies undergo this process. We discuss how technical a team should be when marketing open source and conclude the conversation by talking about analysis paralysis in start-ups and how to avoid it. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Kiersten answers the question “What do CMOs do all day?” (1:49)</li><li>Product strategy with open source products (2:58)</li><li>How open source projects fit into marketing efforts (6:10)</li><li>Kiersten’s advice on how to maintain both a top-down and bottom-up approach (11:28)</li><li>Is there a magic formula for taking a project from open source to for profit? (13:02)</li><li>Biggest mistakes when taking a project from open source to enterprise (15:54)</li><li>Emily asks how technical a marketing team should be for an open source project (22:53)</li><li>Kiersten and Emily discuss the tension between engineering and marketing (24:24)</li><li>Analysis paralysis in startups (26:35)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Kiersten</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/kierstengaffney/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/kierstengaffney/</a></li><li>Twitter: @kierstengaffney</li><li>Company: <a href="https://codefresh.io/">https://codefresh.io/</a></li></ul><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I chat with Kiersten Gaffney, CMO of Codefresh, a software delivery platform. Kiersten begins by defining her role as CMO. We then discuss the unique challenges of product strategy with open source projects. Kiersten talks about the importance of maintaining both a top-down and bottom-up approach when taking a project from open source to enterprise, and then explains some of the most common mistakes she’s seen when companies undergo this process. We discuss how technical a team should be when marketing open source and conclude the conversation by talking about analysis paralysis in start-ups and how to avoid it. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Kiersten answers the question “What do CMOs do all day?” (1:49)</li><li>Product strategy with open source products (2:58)</li><li>How open source projects fit into marketing efforts (6:10)</li><li>Kiersten’s advice on how to maintain both a top-down and bottom-up approach (11:28)</li><li>Is there a magic formula for taking a project from open source to for profit? (13:02)</li><li>Biggest mistakes when taking a project from open source to enterprise (15:54)</li><li>Emily asks how technical a marketing team should be for an open source project (22:53)</li><li>Kiersten and Emily discuss the tension between engineering and marketing (24:24)</li><li>Analysis paralysis in startups (26:35)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Kiersten</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/kierstengaffney/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/kierstengaffney/</a></li><li>Twitter: @kierstengaffney</li><li>Company: <a href="https://codefresh.io/">https://codefresh.io/</a></li></ul><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 18 May 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/e805e3c8/3d6ee447.mp3" length="44540192" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1789</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Today I chat with Kiersten Gaffney, CMO of Codefresh, a software delivery platform. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today I chat with Kiersten Gaffney, CMO of Codefresh, a software delivery platform. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Lessons from Sandeep Lahane</title>
      <itunes:episode>98</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>98</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Lessons from Sandeep Lahane</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">ce4a42f4-3a05-4d09-9972-1bbab8ab2b75</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/99479d93</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this short summation episode, I talked a little more about why I think Deepfence's open source strategy is so genius. </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this short summation episode, I talked a little more about why I think Deepfence's open source strategy is so genius. </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Fri, 13 May 2022 09:00:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/99479d93/d57c0159.mp3" length="5872152" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>363</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>In this short summation episode, I talked a little more about why I think Deepfence's open source strategy is so genius. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this short summation episode, I talked a little more about why I think Deepfence's open source strategy is so genius. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Threat Mapping and Striking with Sandeep Lahane</title>
      <itunes:episode>97</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>97</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Threat Mapping and Striking with Sandeep Lahane</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">16c47db9-123e-40f9-89c7-6dde69d78eef</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/6b24e54f</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I sat down with Sandeep Lahane, founder and CEO of Deepfence, a security preventive and detective solution for cloud and container native environments. Sandeep began by explaining both the open source and enterprise components of Deepfence. Threatmapper is a multi-cloud platform for scanning, mapping, and ranking vulnerabilities in running containers, images, hosts, and repositories, and Threatstryker is a commercial product that offers runtime attack analysis, threat assessment, and targeted protection for infrastructures and applications. We then talk about the inexhaustibility and the ever-changing landscape of cybersecurity. Sandeep explains the impetus for launching Deepfence and the process of getting to Threatmapper and Threatstryker, and then talks about his journey from working as a systems programmer to launching a tech startup. We discuss the tense relationship between security and development in the industry, and end the conversation with some words of advice for engineers considering the entrepreneurial plunge.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>What is the difference between Threatmapper and Threatstryker at Deepfence? (00:55)</li><li>Sandeep explains how the Deepfence commission product builds upon the open source one (2:14)</li><li>Discussing the inexhaustibility of the cybersecurity landscape (11:40)</li><li>The genesis of Deepfence (13:58)</li><li>Sandeep discusses the business benefits of having an open source project (14:57)</li><li>Sandeep talks about his journey from systems programmer to tech startup (17:20)</li><li>Emily and Sandeep discuss the tense relationship between security and development (21:19)</li><li>Sandeep gives advice to engineers considering entrepreneurship (33:57)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Sandeep</p><ul><li>https://deepfence.io</li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I sat down with Sandeep Lahane, founder and CEO of Deepfence, a security preventive and detective solution for cloud and container native environments. Sandeep began by explaining both the open source and enterprise components of Deepfence. Threatmapper is a multi-cloud platform for scanning, mapping, and ranking vulnerabilities in running containers, images, hosts, and repositories, and Threatstryker is a commercial product that offers runtime attack analysis, threat assessment, and targeted protection for infrastructures and applications. We then talk about the inexhaustibility and the ever-changing landscape of cybersecurity. Sandeep explains the impetus for launching Deepfence and the process of getting to Threatmapper and Threatstryker, and then talks about his journey from working as a systems programmer to launching a tech startup. We discuss the tense relationship between security and development in the industry, and end the conversation with some words of advice for engineers considering the entrepreneurial plunge.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>What is the difference between Threatmapper and Threatstryker at Deepfence? (00:55)</li><li>Sandeep explains how the Deepfence commission product builds upon the open source one (2:14)</li><li>Discussing the inexhaustibility of the cybersecurity landscape (11:40)</li><li>The genesis of Deepfence (13:58)</li><li>Sandeep discusses the business benefits of having an open source project (14:57)</li><li>Sandeep talks about his journey from systems programmer to tech startup (17:20)</li><li>Emily and Sandeep discuss the tense relationship between security and development (21:19)</li><li>Sandeep gives advice to engineers considering entrepreneurship (33:57)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Sandeep</p><ul><li>https://deepfence.io</li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 11 May 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/6b24e54f/3fc112c1.mp3" length="53692316" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2173</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Today I sat down with Sandeep Lahane, founder and CEO of Deepfence, a security preventive and detective solution for cloud and container native environments. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today I sat down with Sandeep Lahane, founder and CEO of Deepfence, a security preventive and detective solution for cloud and container native environments. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Lessons from Eric "The IT Guy" Hendricks</title>
      <itunes:episode>96</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>96</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Lessons from Eric "The IT Guy" Hendricks</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">bfba842a-3fd8-435f-aa6e-e1de27074168</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/fd0fedb8</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Some short thoughts on marketing in the open source ecosystem, drawn from my conversation with Eric on Wednesday. </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Some short thoughts on marketing in the open source ecosystem, drawn from my conversation with Eric on Wednesday. </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Fri, 06 May 2022 13:21:56 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/fd0fedb8/1b79ec5e.mp3" length="6587172" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>408</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Some short thoughts on marketing in the open source ecosystem, drawn from my conversation with Eric on Wednesday. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Some short thoughts on marketing in the open source ecosystem, drawn from my conversation with Eric on Wednesday. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Technical Marketing and Open Source with Eric Hendricks</title>
      <itunes:episode>95</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>95</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Technical Marketing and Open Source with Eric Hendricks</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">bb43502e-20d4-4c80-a089-2224bbbc3f19</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/f9c1b9fa</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I sit down with Eric Hendricks, the technical marketing director at Red Hat. Red Hat delivers open source solutions that make it easier for enterprises to work across platforms and environments. Eric begins the conversation by discussing his start as a technologist and how he decided to make the move to marketing. Eric then discusses the challenges of bringing marketing savvy into the devops space, including the unintended consequences of marketing buzzwords. I ask Eric about the relationship between marketing and open source, and Eric talks about how many of Red Hat’s community marketing efforts are driven through upstream communities. We then discuss the concept of the buyer in open source versus start ups, and how the difference is that the “big ask” in open source projects is emotional investment. Eric concludes the conversation by talking about the impact of his current role as a technical marketer as compared to the impact of a founder or IC. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Eric answers the question “At what point did you start to see yourself and did other people see you as a marketer?” (5:53)</li><li>The stigma around marketing and the problem with marketing buzzwords in devops (10:22)</li><li>Emily and Eric discuss the shared vocabulary problem that can arise with newer concepts in tech (14:35)</li><li>Eric talks about equipping his product’s “champions” with all the resources they need to communicate need and efficacy to potential buyers (15:39)</li><li>Emily asks Eric about the relationship between marketing and open source (19:50)</li><li>Emily and Eric discuss the concept of “the buyer” with open source (25:14)</li><li>Eric answers the question: “how are you able to have more of an impact in your current role than you would as an IC?” (29:30)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>Personal website: <a href="http://www.itguyeric.com/">www.itguyeric.com</a></li><li>Company website: <a href="http://www.redhat.com/">www.redhat.com</a></li><li>Twitter: @itguyeric</li><li>Company: @rhel</li><li>Podcasts: RHEL Presents, Into the Terminal</li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I sit down with Eric Hendricks, the technical marketing director at Red Hat. Red Hat delivers open source solutions that make it easier for enterprises to work across platforms and environments. Eric begins the conversation by discussing his start as a technologist and how he decided to make the move to marketing. Eric then discusses the challenges of bringing marketing savvy into the devops space, including the unintended consequences of marketing buzzwords. I ask Eric about the relationship between marketing and open source, and Eric talks about how many of Red Hat’s community marketing efforts are driven through upstream communities. We then discuss the concept of the buyer in open source versus start ups, and how the difference is that the “big ask” in open source projects is emotional investment. Eric concludes the conversation by talking about the impact of his current role as a technical marketer as compared to the impact of a founder or IC. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Eric answers the question “At what point did you start to see yourself and did other people see you as a marketer?” (5:53)</li><li>The stigma around marketing and the problem with marketing buzzwords in devops (10:22)</li><li>Emily and Eric discuss the shared vocabulary problem that can arise with newer concepts in tech (14:35)</li><li>Eric talks about equipping his product’s “champions” with all the resources they need to communicate need and efficacy to potential buyers (15:39)</li><li>Emily asks Eric about the relationship between marketing and open source (19:50)</li><li>Emily and Eric discuss the concept of “the buyer” with open source (25:14)</li><li>Eric answers the question: “how are you able to have more of an impact in your current role than you would as an IC?” (29:30)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>Personal website: <a href="http://www.itguyeric.com/">www.itguyeric.com</a></li><li>Company website: <a href="http://www.redhat.com/">www.redhat.com</a></li><li>Twitter: @itguyeric</li><li>Company: @rhel</li><li>Podcasts: RHEL Presents, Into the Terminal</li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 04 May 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/f9c1b9fa/d14c2ddc.mp3" length="52941306" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2149</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Today I sit down with Eric Hendricks, the technical marketing director at Red Hat. Red Hat delivers open source solutions that make it easier for enterprises to work across platforms and environments. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today I sit down with Eric Hendricks, the technical marketing director at Red Hat. Red Hat delivers open source solutions that make it easier for enterprises to work across platforms and environments. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Lessons from Omri Gazitt</title>
      <itunes:episode>94</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>94</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Lessons from Omri Gazitt</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">bf62008e-57ab-4f42-b497-9c89fa37f867</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/dc790752</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>I'm trying something new this week — adding an extra episode with some key takeaways from the interview earlier in the week. In this one, I talked about the education battle many cloud native companies face, the problem of open source projects that are too good and understanding pain points for different personas. </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I'm trying something new this week — adding an extra episode with some key takeaways from the interview earlier in the week. In this one, I talked about the education battle many cloud native companies face, the problem of open source projects that are too good and understanding pain points for different personas. </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Fri, 29 Apr 2022 12:47:35 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/dc790752/c17e1dad.mp3" length="5441304" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>337</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>I'm trying something new this week — adding an extra episode with some key takeaways from the interview earlier in the week. In this one, I talked about the education battle many cloud native companies face, the problem of open source projects that are too good and understanding pain points for different personas. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>I'm trying something new this week — adding an extra episode with some key takeaways from the interview earlier in the week. In this one, I talked about the education battle many cloud native companies face, the problem of open source projects that are to</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Cloud Native Authorization with Omri Gazitt</title>
      <itunes:episode>93</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>93</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Cloud Native Authorization with Omri Gazitt</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">a7aa2b0d-082e-4249-8a3e-0d69cd15645e</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/ea77d4f4</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I’m joined by Omri Gazitt, founder of Aserto, an authorization company that offers cloud native authorization as a service. We discuss the differences between ID authorization and authentication and the problems associated with educating developers on the distinctions. Omri also talks about the evolution of authorization from server software all the way to cloud native authorization. He then expounds on the strategic nature of the decision to open source or not, and offers advice to developers based on his experience as both an engineer and an executive. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>The beginnings of Aserto (7:50)</li><li>Omri talks about what it was like to be part of a startup, Neon, in the 90s (10:49)</li><li>Emily and Omri discuss what authorization was like pre-cloud native (13:32)</li><li>How integration became the strategy used by Aserto to begin to solve authorization problems (17:10)</li><li>The decision to open source and how organizations should be strategic when considering open source  (18:55)</li><li>Omri discusses his unique perspective as both a former tech engineer and executive in forming his start-up (25:08)</li><li>Omri talks about a missed opportunity in the early stages of Aserto (28:56)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Omri</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/ogazitt/">LinkedIn:</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/omrig">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://www.aserto.com/">Company</a></li></ul><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today I’m joined by Omri Gazitt, founder of Aserto, an authorization company that offers cloud native authorization as a service. We discuss the differences between ID authorization and authentication and the problems associated with educating developers on the distinctions. Omri also talks about the evolution of authorization from server software all the way to cloud native authorization. He then expounds on the strategic nature of the decision to open source or not, and offers advice to developers based on his experience as both an engineer and an executive. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>The beginnings of Aserto (7:50)</li><li>Omri talks about what it was like to be part of a startup, Neon, in the 90s (10:49)</li><li>Emily and Omri discuss what authorization was like pre-cloud native (13:32)</li><li>How integration became the strategy used by Aserto to begin to solve authorization problems (17:10)</li><li>The decision to open source and how organizations should be strategic when considering open source  (18:55)</li><li>Omri discusses his unique perspective as both a former tech engineer and executive in forming his start-up (25:08)</li><li>Omri talks about a missed opportunity in the early stages of Aserto (28:56)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Omri</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/ogazitt/">LinkedIn:</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/omrig">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://www.aserto.com/">Company</a></li></ul><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 27 Apr 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/ea77d4f4/0cccfa33.mp3" length="47901090" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1947</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>I’m joined by Omri Gazitt, founder of Aserto, an authorization company that offers cloud native authorization as a service. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>I’m joined by Omri Gazitt, founder of Aserto, an authorization company that offers cloud native authorization as a service. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>The Google Search for Data with Mark Grover</title>
      <itunes:episode>92</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>92</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>The Google Search for Data with Mark Grover</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">ee93c49b-d99b-4ff0-b0bb-793079c78b51</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/6a9fff44</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>I’m joined by Mark Grover, one of the founders of Stemma, a data catalogue for building decentralized data informed cultures. In essence it is a “Google Search” built for data scientists, data analyst, business leaders, and more. Stemma is striving to solve data documentation and relevance issues by keeping data cataloguing up to date and current.</p><p><br></p><p>In this episode Mark covers his transition from the data team at Lyft to establishing Stemma. He discusses how he identified the need for a source of truth for ETA data, and how the data scientist in these teams should be the end all for this knowledge. Starting with building Amundsen, Stemma expands on the groundwork laid there to bring data to the user and open-source community’s needs.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>An introduction to Mark and Stemma (00:00)</li><li>The history of Stemma (00:45)</li><li>How open source helped solved data cataloguing problems (4:40)</li><li>The decision to found Stemma (07:40)</li><li>How Stemma’s relationship with Amundsen has evolved (13:20)</li><li>The unexpected challenges and unexpected eases (18:35)</li><li>Navigating the co-founding experience (23:35)</li><li>Mark’s vision for Stemma’s future (28:54)</li><li>Mark’s tips for aspiring founders (32:54)</li></ul><p><br></p><p>Links:</p><p>Mark</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/grovermark">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/mark_grover?lang=en">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://www.stemma.ai/">Company</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I’m joined by Mark Grover, one of the founders of Stemma, a data catalogue for building decentralized data informed cultures. In essence it is a “Google Search” built for data scientists, data analyst, business leaders, and more. Stemma is striving to solve data documentation and relevance issues by keeping data cataloguing up to date and current.</p><p><br></p><p>In this episode Mark covers his transition from the data team at Lyft to establishing Stemma. He discusses how he identified the need for a source of truth for ETA data, and how the data scientist in these teams should be the end all for this knowledge. Starting with building Amundsen, Stemma expands on the groundwork laid there to bring data to the user and open-source community’s needs.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>An introduction to Mark and Stemma (00:00)</li><li>The history of Stemma (00:45)</li><li>How open source helped solved data cataloguing problems (4:40)</li><li>The decision to found Stemma (07:40)</li><li>How Stemma’s relationship with Amundsen has evolved (13:20)</li><li>The unexpected challenges and unexpected eases (18:35)</li><li>Navigating the co-founding experience (23:35)</li><li>Mark’s vision for Stemma’s future (28:54)</li><li>Mark’s tips for aspiring founders (32:54)</li></ul><p><br></p><p>Links:</p><p>Mark</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/grovermark">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/mark_grover?lang=en">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://www.stemma.ai/">Company</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 20 Apr 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/6a9fff44/fa933f43.mp3" length="50852674" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2078</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>I’m joined by Mark Grover, one of the founders of Stemma, a data catalogue for building decentralized data inform cultures. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>I’m joined by Mark Grover, one of the founders of Stemma, a data catalogue for building decentralized data inform cultures. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>A How To Guide for Startups with Matt Leray</title>
      <itunes:episode>91</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>91</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>A How To Guide for Startups with Matt Leray</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">fe5c4ce0-1324-48d1-b0f3-3a79f791e22b</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/f5f2945e</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>I’m joined by Matt Leray, co-founder and CTO Speedscale, an API testing product that applies “real world” stresses to “collect and replay traffic without scripting, simulate load and chaos, and measure performance.” With a history steeped in various aspects of tech, and with time spent in the startup space and cloud native space, Matt brings to the table some encompassing perspectives.</p><p><br></p><p>Matt’s career has carried him from monitoring satallite earth stations, to fiber optics, and more recently into cloud native. Matt began in startups, then went to larger companies, then back to startups, which he offers some insight on. Matt has a lot of wisdom to share on entrepreneurship, how the startup space has changed, and how to best navigate that. Matt discusses how Speedscale works as an “traffic replay” platform for APIs and his role there both technically and as a co-founder. Check out the conversation for a list of startup how-tos!</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Introduction to Matt and Speedscale (00:00)</li><li>When Matt decided to become an entrepreneur (02:10)</li><li>Deciding to jump into startups (06:00)</li><li>What has stayed the same, and what has changed for Matt’s entrepreneurship (10:00)</li><li>Being selective (14:00)</li><li>Nailing down the timing and finding the right moment for Speedscale (20:26)</li><li>Matt’s most controversial view about the cloud native startup space (26:25)</li><li>Matt’s final thoughts (30:18)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Matt</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/matthewleray/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/matthewleray">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://t.co/F3Zuk9foBo">Company</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>I’m joined by Matt Leray, co-founder and CTO Speedscale, an API testing product that applies “real world” stresses to “collect and replay traffic without scripting, simulate load and chaos, and measure performance.” With a history steeped in various aspects of tech, and with time spent in the startup space and cloud native space, Matt brings to the table some encompassing perspectives.</p><p><br></p><p>Matt’s career has carried him from monitoring satallite earth stations, to fiber optics, and more recently into cloud native. Matt began in startups, then went to larger companies, then back to startups, which he offers some insight on. Matt has a lot of wisdom to share on entrepreneurship, how the startup space has changed, and how to best navigate that. Matt discusses how Speedscale works as an “traffic replay” platform for APIs and his role there both technically and as a co-founder. Check out the conversation for a list of startup how-tos!</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Introduction to Matt and Speedscale (00:00)</li><li>When Matt decided to become an entrepreneur (02:10)</li><li>Deciding to jump into startups (06:00)</li><li>What has stayed the same, and what has changed for Matt’s entrepreneurship (10:00)</li><li>Being selective (14:00)</li><li>Nailing down the timing and finding the right moment for Speedscale (20:26)</li><li>Matt’s most controversial view about the cloud native startup space (26:25)</li><li>Matt’s final thoughts (30:18)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Matt</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/matthewleray/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/matthewleray">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://t.co/F3Zuk9foBo">Company</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 13 Apr 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/f5f2945e/189130ad.mp3" length="46542040" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1906</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>I’m joined by Matt Leray, co-founder and CTO Speedscale, an API testing product that applies “real world” stresses to “collect and replay traffic without scripting, simulate load and chaos, and measure performance.”</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>I’m joined by Matt Leray, co-founder and CTO Speedscale, an API testing product that applies “real world” stresses to “collect and replay traffic without scripting, simulate load and chaos, and measure performance.”</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>The Subtle Art of Coalition Building with Kit Merker</title>
      <itunes:episode>90</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>90</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>The Subtle Art of Coalition Building with Kit Merker</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">71221eab-6074-4565-80b1-4be068dd53e5</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/04836a91</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Kit Merker, co-founder and COO at Nobl9, a software reliability platform. Through software-defined SLO’s Nobl9 helps developers, DevOps and reliability engineers deliver more reliable features faster. Kit has had a storied career in tech, and as a result is a great source of wisdom and know how. Especially in regard to navigating the various sides of any given business. </p><p><br></p><p>In this episode, Kit offers up some anecdotes from his long history in the software space, and how he transitioned from engieenering to the “business side” of things. He tears down some stereotypical misrepresentations of both sides, and expands on how empathy helps alleviate many of these issues. Kit discusses his partnership experiences, work in M&amp;A, building a “coalition” in open space, and more! Tune in for our conversation for Kit’s emphatic and valuable insight.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Introduction to Kit and Nobl9 (00:00)</li><li>Why Kit decided to transition to the “business side” (03:55)</li><li>Kit’s reflections on partnerships (06:30)</li><li>The importance of building a coalition around Kubernetes (10:00)</li><li>Alleviating developer burnout (18:15)</li><li>Nobl9 and how it came to be and how they work (20:15)</li><li>The challenges of being a consultant first (27:00)</li><li>Recognizing the margins (33:30)</li></ul><p><br></p><p>Links:</p><p>Kit</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/kitmerker/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/kitmerker?lang=en">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://www.nobl9.com/">Nobl9</a></li></ul><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Kit Merker, co-founder and COO at Nobl9, a software reliability platform. Through software-defined SLO’s Nobl9 helps developers, DevOps and reliability engineers deliver more reliable features faster. Kit has had a storied career in tech, and as a result is a great source of wisdom and know how. Especially in regard to navigating the various sides of any given business. </p><p><br></p><p>In this episode, Kit offers up some anecdotes from his long history in the software space, and how he transitioned from engieenering to the “business side” of things. He tears down some stereotypical misrepresentations of both sides, and expands on how empathy helps alleviate many of these issues. Kit discusses his partnership experiences, work in M&amp;A, building a “coalition” in open space, and more! Tune in for our conversation for Kit’s emphatic and valuable insight.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Introduction to Kit and Nobl9 (00:00)</li><li>Why Kit decided to transition to the “business side” (03:55)</li><li>Kit’s reflections on partnerships (06:30)</li><li>The importance of building a coalition around Kubernetes (10:00)</li><li>Alleviating developer burnout (18:15)</li><li>Nobl9 and how it came to be and how they work (20:15)</li><li>The challenges of being a consultant first (27:00)</li><li>Recognizing the margins (33:30)</li></ul><p><br></p><p>Links:</p><p>Kit</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/kitmerker/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/kitmerker?lang=en">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://www.nobl9.com/">Nobl9</a></li></ul><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 06 Apr 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/04836a91/16e1b9a7.mp3" length="64045706" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2643</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>I’m joined by Kit Merker, co-founder and COO at Nobl9, a software reliability platform. Through software-defined SLO’s Nobl9 helps developers, DevOps and reliability engineers deliver more reliable features faster. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>I’m joined by Kit Merker, co-founder and COO at Nobl9, a software reliability platform. Through software-defined SLO’s Nobl9 helps developers, DevOps and reliability engineers deliver more reliable features faster. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Plural’s Navigation of the Open-Source Ecosystem with Michael Guarino </title>
      <itunes:episode>89</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>89</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Plural’s Navigation of the Open-Source Ecosystem with Michael Guarino </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">293aa8d8-62cb-464a-9038-818c74ee3854</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/6076abed</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Michael Guarino, founder of Plural, a unified platform for open-source management platform entirely hosted on Kubernetes which creates a fully functional ecosystem around deploying Airflow. Though working in Kubernetes and more, Plural can be used across a wide spectrum of open source projects. Many of which Plural is specifically targeting to make their product appealing to users.</p><p><br></p><p>In this episode, Michael talks about how Plural works within the open-source space, and how in using it with Airflow they’ve helped to elminate much of the work needed there. Michael lays out how using Plural makes using Airflow easier on the user, versus taking a DYI approach. Michael discusses avoiding lock-in, the various open source tools they use, working through the early days in COVID,  the history of building Plural, and more!</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Introduction to Michael and Plural (00:00)</li><li>The open source projects that work with Plural and its advantages (01:30)</li><li>How using Plural is easier than DYI and avoiding lock-in (04:06)</li><li>How Plural came to be (08:26)</li><li>The unexpected difficulties, and the unexpected ease (15:06)</li><li>Plural and open-source (18:40)</li><li>Navigating potential roadblocks to community building (23:09)</li><li>Monetization (26:20)</li><li>Michael’s thoughts on the future of open-source (28:11)</li></ul><p>Links<strong>:</strong></p><p>Michael</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/michael-guarino-33652298/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://www.plural.sh/">Plural</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Michael Guarino, founder of Plural, a unified platform for open-source management platform entirely hosted on Kubernetes which creates a fully functional ecosystem around deploying Airflow. Though working in Kubernetes and more, Plural can be used across a wide spectrum of open source projects. Many of which Plural is specifically targeting to make their product appealing to users.</p><p><br></p><p>In this episode, Michael talks about how Plural works within the open-source space, and how in using it with Airflow they’ve helped to elminate much of the work needed there. Michael lays out how using Plural makes using Airflow easier on the user, versus taking a DYI approach. Michael discusses avoiding lock-in, the various open source tools they use, working through the early days in COVID,  the history of building Plural, and more!</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Introduction to Michael and Plural (00:00)</li><li>The open source projects that work with Plural and its advantages (01:30)</li><li>How using Plural is easier than DYI and avoiding lock-in (04:06)</li><li>How Plural came to be (08:26)</li><li>The unexpected difficulties, and the unexpected ease (15:06)</li><li>Plural and open-source (18:40)</li><li>Navigating potential roadblocks to community building (23:09)</li><li>Monetization (26:20)</li><li>Michael’s thoughts on the future of open-source (28:11)</li></ul><p>Links<strong>:</strong></p><p>Michael</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/michael-guarino-33652298/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://www.plural.sh/">Plural</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 30 Mar 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/6076abed/997f2ba8.mp3" length="48299227" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1991</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>I’m joined by Michael Guarino, founder of Plural, a unified platform for open-source management entirely hosted on Kubernetes that creates a fully functional ecosystem around deploying Airflow. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>I’m joined by Michael Guarino, founder of Plural, a unified platform for open-source management entirely hosted on Kubernetes that creates a fully functional ecosystem around deploying Airflow. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Innovating on the Edge with Michael Tanenbaum </title>
      <itunes:episode>88</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>88</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Innovating on the Edge with Michael Tanenbaum </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">c786e32b-8906-4226-a03d-8815907f2c3e</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/6583e103</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today’s guest is Michael Tanenbaum, CEO and co-founder of Mycelial, an edge data platform for distributed local first applications that is built with developers in mind. Myceclial takes the accomplishments of the cloud native movement to bring data that exists outside the data center into the hands of the developers themselves. With a focus on data from the “edge”, which Michael defines as anything from a smart thermostat, to a 5g tower, applications, and more.</p><p><br></p><p>In this episode Michael lays out how he and his partners captilized on the oppurtunity of recent innovations in cloud native, and in turn commercialize the need to “get applications out of the data center to work harmoniously with applications in the data center.” He and his co-founders are striving to build complex edge native applications and local native data. Michael breaks down the “three pillars” of edge native to provide some crucial definitions, how he identified the needs Mycelial addresses, the diverse range of obstacles they’ve already surmounted, and more! </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>An introduction to Michael and Mycelial (00:00)</li><li>When Michael recognized the need for a product like Mycelial (02:32)</li><li>The “Three Pillars” of edge native (05:11)</li><li>Disovering an “unsexy” problem and deciding to solve it (09:00)</li><li>The unforseen difficulties of Mycelial (15:15)</li><li>The unforseen easy parts of Mycelial (20:32)</li><li>Some important takaways from the founding experience (26:45)</li></ul><p><br></p><p>Links<strong>:</strong></p><p>Michael</p><ul><li><a href="https://twitter.com/tbaums?lang=en">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://mycelial.com/">Mycelial</a></li></ul><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today’s guest is Michael Tanenbaum, CEO and co-founder of Mycelial, an edge data platform for distributed local first applications that is built with developers in mind. Myceclial takes the accomplishments of the cloud native movement to bring data that exists outside the data center into the hands of the developers themselves. With a focus on data from the “edge”, which Michael defines as anything from a smart thermostat, to a 5g tower, applications, and more.</p><p><br></p><p>In this episode Michael lays out how he and his partners captilized on the oppurtunity of recent innovations in cloud native, and in turn commercialize the need to “get applications out of the data center to work harmoniously with applications in the data center.” He and his co-founders are striving to build complex edge native applications and local native data. Michael breaks down the “three pillars” of edge native to provide some crucial definitions, how he identified the needs Mycelial addresses, the diverse range of obstacles they’ve already surmounted, and more! </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>An introduction to Michael and Mycelial (00:00)</li><li>When Michael recognized the need for a product like Mycelial (02:32)</li><li>The “Three Pillars” of edge native (05:11)</li><li>Disovering an “unsexy” problem and deciding to solve it (09:00)</li><li>The unforseen difficulties of Mycelial (15:15)</li><li>The unforseen easy parts of Mycelial (20:32)</li><li>Some important takaways from the founding experience (26:45)</li></ul><p><br></p><p>Links<strong>:</strong></p><p>Michael</p><ul><li><a href="https://twitter.com/tbaums?lang=en">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://mycelial.com/">Mycelial</a></li></ul><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 23 Mar 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/6583e103/738519b8.mp3" length="44105252" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1818</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Today’s guest is Michael Tanenbaum, CEO and co-founder of Mycelial, an edge data platform for distributed local first applications that is built with developers in mind.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today’s guest is Michael Tanenbaum, CEO and co-founder of Mycelial, an edge data platform for distributed local first applications that is built with developers in mind.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Turning Blame into an Opportunity to Learn with Lyon Wong</title>
      <itunes:episode>87</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>87</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Turning Blame into an Opportunity to Learn with Lyon Wong</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">c1e1b758-2cf2-4d56-b3d4-bf099c2e9cc3</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/2b07827b</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Lyon Wong, CEO and co-founder of Blameless, a complete reliability engineering platform that brings together AI-driven incident resolution, blameless retrospectives, SLOs/Error Budgets, and reliability insights reports and dashboards that enable businesses to optimize reliability and innovation. Lyon has a history steeped in founding and investing in start ups and company building, which has lead a heavy involvement in Blameless where he can apply the many lessons learned.</p><p><br></p><p>In this episode, Lyon breaks down his background and how it influenced his decision to become a founder at Blameless. Over the course of his career he noticed trends in other companies where teams were prevented from learning opportunities because they were worried about catching the blame. As a result Lyon identified the need in the market for a way to synthesize the cultural tensions around blame. Lyon’s insight on building trust, partnership, and communications on learning are deep and worthwhile. Check out the full conversation!</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>An introduction to Lyon and Blameless (00:00)</li><li>Jumping back into being a founder after time as a VC (2:28)</li><li>Creating a blameless culture (05:50)</li><li>What Lyon does different as a founder and investor and his early experiences (09:50)</li><li>The importance of credibility (16:10)</li><li>The “core skillsets” needed in start ups and some crucial beliefs (18:55)</li><li>The larger and smaller pictures, and balancing short and long term (25:34)</li><li>Lyon’s parting words and wisdom for founders (32:51)</li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Lyon Wong, CEO and co-founder of Blameless, a complete reliability engineering platform that brings together AI-driven incident resolution, blameless retrospectives, SLOs/Error Budgets, and reliability insights reports and dashboards that enable businesses to optimize reliability and innovation. Lyon has a history steeped in founding and investing in start ups and company building, which has lead a heavy involvement in Blameless where he can apply the many lessons learned.</p><p><br></p><p>In this episode, Lyon breaks down his background and how it influenced his decision to become a founder at Blameless. Over the course of his career he noticed trends in other companies where teams were prevented from learning opportunities because they were worried about catching the blame. As a result Lyon identified the need in the market for a way to synthesize the cultural tensions around blame. Lyon’s insight on building trust, partnership, and communications on learning are deep and worthwhile. Check out the full conversation!</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>An introduction to Lyon and Blameless (00:00)</li><li>Jumping back into being a founder after time as a VC (2:28)</li><li>Creating a blameless culture (05:50)</li><li>What Lyon does different as a founder and investor and his early experiences (09:50)</li><li>The importance of credibility (16:10)</li><li>The “core skillsets” needed in start ups and some crucial beliefs (18:55)</li><li>The larger and smaller pictures, and balancing short and long term (25:34)</li><li>Lyon’s parting words and wisdom for founders (32:51)</li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 16 Mar 2022 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/2b07827b/e5b7ab56.mp3" length="52393054" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2170</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Lyon Wong, CEO and co-founder of Blameless, on changing the blame culture in organizations to create opportunities to learn.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Lyon Wong, CEO and co-founder of Blameless, on changing the blame culture in organizations to create opportunities to learn.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Building a Kubernetes Operations Company with Haseeb Budhani</title>
      <itunes:episode>86</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>86</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Building a Kubernetes Operations Company with Haseeb Budhani</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">98347b21-64bf-4317-95d1-279c47a68a9b</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/a53441eb</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Haseeb Budhani, co-founder and CEO of Rafay Systems, a Kubernetes operations company joins the conversation. What a Kubernetes operation company is as companies use Kubernetes across their organizations they need the right automation, security, visibility and more. These are needs that come from multiple teams working across multiple applications, and it creates a lot of work. This is where Rafay Systems is looking to cover down.</p><p><br></p><p>Haseeb introduces us to the work at Rafay systems, and his own discovery of the problems they want to address. Haseeb discusses the history of Rafay’s establishment, and how they are striving to create a fluid and robust workflow engine. He reflects on how his previous experience has reinforced the lessons he brought to Rafay, how to connect to the customers, and more! Check out the conversation!</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>An introduction to Haseeb and Rafay Systems (00:00)</li><li>Lessons learned at other companies and staying the course (6:12)</li><li>Successfully connecting with the customers needs (12:29)</li><li>The lessons learned already at Rafay and some helpful advice (15:36)</li><li>Where the Kubernete’s ecosystem is headed (25:22)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Haseeb</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/budhani/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/haseebbudhani">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://rafay.co/">Company</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Haseeb Budhani, co-founder and CEO of Rafay Systems, a Kubernetes operations company joins the conversation. What a Kubernetes operation company is as companies use Kubernetes across their organizations they need the right automation, security, visibility and more. These are needs that come from multiple teams working across multiple applications, and it creates a lot of work. This is where Rafay Systems is looking to cover down.</p><p><br></p><p>Haseeb introduces us to the work at Rafay systems, and his own discovery of the problems they want to address. Haseeb discusses the history of Rafay’s establishment, and how they are striving to create a fluid and robust workflow engine. He reflects on how his previous experience has reinforced the lessons he brought to Rafay, how to connect to the customers, and more! Check out the conversation!</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>An introduction to Haseeb and Rafay Systems (00:00)</li><li>Lessons learned at other companies and staying the course (6:12)</li><li>Successfully connecting with the customers needs (12:29)</li><li>The lessons learned already at Rafay and some helpful advice (15:36)</li><li>Where the Kubernete’s ecosystem is headed (25:22)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Haseeb</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/budhani/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/haseebbudhani">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://rafay.co/">Company</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 09 Mar 2022 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/a53441eb/0f8de0e8.mp3" length="42493521" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1762</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Haseeb Budhani, co-founder and CEO of Rafay Systems, a Kubernetes operations company joins the conversation. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Haseeb Budhani, co-founder and CEO of Rafay Systems, a Kubernetes operations company joins the conversation. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Molding a Passion for Open Source into a Company with Andrew Rynhard </title>
      <itunes:episode>85</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>85</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Molding a Passion for Open Source into a Company with Andrew Rynhard </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">3a5318da-e6b9-43f3-a1a9-3aeb3c22d9fa</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/36a48dbd</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Andrew Rynhard, Founder and CTO of Sidero Labs, joins the show today to discuss his work and Sidero Labs. Sidero is a Kubernetes lifecycle management reimagined from the operating system to entire stack. Andrew has origins steeped deeply in open source, and it has become a central focus to his entire ethos and drive.</p><p><br></p><p>Andrew breaks down his own trajectory that lead to Sidero and the passion he leveled for the endevour from the onset. Andrew’s passion for open source served as the impetus founding the company, and he shares his love for open source and the pathways that it created for him through his career. Andrew shares Sidero Lab’s successful initial funding, the shift to it being his full-time job, and their meteoric rise.</p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>An introduction to Andrew and Sidero Labs (00:00)</li><li>The early days of Sidero Labs and their current position (03:10)</li><li>The moment Sidero became Andrew’s primary focus and the companies journey (08:05)</li><li>Sidero’s focus on distributed systems (17:48)</li><li>The challenges of a project that is far down the stack (22:15)</li><li>Some final thoughts from Andrew (31:35)</li></ul><p><br></p><p>Links:</p><p>Andrew</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/andrewrynhard/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/andrewrynhard/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/andrewrynhard?lang=en">https://twitter.com/andrewrynhard?lang=en</a></li><li>Company:<a href="https://www.siderolabs.com/">https://www.siderolabs.com</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Andrew Rynhard, Founder and CTO of Sidero Labs, joins the show today to discuss his work and Sidero Labs. Sidero is a Kubernetes lifecycle management reimagined from the operating system to entire stack. Andrew has origins steeped deeply in open source, and it has become a central focus to his entire ethos and drive.</p><p><br></p><p>Andrew breaks down his own trajectory that lead to Sidero and the passion he leveled for the endevour from the onset. Andrew’s passion for open source served as the impetus founding the company, and he shares his love for open source and the pathways that it created for him through his career. Andrew shares Sidero Lab’s successful initial funding, the shift to it being his full-time job, and their meteoric rise.</p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>An introduction to Andrew and Sidero Labs (00:00)</li><li>The early days of Sidero Labs and their current position (03:10)</li><li>The moment Sidero became Andrew’s primary focus and the companies journey (08:05)</li><li>Sidero’s focus on distributed systems (17:48)</li><li>The challenges of a project that is far down the stack (22:15)</li><li>Some final thoughts from Andrew (31:35)</li></ul><p><br></p><p>Links:</p><p>Andrew</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/andrewrynhard/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/andrewrynhard/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/andrewrynhard?lang=en">https://twitter.com/andrewrynhard?lang=en</a></li><li>Company:<a href="https://www.siderolabs.com/">https://www.siderolabs.com</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 02 Mar 2022 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/36a48dbd/4db49bb7.mp3" length="47338932" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1965</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Andrew Rynhard, CTO of Sidero Labs, joins the show today to discuss his work and Sidero Labs, a Kubernetes lifecycle management reimagined from the operating system to entire stack. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Andrew Rynhard, CTO of Sidero Labs, joins the show today to discuss his work and Sidero Labs, a Kubernetes lifecycle management reimagined from the operating system to entire stack. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Collaboration and an Emphasis on Project Over Product with Open Telemetry </title>
      <itunes:episode>84</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>84</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Collaboration and an Emphasis on Project Over Product with Open Telemetry </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">094fe790-0620-4a7a-b6da-1b0107f3cd70</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/328af400</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today’s episode is a round table with Morgan McClean, Ben Sigelman, and Alolita Sharma, the maintainers of Open Telemetry. Open Telemetry is a high-quality, ubiquitous, and portable telemetry to enable effective observability with a mission to make telemetry as approachable and applicable as possible. Open Telemetry’s values center on compatibility, reliability, resilience, and performance. With these objectives in hand, our maintainers are making waves in open space.</p><p><br></p><p>In this episode Morgan, Ben, and Alolita breakdown their individaul involvement in Open Telemetry. They discuss the paths each of them took to end up there, and the varied skillsets the bring to the project. Open Telemetry’s vision and mission is unique in its clarity and precision, and they share some insight as to why. Open Telemetry’s collaboration allows the space for their mission statement to shine through, and as a project before a product, give to the open source community. Check out the conversation for Morgan, Ben and Alolita’s excellent perspectives!</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Introductions to our three maintainers and their invovlement in Open Telemetry (00:26)</li><li>Why and how Open Telemetry has such an explicitly clear mission and vision (03:44)</li><li>Making it clear what Open Telemetry is not (08:20)</li><li>Thinking as a project, not product (10:45)</li><li>The pros and cons of working with “frenemies” (17:55)</li><li>Why Open Telemetry has been successful (27:22)</li><li>Closing comments on Open Telemetry (32:35)</li></ul><p><br></p><p>Links:</p><p>Open Telemetry</p><ul><li>Twitter: @opentelemetry, Ben (@el_bhs), Alolita (@alolita)</li><li>Company: <a href="https://opentelemetry.io/">https://opentelemetry.io</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Today’s episode is a round table with Morgan McClean, Ben Sigelman, and Alolita Sharma, the maintainers of Open Telemetry. Open Telemetry is a high-quality, ubiquitous, and portable telemetry to enable effective observability with a mission to make telemetry as approachable and applicable as possible. Open Telemetry’s values center on compatibility, reliability, resilience, and performance. With these objectives in hand, our maintainers are making waves in open space.</p><p><br></p><p>In this episode Morgan, Ben, and Alolita breakdown their individaul involvement in Open Telemetry. They discuss the paths each of them took to end up there, and the varied skillsets the bring to the project. Open Telemetry’s vision and mission is unique in its clarity and precision, and they share some insight as to why. Open Telemetry’s collaboration allows the space for their mission statement to shine through, and as a project before a product, give to the open source community. Check out the conversation for Morgan, Ben and Alolita’s excellent perspectives!</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Introductions to our three maintainers and their invovlement in Open Telemetry (00:26)</li><li>Why and how Open Telemetry has such an explicitly clear mission and vision (03:44)</li><li>Making it clear what Open Telemetry is not (08:20)</li><li>Thinking as a project, not product (10:45)</li><li>The pros and cons of working with “frenemies” (17:55)</li><li>Why Open Telemetry has been successful (27:22)</li><li>Closing comments on Open Telemetry (32:35)</li></ul><p><br></p><p>Links:</p><p>Open Telemetry</p><ul><li>Twitter: @opentelemetry, Ben (@el_bhs), Alolita (@alolita)</li><li>Company: <a href="https://opentelemetry.io/">https://opentelemetry.io</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 23 Feb 2022 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/328af400/e41ec707.mp3" length="50482976" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2096</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Today’s episode is a round table with Morgan McClean, Ben Sigelman, and Alolita Sharma, the maintainers of Open Telemetry. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Today’s episode is a round table with Morgan McClean, Ben Sigelman, and Alolita Sharma, the maintainers of Open Telemetry. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>The Intersection of Developer Lead Companies and Capital with Tyler Jewell</title>
      <itunes:episode>83</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>83</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>The Intersection of Developer Lead Companies and Capital with Tyler Jewell</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">adbbd7a9-4043-4e45-8f33-29fa39e3aeec</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/a146b6dc</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Tyler Jewell, Managing Director at Dell Technologies Capital, joins me for a deep conversation about the intersection of capital and technology. As a managing director, Tyler harnesses a focus on developer lead companies and the push he makes for those companies when it comes to funding. For Dell Technologies Capital, the focus is on providing the financial support and backing for the market that is developing around the developers themselves.</p><p><br></p><p>Tyler breaks down how he honed his focus on backing developers. He refers to the rise of software developers as a “talent class” where he could cultivate investments and partnerships. Tyler shares his parameters for how he categorizes companies and software into four “buckets,” which facilitates the focus he lends to these companies. From identification, to the intersection with capital, check out this conversation for Tyler’s in-depth and exacting definitions.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Introduction to Tyler and Dell Technologies Capital (00:00)</li><li>Defining what it means to be “developer lead.” (02:15)</li><li>Tyler defines his differences between DevTools and DevPlatforms (4:50)</li><li>Who is a developer? What is the difference between developer lead companies and the rest? (08:20)</li><li>Tyler provides insight for those who want to found a developer centric company (14:35)</li><li>Tyler’s predictions for the coming year, and some advice (21:45</li></ul><p><br></p><p>Links:</p><p>Tyler</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tylerjewell/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://mobile.twitter.com/tylerjewell">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://www.delltechnologiescapital.com/">Dell Technologies Capital</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Tyler Jewell, Managing Director at Dell Technologies Capital, joins me for a deep conversation about the intersection of capital and technology. As a managing director, Tyler harnesses a focus on developer lead companies and the push he makes for those companies when it comes to funding. For Dell Technologies Capital, the focus is on providing the financial support and backing for the market that is developing around the developers themselves.</p><p><br></p><p>Tyler breaks down how he honed his focus on backing developers. He refers to the rise of software developers as a “talent class” where he could cultivate investments and partnerships. Tyler shares his parameters for how he categorizes companies and software into four “buckets,” which facilitates the focus he lends to these companies. From identification, to the intersection with capital, check out this conversation for Tyler’s in-depth and exacting definitions.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Introduction to Tyler and Dell Technologies Capital (00:00)</li><li>Defining what it means to be “developer lead.” (02:15)</li><li>Tyler defines his differences between DevTools and DevPlatforms (4:50)</li><li>Who is a developer? What is the difference between developer lead companies and the rest? (08:20)</li><li>Tyler provides insight for those who want to found a developer centric company (14:35)</li><li>Tyler’s predictions for the coming year, and some advice (21:45</li></ul><p><br></p><p>Links:</p><p>Tyler</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tylerjewell/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://mobile.twitter.com/tylerjewell">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://www.delltechnologiescapital.com/">Dell Technologies Capital</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 16 Feb 2022 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/a146b6dc/40ff2ef2.mp3" length="41395063" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1721</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Tyler Jewell, Managing Director at Dell Technologies Capital, joins me for a deep conversation about the intersection of capital and technology. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Tyler Jewell, Managing Director at Dell Technologies Capital, joins me for a deep conversation about the intersection of capital and technology. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>RakN’s Focus on Infrastructure as Code Automation with Rob Hirschfeld</title>
      <itunes:episode>82</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>82</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>RakN’s Focus on Infrastructure as Code Automation with Rob Hirschfeld</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">88de8ccc-7071-4b75-9f3c-0c69f3913aec</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/d96ff5f7</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Rob Hirschfeld, CEO of and co-founder of RakN, joins the show to discuss their work in the world of automation. Notably so, automation of data centers using infrastructure code principles to create “infrastructure pipelines.” Rob’s honest and open story provides a great example of how to identify areas that need a product, to developing the product itself.</p><p>In this episode, Rob gives us the history of RakN from the earlier inception when he was at Dell, to where they stand today. Rob shares some insight on the challenges of DevOps when it comes to dealing with the various “silos” that organizations have created. He reflects on their transition away from Dell, and how they realized they needed to be table to talk to customers about how they used their products.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Introduction to Rob and RakN, a focus on automation, and their origins (00:00)</li><li>The differences between building and shipping instead of just building on site (04:40)</li><li>The transition away from Dell and RakN’s early growing pains (08:20) </li><li>The hardest parts of the technology/commercial balance (14:45)</li><li>Some critical lessons from the transition (23:25)</li><li>Reflecting on the early days and lessons (30:25) </li></ul><p><br><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Rob</p><ul><li><a href="https://twitter.com/zehicle">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/rhirschfeld/">LinkedIn</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Rob Hirschfeld, CEO of and co-founder of RakN, joins the show to discuss their work in the world of automation. Notably so, automation of data centers using infrastructure code principles to create “infrastructure pipelines.” Rob’s honest and open story provides a great example of how to identify areas that need a product, to developing the product itself.</p><p>In this episode, Rob gives us the history of RakN from the earlier inception when he was at Dell, to where they stand today. Rob shares some insight on the challenges of DevOps when it comes to dealing with the various “silos” that organizations have created. He reflects on their transition away from Dell, and how they realized they needed to be table to talk to customers about how they used their products.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Introduction to Rob and RakN, a focus on automation, and their origins (00:00)</li><li>The differences between building and shipping instead of just building on site (04:40)</li><li>The transition away from Dell and RakN’s early growing pains (08:20) </li><li>The hardest parts of the technology/commercial balance (14:45)</li><li>Some critical lessons from the transition (23:25)</li><li>Reflecting on the early days and lessons (30:25) </li></ul><p><br><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Rob</p><ul><li><a href="https://twitter.com/zehicle">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/rhirschfeld/">LinkedIn</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 09 Feb 2022 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/d96ff5f7/8c6a3ab0.mp3" length="55087248" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2289</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Rob Hirschfeld, CEO and co-founder of RakN, talks about their focus on infrastructure as code automation.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Rob Hirschfeld, CEO and co-founder of RakN, talks about their focus on infrastructure as code automation.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Moving from Open Source to a Commercial Endeavor with Sam Bhagwat</title>
      <itunes:episode>81</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>81</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Moving from Open Source to a Commercial Endeavor with Sam Bhagwat</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">09d6abe6-0bb6-4ba0-8a4e-acef74df5ac9</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/c711a446</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Sam Bhagwat, Co-founder &amp; Chief Strategy Officer at Gatsby, joins me for a conversation about his work. Gatsby is an open source project using React with a focus on building web sites, and not just web apps. As CSO Sam tracks the trends in the modern web development space and helps Gatsby to stay on the innovative edge. From the origin of the open source project in 2015, to the establishment of the company in 2017, Sam and Gatsby’s contributions have only grown exponentially since then.</p><p><br></p><p>Sam talks about the history of Gatsby’s rise to prominence and their shift from open source into a proper business. Sam dives into how and why they’ve leaned on investment into the company to help them better address the needs of the web site development ecosystem. From the first service they charged money for, Sam’s take on open source and commercial crossing paths, to Gatsby’s global focus, Sam offers up a lot for consideration! </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Introduction to Sam and Gatsby (00:00)</li><li>Moving from purely open source into a business (03:20)</li><li>Sam’s perspectives on open source and commercial offerings (08:20)</li><li>Open source as not only a DevTool (12:03)</li><li>Building websites and brining multiple parties on board (15:16)</li><li>Sam’s advice to others starting open source projects (21:06)</li><li>Where to find Sam (25:40)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><br>Links:</p><p>Sam</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/sambhagwat">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/calcsam?ref_src=twsrc%5Egoogle%7Ctwcamp%5Eserp%7Ctwgr%5Eauthor">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://www.gatsbyjs.com/">https://www.gatsbyjs.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Sam Bhagwat, Co-founder &amp; Chief Strategy Officer at Gatsby, joins me for a conversation about his work. Gatsby is an open source project using React with a focus on building web sites, and not just web apps. As CSO Sam tracks the trends in the modern web development space and helps Gatsby to stay on the innovative edge. From the origin of the open source project in 2015, to the establishment of the company in 2017, Sam and Gatsby’s contributions have only grown exponentially since then.</p><p><br></p><p>Sam talks about the history of Gatsby’s rise to prominence and their shift from open source into a proper business. Sam dives into how and why they’ve leaned on investment into the company to help them better address the needs of the web site development ecosystem. From the first service they charged money for, Sam’s take on open source and commercial crossing paths, to Gatsby’s global focus, Sam offers up a lot for consideration! </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Introduction to Sam and Gatsby (00:00)</li><li>Moving from purely open source into a business (03:20)</li><li>Sam’s perspectives on open source and commercial offerings (08:20)</li><li>Open source as not only a DevTool (12:03)</li><li>Building websites and brining multiple parties on board (15:16)</li><li>Sam’s advice to others starting open source projects (21:06)</li><li>Where to find Sam (25:40)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><br>Links:</p><p>Sam</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/sambhagwat">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/calcsam?ref_src=twsrc%5Egoogle%7Ctwcamp%5Eserp%7Ctwgr%5Eauthor">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://www.gatsbyjs.com/">https://www.gatsbyjs.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 02 Feb 2022 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/c711a446/a8775e32.mp3" length="38924532" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1616</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Sam Bhagwat, Cofounder &amp;amp; Chief Strategy Officer at Gatsby, an open source project with a focus on building web sites, joins us to talk about their business.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Sam Bhagwat, Cofounder &amp;amp; Chief Strategy Officer at Gatsby, an open source project with a focus on building web sites, joins us to talk about their business.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Making Data Transparent and Accessible with Avi Press</title>
      <itunes:episode>80</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>80</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Making Data Transparent and Accessible with Avi Press</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">29dcaa91-2536-4714-a0b0-9ad0a9077176</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/dfa39daf</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Avi Press, CEO and Co-Founder of Scarf, joins me for an in depth conversation about Scarf and the work they are doing in transparecny in open source maintainers. Avi’s career and the tools he built lead to a decision to capitalize on his tools. Now Scarf is an extension of his work into a commercial opportunity to change the open source ecosystem. </p><p><br></p><p>Avi addresses the general maintaner issues that Scarf wishes to solve. Avi expands on his processes that have landed on a data forward approach and the importance of making that data is a viable capital value. Avi also breaks down the uses of Scarf for maintainers and the suite of tools they are implementing. Importantly so, Avi talks about the ways that the open source space can change to stay innovative and relevant. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Introduction to Avi and Scarf’s work (00:00)</li><li>Shaping his own tools for use (03:50)</li><li>Scarf’s suite of tools and engaging with the metrics (06:14)</li><li>Some highlights and information for Scarf users (12:41)</li><li>Areas where Scarf is building (17:00)</li><li>How Scarf is working to guard privacy (22:12)</li><li>Making registry lock in a conversation (27:30)</li><li>Avi discusses the open source world and some changes that can be made (30:00)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Avi</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/avi-press-4437a356/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/avi_press">Twitter: @avi_press</a></li><li><a href="https://about.scarf.sh/">Scarf</a></li></ul><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Avi Press, CEO and Co-Founder of Scarf, joins me for an in depth conversation about Scarf and the work they are doing in transparecny in open source maintainers. Avi’s career and the tools he built lead to a decision to capitalize on his tools. Now Scarf is an extension of his work into a commercial opportunity to change the open source ecosystem. </p><p><br></p><p>Avi addresses the general maintaner issues that Scarf wishes to solve. Avi expands on his processes that have landed on a data forward approach and the importance of making that data is a viable capital value. Avi also breaks down the uses of Scarf for maintainers and the suite of tools they are implementing. Importantly so, Avi talks about the ways that the open source space can change to stay innovative and relevant. </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Introduction to Avi and Scarf’s work (00:00)</li><li>Shaping his own tools for use (03:50)</li><li>Scarf’s suite of tools and engaging with the metrics (06:14)</li><li>Some highlights and information for Scarf users (12:41)</li><li>Areas where Scarf is building (17:00)</li><li>How Scarf is working to guard privacy (22:12)</li><li>Making registry lock in a conversation (27:30)</li><li>Avi discusses the open source world and some changes that can be made (30:00)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Avi</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/avi-press-4437a356/">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/avi_press">Twitter: @avi_press</a></li><li><a href="https://about.scarf.sh/">Scarf</a></li></ul><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 26 Jan 2022 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/dfa39daf/f9e45fd2.mp3" length="46684702" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1940</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Avi Press, CEO and Co-Founder of Scarf, joins me for an in depth conversation about Scarf and the work they are doing in open source maintainers.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Avi Press, CEO and Co-Founder of Scarf, joins me for an in depth conversation about Scarf and the work they are doing in open source maintainers.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Rebranding to Reflect the Infrastructure with Alex Chircop</title>
      <itunes:episode>79</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>79</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Rebranding to Reflect the Infrastructure with Alex Chircop</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">ea350e13-2d51-4ad1-8c74-4075b67f238f</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/dc9e5806</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Alex Chircop, CEO of <a href="http://ondat.io/">Ondat.io</a>, joins me to talk about his company and their recent rebrand to reflect their shift to focus on some fundamental changes in the industry. With a changing persepective that mirrors the changes happening in cloud data and its uses, Alex and the teams at Ondat.io are staying ahead of the curve and implementing some institutional changes.</p><p><br></p><p>In this episode Alex goes into the details of their rebranding, and he discusses how they are shifting to answer what Alex calls the “infrastructural dilemma.” With the massive shift to cloud native that developers are making, and the requirements that are demanded by the adoption of these infrastructural demands, Alex and his team are staying in step with the larger community. Alex also discusses the “why” behind their drive to rebrand, and their determination to maneuver the concept of storage as server based into data services that are application centric.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Alex’s introdcution and the rebranding of Ondat (00:29)</li><li>What was happening inside Storage OS that drove them to rebrand (05:00)</li><li>What it took to follow through a succesful rebranding (09:33)</li><li>The feedback from the rebranding and branding as a personal choice (14:10)</li><li>The teams coalescence around the new brand and landing on a name (18:57)</li><li>Some advice for others who are looking to rebrand (22:33) </li><li>What is next for Ondat and thier coming services (24:30)</li></ul><p><br></p><p>Links:</p><p>Alex</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/alexchircop/?originalSubdomain=uk">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/chira001">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="http://www.ondat.io/">www.ondat.io</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Alex Chircop, CEO of <a href="http://ondat.io/">Ondat.io</a>, joins me to talk about his company and their recent rebrand to reflect their shift to focus on some fundamental changes in the industry. With a changing persepective that mirrors the changes happening in cloud data and its uses, Alex and the teams at Ondat.io are staying ahead of the curve and implementing some institutional changes.</p><p><br></p><p>In this episode Alex goes into the details of their rebranding, and he discusses how they are shifting to answer what Alex calls the “infrastructural dilemma.” With the massive shift to cloud native that developers are making, and the requirements that are demanded by the adoption of these infrastructural demands, Alex and his team are staying in step with the larger community. Alex also discusses the “why” behind their drive to rebrand, and their determination to maneuver the concept of storage as server based into data services that are application centric.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Alex’s introdcution and the rebranding of Ondat (00:29)</li><li>What was happening inside Storage OS that drove them to rebrand (05:00)</li><li>What it took to follow through a succesful rebranding (09:33)</li><li>The feedback from the rebranding and branding as a personal choice (14:10)</li><li>The teams coalescence around the new brand and landing on a name (18:57)</li><li>Some advice for others who are looking to rebrand (22:33) </li><li>What is next for Ondat and thier coming services (24:30)</li></ul><p><br></p><p>Links:</p><p>Alex</p><ul><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/alexchircop/?originalSubdomain=uk">LinkedIn</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/chira001">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="http://www.ondat.io/">www.ondat.io</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 19 Jan 2022 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/dc9e5806/7d3b4997.mp3" length="38892694" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1616</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Alex Chircop, CEO of Ondat.io, joins me to discuss in detail his company’s rebranding in order to change with the infrasctural demands of cloud native.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Alex Chircop, CEO of Ondat.io, joins me to discuss in detail his company’s rebranding in order to change with the infrasctural demands of cloud native.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>A Bird's Eye View of Open Source with Matt Yonkovit</title>
      <itunes:episode>78</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>78</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>A Bird's Eye View of Open Source with Matt Yonkovit</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">94d0fae7-14eb-45be-8aff-919d0412c1e9</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/99e786b8</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Matt Yonkovit, Head of Open Source Strategy at Percona, joins me for a conversation about Percona’s work and their robust history in open source. Percona has been at it for 15 years now and Matt’s work there is both prolific and sets him up to be very well informed about open source strategy at large.</p><p><br></p><p>In this episode, Matt discusses what exactly his job means within the context of Percona, and how he covers down to help both the higher echelons of the company, but also the community. Matt provides an excellent bird's eye view of what is going on in the world of open source. His experience highlights many of the challenges that the open source model is currently facing, and can expect to face in the near future. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Introduction to Percona and the work Matt does there (00:00)</li><li>Open source strategy and Matt’s take on its role in an organization (04:20) </li><li>Choosing where to place priorities and where open source is going (08:00) </li><li>The ins and outs of pricing models/Percona’s contributions (12:00)</li><li>Who doesn’t fit the Percona mold? (17:09)</li><li>Maintaining integrity and staying malleable (21:30) </li><li>“Shooting [the] sacred cows” of growth (30:45)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Connect with Matt</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/myonk">https://www.linkedin.com/in/myonk</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/myonkovit">https://twitter.com/myonkovit</a></li><li>Percona: <a href="https://www.percona.com">https://www.percona.com</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Matt Yonkovit, Head of Open Source Strategy at Percona, joins me for a conversation about Percona’s work and their robust history in open source. Percona has been at it for 15 years now and Matt’s work there is both prolific and sets him up to be very well informed about open source strategy at large.</p><p><br></p><p>In this episode, Matt discusses what exactly his job means within the context of Percona, and how he covers down to help both the higher echelons of the company, but also the community. Matt provides an excellent bird's eye view of what is going on in the world of open source. His experience highlights many of the challenges that the open source model is currently facing, and can expect to face in the near future. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Introduction to Percona and the work Matt does there (00:00)</li><li>Open source strategy and Matt’s take on its role in an organization (04:20) </li><li>Choosing where to place priorities and where open source is going (08:00) </li><li>The ins and outs of pricing models/Percona’s contributions (12:00)</li><li>Who doesn’t fit the Percona mold? (17:09)</li><li>Maintaining integrity and staying malleable (21:30) </li><li>“Shooting [the] sacred cows” of growth (30:45)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Connect with Matt</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/myonk">https://www.linkedin.com/in/myonk</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/myonkovit">https://twitter.com/myonkovit</a></li><li>Percona: <a href="https://www.percona.com">https://www.percona.com</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 12 Jan 2022 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/99e786b8/0d8877eb.mp3" length="54827195" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2280</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Matt Yonkovit, Head of Open Source Strategy at Percona, joins me to discuss the nature of his work at Percona and in the open source space.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Matt Yonkovit, Head of Open Source Strategy at Percona, joins me to discuss the nature of his work at Percona and in the open source space.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Navigating Risks and Building Open Source Communities with Dawn Foster</title>
      <itunes:episode>77</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>77</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Navigating Risks and Building Open Source Communities with Dawn Foster</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">4f481878-c582-48ac-bfdd-516261bd62ad</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/7b1ea002</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Dawn Foster, Director of Open Source Community Strategy at VMware, joins me to chat about open sourcing and the potential risks to consider. With 20+ years of experience in business technology, Dawn lends great insight not only as a leader in the realm of open source, but as a champion for measuring project health.</p><p><br></p><p>In this episode, Dawn discusses key risks to consider when open sourcing a project and what startups and small companies should think about as they embrace open source technologies. We also explore trust as a currency of open source, donating to neutral foundations, the CNCF Project Health Measurement Guide, and more.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>What companies should consider when open sourcing a project. (00:24)</li><li>Risks associated with open sourcing and the advantage of contributing projects to foundations. (03:59)</li><li>Dawn explores the interrelation between using and contributing to an open source project. (07:26)  </li><li>A discussion about evaluating and prioritizing a large number of projects - and why smaller companies should be deliberate about the open source technologies they embrace. (11:49)  </li><li>A look at contributor risk with examples of how the risks can vary depending on the project. (17:09)  </li><li>The value of trust in the open source - and Kim’s final thoughts on measuring project health. (22:35)  </li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Connect with Dawn:</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/dawnfoster/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/dawnfoster/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/geekygirldawn">https://twitter.com/geekygirldawn</a></li><li>Fast Wonder Blog: <a href="https://fastwonderblog.com/">https://fastwonderblog.com/</a></li><li>VMware: <a href="https://www.vmware.com/">https://www.vmware.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Dawn Foster, Director of Open Source Community Strategy at VMware, joins me to chat about open sourcing and the potential risks to consider. With 20+ years of experience in business technology, Dawn lends great insight not only as a leader in the realm of open source, but as a champion for measuring project health.</p><p><br></p><p>In this episode, Dawn discusses key risks to consider when open sourcing a project and what startups and small companies should think about as they embrace open source technologies. We also explore trust as a currency of open source, donating to neutral foundations, the CNCF Project Health Measurement Guide, and more.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>What companies should consider when open sourcing a project. (00:24)</li><li>Risks associated with open sourcing and the advantage of contributing projects to foundations. (03:59)</li><li>Dawn explores the interrelation between using and contributing to an open source project. (07:26)  </li><li>A discussion about evaluating and prioritizing a large number of projects - and why smaller companies should be deliberate about the open source technologies they embrace. (11:49)  </li><li>A look at contributor risk with examples of how the risks can vary depending on the project. (17:09)  </li><li>The value of trust in the open source - and Kim’s final thoughts on measuring project health. (22:35)  </li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Connect with Dawn:</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/dawnfoster/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/dawnfoster/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/geekygirldawn">https://twitter.com/geekygirldawn</a></li><li>Fast Wonder Blog: <a href="https://fastwonderblog.com/">https://fastwonderblog.com/</a></li><li>VMware: <a href="https://www.vmware.com/">https://www.vmware.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 05 Jan 2022 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/7b1ea002/18135a78.mp3" length="40546326" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1687</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Dawn Foster, Director of Open Source Community Strategy at VMware, joins me to chat about open sourcing and the potential risks to consider. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Dawn Foster, Director of Open Source Community Strategy at VMware, joins me to chat about open sourcing and the potential risks to consider. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>The Evolving Job Market for Kubernetes Talent with Joe Bignell</title>
      <itunes:episode>76</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>76</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>The Evolving Job Market for Kubernetes Talent with Joe Bignell</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">06c8b29f-7b74-4a6c-8d44-74c67d1580c2</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/01aa2c9b</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Joe Bignell, the Kubernetes recruiter at InterQuest Group, joins me for an interesting conversation about the current job market in the Kubernetes space and his role and vision as a talent seeker.</p><p><br>In this episode, Joe and I go into the rabbit hole as we explore the global talent shortage and its impact on the Kubernetes ecosystem. Joe shares invaluable insight and perspective on recruiting for startups, what founders can do to attract talent, and why transparency from all sides (company, recruiter, and candidate) is vital. We also discuss remote work and its increased value and how companies can leverage their Kubernetes talent.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>What is Joe’s responsibility as the Kubernetes recruiter? (00:19)</li><li>The current hiring challenges in the Kubernetes talent space. (01:00)</li><li>Joe’s perspective on recruiting best practices - and his thoughts on companies that seek Kubernetes experts. (06:30)</li><li>A look at the founder/recruiter relationship, how founders can enhance their recruiting positioning, and the evolution of remote work. (12:31)</li><li>The pros and cons of recruiting for a startup – and why certain hires can ruin a startup. (19:33)</li><li>What companies can do to create Kubernetes experts and the role InterQuest plays in closing the talent market gap. (23:06)<p></p></li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>Joe’s LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/joebignell/?originalSubdomain=uk">https://www.linkedin.com/in/joebignell/?originalSubdomain=uk</a></li><li>Joe’s Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/joe_bignell">https://twitter.com/joe_bignell</a></li><li>DevOps for Everyone: <a href="https://www.meetup.com/DevOps-For-Everyone/">https://www.meetup.com/DevOps-For-Everyone/</a></li><li>InterQuest Group: <a href="https://www.interquestgroup.com/">https://www.interquestgroup.com/<br></a><br></li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Joe Bignell, the Kubernetes recruiter at InterQuest Group, joins me for an interesting conversation about the current job market in the Kubernetes space and his role and vision as a talent seeker.</p><p><br>In this episode, Joe and I go into the rabbit hole as we explore the global talent shortage and its impact on the Kubernetes ecosystem. Joe shares invaluable insight and perspective on recruiting for startups, what founders can do to attract talent, and why transparency from all sides (company, recruiter, and candidate) is vital. We also discuss remote work and its increased value and how companies can leverage their Kubernetes talent.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>What is Joe’s responsibility as the Kubernetes recruiter? (00:19)</li><li>The current hiring challenges in the Kubernetes talent space. (01:00)</li><li>Joe’s perspective on recruiting best practices - and his thoughts on companies that seek Kubernetes experts. (06:30)</li><li>A look at the founder/recruiter relationship, how founders can enhance their recruiting positioning, and the evolution of remote work. (12:31)</li><li>The pros and cons of recruiting for a startup – and why certain hires can ruin a startup. (19:33)</li><li>What companies can do to create Kubernetes experts and the role InterQuest plays in closing the talent market gap. (23:06)<p></p></li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>Joe’s LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/joebignell/?originalSubdomain=uk">https://www.linkedin.com/in/joebignell/?originalSubdomain=uk</a></li><li>Joe’s Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/joe_bignell">https://twitter.com/joe_bignell</a></li><li>DevOps for Everyone: <a href="https://www.meetup.com/DevOps-For-Everyone/">https://www.meetup.com/DevOps-For-Everyone/</a></li><li>InterQuest Group: <a href="https://www.interquestgroup.com/">https://www.interquestgroup.com/<br></a><br></li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 29 Dec 2021 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/01aa2c9b/9ee7b619.mp3" length="43780520" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1820</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Joe Bignell, the Kubernetes recruiter at InterQuest Group, joins me for an interesting conversation about the current job market in the Kubernetes space and his role and vision as a talent seeker.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Joe Bignell, the Kubernetes recruiter at InterQuest Group, joins me for an interesting conversation about the current job market in the Kubernetes space and his role and vision as a talent seeker.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>DataStax and the Startup Mentality with Jonathan Ellis</title>
      <itunes:episode>75</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>75</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>DataStax and the Startup Mentality with Jonathan Ellis</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">a391c501-a48a-4346-b4c7-368875b5e818</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/b8ecae80</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Jonathan Ellis, CTO and co-founder of DataStax, has always had a startup mindset. In this episode, Jonathan joins me to discuss his journey and entrepreneurial roadmap thus far.</p><p><br></p><p>In our conversation, Jonathan shares how he became involved with the Apache Cassandra project and his transition to founding DataStax. He also shares insight on the importance of hiring a go to market team, why hiring executives proves to be more challenging than engineers, building a company based around an open-source project, and more.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Jonathan’s views on his identity as a founder and scratching his coding itch through art. (00:23)</li><li>A look at Jonathan’s journey from Mozy to the Apache Cassandra project. (05:40)</li><li>The history of DataStax - and Jonathan explores the benefits of building a company around open source. (11:33)  </li><li>Lessons learned: the importance of implementing a go-to-market team, DataStax Kubernetes adoption, and why hiring executives is a challenge. (15:58)</li><li>Jonathan’s advice to technical founders - and his perspective and insight on remote work. (27:39)</li></ul><p><br></p><p>Links:</p><p>Jonathan</p><p>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/jbellis/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/jbellis/</a></p><p>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/spyced">https://twitter.com/spyced</a></p><p>DataSTax: <a href="https://www.datastax.com/">https://www.datastax.com/</a></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Jonathan Ellis, CTO and co-founder of DataStax, has always had a startup mindset. In this episode, Jonathan joins me to discuss his journey and entrepreneurial roadmap thus far.</p><p><br></p><p>In our conversation, Jonathan shares how he became involved with the Apache Cassandra project and his transition to founding DataStax. He also shares insight on the importance of hiring a go to market team, why hiring executives proves to be more challenging than engineers, building a company based around an open-source project, and more.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Jonathan’s views on his identity as a founder and scratching his coding itch through art. (00:23)</li><li>A look at Jonathan’s journey from Mozy to the Apache Cassandra project. (05:40)</li><li>The history of DataStax - and Jonathan explores the benefits of building a company around open source. (11:33)  </li><li>Lessons learned: the importance of implementing a go-to-market team, DataStax Kubernetes adoption, and why hiring executives is a challenge. (15:58)</li><li>Jonathan’s advice to technical founders - and his perspective and insight on remote work. (27:39)</li></ul><p><br></p><p>Links:</p><p>Jonathan</p><p>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/jbellis/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/jbellis/</a></p><p>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/spyced">https://twitter.com/spyced</a></p><p>DataSTax: <a href="https://www.datastax.com/">https://www.datastax.com/</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 22 Dec 2021 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/b8ecae80/39033403.mp3" length="42953105" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1786</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Jonathan Ellis, CTO and co-founder of DataStax, has always had a startup mindset. In this episode, Jonathan joins me to discuss his journey and entrepreneurial roadmap thus far.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Jonathan Ellis, CTO and co-founder of DataStax, has always had a startup mindset. In this episode, Jonathan joins me to discuss his journey and entrepreneurial roadmap thus far.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Owning Your Slice of the World with Guy Podjarny</title>
      <itunes:episode>74</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>74</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Owning Your Slice of the World with Guy Podjarny</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">21486227-409c-4cd1-9425-99a9060b398a</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/560475d1</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Guy Podjarny, co-founder and President of Snyk, has seen the world of startups through the lens of an employee and as a founder. With two companies under his belt, Guy has excelled as an entrepreneur as Snyk proves to be a leader in developer security.</p><p> </p><p>In this episode of Cloud Native Startup, Guy shares insight on his first startup, Blaze (acquired by Akamai), and his current company, Snyk. He lends perspective on key traits to master when building a successful company and why it’s an exciting time to be an entrepreneur. We also explore why there are major gaps in security, what it will take to fix them, and how Snyk is helping close the gap by decentralizing security.</p><p> </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Guy’s interesting evolution from working at startups to finally founding his own. (00:14)</li><li>Exploring the differences between two worlds: security and DevOps. (05:40)</li><li>Why Guy sold his first company, Blaze - and lessons learned along the way. (10:27)  </li><li>Guy’s perspective on embracing Snyk’s “failures” - and he reflects on the journey towards identifying their opportunities within the market. (17:27)</li><li>A discussion about major gaps in security and how Snyke aims to be a solution. (27:39)</li></ul><p> </p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Guy</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://uk.linkedin.com/in/guypo">https://uk.linkedin.com/in/guypo</a> </li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/guypod">https://twitter.com/guypod</a> </li><li>Podcast: <a href="https://www.devseccon.com/the-secure-developer-podcast/">The Secure Developer</a></li><li>Snyk: <a href="https://snyk.io/">https://snyk.io/</a> </li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Guy Podjarny, co-founder and President of Snyk, has seen the world of startups through the lens of an employee and as a founder. With two companies under his belt, Guy has excelled as an entrepreneur as Snyk proves to be a leader in developer security.</p><p> </p><p>In this episode of Cloud Native Startup, Guy shares insight on his first startup, Blaze (acquired by Akamai), and his current company, Snyk. He lends perspective on key traits to master when building a successful company and why it’s an exciting time to be an entrepreneur. We also explore why there are major gaps in security, what it will take to fix them, and how Snyk is helping close the gap by decentralizing security.</p><p> </p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Guy’s interesting evolution from working at startups to finally founding his own. (00:14)</li><li>Exploring the differences between two worlds: security and DevOps. (05:40)</li><li>Why Guy sold his first company, Blaze - and lessons learned along the way. (10:27)  </li><li>Guy’s perspective on embracing Snyk’s “failures” - and he reflects on the journey towards identifying their opportunities within the market. (17:27)</li><li>A discussion about major gaps in security and how Snyke aims to be a solution. (27:39)</li></ul><p> </p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Guy</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://uk.linkedin.com/in/guypo">https://uk.linkedin.com/in/guypo</a> </li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/guypod">https://twitter.com/guypod</a> </li><li>Podcast: <a href="https://www.devseccon.com/the-secure-developer-podcast/">The Secure Developer</a></li><li>Snyk: <a href="https://snyk.io/">https://snyk.io/</a> </li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Thu, 16 Dec 2021 08:59:42 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/560475d1/48b57e12.mp3" length="80368600" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2007</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode of Cloud Native Startup, Guy Podjarny, co-founder and President of Snyk, shares insight on his first startup, Blaze (acquired by Akamai), and his current company, Snyk.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode of Cloud Native Startup, Guy Podjarny, co-founder and President of Snyk, shares insight on his first startup, Blaze (acquired by Akamai), and his current company, Snyk.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Investing In Early-Stage Enterprise Startups with Vidya Raman </title>
      <itunes:episode>73</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>73</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Investing In Early-Stage Enterprise Startups with Vidya Raman </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">ee185ca7-b240-468b-ac94-3bfac1f485ab</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/2af4a739</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>For Vidya Raman, technology has always been close to her heart. As an investor at Sorenson Ventures, Vidya is guided by this passion and plays an impactful role in helping technical founders build and grow successful businesses. Vidya serves as a leader in early-stage startup investing and thrives on optimizing companies.</p><p><br>In this episode of Cloud Native Startup, Vidya talks about her transition from engineering to venture capital investing, important criteria to consider when evaluating companies, what founders should look for in VCs, her lessons learned, and more.</p><p> <br>Highlights:</p><ul><li>A look at Vidya’s background and the journey that lead to her leap into venture capital investing. (00:11)</li><li>Exploring Vidya’s role, her passion for partnering deeply with founders, and misconceptions that founders often have about VC. (05:37)</li><li>What to identify when evaluating companies - and how Viyda measures good fit. (10:41) </li><li>From the lens of a founder, Vidya shares top criteria founders should consider when seeking VC. (18:58) </li><li>A discussion about conflicts of interest and managing disagreements between investors and companies. (23:09)</li><li>Vidya shares her top three lessons learned. (29:23) </li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Vidya</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/vidya-raman/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/vidya-raman/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/veenormous">https://twitter.com/veenormous</a> </li><li>Sorenson Ventures: <a href="https://www.sorensoncapital.com/">https://www.sorensoncapital.com/</a> </li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>For Vidya Raman, technology has always been close to her heart. As an investor at Sorenson Ventures, Vidya is guided by this passion and plays an impactful role in helping technical founders build and grow successful businesses. Vidya serves as a leader in early-stage startup investing and thrives on optimizing companies.</p><p><br>In this episode of Cloud Native Startup, Vidya talks about her transition from engineering to venture capital investing, important criteria to consider when evaluating companies, what founders should look for in VCs, her lessons learned, and more.</p><p> <br>Highlights:</p><ul><li>A look at Vidya’s background and the journey that lead to her leap into venture capital investing. (00:11)</li><li>Exploring Vidya’s role, her passion for partnering deeply with founders, and misconceptions that founders often have about VC. (05:37)</li><li>What to identify when evaluating companies - and how Viyda measures good fit. (10:41) </li><li>From the lens of a founder, Vidya shares top criteria founders should consider when seeking VC. (18:58) </li><li>A discussion about conflicts of interest and managing disagreements between investors and companies. (23:09)</li><li>Vidya shares her top three lessons learned. (29:23) </li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Vidya</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/vidya-raman/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/vidya-raman/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/veenormous">https://twitter.com/veenormous</a> </li><li>Sorenson Ventures: <a href="https://www.sorensoncapital.com/">https://www.sorensoncapital.com/</a> </li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 08 Dec 2021 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/2af4a739/e75f30bd.mp3" length="49488046" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2058</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>For Vidya Raman, technology has always been close to her heart. As an investor at Sorenson Ventures, Vidya is guided by this passion and plays an impactful role in helping technical founders build and grow successful businesses. Vidya serves as a leader in early-stage startup investing and thrives on optimizing companies.

In this episode of Cloud Native Startup, Vidya talks about her transition from engineering to venture capital investing, important criteria to consider when evaluating companies, what founders should look for in VCs, her lessons learned, and more.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>For Vidya Raman, technology has always been close to her heart. As an investor at Sorenson Ventures, Vidya is guided by this passion and plays an impactful role in helping technical founders build and grow successful businesses. Vidya serves as a leader i</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Shifting Your Mindset with Tobias Kunze</title>
      <itunes:episode>72</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>72</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Shifting Your Mindset with Tobias Kunze</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">691484ef-c004-44df-a38d-61f3a9491ba2</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/49761df0</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Glasnostic is a cutting-edge observability solution that enables DevOps, SRE and security teams to effectively control emerging disruptive behaviors. In this episode of Cloud Native Startup, I chat with Glasnotic’s co-founder and CEO, Tobias Kunze.</p><p><br></p><p>As a trailblazer in the world of cloud-native technologies and a two-time startup founder, Tobias brings a wealth of insight. Prior to Glasnostic, Tobias founded Makara, which was later acquired by Red Hat Open Shift. In our conversation, we explore his journey from Makara to Glasnostic and his shift from engineering to entrepreneurship. We also discuss why sales and people management are core skills needed to become an entrepreneur, the importance of actively stepping out of your comfort zone, and the staggering pace of technology.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>A look at how Tobias shifted his focus from engineering to entrepreneurship. (00:15)</li><li>Tobias’ perspective on applying lessons learned from his first startup the second time around – and the similar challenges he faced with both companies. (09:00)</li><li>A discussion about the first dollar and why it is important to step outside of your comfort zone as an entrepreneur. (14:16)</li><li>Why sales and people management skills are core traits of a successful entrepreneur and startup founder – and why these skills are more difficult for engineers to cultivate. (18:19)</li><li>Tobias uses air traffic control to illustrate his journey towards founding Glasnostic – and shares insight on current challenges in the technology sector. (26:31)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p><br></p><p>Tobias</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tkunze">https://www.linkedin.com/in/tkunze</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/tkunze">https://twitter.com/tkunze</a> </li><li>Glasnostic: <a href="http://glasnostic.com/">http://glasnostic.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Glasnostic is a cutting-edge observability solution that enables DevOps, SRE and security teams to effectively control emerging disruptive behaviors. In this episode of Cloud Native Startup, I chat with Glasnotic’s co-founder and CEO, Tobias Kunze.</p><p><br></p><p>As a trailblazer in the world of cloud-native technologies and a two-time startup founder, Tobias brings a wealth of insight. Prior to Glasnostic, Tobias founded Makara, which was later acquired by Red Hat Open Shift. In our conversation, we explore his journey from Makara to Glasnostic and his shift from engineering to entrepreneurship. We also discuss why sales and people management are core skills needed to become an entrepreneur, the importance of actively stepping out of your comfort zone, and the staggering pace of technology.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>A look at how Tobias shifted his focus from engineering to entrepreneurship. (00:15)</li><li>Tobias’ perspective on applying lessons learned from his first startup the second time around – and the similar challenges he faced with both companies. (09:00)</li><li>A discussion about the first dollar and why it is important to step outside of your comfort zone as an entrepreneur. (14:16)</li><li>Why sales and people management skills are core traits of a successful entrepreneur and startup founder – and why these skills are more difficult for engineers to cultivate. (18:19)</li><li>Tobias uses air traffic control to illustrate his journey towards founding Glasnostic – and shares insight on current challenges in the technology sector. (26:31)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p><br></p><p>Tobias</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tkunze">https://www.linkedin.com/in/tkunze</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/tkunze">https://twitter.com/tkunze</a> </li><li>Glasnostic: <a href="http://glasnostic.com/">http://glasnostic.com/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 01 Dec 2021 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/49761df0/49ab175e.mp3" length="51622279" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2147</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Glasnostic is a cutting-edge observability solution that enables DevOps, SRE and security teams to effectively control emerging disruptive behaviors. In this episode of Cloud Native Startup, I chat with Glasnotic’s co-founder and CEO, Tobias Kunze.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Glasnostic is a cutting-edge observability solution that enables DevOps, SRE and security teams to effectively control emerging disruptive behaviors. In this episode of Cloud Native Startup, I chat with Glasnotic’s co-founder and CEO, Tobias Kunze.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Achieving the Impossible with Laurent Gil</title>
      <itunes:episode>71</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>71</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Achieving the Impossible with Laurent Gil</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">161cce4c-b313-4167-ba9c-37597d7a5ebf</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/19f0ef83</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Laurent Gil is by no means a novice when it comes to founding companies. As the Co-Founder and Chief Product Officer at CAST.AI, Laurent marks this as his fourth company. As a repeated entrepreneur, Laurent comes with valuable insight, which he brings to this conversation on Cloud Native Startup.</p><p><br>In this episode, we discuss Laurent’s entrepreneurial journey, which has taken him across the globe and he shares his opinion on why entrepreneurs should hear the word “no.” We also discuss the importance of simplifying product features, the bond he’s built with his co-founders, product-market fit, and more.</p><p><br>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Laurent shares his entrepreneurial resume and what led to the founding of CAST.AI. (00:12)</li><li>How a conversation over coffee in France led to building a company in Ukraine – and why rejection should fuel entrepreneurs to keep going. (03:31)</li><li>Challenging moments Laurent faced while building startups – and how he has been able to work with the same co-founders throughout different companies. (08:58)</li><li>Laurent explains why simplicity is CAST.AI’s leading principle. (12:49)</li><li>A discussion about CAST.AI’s pivot to optimizing the one single cloud. (17:16)</li><li>Defining and measuring product-market fit. (23:21)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p><br>Laurent</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/laurentgil">https://www.linkedin.com/in/laurentgil</a></li><li>Email: <a href="mailto:laurent@cast.ai">laurent@cast.ai.</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/laurentgil">https://twitter.com/laurentgil</a></li><li>CAST.AI: <a href="https://cast.ai/">https://cast.ai/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Laurent Gil is by no means a novice when it comes to founding companies. As the Co-Founder and Chief Product Officer at CAST.AI, Laurent marks this as his fourth company. As a repeated entrepreneur, Laurent comes with valuable insight, which he brings to this conversation on Cloud Native Startup.</p><p><br>In this episode, we discuss Laurent’s entrepreneurial journey, which has taken him across the globe and he shares his opinion on why entrepreneurs should hear the word “no.” We also discuss the importance of simplifying product features, the bond he’s built with his co-founders, product-market fit, and more.</p><p><br>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Laurent shares his entrepreneurial resume and what led to the founding of CAST.AI. (00:12)</li><li>How a conversation over coffee in France led to building a company in Ukraine – and why rejection should fuel entrepreneurs to keep going. (03:31)</li><li>Challenging moments Laurent faced while building startups – and how he has been able to work with the same co-founders throughout different companies. (08:58)</li><li>Laurent explains why simplicity is CAST.AI’s leading principle. (12:49)</li><li>A discussion about CAST.AI’s pivot to optimizing the one single cloud. (17:16)</li><li>Defining and measuring product-market fit. (23:21)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p><br>Laurent</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/laurentgil">https://www.linkedin.com/in/laurentgil</a></li><li>Email: <a href="mailto:laurent@cast.ai">laurent@cast.ai.</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/laurentgil">https://twitter.com/laurentgil</a></li><li>CAST.AI: <a href="https://cast.ai/">https://cast.ai/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 24 Nov 2021 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/19f0ef83/eba9f87e.mp3" length="30116994" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1879</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Laurent Gil is by no means a novice when it comes to founding companies. As the Co-Founder and Chief Product Officer at CAST.AI, Laurent marks this as his fourth company. As a repeated entrepreneur, Laurent comes with valuable insight, which he brings to this conversation on Cloud Native Startup.

In this episode, we discuss Laurent’s entrepreneurial journey, which has taken him across the globe and he shares his opinion on why entrepreneurs should hear the word “no.” We also discuss the importance of simplifying product features, the bond he’s built with his co-founders, product-market fit, and more.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Laurent Gil is by no means a novice when it comes to founding companies. As the Co-Founder and Chief Product Officer at CAST.AI, Laurent marks this as his fourth company. As a repeated entrepreneur, Laurent comes with valuable insight, which he brings to </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>The Keys to Creating Your Masterpiece with Marco Palladino</title>
      <itunes:episode>70</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>70</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>The Keys to Creating Your Masterpiece with Marco Palladino</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">a6baaf72-8fe4-4adb-bd16-9ea029c8225d</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/b11b1c88</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>As the Co-Founder and Chief Technology Officer at Kong Inc., Marco Palladino takes great pride in the company he has built from the ground up. Marco’s story begins with his move from Italy to San Francisco with no money and a 3-month visa. Today, he and his fellow Co-Founder, Augusto Marietti, have undoubtedly earned that pride.</p><p><br></p><p>In this episode of Cloud Native Startup, we explore Marco’s life journey, and he reflects on how his obsession with building Kong led to its innovative success. We also discuss why Kong’s pivot was a risk worth taking, compare building companies around open source, dive into the importance of releasing trust as a technical founder, and more.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>An overview of Marco’s role as Co-Founder and CTO, how it has evolved, and the origin of Kong. (00:10)</li><li>Why Kong pivoted from an API marketplace to a technology vendor – and Marco looks back on the wins and challenges in the early days of Kong. (05:56)</li><li>A discussion about building a company around open source – why Marco embraces mistakes as he reflects on Kong’s global impact. (13:20)</li><li>Key pieces of advice for technical founders (22:15)</li><li>Marco talks about his experience as a young entrepreneur and provides insight into why this journey has defined him as a leader. (27:49)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p><br></p><p>Marco</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/marcopalladino/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/marcopalladino/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/thekonginc">https://twitter.com/thekonginc</a>  </li><li>Kong Inc.: <a href="https://konghq.com">https://konghq.com</a></li></ul><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>As the Co-Founder and Chief Technology Officer at Kong Inc., Marco Palladino takes great pride in the company he has built from the ground up. Marco’s story begins with his move from Italy to San Francisco with no money and a 3-month visa. Today, he and his fellow Co-Founder, Augusto Marietti, have undoubtedly earned that pride.</p><p><br></p><p>In this episode of Cloud Native Startup, we explore Marco’s life journey, and he reflects on how his obsession with building Kong led to its innovative success. We also discuss why Kong’s pivot was a risk worth taking, compare building companies around open source, dive into the importance of releasing trust as a technical founder, and more.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>An overview of Marco’s role as Co-Founder and CTO, how it has evolved, and the origin of Kong. (00:10)</li><li>Why Kong pivoted from an API marketplace to a technology vendor – and Marco looks back on the wins and challenges in the early days of Kong. (05:56)</li><li>A discussion about building a company around open source – why Marco embraces mistakes as he reflects on Kong’s global impact. (13:20)</li><li>Key pieces of advice for technical founders (22:15)</li><li>Marco talks about his experience as a young entrepreneur and provides insight into why this journey has defined him as a leader. (27:49)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p><br></p><p>Marco</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/marcopalladino/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/marcopalladino/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/thekonginc">https://twitter.com/thekonginc</a>  </li><li>Kong Inc.: <a href="https://konghq.com">https://konghq.com</a></li></ul><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 17 Nov 2021 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/b11b1c88/ce428f51.mp3" length="46943080" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1953</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Marco Palladino, Co-Founder and Chief Technology Officer at Kong Inc., joins me this week on Cloud Native Startup. 

In this episode, we explore Marco’s life journey, and he reflects on how his obsession with building Kong led to its innovative success. We also discuss why Kong’s pivot was a risk worth taking, compare building companies around open source, dive into the importance of releasing trust as a technical founder, and more.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Marco Palladino, Co-Founder and Chief Technology Officer at Kong Inc., joins me this week on Cloud Native Startup. 

In this episode, we explore Marco’s life journey, and he reflects on how his obsession with building Kong led to its innovative success.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Contributing Your Open Source Project to CNCF with Ihor Dvoretskyi</title>
      <itunes:episode>69</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>69</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Contributing Your Open Source Project to CNCF with Ihor Dvoretskyi</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">9df543b1-d885-4765-96d0-b8cb9f1eab10</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/0f6ab0ce</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode of Cloud Native Startup, Ihor Dvoretskyi, Developer Advocate at Cloud Native Computing Foundation (CNCF), joins me for a conversation about contributing a project to CNCF. We discuss the benefits of contributing an open source project and Ihor shares insight on the key metrics for success. Ihor also defines each of the three project stages; sandbox, incubating, and graduated, and takes a deep dive into the history of this fascinating open source foundation. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>A closer look at the history of CNCF and the benefits of contributing a project for both contributors and end-users. (00:18)</li><li>What it means to donate a project and the responsibilities and continuing services CNCF provides. (08:11)</li><li>Exploring the different maturity levels of CNCF’S projects – sandbox, incubating and graduated. (12:41)</li><li>How the CNCF Technical Oversight Committee evaluates projects in consideration for contribution – and Ihor provides insight on the stage that requires the most time and commitment. (18:23)</li><li>Understanding what a successful open source project looks like and how it is measured. (22:42)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Ihor</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/idvoretskyi/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/idvoretskyi/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/idvoretskyi">https://twitter.com/idvoretskyi</a></li><li>CNCF: <a href="https://%20www.cncf.io/">https:// www.cncf.io/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode of Cloud Native Startup, Ihor Dvoretskyi, Developer Advocate at Cloud Native Computing Foundation (CNCF), joins me for a conversation about contributing a project to CNCF. We discuss the benefits of contributing an open source project and Ihor shares insight on the key metrics for success. Ihor also defines each of the three project stages; sandbox, incubating, and graduated, and takes a deep dive into the history of this fascinating open source foundation. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>A closer look at the history of CNCF and the benefits of contributing a project for both contributors and end-users. (00:18)</li><li>What it means to donate a project and the responsibilities and continuing services CNCF provides. (08:11)</li><li>Exploring the different maturity levels of CNCF’S projects – sandbox, incubating and graduated. (12:41)</li><li>How the CNCF Technical Oversight Committee evaluates projects in consideration for contribution – and Ihor provides insight on the stage that requires the most time and commitment. (18:23)</li><li>Understanding what a successful open source project looks like and how it is measured. (22:42)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Ihor</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/idvoretskyi/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/idvoretskyi/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/idvoretskyi">https://twitter.com/idvoretskyi</a></li><li>CNCF: <a href="https://%20www.cncf.io/">https:// www.cncf.io/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 03 Nov 2021 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/0f6ab0ce/d31fd65e.mp3" length="38470704" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1599</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode of Cloud Native Startup, Ihor Dvoretskyi, Developer Advocate at Cloud Native Computing Foundation (CNCF), joins me for a conversation about contributing a project to CNCF. We discuss the benefits of contributing an open source project and Ihor shares insight on the key metrics for success. Ihor also defines each of the three project stages; sandbox, incubating, and graduated, and takes a deep dive into the history of this fascinating open source foundation. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode of Cloud Native Startup, Ihor Dvoretskyi, Developer Advocate at Cloud Native Computing Foundation (CNCF), joins me for a conversation about contributing a project to CNCF. We discuss the benefits of contributing an open source project and </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Using Technology to its Fullest with Justin Borgman</title>
      <itunes:episode>68</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>68</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Using Technology to its Fullest with Justin Borgman</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">99c506ac-8c60-449d-8227-be2111214ccc</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/9b632187</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode of Cloud Native Startup, Justin Borgman, Chairman and CEO of Starburst Data, takes us through Starburst’s evolution as it speedily makes its mark in the enterprise software space. As a two-time startup founder, Justin illustrates his journey towards founding Starburst, alongside his fellow co-founders, and we explore how they built this unique company. He also shares his advice and lessons learned and we discuss what’s in store for Starburst as the company ventures into its next phase.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Exploring how Starburst came into being and what led to the realization that a business would be built around Presto. (00:14)</li><li>Why Starburst has 12 co-founders and the factors that contribute to the strength of the founding team. (05:53)</li><li>Starburst’s journey towards raising venture funding. (08:19)</li><li>The evolution of PrestoSQL and how it became Trino – and Justin shares advice for anyone developing an open source project. (13:49)</li><li>More on Starburst’s shift towards venture funding and how the founders came to that decision. (21:15)</li><li>Differences between Justin’s first and second experience as a startup founder and how he applies what he’s learned. (24:53)</li><li>A look at Starburst’s transition into its third phase. (28:13)</li><li>Mistakes and lessons learned. (32:02)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p><br></p><p>Justin</p><ul><li>LinkedIn:  <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/justinborgman/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/justinborgman/</a>        </li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/justinborgman">https://twitter.com/justinborgman</a></li><li>Starburst: <a href="https://www.starburst.io/">https://www.starburst.io/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode of Cloud Native Startup, Justin Borgman, Chairman and CEO of Starburst Data, takes us through Starburst’s evolution as it speedily makes its mark in the enterprise software space. As a two-time startup founder, Justin illustrates his journey towards founding Starburst, alongside his fellow co-founders, and we explore how they built this unique company. He also shares his advice and lessons learned and we discuss what’s in store for Starburst as the company ventures into its next phase.</p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Exploring how Starburst came into being and what led to the realization that a business would be built around Presto. (00:14)</li><li>Why Starburst has 12 co-founders and the factors that contribute to the strength of the founding team. (05:53)</li><li>Starburst’s journey towards raising venture funding. (08:19)</li><li>The evolution of PrestoSQL and how it became Trino – and Justin shares advice for anyone developing an open source project. (13:49)</li><li>More on Starburst’s shift towards venture funding and how the founders came to that decision. (21:15)</li><li>Differences between Justin’s first and second experience as a startup founder and how he applies what he’s learned. (24:53)</li><li>A look at Starburst’s transition into its third phase. (28:13)</li><li>Mistakes and lessons learned. (32:02)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p><br></p><p>Justin</p><ul><li>LinkedIn:  <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/justinborgman/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/justinborgman/</a>        </li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/justinborgman">https://twitter.com/justinborgman</a></li><li>Starburst: <a href="https://www.starburst.io/">https://www.starburst.io/</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 27 Oct 2021 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/9b632187/c888ef8a.mp3" length="56543988" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2352</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode of Cloud Native Startup, Justin Borgman, Chairman and CEO of Starburst Data, takes us through Starburst’s evolution as it speedily makes its mark in the enterprise software space. 

As a two-time startup founder, Justin illustrates his journey towards founding Starburst, alongside his fellow co-founders, and we explore how they built this unique company. He also shares his advice and lessons learned and we discuss what’s in store for Starburst as the company ventures into its next phase.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode of Cloud Native Startup, Justin Borgman, Chairman and CEO of Starburst Data, takes us through Starburst’s evolution as it speedily makes its mark in the enterprise software space. 

As a two-time startup founder, Justin illustrates his j</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Fueling Innovation Through Open Source  with Tobi Knaup</title>
      <itunes:episode>67</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>67</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Fueling Innovation Through Open Source  with Tobi Knaup</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">610c1c0d-db82-492d-acde-a438b9102bed</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/f66e324d</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on Cloud Native Startup, I’m joined by Tobi Knaup, CEO &amp; Co-Founder of D2iQ.</p><p><br></p><p>In this episode, Tobi provides insight on how D2iQ helps its customers change the world through open source and how it is reflected in their core mission. We also explore what led to the creation of this pioneering technology company and how the cloud native space has changed since. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Tobi provides an overview of D2iQ and how it came to be - and he walks through their pivot from Mesos to Kubernetes. (00:11) </li><li>More on the core mission of D2iQ - and how solving technology challenges at Twitter and Airbnb led to the creation of D2iQ. (04:05) </li><li>How DQI2 partnered with companies in its early days - and the common mistake that D2IQ and most companies make early on. (13:30) </li><li>Tobi reflects on his journey from an engineer to founder and CEO - and shares his perspective on the evolution of the cloud native ecosystem. (18:44)</li><li>Tobi’s advice to the younger version of himself and his fellow co-founders. (28:17)   </li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Tobi</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tobiasknaup/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/tobiasknaup/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/superguenter">https://twitter.com/superguenter</a></li></ul><p>D2iQ</p><ul><li>Website: <a href="https://d2iq.com/">https://d2iq.com/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/D2iQ">https://twitter.com/D2iQ</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on Cloud Native Startup, I’m joined by Tobi Knaup, CEO &amp; Co-Founder of D2iQ.</p><p><br></p><p>In this episode, Tobi provides insight on how D2iQ helps its customers change the world through open source and how it is reflected in their core mission. We also explore what led to the creation of this pioneering technology company and how the cloud native space has changed since. </p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>Tobi provides an overview of D2iQ and how it came to be - and he walks through their pivot from Mesos to Kubernetes. (00:11) </li><li>More on the core mission of D2iQ - and how solving technology challenges at Twitter and Airbnb led to the creation of D2iQ. (04:05) </li><li>How DQI2 partnered with companies in its early days - and the common mistake that D2IQ and most companies make early on. (13:30) </li><li>Tobi reflects on his journey from an engineer to founder and CEO - and shares his perspective on the evolution of the cloud native ecosystem. (18:44)</li><li>Tobi’s advice to the younger version of himself and his fellow co-founders. (28:17)   </li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Tobi</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tobiasknaup/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/tobiasknaup/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/superguenter">https://twitter.com/superguenter</a></li></ul><p>D2iQ</p><ul><li>Website: <a href="https://d2iq.com/">https://d2iq.com/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/D2iQ">https://twitter.com/D2iQ</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 20 Oct 2021 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/f66e324d/45e430a2.mp3" length="43763817" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1820</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>This week on Cloud Native Startup, I’m joined by Tobi Knaup, CEO &amp;amp; Co-Founder of D2iQ.

In this episode, Tobi provides insight on how D2iQ helps its customers change the world through open source and how it is reflected in their core mission. We also explore what led to the creation of this pioneering technology company and how the cloud native space has changed since. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>This week on Cloud Native Startup, I’m joined by Tobi Knaup, CEO &amp;amp; Co-Founder of D2iQ.

In this episode, Tobi provides insight on how D2iQ helps its customers change the world through open source and how it is reflected in their core mission. We als</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Building a Vibrant Open Source Community with Armon Dadgar</title>
      <itunes:episode>66</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>66</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Building a Vibrant Open Source Community with Armon Dadgar</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">8883f6e2-91e9-4cd1-b368-c6235e181c3b</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/2e90d5d8</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>HashiCorp’s Co-Founder and CTO, Armon Dadgar, joins me for a conversation on Cloud Native Startup.</p><p>In this episode, we focus on open source and how it serves as the core to HashiCorp’s identity. We also explore Armon’s journey towards founding HashiCorp with Mitchell Hashimoto and what the future holds as they both lean into their respective passions. Learn a few keys to cultivating a successful open source community, why some companies don’t rely on this success, his lessons learned, and more.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>A  look at Armon’s role as Co-Founder and Chief Technology Officer and what sparked the decision to build HashiCorp alongside Mitchell Hashimoto. (00:13)</li><li>Armon shares why HashiCorp began as open source and how that developed into a company. (4:46)</li><li>How an open source community compares to a paid community - and Armon’s take on bootstraping an open source company. (11:23)</li><li>Why creating an open source project directly from a closed source project is not the best strategy. (14:43)</li><li>Keys to building a successful open source community and why this is vital to HashiCorp.(18:14)</li><li>Armon shares lessons learned during the early days of HashiCorp - and his thoughts on the complexities of being a founder. (23:15)</li><li>How Mitchell’s decision to step back as an individual contributor allows him to focus on his passion - and more on why they chose to monetize HashiCorp. (29:30)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Armon</p><ul><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/armon">https://twitter.com/armon</a></li><li>GitHub: <a href="https://github.com/armon">https://github.com/armon</a></li><li>Linkedin: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/armon-dadgar/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/armon-dadgar/</a></li></ul><p>HashiCorp</p><ul><li>Website: <a href="https://www.hashicorp.com/">https://www.hashicorp.com/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="http://www.twitter.com/hashicorp">www.twitter.com/hashicorp</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>HashiCorp’s Co-Founder and CTO, Armon Dadgar, joins me for a conversation on Cloud Native Startup.</p><p>In this episode, we focus on open source and how it serves as the core to HashiCorp’s identity. We also explore Armon’s journey towards founding HashiCorp with Mitchell Hashimoto and what the future holds as they both lean into their respective passions. Learn a few keys to cultivating a successful open source community, why some companies don’t rely on this success, his lessons learned, and more.</p><p>Highlights:</p><ul><li>A  look at Armon’s role as Co-Founder and Chief Technology Officer and what sparked the decision to build HashiCorp alongside Mitchell Hashimoto. (00:13)</li><li>Armon shares why HashiCorp began as open source and how that developed into a company. (4:46)</li><li>How an open source community compares to a paid community - and Armon’s take on bootstraping an open source company. (11:23)</li><li>Why creating an open source project directly from a closed source project is not the best strategy. (14:43)</li><li>Keys to building a successful open source community and why this is vital to HashiCorp.(18:14)</li><li>Armon shares lessons learned during the early days of HashiCorp - and his thoughts on the complexities of being a founder. (23:15)</li><li>How Mitchell’s decision to step back as an individual contributor allows him to focus on his passion - and more on why they chose to monetize HashiCorp. (29:30)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Armon</p><ul><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/armon">https://twitter.com/armon</a></li><li>GitHub: <a href="https://github.com/armon">https://github.com/armon</a></li><li>Linkedin: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/armon-dadgar/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/armon-dadgar/</a></li></ul><p>HashiCorp</p><ul><li>Website: <a href="https://www.hashicorp.com/">https://www.hashicorp.com/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="http://www.twitter.com/hashicorp">www.twitter.com/hashicorp</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 13 Oct 2021 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/2e90d5d8/a18250ec.mp3" length="49315891" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2051</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>HashiCorp’s Co-Founder and CTO, Armon Dadgar, joins me for a conversation on Cloud Native Startup.

In this episode, we focus on open source and how it serves as the core to HashiCorp’s identity. We also explore Armon’s journey towards founding HashiCorp with Mitchell Hashimoto and what the future holds as they both lean into their respective passions. Learn a few keys to cultivating a successful open source community, why some companies don’t rely on this success, his lessons learned, and more.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>HashiCorp’s Co-Founder and CTO, Armon Dadgar, joins me for a conversation on Cloud Native Startup.

In this episode, we focus on open source and how it serves as the core to HashiCorp’s identity. We also explore Armon’s journey towards founding HashiCor</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Embracing the New Paradigm with Neil Cresswell</title>
      <itunes:episode>65</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>65</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Embracing the New Paradigm with Neil Cresswell</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">0893fd80-c46c-4d66-b5d5-d28295058125</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/9a114570</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Neil Cresswell, co-founder of Portainer, joins me this week on Cloud Native Startup. In this episode, we talk about the evolution of Neil’s fascinating career, which began at age 17, and how it led to Portainer. We also discuss Portainer’s core ethos of simplicity, open source product, Neil’s predictions on Kubernetes, and more.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>Neil recounts how he went from self-employed to co-founding Portainer. (00:19)</li><li>A look at who Portainer was originally built for and the moment he realized it would be a commercial entity. (08:09).</li><li>Neil dives into the three elements to success in open source product. (11:56)</li><li>Neil’s advice for someone working on an open source - and a look back at his consulting experience. (14:54)</li><li>Neil’s shares his lessons learned along his journey - and breaks down some differences in his past and present roles. (20:08)</li><li>How Neil’s team ensures simplicity - and his Kubernetes predictions. (25:09)</li><li>Neil shares some of the everyday challenges and advantages of working across different timezones. (29:19)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Neil</p><ul><li>Linkedin: <a href="http://www.linkedin.com/in/ncresswell">www.linkedin.com/in/ncresswell</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="http://twitter.com/neilc_cloud">twitter.com/neilc_cloud</a></li></ul><p>Portainer</p><ul><li>Website: <a href="http://Portainer.io">Portainer.io</a></li><li> Twitter: <a href="http://twitter.com/portainer.io">twitter.com/portainer.io</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Neil Cresswell, co-founder of Portainer, joins me this week on Cloud Native Startup. In this episode, we talk about the evolution of Neil’s fascinating career, which began at age 17, and how it led to Portainer. We also discuss Portainer’s core ethos of simplicity, open source product, Neil’s predictions on Kubernetes, and more.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>Neil recounts how he went from self-employed to co-founding Portainer. (00:19)</li><li>A look at who Portainer was originally built for and the moment he realized it would be a commercial entity. (08:09).</li><li>Neil dives into the three elements to success in open source product. (11:56)</li><li>Neil’s advice for someone working on an open source - and a look back at his consulting experience. (14:54)</li><li>Neil’s shares his lessons learned along his journey - and breaks down some differences in his past and present roles. (20:08)</li><li>How Neil’s team ensures simplicity - and his Kubernetes predictions. (25:09)</li><li>Neil shares some of the everyday challenges and advantages of working across different timezones. (29:19)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Neil</p><ul><li>Linkedin: <a href="http://www.linkedin.com/in/ncresswell">www.linkedin.com/in/ncresswell</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="http://twitter.com/neilc_cloud">twitter.com/neilc_cloud</a></li></ul><p>Portainer</p><ul><li>Website: <a href="http://Portainer.io">Portainer.io</a></li><li> Twitter: <a href="http://twitter.com/portainer.io">twitter.com/portainer.io</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 06 Oct 2021 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/9a114570/2df82fb6.mp3" length="46216224" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1923</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Neil Cresswell, co-founder of Portainer, joins me this week on Cloud Native Startup. In this episode, we talk about the evolution of Neil’s fascinating career, which began at age 17, and how it led to Portainer. We also discuss Portainer’s core ethos of simplicity, open source product, Neil’s predictions on Kubernetes, and more.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Neil Cresswell, co-founder of Portainer, joins me this week on Cloud Native Startup. In this episode, we talk about the evolution of Neil’s fascinating career, which began at age 17, and how it led to Portainer. We also discuss Portainer’s core ethos of s</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>The Power of Computing with Michael Hyatt</title>
      <itunes:episode>64</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>64</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>The Power of Computing with Michael Hyatt</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">0096ef28-1017-4d8f-abfb-88235affbe6b</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/fed4a104</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Michael Hyatt joins me on this episode of <em>Cloud Native Startup. </em></p><p><br></p><p>Not only is Michael a leading tech investor and philanthropist, but he also ranks as one of Canada’s top entrepreneurs. In this episode, Michael provides a wealth of knowledge as he shares invaluable tips for aspiring, new, and current founders. We also discuss the early stages of founding companies with his brother Richard, the mentality behind hiring your weakness, the phenomenal impact of computing, and much more. </p><p><br></p><p>In this episode, we cover:</p><ul><li>Michael’s take on why starting a company with his brother was a powerful and successful business move. (00:15)</li><li>The power of computing - and the awful truth about technology. (4:12)</li><li>The importance of being able to pivot and hire your weakness. (8:18)</li><li>What Michael looks for when he is investing in a company. (17:27)</li><li>The impact computing has on new companies now vs 20 years ago. (20:24)</li><li>Michael reflects on the moment he knew success was on the horizon - and how his inferiority complex played a role. (26:07)</li><li>The challenges of creating a company built around technology. (28:49)</li><li>Why you need marque customers. (32:24)</li><li>Michael’s advice to founders. (35:47)</li></ul><p><br><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Michael Hyatt</p><ul><li>Linkedin: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/michaelhyatt1">https://www.linkedin.com/in/michaelhyatt1</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/mhyattoffice">https://twitter.com/mhyattoffice</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Michael Hyatt joins me on this episode of <em>Cloud Native Startup. </em></p><p><br></p><p>Not only is Michael a leading tech investor and philanthropist, but he also ranks as one of Canada’s top entrepreneurs. In this episode, Michael provides a wealth of knowledge as he shares invaluable tips for aspiring, new, and current founders. We also discuss the early stages of founding companies with his brother Richard, the mentality behind hiring your weakness, the phenomenal impact of computing, and much more. </p><p><br></p><p>In this episode, we cover:</p><ul><li>Michael’s take on why starting a company with his brother was a powerful and successful business move. (00:15)</li><li>The power of computing - and the awful truth about technology. (4:12)</li><li>The importance of being able to pivot and hire your weakness. (8:18)</li><li>What Michael looks for when he is investing in a company. (17:27)</li><li>The impact computing has on new companies now vs 20 years ago. (20:24)</li><li>Michael reflects on the moment he knew success was on the horizon - and how his inferiority complex played a role. (26:07)</li><li>The challenges of creating a company built around technology. (28:49)</li><li>Why you need marque customers. (32:24)</li><li>Michael’s advice to founders. (35:47)</li></ul><p><br><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Michael Hyatt</p><ul><li>Linkedin: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/michaelhyatt1">https://www.linkedin.com/in/michaelhyatt1</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/mhyattoffice">https://twitter.com/mhyattoffice</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 29 Sep 2021 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/fed4a104/79f4f089.mp3" length="56599110" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2356</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Michael Hyatt joins me on this episode of Cloud Native Startup. 

Not only is Michael a leading tech investor and philanthropist, but he also ranks as one of Canada’s top entrepreneurs. In this episode, Michael provides a wealth of knowledge as he shares invaluable tips to aspiring, new, and current founders. We also discuss the early stages of founding companies with his brother Richard, the mentality behind hiring your weakness, the phenomenal impact of computing, and much more. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Michael Hyatt joins me on this episode of Cloud Native Startup. 

Not only is Michael a leading tech investor and philanthropist, but he also ranks as one of Canada’s top entrepreneurs. In this episode, Michael provides a wealth of knowledge as he share</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Filling the Gap In the Market with JJ Guy</title>
      <itunes:episode>63</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>63</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Filling the Gap In the Market with JJ Guy</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">3cd4bf07-2430-4d1a-925e-327332692705</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/888114a1</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>J.J. Guy, Co-founder and CEO of Sevco Security, joins me this week on <em>Cloud Native Startup</em>. In this episode, J.J. breaks down Sevco Security and the IT security ecosystem. We also discuss challenges, lessons learned, building a solid team culture and more.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>Introduction to Sevco and how it fits into the security product ecosystem. (:0016)</li><li>What creates friction across the entire IT organization and why it is taken for granted. (5:05)</li><li>J.J. shares ideas that he considered but then ultimately rejected and what he would have done differently. (10:39)</li><li>The fascinating challenges around enterprise products in security. (17:44)</li><li>Key lessons learned and how J.J. applies them to Sevco Security. (22:50)</li><li>The challenges of developing a new product in a new market segment. (27:23)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p><br></p><p>J.J. </p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/jjguy/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/jjguy/</a> </li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/jjguy">https://twitter.com/jjguy</a> </li></ul><p>Sevco Security</p><ul><li>Website: <a href="https://sevcosecurity.com/">https://sevcosecurity.com/</a></li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>J.J. Guy, Co-founder and CEO of Sevco Security, joins me this week on <em>Cloud Native Startup</em>. In this episode, J.J. breaks down Sevco Security and the IT security ecosystem. We also discuss challenges, lessons learned, building a solid team culture and more.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><ul><li>Introduction to Sevco and how it fits into the security product ecosystem. (:0016)</li><li>What creates friction across the entire IT organization and why it is taken for granted. (5:05)</li><li>J.J. shares ideas that he considered but then ultimately rejected and what he would have done differently. (10:39)</li><li>The fascinating challenges around enterprise products in security. (17:44)</li><li>Key lessons learned and how J.J. applies them to Sevco Security. (22:50)</li><li>The challenges of developing a new product in a new market segment. (27:23)</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p><br></p><p>J.J. </p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/jjguy/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/jjguy/</a> </li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/jjguy">https://twitter.com/jjguy</a> </li></ul><p>Sevco Security</p><ul><li>Website: <a href="https://sevcosecurity.com/">https://sevcosecurity.com/</a></li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 22 Sep 2021 00:00:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/888114a1/118e5e88.mp3" length="52437044" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2182</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>JJ Guy, Co-founder and CEO of Sevco Security, joins me this week on Cloud Native Startup. In this episode, J.J. breaks down Sevco Security and the IT security ecosystem. We also discuss challenges, lessons learned, building a solid team culture and more.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>JJ Guy, Co-founder and CEO of Sevco Security, joins me this week on Cloud Native Startup. In this episode, J.J. breaks down Sevco Security and the IT security ecosystem. We also discuss challenges, lessons learned, building a solid team culture and more.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>The Core Value of Your Business with William Morgan</title>
      <itunes:episode>62</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>62</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>The Core Value of Your Business with William Morgan</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">4e6182fd-abbb-4f11-84f1-395ae5a221d2</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/5fb239e1</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on Cloud Native Startup, I am joined by William Morgan, CEO of Buoyant, Inc. In this episode, William talks about his beginnings as a software engineer at Twitter and his transition towards starting and running his own company. We also discuss how rewriting Linkerd enhanced its core value of simplicity, the blessing and curse of open source, his advice to his younger self, and more.</p><p><br></p><p>In this episode, we cover:</p><ul><li>Who is the CEO of Buoyant? William Morgan shares his background. (00:14)</li><li>The story behind Linkerd and how it came into existence. (1:40)</li><li>Building a company around Linkerd - and monetizing an open source project. (3:43)</li><li>William’s thoughts on the open-core model. (7:52)</li><li>The evolution of Buoyant: Building the long-term future of the business. (9:08)</li><li>Lessons learned and advice to William’s younger self. (13:48)</li><li>Deep dive into the process of simplifying Linkerd to reach its core value. (17:34)</li><li>Istio or Linkerd? William’s take on deciding what is right for you. (23:26)</li><li>The blessing and curse of open source. (27:03)</li><li>William reflects on his journey as an engineer to starting and running a company:  (32:00)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>William Morgan</p><ul><li>Linkedin: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/wmorgan">https://www.linkedin.com/in/wmorgan</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/wm">https://twitter.com/wm</a></li></ul><p>Buoyant</p><ul><li>Website: <a href="https://buoyant.io">https://buoyant.io</a></li><li> Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/BuoyantIO">https://twitter.com/BuoyantIO</a></li></ul><p>Linkerd</p><ul><li>Website: <a href="https://buoyant.io/linkerd/">https://buoyant.io/linkerd/</a></li><li>Linkerd Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/Linkerd">https://twitter.com/Linkerd</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on Cloud Native Startup, I am joined by William Morgan, CEO of Buoyant, Inc. In this episode, William talks about his beginnings as a software engineer at Twitter and his transition towards starting and running his own company. We also discuss how rewriting Linkerd enhanced its core value of simplicity, the blessing and curse of open source, his advice to his younger self, and more.</p><p><br></p><p>In this episode, we cover:</p><ul><li>Who is the CEO of Buoyant? William Morgan shares his background. (00:14)</li><li>The story behind Linkerd and how it came into existence. (1:40)</li><li>Building a company around Linkerd - and monetizing an open source project. (3:43)</li><li>William’s thoughts on the open-core model. (7:52)</li><li>The evolution of Buoyant: Building the long-term future of the business. (9:08)</li><li>Lessons learned and advice to William’s younger self. (13:48)</li><li>Deep dive into the process of simplifying Linkerd to reach its core value. (17:34)</li><li>Istio or Linkerd? William’s take on deciding what is right for you. (23:26)</li><li>The blessing and curse of open source. (27:03)</li><li>William reflects on his journey as an engineer to starting and running a company:  (32:00)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>William Morgan</p><ul><li>Linkedin: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/wmorgan">https://www.linkedin.com/in/wmorgan</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/wm">https://twitter.com/wm</a></li></ul><p>Buoyant</p><ul><li>Website: <a href="https://buoyant.io">https://buoyant.io</a></li><li> Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/BuoyantIO">https://twitter.com/BuoyantIO</a></li></ul><p>Linkerd</p><ul><li>Website: <a href="https://buoyant.io/linkerd/">https://buoyant.io/linkerd/</a></li><li>Linkerd Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/Linkerd">https://twitter.com/Linkerd</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 15 Sep 2021 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/5fb239e1/30a29e03.mp3" length="50332502" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2094</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>This week on Cloud Native Startup, I am joined by William Morgan, CEO of Buoyant, Inc. In this episode, William talks about his beginnings as a software engineer at Twitter and his transition towards starting and running his own company. We also discuss how rewriting Linkerd enhanced its core value of simplicity, the blessing and curse of open source, his advice to his younger self, and more.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>This week on Cloud Native Startup, I am joined by William Morgan, CEO of Buoyant, Inc. In this episode, William talks about his beginnings as a software engineer at Twitter and his transition towards starting and running his own company. We also discuss h</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Conducting Your Business Orchestra with David Friend </title>
      <itunes:episode>61</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>61</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Conducting Your Business Orchestra with David Friend </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">92f72159-7a07-4788-bf88-a5762ad700b4</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/0df707af</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>David Friend, co-founder and CEO of Wasabi Technologies, Inc. writes the rules of his own success. With 7 companies under his belt, David continues to be an impactful maverick entrepreneur. In this episode, David and I talk about the evolution of his journey, which started off in the music industry, and how it led him to found a cloud data storage company. Join us for more on this week’s episode of Cloud Data Startup.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights</strong>:</p><ul><li>The evolution of David’s companies from the very beginning of his entrepreneurial journey. (00:30)</li><li>David compares running a synthesizer company to a cloud storage company. (5:42)</li><li>How careful hiring allows David to focus on his strengths. (10:18)</li><li>David shares why price and simplicity are the two most important ingredients in selling. (13:50)</li><li>The influence of data storage and AI and how it has changed the mindset of customers over time. (16:59)</li><li>David's philosophy on running a business and the joys of conducting the orchestra of his company. (20:46)</li><li>Advice for first-time founders. (22:18)</li><li>David’s philosophy on raising money as an entrepreneur. (24:47)</li></ul><p><br><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>David</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/david-friend-3660832/ </li><li>Twitter: https://twitter.com/wasabi_dave</li></ul><p>Wasabi Technologies Inc.</p><ul><li>Website: https://wasabi.com/ </li><li>Twitter: https://twitter.com/wasabi_cloud</li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>David Friend, co-founder and CEO of Wasabi Technologies, Inc. writes the rules of his own success. With 7 companies under his belt, David continues to be an impactful maverick entrepreneur. In this episode, David and I talk about the evolution of his journey, which started off in the music industry, and how it led him to found a cloud data storage company. Join us for more on this week’s episode of Cloud Data Startup.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights</strong>:</p><ul><li>The evolution of David’s companies from the very beginning of his entrepreneurial journey. (00:30)</li><li>David compares running a synthesizer company to a cloud storage company. (5:42)</li><li>How careful hiring allows David to focus on his strengths. (10:18)</li><li>David shares why price and simplicity are the two most important ingredients in selling. (13:50)</li><li>The influence of data storage and AI and how it has changed the mindset of customers over time. (16:59)</li><li>David's philosophy on running a business and the joys of conducting the orchestra of his company. (20:46)</li><li>Advice for first-time founders. (22:18)</li><li>David’s philosophy on raising money as an entrepreneur. (24:47)</li></ul><p><br><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>David</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: https://www.linkedin.com/in/david-friend-3660832/ </li><li>Twitter: https://twitter.com/wasabi_dave</li></ul><p>Wasabi Technologies Inc.</p><ul><li>Website: https://wasabi.com/ </li><li>Twitter: https://twitter.com/wasabi_cloud</li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Tue, 07 Sep 2021 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/0df707af/0ac982b1.mp3" length="30962915" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1932</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>David Friend, co-founder and CEO of Wasabi Technologies, Inc., writes the rules of his own success. With 7 companies under his belt, David continues to be an impactful maverick entrepreneur. In this episode, David and I talk about the evolution of his journey, which started off in the music industry, and how it led him to found a cloud data storage company. Join us for more on this week’s episode of Cloud Data Startup.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>David Friend, co-founder and CEO of Wasabi Technologies, Inc., writes the rules of his own success. With 7 companies under his belt, David continues to be an impactful maverick entrepreneur. In this episode, David and I talk about the evolution of his jou</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>cloud data storage company. Join us for more on this week’s episode of Cloud Data Startup.</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Creating an Open Source Business Model with Swaroop Jagadish</title>
      <itunes:episode>60</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>60</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Creating an Open Source Business Model with Swaroop Jagadish</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">156ba65e-79ba-443c-8005-40c7fd187e6d</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/3869e8b1</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week, Swaroop Jagadish, co-founder of <a href="https://www.acryldata.io/">Acryl Data</a>, takes us through his journey from quitting his day job as an engineer to founding his first startup company alongside Shirshanka Das. Swaroop also shares his insights on Acryl Data’s business model and the advantages and challenges of building an open source project-based company. Tune in for more on Swaroop and Acryl Data in this episode of Cloud Native Startup.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights</strong></p><ul><li>How Swaroop created Acryl Data and the story behind the name. (00:42)</li><li>Lessons Swaroop learned on his journey towards becoming a startup founder. (6:52)</li><li>Swaroop reflects on the challenges of building an open source project-based company. (10:31)</li><li>How Acryl Data’s core ethos aligns with LinkedIn (12:49)</li><li>The unique advantages of Acryl Data’s business model. (14:03)</li><li>The scariest part of the startup journey. (16:27)</li><li>Swaroop’s thoughts on approaching the modern data ecosystem. (17:32)</li><li>Acryl Data’s use-cases. (20:12)</li><li>Swaroop’s insights on building an open-source company and generally, as a first-time founder (27:32)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Swaroop:</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/swaroopjagadish">https://www.linkedin.com/in/swaroopjagadish</a></li></ul><p>Acryl Data</p><ul><li>Website: <a href="https://www.acryldata.io/">https://www.acryldata.io/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/acryldata">https://twitter.com/acryldata</a></li><li>Data Hub Project Website: <a href="https://datahubproject.io/">https://datahubproject.io/</a></li><li>Data Hub Slack Community: <a href="https://datahubspace.slack.com/join/shared_invite/zt-nx7i0dj7-I3IJYC551vpnvvjIaNRRGw#/shared-invite/email">https://datahubspace.slack.com</a></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week, Swaroop Jagadish, co-founder of <a href="https://www.acryldata.io/">Acryl Data</a>, takes us through his journey from quitting his day job as an engineer to founding his first startup company alongside Shirshanka Das. Swaroop also shares his insights on Acryl Data’s business model and the advantages and challenges of building an open source project-based company. Tune in for more on Swaroop and Acryl Data in this episode of Cloud Native Startup.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights</strong></p><ul><li>How Swaroop created Acryl Data and the story behind the name. (00:42)</li><li>Lessons Swaroop learned on his journey towards becoming a startup founder. (6:52)</li><li>Swaroop reflects on the challenges of building an open source project-based company. (10:31)</li><li>How Acryl Data’s core ethos aligns with LinkedIn (12:49)</li><li>The unique advantages of Acryl Data’s business model. (14:03)</li><li>The scariest part of the startup journey. (16:27)</li><li>Swaroop’s thoughts on approaching the modern data ecosystem. (17:32)</li><li>Acryl Data’s use-cases. (20:12)</li><li>Swaroop’s insights on building an open-source company and generally, as a first-time founder (27:32)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p>Swaroop:</p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/swaroopjagadish">https://www.linkedin.com/in/swaroopjagadish</a></li></ul><p>Acryl Data</p><ul><li>Website: <a href="https://www.acryldata.io/">https://www.acryldata.io/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/acryldata">https://twitter.com/acryldata</a></li><li>Data Hub Project Website: <a href="https://datahubproject.io/">https://datahubproject.io/</a></li><li>Data Hub Slack Community: <a href="https://datahubspace.slack.com/join/shared_invite/zt-nx7i0dj7-I3IJYC551vpnvvjIaNRRGw#/shared-invite/email">https://datahubspace.slack.com</a></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Tue, 31 Aug 2021 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/3869e8b1/e1f4978b.mp3" length="45664248" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1899</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>This week, Swaroop Jagadish, co-founder of Acryl Data, takes us through his journey from quitting his day job as an engineer to founding his first startup company alongside Shirshanka Das. Swaroop also shares his insights on Acryl Data’s business model and the advantages and challenges of building an open source project-based company. Tune in for more on Swaroop and Acryl Data in this episode of Cloud Native Startup.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>This week, Swaroop Jagadish, co-founder of Acryl Data, takes us through his journey from quitting his day job as an engineer to founding his first startup company alongside Shirshanka Das. Swaroop also shares his insights on Acryl Data’s business model an</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Building the Next Layer of Innovation with Dhiraj Sharan</title>
      <itunes:episode>59</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>59</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Building the Next Layer of Innovation with Dhiraj Sharan</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">6ff317db-779c-4afa-9e52-5b7424aafe0f</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/2b91e8fd</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Dhiraj Sharan, CEO and founder of <a href="https://query.ai/">Query.AI</a>, joins me this week on Cloud Native Startup. </p><p><br></p><p>With a career that spans over 20 years in cybersecurity, Dhiraj has seen the swift adoption of multi-cloud environments and SaaS apps. In this episode, Dhiraj discusses the importance of evolving your product as the world changes and why you should ask yourself, “How can I be innovative for the next layer?” Dhiraj also gives his younger self advice on the cybersecurity game of chess and much more. </p><p><strong>Highlights</strong></p><ul><li>What led Dhiraj to pursue Query.AI? (0:23)</li><li>Dhiraj shares ideas that he ultimately didn’t pursue (3:52)</li><li>The importance of evolving and the layers of innovation. (5:30)</li><li>The difference between being a founder and being an early employee. (8:52)</li><li>Advice Dhiraj would give himself if he could go back 20 years. (10:19)</li><li>Dhiraj’s advice on building a company. (11:52)</li><li>Security team budgets and creating an ROI calculator. (13:11)</li><li>Query.AI’s “unique” struggle. (18:47)</li><li>CSO’s general response to Query.AI. (20:03)</li><li>Dhiraj reflects on lessons learned and the importance of understanding your customer. (21:48)</li><li>Dhiraj on the entrepreneur in everyone. (23:32)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>Dhiraj: <ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/dhirajsharan">https://www.linkedin.com/in/dhirajsharan</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/dhirajsharan">https://twitter.com/dhirajsharan</a></li></ul></li><li>Query.AI:<ul><li>Website: <a href="https://query.ai">https://query.ai</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://www.twitter.com/query_ai">https://www.twitter.com/query_ai</a></li></ul></li></ul><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Dhiraj Sharan, CEO and founder of <a href="https://query.ai/">Query.AI</a>, joins me this week on Cloud Native Startup. </p><p><br></p><p>With a career that spans over 20 years in cybersecurity, Dhiraj has seen the swift adoption of multi-cloud environments and SaaS apps. In this episode, Dhiraj discusses the importance of evolving your product as the world changes and why you should ask yourself, “How can I be innovative for the next layer?” Dhiraj also gives his younger self advice on the cybersecurity game of chess and much more. </p><p><strong>Highlights</strong></p><ul><li>What led Dhiraj to pursue Query.AI? (0:23)</li><li>Dhiraj shares ideas that he ultimately didn’t pursue (3:52)</li><li>The importance of evolving and the layers of innovation. (5:30)</li><li>The difference between being a founder and being an early employee. (8:52)</li><li>Advice Dhiraj would give himself if he could go back 20 years. (10:19)</li><li>Dhiraj’s advice on building a company. (11:52)</li><li>Security team budgets and creating an ROI calculator. (13:11)</li><li>Query.AI’s “unique” struggle. (18:47)</li><li>CSO’s general response to Query.AI. (20:03)</li><li>Dhiraj reflects on lessons learned and the importance of understanding your customer. (21:48)</li><li>Dhiraj on the entrepreneur in everyone. (23:32)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>Dhiraj: <ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/dhirajsharan">https://www.linkedin.com/in/dhirajsharan</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/dhirajsharan">https://twitter.com/dhirajsharan</a></li></ul></li><li>Query.AI:<ul><li>Website: <a href="https://query.ai">https://query.ai</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://www.twitter.com/query_ai">https://www.twitter.com/query_ai</a></li></ul></li></ul><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 25 Aug 2021 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/2b91e8fd/23714626.mp3" length="38034158" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1581</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Dhiraj Sharan, CEO and founder of Query.AI, joins me this week on Cloud Native Startup. 

With a career that spans over 20 years in cybersecurity, Dhiraj has seen the swift adoption of multi-cloud environments and SaaS apps. In this episode, Dhiraj discusses the importance of evolving your product as the world changes and why you should ask yourself “How can I be innovative for the next layer?” Dhiraj also gives his younger self advice on the cybersecurity game of chess and much more. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Dhiraj Sharan, CEO and founder of Query.AI, joins me this week on Cloud Native Startup. 

With a career that spans over 20 years in cybersecurity, Dhiraj has seen the swift adoption of multi-cloud environments and SaaS apps. In this episode, Dhiraj disc</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Transitioning Your Career Focus with Anurag Goel</title>
      <itunes:episode>58</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>58</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Transitioning Your Career Focus with Anurag Goel</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">e1314228-1578-45bc-acf5-cec42b7eb709</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/6ab4fdae</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Anurag Goel, Founder and CEO of <a href="https://render.com/">Render</a>, joins me on this episode of Cloud Native Startup. Learn about his beginnings at Stripe as employee #8, the birth of Render and how it solved a gap in the market, and his lessons learned while transitioning roles. We also discuss how open source fits into business strategy and much more.</p><p><br>In this episode, we cover:</p><ul><li>Anurag and how he founded Render (00:27) </li><li>Lessons learned while transitioning professional focus from engineering at Stripe to strategic business (05:42)</li><li>Anurag’s advice for people who want to transition into larger business roles (11:11)</li><li>The evolution of Render and its market and use case (13:57)</li><li>The important role of open source in the developer tool ecosystem (19:46)</li><li>Why Anurag chose to make Render open source  (22:11)</li><li>Strategies for making open source part of your platform (22:51)</li><li>How open source fits into business strategy (23:55)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>Anurag: <a href="http://www.twitter.com/anuraggoel">www.twitter.com/anuraggoel</a></li><li>Render<ul><li>Website: <a href="https://render.com/">https://render.com/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="http://www.twitter.com/render">https://www.twitter.com/render</a></li></ul></li></ul>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Anurag Goel, Founder and CEO of <a href="https://render.com/">Render</a>, joins me on this episode of Cloud Native Startup. Learn about his beginnings at Stripe as employee #8, the birth of Render and how it solved a gap in the market, and his lessons learned while transitioning roles. We also discuss how open source fits into business strategy and much more.</p><p><br>In this episode, we cover:</p><ul><li>Anurag and how he founded Render (00:27) </li><li>Lessons learned while transitioning professional focus from engineering at Stripe to strategic business (05:42)</li><li>Anurag’s advice for people who want to transition into larger business roles (11:11)</li><li>The evolution of Render and its market and use case (13:57)</li><li>The important role of open source in the developer tool ecosystem (19:46)</li><li>Why Anurag chose to make Render open source  (22:11)</li><li>Strategies for making open source part of your platform (22:51)</li><li>How open source fits into business strategy (23:55)</li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>Anurag: <a href="http://www.twitter.com/anuraggoel">www.twitter.com/anuraggoel</a></li><li>Render<ul><li>Website: <a href="https://render.com/">https://render.com/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="http://www.twitter.com/render">https://www.twitter.com/render</a></li></ul></li></ul>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 18 Aug 2021 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/6ab4fdae/fac76e03.mp3" length="41984809" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1746</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Anurag Goel, Founder and CEO of Render, joins me on this episode of Cloud Native Startup. Learn about his beginnings at Stripe as employee #8, the birth of Render and how it solved a gap in the market, and his lessons learned while transitioning roles. We also discuss how open source fits into business strategy and much more.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Anurag Goel, Founder and CEO of Render, joins me on this episode of Cloud Native Startup. Learn about his beginnings at Stripe as employee #8, the birth of Render and how it solved a gap in the market, and his lessons learned while transitioning roles. We</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Starting and Scaling a K8s Security Company with Wei Dang</title>
      <itunes:episode>57</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>57</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Starting and Scaling a K8s Security Company with Wei Dang</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">37b11a1d-c47e-4385-b111-22fc955dbae5</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/6d3e5cda</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on Cloud Native Startup, I talked with Wei Dang, founder of cloud native security company StackRox which was acquired by RedHat in 2020. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights: </strong></p><p><br></p><p>How Wei met his co-founder and how the two of them saw the need for new types of security tools. </p><p><br></p><p>Why talking to people throughout the Kubernetes ecosystem led to a series of a realizations that security in a cloud native world was going to me an increasingly important part of the conversations as more people adopted Kubernetes. </p><p><br></p><p>Where the name StackRox came from. </p><p><br></p><p>How even understanding if there was a market for a container security product. The moments wondering ‘are we building the right product’ was the scary. </p><p><br></p><p>Why it’s important to focus at the beginning. </p><p><br></p><p>How StackRox evolved from container security to Kubernetes security as the broader conversation shifted and the industry consolidated around Kubernetes. </p><p><br></p><p>The moment Wei felt like there was product-market fit for StackRox. </p><p><br></p><p>How Wei would define Kubernetes Security. </p><p><br></p><p>The ways in which starting and growing a company forced Wei to learn new skills and gain knowledge. </p><p><br></p><p>Why community is so important for companies in the Kubernetes ecosystem. </p><p><br></p><p>How things have changed — and how they haven’t — since becoming part of Red Hat. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links</strong></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://twitter.com/weiliendang"><strong>https://twitter.com/weiliendang</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/weiliendang/"><strong>https://www.linkedin.com/in/weiliendang/</strong></a></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on Cloud Native Startup, I talked with Wei Dang, founder of cloud native security company StackRox which was acquired by RedHat in 2020. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights: </strong></p><p><br></p><p>How Wei met his co-founder and how the two of them saw the need for new types of security tools. </p><p><br></p><p>Why talking to people throughout the Kubernetes ecosystem led to a series of a realizations that security in a cloud native world was going to me an increasingly important part of the conversations as more people adopted Kubernetes. </p><p><br></p><p>Where the name StackRox came from. </p><p><br></p><p>How even understanding if there was a market for a container security product. The moments wondering ‘are we building the right product’ was the scary. </p><p><br></p><p>Why it’s important to focus at the beginning. </p><p><br></p><p>How StackRox evolved from container security to Kubernetes security as the broader conversation shifted and the industry consolidated around Kubernetes. </p><p><br></p><p>The moment Wei felt like there was product-market fit for StackRox. </p><p><br></p><p>How Wei would define Kubernetes Security. </p><p><br></p><p>The ways in which starting and growing a company forced Wei to learn new skills and gain knowledge. </p><p><br></p><p>Why community is so important for companies in the Kubernetes ecosystem. </p><p><br></p><p>How things have changed — and how they haven’t — since becoming part of Red Hat. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links</strong></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://twitter.com/weiliendang"><strong>https://twitter.com/weiliendang</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/weiliendang/"><strong>https://www.linkedin.com/in/weiliendang/</strong></a></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 28 Jul 2021 13:53:08 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/6d3e5cda/8f2386b4.mp3" length="27324974" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1704</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>This week on Cloud Native Startup, I talked with Wei Dang, founder of cloud native security company StackRox which was acquired by RedHat in 2020. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>This week on Cloud Native Startup, I talked with Wei Dang, founder of cloud native security company StackRox which was acquired by RedHat in 2020. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Introducing Cloud Native Startup</title>
      <itunes:episode>56</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>56</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Introducing Cloud Native Startup</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">1e78be51-854b-4af4-9f48-f30e80c871eb</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/069f5671</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>The Business of Cloud Native is now Cloud Native Startup. Going forward, I'm moving away from talking to end users and focusing instead on what it takes to build a startup in the cloud native ecosystem. I'll be talking with startup founders, startup advisors and others in the ecosystem about making the transition from software engineer to startup founder, the stories behind companies we read about in the tech press and how to increase your odds of success in the cloud native startup world. </p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>The Business of Cloud Native is now Cloud Native Startup. Going forward, I'm moving away from talking to end users and focusing instead on what it takes to build a startup in the cloud native ecosystem. I'll be talking with startup founders, startup advisors and others in the ecosystem about making the transition from software engineer to startup founder, the stories behind companies we read about in the tech press and how to increase your odds of success in the cloud native startup world. </p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 14 Jul 2021 14:47:37 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/069f5671/e362cea4.mp3" length="2317454" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>141</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>The Business of Cloud Native is now Cloud Native Startup. Going forward, I'm moving away from talking to end users and focusing instead on what it takes to build a startup in the cloud native ecosystem. I'll be talking with startup founders, startup advisors and others in the ecosystem about making the transition from software engineer to startup founder, the stories behind companies we read about in the tech press and how to increase your odds of success in the cloud native startup world. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>The Business of Cloud Native is now Cloud Native Startup. Going forward, I'm moving away from talking to end users and focusing instead on what it takes to build a startup in the cloud native ecosystem. I'll be talking with startup founders, startup advis</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>The Changing Role of Tech in the Enterprise with Abby Kearns</title>
      <itunes:episode>55</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>55</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>The Changing Role of Tech in the Enterprise with Abby Kearns</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">d1e2b9fc-76ec-4fd4-82c4-38327f79d789</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/89570321</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Cloud Native, I spoke with Abby Kearns, CTO at Puppet, about the changing role of technology in the enterprise and how that changes things for software companies like Puppet. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights</strong></p><p><br></p><p>Whatever the exact definition of cloud native, ultimately it is a way to improve scaling and resilience. </p><p><br></p><p>The increasing importance of software for enterprises, because customers simply expect to use software to connect with companies of all sizes. </p><p><br></p><p>Why cloud native is tied to digital transformation — because you can’t do one without the other. </p><p><br></p><p>Picking tech and deploying it — that’s the easy part. But the people part is hard. Changing organizational structures is hard, but the companies that are succeeding in the new digital environment have to do the hard work. </p><p><br></p><p>Why enterprises that are successfully using software to build a better relationship with your customers have top company leadership, from the CEO on down, investing in the transformation and incorporating technology into the company’s vision. </p><p><br></p><p>How the changing role of technology in the enterprise has changed things for technology companies like Puppet. </p><p><br></p><p>How technology decisions have now become board-level decisions, rather than decisions that made in a basement among technologists. </p><p><br></p><p>How the changing landscape has forced Puppet to change its go to market strategy, positioning and messaging. </p><p><br></p><p>The speed of change in the technology space seems to be accelerating and can lead to a lot of uncertainty. </p><p><br></p><p>Why open source can be extremely rewarding, but requires companies to give up a huge amount of control that can be unnerving for enterprises. </p><p><br></p><p>What is the role of a CTO at a technology company — is it tactical? Is it visionary? </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links</strong></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/abbykearns/">Abby Kearns on LinkedIn</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://twitter.com/ab415?lang=en">Abby Kearns on Twitter</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://puppet.com">Puppet</a></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Cloud Native, I spoke with Abby Kearns, CTO at Puppet, about the changing role of technology in the enterprise and how that changes things for software companies like Puppet. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights</strong></p><p><br></p><p>Whatever the exact definition of cloud native, ultimately it is a way to improve scaling and resilience. </p><p><br></p><p>The increasing importance of software for enterprises, because customers simply expect to use software to connect with companies of all sizes. </p><p><br></p><p>Why cloud native is tied to digital transformation — because you can’t do one without the other. </p><p><br></p><p>Picking tech and deploying it — that’s the easy part. But the people part is hard. Changing organizational structures is hard, but the companies that are succeeding in the new digital environment have to do the hard work. </p><p><br></p><p>Why enterprises that are successfully using software to build a better relationship with your customers have top company leadership, from the CEO on down, investing in the transformation and incorporating technology into the company’s vision. </p><p><br></p><p>How the changing role of technology in the enterprise has changed things for technology companies like Puppet. </p><p><br></p><p>How technology decisions have now become board-level decisions, rather than decisions that made in a basement among technologists. </p><p><br></p><p>How the changing landscape has forced Puppet to change its go to market strategy, positioning and messaging. </p><p><br></p><p>The speed of change in the technology space seems to be accelerating and can lead to a lot of uncertainty. </p><p><br></p><p>Why open source can be extremely rewarding, but requires companies to give up a huge amount of control that can be unnerving for enterprises. </p><p><br></p><p>What is the role of a CTO at a technology company — is it tactical? Is it visionary? </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links</strong></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/abbykearns/">Abby Kearns on LinkedIn</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://twitter.com/ab415?lang=en">Abby Kearns on Twitter</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://puppet.com">Puppet</a></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 07 Jul 2021 08:14:59 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/89570321/32e3f5cc.mp3" length="51738938" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1615</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>This week on The Business of Cloud Native, I spoke with Abby Kearns, CTO at Puppet, about the changing role of technology in the enterprise and how that changes things for software companies like Puppet. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>This week on The Business of Cloud Native, I spoke with Abby Kearns, CTO at Puppet, about the changing role of technology in the enterprise and how that changes things for software companies like Puppet. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Understanding the Kubernetes Journey with Kelsey Hightower</title>
      <itunes:episode>54</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>54</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Understanding the Kubernetes Journey with Kelsey Hightower</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">de776274-2583-491b-92dc-7814c426eed4</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/b8c7f30d</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on the Business of Cloud Native, I talked with Kelsey Hightower, principle engineer at Google and Kubernetes expert. We talked about how technology like Kubernetes helps engineers focus more on solving business problems instead of constantly solving the same low-level problems. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights: </strong></p><p><br></p><p>How the evolution of technology — and the evolution of customers’ expectation — have made cloud native practices table stakes. </p><p><br></p><p>The more established a company is, the more layers it likely has in its technology stacks. Unless a company is under 10 years old, it probably isn’t 100% cloud native because it’s rarely practical to throw away everything they’ve been doing in the past.</p><p><br></p><p>Why it’s so challenging for companies to “disrupt themselves” by adopting cloud native technology unless they have serious motivation. </p><p><br></p><p>How successful cloud native journeys involve both grand strategic visions and boring tactical plans that can actually be implemented. </p><p><br></p><p>Why companies need to take into account the entire ‘infrastructure’ needed to adopt cloud native. How do you collect the data you need to reach your goals? Do you have the human resources, both technical and non-technical, to achieve their goals? </p><p><br></p><p>How cloud native transitions can quickly become an ‘onion’ problem where there is always another layer that companies need to solve. </p><p><br></p><p>How to convince practitioners who are trying to build customer tools internally that they should use Kubernetes or other open source projects. </p><p><br></p><p>The myth of ‘tech displacing people.’ Usually evolution of technology leads to more jobs for software engineers, not less. </p><p><br></p><p>How Kubernetes helps engineers focus on the business — and that is a good thing. </p><p><br></p><p>The difference between 20 years of experience and 20 years worth of 1-year experience. </p><p><br></p><p>Why Kubernetes is a platform for building other platforms. </p><p><br></p><p>Why Kubernetes and cloud native are not a magic bullet that will completely transform your business. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links: </strong></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://twitter.com/kelseyhightower">Kelsey Hightower on Twitter</a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on the Business of Cloud Native, I talked with Kelsey Hightower, principle engineer at Google and Kubernetes expert. We talked about how technology like Kubernetes helps engineers focus more on solving business problems instead of constantly solving the same low-level problems. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights: </strong></p><p><br></p><p>How the evolution of technology — and the evolution of customers’ expectation — have made cloud native practices table stakes. </p><p><br></p><p>The more established a company is, the more layers it likely has in its technology stacks. Unless a company is under 10 years old, it probably isn’t 100% cloud native because it’s rarely practical to throw away everything they’ve been doing in the past.</p><p><br></p><p>Why it’s so challenging for companies to “disrupt themselves” by adopting cloud native technology unless they have serious motivation. </p><p><br></p><p>How successful cloud native journeys involve both grand strategic visions and boring tactical plans that can actually be implemented. </p><p><br></p><p>Why companies need to take into account the entire ‘infrastructure’ needed to adopt cloud native. How do you collect the data you need to reach your goals? Do you have the human resources, both technical and non-technical, to achieve their goals? </p><p><br></p><p>How cloud native transitions can quickly become an ‘onion’ problem where there is always another layer that companies need to solve. </p><p><br></p><p>How to convince practitioners who are trying to build customer tools internally that they should use Kubernetes or other open source projects. </p><p><br></p><p>The myth of ‘tech displacing people.’ Usually evolution of technology leads to more jobs for software engineers, not less. </p><p><br></p><p>How Kubernetes helps engineers focus on the business — and that is a good thing. </p><p><br></p><p>The difference between 20 years of experience and 20 years worth of 1-year experience. </p><p><br></p><p>Why Kubernetes is a platform for building other platforms. </p><p><br></p><p>Why Kubernetes and cloud native are not a magic bullet that will completely transform your business. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links: </strong></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://twitter.com/kelseyhightower">Kelsey Hightower on Twitter</a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 30 Jun 2021 14:24:50 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/b8c7f30d/2c684042.mp3" length="59513981" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1858</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>This week on the Business of Cloud Native, I talked with Kelsey Hightower, principle engineer at Google and Kubernetes expert. We talked about how technology like Kubernetes helps engineers focus more on solving business problems instead of constantly solving the same low-level problems. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>This week on the Business of Cloud Native, I talked with Kelsey Hightower, principle engineer at Google and Kubernetes expert. We talked about how technology like Kubernetes helps engineers focus more on solving business problems instead of constantly sol</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Turning IT into a Profit Center with Mark Thiele</title>
      <itunes:episode>53</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>53</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Turning IT into a Profit Center with Mark Thiele</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">8875dc90-b6ea-4e51-aec7-7b64ffbb2ef5</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/3282bd6e</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Cloud Native, I spoke with Mark Thiele of Edgevana about the definition of cloud and cloud native, where the line is between cloud and edge and situations where edge is the best option. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights: </strong></p><p><br></p><p>A discussion of situations where edge is the most appropriate option and how edge can help solve problems related to latency, data transfer costs, data sovereignty and network access. </p><p><br></p><p>Why the right architecture depends on your business needs — there is no one size fits all way to design an edge solution. </p><p><br></p><p>The relationship between data centers, public clouds and edge devices, including how co-location facilities fit into the equation. </p><p><br></p><p>How IT is shifting from being a cost center in the business to being a profit center, and how this re-framing of IT is the root of fundamental change. </p><p><br></p><p>What types of companies can successfully manage a data center and what types of companies should accept that they don’t have the skills and just go to the public cloud. </p><p><br></p><p>Why success in the digital transformation is really a question of prioritization. </p><p><br></p><p>Do you enjoy the podcast? Help others find it by leaving a review on <a href="https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/the-business-of-cloud-native/id1514646781">Apple Podcasts</a> and sharing on social media. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links</strong></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.edgevana.com">Edgevana</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/markthiele/">Mark on LinkedIn</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://twitter.com/mthiele10">Mark on Twitter</a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Cloud Native, I spoke with Mark Thiele of Edgevana about the definition of cloud and cloud native, where the line is between cloud and edge and situations where edge is the best option. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights: </strong></p><p><br></p><p>A discussion of situations where edge is the most appropriate option and how edge can help solve problems related to latency, data transfer costs, data sovereignty and network access. </p><p><br></p><p>Why the right architecture depends on your business needs — there is no one size fits all way to design an edge solution. </p><p><br></p><p>The relationship between data centers, public clouds and edge devices, including how co-location facilities fit into the equation. </p><p><br></p><p>How IT is shifting from being a cost center in the business to being a profit center, and how this re-framing of IT is the root of fundamental change. </p><p><br></p><p>What types of companies can successfully manage a data center and what types of companies should accept that they don’t have the skills and just go to the public cloud. </p><p><br></p><p>Why success in the digital transformation is really a question of prioritization. </p><p><br></p><p>Do you enjoy the podcast? Help others find it by leaving a review on <a href="https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/the-business-of-cloud-native/id1514646781">Apple Podcasts</a> and sharing on social media. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links</strong></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.edgevana.com">Edgevana</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/markthiele/">Mark on LinkedIn</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://twitter.com/mthiele10">Mark on Twitter</a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 23 Jun 2021 06:54:07 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/3282bd6e/b978d2f4.mp3" length="59964377" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1872</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>This week on The Business of Cloud Native, I spoke with Mark Thiele of Edgevana about the definition of cloud and cloud native, where the line is between cloud and edge and situations where edge is the best option. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>This week on The Business of Cloud Native, I spoke with Mark Thiele of Edgevana about the definition of cloud and cloud native, where the line is between cloud and edge and situations where edge is the best option. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Building Community with Jana Boruta</title>
      <itunes:episode>52</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>52</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Building Community with Jana Boruta</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">c3d5661c-89d9-4f69-be99-623f47f441f4</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/da6255e1</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Cloud Native, I spoke with Jana Boruta, Director of Global Events at HashiCorp, about building community — for startups, for big companies and for open source projects with no budget. We also touched on digital-first events and how they differ from in person events. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><p><br></p><p>What is community and why does it matter for companies building commercial tools for developers. </p><p><br></p><p>Why community building is for everyone — from Nike to volunteer organizations to enterprise software. </p><p><br></p><p>Is it ever too early for community building? How to determine if you’re building community for the right reasons. </p><p><br></p><p>Why community building is a long game — not something that will show immediate ROI after a single event. </p><p><br></p><p>Community building starts with creating a community blueprint. While some tactics are common, but every company’s community is going to be different and has to be authentic to the company. </p><p><br></p><p>Why product feedback can be an important first step for building a community. </p><p><br></p><p>Why starting with community building too early, when the product is too buggy, can be counter productive. </p><p><br></p><p>Why you should avoid thinking of your community as a demand gen program. </p><p><br></p><p>How create digital events that provide value for the attendees, even if they deliver it in a very different way than an in-person event. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.janaboruta.com">Jana’s website</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/janaboruta/">Jana on LinkedIn</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://hashiconf.com">HashiConf</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://epicconf.com">EpicConf</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://leanpub.com/digital-firstevents/">Digital-First Events</a>, Jana’s book about digital events </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Cloud Native, I spoke with Jana Boruta, Director of Global Events at HashiCorp, about building community — for startups, for big companies and for open source projects with no budget. We also touched on digital-first events and how they differ from in person events. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><p><br></p><p>What is community and why does it matter for companies building commercial tools for developers. </p><p><br></p><p>Why community building is for everyone — from Nike to volunteer organizations to enterprise software. </p><p><br></p><p>Is it ever too early for community building? How to determine if you’re building community for the right reasons. </p><p><br></p><p>Why community building is a long game — not something that will show immediate ROI after a single event. </p><p><br></p><p>Community building starts with creating a community blueprint. While some tactics are common, but every company’s community is going to be different and has to be authentic to the company. </p><p><br></p><p>Why product feedback can be an important first step for building a community. </p><p><br></p><p>Why starting with community building too early, when the product is too buggy, can be counter productive. </p><p><br></p><p>Why you should avoid thinking of your community as a demand gen program. </p><p><br></p><p>How create digital events that provide value for the attendees, even if they deliver it in a very different way than an in-person event. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.janaboruta.com">Jana’s website</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/janaboruta/">Jana on LinkedIn</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://hashiconf.com">HashiConf</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://epicconf.com">EpicConf</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://leanpub.com/digital-firstevents/">Digital-First Events</a>, Jana’s book about digital events </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 02 Jun 2021 10:08:01 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/da6255e1/7b41d99c.mp3" length="52874253" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1650</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>This week on The Business of Cloud Native, I spoke with Jana Boruta, Director of Global Events at HashiCorp, about building community — for startups, for big companies and for open source projects with no budget. We also touched on digital-first events and how they differ from in person events. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>This week on The Business of Cloud Native, I spoke with Jana Boruta, Director of Global Events at HashiCorp, about building community — for startups, for big companies and for open source projects with no budget. We also touched on digital-first events an</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Security Forensics in a Cloud Native Environment with James Campbell</title>
      <itunes:episode>51</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>51</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Security Forensics in a Cloud Native Environment with James Campbell</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">4c330935-dc24-4479-974d-afd619cbba4d</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/27e001ad</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Cloud Native, I spoke with James Campbell, CEO of Cado Security, about his background in the security world and why he felt like there needed to be a better way to manage security forensics in a cloud native environment. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights: </strong></p><p><br></p><p>Why it’s important to get better information about security incidents — or potential security incidents — to make better decisions. </p><p><br></p><p>Why security has to be relatively easy because otherwise people will ignore it — at their peril. </p><p><br></p><p>How cloud native features like auto-scaling are great for compute but make security, especially security forensics, more complex. </p><p><br></p><p>Without enough data collected in real time, companies can end up unable to know whether or not an anomaly actually caused data loss, which data was impacted and what the root cause of incident was. </p><p><br></p><p>How some of the most sophisticated attackers operate and how they can cause havoc even if the impacted container has spun down. </p><p><br></p><p>The triggers that led Campbell and his co-founder to start Cado Security. </p><p><br></p><p>Why having better information is critical to responding effectively to breaches, large and small. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links: </strong></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/cirninja/">James Campbell on LinkedIn</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://twitter.com/SomeIRguy">James Campbell on Twitter</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.cadosecurity.com">Cado Security</a></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Cloud Native, I spoke with James Campbell, CEO of Cado Security, about his background in the security world and why he felt like there needed to be a better way to manage security forensics in a cloud native environment. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights: </strong></p><p><br></p><p>Why it’s important to get better information about security incidents — or potential security incidents — to make better decisions. </p><p><br></p><p>Why security has to be relatively easy because otherwise people will ignore it — at their peril. </p><p><br></p><p>How cloud native features like auto-scaling are great for compute but make security, especially security forensics, more complex. </p><p><br></p><p>Without enough data collected in real time, companies can end up unable to know whether or not an anomaly actually caused data loss, which data was impacted and what the root cause of incident was. </p><p><br></p><p>How some of the most sophisticated attackers operate and how they can cause havoc even if the impacted container has spun down. </p><p><br></p><p>The triggers that led Campbell and his co-founder to start Cado Security. </p><p><br></p><p>Why having better information is critical to responding effectively to breaches, large and small. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links: </strong></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/cirninja/">James Campbell on LinkedIn</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://twitter.com/SomeIRguy">James Campbell on Twitter</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.cadosecurity.com">Cado Security</a></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 26 May 2021 09:44:27 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/27e001ad/cbca1f07.mp3" length="48536643" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1515</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>This week on The Business of Cloud Native, I spoke with James Campbell, CEO of Cado Security, about his background in the security world and why he felt like there needed to be a better way to manage security forensics in a cloud native environment. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>This week on The Business of Cloud Native, I spoke with James Campbell, CEO of Cado Security, about his background in the security world and why he felt like there needed to be a better way to manage security forensics in a cloud native environment. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Building on the Edge with Samy Fodil</title>
      <itunes:episode>50</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>50</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Building on the Edge with Samy Fodil</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">2c6f6dfe-05b9-4b1b-9702-2258b1c57ad3</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/752f03df</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>What is edge? What is cloud? What is the difference and what are the different requirements for each use case? I talked to Samy Fodil, CEO and founder of Taubyte, about edge computing, industrial IoT and how the edge requires a dramatically different approach from the cloud. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><p><br></p><p>Why edge is a truly distributed system, unlike the cloud. </p><p><br></p><p>What inspired Fodil to start Taubyte and why he thinks the edge will be the default computing platform in the years to come.</p><p><br></p><p>What overlap there is in skill sets between on-prem development, cloud development and developing edge-native applications.</p><p><br></p><p>Why edge-to-edge communications can be so hard for developers to understand. </p><p><br></p><p>What barriers prevent companies from taking advantage of the edge and why it’s worth it for those businesses in spite of the complexity. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/samy-fodil-350a9117/">Samy Fodil</a> on LinkedIn</p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://taubyte.com">Taubyte</a></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>What is edge? What is cloud? What is the difference and what are the different requirements for each use case? I talked to Samy Fodil, CEO and founder of Taubyte, about edge computing, industrial IoT and how the edge requires a dramatically different approach from the cloud. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights:</strong></p><p><br></p><p>Why edge is a truly distributed system, unlike the cloud. </p><p><br></p><p>What inspired Fodil to start Taubyte and why he thinks the edge will be the default computing platform in the years to come.</p><p><br></p><p>What overlap there is in skill sets between on-prem development, cloud development and developing edge-native applications.</p><p><br></p><p>Why edge-to-edge communications can be so hard for developers to understand. </p><p><br></p><p>What barriers prevent companies from taking advantage of the edge and why it’s worth it for those businesses in spite of the complexity. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/samy-fodil-350a9117/">Samy Fodil</a> on LinkedIn</p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://taubyte.com">Taubyte</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Fri, 21 May 2021 09:31:38 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/752f03df/4a1148e7.mp3" length="45703704" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1426</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>What is edge? What is cloud? What is the difference and what are the different requirements for each use case? I talked to Samy Fodil, CEO and founder of Taubyte, about edge computing, industrial IoT and how the edge requires a dramatically different approach from the cloud. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>What is edge? What is cloud? What is the difference and what are the different requirements for each use case? I talked to Samy Fodil, CEO and founder of Taubyte, about edge computing, industrial IoT and how the edge requires a dramatically different appr</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Positioning Open Source: Rook</title>
      <itunes:episode>49</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>49</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Positioning Open Source: Rook</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">609cc2b5-e850-4f6d-a1fd-5e2450809dfb</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/fb06a43f</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Cloud Native I spoke with Travis Nielsen and Sebastien Han about how Rook has evolved over the years, beginning as a way to build a cloud native storage platform but before anyone was talking about cloud native or Kubernetes. </p><p><br></p><p>Links: </p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/travis23/">Travis on LinkedIn</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/s%C3%A9bastien-han-9215222b/">Sebastien on LinkedIn</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://rook.io">The Rook project page</a></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Cloud Native I spoke with Travis Nielsen and Sebastien Han about how Rook has evolved over the years, beginning as a way to build a cloud native storage platform but before anyone was talking about cloud native or Kubernetes. </p><p><br></p><p>Links: </p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/travis23/">Travis on LinkedIn</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/s%C3%A9bastien-han-9215222b/">Sebastien on LinkedIn</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://rook.io">The Rook project page</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 12 May 2021 14:13:28 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/fb06a43f/2eed94df.mp3" length="57002768" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1779</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>This week on The Business of Cloud Native I spoke with Travis Nielsen and Sebastien Han about how Rook has evolved over the years, beginning as a way to build a cloud native storage platform but before anyone was talking about cloud native or Kubernetes. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>This week on The Business of Cloud Native I spoke with Travis Nielsen and Sebastien Han about how Rook has evolved over the years, beginning as a way to build a cloud native storage platform but before anyone was talking about cloud native or Kubernetes. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Moving Between Market Categories in Cloud Security with Augusto Barros</title>
      <itunes:episode>48</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>48</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Moving Between Market Categories in Cloud Security with Augusto Barros</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">95c23a24-fae4-4a2c-9705-64683226bfc2</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/3b258e78</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Cloud Native, I talked with former Gartner Analyst, current VP of Solutions at Securonix Augusto Barros. We talked about how Securonix’s positioning has evolved over the years as it has move between market categories as well as how to evaluate and test cloud native security solutions. </p><p><br></p><p>Links:</p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://twitter.com/apbarros?ref_src=twsrc%5Egoogle%7Ctwcamp%5Eserp%7Ctwgr%5Eauthor">Augusto on Twitter</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/apbarros/?originalSubdomain=ca">Augusto on LinkedIn</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/apbarros/?originalSubdomain=ca">Securonix</a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Cloud Native, I talked with former Gartner Analyst, current VP of Solutions at Securonix Augusto Barros. We talked about how Securonix’s positioning has evolved over the years as it has move between market categories as well as how to evaluate and test cloud native security solutions. </p><p><br></p><p>Links:</p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://twitter.com/apbarros?ref_src=twsrc%5Egoogle%7Ctwcamp%5Eserp%7Ctwgr%5Eauthor">Augusto on Twitter</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/apbarros/?originalSubdomain=ca">Augusto on LinkedIn</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/apbarros/?originalSubdomain=ca">Securonix</a></p><p><br></p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 05 May 2021 14:13:07 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/3b258e78/ff584d1a.mp3" length="69117087" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2158</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>This week on The Business of Cloud Native, I talked with former Gartner Analyst, current VP of Solutions at Securonix Augusto Barros. We talked about how Securonix’s positioning has evolved over the years as it has move between market categories as well as how to evaluate and test cloud native security solutions. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>This week on The Business of Cloud Native, I talked with former Gartner Analyst, current VP of Solutions at Securonix Augusto Barros. We talked about how Securonix’s positioning has evolved over the years as it has move between market categories as well a</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Choosing a Cloud Provider for Strategic Business Reasons with Evan Reiser</title>
      <itunes:episode>47</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>47</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Choosing a Cloud Provider for Strategic Business Reasons with Evan Reiser</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">ed79a7f9-2411-4f93-8b2e-711843b0f54e</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/1ba9effb</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode with Evan Reiser, CEO of Abnormal Security, we explored how positioning and an understanding of who your ideal customers are and what their needs are can influence technology choices, including which cloud provider you build on. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights</strong></p><p><br></p><p>How a seemingly pure technology choice like cloud provider can have serious implications for customer experience. </p><p><br></p><p>The difference between having a board-level discussion about cloud providers is different from gathering the engineering team to talk about cloud infrastructure </p><p><br></p><p>Why being integrated in the Microsoft ecosystem was a strategic business decision and how technology decisions in general can be high-level business decisions</p><p><br></p><p>Why technology teams should think more about what the customers need and want instead of just choosing the best tool from a technical perspective</p><p><br></p><p>Evan’s hesitations about making the transition to Azure and why they did it anyway</p><p><br></p><p>Why they chose to re-architect at the time they did</p><p><br></p><p>Even though the move to Azure was made to improve customer experience, customers don’t necessarily have a different experience since the move</p><p><br></p><p>Why founders should keep in mind that startups rarely fail because their technology doesn’t work, but because they don’t meet the needs of their customers</p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Links: </p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/evanreiser/">Evan on LinkedIn</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://abnormalsecurity.com">Abnormal Security</a></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode with Evan Reiser, CEO of Abnormal Security, we explored how positioning and an understanding of who your ideal customers are and what their needs are can influence technology choices, including which cloud provider you build on. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights</strong></p><p><br></p><p>How a seemingly pure technology choice like cloud provider can have serious implications for customer experience. </p><p><br></p><p>The difference between having a board-level discussion about cloud providers is different from gathering the engineering team to talk about cloud infrastructure </p><p><br></p><p>Why being integrated in the Microsoft ecosystem was a strategic business decision and how technology decisions in general can be high-level business decisions</p><p><br></p><p>Why technology teams should think more about what the customers need and want instead of just choosing the best tool from a technical perspective</p><p><br></p><p>Evan’s hesitations about making the transition to Azure and why they did it anyway</p><p><br></p><p>Why they chose to re-architect at the time they did</p><p><br></p><p>Even though the move to Azure was made to improve customer experience, customers don’t necessarily have a different experience since the move</p><p><br></p><p>Why founders should keep in mind that startups rarely fail because their technology doesn’t work, but because they don’t meet the needs of their customers</p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Links: </p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/evanreiser/">Evan on LinkedIn</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://abnormalsecurity.com">Abnormal Security</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 28 Apr 2021 14:03:22 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/1ba9effb/828097c7.mp3" length="53734383" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1677</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode with Evan Reiser, CEO of Abnormal Security, we explored how positioning and an understanding of who your ideal customers are and what their needs are can influence technology choices, including which cloud provider you build on. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode with Evan Reiser, CEO of Abnormal Security, we explored how positioning and an understanding of who your ideal customers are and what their needs are can influence technology choices, including which cloud provider you build on. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Positioning Open Source: The Evolution of CoreDNS</title>
      <itunes:episode>46</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>46</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Positioning Open Source: The Evolution of CoreDNS</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">3c822476-974d-4916-b0a2-a4bc98d3fa91</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/5c566334</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Cloud Native I talked with Yong Tang, one of the maintainers of CoreDNS, about how the project started, how it’s evolved over the years and how the team decided to integrate it with Kubernetes. </p><p><br></p><p>Links: </p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://coredns.io">CoreDNS</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/yong-tang/">Yong Tang</a> on LinkedIn</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Cloud Native I talked with Yong Tang, one of the maintainers of CoreDNS, about how the project started, how it’s evolved over the years and how the team decided to integrate it with Kubernetes. </p><p><br></p><p>Links: </p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://coredns.io">CoreDNS</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/yong-tang/">Yong Tang</a> on LinkedIn</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 21 Apr 2021 13:22:34 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/5c566334/f48e9e8f.mp3" length="53444228" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1668</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>This week on The Business of Cloud Native I talked with Yong Tang, one of the maintainers of CoreDNS, about how the project started, how it’s evolved over the years and how the team decided to integrate it with Kubernetes. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>This week on The Business of Cloud Native I talked with Yong Tang, one of the maintainers of CoreDNS, about how the project started, how it’s evolved over the years and how the team decided to integrate it with Kubernetes. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>The Edge, the cloud and Kubernetes with Brian Gracely</title>
      <itunes:episode>45</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>45</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>The Edge, the cloud and Kubernetes with Brian Gracely</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">547912ec-23cc-449d-9977-a9cfcd47bfe3</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/2997b1ca</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Cloud Native, I talked with Brian Gracely about using Kubernetes for edge workloads as well as the difference between “cloud” and “edge.” </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights</strong></p><p><br></p><p>Is edge part of the cloud, is cloud a part of edge or are they completely separate but slightly related environments? </p><p><br></p><p>What makes something a data center vs what makes something an edge device? </p><p><br></p><p>How enterprises think of edge vs how Telcos think about edge. </p><p><br></p><p>How the edge has gone from being a cost center to a competitive advantage for enterprises.</p><p><br></p><p>Why Telcos have always thought of edge as a market opportunity. </p><p><br></p><p>Why Kubernetes can help standardize environments and make it easier to deploy software to the edge, but there are still challenges to overcome. </p><p><br></p><p>Why edge deployments require re-thinking many basic environmental factors like bandwidth and compute capacity. </p><p><br></p><p>Why consistency at the edge is so important. </p><p><br></p><p>Why you can’t ignore the physical conditions that make edge environments unique. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links</strong></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://twitter.com/bgracely?ref_src=twsrc%5Egoogle%7Ctwcamp%5Eserp%7Ctwgr%5Eauthor">Brian on Twitter</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.thecloudcast.net/2021/04/managing-unstructured-data-in-cloud.html">The Cloudcast</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.redhat.com/en/technologies/cloud-computing/openshift/try-it?sc_cid=7013a0000026OagAAE&amp;gclid=Cj0KCQjwpdqDBhCSARIsAEUJ0hPQaWZByHEDtZcWnkoMKaWeTyWoCV7XmknsK7Bsp9Sg7jm6h5VxW80aAs45EALw_wcB&amp;gclsrc=aw.ds">RedHat OpenShift</a></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Cloud Native, I talked with Brian Gracely about using Kubernetes for edge workloads as well as the difference between “cloud” and “edge.” </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights</strong></p><p><br></p><p>Is edge part of the cloud, is cloud a part of edge or are they completely separate but slightly related environments? </p><p><br></p><p>What makes something a data center vs what makes something an edge device? </p><p><br></p><p>How enterprises think of edge vs how Telcos think about edge. </p><p><br></p><p>How the edge has gone from being a cost center to a competitive advantage for enterprises.</p><p><br></p><p>Why Telcos have always thought of edge as a market opportunity. </p><p><br></p><p>Why Kubernetes can help standardize environments and make it easier to deploy software to the edge, but there are still challenges to overcome. </p><p><br></p><p>Why edge deployments require re-thinking many basic environmental factors like bandwidth and compute capacity. </p><p><br></p><p>Why consistency at the edge is so important. </p><p><br></p><p>Why you can’t ignore the physical conditions that make edge environments unique. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links</strong></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://twitter.com/bgracely?ref_src=twsrc%5Egoogle%7Ctwcamp%5Eserp%7Ctwgr%5Eauthor">Brian on Twitter</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.thecloudcast.net/2021/04/managing-unstructured-data-in-cloud.html">The Cloudcast</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.redhat.com/en/technologies/cloud-computing/openshift/try-it?sc_cid=7013a0000026OagAAE&amp;gclid=Cj0KCQjwpdqDBhCSARIsAEUJ0hPQaWZByHEDtZcWnkoMKaWeTyWoCV7XmknsK7Bsp9Sg7jm6h5VxW80aAs45EALw_wcB&amp;gclsrc=aw.ds">RedHat OpenShift</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 14 Apr 2021 13:51:16 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/2997b1ca/4df87f58.mp3" length="55692068" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1738</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>This week on The Business of Cloud Native, I talked with Brian Gracely about using Kubernetes for edge workloads as well as the difference between “cloud” and “edge.” </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>This week on The Business of Cloud Native, I talked with Brian Gracely about using Kubernetes for edge workloads as well as the difference between “cloud” and “edge.” </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Positioning Open Source: Prometheus</title>
      <itunes:episode>44</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>44</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Positioning Open Source: Prometheus</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">35e1aaee-0214-484f-888b-8c9f73fab382</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/74c62825</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>In today’s episode of The Business of Cloud Native, I talked with Julien Pivotto and Richard Hartmann, two of the maintainers of Prometheus, about how the project started, how it’s evolved over the years (and how it’s stayed the same) as well as some novel ways Prometheus is used in the real world. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights</strong></p><p><br></p><p>Why both Julien and Richard got started with Prometheus</p><p><br></p><p>Some surprising ways that Prometheus is used to monitor things beyond the software engineering world</p><p><br></p><p>How Prometheus has evolved in technology and usage over the years</p><p><br></p><p>How Kubernetes and its relationship with Prometheus has changed the project</p><p><br></p><p>What assumptions ‘cloud native’ creates for potential Prometheus users</p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links</strong></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://twitter.com/roidelapluie"><strong>Julien on Twitter</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://twitter.com/TwitchiH"><strong>Richard on Twitter</strong></a></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In today’s episode of The Business of Cloud Native, I talked with Julien Pivotto and Richard Hartmann, two of the maintainers of Prometheus, about how the project started, how it’s evolved over the years (and how it’s stayed the same) as well as some novel ways Prometheus is used in the real world. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights</strong></p><p><br></p><p>Why both Julien and Richard got started with Prometheus</p><p><br></p><p>Some surprising ways that Prometheus is used to monitor things beyond the software engineering world</p><p><br></p><p>How Prometheus has evolved in technology and usage over the years</p><p><br></p><p>How Kubernetes and its relationship with Prometheus has changed the project</p><p><br></p><p>What assumptions ‘cloud native’ creates for potential Prometheus users</p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links</strong></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://twitter.com/roidelapluie"><strong>Julien on Twitter</strong></a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://twitter.com/TwitchiH"><strong>Richard on Twitter</strong></a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 07 Apr 2021 14:15:36 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/74c62825/ac83dcf9.mp3" length="56771309" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1772</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>In today’s episode of The Business of Cloud Native, I talked with Julien Pivotto and Richard Hartmann, two of the maintainers of Prometheus, about how the project started, how it’s evolved over the years (and how it’s stayed the same) as well as some novel ways Prometheus is used in the real world. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>In today’s episode of The Business of Cloud Native, I talked with Julien Pivotto and Richard Hartmann, two of the maintainers of Prometheus, about how the project started, how it’s evolved over the years (and how it’s stayed the same) as well as some nove</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Connecting ‘legacy’ apps and cloud native apps with Chris Holmes</title>
      <itunes:episode>43</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>43</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Connecting ‘legacy’ apps and cloud native apps with Chris Holmes</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">ea295dec-4517-415a-867d-e39dcbae57ce</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/8a26aff3</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, Chris Holmes talks about bootstrapping Decipher Technology Studies and their core product, intelligent service mesh Greymatter.io. He also talks about why it's so important for brownfield and greenfield apps to talk to one another and the many similarities between public sector and private sector organizations. </p><p><strong>Highlights: </strong></p><p><br></p><p>How Greymatter combines business intelligence and security controls.</p><p><br></p><p>The difference between working with public sector customers and private sector / enterprise customers — and why there are more similarities than differences. </p><p><br></p><p>How segmentation is sometimes necessary for any highly security-conscious organization, including both government organizations and financial services companies in the private sector. </p><p><br></p><p>Why we need to respect legacy applications — because they tend to be the mission-critical applications that drive revenue. </p><p><br></p><p>Why connecting brownfield and greenfield applications is critical, because not all ‘legacy’ apps will ever be moved to the cloud.</p><p><br></p><p>What ‘returns’ a company is looking for when evaluating ROI on cloud migrations. </p><p><br></p><p>What we mean when we talk about an “ROI” on security tools. </p><p><br></p><p>Why Kubernetes’ terrible networking is part of why Chris could see that service meshes would be necessary even back in 2015. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/chris-holmes-6b73b22/">Chris on LinkedIn</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="http://greymatter.io">greymatter.io</a> </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, Chris Holmes talks about bootstrapping Decipher Technology Studies and their core product, intelligent service mesh Greymatter.io. He also talks about why it's so important for brownfield and greenfield apps to talk to one another and the many similarities between public sector and private sector organizations. </p><p><strong>Highlights: </strong></p><p><br></p><p>How Greymatter combines business intelligence and security controls.</p><p><br></p><p>The difference between working with public sector customers and private sector / enterprise customers — and why there are more similarities than differences. </p><p><br></p><p>How segmentation is sometimes necessary for any highly security-conscious organization, including both government organizations and financial services companies in the private sector. </p><p><br></p><p>Why we need to respect legacy applications — because they tend to be the mission-critical applications that drive revenue. </p><p><br></p><p>Why connecting brownfield and greenfield applications is critical, because not all ‘legacy’ apps will ever be moved to the cloud.</p><p><br></p><p>What ‘returns’ a company is looking for when evaluating ROI on cloud migrations. </p><p><br></p><p>What we mean when we talk about an “ROI” on security tools. </p><p><br></p><p>Why Kubernetes’ terrible networking is part of why Chris could see that service meshes would be necessary even back in 2015. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/chris-holmes-6b73b22/">Chris on LinkedIn</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="http://greymatter.io">greymatter.io</a> </p><p><br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 31 Mar 2021 11:12:40 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/8a26aff3/152b7919.mp3" length="65939843" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2059</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, Chris Holmes talks about bootstrapping Decipher Technology Studies and their core product, intelligent service mesh Greymatter.io. He also talks about why it's so important for brownfield and greenfield apps to talk to one another and the many similarities between public sector and private sector organizations. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, Chris Holmes talks about bootstrapping Decipher Technology Studies and their core product, intelligent service mesh Greymatter.io. He also talks about why it's so important for brownfield and greenfield app</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Cutting through the Multicloud Hype with Chris Psaltis</title>
      <itunes:episode>42</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>42</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Cutting through the Multicloud Hype with Chris Psaltis</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">f2e2793c-84d7-4e2b-8f55-8293c20d7cef</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/6b264498</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Cloud Native I spoke with Chris Psaltis, CEO and co-founder of <a href="http://mist.io">mist.io</a>. We spoke about why multicloud is necessary (and scenarios where multicloud is not necessary), where multicloud is headed in the future and the journey Chris and his co-founders have been on with Mist. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights</strong></p><p><br></p><p>The difference between using multicloud for legal / regulatory reasons or because of the company’s history and using multicloud strategically to improve developer velocity or improve customer experience. </p><p><br></p><p>The complexity involved with pursuing multicloud and why many organizations are better off in just one cloud. </p><p><br></p><p>Why being cloud agnostic from day one is not a good strategy in the vast majority of cases. </p><p><br></p><p>Why no one seems to be able to correctly estimate how difficult it is to build a multicloud platform. </p><p><br></p><p>Why ‘silos’ are the competitive alternative to a unified platform for companies </p><p><br></p><p>How Mist went from working primarily with smaller teams before figuring out that they provided more value for large teams because the pain from multicloud management increases exponentially as the number of engineers, applications and environments increases. </p><p><br></p><p>When the founding team decided to stop being consultants and start an open source technology startup. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links</strong></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://mist.io/">Mist</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/chpsaltis/">Chris on LinkedIn</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://twitter.com/cpsaltis">Chris on Twitter</a></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Cloud Native I spoke with Chris Psaltis, CEO and co-founder of <a href="http://mist.io">mist.io</a>. We spoke about why multicloud is necessary (and scenarios where multicloud is not necessary), where multicloud is headed in the future and the journey Chris and his co-founders have been on with Mist. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights</strong></p><p><br></p><p>The difference between using multicloud for legal / regulatory reasons or because of the company’s history and using multicloud strategically to improve developer velocity or improve customer experience. </p><p><br></p><p>The complexity involved with pursuing multicloud and why many organizations are better off in just one cloud. </p><p><br></p><p>Why being cloud agnostic from day one is not a good strategy in the vast majority of cases. </p><p><br></p><p>Why no one seems to be able to correctly estimate how difficult it is to build a multicloud platform. </p><p><br></p><p>Why ‘silos’ are the competitive alternative to a unified platform for companies </p><p><br></p><p>How Mist went from working primarily with smaller teams before figuring out that they provided more value for large teams because the pain from multicloud management increases exponentially as the number of engineers, applications and environments increases. </p><p><br></p><p>When the founding team decided to stop being consultants and start an open source technology startup. </p><p><br></p><p><strong>Links</strong></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://mist.io/">Mist</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/chpsaltis/">Chris on LinkedIn</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://twitter.com/cpsaltis">Chris on Twitter</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 24 Mar 2021 07:57:39 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/6b264498/790bef84.mp3" length="51689803" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1613</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>This week on The Business of Cloud Native I spoke with Chris Psaltis, CEO and co-founder of mist.io. We spoke about why multicloud is necessary (and scenarios where multicloud is not necessary), where multicloud is headed in the future and the journey Chris and his co-founders have been on with Mist. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>This week on The Business of Cloud Native I spoke with Chris Psaltis, CEO and co-founder of mist.io. We spoke about why multicloud is necessary (and scenarios where multicloud is not necessary), where multicloud is headed in the future and the journey Chr</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Security, Clouds and Open Source with Tzury Bar Yochay</title>
      <itunes:episode>41</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>41</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Security, Clouds and Open Source with Tzury Bar Yochay</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">55c1939c-02c8-404e-879a-c174bab5d733</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/3c3e7007</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Cloud Native, I talked to Tzury Bar Yochay, founder and CTO of Reblaze, about building a cloud native security company before twelve thousand people were going to KubeCon. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><p><br></p><p>Why your security measures have to keep up with hackers’ sophistication.</p><p><br></p><p>The moment when Tzury decided to go from being a contractor for the defense industry to founding a company.</p><p><br></p><p>Why the default path for startups is failure. </p><p><br></p><p>Why open source is key to securing your cloud environment.</p><p><br></p><p>How selling a security product to developers has evolved over time. </p><p><br></p><p>Why lazy developers are good developers. </p><p><br></p><p>Why selling software to developers is different from selling software to other types of professionals. </p><p><br></p><p>Why he thinks the most brilliant developers tend to gravitate towards open source. </p><p><br></p><p>Why security based on obscurity is a terrible, perhaps even evil, strategy. </p><p><br></p><p>Links:</p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.reblaze.com/">Reblaze</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tzury/?originalSubdomain=il">Tzury on LinkedIn</a></p><p><br></p><p>@tzury on Twitter</p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://github.com/tzuryby">Tzury on GitHub</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.curiefense.io/">Curiefense</a></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week on The Business of Cloud Native, I talked to Tzury Bar Yochay, founder and CTO of Reblaze, about building a cloud native security company before twelve thousand people were going to KubeCon. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Highlights:</p><p><br></p><p>Why your security measures have to keep up with hackers’ sophistication.</p><p><br></p><p>The moment when Tzury decided to go from being a contractor for the defense industry to founding a company.</p><p><br></p><p>Why the default path for startups is failure. </p><p><br></p><p>Why open source is key to securing your cloud environment.</p><p><br></p><p>How selling a security product to developers has evolved over time. </p><p><br></p><p>Why lazy developers are good developers. </p><p><br></p><p>Why selling software to developers is different from selling software to other types of professionals. </p><p><br></p><p>Why he thinks the most brilliant developers tend to gravitate towards open source. </p><p><br></p><p>Why security based on obscurity is a terrible, perhaps even evil, strategy. </p><p><br></p><p>Links:</p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.reblaze.com/">Reblaze</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tzury/?originalSubdomain=il">Tzury on LinkedIn</a></p><p><br></p><p>@tzury on Twitter</p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://github.com/tzuryby">Tzury on GitHub</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.curiefense.io/">Curiefense</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 17 Mar 2021 09:24:57 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/3c3e7007/99761894.mp3" length="67427436" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2105</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>This week on The Business of Cloud Native, I talked to Tzury Bar Yochay, founder and CTO of Reblaze, about building a cloud native security company before twelve thousand people were going to KubeCon. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>This week on The Business of Cloud Native, I talked to Tzury Bar Yochay, founder and CTO of Reblaze, about building a cloud native security company before twelve thousand people were going to KubeCon. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Building a reliable, transactional cloud native database with Karthik Ranganathan</title>
      <itunes:episode>40</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>40</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Building a reliable, transactional cloud native database with Karthik Ranganathan</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">fee9aed1-d49f-44d1-8c42-56f33bbe1fa9</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/06704be7</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week, I talked with Karthik Ranganathan about the challenges going from employee of a large company to startup frounder and why he founded Yugabyte because he wanted a database that both was transactional and still could be highly available.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights: </strong></p><p><br></p><p>Why the ability to scale is important for any cloud native application, including for a cloud native database.</p><p><br></p><p>Why Yugabyte is still open source and why being open source is important to the company. </p><p><br></p><p>Why enterprises wanted an open source database to house their mission-critical data. </p><p><br></p><p>Why the company went from an open core model to open source / managed service model. </p><p><br></p><p>Why end customers care about open source. </p><p><br></p><p>Why early-stage, small companies have trouble establishing trust and how being open source helps build trust. </p><p><br></p><p>Why building around open source helps nudge customers to ‘buy’ instead of built it themselves. </p><p><br></p><p>Why finding the right position and the right message is a major challenge at the beginning of the company. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Links: </p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/kranganathan/">Karthik on LinkedIn</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://twitter.com/karthikr?lang=en">Karthik on Twitter </a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.yugabyte.com/">Yugabyte</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://yugabyte-db.slack.com/join/shared_invite/zt-mdgm6tbn-6vNZ21Udq_XJ0p~XAz9ZSA#/">Yugabyte Slack</a></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week, I talked with Karthik Ranganathan about the challenges going from employee of a large company to startup frounder and why he founded Yugabyte because he wanted a database that both was transactional and still could be highly available.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>Highlights: </strong></p><p><br></p><p>Why the ability to scale is important for any cloud native application, including for a cloud native database.</p><p><br></p><p>Why Yugabyte is still open source and why being open source is important to the company. </p><p><br></p><p>Why enterprises wanted an open source database to house their mission-critical data. </p><p><br></p><p>Why the company went from an open core model to open source / managed service model. </p><p><br></p><p>Why end customers care about open source. </p><p><br></p><p>Why early-stage, small companies have trouble establishing trust and how being open source helps build trust. </p><p><br></p><p>Why building around open source helps nudge customers to ‘buy’ instead of built it themselves. </p><p><br></p><p>Why finding the right position and the right message is a major challenge at the beginning of the company. </p><p><br></p><p><br></p><p>Links: </p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/kranganathan/">Karthik on LinkedIn</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://twitter.com/karthikr?lang=en">Karthik on Twitter </a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://www.yugabyte.com/">Yugabyte</a></p><p><br></p><p><a href="https://yugabyte-db.slack.com/join/shared_invite/zt-mdgm6tbn-6vNZ21Udq_XJ0p~XAz9ZSA#/">Yugabyte Slack</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 10 Mar 2021 13:32:11 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/06704be7/a6a53dff.mp3" length="71884707" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2244</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>This week on The Business of Cloud Native I talked with Karthik Ranganathan about the challenges of managing a cloud native database and why he founded Yugabyte because he wanted a database that both was transactional and still could be highly available.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>This week on The Business of Cloud Native I talked with Karthik Ranganathan about the challenges of managing a cloud native database and why he founded Yugabyte because he wanted a database that both was transactional and still could be highly available.</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Hiring a Team for your Technical Startup with Natalie Ledbetter</title>
      <itunes:episode>39</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>39</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Hiring a Team for your Technical Startup with Natalie Ledbetter</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">d0c4ea38-c066-48fe-b2c2-5c78e58974cd</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/6f8aa46b</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week, I talked to Natalie Ledbetter, Head of People and Platform at Boldstart Ventures. We talked about how startups can approach team and culture building, including:</p><ul><li>How to prioritize your hires</li><li>Common mistakes founders make when building a team</li><li>Why you should always avoid brilliant jerks, even if they are very brilliant</li><li>How to divide responsibilities between founders</li><li>Anticipating growth and setting your team up so that it can scale as easily as possible</li><li>The difference in skills sets between 'startup people' and employees you would want to hire later on</li></ul><p>Links: </p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/natalie-ledbetter/">Natalie on LinkedIn</a></p><p><a href="https://twitter.com/LeUnicornHunter">Natalie on Twitter</a></p><p><a href="https://www.boldstart.vc/">Boldstart Ventures</a></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This week, I talked to Natalie Ledbetter, Head of People and Platform at Boldstart Ventures. We talked about how startups can approach team and culture building, including:</p><ul><li>How to prioritize your hires</li><li>Common mistakes founders make when building a team</li><li>Why you should always avoid brilliant jerks, even if they are very brilliant</li><li>How to divide responsibilities between founders</li><li>Anticipating growth and setting your team up so that it can scale as easily as possible</li><li>The difference in skills sets between 'startup people' and employees you would want to hire later on</li></ul><p>Links: </p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/natalie-ledbetter/">Natalie on LinkedIn</a></p><p><a href="https://twitter.com/LeUnicornHunter">Natalie on Twitter</a></p><p><a href="https://www.boldstart.vc/">Boldstart Ventures</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 03 Mar 2021 12:24:22 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/6f8aa46b/2fe9ead2.mp3" length="71923027" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2246</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>This week, I talked to Natalie Ledbetter, Head of People and Platform at Boldstart Ventures, about how technical founders should approach hiring and team building at the beginning of the company's life. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>This week, I talked to Natalie Ledbetter, Head of People and Platform at Boldstart Ventures, about how technical founders should approach hiring and team building at the beginning of the company's life. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>What Does Cloud Freedom Mean with Sirish Raghuram</title>
      <itunes:episode>38</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>38</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>What Does Cloud Freedom Mean with Sirish Raghuram</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">cc5162d2-f223-4213-a085-e0b477d579f6</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/b246b793</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, we talk about the hard business goals behind words like "freedom" as well as what it's like to go from engineer to CEO. My guest, Sirish Raghuram, is the CEO and co-founder of Platform9.</p><p>Links: <br>https://platform9.com/<br>https://www.linkedin.com/in/sirishraghuram/</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, we talk about the hard business goals behind words like "freedom" as well as what it's like to go from engineer to CEO. My guest, Sirish Raghuram, is the CEO and co-founder of Platform9.</p><p>Links: <br>https://platform9.com/<br>https://www.linkedin.com/in/sirishraghuram/</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 24 Feb 2021 12:07:14 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/b246b793/3bfe2d08.mp3" length="70132382" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2190</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, we talk about the hard business goals behind words like "freedom" as well as what it's like to go from engineer to CEO. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, we talk about the hard business goals behind words like "freedom" as well as what it's like to go from engineer to CEO. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>The Importance of Managing SaaS Applications with Shawn Lankton</title>
      <itunes:episode>37</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>37</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>The Importance of Managing SaaS Applications with Shawn Lankton</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">7e5d5871-42e6-49e4-80b6-722d11ef4906</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/e1ca338e</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, Shawn Lankton talks about how Microsoft 365 and related applications fit into an organization's move to the cloud and why organizations need to pay attention to security for all their SaaS applications. </p><p> <br>Links: <br>https://www.coreview.com<br><a href="https://twitter.com/shawnlankton">Shawn on Twitter</a></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, Shawn Lankton talks about how Microsoft 365 and related applications fit into an organization's move to the cloud and why organizations need to pay attention to security for all their SaaS applications. </p><p> <br>Links: <br>https://www.coreview.com<br><a href="https://twitter.com/shawnlankton">Shawn on Twitter</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 17 Feb 2021 13:00:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/e1ca338e/c8d45fac.mp3" length="39701019" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1239</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, Shawn Lankton talks about how Microsoft 365 and related applications fit into an organization's move to the cloud and why organizations need to pay attention to security for all their SaaS applications. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, Shawn Lankton talks about how Microsoft 365 and related applications fit into an organization's move to the cloud and why organizations need to pay attention to security for all their SaaS applications. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Overcoming hosting challenges for OSS with Thomas Markey</title>
      <itunes:episode>36</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>36</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Overcoming hosting challenges for OSS with Thomas Markey</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">36e1a15e-965e-4e7b-91b2-8160c62cf360</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/061c31e1</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Thomas Markey talks about how to remove some of the barriers to running an open source project with free hosting services. </p><p> </p><p>Links: </p><p><a href="https://fosshost.org/">https://fosshost.org</a></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/thomasmarkey1/">Thomas on LinkedIn</a><br><a href="https://twitter.com/fosshostorg">FOSSHOST on Twitter</a><br><a href="https://discord.com/invite/8MfNdGK">Discord</a></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Thomas Markey talks about how to remove some of the barriers to running an open source project with free hosting services. </p><p> </p><p>Links: </p><p><a href="https://fosshost.org/">https://fosshost.org</a></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/thomasmarkey1/">Thomas on LinkedIn</a><br><a href="https://twitter.com/fosshostorg">FOSSHOST on Twitter</a><br><a href="https://discord.com/invite/8MfNdGK">Discord</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 10 Feb 2021 12:11:48 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/061c31e1/73c78859.mp3" length="54509099" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1701</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Thomas Markey talks about how to remove some of the barriers to running an open source project with free hosting services. 

 </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Thomas Markey talks about how to remove some of the barriers to running an open source project with free hosting services. 

 </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Separating Compute and Storage with Ranjan Parthasarathy</title>
      <itunes:episode>35</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>35</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Separating Compute and Storage with Ranjan Parthasarathy</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">05df58ca-f3e0-4686-add7-8eca5d21ece8</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/02029d4c</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ranjan Parthasarathy talks about why separating compute and storage makes it easier to operate at hyper scale and why he decided to found Logiq.ai to make it easier for companies to do so. </p><p>Links: </p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/ranjanp/">LinkedIn</a><br><a href="https://logiq.ai/">Logiq.ai</a></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Ranjan Parthasarathy talks about why separating compute and storage makes it easier to operate at hyper scale and why he decided to found Logiq.ai to make it easier for companies to do so. </p><p>Links: </p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/ranjanp/">LinkedIn</a><br><a href="https://logiq.ai/">Logiq.ai</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 03 Feb 2021 11:45:43 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/02029d4c/94887615.mp3" length="46657431" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1456</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Ranjan Parthasarathy talks about why separating compute and storage makes it easier to operate at hyper scale and why he decided to found Logiq.ai to make it easier for companies to do so. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Ranjan Parthasarathy talks about why separating compute and storage makes it easier to operate at hyper scale and why he decided to found Logiq.ai to make it easier for companies to do so. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>The Business Implications of Open Source Licenses with McCoy Smith</title>
      <itunes:episode>34</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>34</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>The Business Implications of Open Source Licenses with McCoy Smith</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">d06f4ee2-51ae-4d51-9d62-6de0516209b9</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/96797e6d</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you thought about how your OSS license could impact your ability to grow your community and monetize your OSS in the future? Attorney McCoy Smith talks about what to be aware of at the beginning to avoid messy legal issues down the road. </p><p>Links: <br><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mccoysmith/">McCoy on LinkedIn</a> <br><a href="https://www.lexpan.law/">Lex Pan Law</a><br><a href="https://opsequ.io/">Opsequ.io</a></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Have you thought about how your OSS license could impact your ability to grow your community and monetize your OSS in the future? Attorney McCoy Smith talks about what to be aware of at the beginning to avoid messy legal issues down the road. </p><p>Links: <br><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/mccoysmith/">McCoy on LinkedIn</a> <br><a href="https://www.lexpan.law/">Lex Pan Law</a><br><a href="https://opsequ.io/">Opsequ.io</a></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 27 Jan 2021 11:05:32 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/96797e6d/59e1ce4e.mp3" length="67916606" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2120</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Have you thought about how your OSS license could impact your ability to grow your community and monetize your OSS in the future? Attorney McCoy Smith talks about what to be aware of at the beginning to avoid messy legal issues down the road. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Have you thought about how your OSS license could impact your ability to grow your community and monetize your OSS in the future? Attorney McCoy Smith talks about what to be aware of at the beginning to avoid messy legal issues down the road. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Connecting Cloud Native Technology to Unique Business Goals with Bola Rotibi</title>
      <itunes:episode>33</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>33</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Connecting Cloud Native Technology to Unique Business Goals with Bola Rotibi</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">f2a068dc-8aad-4e2c-9a92-388515cc00c6</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/55175c04</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>As an analyst at CCS insight, Bola Rotibi gets a birds-eye view of trends in how industries use software to advance their business goals. We had an incredible conversation about how companies use cloud native technology to meet business goals and how vendors in the cloud native space should pay more attention to the needs of specific industries. </p><p>Links: <br>https://www.ccsinsight.com/blog/author/bolarotibi/<br>https://www.linkedin.com/in/bolarotibi/<br>https://twitter.com/bolarotibi</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>As an analyst at CCS insight, Bola Rotibi gets a birds-eye view of trends in how industries use software to advance their business goals. We had an incredible conversation about how companies use cloud native technology to meet business goals and how vendors in the cloud native space should pay more attention to the needs of specific industries. </p><p>Links: <br>https://www.ccsinsight.com/blog/author/bolarotibi/<br>https://www.linkedin.com/in/bolarotibi/<br>https://twitter.com/bolarotibi</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 20 Jan 2021 12:45:08 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/55175c04/a99bce45.mp3" length="71640039" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2237</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>As an analyst at CCS insight, Bola Rotibi gets a birds-eye view of trends in how industries use software to advance their business goals. We had an incredible conversation about how companies use cloud native technology to meet business goals and how vendors in the cloud native space should pay more attention to the needs of specific industries. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>As an analyst at CCS insight, Bola Rotibi gets a birds-eye view of trends in how industries use software to advance their business goals. We had an incredible conversation about how companies use cloud native technology to meet business goals and how vend</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Managing Data Locality with Oran Sears</title>
      <itunes:episode>32</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>32</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Managing Data Locality with Oran Sears</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">d080d5aa-378b-4878-ad9d-51b6d3cf3520</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/b6ff82e2</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>SaaS companies that handle customers' sensitive data need to worry about how they manage data locality. In this podcast, Canopy CTO and founder talks about how their business would not be possible without the flexibility and ability to easily spin up resources in regions across the world that a cloud native architecture offers. </p><p>Links: </p><p>https://www.canopyco.io<br>https://www.linkedin.com/in/oransears</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>SaaS companies that handle customers' sensitive data need to worry about how they manage data locality. In this podcast, Canopy CTO and founder talks about how their business would not be possible without the flexibility and ability to easily spin up resources in regions across the world that a cloud native architecture offers. </p><p>Links: </p><p>https://www.canopyco.io<br>https://www.linkedin.com/in/oransears</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Fri, 15 Jan 2021 09:25:39 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/b6ff82e2/2ee18588.mp3" length="60309061" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1883</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>SaaS companies that handle customers' sensitive data need to worry about how they manage data locality. In this podcast, Canopy CTO and founder talks about how their business would not be possible without the flexibility and ability to easily spin up resources in regions across the world that a cloud native architecture offers. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>SaaS companies that handle customers' sensitive data need to worry about how they manage data locality. In this podcast, Canopy CTO and founder talks about how their business would not be possible without the flexibility and ability to easily spin up reso</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Positioning for Startups in the Cloud Native Ecosystem</title>
      <itunes:episode>31</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>31</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Positioning for Startups in the Cloud Native Ecosystem</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">4d458c2e-3861-4bae-9c9d-fec55c46de05</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/c9678b22</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Here's what I covered in this episode: </p><ul><li>What positioning and market segmentation is and is not</li><li>The specific positioning challenges facing companies in the cloud native ecosystem</li><li>Why it's important to identify and talk about the types of application your product benefits the most</li></ul><p><br>Thanks for listening, and happy new year!</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Here's what I covered in this episode: </p><ul><li>What positioning and market segmentation is and is not</li><li>The specific positioning challenges facing companies in the cloud native ecosystem</li><li>Why it's important to identify and talk about the types of application your product benefits the most</li></ul><p><br>Thanks for listening, and happy new year!</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 06 Jan 2021 12:31:15 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/c9678b22/050818b2.mp3" length="26008351" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>811</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode, I didn't have a guest — so I talked about positioning and what it means for startups in the cloud native ecosystem. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode, I didn't have a guest — so I talked about positioning and what it means for startups in the cloud native ecosystem. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>The Business of Cloud Native #30 with Jim Bugwadia</title>
      <itunes:episode>30</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>30</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>The Business of Cloud Native #30 with Jim Bugwadia</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">e6ac47ad-e32c-4654-9557-402999c0a532</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/7c884189</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Jim Bugwadia, CEO and co-founder of Nirmata, talks about what has changed (and what has stayed the same) since the company started in 2013. </p><p>Links:</p><p>https://www.linkedin.com/in/jimbugwadia/<br>https://nirmata.com<br>https://kyverno.io</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Jim Bugwadia, CEO and co-founder of Nirmata, talks about what has changed (and what has stayed the same) since the company started in 2013. </p><p>Links:</p><p>https://www.linkedin.com/in/jimbugwadia/<br>https://nirmata.com<br>https://kyverno.io</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 16 Dec 2020 13:34:54 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/7c884189/03fb16eb.mp3" length="59145050" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1846</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Jim Bugwadia, CEO of Nirmata, talks about how the company and the cloud native ecosystem has evolved in the 7 years since he and his co-founders started Nirmata. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Jim Bugwadia, CEO of Nirmata, talks about how the company and the cloud native ecosystem has evolved in the 7 years since he and his co-founders started Nirmata. </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>The Business of Cloud Native #29 with Krishnan Subramanian</title>
      <itunes:episode>29</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>29</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>The Business of Cloud Native #29 with Krishnan Subramanian</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">de649e15-8367-4e88-8603-63ad031bf480</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/e7ffb9d1</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>In episode 29 of The Business of Cloud Native, I talked to Krishnan Subramanian of Rishidot Research about trends he sees in how end users use cloud native technologies and how startups in the space can meet end users where they are. </p><p> </p><p>Links: </p><p><a href="https://rishidot.com/">https://rishidot.com</a></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/krishnansubramanian/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/krishnansubramanian/</a></p><p>https://twitter.com/krishnan</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In episode 29 of The Business of Cloud Native, I talked to Krishnan Subramanian of Rishidot Research about trends he sees in how end users use cloud native technologies and how startups in the space can meet end users where they are. </p><p> </p><p>Links: </p><p><a href="https://rishidot.com/">https://rishidot.com</a></p><p><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/krishnansubramanian/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/krishnansubramanian/</a></p><p>https://twitter.com/krishnan</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Thu, 10 Dec 2020 08:59:01 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/e7ffb9d1/9a2d18e5.mp3" length="63358237" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1978</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>In episode 29 of The Business of Cloud Native, I talked to Krishnan Subramanian of Rishidot Research about trends he sees in how end users use cloud native technologies and how startups in the space can meet end users where they are. 

 </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>In episode 29 of The Business of Cloud Native, I talked to Krishnan Subramanian of Rishidot Research about trends he sees in how end users use cloud native technologies and how startups in the space can meet end users where they are. 

 </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Solving Application Networking Challenges with with Idit Levine</title>
      <itunes:episode>28</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>28</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Solving Application Networking Challenges with with Idit Levine</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">815ab312-177a-4b74-ac7e-980d3551f109</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/973954d5</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>This conversation covers:</strong></p><ul><li>Idit’s role at Solo.io, and what she typically does on a daily basis. Idit also talks about how her job duties have changed over the last two years, and the impact that COVID-19 had on the company.</li><li>The common business reasons why customers come to Solo.io — and where they typically are in terms of cloud-native maturity. </li><li>Some things that Idit has learned about customers over the last two years. In addition, Idit talks about her own journey at Solo.io and what she’s had to learn along the way.</li><li>How Idit’s customers typically benefit from using distributed systems — and some of the top misconceptions that they tend to have about using them.</li><li>Idit’s thoughts on the market for cloud-native technologies.</li></ul><p><strong>Links</strong></p><ul><li><a href="https://www.solo.io/">Solo.io</a></li><li>Follow Idit on <a href="https://twitter.com/idit_levine">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://slack.solo.io/">Slack</a></li></ul><p><strong>Transcript<br></strong>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Welcome to the <em>Business of Cloud Native</em>. I'm Emily Omier, your host, and today I'm chatting with Idit Levine of <a href="https://www.solo.io/">Solo.io</a>. Idit, I want to start out, first of all, by thanking you for joining me. </p><p><br></p><p>Idit: Oh, thanks so much for having me. </p><p><br></p><p>Emily: And then, second of all, I wanted you to just start off by introducing yourself: what you do, what your company does, and also a little bit about how that translates into what you do every day, like, what activities you spend your day doing. </p><p><br></p><p>Idit: Oh, for sure. Okay, so as you said, my name is Idit Levine. And I’m, right now, the founder and the CEO of Solo.io. I started Solo two years ago, and when I started it, my focus was try to solve our [00:01:24 unintelligible] application networking problem that we know that will come up. </p><p><br></p><p>So, what does it mean? As you guys all know, there was a huge shift in the market between monolithic to microservices and, kind of like, moving from technology of monolithic to microservice stack mean that now we also moved to a distributed application. And it was clear to me that now everything is basically will go on the wire; any communication, small communication, between those two microservices basically will have to go to the network. And I thought that would become a big problem because stuff that we didn't need to take care of when everything was the same binary, now we need to actually figure out how to solve. And basically, I was really passionate, thought that that will be a huge problem in the ecosystem and I was very passionate to actually try to solve that. So, the idea was, how to connect, right? How to connect the application, how to connect everything related to your, eventually, application to the user.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: And then tell me a little bit, what do you do every day? When you start, what does an average day actually consist of?</p><p><br></p><p>Idit: Oh, wow. So, it's really interesting, that I think it's a huge difference between now and what I was doing a year ago. Right now, basically, it's pretty simple. Corona came by and it was influence a lot of companies. I was assume that it will influence also my company, and therefore I basically freeze hiring, freeze everything, and try to do the best I can with the resources that we had. </p><p><br></p><p>What happened is that actually, not only that we didn't was influenced, we actually over doubled our revenue every quarter. That's basically forced me to immediately grow the team to be able to actually serve all those customers. Right now, basically, the main thing that I'm focusing on is—besides the technology, of course, in the strategic of the company—is basically on growing the team. So, it's hiring, it's interviewing, it's looking for the right people, it's building. You know, basically try to grow the team as much as I can in order to basically, yeah, serve well, the customer that are asking for us to—you know, for our products. That's a lot of my focus this day.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: And what do you find are the business reasons? What's the business problems that cause somebody to come to you?</p><p><br></p><p>Idit: So, as I said, once people basically is moving from monolithic to microservices, there is a lot of simple stuff that before that just natively happened inside of the organization; right now, it's a little bit more complex. So, first of all, they needed to find something to run it on, and this is what Kubernetes so great in this ecosystem is the ability to install, upgrade, and basically orchestrate their microservices. But then, as I said, simple stuff that before that people were baking into the microservices created a lot of issues, like small stuff, like how do two microservices communicate with each other? How do you make sure that they're doing it safely right now? Because as right now, it's all on the wire, so potentially, there's always a third party that could, you know, join the party. </p><p><br></p><p>So, you really need to be safe and make sure that there is a very secure line between those microservices. And then the last thing is that because there is so many because the idea of microservices was to allow you to scale, the question is how do where the request is actually routed? So, in the [00:04:52 unintelligible], request is coming, and there is a lot of replication of the same microservices, and you have no idea basically where it's coming and where it's landing. And then it will go to the next level of the microservices, and again, not know which instance of it is basically being hit. </p><p><br></p><p>So, now the question is, how do you get visibility to something like that? How do you know what's going on in your cluster? How do what to look for the logs when now it's distributed all over the place. So, that's a lot of problem that the organization basically started to have. As well as with this—if—before that, there was a technology called [00:05:26 api-get] that was relatively popular, but people somehow—it wasn't a must. </p><p><br></p><p>Right now, when microservices was adopted specific in environment like Kubernetes, when everything is very cloud-wise, you know, stuff is coming up and coming down, you really wanted to make sure that you have a place that you can actually control the policy, control the [00:05:50 unintelligible], the [00:05:51 unintelligible]. And that's basically where API can help. So, that is basically—how do you manage all this networking, basically, of all these systems and applications, as an edge gateway? It's something that going inside your cluster, as well as what's going on inside the cluster after it. And that's basically, yeah, the main problem that you're solving. </p><p><br></p><p>So, every traffic to your infrastructure, node to start, we're basically taking care of exactly of everything that you then have traffic between what called East and West, inside your cluster. And that's basically the st...</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>This conversation covers:</strong></p><ul><li>Idit’s role at Solo.io, and what she typically does on a daily basis. Idit also talks about how her job duties have changed over the last two years, and the impact that COVID-19 had on the company.</li><li>The common business reasons why customers come to Solo.io — and where they typically are in terms of cloud-native maturity. </li><li>Some things that Idit has learned about customers over the last two years. In addition, Idit talks about her own journey at Solo.io and what she’s had to learn along the way.</li><li>How Idit’s customers typically benefit from using distributed systems — and some of the top misconceptions that they tend to have about using them.</li><li>Idit’s thoughts on the market for cloud-native technologies.</li></ul><p><strong>Links</strong></p><ul><li><a href="https://www.solo.io/">Solo.io</a></li><li>Follow Idit on <a href="https://twitter.com/idit_levine">Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://slack.solo.io/">Slack</a></li></ul><p><strong>Transcript<br></strong>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Welcome to the <em>Business of Cloud Native</em>. I'm Emily Omier, your host, and today I'm chatting with Idit Levine of <a href="https://www.solo.io/">Solo.io</a>. Idit, I want to start out, first of all, by thanking you for joining me. </p><p><br></p><p>Idit: Oh, thanks so much for having me. </p><p><br></p><p>Emily: And then, second of all, I wanted you to just start off by introducing yourself: what you do, what your company does, and also a little bit about how that translates into what you do every day, like, what activities you spend your day doing. </p><p><br></p><p>Idit: Oh, for sure. Okay, so as you said, my name is Idit Levine. And I’m, right now, the founder and the CEO of Solo.io. I started Solo two years ago, and when I started it, my focus was try to solve our [00:01:24 unintelligible] application networking problem that we know that will come up. </p><p><br></p><p>So, what does it mean? As you guys all know, there was a huge shift in the market between monolithic to microservices and, kind of like, moving from technology of monolithic to microservice stack mean that now we also moved to a distributed application. And it was clear to me that now everything is basically will go on the wire; any communication, small communication, between those two microservices basically will have to go to the network. And I thought that would become a big problem because stuff that we didn't need to take care of when everything was the same binary, now we need to actually figure out how to solve. And basically, I was really passionate, thought that that will be a huge problem in the ecosystem and I was very passionate to actually try to solve that. So, the idea was, how to connect, right? How to connect the application, how to connect everything related to your, eventually, application to the user.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: And then tell me a little bit, what do you do every day? When you start, what does an average day actually consist of?</p><p><br></p><p>Idit: Oh, wow. So, it's really interesting, that I think it's a huge difference between now and what I was doing a year ago. Right now, basically, it's pretty simple. Corona came by and it was influence a lot of companies. I was assume that it will influence also my company, and therefore I basically freeze hiring, freeze everything, and try to do the best I can with the resources that we had. </p><p><br></p><p>What happened is that actually, not only that we didn't was influenced, we actually over doubled our revenue every quarter. That's basically forced me to immediately grow the team to be able to actually serve all those customers. Right now, basically, the main thing that I'm focusing on is—besides the technology, of course, in the strategic of the company—is basically on growing the team. So, it's hiring, it's interviewing, it's looking for the right people, it's building. You know, basically try to grow the team as much as I can in order to basically, yeah, serve well, the customer that are asking for us to—you know, for our products. That's a lot of my focus this day.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: And what do you find are the business reasons? What's the business problems that cause somebody to come to you?</p><p><br></p><p>Idit: So, as I said, once people basically is moving from monolithic to microservices, there is a lot of simple stuff that before that just natively happened inside of the organization; right now, it's a little bit more complex. So, first of all, they needed to find something to run it on, and this is what Kubernetes so great in this ecosystem is the ability to install, upgrade, and basically orchestrate their microservices. But then, as I said, simple stuff that before that people were baking into the microservices created a lot of issues, like small stuff, like how do two microservices communicate with each other? How do you make sure that they're doing it safely right now? Because as right now, it's all on the wire, so potentially, there's always a third party that could, you know, join the party. </p><p><br></p><p>So, you really need to be safe and make sure that there is a very secure line between those microservices. And then the last thing is that because there is so many because the idea of microservices was to allow you to scale, the question is how do where the request is actually routed? So, in the [00:04:52 unintelligible], request is coming, and there is a lot of replication of the same microservices, and you have no idea basically where it's coming and where it's landing. And then it will go to the next level of the microservices, and again, not know which instance of it is basically being hit. </p><p><br></p><p>So, now the question is, how do you get visibility to something like that? How do you know what's going on in your cluster? How do what to look for the logs when now it's distributed all over the place. So, that's a lot of problem that the organization basically started to have. As well as with this—if—before that, there was a technology called [00:05:26 api-get] that was relatively popular, but people somehow—it wasn't a must. </p><p><br></p><p>Right now, when microservices was adopted specific in environment like Kubernetes, when everything is very cloud-wise, you know, stuff is coming up and coming down, you really wanted to make sure that you have a place that you can actually control the policy, control the [00:05:50 unintelligible], the [00:05:51 unintelligible]. And that's basically where API can help. So, that is basically—how do you manage all this networking, basically, of all these systems and applications, as an edge gateway? It's something that going inside your cluster, as well as what's going on inside the cluster after it. And that's basically, yeah, the main problem that you're solving. </p><p><br></p><p>So, every traffic to your infrastructure, node to start, we're basically taking care of exactly of everything that you then have traffic between what called East and West, inside your cluster. And that's basically the st...</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 02 Dec 2020 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/973954d5/7a8bf5d3.mp3" length="38396338" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1590</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, host Emily Omier talks with Idit Levine who is CEO and Founder of Solo.io. Levine provides a comprehensive overview of Solo.io, an API infrastructure company focused on delivering application networking from the edge to service mesh, and helping enterprises adopt, secure, and operate cloud native technologies. Levine also offers her unique perspective on the evolving cloud-native market.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, host Emily Omier talks with Idit Levine who is CEO and Founder of Solo.io. Levine provides a comprehensive overview of Solo.io, an API infrastructure company focused on delivering application networking fro</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Positioning Open Source Projects with Sam Selikoff</title>
      <itunes:episode>27</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>27</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Positioning Open Source Projects with Sam Selikoff</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">574303ec-dfb7-4c36-ba2b-68c7a594f4b3</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/ce5002d7</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>This conversation covers:</strong></p><ul><li>Mirage’s role as an API mocking library, the value that it offers for developers, and who can benefit from using it.</li><li>How Mirage empowers front end developers to create production-ready UIs as quickly as possible.</li><li>How Mirage evolved into an API mocking library </li><li>How Mirage differs from JSON Server </li><li>Sam’s relationship to Mirage, and how it fits in with his business. Sam also talks about open source business models, and whether Mirage could work as a SaaS offering.</li><li>One interesting use case for Mirage, which involves demoing software and driving sales.</li></ul><p><strong>Links</strong></p><ul><li><a href="https://miragejs.com/">Mirage</a></li><li>Sam’s <a href="https://embermap.com/">teaching site</a></li><li>Follow Sam on <a href="https://twitter.com/samselikoff">Twitter</a></li><li>Subscribe to Sam’s <a href="https://www.youtube.com/samselikoff">YouTube Channel</a></li></ul><p><strong>Transcript<br></strong>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Welcome to the <em>Business of Cloud Native</em>. My name is Emily, I'm your host, and today I'm chatting with Sam Selikoff. Thank you so much for joining us, Sam.</p><p><br></p><p>Sam: Thanks for having me.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Yeah. So, today, we're going to do something a little bit different, and we're going to talk about positioning for open source projects. A lot of people talk about positioning for companies, which is also really important. And they don't always think about how positioning is important for open source. Open source maintainers often don't like to talk about marketing because you're not selling anything. </p><p><br></p><p>But you are asking people to give you their time which, at least for some people, is actually more valuable than their money. And that means you have to make a compelling case for why it's worth it to contribute to your project, and also why they should use it, why they should care about it? So, anyway, we're going to talk with Sam, about <a href="https://miragejs.com/">Mirage</a>. But first, I should let you introduce yourself. Sam, thank you so much for joining me, and can you introduce yourself a little bit?</p><p><br></p><p>Sam: Sure. My name is Sam Selikoff. These days, I spend most of my time teaching people how to code in the form of videos on my YouTube channel, and my website, <a href="https://embermap.com/">embermap.com</a>. Most of it is front end web development focused. So, we focus on JavaScript. I have a business partner who also works with me. And then we also do custom app development, you know, some consulting throughout the year.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Cool. And then tell me a little bit about Mirage.</p><p><br></p><p>Sam: Yeah, so Mirage is the biggest open source project I've been a part of since falling into web development, I'd say about eight years ago, I got into open source pretty early on in programming, kind of what made me fall in love with web development and JavaScript. So, I was starting to help out and just get involved with existing projects and things that I was using. Eventually, I made my way to TED Talks, the conference company where I was a front end developer, and that's actually where I met my business partner, Ryan. And we were using Ember.js, which is a JavaScript framework, and we had lots of different apps at TED that were helping with various parts of publishing talks, and running conferences, and all that stuff. </p><p><br></p><p>And we were seeing some common setup code that we were using across all these apps to help us test them, and that's where Mirage came from. There was another project called Pretender, which helped you mock out servers so that you could test your front end against different server states. And we first wrapped that with something called Pretenderify, and then it grew in complexity. So, I was working on it on my learning Wednesdays, renamed it to Mirage, and then I've been working on it basically ever since. And then, the other big step, I guess, in the history is that originally was an Ember only project, and then last year, we worked on generalizing it so that it can be used by React developers, React Native developers, Vue developers, so now it's just a general-purpose JavaScript API mocking library.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: So, we would say that the position is an API mocking library. And—does that sound right?</p><p><br></p><p>Sam: Yeah. If I had to say what it is, I would say it's a mocking library that helps front end developers mock out backend API's so that they can develop and test the user interfaces without having to rely on back end services.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Why does that matter?</p><p><br></p><p>Sam: It matters because back end services can be very complicated, there can be multiple back end services that need to run in order to support a UI, and if you're a front end developer, and you just want to make a change and see what the shopping cart looks like when it's empty. What does the shopping cart look like when there's one item? What does it look like when there's 100 items, and we have to have multiple pages? All three of those states correspond to different data in some back end service, usually in a database. </p><p><br></p><p>And so, for a front end developer, or anyone working on the user interface, really, it can be time-consuming and complex to put that actual server in that state that they need to help them develop the UI. That can involve anything from running, like, a Rails server on their computer to getting other API's that other teams manage into the state they need to develop the UI. So, Mirage lets them mock that out and basically have a fake server that they control and they can put into any state they need. So, it’s like a simplified version of back end services that the front end developer can control to help them develop and test the UI.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: And when you first started Mirage, did you think of it as an API mocking library?</p><p><br></p><p>Sam: Not exactly. We used it mostly because of testing. So, in a test, it's usually a best practice to not have your test rely on an actual network. You want to be able to run your test suite of your user interface anywhere, let's say on an airplane or something like that. So, if your user interface relies on live back end services, that's usually where you would bring in a mocking library. </p><p><br></p><p>And then you would say, okay, when the user visits amazon.com/cart, normally, it would go try to fetch the items in your cart from a real server, but in the test, we're going to say, “Oh, when my app does that, let's just respond with zero items. And then in this next test, when my app does that, let's respond with three items.” So, that's the motivation originally, is in a testing environment, giving the UI developer control over that. And then what happened was that it was so useful, we started using it in development as well, just to help during normal times, just because it was faster than working with the real back end services.</p>...]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>This conversation covers:</strong></p><ul><li>Mirage’s role as an API mocking library, the value that it offers for developers, and who can benefit from using it.</li><li>How Mirage empowers front end developers to create production-ready UIs as quickly as possible.</li><li>How Mirage evolved into an API mocking library </li><li>How Mirage differs from JSON Server </li><li>Sam’s relationship to Mirage, and how it fits in with his business. Sam also talks about open source business models, and whether Mirage could work as a SaaS offering.</li><li>One interesting use case for Mirage, which involves demoing software and driving sales.</li></ul><p><strong>Links</strong></p><ul><li><a href="https://miragejs.com/">Mirage</a></li><li>Sam’s <a href="https://embermap.com/">teaching site</a></li><li>Follow Sam on <a href="https://twitter.com/samselikoff">Twitter</a></li><li>Subscribe to Sam’s <a href="https://www.youtube.com/samselikoff">YouTube Channel</a></li></ul><p><strong>Transcript<br></strong>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Welcome to the <em>Business of Cloud Native</em>. My name is Emily, I'm your host, and today I'm chatting with Sam Selikoff. Thank you so much for joining us, Sam.</p><p><br></p><p>Sam: Thanks for having me.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Yeah. So, today, we're going to do something a little bit different, and we're going to talk about positioning for open source projects. A lot of people talk about positioning for companies, which is also really important. And they don't always think about how positioning is important for open source. Open source maintainers often don't like to talk about marketing because you're not selling anything. </p><p><br></p><p>But you are asking people to give you their time which, at least for some people, is actually more valuable than their money. And that means you have to make a compelling case for why it's worth it to contribute to your project, and also why they should use it, why they should care about it? So, anyway, we're going to talk with Sam, about <a href="https://miragejs.com/">Mirage</a>. But first, I should let you introduce yourself. Sam, thank you so much for joining me, and can you introduce yourself a little bit?</p><p><br></p><p>Sam: Sure. My name is Sam Selikoff. These days, I spend most of my time teaching people how to code in the form of videos on my YouTube channel, and my website, <a href="https://embermap.com/">embermap.com</a>. Most of it is front end web development focused. So, we focus on JavaScript. I have a business partner who also works with me. And then we also do custom app development, you know, some consulting throughout the year.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Cool. And then tell me a little bit about Mirage.</p><p><br></p><p>Sam: Yeah, so Mirage is the biggest open source project I've been a part of since falling into web development, I'd say about eight years ago, I got into open source pretty early on in programming, kind of what made me fall in love with web development and JavaScript. So, I was starting to help out and just get involved with existing projects and things that I was using. Eventually, I made my way to TED Talks, the conference company where I was a front end developer, and that's actually where I met my business partner, Ryan. And we were using Ember.js, which is a JavaScript framework, and we had lots of different apps at TED that were helping with various parts of publishing talks, and running conferences, and all that stuff. </p><p><br></p><p>And we were seeing some common setup code that we were using across all these apps to help us test them, and that's where Mirage came from. There was another project called Pretender, which helped you mock out servers so that you could test your front end against different server states. And we first wrapped that with something called Pretenderify, and then it grew in complexity. So, I was working on it on my learning Wednesdays, renamed it to Mirage, and then I've been working on it basically ever since. And then, the other big step, I guess, in the history is that originally was an Ember only project, and then last year, we worked on generalizing it so that it can be used by React developers, React Native developers, Vue developers, so now it's just a general-purpose JavaScript API mocking library.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: So, we would say that the position is an API mocking library. And—does that sound right?</p><p><br></p><p>Sam: Yeah. If I had to say what it is, I would say it's a mocking library that helps front end developers mock out backend API's so that they can develop and test the user interfaces without having to rely on back end services.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Why does that matter?</p><p><br></p><p>Sam: It matters because back end services can be very complicated, there can be multiple back end services that need to run in order to support a UI, and if you're a front end developer, and you just want to make a change and see what the shopping cart looks like when it's empty. What does the shopping cart look like when there's one item? What does it look like when there's 100 items, and we have to have multiple pages? All three of those states correspond to different data in some back end service, usually in a database. </p><p><br></p><p>And so, for a front end developer, or anyone working on the user interface, really, it can be time-consuming and complex to put that actual server in that state that they need to help them develop the UI. That can involve anything from running, like, a Rails server on their computer to getting other API's that other teams manage into the state they need to develop the UI. So, Mirage lets them mock that out and basically have a fake server that they control and they can put into any state they need. So, it’s like a simplified version of back end services that the front end developer can control to help them develop and test the UI.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: And when you first started Mirage, did you think of it as an API mocking library?</p><p><br></p><p>Sam: Not exactly. We used it mostly because of testing. So, in a test, it's usually a best practice to not have your test rely on an actual network. You want to be able to run your test suite of your user interface anywhere, let's say on an airplane or something like that. So, if your user interface relies on live back end services, that's usually where you would bring in a mocking library. </p><p><br></p><p>And then you would say, okay, when the user visits amazon.com/cart, normally, it would go try to fetch the items in your cart from a real server, but in the test, we're going to say, “Oh, when my app does that, let's just respond with zero items. And then in this next test, when my app does that, let's respond with three items.” So, that's the motivation originally, is in a testing environment, giving the UI developer control over that. And then what happened was that it was so useful, we started using it in development as well, just to help during normal times, just because it was faster than working with the real back end services.</p>...]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 25 Nov 2020 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/ce5002d7/858b5647.mp3" length="55705534" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2311</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>It’s not every day that you hear about positioning for open source projects. In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, master web developer Sam Selikoff discusses how he’s growing the Mirage community and reaching more developers. Sam also opens up about the transformative power of Mirage, and how it’s helping people develop faster and more effectively.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>It’s not every day that you hear about positioning for open source projects. In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, master web developer Sam Selikoff discusses how he’s growing the Mirage community and reaching more developers. Sam also opens up</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Discussing Bloomberg’s Cloud Native Journey with Andrey Rybka</title>
      <itunes:episode>26</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>26</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Discussing Bloomberg’s Cloud Native Journey with Andrey Rybka</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">3dcc013c-6908-4152-b297-4e54733999f1</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/13764ab8</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>This conversation covers:</strong></p><ul><li>How Bloomberg is demystifying bond trading and pricing, and bringing transparency to financial markets through their various digital offerings.</li><li>Andrey’s role as CTO of compute architecture at Bloomberg, where he oversees research implementation of new compute related technologies to support kind of our business and engineering objectives.</li><li>Why factors like speed and reliability are integral to Bloomberg’s operations, and how they impact Bloomberg’s operations . Andrey also talks about how they impact his approach to technology, and why they use cloud-native technology.</li><li>How Andrey and his team use containers to scale and ensure reliability.</li><li>Why portability is important to Bloomberg’s applications.</li><li>Bloomberg’s journey to cloud-native. </li><li>Some of the open-source services that Andrey and his team are using at Bloomberg.</li><li>Unexpected challenges that Andrey has encountered at Bloomberg.</li><li>Primary business value that Bloomberg has experienced from their cloud-native transition.</li></ul><p><strong>Links</strong></p><ul><li><a href="https://www.bloomberg.com/">Bloomberg</a></li><li><a href="https://github.com/bloomberg">Bloomberg GitHub</a></li><li>Follow Andrey on <a href="https://twitter.com/andrey_rybka?lang=en">Twitter</a></li><li>Connect with Andrey on <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/arybka/">LinkedIn</a></li></ul><p><strong>Transcript<br></strong>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>, I'm your host Emily Omier. And today I'm chatting with Andrey Rybka from <a href="https://www.bloomberg.com/">Bloomberg</a>, thank you so much for joining us, Andrey.</p><p><br></p><p>Andrey: Thank you for your invitation.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Course. So, first of all, can you tell us a little bit about yourself and about Bloomberg?</p><p><br></p><p>Andrey: Sure. So, I lead the secure computer architecture team, as the name suggests, in the CTO office. And our mission is to help with research implementation of new compute-related technologies to support our business and engineering objectives. But more specifically, we work on ways to faster provision, manage, and elastically scale compute infrastructure, as well as support rapid application development and delivery. And we also work on developing and articulating company’s compute strategic direction, which includes the compute storage middleware, and application technologists, and we also help us product owners for the specific offerings that we have in-house. </p><p><br></p><p>And as far as Bloomberg, so Bloomberg was founded in 1981 and it's got very large presence: about 325,000 <em>Bloomberg</em> subscribers in about 170 countries, about 20,000 employees, and more news reporters than <em>The New York Times</em>, <em>Washington Post,</em> and <em>Chicago Tribune</em> combined. And we have about 6000 plus software engineers, so pretty large team of very talented people, and we have quite a lot of data scientists and some specialized technologists. And some impressive, I guess, points is we run one of the largest private networks in the world, and we move about a hundred and twenty billion pieces of data from financial markets each day, with a peak of more than 10 million messages a second. We generate about 2 million news stories—and they're published every day—and then news content, we consuming from about 125,000 sources. And the platform allows and supports about 1 million messages, chats handled every day. So, it's very large and high-performance kind of deployment.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: And can you tell me just a little bit more about the types of applications that Bloomberg is working on or that Bloomberg offers? Maybe not everybody is familiar with why people subscribe to Bloomberg, what the main value is. And I'm also curious how the different applications fit into that.</p><p><br></p><p>Andrey: The core product is Bloomberg Terminal, which is Software as a Service offering that is delivering diverse array of information of news and analytics to facilitate financial decision-making. And Bloomberg has been doing a lot of things that make financial markets quite a bit more transparent. The original platform helped to demystify a lot of bond trading and pricing. So, the Bloomberg Terminal is the core product, but there's a lot of products that are focused on the trading solutions, there is enterprise data distribution for market data and such, and there is a lot of verticals such as Bloomberg Media: that's <a href="https://www.bloomberg.com/">bloomberg.com</a>, TV, and radio, and news articles that are consumer-facing. </p><p><br></p><p>But also there is Bloomberg Law, which is offering for the attorneys, and there is other verticals like New Energy Finance, which helps with all the green energy and information that helps a lot to do with helping with climate change. And then there's Bloomberg Government, which is focused on, specifically, research around government-specific data feeds. And so in general, you've got finance, government, law, and new energy as the key solutions.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: And how important is speed?</p><p><br></p><p>Andrey: It is extremely important because, well, first of all, obviously, for traders, although we're not in high-frequency game, we definitely want to deliver the news as fast as possible. We want to deliver actionable financial information as fast as possible, so definitely it is a major factor, but also not the only factor because there's other considerations like reliability and quality of service as well.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: And then how does this translate to your approach to new technology in general? And then also, why did you think cloud-native might be a good technology to look into and to adopt?</p><p><br></p><p>Andrey: So, I guess if we define cloud-native, a little because I think there's different definitions; many people think of containers immediately. But I think that we need to think of outside of not just, I guess, containers, but I guess the container orchestration and scaling elastically, up and down. And those, I guess, primitives. So, when we originally started on our cloud-native journey, we had this problem of we were treating our machines as pets if you know the paradigm of pets versus cattle where pet is something that you care for, and there’s, like, literally the name for it, you take it to the vet if it gets sick. And when you use think of herd of cattle, there's many of them, and you can replace, and you have quite a lot of understanding of scalability with the herd versus pets. </p><p><br></p><p>So, we started moving towards that direction because we wanted to have more uniform infrastructure, more heterogeneous. And we started with VMs. So, we didn't necessarily jump to containers. And then we started thinking like, “Is VMs the right abstraction?” And for some workloads it is, but then in some cases, we started thinking, “Well, maybe we need something more lightweight.” </p><p><br></p><p>So, that's how we started looking at containers because ...</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>This conversation covers:</strong></p><ul><li>How Bloomberg is demystifying bond trading and pricing, and bringing transparency to financial markets through their various digital offerings.</li><li>Andrey’s role as CTO of compute architecture at Bloomberg, where he oversees research implementation of new compute related technologies to support kind of our business and engineering objectives.</li><li>Why factors like speed and reliability are integral to Bloomberg’s operations, and how they impact Bloomberg’s operations . Andrey also talks about how they impact his approach to technology, and why they use cloud-native technology.</li><li>How Andrey and his team use containers to scale and ensure reliability.</li><li>Why portability is important to Bloomberg’s applications.</li><li>Bloomberg’s journey to cloud-native. </li><li>Some of the open-source services that Andrey and his team are using at Bloomberg.</li><li>Unexpected challenges that Andrey has encountered at Bloomberg.</li><li>Primary business value that Bloomberg has experienced from their cloud-native transition.</li></ul><p><strong>Links</strong></p><ul><li><a href="https://www.bloomberg.com/">Bloomberg</a></li><li><a href="https://github.com/bloomberg">Bloomberg GitHub</a></li><li>Follow Andrey on <a href="https://twitter.com/andrey_rybka?lang=en">Twitter</a></li><li>Connect with Andrey on <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/arybka/">LinkedIn</a></li></ul><p><strong>Transcript<br></strong>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>, I'm your host Emily Omier. And today I'm chatting with Andrey Rybka from <a href="https://www.bloomberg.com/">Bloomberg</a>, thank you so much for joining us, Andrey.</p><p><br></p><p>Andrey: Thank you for your invitation.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Course. So, first of all, can you tell us a little bit about yourself and about Bloomberg?</p><p><br></p><p>Andrey: Sure. So, I lead the secure computer architecture team, as the name suggests, in the CTO office. And our mission is to help with research implementation of new compute-related technologies to support our business and engineering objectives. But more specifically, we work on ways to faster provision, manage, and elastically scale compute infrastructure, as well as support rapid application development and delivery. And we also work on developing and articulating company’s compute strategic direction, which includes the compute storage middleware, and application technologists, and we also help us product owners for the specific offerings that we have in-house. </p><p><br></p><p>And as far as Bloomberg, so Bloomberg was founded in 1981 and it's got very large presence: about 325,000 <em>Bloomberg</em> subscribers in about 170 countries, about 20,000 employees, and more news reporters than <em>The New York Times</em>, <em>Washington Post,</em> and <em>Chicago Tribune</em> combined. And we have about 6000 plus software engineers, so pretty large team of very talented people, and we have quite a lot of data scientists and some specialized technologists. And some impressive, I guess, points is we run one of the largest private networks in the world, and we move about a hundred and twenty billion pieces of data from financial markets each day, with a peak of more than 10 million messages a second. We generate about 2 million news stories—and they're published every day—and then news content, we consuming from about 125,000 sources. And the platform allows and supports about 1 million messages, chats handled every day. So, it's very large and high-performance kind of deployment.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: And can you tell me just a little bit more about the types of applications that Bloomberg is working on or that Bloomberg offers? Maybe not everybody is familiar with why people subscribe to Bloomberg, what the main value is. And I'm also curious how the different applications fit into that.</p><p><br></p><p>Andrey: The core product is Bloomberg Terminal, which is Software as a Service offering that is delivering diverse array of information of news and analytics to facilitate financial decision-making. And Bloomberg has been doing a lot of things that make financial markets quite a bit more transparent. The original platform helped to demystify a lot of bond trading and pricing. So, the Bloomberg Terminal is the core product, but there's a lot of products that are focused on the trading solutions, there is enterprise data distribution for market data and such, and there is a lot of verticals such as Bloomberg Media: that's <a href="https://www.bloomberg.com/">bloomberg.com</a>, TV, and radio, and news articles that are consumer-facing. </p><p><br></p><p>But also there is Bloomberg Law, which is offering for the attorneys, and there is other verticals like New Energy Finance, which helps with all the green energy and information that helps a lot to do with helping with climate change. And then there's Bloomberg Government, which is focused on, specifically, research around government-specific data feeds. And so in general, you've got finance, government, law, and new energy as the key solutions.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: And how important is speed?</p><p><br></p><p>Andrey: It is extremely important because, well, first of all, obviously, for traders, although we're not in high-frequency game, we definitely want to deliver the news as fast as possible. We want to deliver actionable financial information as fast as possible, so definitely it is a major factor, but also not the only factor because there's other considerations like reliability and quality of service as well.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: And then how does this translate to your approach to new technology in general? And then also, why did you think cloud-native might be a good technology to look into and to adopt?</p><p><br></p><p>Andrey: So, I guess if we define cloud-native, a little because I think there's different definitions; many people think of containers immediately. But I think that we need to think of outside of not just, I guess, containers, but I guess the container orchestration and scaling elastically, up and down. And those, I guess, primitives. So, when we originally started on our cloud-native journey, we had this problem of we were treating our machines as pets if you know the paradigm of pets versus cattle where pet is something that you care for, and there’s, like, literally the name for it, you take it to the vet if it gets sick. And when you use think of herd of cattle, there's many of them, and you can replace, and you have quite a lot of understanding of scalability with the herd versus pets. </p><p><br></p><p>So, we started moving towards that direction because we wanted to have more uniform infrastructure, more heterogeneous. And we started with VMs. So, we didn't necessarily jump to containers. And then we started thinking like, “Is VMs the right abstraction?” And for some workloads it is, but then in some cases, we started thinking, “Well, maybe we need something more lightweight.” </p><p><br></p><p>So, that's how we started looking at containers because ...</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 18 Nov 2020 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/13764ab8/c3980ab4.mp3" length="45108718" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1854</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>When you think of Bloomberg, you may think of their leading global business publications. But the company also offers Bloomberg Terminal, a service that offers a diverse array of information, news, and analytics to facilitate financial decision making. 

In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, host Emily Omier talks with Andrey Rybka who is head of CTO compute architecture at Bloomberg. They explore the cloud-native technologies that are being used at Bloomberg, and how they’re helping the company deliver information faster and at scale.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>When you think of Bloomberg, you may think of their leading global business publications. But the company also offers Bloomberg Terminal, a service that offers a diverse array of information, news, and analytics to facilitate financial decision making. 
</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>How Systematic Approaches Cloud-Native with Thomas Vitale</title>
      <itunes:episode>25</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>25</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>How Systematic Approaches Cloud-Native with Thomas Vitale</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">232ef469-51d6-4a93-bafd-89061a916b9e</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/8372ac9e</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>This conversation covers:</strong></p><ul><li>An average workday for Thomas as senior systems engineer at Systematic.</li><li>How Systematic uses cross-functional collaboration to solve problems and produce high quality software.</li><li>How security and data privacy relate to cloud-native technologies, and the challenges they present. </li><li>Systematic’s journey to cloud native, and why the company decided it was a good idea. </li><li>Why it’s important to consider the hidden costs and complexities of cloud-native before migrating.</li><li>What makes an application appropriate for the cloud, and some tips to help with making that decision.</li><li>The biggest surprises that Thomas has encountered when  moving applications to cloud-native technology. </li><li>Thomas’s new book, <em>Cloud Native Spring in Action,</em> which is about designing and developing cloud-native applications using Spring Boot, Kubernetes, and other cloud-native technologies. Thomas also talks about who would benefit from his book.</li><li>Thomas’s background and experience using cloud-native technology.</li><li>The biggest misconceptions about cloud-native, according to Thomas.</li></ul><p><strong>Links</strong></p><ul><li><a href="https://systematic.com/">Systematic</a></li><li><a href="https://www.manning.com/books/cloud-native-spring-in-action">Cloud Native Spring in Action book</a></li><li><a href="https://www.thomasvitale.com/">Thomas Vitale personal website</a></li><li>Follow Thomas on <a href="https://twitter.com/vitalethomas">Twitter</a></li><li>Connect with Thomas on <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/vitalethomas/">LinkedIn</a></li></ul><p><strong>Transcript<br></strong>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. I'm your host, Emily Omier, and today I'm chatting with Thomas Vitale. Thomas, thanks so much for joining us.</p><p><br></p><p>Thomas: Hi, Emily. And thanks for having me on this podcast.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Of course. I just like to start by asking everyone to introduce themselves. So, Thomas, can you tell us a little bit about what you do and where you work, and how you actually spend your day?</p><p><br></p><p>Thomas: Yes, I work as a senior systems engineer at <a href="https://systematic.com/">Systematic</a>. That is a Danish company, where I design and develop software solutions in the healthcare sector. And I really like working with cloud-native technologies and, in particular, with Java frameworks, and with Kubernetes, and Docker. I'm particularly passionate about application security and data privacy. These are the two main things that I've been doing, also, in Systematic.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: And can you tell me a little bit about what a normal workday looks like for you?</p><p><br></p><p>Thomas: That's a very interesting question. So, in my daily work, I work on features for our set of applications that are used in the healthcare sector. And I participate in requirements elicitation and goal clarification for all new features and new set of functionality that we'd like to introduce in our application. And I'm also involved in the deployment part, so I work on the full value stream, we could say. So, from the early design and development, and then deploying the result in production.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: And to what extent, at Systematic, do you have a division between application developers and platform engineers, or however else you want to call them—DevOps teams?</p><p><br></p><p>Thomas: In my project, currently, we are going through what we can call as maybe a DevOps transformation, or cloud transformation because we started combining different responsibilities in the same team, so in a DevOps culture, where we have a full collaboration between people with different expertise, so not only developers but also operators, testers. And this is a very powerful collaboration because it means putting together different people in a team that can bring an idea to production in a very high-quality way because you have all the skills to actually address all the problems in advance, or to foresee, maybe, some difficulties, or how to better make a decision when there's different options because you have not only the point of view of a developer—so how is better the code—but also the effects that each option has in production because that is where the software will live. And that is the part that provides value to the customers. </p><p><br></p><p>And I think it's a very important part. When I first started being responsible, also, for the next part, after developing features, I feel like I really started growing in my professional career because suddenly, you approach problems in a totally different way. You have full awareness of how each piece of a system will behave in production. And I just think it's, it's awesome. It's really powerful. And quality-wise, it's a win-win situation.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: And I wanted to ask also about security and data privacy that you mentioned being one of your interests. How do those two concepts relate to cloud-native technologies? And what are some of the challenges in being secure and managing data privacy specifically for cloud-native?</p><p><br></p><p>Thomas: I think in general, security has always been a critical concern that sometimes is not considered at the very beginning of the development process, and that's a mistake. So, the same thing should happen in a cloud-native project. Security should be a concern from day one. And the specific case of the Cloud: if we are moving from a more traditional system and more traditional infrastructure, we have a set of new challenges that have to be solved because especially if we are going with a public cloud, starting from an on-premise solution, we start having challenges about how to manage data. </p><p><br></p><p>So, from the data privacy point of view, we have—depending also on the country—different laws about how to manage data, and that is one of the critical concerns, I think, especially for organizations working in the healthcare domain, or finance—like banks. The data ownership and management can really differ depending on the domain. And in the Cloud, there's a risk if you're not managing your own infrastructure in specific cases. So, I think this is one of the aspects to consider when approaching a cloud-native migration: how your data should be managed, and if there is any law or particular regulation on how they should be managed.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Excellent. And can you actually tell me a little bit about Systematic’s journey to cloud-native and why the company decided that this was a good idea? What were some of the business goals in adopting things like Docker and Kubernetes?</p><p><br></p><p>Thomas: Going to the Cloud, I think is a successful decision when an organization has those problems that the cloud-native technologies attempt to solve. And some goals that are commonly addressed by cloud-native technologies are, for example, scalability. We gain a lot of possibilities to scale our applications, not only in terms of computational resources, and le...</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>This conversation covers:</strong></p><ul><li>An average workday for Thomas as senior systems engineer at Systematic.</li><li>How Systematic uses cross-functional collaboration to solve problems and produce high quality software.</li><li>How security and data privacy relate to cloud-native technologies, and the challenges they present. </li><li>Systematic’s journey to cloud native, and why the company decided it was a good idea. </li><li>Why it’s important to consider the hidden costs and complexities of cloud-native before migrating.</li><li>What makes an application appropriate for the cloud, and some tips to help with making that decision.</li><li>The biggest surprises that Thomas has encountered when  moving applications to cloud-native technology. </li><li>Thomas’s new book, <em>Cloud Native Spring in Action,</em> which is about designing and developing cloud-native applications using Spring Boot, Kubernetes, and other cloud-native technologies. Thomas also talks about who would benefit from his book.</li><li>Thomas’s background and experience using cloud-native technology.</li><li>The biggest misconceptions about cloud-native, according to Thomas.</li></ul><p><strong>Links</strong></p><ul><li><a href="https://systematic.com/">Systematic</a></li><li><a href="https://www.manning.com/books/cloud-native-spring-in-action">Cloud Native Spring in Action book</a></li><li><a href="https://www.thomasvitale.com/">Thomas Vitale personal website</a></li><li>Follow Thomas on <a href="https://twitter.com/vitalethomas">Twitter</a></li><li>Connect with Thomas on <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/vitalethomas/">LinkedIn</a></li></ul><p><strong>Transcript<br></strong>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. I'm your host, Emily Omier, and today I'm chatting with Thomas Vitale. Thomas, thanks so much for joining us.</p><p><br></p><p>Thomas: Hi, Emily. And thanks for having me on this podcast.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Of course. I just like to start by asking everyone to introduce themselves. So, Thomas, can you tell us a little bit about what you do and where you work, and how you actually spend your day?</p><p><br></p><p>Thomas: Yes, I work as a senior systems engineer at <a href="https://systematic.com/">Systematic</a>. That is a Danish company, where I design and develop software solutions in the healthcare sector. And I really like working with cloud-native technologies and, in particular, with Java frameworks, and with Kubernetes, and Docker. I'm particularly passionate about application security and data privacy. These are the two main things that I've been doing, also, in Systematic.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: And can you tell me a little bit about what a normal workday looks like for you?</p><p><br></p><p>Thomas: That's a very interesting question. So, in my daily work, I work on features for our set of applications that are used in the healthcare sector. And I participate in requirements elicitation and goal clarification for all new features and new set of functionality that we'd like to introduce in our application. And I'm also involved in the deployment part, so I work on the full value stream, we could say. So, from the early design and development, and then deploying the result in production.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: And to what extent, at Systematic, do you have a division between application developers and platform engineers, or however else you want to call them—DevOps teams?</p><p><br></p><p>Thomas: In my project, currently, we are going through what we can call as maybe a DevOps transformation, or cloud transformation because we started combining different responsibilities in the same team, so in a DevOps culture, where we have a full collaboration between people with different expertise, so not only developers but also operators, testers. And this is a very powerful collaboration because it means putting together different people in a team that can bring an idea to production in a very high-quality way because you have all the skills to actually address all the problems in advance, or to foresee, maybe, some difficulties, or how to better make a decision when there's different options because you have not only the point of view of a developer—so how is better the code—but also the effects that each option has in production because that is where the software will live. And that is the part that provides value to the customers. </p><p><br></p><p>And I think it's a very important part. When I first started being responsible, also, for the next part, after developing features, I feel like I really started growing in my professional career because suddenly, you approach problems in a totally different way. You have full awareness of how each piece of a system will behave in production. And I just think it's, it's awesome. It's really powerful. And quality-wise, it's a win-win situation.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: And I wanted to ask also about security and data privacy that you mentioned being one of your interests. How do those two concepts relate to cloud-native technologies? And what are some of the challenges in being secure and managing data privacy specifically for cloud-native?</p><p><br></p><p>Thomas: I think in general, security has always been a critical concern that sometimes is not considered at the very beginning of the development process, and that's a mistake. So, the same thing should happen in a cloud-native project. Security should be a concern from day one. And the specific case of the Cloud: if we are moving from a more traditional system and more traditional infrastructure, we have a set of new challenges that have to be solved because especially if we are going with a public cloud, starting from an on-premise solution, we start having challenges about how to manage data. </p><p><br></p><p>So, from the data privacy point of view, we have—depending also on the country—different laws about how to manage data, and that is one of the critical concerns, I think, especially for organizations working in the healthcare domain, or finance—like banks. The data ownership and management can really differ depending on the domain. And in the Cloud, there's a risk if you're not managing your own infrastructure in specific cases. So, I think this is one of the aspects to consider when approaching a cloud-native migration: how your data should be managed, and if there is any law or particular regulation on how they should be managed.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Excellent. And can you actually tell me a little bit about Systematic’s journey to cloud-native and why the company decided that this was a good idea? What were some of the business goals in adopting things like Docker and Kubernetes?</p><p><br></p><p>Thomas: Going to the Cloud, I think is a successful decision when an organization has those problems that the cloud-native technologies attempt to solve. And some goals that are commonly addressed by cloud-native technologies are, for example, scalability. We gain a lot of possibilities to scale our applications, not only in terms of computational resources, and le...</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 11 Nov 2020 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/8372ac9e/765e5060.mp3" length="33522396" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1387</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Have you been wondering whether cloud-native is right for your organization? If so, you don’t want to miss this discussion with Thomas Vitale who is a senior systems engineer at Systematic, a leading software developer for a variety of industries including healthcare, defense and finance. 

In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, host Emily Omier and Thomas discuss a variety of topics including Systematic’s approach to cloud-native, the hidden costs and complexities of cloud-native, Thomas’s new book, and more.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Have you been wondering whether cloud-native is right for your organization? If so, you don’t want to miss this discussion with Thomas Vitale who is a senior systems engineer at Systematic, a leading software developer for a variety of industries includin</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Discussing Forter with CTO Iftah Gideoni</title>
      <itunes:episode>24</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>24</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Discussing Forter with CTO Iftah Gideoni</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">180e0ee9-85cb-4742-9298-03f832df9941</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/48fa9ad2</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This conversation covers:</p><ul><li>The value that Forter provides, and the types of companies that they work with. Iftah also explains what makes Forter so unique. </li><li>The underlying technology that Forter is using, and how they quickly process hundreds of complex backend workflows. Iftah also talks about some of the tools that they are using, including AWS and Apache Storm.</li><li>How Forter approaches the cloud, and how it’s helping them concentrate on the business of detecting fraud. In addition, talks about the types of cloud services that Forter is using.</li><li>Forter’s ability to scale — including how they responded to increased customer demand during COVID-19.</li><li>Forter’s biggest technical challenge that they are currently working through.</li><li>Iftah’s thoughts on the security- speed tradeoff.</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li><a href="https://www.forter.com/">Forter</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/ForterGlobal">Forter on Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/iftah-gideoni-0b41314/?originalSubdomain=il">Connect with Iftah on LinkedIn</a></li><li>Iftah’s email: <a href="mailto:iftah@forter.com">iftah@forter.com</a></li></ul><p><strong>Transcript:</strong><br>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. I'm Emily Omier, your host, and today I'm chatting with Iftah Gideoni. Iftah is the CTO at <a href="https://www.forter.com/">Forter</a>. Iftah, first of all, thank you so much for joining me.</p><p><br></p><p>Iftah: Very glad to be here.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: So, I wanted to have you start by introducing yourself and what you do, and then also what Forter does.</p><p><br></p><p>Iftah: Hi, I'm Iftah. I’m a physicist of education, and in the last 20 years, a CTO of several companies, mostly [00:01:11 unintelligible] governmental companies, and companies that I founded. In the last six and a half years, I'm with Forter. And what Forter started to do from 2014 is to provide what was, at the time, very bold vision of fully automated, fully cloud-based decisions about whether to allow or decline e-commerce transactions. </p><p><br></p><p>Now, from that time we actually implemented and executed that, we decide very many more than 3 million transactions every day, today, all in real-time without a human in the loop. And we expanded into being a fully-fledged trust engine that gives decisions not only about transactions, but about many other points of interaction with the consumer, for example, in their login time, and in other points where trust decision is needed.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: So, just because I think it might be interesting to listeners, give me some examples of, like, when somebody might interact with Forter or have some sort of action approved or declined by Forter.</p><p><br></p><p>Iftah: Right. The prime customers of Forter are the big e-commerce enterprises. Think about the [00:02:42 Sephoras], the Nordstroms, the Home Depots, and this kind of companies. And whenever you press the button of requesting to committing to the purchase and you see this small things rounding on the screen, then it is sent to Forter and Forter within, usually, half a second returns a decision. </p><p><br></p><p>Now, Forter does not act as an additional data point, or input, or score into some system of the merchant. It actually answer whether to approve or decline the transaction. In very many—and most of the revenue of Forter comes from a covered transaction that, if this transaction was fraud, it’s on Forter. Forter will guarantee it. And we were pioneering this model to putting our mouth where our money is.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Tell me just a little bit about why this is so difficult. What makes what Forter does unique?</p><p><br></p><p>Iftah: What Forter does is unique because it tells the human story, and takes it all the way to the decision itself. For example, it's very easy to approve the fourth transaction of a person that is sitting at home, browsing from home, making the purchase on the same desktop they made at previous times, and sending the shipment to the same home. That's very easy. But we want to be able to approve the traveler, the person that is sending a gift to a third party, or a person that is sending a gift to another state while not browsing from home and not from his common device. </p><p><br></p><p>We want to be able to approve those transactions that are checking out as guests from a new device and that's the first time this person ever appeared on our radar. And the ability to do that and to take the calculated risks and to look at the behavior, the cyber clues, and still be able to tell that this is indeed a new person and not someone that visited before and is trying now to hide. That's what makes what we do very difficult and complex.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: So, tell me a bit about the technology story. What technology do you use to accomplish this, and how does it work? What does your stack look like?</p><p><br></p><p>Iftah: When I came to—from 2014, I looked at the system and what is actually needed in order to cater to such a complex story? And I thought to myself—and we'll talk about maybe a bit later about how all this is excellently suited for the Cloud, but what I found that throughput and big data is not the problem. First, it’s more or less solved, but it is the e-commerce business; it's not Facebook scale throughput. And on the other hand, it's not hardcore real-time, right? We're talking about tens of milliseconds, not the microseconds domain. </p><p><br></p><p>What is extreme about what we do is the complexity of the flow. We have hundreds of processes that are needed to be ran within that half a second in order to test, and check, and infer, and decide on many aspects of this transaction and of this person. So, first, we started from Amazon Web Services, and we started with, actually, Apache Storm. And why we decided that because we wanted to have something that enables first, a lot of parallelism—doing many things in parallel—with smart joins, that is with processes that takes information from other processes that executed in parallel, and can decide whether what they have so far from these processes is enough. Because we are very high availability, we didn't lose more than 10 seconds straight in the last four years. We are very high availability, but a lot of our sub-processes are not. </p><p><br></p><p>So, you need such a machine that will be able to infer about whether the information at hand is good enough and to move forward and still give, after half a second, the answer. We also wanted to have within this high availability system, we wanted to have the domain experts, the analysts, and the fraud researchers, we wanted to give them a very direct access to the code and each insight that they get, in close to real-time, maybe in 10 or 15 minutes from the time that they understood that there is a new wave of attacks or a new fraudster in action in a particular store or across stores. We wanted all these insights to be manifested in the sys...</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This conversation covers:</p><ul><li>The value that Forter provides, and the types of companies that they work with. Iftah also explains what makes Forter so unique. </li><li>The underlying technology that Forter is using, and how they quickly process hundreds of complex backend workflows. Iftah also talks about some of the tools that they are using, including AWS and Apache Storm.</li><li>How Forter approaches the cloud, and how it’s helping them concentrate on the business of detecting fraud. In addition, talks about the types of cloud services that Forter is using.</li><li>Forter’s ability to scale — including how they responded to increased customer demand during COVID-19.</li><li>Forter’s biggest technical challenge that they are currently working through.</li><li>Iftah’s thoughts on the security- speed tradeoff.</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li><a href="https://www.forter.com/">Forter</a></li><li><a href="https://twitter.com/ForterGlobal">Forter on Twitter</a></li><li><a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/iftah-gideoni-0b41314/?originalSubdomain=il">Connect with Iftah on LinkedIn</a></li><li>Iftah’s email: <a href="mailto:iftah@forter.com">iftah@forter.com</a></li></ul><p><strong>Transcript:</strong><br>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. I'm Emily Omier, your host, and today I'm chatting with Iftah Gideoni. Iftah is the CTO at <a href="https://www.forter.com/">Forter</a>. Iftah, first of all, thank you so much for joining me.</p><p><br></p><p>Iftah: Very glad to be here.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: So, I wanted to have you start by introducing yourself and what you do, and then also what Forter does.</p><p><br></p><p>Iftah: Hi, I'm Iftah. I’m a physicist of education, and in the last 20 years, a CTO of several companies, mostly [00:01:11 unintelligible] governmental companies, and companies that I founded. In the last six and a half years, I'm with Forter. And what Forter started to do from 2014 is to provide what was, at the time, very bold vision of fully automated, fully cloud-based decisions about whether to allow or decline e-commerce transactions. </p><p><br></p><p>Now, from that time we actually implemented and executed that, we decide very many more than 3 million transactions every day, today, all in real-time without a human in the loop. And we expanded into being a fully-fledged trust engine that gives decisions not only about transactions, but about many other points of interaction with the consumer, for example, in their login time, and in other points where trust decision is needed.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: So, just because I think it might be interesting to listeners, give me some examples of, like, when somebody might interact with Forter or have some sort of action approved or declined by Forter.</p><p><br></p><p>Iftah: Right. The prime customers of Forter are the big e-commerce enterprises. Think about the [00:02:42 Sephoras], the Nordstroms, the Home Depots, and this kind of companies. And whenever you press the button of requesting to committing to the purchase and you see this small things rounding on the screen, then it is sent to Forter and Forter within, usually, half a second returns a decision. </p><p><br></p><p>Now, Forter does not act as an additional data point, or input, or score into some system of the merchant. It actually answer whether to approve or decline the transaction. In very many—and most of the revenue of Forter comes from a covered transaction that, if this transaction was fraud, it’s on Forter. Forter will guarantee it. And we were pioneering this model to putting our mouth where our money is.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Tell me just a little bit about why this is so difficult. What makes what Forter does unique?</p><p><br></p><p>Iftah: What Forter does is unique because it tells the human story, and takes it all the way to the decision itself. For example, it's very easy to approve the fourth transaction of a person that is sitting at home, browsing from home, making the purchase on the same desktop they made at previous times, and sending the shipment to the same home. That's very easy. But we want to be able to approve the traveler, the person that is sending a gift to a third party, or a person that is sending a gift to another state while not browsing from home and not from his common device. </p><p><br></p><p>We want to be able to approve those transactions that are checking out as guests from a new device and that's the first time this person ever appeared on our radar. And the ability to do that and to take the calculated risks and to look at the behavior, the cyber clues, and still be able to tell that this is indeed a new person and not someone that visited before and is trying now to hide. That's what makes what we do very difficult and complex.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: So, tell me a bit about the technology story. What technology do you use to accomplish this, and how does it work? What does your stack look like?</p><p><br></p><p>Iftah: When I came to—from 2014, I looked at the system and what is actually needed in order to cater to such a complex story? And I thought to myself—and we'll talk about maybe a bit later about how all this is excellently suited for the Cloud, but what I found that throughput and big data is not the problem. First, it’s more or less solved, but it is the e-commerce business; it's not Facebook scale throughput. And on the other hand, it's not hardcore real-time, right? We're talking about tens of milliseconds, not the microseconds domain. </p><p><br></p><p>What is extreme about what we do is the complexity of the flow. We have hundreds of processes that are needed to be ran within that half a second in order to test, and check, and infer, and decide on many aspects of this transaction and of this person. So, first, we started from Amazon Web Services, and we started with, actually, Apache Storm. And why we decided that because we wanted to have something that enables first, a lot of parallelism—doing many things in parallel—with smart joins, that is with processes that takes information from other processes that executed in parallel, and can decide whether what they have so far from these processes is enough. Because we are very high availability, we didn't lose more than 10 seconds straight in the last four years. We are very high availability, but a lot of our sub-processes are not. </p><p><br></p><p>So, you need such a machine that will be able to infer about whether the information at hand is good enough and to move forward and still give, after half a second, the answer. We also wanted to have within this high availability system, we wanted to have the domain experts, the analysts, and the fraud researchers, we wanted to give them a very direct access to the code and each insight that they get, in close to real-time, maybe in 10 or 15 minutes from the time that they understood that there is a new wave of attacks or a new fraudster in action in a particular store or across stores. We wanted all these insights to be manifested in the sys...</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 04 Nov 2020 00:30:00 -0800</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/48fa9ad2/4506c4e8.mp3" length="56997518" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2365</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Forter offers an integrated fraud prevention platform for retailers and marketplaces, providing rapid insights to detect and deter criminal activity. 

In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, host Emily Omier speaks with Iftah Gideoni who is CTO of Forter. Iftah talks about Forter’s underlying technology and how the company achieves fast and reliable data processing.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Forter offers an integrated fraud prevention platform for retailers and marketplaces, providing rapid insights to detect and deter criminal activity. 

In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, host Emily Omier speaks with Iftah Gideoni who is CT</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Aligning Open-Source and Business Goals with Tobie Langel</title>
      <itunes:episode>23</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>23</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Aligning Open-Source and Business Goals with Tobie Langel</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">6ea973ce-d556-4aaa-9e3f-84b9cff88ba9</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/a355de66</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This conversation covers:</p><ul><li>Laying the groundwork for a successful open-source program office (OSPO).</li><li>Why legal and engineering are usually the two main stakeholders in open-source projects.</li><li>Why engineering teams tend to struggle at articulating their perspective on open-source. Tobie offers some improvement tips. </li><li>How Tobie defines open-source strategy. Tobie also explains the risk of not having an open-source strategy, as well as his process for helping organizations determine the best strategy for their needs.</li><li>Common challenges that businesses face when deploying open-source software. </li><li>The secondary — or non-code — benefits of open-source, and why many organizations tend to overlook them.</li><li>Tips for engineers in non-technology organizations like pharmaceuticals or finance to approach business leadership about open-source. </li></ul><p><strong>Links</strong></p><ul><li>UnlockOpen: <a href="https://unlockopen.com/">https://unlockopen.com/</a> </li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/tobie">https://twitter.com/tobie</a></li></ul><p><strong>Transcript<br></strong>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. Today, I am talking with Tobie Langel from <a href="https://unlockopen.com/">UnlockOpen</a>, and I wanted to start, Tobie, by just asking, you know, what do you do? Can you give us sort of an introduction to what you do, and how you tend to spend your days?</p><p><br></p><p>Tobie: Sure. So, I've been back into consulting for a number of years at this point. And I essentially focus on helping organizations align their open-source strategy with business goals. So, it can be both at the project level—so sometimes helping specific projects out—or larger strategy at the corporate level.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: So, I actually recently had Nithya Ruff, who's the head of the OSPO at Comcast on the podcast. For listeners who don't know, that's an open-source program office. So, are you sort of an outsourced OSPO for companies that aren't Comcast’s size?</p><p><br></p><p>Tobie: So, that's a really good question. My answer would be no, but it tends to happen that I help companies build that capacity internally. So, I would generally tend to come up before an OSPO is needed, and help them figure out what exactly they need to build. For OSPO, my pet peeve is companies building OSPOs like they need to tick a checkbox on the list of the things that they have to do to be up-to-date with good engineering practices, if you will. </p><p><br></p><p>In general, if you want to be successful, with an OSPO, it has to meet the particular needs of your company, and that's usually kind of hard to figure out if you just leave it to whoever in the organization is more interested in driving that effort. And so essentially, I sort of help in the early stages of that by bringing all of the stakeholders at the table, and essentially listening to them and making sure that what they want out of an OSPO is aligned between the different stakeholders and matches the overall strategy of the company.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: And who are the stakeholders that you're generally talking to?</p><p><br></p><p>Tobie: So, essentially, open-sources is strange, for one reason, in terms of how it was adopted in companies from a historical perspective. Adopters have always been essentially engineers who just wanted better tools, or the package or the software that best fitted their current intention, and there's a very, very grassroots process by which companies start using open-source. And what happened at some point is companies sorted to see all of the software, and got concerned, and started trying to assess the risk. And so companies just tended to bring in the legal arm and lawyers at this point. And so to fulfill compliance questions, you bring in lawyers, and then the responsibility of grown-up open-source kind of falls on to lawyers, which tends to be problematic from the perspective of good engineering practice and velocity that you want from your engineering and product side in a company. </p><p><br></p><p>And so clearly, the two stakeholders or the two main stakeholders tend to be legal and engineering, and there tends to be a tension between these two sides. And in lots of companies this tension, instead of being resolved to some degree, tends to be won by the legal side that understands business concerns better and is better able to praise or explain what they do in terms of business impact and business risks than the engineering side. And so this equilibrium tends to create OSPOs which are legal heavy, process heavy, and don't really give engineers the kind of freedom that they would need to be effective in their daily engineering practice. And the reason behind that being essentially over exaggerated risk perception of open-source because, to be frank, open-source is not well taught in legal school and clearly not part of the curricular that most lawyers are familiar with when they move into helping tech companies out. So, essentially, I sort of tried to bridge these two worlds.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: I can imagine that being an open-source lawyer, that's a niche, that's a very specific niche.</p><p><br></p><p>Tobie: Yeah, actually there's a running joke in that community, which is, “As soon as you get your law degree and you’re an open-source lawyer, you’re one of the 25 best open-source lawyers in the world.”</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: [laughs]. That's awesome. Why do you think engineering teams are so bad at clearly articulating their perspective on open-source, and what can they do to improve?</p><p><br></p><p>Tobie: So, there are clearly multiple reasons why engineers aren't the best at articulating how open-source matters. So, I think one of the key ones, it's just, it's something that's part of their daily practice, and they don't really understand and never have been taught the actual intellectual property—IP—impact, that open-source has on their company, and they don't really understand how others in the company might perceive this IP impact. So, I think, one part of it is, essentially, this is just how engineers work. Like, you want to use a piece of software, you put it in it, right? If you want to fix something, well, you do a pull request. This is sort of, like, a common practice. And it's always hard to articulate things that are essentially part of your, like—you know, like a native language, like part of your culture. It's really hard to describe, why you would do this, and why it matters. So, I think that's one reason.</p><p><br></p><p>The other reason, I think, is that there is a lot of overlap between the way legal works, and the way business works in general. Few examples of that are, engineers tend to think really like in binary way, like, you know, something is true or false, something is on or off, whereas business and law a much more spectrum thinking and into the gray area of things. Similarly, law will share with executive manager’s schedule, versus a maker’s schedule. So, there's lots of cultural artifacts of law culture in corporat...</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This conversation covers:</p><ul><li>Laying the groundwork for a successful open-source program office (OSPO).</li><li>Why legal and engineering are usually the two main stakeholders in open-source projects.</li><li>Why engineering teams tend to struggle at articulating their perspective on open-source. Tobie offers some improvement tips. </li><li>How Tobie defines open-source strategy. Tobie also explains the risk of not having an open-source strategy, as well as his process for helping organizations determine the best strategy for their needs.</li><li>Common challenges that businesses face when deploying open-source software. </li><li>The secondary — or non-code — benefits of open-source, and why many organizations tend to overlook them.</li><li>Tips for engineers in non-technology organizations like pharmaceuticals or finance to approach business leadership about open-source. </li></ul><p><strong>Links</strong></p><ul><li>UnlockOpen: <a href="https://unlockopen.com/">https://unlockopen.com/</a> </li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/tobie">https://twitter.com/tobie</a></li></ul><p><strong>Transcript<br></strong>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. Today, I am talking with Tobie Langel from <a href="https://unlockopen.com/">UnlockOpen</a>, and I wanted to start, Tobie, by just asking, you know, what do you do? Can you give us sort of an introduction to what you do, and how you tend to spend your days?</p><p><br></p><p>Tobie: Sure. So, I've been back into consulting for a number of years at this point. And I essentially focus on helping organizations align their open-source strategy with business goals. So, it can be both at the project level—so sometimes helping specific projects out—or larger strategy at the corporate level.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: So, I actually recently had Nithya Ruff, who's the head of the OSPO at Comcast on the podcast. For listeners who don't know, that's an open-source program office. So, are you sort of an outsourced OSPO for companies that aren't Comcast’s size?</p><p><br></p><p>Tobie: So, that's a really good question. My answer would be no, but it tends to happen that I help companies build that capacity internally. So, I would generally tend to come up before an OSPO is needed, and help them figure out what exactly they need to build. For OSPO, my pet peeve is companies building OSPOs like they need to tick a checkbox on the list of the things that they have to do to be up-to-date with good engineering practices, if you will. </p><p><br></p><p>In general, if you want to be successful, with an OSPO, it has to meet the particular needs of your company, and that's usually kind of hard to figure out if you just leave it to whoever in the organization is more interested in driving that effort. And so essentially, I sort of help in the early stages of that by bringing all of the stakeholders at the table, and essentially listening to them and making sure that what they want out of an OSPO is aligned between the different stakeholders and matches the overall strategy of the company.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: And who are the stakeholders that you're generally talking to?</p><p><br></p><p>Tobie: So, essentially, open-sources is strange, for one reason, in terms of how it was adopted in companies from a historical perspective. Adopters have always been essentially engineers who just wanted better tools, or the package or the software that best fitted their current intention, and there's a very, very grassroots process by which companies start using open-source. And what happened at some point is companies sorted to see all of the software, and got concerned, and started trying to assess the risk. And so companies just tended to bring in the legal arm and lawyers at this point. And so to fulfill compliance questions, you bring in lawyers, and then the responsibility of grown-up open-source kind of falls on to lawyers, which tends to be problematic from the perspective of good engineering practice and velocity that you want from your engineering and product side in a company. </p><p><br></p><p>And so clearly, the two stakeholders or the two main stakeholders tend to be legal and engineering, and there tends to be a tension between these two sides. And in lots of companies this tension, instead of being resolved to some degree, tends to be won by the legal side that understands business concerns better and is better able to praise or explain what they do in terms of business impact and business risks than the engineering side. And so this equilibrium tends to create OSPOs which are legal heavy, process heavy, and don't really give engineers the kind of freedom that they would need to be effective in their daily engineering practice. And the reason behind that being essentially over exaggerated risk perception of open-source because, to be frank, open-source is not well taught in legal school and clearly not part of the curricular that most lawyers are familiar with when they move into helping tech companies out. So, essentially, I sort of tried to bridge these two worlds.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: I can imagine that being an open-source lawyer, that's a niche, that's a very specific niche.</p><p><br></p><p>Tobie: Yeah, actually there's a running joke in that community, which is, “As soon as you get your law degree and you’re an open-source lawyer, you’re one of the 25 best open-source lawyers in the world.”</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: [laughs]. That's awesome. Why do you think engineering teams are so bad at clearly articulating their perspective on open-source, and what can they do to improve?</p><p><br></p><p>Tobie: So, there are clearly multiple reasons why engineers aren't the best at articulating how open-source matters. So, I think one of the key ones, it's just, it's something that's part of their daily practice, and they don't really understand and never have been taught the actual intellectual property—IP—impact, that open-source has on their company, and they don't really understand how others in the company might perceive this IP impact. So, I think, one part of it is, essentially, this is just how engineers work. Like, you want to use a piece of software, you put it in it, right? If you want to fix something, well, you do a pull request. This is sort of, like, a common practice. And it's always hard to articulate things that are essentially part of your, like—you know, like a native language, like part of your culture. It's really hard to describe, why you would do this, and why it matters. So, I think that's one reason.</p><p><br></p><p>The other reason, I think, is that there is a lot of overlap between the way legal works, and the way business works in general. Few examples of that are, engineers tend to think really like in binary way, like, you know, something is true or false, something is on or off, whereas business and law a much more spectrum thinking and into the gray area of things. Similarly, law will share with executive manager’s schedule, versus a maker’s schedule. So, there's lots of cultural artifacts of law culture in corporat...</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 28 Oct 2020 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/a355de66/672cdecf.mp3" length="45356837" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1874</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>An open-source project isn’t something that should be rushed or executed haphazardly. It requires careful planning and strategizing, as well as clear communication between all stakeholders. 

In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, host Emily Omier speaks with Tobie Langel who is founder of UnlockOpen, a boutique consulting firm that specializes in open-source and standardization. Emily and Tobie explore how businesses can best align their open-source strategy with business goals.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>An open-source project isn’t something that should be rushed or executed haphazardly. It requires careful planning and strategizing, as well as clear communication between all stakeholders. 

In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, host Emily O</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Exploring Open-Source and Cloud-Native with Tracy Miranda</title>
      <itunes:episode>22</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>22</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Exploring Open-Source and Cloud-Native with Tracy Miranda</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">d0a100f7-533b-447b-9730-91502cb6e77a</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/4e274add</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>The conversation covers: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Tracy’s thoughts on how the relationship between open-source and cloud-native should be described.</li><li>The advantages and disadvantages to an organization using open-source.</li><li>Some of the major risks associated with using open-source, and why companies should approach with caution.  </li><li>Why CI/CD is a rising security concern for open-source organizations.Tracy also provides her thoughts on how businesses are handling the CI/CD pipeline today, and where the trend is heading.</li><li>Some of the unresolved challenges related to continuous delivery that currently exist.</li><li>Tracy’s advice for companies that are just starting to develop an open-source contribution strategy.</li><li>How companies should approach topics like open-source strategizing and building open-source communities.</li><li>The common mistakes that individuals and companies make when nurturing open-source communities. Tracy also comments on mistakes that people are making with continuous delivery.</li></ul><p>Links</p><ul><li>CloudBees: <a href="https://www.cloudbees.com/">https://www.cloudbees.com/</a></li><li>Continuous Delivery Foundation: <a href="https://cd.foundation/">https://cd.foundation/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/tracymiranda">https://twitter.com/tracymiranda</a> </li></ul><p>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. Today, I'm chatting with Tracy Miranda. Tracy, thank you so much for joining me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Tracy: Hi, Emily. Thanks for having me. It's my pleasure.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: So, as usual, I just want to start off with having you introduce yourself, both what you do, where you work, but also, like, some details, what does this actually mean? How do you actually spend your day?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Tracy: Yeah, so I'm the director of open-source <a href="https://www.cloudbees.com/">CloudBees</a>, and I'm also the board chair at the <a href="https://cd.foundation/">Continuous Delivery Foundation</a>, which is an open-source foundation, which is home to projects like Jenkins, and Spinnaker, and Tecton, and Jenkins X. So, basically, I'm a big fan of all things open-source, which in day-to-day means I'm doing anything which is related to building communities. So, either involved with code, or building communities and through conferences, or sometimes just the boring governance stuff around open-source.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: What is the boring governance stuff around open-source?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Tracy: So, I guess it is just trying to get folks moving in the same direction, and reminding people that it's sometimes more than just code. And whether it's updating a code of conduct, and one of the things we've seen and—okay, I wouldn't call this boring; it's actually taken over a bit in open-source communities, but it's sort of different from the code, but it's the whole terminology updates. We've seen a lot of open-source communities have become more aware about wanting to be better about using terms like ‘master’ and ‘slave’ and move away from that. That being said, it's not that easy, so there's a lot to do in getting people on the same page and ready to move forward even before you can start changing a line of code.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Since the topic of the podcast is cloud-native, obviously, open-source and cloud-native are related. In fact, some people think that cloud-native must be open-source. Where do you fall on that spectrum? How do you think the relationship between open-source and cloud-native should be described?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Tracy: Yeah, I think that they're pretty distinct things. So, cloud-native is all about using the Cloud effectively and having technology which takes advantage of modern architectures to give you things like rapid elasticity, or on-demand self-service. And that's distinct from open-source, which is around the licensing, and it's become more about communities, as well. But I think because Kubernetes has been the most successful cloud-native project that is open-source, I guess there's become this very, very strong association which, in my mind, is a very, very good thing because I think open-source communities are really the way to drive innovation very, very quickly across the industry.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And this may seem sort of obvious, but what are some of the advantages and disadvantages to an organization in using open-source?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Tracy: Yes. So, I think—well, lots—virtually every company uses open-source, and the first thing people can see as the benefits are just the engineering efficiencies. So, using technologies which, say aren’t core to the business, but then building on top of those and taking advantage of the features rather than dedicating their own engineering resources to developing them. I used to work as a consultant, and I would go from company to company, and usually, they would be adopting open-source when they wanted to get away from an in-house project where the people or person who had written it had left the company. So, I think there's a lot to be said, as well, for sustainability of technology: that communities and open-source communities are really good at sustaining projects over the long term, and therefore kind of the best bet for technology that's going to live on beyond individuals or even companies, acquisitions, or whatever.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Do you think there are any risks to using open-source? I'm even interested in hearing if there are risks that are not real, but that are perceived risks. And then even maybe some risks that people don't think about, but that are in fact, quite real.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Tracy: Yes, yeah, no, absolutely there are risks. So, it's wise for companies to approach with caution. I think the risks sort of depend on which side—like, are you looking to just use open-source that someone else has written, or are you contributing something, which might be key to your company, but then you’re saying, “Okay, I'm going to do this in an open way,” which brings us to one of those common perceived myths, that someone, like a cloud provider, is then going to take your open-source software and do a better job of making money around it, so thereby just ruining your entire business model.</p><p><br></p><p><br>And I think the other area where we tend to see a lot of dialogue around, is always around open-source security. For a long time, people used to, sort of, make out that this was different from closed source security, somehow. Security through obscurity meant that closed-source was better than open-source, which is clearly not the case. You can have secure open-source software, not secure open-source software. It just really depends on the project and the practices.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And then also, I thought we'd talk a little bit specifically about this CI/CD work that you do. How important is CI/CD, do you think, in the pursuit of being cloud-native?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Tracy: Yes, no, I think CI/CD h...</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>The conversation covers: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Tracy’s thoughts on how the relationship between open-source and cloud-native should be described.</li><li>The advantages and disadvantages to an organization using open-source.</li><li>Some of the major risks associated with using open-source, and why companies should approach with caution.  </li><li>Why CI/CD is a rising security concern for open-source organizations.Tracy also provides her thoughts on how businesses are handling the CI/CD pipeline today, and where the trend is heading.</li><li>Some of the unresolved challenges related to continuous delivery that currently exist.</li><li>Tracy’s advice for companies that are just starting to develop an open-source contribution strategy.</li><li>How companies should approach topics like open-source strategizing and building open-source communities.</li><li>The common mistakes that individuals and companies make when nurturing open-source communities. Tracy also comments on mistakes that people are making with continuous delivery.</li></ul><p>Links</p><ul><li>CloudBees: <a href="https://www.cloudbees.com/">https://www.cloudbees.com/</a></li><li>Continuous Delivery Foundation: <a href="https://cd.foundation/">https://cd.foundation/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/tracymiranda">https://twitter.com/tracymiranda</a> </li></ul><p>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. Today, I'm chatting with Tracy Miranda. Tracy, thank you so much for joining me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Tracy: Hi, Emily. Thanks for having me. It's my pleasure.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: So, as usual, I just want to start off with having you introduce yourself, both what you do, where you work, but also, like, some details, what does this actually mean? How do you actually spend your day?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Tracy: Yeah, so I'm the director of open-source <a href="https://www.cloudbees.com/">CloudBees</a>, and I'm also the board chair at the <a href="https://cd.foundation/">Continuous Delivery Foundation</a>, which is an open-source foundation, which is home to projects like Jenkins, and Spinnaker, and Tecton, and Jenkins X. So, basically, I'm a big fan of all things open-source, which in day-to-day means I'm doing anything which is related to building communities. So, either involved with code, or building communities and through conferences, or sometimes just the boring governance stuff around open-source.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: What is the boring governance stuff around open-source?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Tracy: So, I guess it is just trying to get folks moving in the same direction, and reminding people that it's sometimes more than just code. And whether it's updating a code of conduct, and one of the things we've seen and—okay, I wouldn't call this boring; it's actually taken over a bit in open-source communities, but it's sort of different from the code, but it's the whole terminology updates. We've seen a lot of open-source communities have become more aware about wanting to be better about using terms like ‘master’ and ‘slave’ and move away from that. That being said, it's not that easy, so there's a lot to do in getting people on the same page and ready to move forward even before you can start changing a line of code.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Since the topic of the podcast is cloud-native, obviously, open-source and cloud-native are related. In fact, some people think that cloud-native must be open-source. Where do you fall on that spectrum? How do you think the relationship between open-source and cloud-native should be described?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Tracy: Yeah, I think that they're pretty distinct things. So, cloud-native is all about using the Cloud effectively and having technology which takes advantage of modern architectures to give you things like rapid elasticity, or on-demand self-service. And that's distinct from open-source, which is around the licensing, and it's become more about communities, as well. But I think because Kubernetes has been the most successful cloud-native project that is open-source, I guess there's become this very, very strong association which, in my mind, is a very, very good thing because I think open-source communities are really the way to drive innovation very, very quickly across the industry.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And this may seem sort of obvious, but what are some of the advantages and disadvantages to an organization in using open-source?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Tracy: Yes. So, I think—well, lots—virtually every company uses open-source, and the first thing people can see as the benefits are just the engineering efficiencies. So, using technologies which, say aren’t core to the business, but then building on top of those and taking advantage of the features rather than dedicating their own engineering resources to developing them. I used to work as a consultant, and I would go from company to company, and usually, they would be adopting open-source when they wanted to get away from an in-house project where the people or person who had written it had left the company. So, I think there's a lot to be said, as well, for sustainability of technology: that communities and open-source communities are really good at sustaining projects over the long term, and therefore kind of the best bet for technology that's going to live on beyond individuals or even companies, acquisitions, or whatever.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Do you think there are any risks to using open-source? I'm even interested in hearing if there are risks that are not real, but that are perceived risks. And then even maybe some risks that people don't think about, but that are in fact, quite real.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Tracy: Yes, yeah, no, absolutely there are risks. So, it's wise for companies to approach with caution. I think the risks sort of depend on which side—like, are you looking to just use open-source that someone else has written, or are you contributing something, which might be key to your company, but then you’re saying, “Okay, I'm going to do this in an open way,” which brings us to one of those common perceived myths, that someone, like a cloud provider, is then going to take your open-source software and do a better job of making money around it, so thereby just ruining your entire business model.</p><p><br></p><p><br>And I think the other area where we tend to see a lot of dialogue around, is always around open-source security. For a long time, people used to, sort of, make out that this was different from closed source security, somehow. Security through obscurity meant that closed-source was better than open-source, which is clearly not the case. You can have secure open-source software, not secure open-source software. It just really depends on the project and the practices.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And then also, I thought we'd talk a little bit specifically about this CI/CD work that you do. How important is CI/CD, do you think, in the pursuit of being cloud-native?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Tracy: Yes, no, I think CI/CD h...</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 21 Oct 2020 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/4e274add/72330518.mp3" length="40194238" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1672</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Tracy Miranda is director of open-source at CloudBees and board chair of the Continuous Delivery Foundation, an open-source foundation that runs projects like Jenkins, Spinnaker, and Tecton, and Jenkins X.

In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, host Emily Omier and Tracy discuss the link between open-source and cloud-native, while exploring key considerations that organizations should make when implementing open-source technologies and communities.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Tracy Miranda is director of open-source at CloudBees and board chair of the Continuous Delivery Foundation, an open-source foundation that runs projects like Jenkins, Spinnaker, and Tecton, and Jenkins X.

In this episode of The Business of Cloud Nativ</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>The Importance of OSPO with Nithya Ruff</title>
      <itunes:episode>21</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>21</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>The Importance of OSPO with Nithya Ruff</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">a0d0f03b-6a98-4de9-96aa-e07bdcd2a76e</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/b5a37ae9</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>The conversation covers: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>The main function of an OSPO, and why Comcast has one.</li><li>How Nithya approaches non-technical stakeholders about open-source. </li><li>Where the OSPO typically sits in the organizational hierarchy.</li><li>The risk of ignoring open-source, or ignoring the way that open-source is consumed in an organization.</li><li>Why every enterprise today is using open-source in some way or another.</li><li>The relationship between cloud-native and open-source.</li><li>Some of the major misconceptions about the role of open-source in major companies. </li><li>Common mistakes that companies make when setting up OSPOs.</li><li>Why Nithya and her team rely heavily on the TODO Group in the Linux Foundation.</li></ul><p><br></p><p>Links:</p><ul><li>Comcast: <a href="https://www.xfinity.com/">https://www.xfinity.com/</a> </li><li>Linux Foundation: <a href="https://www.linuxfoundation.org/">https://www.linuxfoundation.org/</a> </li><li>TODO Group and The New Stack survey: <a href="https://thenewstack.io/survey-open-source-programs-are-a-best-practice-among-large-companies/">https://thenewstack.io/survey-open-source-programs-are-a-best-practice-among-large-companies/</a> </li><li>Trixter GitHub: <a href="https://github.com/tricksterproxy/trickster">https://github.com/tricksterproxy/trickster</a> </li><li>Kuberhealthy GitHub: <a href="https://github.com/Comcast/kuberhealthy">https://github.com/Comcast/kuberhealthy</a> </li><li>Comcast GitHub: <a href="https://comcast.github.io/">https://comcast.github.io/</a></li><li>Nithya Ruff Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/nithyaruff">https://twitter.com/nithyaruff</a> </li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><b>Transcript</b></p><p><br>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>, my name is Emily Omier, and today I'm chatting with Nithya Ruff, and she's joining us from the open source program office at <a href="https://www.xfinity.com/">Comcast</a>. Nethya, thank you so much for joining us.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Nithya: Oh, it's such a pleasure to be here, Emily. Thank you for inviting me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: I want to start with having you introduce yourself, you run an open source program office. And if you could talk a little bit about what that is, and what you do every day.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Nithya: So, just to introduce myself, I started working in open-source back in 1998, when open-source was still kind of new to companies and organizations. And from that point on, I’ve been working to build bridges between companies using open-source and communities where open-source is created. At Comcast, I have the pleasure of running our open source program office for the company, and I also sit on the board of the <a href="https://www.linuxfoundation.org/">Linux Foundation</a> and recently was elected chair. So, it gives me a chance to both look at the community side through the LF and through corporate use of open-source at Comcast.</p><p><br></p><p><br>So, you also ask what does an OSPO do? What is an OSPO, and why does Comcast have one? So, an open source program office is a fairly new construct, and it started about 10, 11 years ago, when companies were doing so much open-source that they really couldn't keep track of all of the different areas of open-source usage, contribution, collaboration across their companies. And they felt that they wanted to have a little more coordination, if you will, across all of their developers in terms of policy for use, the process for contribution, and some guidelines around how to comply with open-source licenses and, on a more strategic note, to educate both executives as well as the company in terms of open-source and opportunities from a business engagement and a strategy perspective. So, you find that a lot of large companies typically have open source program offices. </p><p><br></p><p><br>And we, frankly, have been using open-source for a very long time as a company, almost since the turn of the century, around 2005. And we started contributing and our number of developers started growing, and we didn't realize that we needed a center of excellence, which is what an open source program office is, where people can come to ask for help on legal matters—meaning compliance and license matters—ask for help in engaging with open-source communities, and generally come for all things open-source; be kind of a concierge service for all things open-source.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And how long has Comcast had an OSPO?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Nithya: I came on board in 2017 to start the OSPO, but as I mentioned before, we’ve done open-source organically throughout the company for many, many more years before I came on board. My coming on board just, kind of, formalized, if you will, the face of open-source work for the company to the outside world.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: You know, when we think about open-source in the enterprise, what sort of business opportunities and risks do you have to balance?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Nithya: That's a great question. There are lots and lots of great business value and opportunity that companies get from open-source. And the more engaged you are with open-source, the more business value you'll get. So, if you're just consuming open-source, then clearly it reduces the cost of your development, it helps you get to market faster, you're using tried and tested projects that other companies have used and hundreds of developers around the world have used. So, you get a chance to really cut cost and go to market faster. </p><p><br></p><p><br>But as you become more sophisticated in collaborating with other companies and contributing open-source back, you start realizing the benefit of, say leveraging a lot of other developers in maintaining code that you've contributed. You may start off at contributing a project, and you are often the only one bearing the burden of that project, and very soon, as it becomes useful to more and more people, you're sharing the burden with others, and you benefit from hundreds of new use cases coming into the code, hundreds of new features and functions coming in which you could never have thought of as a small team yourself. I believe that the quality of code improves when you're going to open-source something, it helps with recruitment and thought leadership because now candidates can actually see the kind of work that you do and the quality of work that you produce, and before that, they would just know that you were in this space, or telecom, or other areas, but they could not see the type of work that you did. And so, to me, from a business value, there's a tremendous amount of business value that companies get. </p><p><br></p><p><br>On the risk side is the fact that you need to use it correctly, meaning you need to understand the license; you need to understand how you're combining your code with the proprietary code in your company; you need to understand if the code is coming from a good community, meaning a healthy community that is here to stay, and that has a good cadence of releases and is vibrant ...</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>The conversation covers: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>The main function of an OSPO, and why Comcast has one.</li><li>How Nithya approaches non-technical stakeholders about open-source. </li><li>Where the OSPO typically sits in the organizational hierarchy.</li><li>The risk of ignoring open-source, or ignoring the way that open-source is consumed in an organization.</li><li>Why every enterprise today is using open-source in some way or another.</li><li>The relationship between cloud-native and open-source.</li><li>Some of the major misconceptions about the role of open-source in major companies. </li><li>Common mistakes that companies make when setting up OSPOs.</li><li>Why Nithya and her team rely heavily on the TODO Group in the Linux Foundation.</li></ul><p><br></p><p>Links:</p><ul><li>Comcast: <a href="https://www.xfinity.com/">https://www.xfinity.com/</a> </li><li>Linux Foundation: <a href="https://www.linuxfoundation.org/">https://www.linuxfoundation.org/</a> </li><li>TODO Group and The New Stack survey: <a href="https://thenewstack.io/survey-open-source-programs-are-a-best-practice-among-large-companies/">https://thenewstack.io/survey-open-source-programs-are-a-best-practice-among-large-companies/</a> </li><li>Trixter GitHub: <a href="https://github.com/tricksterproxy/trickster">https://github.com/tricksterproxy/trickster</a> </li><li>Kuberhealthy GitHub: <a href="https://github.com/Comcast/kuberhealthy">https://github.com/Comcast/kuberhealthy</a> </li><li>Comcast GitHub: <a href="https://comcast.github.io/">https://comcast.github.io/</a></li><li>Nithya Ruff Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/nithyaruff">https://twitter.com/nithyaruff</a> </li></ul><p><br></p><p><br></p><p><b>Transcript</b></p><p><br>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>, my name is Emily Omier, and today I'm chatting with Nithya Ruff, and she's joining us from the open source program office at <a href="https://www.xfinity.com/">Comcast</a>. Nethya, thank you so much for joining us.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Nithya: Oh, it's such a pleasure to be here, Emily. Thank you for inviting me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: I want to start with having you introduce yourself, you run an open source program office. And if you could talk a little bit about what that is, and what you do every day.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Nithya: So, just to introduce myself, I started working in open-source back in 1998, when open-source was still kind of new to companies and organizations. And from that point on, I’ve been working to build bridges between companies using open-source and communities where open-source is created. At Comcast, I have the pleasure of running our open source program office for the company, and I also sit on the board of the <a href="https://www.linuxfoundation.org/">Linux Foundation</a> and recently was elected chair. So, it gives me a chance to both look at the community side through the LF and through corporate use of open-source at Comcast.</p><p><br></p><p><br>So, you also ask what does an OSPO do? What is an OSPO, and why does Comcast have one? So, an open source program office is a fairly new construct, and it started about 10, 11 years ago, when companies were doing so much open-source that they really couldn't keep track of all of the different areas of open-source usage, contribution, collaboration across their companies. And they felt that they wanted to have a little more coordination, if you will, across all of their developers in terms of policy for use, the process for contribution, and some guidelines around how to comply with open-source licenses and, on a more strategic note, to educate both executives as well as the company in terms of open-source and opportunities from a business engagement and a strategy perspective. So, you find that a lot of large companies typically have open source program offices. </p><p><br></p><p><br>And we, frankly, have been using open-source for a very long time as a company, almost since the turn of the century, around 2005. And we started contributing and our number of developers started growing, and we didn't realize that we needed a center of excellence, which is what an open source program office is, where people can come to ask for help on legal matters—meaning compliance and license matters—ask for help in engaging with open-source communities, and generally come for all things open-source; be kind of a concierge service for all things open-source.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And how long has Comcast had an OSPO?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Nithya: I came on board in 2017 to start the OSPO, but as I mentioned before, we’ve done open-source organically throughout the company for many, many more years before I came on board. My coming on board just, kind of, formalized, if you will, the face of open-source work for the company to the outside world.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: You know, when we think about open-source in the enterprise, what sort of business opportunities and risks do you have to balance?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Nithya: That's a great question. There are lots and lots of great business value and opportunity that companies get from open-source. And the more engaged you are with open-source, the more business value you'll get. So, if you're just consuming open-source, then clearly it reduces the cost of your development, it helps you get to market faster, you're using tried and tested projects that other companies have used and hundreds of developers around the world have used. So, you get a chance to really cut cost and go to market faster. </p><p><br></p><p><br>But as you become more sophisticated in collaborating with other companies and contributing open-source back, you start realizing the benefit of, say leveraging a lot of other developers in maintaining code that you've contributed. You may start off at contributing a project, and you are often the only one bearing the burden of that project, and very soon, as it becomes useful to more and more people, you're sharing the burden with others, and you benefit from hundreds of new use cases coming into the code, hundreds of new features and functions coming in which you could never have thought of as a small team yourself. I believe that the quality of code improves when you're going to open-source something, it helps with recruitment and thought leadership because now candidates can actually see the kind of work that you do and the quality of work that you produce, and before that, they would just know that you were in this space, or telecom, or other areas, but they could not see the type of work that you did. And so, to me, from a business value, there's a tremendous amount of business value that companies get. </p><p><br></p><p><br>On the risk side is the fact that you need to use it correctly, meaning you need to understand the license; you need to understand how you're combining your code with the proprietary code in your company; you need to understand if the code is coming from a good community, meaning a healthy community that is here to stay, and that has a good cadence of releases and is vibrant ...</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 14 Oct 2020 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/b5a37ae9/280c16b3.mp3" length="51581894" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2147</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Nithya Ruff has been working in open-source since 1998, when the trend was still new for companies. Today, she is now Executive Director of Comcast’s Open Source Program Office (OSPO), where she is running their open source program. In addition, Nithya is the elected chairwoman of the board for the Linux Foundation.

In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, host Emily Omier and Nithya take a deep dive into the role of OSPOs, and explore why many large companies are choosing them to implement them.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Nithya Ruff has been working in open-source since 1998, when the trend was still new for companies. Today, she is now Executive Director of Comcast’s Open Source Program Office (OSPO), where she is running their open source program. In addition, Nithya is</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Disrupting the Cloud Storage Market with Ben Golub</title>
      <itunes:episode>20</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>20</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Disrupting the Cloud Storage Market with Ben Golub</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">90b85c9e-7c49-48b5-9361-89f6811b8d9d</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/6c4a01bc</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>This conversation covers:</p><ul><li>The advantages of using a distributed data storage model.</li><li>How Storj is creating new revenue models for open-source projects, and how the open-source community is responding.</li><li>The business and engineering reasons why users decide to opt for cloud-native, according to Ben.</li><li>Viewing cloud-native as a journey, instead of a destination — and some of the top mistakes that people tend to make on the journey. Ben also talks about the top pitfalls people make with storage and management.</li><li>Why businesses are often caught off guard with high storage costs, and how Storj is working to make it easier for customers. </li><li>Avoiding vendor lock-in with storage.</li><li>Advice for people who are just getting started on their cloud journey.</li><li>The person who should be responsible for making a cloud journey successful.</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>Storj Labs: <a href="https://storj.io/">https://storj.io/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/golubbe">https://twitter.com/golubbe</a></li><li>GitHub: <a href="https://github.com/golubbe">https://github.com/golubbe</a></li></ul><p><br></p><p><b>Transcript</b></p><p><br>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>, my name is Emily Omier. I'm your host, and today I'm chatting with Ben Golub. Ben, thank you so much for joining us.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ben: Oh, Thank you for having me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And I always like to just start off with having you introduce yourself. So, not only where you work and what your job title is, but what you actually spend your day doing.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ben: [laughs]. Okay. I'm Ben Golub. I'm currently the executive chair and CEO of <a href="https://storj.io/">Storj Labs</a>, which is a decentralized storage service. We kind of like to think of it as the Airbnb of disk drives, But probably most of the people on your podcast who, if they're familiar with the, sort of, cloud-native space would have known me as the former CEO of Docker from when it was released up until a few years ago. But yeah, I tend to spend my days doing a lot of stuff, in addition to family and dealing with COVID, running startups. This is now my seventh startup, fourth is a CEO.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Tell me a little bit, like, you know, when you stumble into your home office—just kidding—nobody is going to the office, I know. But when you start your day, what sort of tasks are on your todo list? So, what do you actually spend your time doing?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ben: Sure. We've got a great team of people who are running a decentralized storage company. But of course, we are decentralized in more ways than one. We are 45 people spread across 15 different countries, trying to build a network that provides enterprise-grade storage on disk drives that we don't own, that are spread across 85 different countries. So, there's a lot of coordination, a lot of making sure that everybody has the context to do the right thing, and that we stay focused on doing the right thing for our users, doing the right thing for our suppliers, doing the right thing for each other, as well.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: One of the reasons I thought it’d be really interesting to talk with you is that I know your goal is to, sort of, revolutionize some of the business models related to managing storage. Can you talk about that a little bit more?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ben: Sure. Sure. I mean, obviously, there's been a big trend over the past several years towards the Cloud in general, and a big part of the [laughs] Cloud is storage. Actually, AWS started with S3, and it's a $90 billion market that's growing. The world's going to create enough data this year to fill a stack of CD-ROMs, to the orbit of Mars and back. And yet prices haven't come down, really, in about five years, and the whole market is controlled by essentially three players, Microsoft, Google, in the largest, Amazon, who also happen to be three of the five largest companies on the planet. </p><p><br></p><p><br>And we think that data is so critical to everything that we do that we want to make sure that it doesn't stay centralized in the hands of a few, but that we, sort of, create a more, sort of, democratic—if you will—way of handling data that also addresses some of the serious privacy, data mining, and security concerns that happen when all the data is held by only a few people.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: With this, I'm sure you've heard about digital vegans. So, people who try to avoid all of the big tech giants—</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ben: Right, right.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Does this make it possible to do that?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ben: Well, so we're more of a back end. So, we're a service that people who produce-consumer-facing services use. But absolutely, if somebody—and we actually have people who want to create a more secure way of providing data backup, more secure way of enabling data communications, video sharing, all these sorts of things, and they can use us and service those [laughs] digital vegans, if you will.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: So, if I'm creating a SaaS product for digital vegans, I would go with you?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ben: I would hope you’d consider us, yeah. And by the way, I mean, also people who have mainstream applications use us as well. I mean, so we have people who are working with us who may have sensitive medical data on people, or people who are doing advanced research into areas like COVID, and they're using us partially because we're more secure and more private, but also because we are less likely to be hacked. And also because frankly faster, cheaper, more resilient.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: I was just going to ask, what are the advantages of distributed storage?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ben: Yeah. We benefit from all the same things that the move towards cloud-native in general benefits from, right? When you take workloads, and you take data, and you spread them across large numbers of devices that are operated independently, you get more resilience, you get more security, you can get better performance because things are closer to the edge. And all of these are benefits that are, sort of, inherent to doing things in a decentralized way as opposed to a centralized way. And then, quite frankly we’re cheaper. I mean, because of the economics and doing this this way, we can price anywhere from a half to a third of what the large cloud providers offer, and do so profitably for ourselves.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: You also offer some new revenue models for open-source projects. Can you talk about that a little bit more?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ben: Sure, I mean, obviously I come from an open-source background, and one of the big stories of open-source for the past several years is the challenges for open-source companies in monetizing, and in particular, in a cloud world, a large number of open-source companies are now facing the situation where their produc...</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>This conversation covers:</p><ul><li>The advantages of using a distributed data storage model.</li><li>How Storj is creating new revenue models for open-source projects, and how the open-source community is responding.</li><li>The business and engineering reasons why users decide to opt for cloud-native, according to Ben.</li><li>Viewing cloud-native as a journey, instead of a destination — and some of the top mistakes that people tend to make on the journey. Ben also talks about the top pitfalls people make with storage and management.</li><li>Why businesses are often caught off guard with high storage costs, and how Storj is working to make it easier for customers. </li><li>Avoiding vendor lock-in with storage.</li><li>Advice for people who are just getting started on their cloud journey.</li><li>The person who should be responsible for making a cloud journey successful.</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>Storj Labs: <a href="https://storj.io/">https://storj.io/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/golubbe">https://twitter.com/golubbe</a></li><li>GitHub: <a href="https://github.com/golubbe">https://github.com/golubbe</a></li></ul><p><br></p><p><b>Transcript</b></p><p><br>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>, my name is Emily Omier. I'm your host, and today I'm chatting with Ben Golub. Ben, thank you so much for joining us.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ben: Oh, Thank you for having me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And I always like to just start off with having you introduce yourself. So, not only where you work and what your job title is, but what you actually spend your day doing.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ben: [laughs]. Okay. I'm Ben Golub. I'm currently the executive chair and CEO of <a href="https://storj.io/">Storj Labs</a>, which is a decentralized storage service. We kind of like to think of it as the Airbnb of disk drives, But probably most of the people on your podcast who, if they're familiar with the, sort of, cloud-native space would have known me as the former CEO of Docker from when it was released up until a few years ago. But yeah, I tend to spend my days doing a lot of stuff, in addition to family and dealing with COVID, running startups. This is now my seventh startup, fourth is a CEO.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Tell me a little bit, like, you know, when you stumble into your home office—just kidding—nobody is going to the office, I know. But when you start your day, what sort of tasks are on your todo list? So, what do you actually spend your time doing?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ben: Sure. We've got a great team of people who are running a decentralized storage company. But of course, we are decentralized in more ways than one. We are 45 people spread across 15 different countries, trying to build a network that provides enterprise-grade storage on disk drives that we don't own, that are spread across 85 different countries. So, there's a lot of coordination, a lot of making sure that everybody has the context to do the right thing, and that we stay focused on doing the right thing for our users, doing the right thing for our suppliers, doing the right thing for each other, as well.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: One of the reasons I thought it’d be really interesting to talk with you is that I know your goal is to, sort of, revolutionize some of the business models related to managing storage. Can you talk about that a little bit more?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ben: Sure. Sure. I mean, obviously, there's been a big trend over the past several years towards the Cloud in general, and a big part of the [laughs] Cloud is storage. Actually, AWS started with S3, and it's a $90 billion market that's growing. The world's going to create enough data this year to fill a stack of CD-ROMs, to the orbit of Mars and back. And yet prices haven't come down, really, in about five years, and the whole market is controlled by essentially three players, Microsoft, Google, in the largest, Amazon, who also happen to be three of the five largest companies on the planet. </p><p><br></p><p><br>And we think that data is so critical to everything that we do that we want to make sure that it doesn't stay centralized in the hands of a few, but that we, sort of, create a more, sort of, democratic—if you will—way of handling data that also addresses some of the serious privacy, data mining, and security concerns that happen when all the data is held by only a few people.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: With this, I'm sure you've heard about digital vegans. So, people who try to avoid all of the big tech giants—</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ben: Right, right.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Does this make it possible to do that?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ben: Well, so we're more of a back end. So, we're a service that people who produce-consumer-facing services use. But absolutely, if somebody—and we actually have people who want to create a more secure way of providing data backup, more secure way of enabling data communications, video sharing, all these sorts of things, and they can use us and service those [laughs] digital vegans, if you will.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: So, if I'm creating a SaaS product for digital vegans, I would go with you?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ben: I would hope you’d consider us, yeah. And by the way, I mean, also people who have mainstream applications use us as well. I mean, so we have people who are working with us who may have sensitive medical data on people, or people who are doing advanced research into areas like COVID, and they're using us partially because we're more secure and more private, but also because we are less likely to be hacked. And also because frankly faster, cheaper, more resilient.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: I was just going to ask, what are the advantages of distributed storage?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ben: Yeah. We benefit from all the same things that the move towards cloud-native in general benefits from, right? When you take workloads, and you take data, and you spread them across large numbers of devices that are operated independently, you get more resilience, you get more security, you can get better performance because things are closer to the edge. And all of these are benefits that are, sort of, inherent to doing things in a decentralized way as opposed to a centralized way. And then, quite frankly we’re cheaper. I mean, because of the economics and doing this this way, we can price anywhere from a half to a third of what the large cloud providers offer, and do so profitably for ourselves.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: You also offer some new revenue models for open-source projects. Can you talk about that a little bit more?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ben: Sure, I mean, obviously I come from an open-source background, and one of the big stories of open-source for the past several years is the challenges for open-source companies in monetizing, and in particular, in a cloud world, a large number of open-source companies are now facing the situation where their produc...</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 07 Oct 2020 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/6c4a01bc/b2fcb8f4.mp3" length="35857916" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1492</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Right now the cloud storage market is dominated by three major providers including Microsoft, Amazon and Google. Enter Storj Labs, a company that’s disrupting the market with their decentralized approach. 

In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, host Emily Omier speaks with Stor Executive Chair and CEO Ben Golub to learn more about the company and how they’re changing the cloud storage landscape and creating more opportunities for customers.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Right now the cloud storage market is dominated by three major providers including Microsoft, Amazon and Google. Enter Storj Labs, a company that’s disrupting the market with their decentralized approach. 

In this episode of The Business of Cloud Nativ</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Securing the Cloud with Josh Stella</title>
      <itunes:episode>19</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>19</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Securing the Cloud with Josh Stella</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">cc9dd586-4df9-4c7f-a64c-af075ad5db6c</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/a35ebbb5</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>The conversation covers: </p><ul><li>Josh’s role as CTO of Fugue, a leading cloud security and compliance provider for engineers. </li><li>The difference between cloud security and data center security — and why old school approaches to security don’t work in the cloud. </li><li>How engineers and security specialists can best communicate with business leaders about how to approach security, and how Fugue can help. </li><li>Who should be the person in charge of setting up Fugue, running reports, and communicating results across an oragnization.</li><li>The people who tend to lose their job when a cloud security breach occurs. </li><li>Why cloud security requires organizational change, and how companies are adapting to prevent issues. </li><li>The importance of upskilling employees and making sure they have the appropriate knowledge to solve cloud challenges. </li><li>Why the cloud has the possibility to be more secure than a data center. Josh also talks about cloud perception, and why some are still viewing the cloud as scarier than the data center. </li><li>What Joshn considers to be the most effective hacking strategies for cybercriminals. </li><li>The relationship between security and compliance, and how organizations should approach that relationship. </li><li>Why there is no such thing as a perfect security posture. </li></ul><p><strong>Links</strong></p><ul><li>Fugue: <a href="https://www.fugue.co/">https://www.fugue.co/</a> </li><li>Customer write-up on G2: <a href="https://www.g2.com/products/fugue/reviews/fugue-review-4269523">https://www.g2.com/products/fugue/reviews/fugue-review-4269523</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/joshstella">https://twitter.com/joshstella</a></li><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/josh-stella-949a9711/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/josh-stella-949a9711/</a></li><li>Fugue Blog: <a href="https://www.fugue.co/blog">https://www.fugue.co/blog</a></li><li>Fugue Masterclass: <a href="https://resources.fugue.co/cloud-security-masterclass-registration">https://resources.fugue.co/cloud-security-masterclass-registration</a></li><li>Fugue Office Hours: <a href="https://resources.fugue.co/cloud-infrastructure-security-office-hours">https://resources.fugue.co/cloud-infrastructure-security-office-hours</a></li></ul><p><b>Transcript</b></p><p>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. I'm Emily Omier, your host, and today I'm chatting with Josh Stella. Josh, thanks so much for joining us.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Josh: Well, Emily, thanks so much for having me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Of course. I always like to start the same. Can you just introduce yourself and your company, and tell me a little bit about what the company does, and then also what you do?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Josh: Sure. So, <a href="https://www.fugue.co/">Fugue</a> does cloud security for public cloud providers like AWS, and Azure, and Google. Prior to founding Fugue, I worked at AWS as a principal solutions architect primarily focused on national security; Department of Defense, and similar things. My background is I'm a programmer and I'm a software architect, and I've kind of lived between national security kinds of work and high tech in startups. And so what Fugue does is we’ll tell you all about the security posture of your cloud environments, and teach you where you have weaknesses that hackers can exploit; we help you close those, and then we can actually keep things from having those misconfigurations going forward. So, that's a little bit about us. If you're a developer, you can use our forever free developer version, and we work with a lot of enterprises folks like SAP, and big organizations, too.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: So, were you involved with setting up the super-secret CIA cloud that AWS was involved in?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Josh: I was not personally. A very close colleague of mine was actually working very closely on that, but no, I was not directly involved in that.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Okay, you probably couldn't talk about it, even if you were so. [laughs].</p><p><br></p><p><br>Josh: No comment.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Anyway, I always like to ask also, what do you actually do? Like, you get up in the morning, presumably, you don't go to an office anymore, but—</p><p><br></p><p><br>Josh: Oh, true. True, yeah. Whether going to an office or not, my days are… so I started out founding the company with my co-founder, Andrew Wright. And for a while, I was the CEO when we were in the kind of R&amp;D phase, but then I always intended to hire a really great CEO, which we did a couple of years ago, Phillip Merrick, and I became the CTO. And there are different kinds of CTO. </p><p><br></p><p><br>My main functions are, like, I get up in the morning, I go read the news about any breaches in Cloud that have happened, and then I try to recreate them whenever possible, if there's enough information, because the attack vectors on Cloud are completely different than in the data center, and are inobvious to folks. So, when you read about a breach, and you see that they use the identity and access management service almost like a network, to get to S3, that's really interesting and it's really important so that Fugue can protect our customers. So, I spent a fair amount of time doing that. I do work every day with the product team. Occasionally, I will weigh in fairly strongly on an engineering topic, but a lot of times our engineers are just very, very good and we've hired experts and all their areas so I work with them, but it's usually just to give advice and some guidance. </p><p><br></p><p><br>And I do a fair amount of writing, and I do a fair amount of teaching classes online: we have a masterclass series on Cloud security that has been very well received. And then the research I do into how cloud exploits are actually being done by recreating those in my own environments, I use those both in the classes and of course, Fugue as our product can then have protections built-in against them. So, I’d say that's a lot of what I do.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: I wanted to ask a little bit more about this difference between cloud security and data center security. Can you go into that a little bit more? And then also, what do people miss in that difference?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Josh: Okay, so I'm going to start at the prosaic and kind of go to the sublime a little bit, but the most simple way to think about the difference is in the data center days, you really had a network perimeter. So, you've got a big pile of servers, they're racked and there are switches that that connect them together, and then there's this layer of security at the, kind of, perimeters of the network where the data center network connects to, whether it's the corporate network, or another data center, or the internet. And that kind of perimeter defense slash defense in-depth idea meant when you were talking about data center security, the primary things you were thinking about were, “What's happening on my netwo...</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>The conversation covers: </p><ul><li>Josh’s role as CTO of Fugue, a leading cloud security and compliance provider for engineers. </li><li>The difference between cloud security and data center security — and why old school approaches to security don’t work in the cloud. </li><li>How engineers and security specialists can best communicate with business leaders about how to approach security, and how Fugue can help. </li><li>Who should be the person in charge of setting up Fugue, running reports, and communicating results across an oragnization.</li><li>The people who tend to lose their job when a cloud security breach occurs. </li><li>Why cloud security requires organizational change, and how companies are adapting to prevent issues. </li><li>The importance of upskilling employees and making sure they have the appropriate knowledge to solve cloud challenges. </li><li>Why the cloud has the possibility to be more secure than a data center. Josh also talks about cloud perception, and why some are still viewing the cloud as scarier than the data center. </li><li>What Joshn considers to be the most effective hacking strategies for cybercriminals. </li><li>The relationship between security and compliance, and how organizations should approach that relationship. </li><li>Why there is no such thing as a perfect security posture. </li></ul><p><strong>Links</strong></p><ul><li>Fugue: <a href="https://www.fugue.co/">https://www.fugue.co/</a> </li><li>Customer write-up on G2: <a href="https://www.g2.com/products/fugue/reviews/fugue-review-4269523">https://www.g2.com/products/fugue/reviews/fugue-review-4269523</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/joshstella">https://twitter.com/joshstella</a></li><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/josh-stella-949a9711/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/josh-stella-949a9711/</a></li><li>Fugue Blog: <a href="https://www.fugue.co/blog">https://www.fugue.co/blog</a></li><li>Fugue Masterclass: <a href="https://resources.fugue.co/cloud-security-masterclass-registration">https://resources.fugue.co/cloud-security-masterclass-registration</a></li><li>Fugue Office Hours: <a href="https://resources.fugue.co/cloud-infrastructure-security-office-hours">https://resources.fugue.co/cloud-infrastructure-security-office-hours</a></li></ul><p><b>Transcript</b></p><p>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. I'm Emily Omier, your host, and today I'm chatting with Josh Stella. Josh, thanks so much for joining us.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Josh: Well, Emily, thanks so much for having me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Of course. I always like to start the same. Can you just introduce yourself and your company, and tell me a little bit about what the company does, and then also what you do?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Josh: Sure. So, <a href="https://www.fugue.co/">Fugue</a> does cloud security for public cloud providers like AWS, and Azure, and Google. Prior to founding Fugue, I worked at AWS as a principal solutions architect primarily focused on national security; Department of Defense, and similar things. My background is I'm a programmer and I'm a software architect, and I've kind of lived between national security kinds of work and high tech in startups. And so what Fugue does is we’ll tell you all about the security posture of your cloud environments, and teach you where you have weaknesses that hackers can exploit; we help you close those, and then we can actually keep things from having those misconfigurations going forward. So, that's a little bit about us. If you're a developer, you can use our forever free developer version, and we work with a lot of enterprises folks like SAP, and big organizations, too.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: So, were you involved with setting up the super-secret CIA cloud that AWS was involved in?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Josh: I was not personally. A very close colleague of mine was actually working very closely on that, but no, I was not directly involved in that.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Okay, you probably couldn't talk about it, even if you were so. [laughs].</p><p><br></p><p><br>Josh: No comment.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Anyway, I always like to ask also, what do you actually do? Like, you get up in the morning, presumably, you don't go to an office anymore, but—</p><p><br></p><p><br>Josh: Oh, true. True, yeah. Whether going to an office or not, my days are… so I started out founding the company with my co-founder, Andrew Wright. And for a while, I was the CEO when we were in the kind of R&amp;D phase, but then I always intended to hire a really great CEO, which we did a couple of years ago, Phillip Merrick, and I became the CTO. And there are different kinds of CTO. </p><p><br></p><p><br>My main functions are, like, I get up in the morning, I go read the news about any breaches in Cloud that have happened, and then I try to recreate them whenever possible, if there's enough information, because the attack vectors on Cloud are completely different than in the data center, and are inobvious to folks. So, when you read about a breach, and you see that they use the identity and access management service almost like a network, to get to S3, that's really interesting and it's really important so that Fugue can protect our customers. So, I spent a fair amount of time doing that. I do work every day with the product team. Occasionally, I will weigh in fairly strongly on an engineering topic, but a lot of times our engineers are just very, very good and we've hired experts and all their areas so I work with them, but it's usually just to give advice and some guidance. </p><p><br></p><p><br>And I do a fair amount of writing, and I do a fair amount of teaching classes online: we have a masterclass series on Cloud security that has been very well received. And then the research I do into how cloud exploits are actually being done by recreating those in my own environments, I use those both in the classes and of course, Fugue as our product can then have protections built-in against them. So, I’d say that's a lot of what I do.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: I wanted to ask a little bit more about this difference between cloud security and data center security. Can you go into that a little bit more? And then also, what do people miss in that difference?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Josh: Okay, so I'm going to start at the prosaic and kind of go to the sublime a little bit, but the most simple way to think about the difference is in the data center days, you really had a network perimeter. So, you've got a big pile of servers, they're racked and there are switches that that connect them together, and then there's this layer of security at the, kind of, perimeters of the network where the data center network connects to, whether it's the corporate network, or another data center, or the internet. And that kind of perimeter defense slash defense in-depth idea meant when you were talking about data center security, the primary things you were thinking about were, “What's happening on my netwo...</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 30 Sep 2020 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/a35ebbb5/32087ef7.mp3" length="56607378" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2356</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Businesses are moving to the cloud at breakneck speed. In fact, in a recent study 82 percent of global IT leaders said they had ramped up their use of the cloud in direct response to the pandemic. 

Unfortunately, general knowledge about cloud security is lagging behind. Many people are deploying outdated and ineffective security strategies for their cloud environments, which is creating many problems. In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, host Emily Omier talks with Josh Stella who is founder and chief technology officer of Fugue, a leading cloud security and compliance provider for engineers. Stella talks about securing the public cloud and making a business case for security. He also provides tips for driving change and enhancing security understanding across an organization. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Businesses are moving to the cloud at breakneck speed. In fact, in a recent study 82 percent of global IT leaders said they had ramped up their use of the cloud in direct response to the pandemic. 

Unfortunately, general knowledge about cloud security </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Cloud-Native Considerations for SMBs with Apurva Joshi</title>
      <itunes:episode>18</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>18</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Cloud-Native Considerations for SMBs with Apurva Joshi</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">1ac960c8-f4ad-4787-84e9-3d145cf0d5ed</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/c33bfd2d</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>The conversation covers: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>The difference between cloud computing and cloud-native, according to AJ</li><li>Whether it’s possible to have a cloud-native application that runs on-premise </li><li>The types of conversations that AJ has with customers, as VP of product. AJ also talks about the different types of customers that DigitalOcean serves.</li><li>How the needs of smaller teams tend to differ from the needs of enterprise users — and the challenges that smaller teams face when learning and implementing cloud-native applications.  </li><li>Making decisions when using Kubernetes, and how it can be overwhelming due to the sheer number of choices that you can make. </li><li>Some of the main motivations that are driving smaller companies to Kubernetes. AJ also explains what he thinks is the best rationale for using Kubernetes.</li><li>Popular misconceptions about cloud-native and Kubernetes that AJ is seeing.</li><li>Why customers often struggle to make technology decisions to support their business goals. </li><li>AJ’s advice for businesses when making technology decisions.</li><li>Why startups are encouraged to start by using open source — and why open source wins in the end when compared to proprietary solutions.</li></ul><p><br></p><p><br><strong>Links</strong></p><ul><li>DigitalOcean: <a href="https://www.digitalocean.com/">https://www.digitalocean.com/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/apurvajo">https://twitter.com/apurvajo</a> </li><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/apurvajo/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/apurvajo/</a> </li></ul><p><br></p><p><b>Transcript</b></p><p><br>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. I'm Emily Omier, your host, and today I'm chatting with AJ. AJ, can you go ahead and introduce yourself?</p><p><br></p><p><br>AJ: Hey, I'm AJ. I’m vice president of product for <a href="https://www.digitalocean.com/">DigitalOcean</a>. I've been with the company for about 15 months. Before that, I spent about a couple of decades with Microsoft. I was fortunate to work on Azure for the last decade, and I had the opportunity to build some cloud services with the company.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And thank you so much for joining us.</p><p><br></p><p><br>AJ: Thank you, thank you for having me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: I always like to start out by asking, what do you actually do? What does a day look like?</p><p><br></p><p><br>AJ: [laughs]. It’s an interesting question. So, yes, the day is usually all over the place depending on the priorities and things that are in motion for a given quarter or a week, per se. But usually, my days involve working with the team around the strategic initiatives that have been planned, driving clarity around different projects that I [unintelligible]. Mainly working with leadership on defining some of the roadmap for the product as well as the company. And yeah, and talking to lots of customers. That's something that I really, really enjoy. And every other day I have a meeting or two talking to our customers, learning from them, how they use our products and how can we get better.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: I'm going to ask more about those conversations with customers because that's what I find really interesting. But first, actually, I wanted to start with another question. What do you see as the difference between cloud computing and cloud-native?</p><p><br></p><p><br>AJ: The difference essentially, in a way, the cloud computing is a much bigger umbrella around how we as a technology industry are enabling other businesses to bring their workload to a more scalable, more efficient, more secure environment versus trying to host, optimize, or do things by themselves. And the cloud-native, in a way, it's a subset of a cloud computing where not necessarily you always have to have existing workloads or something that is prior technology that has been already built and you're looking for a place to host. In a way, when you're building something out, new, greenfield apps and whatnot, you're starting from scratch, you're building your applications and solutions that are cloud-native by definition. They're built for Cloud; they're born in Cloud, and are optimizing the latest and the greatest innovations that are present and as future-looking to help you scale and succeed your business, in a way.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Do you think it's possible to have a cloud-native application that runs on-premise?</p><p><br></p><p><br>AJ: There's a lot of [laughs] innovations happening in pockets, and especially from the top providers to enable those scenarios. But at the end of the day, those investments are essentially driven to help people and companies, especially on the larger scale, to buy some time to completely move to the public cloud where the industry takes their time to come up with the compliance, security requirements and [unintelligible]. So, you'll start to see—you might have heard about some of the investments these top cloud providers are doing about allowing and bringing those similar stack and technologies that they are building in a public cloud to on-premise or running on their own data center, in a way. So, it is possible, in bits and pockets to start with a cloud-native to run, on-premise, but that customer segment and the target is very, very different than the ones that start in a public cloud first.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: I want to switch to talking about some of the conversations that you have with customers. I really like to understand what end users are thinking. What would you say when you talk to customers? What's the thing that they're most excited about?</p><p><br></p><p><br>AJ: Right. So, it depends on what segment of customers you're speaking with, right? DigitalOcean serves a very different set of customers than a typical large cloud providers do. We're focused more on individual developers, small startups, or SMBs. Again, when I say SMBs, it's a broad term, when I say SMBs the S with [unintelligible]. </p><p><br></p><p><br>So, we focus mainly on two to ten devs team, and smaller companies and whatnot. So, their requirements are very different; their needs are very unique compared to what I used to talk, back in my past life, with enterprise customers. Their requirements are very unique and different as well. So, what I hear from the customers that I speak with recently, and have been speaking with for last over a year, is how can I make my business that is [unintelligible] on a cloud? And what I mean by that is how do I build solutions that are simple, easy to understand, and where I'm focused on building software and not really worrying about the complexity of the infrastructure, at the same time, keep the price in control and very simple and predictable. </p><p><br></p><p><br>And that resonates really, really well. The tons and tons of customers that I spoke with recently, they moved from large cloud providers to our platform because their business was not viable on those cloud providers. And what I mean by that...</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>The conversation covers: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>The difference between cloud computing and cloud-native, according to AJ</li><li>Whether it’s possible to have a cloud-native application that runs on-premise </li><li>The types of conversations that AJ has with customers, as VP of product. AJ also talks about the different types of customers that DigitalOcean serves.</li><li>How the needs of smaller teams tend to differ from the needs of enterprise users — and the challenges that smaller teams face when learning and implementing cloud-native applications.  </li><li>Making decisions when using Kubernetes, and how it can be overwhelming due to the sheer number of choices that you can make. </li><li>Some of the main motivations that are driving smaller companies to Kubernetes. AJ also explains what he thinks is the best rationale for using Kubernetes.</li><li>Popular misconceptions about cloud-native and Kubernetes that AJ is seeing.</li><li>Why customers often struggle to make technology decisions to support their business goals. </li><li>AJ’s advice for businesses when making technology decisions.</li><li>Why startups are encouraged to start by using open source — and why open source wins in the end when compared to proprietary solutions.</li></ul><p><br></p><p><br><strong>Links</strong></p><ul><li>DigitalOcean: <a href="https://www.digitalocean.com/">https://www.digitalocean.com/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/apurvajo">https://twitter.com/apurvajo</a> </li><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/apurvajo/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/apurvajo/</a> </li></ul><p><br></p><p><b>Transcript</b></p><p><br>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. I'm Emily Omier, your host, and today I'm chatting with AJ. AJ, can you go ahead and introduce yourself?</p><p><br></p><p><br>AJ: Hey, I'm AJ. I’m vice president of product for <a href="https://www.digitalocean.com/">DigitalOcean</a>. I've been with the company for about 15 months. Before that, I spent about a couple of decades with Microsoft. I was fortunate to work on Azure for the last decade, and I had the opportunity to build some cloud services with the company.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And thank you so much for joining us.</p><p><br></p><p><br>AJ: Thank you, thank you for having me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: I always like to start out by asking, what do you actually do? What does a day look like?</p><p><br></p><p><br>AJ: [laughs]. It’s an interesting question. So, yes, the day is usually all over the place depending on the priorities and things that are in motion for a given quarter or a week, per se. But usually, my days involve working with the team around the strategic initiatives that have been planned, driving clarity around different projects that I [unintelligible]. Mainly working with leadership on defining some of the roadmap for the product as well as the company. And yeah, and talking to lots of customers. That's something that I really, really enjoy. And every other day I have a meeting or two talking to our customers, learning from them, how they use our products and how can we get better.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: I'm going to ask more about those conversations with customers because that's what I find really interesting. But first, actually, I wanted to start with another question. What do you see as the difference between cloud computing and cloud-native?</p><p><br></p><p><br>AJ: The difference essentially, in a way, the cloud computing is a much bigger umbrella around how we as a technology industry are enabling other businesses to bring their workload to a more scalable, more efficient, more secure environment versus trying to host, optimize, or do things by themselves. And the cloud-native, in a way, it's a subset of a cloud computing where not necessarily you always have to have existing workloads or something that is prior technology that has been already built and you're looking for a place to host. In a way, when you're building something out, new, greenfield apps and whatnot, you're starting from scratch, you're building your applications and solutions that are cloud-native by definition. They're built for Cloud; they're born in Cloud, and are optimizing the latest and the greatest innovations that are present and as future-looking to help you scale and succeed your business, in a way.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Do you think it's possible to have a cloud-native application that runs on-premise?</p><p><br></p><p><br>AJ: There's a lot of [laughs] innovations happening in pockets, and especially from the top providers to enable those scenarios. But at the end of the day, those investments are essentially driven to help people and companies, especially on the larger scale, to buy some time to completely move to the public cloud where the industry takes their time to come up with the compliance, security requirements and [unintelligible]. So, you'll start to see—you might have heard about some of the investments these top cloud providers are doing about allowing and bringing those similar stack and technologies that they are building in a public cloud to on-premise or running on their own data center, in a way. So, it is possible, in bits and pockets to start with a cloud-native to run, on-premise, but that customer segment and the target is very, very different than the ones that start in a public cloud first.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: I want to switch to talking about some of the conversations that you have with customers. I really like to understand what end users are thinking. What would you say when you talk to customers? What's the thing that they're most excited about?</p><p><br></p><p><br>AJ: Right. So, it depends on what segment of customers you're speaking with, right? DigitalOcean serves a very different set of customers than a typical large cloud providers do. We're focused more on individual developers, small startups, or SMBs. Again, when I say SMBs, it's a broad term, when I say SMBs the S with [unintelligible]. </p><p><br></p><p><br>So, we focus mainly on two to ten devs team, and smaller companies and whatnot. So, their requirements are very different; their needs are very unique compared to what I used to talk, back in my past life, with enterprise customers. Their requirements are very unique and different as well. So, what I hear from the customers that I speak with recently, and have been speaking with for last over a year, is how can I make my business that is [unintelligible] on a cloud? And what I mean by that is how do I build solutions that are simple, easy to understand, and where I'm focused on building software and not really worrying about the complexity of the infrastructure, at the same time, keep the price in control and very simple and predictable. </p><p><br></p><p><br>And that resonates really, really well. The tons and tons of customers that I spoke with recently, they moved from large cloud providers to our platform because their business was not viable on those cloud providers. And what I mean by that...</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 23 Sep 2020 03:00:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/c33bfd2d/eb848f42.mp3" length="46708800" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1936</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Apurva Joshi (AJ) has decades of experience developing cloud systems, having worked at Microsoft where he worked on Azure among other services. Now, AJ is vice president of product at DigitalOcean, a cloud infrastructure provider that provides developers with cloud services to help deploy and scale apps. 

In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, host Emily Omier and AJ focus on how DigitalOcean’s small to medium-size customers tend to approach cloud-native applications, and the trends that he’s noticing in this space. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Apurva Joshi (AJ) has decades of experience developing cloud systems, having worked at Microsoft where he worked on Azure among other services. Now, AJ is vice president of product at DigitalOcean, a cloud infrastructure provider that provides developers </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Enabling Cloud Native Environments with Gou Rao</title>
      <itunes:episode>17</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>17</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Enabling Cloud Native Environments with Gou Rao</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">39f84126-8f38-41f0-9599-7561b8fd0c18</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/5326f8bf</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>The conversation covers: </strong></p><ul><li>Gou’s role as CTO of Portworx, and how he works with customers on a day to day basis.</li><li>Common pain points that Gou talks about with customers. Gou explains how he helps customers create agile and cost-effective application development and deployment environments.</li><li>The types of people that Gou talks to when approaching customers about cloud native discussions.</li><li>Why customers often struggle with infrastructure related problems during their cloud native journeys, and how Gou and his team help.</li><li>Common misconceptions that exist among customers when exploring cloud native solutions. For example, Gou mentions moving to Kubernetes for the sake of moving to Kubernetes. </li><li>Gou’s thoughts on state — including why there is no such thing as an end-to-end stateless architecture.</li><li>Some cloud native vertical trends that Gou is noticing taking place in the market. </li><li>The issue of vendor lock-in, and how data and state fit into lock-in discussions. </li><li>Gou’s opinion on where he sees the cloud native ecosystem heading.</li></ul><p><strong>Links</strong></p><ul><li>Portworx: <a href="https://portworx.com/">https://portworx.com/</a> </li><li>Portworx Blog: <a href="https://portworx.com/blog/">https://portworx.com/blog/</a></li><li>Gou Rao Email: <a href="mailto:gou@portworx.com">mailto:gou@portworx.com</a> </li></ul><p><b>Transcript</b></p><p><br>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>, I'm your host Emily Omier, and today I am chatting with Gou Rao. Gou, I want to go ahead and have you introduce yourself. Where do you work? What do you do?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Gou: Sure. Hi, Emily, and hi to everybody that's listening in. Thanks for having me on this podcast. My name is Gou Rao. I'm the CTO at <a href="https://portworx.com/">Portworx</a>. Portworx is a leader in the cloud-native storage space. We help companies run mission-critical stateful applications in production in hybrid, multi-cloud, and cloud-native environments.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: So, when you say you’re CTO, obviously that's a job title everyone, sort of, understands. But what does that mean you spend your day doing?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Gou: Yeah, it is an overloaded term. As a CTO, I think CTOs in different companies wear multiple hats doing different things. Here at Portworx, technically I'm in charge of this company strategy and technical direction. What does that mean in terms of my day to day activities? And it's spending a lot of time with customers understanding the problems that they're trying to solve, and then trying to build a pattern around what different people in different industries and companies are doing, and then identifying common problems and trying to bring solutions to market, by working with our engineering teams, that sort of address, holistically, the underlying areas that I see people try and craft solutions around, whether it's enabling an agile development environment for their internal developers, or cost optimization, there's usually some underlying theme, and my job is to identify what that is, and come up with a meaningful solution that addresses a wide segment of the market.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: What are the most common pain points that you end up talking to customers about?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Gou: Over the past, I think, eight-plus years or so—I think the enterprise software space goes through iterations in the types of problems that are being solved. Over the past eight-plus years or so, it really has been around this—we use this term cloud-native—enabling cloud-native environments. And what does that really mean? In talking to customers, what this is really meant recently is enabling an agile application development and deployment environment. And let's even define what that is. </p><p><br></p><p><br>Me as an application developer, I have to rely on traditional IT techniques where there's a separate storage department, compute department, networking department, security department, and I have to interact with all of them just to develop and try out an application. But that really is impeding me as a developer from how fast I can iterate and build product and get it out there, so by and large, the common underlying theme has been, “Make that process better for me.” So, if I'm head of infrastructure how can I enable my developers to build and push product faster? So, getting that agility up in a sense where it makes—cost-wise, too, so it has to make cost sense—how do I enable an efficient, cost-efficient development platform? That has been the underlying theme. That sort of defines a set of technologies that we call cloud-native, and so orchestration tools like Kubernetes, and storage technologies like, hopefully, what we're doing at Portworx, these are all aimed at facilitating that. That's been sort of what we've been focused on over the past couple of years.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And when you talk to customers, do they tend to say, “Hey, we need to figure out a way to increase our development velocity?” Or do they tend to say, “We need a better solution for stateful applications?” What's the type of vocabulary that they're attempting to use to describe their problems, and how high-level do they usually go?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Gou: That's a good question. Both. So, the backdrop really is, “Increase my development velocity. Make it easier for me to put product out there faster.” Now, what does it take to get there? So, the second-order problems then become do I run in the public cloud, private cloud? Do I need help running stateful applications? So, these are all pillars that support the main theme here, which is increasing development velocity. So, the primary umbrella under which our customers are operating under is really around increasing the development velocity in a way that makes cost sense. </p><p><br></p><p><br>And if you double-click on that and look at the type of problems that they're solving, they would include, “How do I efficiently run my applications in a public cloud? Or a hybrid cloud? How do I enable workflows that need to span multiple clouds?” Again because maybe they're using cloud provider technologies, like either compute resources, or even services that a cloud provider may be offering, so that, again, all of this so that they can increase their development velocity.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And in the past, and to a certain extent now, storage was somewhat of a siloed area of expertise. When you're talking to customers, who are you talking to in an organization? I mean, is it somebody who's a storage specialist or is it someone who's not?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Gou: No, they're not. So, that's been one of the things that have really changed in this ecosystem, which is the shift away from this kind of like, hey, there's a storage admin and a storage architect, and then there's a compute admin or BM admin or a security admin, that's really not who are driving this because if you look at that—that world really thinks in terms of infrastructure first.<br></p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>The conversation covers: </strong></p><ul><li>Gou’s role as CTO of Portworx, and how he works with customers on a day to day basis.</li><li>Common pain points that Gou talks about with customers. Gou explains how he helps customers create agile and cost-effective application development and deployment environments.</li><li>The types of people that Gou talks to when approaching customers about cloud native discussions.</li><li>Why customers often struggle with infrastructure related problems during their cloud native journeys, and how Gou and his team help.</li><li>Common misconceptions that exist among customers when exploring cloud native solutions. For example, Gou mentions moving to Kubernetes for the sake of moving to Kubernetes. </li><li>Gou’s thoughts on state — including why there is no such thing as an end-to-end stateless architecture.</li><li>Some cloud native vertical trends that Gou is noticing taking place in the market. </li><li>The issue of vendor lock-in, and how data and state fit into lock-in discussions. </li><li>Gou’s opinion on where he sees the cloud native ecosystem heading.</li></ul><p><strong>Links</strong></p><ul><li>Portworx: <a href="https://portworx.com/">https://portworx.com/</a> </li><li>Portworx Blog: <a href="https://portworx.com/blog/">https://portworx.com/blog/</a></li><li>Gou Rao Email: <a href="mailto:gou@portworx.com">mailto:gou@portworx.com</a> </li></ul><p><b>Transcript</b></p><p><br>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>, I'm your host Emily Omier, and today I am chatting with Gou Rao. Gou, I want to go ahead and have you introduce yourself. Where do you work? What do you do?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Gou: Sure. Hi, Emily, and hi to everybody that's listening in. Thanks for having me on this podcast. My name is Gou Rao. I'm the CTO at <a href="https://portworx.com/">Portworx</a>. Portworx is a leader in the cloud-native storage space. We help companies run mission-critical stateful applications in production in hybrid, multi-cloud, and cloud-native environments.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: So, when you say you’re CTO, obviously that's a job title everyone, sort of, understands. But what does that mean you spend your day doing?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Gou: Yeah, it is an overloaded term. As a CTO, I think CTOs in different companies wear multiple hats doing different things. Here at Portworx, technically I'm in charge of this company strategy and technical direction. What does that mean in terms of my day to day activities? And it's spending a lot of time with customers understanding the problems that they're trying to solve, and then trying to build a pattern around what different people in different industries and companies are doing, and then identifying common problems and trying to bring solutions to market, by working with our engineering teams, that sort of address, holistically, the underlying areas that I see people try and craft solutions around, whether it's enabling an agile development environment for their internal developers, or cost optimization, there's usually some underlying theme, and my job is to identify what that is, and come up with a meaningful solution that addresses a wide segment of the market.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: What are the most common pain points that you end up talking to customers about?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Gou: Over the past, I think, eight-plus years or so—I think the enterprise software space goes through iterations in the types of problems that are being solved. Over the past eight-plus years or so, it really has been around this—we use this term cloud-native—enabling cloud-native environments. And what does that really mean? In talking to customers, what this is really meant recently is enabling an agile application development and deployment environment. And let's even define what that is. </p><p><br></p><p><br>Me as an application developer, I have to rely on traditional IT techniques where there's a separate storage department, compute department, networking department, security department, and I have to interact with all of them just to develop and try out an application. But that really is impeding me as a developer from how fast I can iterate and build product and get it out there, so by and large, the common underlying theme has been, “Make that process better for me.” So, if I'm head of infrastructure how can I enable my developers to build and push product faster? So, getting that agility up in a sense where it makes—cost-wise, too, so it has to make cost sense—how do I enable an efficient, cost-efficient development platform? That has been the underlying theme. That sort of defines a set of technologies that we call cloud-native, and so orchestration tools like Kubernetes, and storage technologies like, hopefully, what we're doing at Portworx, these are all aimed at facilitating that. That's been sort of what we've been focused on over the past couple of years.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And when you talk to customers, do they tend to say, “Hey, we need to figure out a way to increase our development velocity?” Or do they tend to say, “We need a better solution for stateful applications?” What's the type of vocabulary that they're attempting to use to describe their problems, and how high-level do they usually go?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Gou: That's a good question. Both. So, the backdrop really is, “Increase my development velocity. Make it easier for me to put product out there faster.” Now, what does it take to get there? So, the second-order problems then become do I run in the public cloud, private cloud? Do I need help running stateful applications? So, these are all pillars that support the main theme here, which is increasing development velocity. So, the primary umbrella under which our customers are operating under is really around increasing the development velocity in a way that makes cost sense. </p><p><br></p><p><br>And if you double-click on that and look at the type of problems that they're solving, they would include, “How do I efficiently run my applications in a public cloud? Or a hybrid cloud? How do I enable workflows that need to span multiple clouds?” Again because maybe they're using cloud provider technologies, like either compute resources, or even services that a cloud provider may be offering, so that, again, all of this so that they can increase their development velocity.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And in the past, and to a certain extent now, storage was somewhat of a siloed area of expertise. When you're talking to customers, who are you talking to in an organization? I mean, is it somebody who's a storage specialist or is it someone who's not?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Gou: No, they're not. So, that's been one of the things that have really changed in this ecosystem, which is the shift away from this kind of like, hey, there's a storage admin and a storage architect, and then there's a compute admin or BM admin or a security admin, that's really not who are driving this because if you look at that—that world really thinks in terms of infrastructure first.<br></p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 16 Sep 2020 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/5326f8bf/cbe40f8b.mp3" length="42915529" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1778</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Companies across all industries are looking for ways to expedite application development and compete in the digital economy. Yet, many engineers are still using traditional IT techniques and processes that impede development and make it difficult to work quickly. 

In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, host Emily Omier talks with Gou Rao who is CTO of Portworx, an organization that helps clients run mission-critical stateful applications in hybrid, multi-cloud, and cloud-native environments. Gou explains how Portworx is working to enable fast and efficient cloud native environments for their clients, and some of the challenges that they’re helping them work through.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Companies across all industries are looking for ways to expedite application development and compete in the digital economy. Yet, many engineers are still using traditional IT techniques and processes that impede development and make it difficult to work </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Exploring Single Music’s Cloud Native Journey with Kevin Crawley</title>
      <itunes:episode>16</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>16</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Exploring Single Music’s Cloud Native Journey with Kevin Crawley</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">8692ee0c-087e-4f5a-8e60-aadc668d0dff</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/8aa4d82f</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>The conversation covers: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why Kevin helped launch Single Music, where he currently provides SRE and architect duties.</li><li>Single Music’s technical evolution from Docker Swarm to Kubernetes, and the key reasons that drove Kevin and his team to make the leap.</li><li>What’s changed at Single Music since migrating to Kubernetes, and how Kubernetes is opening new doors for the company — increasing stability, and making life easier for developers.</li><li>How Kubernetes allows Single Music to grow and pivot when needed, and introduce new features and products without spending a large amount of time on backend configurations. </li><li>How the COVID-19 pandemic has impacted music sales.</li><li>Single Music’s new plugin system, which empowers their users to create their own middleware.</li><li>Kevin’s current project, which is a series of how-to manuals and guides for users of Kubernetes.</li><li>Some common misconceptions about Kubernetes.</li></ul><p><strong><br>Links</strong></p><ul><li><a href="https://singlemusic.com/">Single Music</a></li><li><a href="https://traefik.io/">Traefik Labs</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/notsureifkevin?lang=en">https://twitter.com/notsureifkevin?lang=en</a></li><li>Connect with Kevin on LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/notsureifkevin">https://www.linkedin.com/in/notsureifkevin</a></li></ul><p>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. I'm Emily Omier, your host, and today I am chatting with Kevin Crawley. And Kevin actually has two jobs that we're going to talk about. Kevin, can you sort of introduce yourself and what your two roles are?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Kevin: First, thank you for inviting me on to the show Emily. I appreciate the opportunity to talk a little bit about both my roles because I certainly enjoy doing both jobs. I don't necessarily enjoy the amount of work it gives me, but it also allows me to explore the technical aspects of cloud-native, as well as the business and marketing aspects of it. So, as you mentioned, my name is Kevin Crawley. I work at a company called <a href="https://containo.us/">Containous</a>. They are the company who created Traefik, the cloud-native load balancer. </p><p><br></p><p><br>We've also created a couple other projects, and I'll talk a little bit about those later. For Containous, I'm a developer advocate. I work both with the marketing team and the engineering team. But also I moonlight as a co-founder and a co-owner of <a href="https://singlemusic.com/">Single Music</a>. And there, I fulfill mostly SRE type duties and also architect duties where a lot of times people will ask me feedback, and I'll happily share my opinion. And Single Music is actually based out of Nashville, Tennessee, where I live, and I started that with a couple friends here.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Tell me actually a little bit more about why you started Single Music. And what do you do exactly?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Kevin: Yeah, absolutely. So, the company started out of really an idea that labels and artists—and these are musicians if you didn't pick up on the name Single Music—we saw an opportunity for those labels and artists to sell their merchandise through a platform called Shopify to have advanced tools around selling music alongside that merchandise. And at the time, which was in 2016, there weren't any tools really to allow independent artists and smaller labels to upload their music to the web and sell it in a way in which could be reported to the Billboard charts, as well as for them to keep their profits. At the time, there was really only Apple Music, or iTunes. And iTunes keeps a significant portion of an artist's revenue, as well as they don't release those funds right away; it takes months for artists to get that money. </p><p><br></p><p><br>And we saw an opportunity to make that turnaround time immediate so that the artists would get that revenue almost instantaneously. And also we saw an opportunity to be more affordable as well. So, initially, we offered that Shopify integration—and they call those applications—and that would allow those store owners to distribute that music digitally and have those sales reported in Nielsen SoundScan, and that drives the Billboard Top 100. Now since then, we've expanded quite considerably since the launch. </p><p><br></p><p><br>We now report on sales for physical merchandise as well. Things like cassette tapes, and vinyl, so records. And you'd be surprised at how many people actually still buy cassette tapes. I don't know what they're doing with them, but they still do. And we're also moving into the live streaming business now, with all the COVID stuff going on, and there's been some pretty cool events that we've been a part of since we started doing that, and bands have gotten really elaborate with their live production setups and live streaming. </p><p><br></p><p><br>To answer the second part of your question, what I do for them, as I mentioned, I mostly serve as an advisor, which is pretty cool because the CTO and the developers on staff, I think there's four or five developers now working on the team, they manage most of the day-to-day operations of the platform, and we have, like, over 150 Kubernetes pods running on an EKS cluster that has roughly, I'd say, 80 cores and 76 gigabytes of RAM. That is around, I'd say about 90 or 100 different services that are running at any given time, and that's across two or three environments, just depending on what we're doing at the time.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Can you tell me a little bit about the sort of technical evolution at Single? Did you start in 2016 on Kubernetes? That's, I suppose, not impossible.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Kevin: It's not impossible, and it's something we had considered at the time. But really, in 2016, Kubernetes, I don't even think there wasn't even a managed offering of Kubernetes outside of Google at that time, I believe, and it was still pretty early on in development. If you wanted to run Kubernetes, you were probably going to operate it on-premise, and that just seemed like way too high of a technical burden. At the time, it was just myself and the CTO, the lead developer on the project, and also the marketing or business person who was also part of the company. And at that time, it was just deemed—it was definitely going to solve the problems that we were anticipating having, which was scaling and building that microservice application environment, but at the time, it was impractical for myself to manage Kubernetes on top of managing all the stuff that Taylor, the CTO, had to build to actually make this product a reality. </p><p><br></p><p><br>So, initially, we launched on Docker Swarm in my garage, on a Dell R815, which was like a, I think was 64 cores and 256 gigs of RAM, which was, like, overkill, but it was also, I think it cost me, like, $600. I bought it off of Craigslist from somebody here in the area. But it served really well as a server for us to grow into, and it was, for the most part, other than electricity and the internet connection into m...</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>The conversation covers: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why Kevin helped launch Single Music, where he currently provides SRE and architect duties.</li><li>Single Music’s technical evolution from Docker Swarm to Kubernetes, and the key reasons that drove Kevin and his team to make the leap.</li><li>What’s changed at Single Music since migrating to Kubernetes, and how Kubernetes is opening new doors for the company — increasing stability, and making life easier for developers.</li><li>How Kubernetes allows Single Music to grow and pivot when needed, and introduce new features and products without spending a large amount of time on backend configurations. </li><li>How the COVID-19 pandemic has impacted music sales.</li><li>Single Music’s new plugin system, which empowers their users to create their own middleware.</li><li>Kevin’s current project, which is a series of how-to manuals and guides for users of Kubernetes.</li><li>Some common misconceptions about Kubernetes.</li></ul><p><strong><br>Links</strong></p><ul><li><a href="https://singlemusic.com/">Single Music</a></li><li><a href="https://traefik.io/">Traefik Labs</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/notsureifkevin?lang=en">https://twitter.com/notsureifkevin?lang=en</a></li><li>Connect with Kevin on LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/notsureifkevin">https://www.linkedin.com/in/notsureifkevin</a></li></ul><p>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. I'm Emily Omier, your host, and today I am chatting with Kevin Crawley. And Kevin actually has two jobs that we're going to talk about. Kevin, can you sort of introduce yourself and what your two roles are?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Kevin: First, thank you for inviting me on to the show Emily. I appreciate the opportunity to talk a little bit about both my roles because I certainly enjoy doing both jobs. I don't necessarily enjoy the amount of work it gives me, but it also allows me to explore the technical aspects of cloud-native, as well as the business and marketing aspects of it. So, as you mentioned, my name is Kevin Crawley. I work at a company called <a href="https://containo.us/">Containous</a>. They are the company who created Traefik, the cloud-native load balancer. </p><p><br></p><p><br>We've also created a couple other projects, and I'll talk a little bit about those later. For Containous, I'm a developer advocate. I work both with the marketing team and the engineering team. But also I moonlight as a co-founder and a co-owner of <a href="https://singlemusic.com/">Single Music</a>. And there, I fulfill mostly SRE type duties and also architect duties where a lot of times people will ask me feedback, and I'll happily share my opinion. And Single Music is actually based out of Nashville, Tennessee, where I live, and I started that with a couple friends here.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Tell me actually a little bit more about why you started Single Music. And what do you do exactly?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Kevin: Yeah, absolutely. So, the company started out of really an idea that labels and artists—and these are musicians if you didn't pick up on the name Single Music—we saw an opportunity for those labels and artists to sell their merchandise through a platform called Shopify to have advanced tools around selling music alongside that merchandise. And at the time, which was in 2016, there weren't any tools really to allow independent artists and smaller labels to upload their music to the web and sell it in a way in which could be reported to the Billboard charts, as well as for them to keep their profits. At the time, there was really only Apple Music, or iTunes. And iTunes keeps a significant portion of an artist's revenue, as well as they don't release those funds right away; it takes months for artists to get that money. </p><p><br></p><p><br>And we saw an opportunity to make that turnaround time immediate so that the artists would get that revenue almost instantaneously. And also we saw an opportunity to be more affordable as well. So, initially, we offered that Shopify integration—and they call those applications—and that would allow those store owners to distribute that music digitally and have those sales reported in Nielsen SoundScan, and that drives the Billboard Top 100. Now since then, we've expanded quite considerably since the launch. </p><p><br></p><p><br>We now report on sales for physical merchandise as well. Things like cassette tapes, and vinyl, so records. And you'd be surprised at how many people actually still buy cassette tapes. I don't know what they're doing with them, but they still do. And we're also moving into the live streaming business now, with all the COVID stuff going on, and there's been some pretty cool events that we've been a part of since we started doing that, and bands have gotten really elaborate with their live production setups and live streaming. </p><p><br></p><p><br>To answer the second part of your question, what I do for them, as I mentioned, I mostly serve as an advisor, which is pretty cool because the CTO and the developers on staff, I think there's four or five developers now working on the team, they manage most of the day-to-day operations of the platform, and we have, like, over 150 Kubernetes pods running on an EKS cluster that has roughly, I'd say, 80 cores and 76 gigabytes of RAM. That is around, I'd say about 90 or 100 different services that are running at any given time, and that's across two or three environments, just depending on what we're doing at the time.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Can you tell me a little bit about the sort of technical evolution at Single? Did you start in 2016 on Kubernetes? That's, I suppose, not impossible.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Kevin: It's not impossible, and it's something we had considered at the time. But really, in 2016, Kubernetes, I don't even think there wasn't even a managed offering of Kubernetes outside of Google at that time, I believe, and it was still pretty early on in development. If you wanted to run Kubernetes, you were probably going to operate it on-premise, and that just seemed like way too high of a technical burden. At the time, it was just myself and the CTO, the lead developer on the project, and also the marketing or business person who was also part of the company. And at that time, it was just deemed—it was definitely going to solve the problems that we were anticipating having, which was scaling and building that microservice application environment, but at the time, it was impractical for myself to manage Kubernetes on top of managing all the stuff that Taylor, the CTO, had to build to actually make this product a reality. </p><p><br></p><p><br>So, initially, we launched on Docker Swarm in my garage, on a Dell R815, which was like a, I think was 64 cores and 256 gigs of RAM, which was, like, overkill, but it was also, I think it cost me, like, $600. I bought it off of Craigslist from somebody here in the area. But it served really well as a server for us to grow into, and it was, for the most part, other than electricity and the internet connection into m...</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 09 Sep 2020 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/8aa4d82f/0dfa8525.mp3" length="55227102" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2299</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Kevin Crawley works as a developer advocate at Traefik Labs, the company that introduced the Traefik cloud native load balancer. He also has an interesting side hustle, moonlighting as co-founder and co-owner of Single Music — a company that creates direct-to-fan music tools for Shopify. 

In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, host Emily Omier talks with Kevin about Single Music’s technical journey, and how the company is using Kubernetes to expand and help hard working musicians remain profitable. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Kevin Crawley works as a developer advocate at Traefik Labs, the company that introduced the Traefik cloud native load balancer. He also has an interesting side hustle, moonlighting as co-founder and co-owner of Single Music — a company that creates direc</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Navigating the Cloud Native Ecosystem with Harness Evangelist Ravi Lachhman</title>
      <itunes:episode>15</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>15</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Navigating the Cloud Native Ecosystem with Harness Evangelist Ravi Lachhman</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">2842d1f8-8be3-493b-9629-b5b545bb2fb6</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/53cfaba4</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>The conversation covers: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>An overview of Ravi’s role as an evangelist — an often misunderstood, but important technology enabler. </li><li>Balancing organizational versus individual needs when making decisions.</li><li>Some of the core motivations that are driving cloud native migrations today. </li><li>Why Ravi believes it in empowering engineers to make business decisions. </li><li>Some of the top misconceptions about cloud native. Ravi also provides his own definition of cloud native.</li><li>How cloud native architectures are forcing developers to “shift left.”</li></ul><p><strong><br>Links</strong></p><ul><li><a href="https://harness.io/">https://harness.io/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/ravilach">https://twitter.com/ravilach</a></li><li>Harness community: <a href="https://community.harness.io/">https://community.harness.io/</a></li><li>Harness Slack: <a href="https://harnesscommunity.slack.com/">https://harnesscommunity.slack.com/</a></li></ul><p><br></p><p><b>Transcript</b></p><p><br>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>, I am your host Emily Omier. And today I'm chatting with Ravi Lachhman. Ravi, I want to always start out with, first of all, saying thank you—</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ravi: Sure, excited to be here.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: —and second of all, I like to have you introduce yourself, in your own words. What do you do? Where do you work?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ravi: Yes, sure. I'm an evangelist for <a href="https://harness.io/">Harness</a>. So, what an evangelist does, I focus on the ecosystem, and I always like the joke, I marry people with software because when people think of evangelists, they think of a televangelist. Or at least that’s what I told my mother and she believes me still. I focus on the ecosystem Harness plays in. And so, Harness is a continuous delivery as a service company. So, what that means, all of the confidence-building steps that you need to get software into production, such as approvals, test orchestration, Harness, how to do that with lots of convention, and as a service.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: So, when you start your day, walk me through what you're actually doing on a typical day?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ravi: a typical day—dude, I wish there was a typical day because we wear so many hats as a start-up here, but kind of a typical day for me and a typical day for my team, I ended up reading a lot. I probably read about two hours a day, at least during the business day. Now, for some people that might not be a lot, but for me, that's a lot. So, I'll usually catch up with a lot of technology news and news in general. They kind of see how certain things are playing out. </p><p><br></p><p><br>So, a big fan of <em>The New Stack</em> big fan of <em>InfoQ</em>. I also like reading <em>Hacker News</em> for more emotional reading. The big orange angry site, I call <em>Hacker News</em>. And then really just interacting with the community and teams at large. So, I'm the person I used to make fun of, you know, quote-unquote, “thought leader.” I used to not understand what they do, then I became one that was like, “Oh, boy.” [laughs]. </p><p><br></p><p><br>And so just providing guidance for some of our field teams, some of the marketing teams around the cloud-native ecosystem, what I'm seeing, what I'm hearing, my opinion on it. And that's pretty much it. And I get to do fun stuff like this, talking on podcasts, always excited to talk to folks and talk to the public. And then kind of just a mix of, say, making some sort of demos, or writing scaffolding code, just exploring new technologies. I'm pretty fortunate in my day to day activities.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And tell me a little bit more about marrying people with software. Are you the matchmaker? Are you the priest, what role?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ravi: I can play all parts of the marrying lifecycle. Sometimes I'm the groom, sometimes I’m the priest. But I'm really helping folks make technical decisions. So, it’s go a joke because I get the opportunity to take a look at a wide swath of technology. And so just helping folks make technical decisions. Oh, is this new technology hot? Does this technology make sense? Does this project fatality? What do you think? I just play, kind of, masters of ceremony on folks who are making technology decisions.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: What are some common decisions that you help people with, and common questions that they have?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ravi: Lot of times it comes around common questions about technology. It's always finding rationale. Why are you leveraging a certain piece of technology? The ‘why’ question is always important. Let's say that you're a forward-thinking engineer or a forward-thinking technology leader. </p><p><br></p><p><br>They also read a lot, and so if they come across, let's say a new hot technology, or if they're on Twitter, seeing, yeah, this particular project’s getting a lot of retweets, or they go in GitHub and see oh, this project has little stars, or forks. What does that mean? So, part of my role when talking to people is actually to kind of help slow that roll down, saying, “Hey, what’s the business rationale behind you making a change? Why do you actually want to go about leveraging a certain, let's say, technology?” </p><p><br></p><p><br>I’m just taking more of a generic approach, saying, “Hey, what’s the shiny penny today might not be the shiny penny tomorrow.” And also just providing some sort of guidance like, “Hey, let's take a look at project vitality. Let's take a look at some other metrics that projects have, like defect close ratio—you know, how often it's updates happening, what's your security posture?” And so just walking through a more, I would say the non-fun tasks or non-functional tasks, and also looking about how to operationalize something like, “Hey, given you want to make sure you're maintaining innovation, and making sure that you're maintaining business controls, what are some best operational practices?” You know, want to go for gold, or don't boil the ocean, it’s helping people make decisive decisions.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: What do you see as sort of the common threads that connect to the conversations that you have?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ravi: Yeah, so I think a lot of the common threads are usually like people say, “Oh, we have to have it. We're going to fall behind if you don't use XYZ technology.” And when you really start getting to talking to them, it's like, let’s try to line up some sort of technical debt or business problem that you have, and how about are you going to solve these particular technical challenges? It's something that, of the space I play into, which is ironic, it's the double-edged sword, I call it ‘chasing conference tech.’ So, sometimes people see a really hot project, if my team implements this, I can go speak at a conference about a certain piece of technology. </p><p><br></p><p><br>And it's like, eh, is that a really r...</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>The conversation covers: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>An overview of Ravi’s role as an evangelist — an often misunderstood, but important technology enabler. </li><li>Balancing organizational versus individual needs when making decisions.</li><li>Some of the core motivations that are driving cloud native migrations today. </li><li>Why Ravi believes it in empowering engineers to make business decisions. </li><li>Some of the top misconceptions about cloud native. Ravi also provides his own definition of cloud native.</li><li>How cloud native architectures are forcing developers to “shift left.”</li></ul><p><strong><br>Links</strong></p><ul><li><a href="https://harness.io/">https://harness.io/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/ravilach">https://twitter.com/ravilach</a></li><li>Harness community: <a href="https://community.harness.io/">https://community.harness.io/</a></li><li>Harness Slack: <a href="https://harnesscommunity.slack.com/">https://harnesscommunity.slack.com/</a></li></ul><p><br></p><p><b>Transcript</b></p><p><br>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>, I am your host Emily Omier. And today I'm chatting with Ravi Lachhman. Ravi, I want to always start out with, first of all, saying thank you—</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ravi: Sure, excited to be here.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: —and second of all, I like to have you introduce yourself, in your own words. What do you do? Where do you work?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ravi: Yes, sure. I'm an evangelist for <a href="https://harness.io/">Harness</a>. So, what an evangelist does, I focus on the ecosystem, and I always like the joke, I marry people with software because when people think of evangelists, they think of a televangelist. Or at least that’s what I told my mother and she believes me still. I focus on the ecosystem Harness plays in. And so, Harness is a continuous delivery as a service company. So, what that means, all of the confidence-building steps that you need to get software into production, such as approvals, test orchestration, Harness, how to do that with lots of convention, and as a service.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: So, when you start your day, walk me through what you're actually doing on a typical day?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ravi: a typical day—dude, I wish there was a typical day because we wear so many hats as a start-up here, but kind of a typical day for me and a typical day for my team, I ended up reading a lot. I probably read about two hours a day, at least during the business day. Now, for some people that might not be a lot, but for me, that's a lot. So, I'll usually catch up with a lot of technology news and news in general. They kind of see how certain things are playing out. </p><p><br></p><p><br>So, a big fan of <em>The New Stack</em> big fan of <em>InfoQ</em>. I also like reading <em>Hacker News</em> for more emotional reading. The big orange angry site, I call <em>Hacker News</em>. And then really just interacting with the community and teams at large. So, I'm the person I used to make fun of, you know, quote-unquote, “thought leader.” I used to not understand what they do, then I became one that was like, “Oh, boy.” [laughs]. </p><p><br></p><p><br>And so just providing guidance for some of our field teams, some of the marketing teams around the cloud-native ecosystem, what I'm seeing, what I'm hearing, my opinion on it. And that's pretty much it. And I get to do fun stuff like this, talking on podcasts, always excited to talk to folks and talk to the public. And then kind of just a mix of, say, making some sort of demos, or writing scaffolding code, just exploring new technologies. I'm pretty fortunate in my day to day activities.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And tell me a little bit more about marrying people with software. Are you the matchmaker? Are you the priest, what role?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ravi: I can play all parts of the marrying lifecycle. Sometimes I'm the groom, sometimes I’m the priest. But I'm really helping folks make technical decisions. So, it’s go a joke because I get the opportunity to take a look at a wide swath of technology. And so just helping folks make technical decisions. Oh, is this new technology hot? Does this technology make sense? Does this project fatality? What do you think? I just play, kind of, masters of ceremony on folks who are making technology decisions.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: What are some common decisions that you help people with, and common questions that they have?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ravi: Lot of times it comes around common questions about technology. It's always finding rationale. Why are you leveraging a certain piece of technology? The ‘why’ question is always important. Let's say that you're a forward-thinking engineer or a forward-thinking technology leader. </p><p><br></p><p><br>They also read a lot, and so if they come across, let's say a new hot technology, or if they're on Twitter, seeing, yeah, this particular project’s getting a lot of retweets, or they go in GitHub and see oh, this project has little stars, or forks. What does that mean? So, part of my role when talking to people is actually to kind of help slow that roll down, saying, “Hey, what’s the business rationale behind you making a change? Why do you actually want to go about leveraging a certain, let's say, technology?” </p><p><br></p><p><br>I’m just taking more of a generic approach, saying, “Hey, what’s the shiny penny today might not be the shiny penny tomorrow.” And also just providing some sort of guidance like, “Hey, let's take a look at project vitality. Let's take a look at some other metrics that projects have, like defect close ratio—you know, how often it's updates happening, what's your security posture?” And so just walking through a more, I would say the non-fun tasks or non-functional tasks, and also looking about how to operationalize something like, “Hey, given you want to make sure you're maintaining innovation, and making sure that you're maintaining business controls, what are some best operational practices?” You know, want to go for gold, or don't boil the ocean, it’s helping people make decisive decisions.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: What do you see as sort of the common threads that connect to the conversations that you have?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ravi: Yeah, so I think a lot of the common threads are usually like people say, “Oh, we have to have it. We're going to fall behind if you don't use XYZ technology.” And when you really start getting to talking to them, it's like, let’s try to line up some sort of technical debt or business problem that you have, and how about are you going to solve these particular technical challenges? It's something that, of the space I play into, which is ironic, it's the double-edged sword, I call it ‘chasing conference tech.’ So, sometimes people see a really hot project, if my team implements this, I can go speak at a conference about a certain piece of technology. </p><p><br></p><p><br>And it's like, eh, is that a really r...</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 02 Sep 2020 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/53cfaba4/e9bb9893.mp3" length="46547191" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1937</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Cloud native journeys can be complex and confusing. Now more than ever, companies need guidance about the business and technical implications of using systems like Kubernetes, to help make informed choices during each step of the process. 

In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, host Emily Omier talks with Harness Evangelist Ravi Lachhman, who helps field teams navigate the cloud native ecosystem.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Cloud native journeys can be complex and confusing. Now more than ever, companies need guidance about the business and technical implications of using systems like Kubernetes, to help make informed choices during each step of the process. 

In this epis</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Simplifying Cloud Native Testing with Jón Eðvald</title>
      <itunes:episode>14</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>14</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Simplifying Cloud Native Testing with Jón Eðvald</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">dba3f664-b579-4b03-b895-6678ad19b814</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/a4ab7bcc</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>The conversation covers:</strong></p><ul><li>Some of the pain points and driving factors that led Jón and his partners to launch Garden. Jon also talks about his early engineering experiences prior to Garden.</li><li>How the developer experience can impact the overall productivity of a company, and   why companies should try and optimize it.</li><li>Kubernetes shortcomings, and the challenges that developers often face when working with it. Jón also talks about the Kubernetes skills gap, and how Garden helps to close that gap. </li><li>Business stakeholder perception regarding Kuberentes challenges. </li><li>The challenge of deploying a single service on Kubernetes in a secure manner — and why Jón was surprised by this process. </li><li>How the Kubernetes ecosystem has grown, and the benefits of working with a large community of people who are committed to improving it. </li><li>Jón’s multi-faceted role as CEO of Garden, and what his day typically entails as a developer, producer, and liaison. </li><li>Garden’s main mission, which involves streamlining end-to-end application testing. </li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>Company site: <a href="https://garden.io/">https://garden.io/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/jonedvald">https://twitter.com/jonedvald</a></li><li>Kubernetes Slack: <a href="https://slack.k8s.io/">https://slack.k8s.io/</a></li></ul><p><strong>Transcript:</strong></p><p>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. I'm your host Emily Omier. And today I'm chatting with Jón Eðvald. And, Jón, thank you so much for joining me.</p><p><br></p><p>Jón: Thank you so much for having me. You got the name pretty spot on. Kudos.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Woohoo, I try. So, if you could actually just start by introducing yourself and where you work in <a href="https://garden.io/">Garden</a>, that would be great.</p><p><br></p><p>Jón: Sure. So, yeah, my name is Jón, one of the founders, and I’m the CEO of Garden. I've been doing software engineering for more years than I'd like to count, but Garden is my second startup. Previous company was some years ago; dropped out of Uni to start what became a natural language processing company. So, different sort of thing than what I'm doing now. </p><p><br></p><p>But it's actually interesting just to scan through the history of how we used to do things compared to today. We ran servers out of basically a cupboard with a fan in it, back in the day, and now, things are done somewhat differently. So, yeah, I moved to Berlin, it's about four years ago now, met my current co-founders. We all shared a passion and, I guess to some degree, frustrations about the general developer experience around, I guess, distributed systems in general. And now it's become a lot about Kubernetes these days in the cloud-native world, but we are interested in addressing common developer headaches regarding all things microservices. </p><p><br></p><p>Testing, in particular, has become a big part of our focus. Garden itself is an open-source product that aims to ease the developer experience around Kubernetes, again, with an emphasis on testing. When we started it, there wasn't a lot of these types of tools around, or they were pretty early on. Now there's a whole bunch of them, so we're trying to fit into this broad ecosystem. Happy to expand on that journey. But yeah, that's roughly—that's what Garden is, and that’s… yeah, a few hop-skips of my history as well.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: So, tell me a little bit more about the frustration that led you to start Garden. What were you doing, and what were you having trouble doing, basically?</p><p><br></p><p>Jón: So, when I first moved to Berlin, it was to work for a company called Clue. They make a popular period tracking app. So, initially, I was meant to focus on the data science and data engineering side of things, but it became apparent that there was a lot of need for people on the engineering side as well. So, I gravitated into that and ended up managing the engineering team there. And it was a small operation. We had more than a million daily active users yet just a single back end developer, so it was bursting at the seams. </p><p><br></p><p>And at the time running a simple Node.js backend on Heroku, single Postgres database, pretty simple. And I took that through—first, we adopted containers and moved into Docker Cloud. Then Docker Cloud disappeared, or was terminated without—we had to discover that by ourselves. And then Kubernetes was manifesting as the de facto way to do these things. So, we went through that transition, and I was kind of surprised. It was easy enough to get going and get to a functional level with Kubernetes and get everything running and working. The frustration came more from just the general developer experience and developer productivity side. Specifically, we found it very difficult to test the whole application because we had, by the end of that journey, a few different services doing different things. And for just the time you make a simple change to your code to it actually having been built, deployed, and ultimately tested was a rather tedious experience. And I found myself building tools, bespoke tools to be able to deal with that, and that ended up being sort of a janky prototype of what Garden is today. And I realized that my passion was getting the better of me, and we wanted to start a company to try and do better.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Why do you think developer experience matters?</p><p><br></p><p>Jón: Beyond just the, kind of, psychological effect of having to have these long and tedious feedback loops—just as a developer myself, it kind of grinds and reduces the overall joy of working on something. But in more concrete material terms, it really limits your productivity. You basically, you take—if your feedback loop is 10 times longer than it should be, that exponentially reduces the overall output of you as an individual or your team. So, it has a pretty significant impact on just the overall productivity of a company.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: And, in fact, it seems like a lot of companies move to Kubernetes or adopt distributed systems, cloud-native in general, precisely to get the speed.</p><p><br></p><p>Jón: And, yeah, that makes sense. I think it's easy to underestimate all the, what are often called these day-two problems, when—so, it's easy enough to grok how you might adopt Kubernetes. You might get the application working, and you even get to production fairly quickly, and then you find that you've left a lot of problems unsolved, that Kubernetes by itself doesn't really address for you. And it's often conflated by the fact that you may be actually adopting multiple things at the same time. You may be not only transitioning to Kubernetes from something analogous, you may be going from simpler, bespoke processes, or you might have just a monolith that didn't really have any complicated requirements when it comes to dev tooling and dev setups. So, yeah, you might be adopting microservices, containers, and Kuberne...</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>The conversation covers:</strong></p><ul><li>Some of the pain points and driving factors that led Jón and his partners to launch Garden. Jon also talks about his early engineering experiences prior to Garden.</li><li>How the developer experience can impact the overall productivity of a company, and   why companies should try and optimize it.</li><li>Kubernetes shortcomings, and the challenges that developers often face when working with it. Jón also talks about the Kubernetes skills gap, and how Garden helps to close that gap. </li><li>Business stakeholder perception regarding Kuberentes challenges. </li><li>The challenge of deploying a single service on Kubernetes in a secure manner — and why Jón was surprised by this process. </li><li>How the Kubernetes ecosystem has grown, and the benefits of working with a large community of people who are committed to improving it. </li><li>Jón’s multi-faceted role as CEO of Garden, and what his day typically entails as a developer, producer, and liaison. </li><li>Garden’s main mission, which involves streamlining end-to-end application testing. </li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>Company site: <a href="https://garden.io/">https://garden.io/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/jonedvald">https://twitter.com/jonedvald</a></li><li>Kubernetes Slack: <a href="https://slack.k8s.io/">https://slack.k8s.io/</a></li></ul><p><strong>Transcript:</strong></p><p>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. I'm your host Emily Omier. And today I'm chatting with Jón Eðvald. And, Jón, thank you so much for joining me.</p><p><br></p><p>Jón: Thank you so much for having me. You got the name pretty spot on. Kudos.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Woohoo, I try. So, if you could actually just start by introducing yourself and where you work in <a href="https://garden.io/">Garden</a>, that would be great.</p><p><br></p><p>Jón: Sure. So, yeah, my name is Jón, one of the founders, and I’m the CEO of Garden. I've been doing software engineering for more years than I'd like to count, but Garden is my second startup. Previous company was some years ago; dropped out of Uni to start what became a natural language processing company. So, different sort of thing than what I'm doing now. </p><p><br></p><p>But it's actually interesting just to scan through the history of how we used to do things compared to today. We ran servers out of basically a cupboard with a fan in it, back in the day, and now, things are done somewhat differently. So, yeah, I moved to Berlin, it's about four years ago now, met my current co-founders. We all shared a passion and, I guess to some degree, frustrations about the general developer experience around, I guess, distributed systems in general. And now it's become a lot about Kubernetes these days in the cloud-native world, but we are interested in addressing common developer headaches regarding all things microservices. </p><p><br></p><p>Testing, in particular, has become a big part of our focus. Garden itself is an open-source product that aims to ease the developer experience around Kubernetes, again, with an emphasis on testing. When we started it, there wasn't a lot of these types of tools around, or they were pretty early on. Now there's a whole bunch of them, so we're trying to fit into this broad ecosystem. Happy to expand on that journey. But yeah, that's roughly—that's what Garden is, and that’s… yeah, a few hop-skips of my history as well.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: So, tell me a little bit more about the frustration that led you to start Garden. What were you doing, and what were you having trouble doing, basically?</p><p><br></p><p>Jón: So, when I first moved to Berlin, it was to work for a company called Clue. They make a popular period tracking app. So, initially, I was meant to focus on the data science and data engineering side of things, but it became apparent that there was a lot of need for people on the engineering side as well. So, I gravitated into that and ended up managing the engineering team there. And it was a small operation. We had more than a million daily active users yet just a single back end developer, so it was bursting at the seams. </p><p><br></p><p>And at the time running a simple Node.js backend on Heroku, single Postgres database, pretty simple. And I took that through—first, we adopted containers and moved into Docker Cloud. Then Docker Cloud disappeared, or was terminated without—we had to discover that by ourselves. And then Kubernetes was manifesting as the de facto way to do these things. So, we went through that transition, and I was kind of surprised. It was easy enough to get going and get to a functional level with Kubernetes and get everything running and working. The frustration came more from just the general developer experience and developer productivity side. Specifically, we found it very difficult to test the whole application because we had, by the end of that journey, a few different services doing different things. And for just the time you make a simple change to your code to it actually having been built, deployed, and ultimately tested was a rather tedious experience. And I found myself building tools, bespoke tools to be able to deal with that, and that ended up being sort of a janky prototype of what Garden is today. And I realized that my passion was getting the better of me, and we wanted to start a company to try and do better.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Why do you think developer experience matters?</p><p><br></p><p>Jón: Beyond just the, kind of, psychological effect of having to have these long and tedious feedback loops—just as a developer myself, it kind of grinds and reduces the overall joy of working on something. But in more concrete material terms, it really limits your productivity. You basically, you take—if your feedback loop is 10 times longer than it should be, that exponentially reduces the overall output of you as an individual or your team. So, it has a pretty significant impact on just the overall productivity of a company.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: And, in fact, it seems like a lot of companies move to Kubernetes or adopt distributed systems, cloud-native in general, precisely to get the speed.</p><p><br></p><p>Jón: And, yeah, that makes sense. I think it's easy to underestimate all the, what are often called these day-two problems, when—so, it's easy enough to grok how you might adopt Kubernetes. You might get the application working, and you even get to production fairly quickly, and then you find that you've left a lot of problems unsolved, that Kubernetes by itself doesn't really address for you. And it's often conflated by the fact that you may be actually adopting multiple things at the same time. You may be not only transitioning to Kubernetes from something analogous, you may be going from simpler, bespoke processes, or you might have just a monolith that didn't really have any complicated requirements when it comes to dev tooling and dev setups. So, yeah, you might be adopting microservices, containers, and Kuberne...</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 26 Aug 2020 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/a4ab7bcc/0ebd0ab0.mp3" length="40023038" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1665</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Oftentimes, developers rush into cloud native deployments, only to find they are less productive than they were before starting. One of the top reasons is because of inefficient application testing. 

One company that is working to streamline this process is Garden, which provides testing environments for QA, integration, and development. Garden simplifies end-to-end application testing, boosting productivity while making life easier for developers. In this episode of the Business Cloud Native, host Emily Omier talks with Jón Eðvald who is co-founder and CEO of Garden, to learn more about how they are disrupting testing.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Oftentimes, developers rush into cloud native deployments, only to find they are less productive than they were before starting. One of the top reasons is because of inefficient application testing. 

One company that is working to streamline this proce</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>CERN’s Transition to Containerization and Kubernetes with Ricardo Rocha </title>
      <itunes:episode>13</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>13</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>CERN’s Transition to Containerization and Kubernetes with Ricardo Rocha </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">b4d8154e-9cce-4555-a2e7-ee378f4de18a</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/3359d698</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Some of the highlights of the show include: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>The challenges that CERN was facing when storing, processing, and analyzing data, and why it pushed them to think about containerization. </li><li>CERN’s evolution from using mainframes, to physical commodity hardware, to virtualization and private clouds, and eventually to containers. Ricardo also explains how the migration to containerization and Kubernetes was started.</li><li>Why there was a big push from groups that focus on reproducibility to explore containerization. </li><li>How end users have responded to Kubernetes and containers. Ricardo talks about the steep Kubernetes learning curve, and how they dealt with frustration and resistance. </li><li>Some of top benefits of migrating to Kubernetes, and the impact that the move has had on their end users. </li><li>Current challenges that CERN is working through, regarding hybrid infrastructure and rising data loads. Ricardo also talks about how CERN optimizes system resources for their scientists, and what it’s like operating as a public sector organization.</li><li>How CERN handles large data transfers. </li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>Email:<a href="mailto:ricardo.rocha@cern.ch">ricardo.rocha@cern.ch</a> </li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/ahcorporto">https://twitter.com/ahcorporto</a></li><li><a href="https://www.google.com/search?q=cern&amp;oq=cern&amp;aqs=chrome.0.69i59j46j69i59j35i39j0l2j69i60l2.707j0j7&amp;sourceid=chrome&amp;ie=UTF-8">CERN</a></li></ul><p><br></p><p><b>Transcript</b></p><p>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to the <em>Business of Cloud Native</em>. I'm your host, Emily Omier, and today I'm here with Ricardo Rocha. Ricardo, thank you so much for joining us.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ricardo: It's a pleasure.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Ricardo, can you actually go ahead and introduce yourself: where you work, and what you do?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ricardo: Yeah, yes, sure. I work at CERN, the European Organization for Nuclear Research. I'm a software engineer and I work in the CERN IT department. I've done quite a few different things in the past in the organization, including software development in the areas of storage and monitoring, and also distributed computing. But right now, I'm part of the CERN Cloud Team, and we manage the CERN private cloud and all the resources we have. And I focus mostly on networking and containerization, so Kubernetes and all these new technologies.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And on a day to day basis, what do you usually do? What sort of activities are you actually doing?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ricardo: Yeah. So, it's mostly making sure we provide the infrastructure that our physics users and experiments require, and also the people on campus. So, CERN is a pretty large organization. We have around 10,000 people on-site, and many more around the world that depend on our resources. So, we operate private clouds, we basically do DevOps-style work. And we have a team dedicated for the Cloud, but also for other areas of the data center. And it's mostly making sure everything operates correctly; try to automate more and more, so we do some improvements gradually; and then giving support to our users.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Just so everyone knows, can you tell a little bit more about what kind of work is done at CERN? What kind of experiments people are running?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ricardo: Our main goal is fundamental research. So, we try to answer some questions about the universe. So, what's dark matter? What's dark energy? Why don't we see antimatter? And similar questions. And for that, we build very large experiments. </p><p><br></p><p><br>So, the biggest experiment we have, which is actually the biggest scientific experiment ever built, is the Large Hadron Collider, and this is a particle accelerator that accelerates two beams of protons in opposite directions, and we make them collide at very specific points where we build this very large physics experiments that try to understand what happens in these collisions and try to look for new physics. And in reality, what happens with these collisions is that we generate large amounts of data that need to be stored, and processed, and analyzed, so the IT infrastructure that we support, it’s larger fraction dedicated to this physics analysis.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Tell me a little bit more about some of the challenges related to processing and storing the huge amount of data that you have. And also, how this has evolved, and how it pushed you to think about containerization.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ricardo: The big challenge we have is the amount of data that we have to support. So, these experiments, each of the experiments, at the moment of the collisions, it can generate data in the order of one petabyte a second. This is, of course, not something we can handle, so the first thing we do, we use these hardware triggers to filter this data quite significantly, but we still generate, per experiment, something like a few gigabytes a second, so up to 10 gigabytes a second. And this we have to store, and then we have large farms that will handle the processing and the reconstruction of all of this. So, we've had these sort of experiments since quite a while, and to analyze all of this, we need a large amount of resources, and with time. </p><p><br></p><p><br>If you come and visit CERN, you can see a bit of the history of computing, kind of evolving with what we used to have in the past in our data center. But it's mostly—we used to have large mainframes, that now it's more in the movies that we see them, but we used to have quite a few of those. And then we transitioned to physical commodity hardware with Linux servers. Eventually introduced virtualization and private clouds to improve the efficiency and the provisioning of these resources to our users, and then eventually, we moved to containers and the main motivation is always to try to be as efficient as possible, and to speed up this process of provisioning resources, and be more flexible in the way we assign compute and also storage. </p><p><br></p><p><br>What we've seen is that in the move from physical to virtualization, we saw that the provisioning and maintenance got significantly improved. What we see with containerization is the extra speed in also deployment and update of the applications that run on those resources. And we also see an improving resource utilization. We already had the possibility to improve quite a bit with virtualization by doing things like overcommit, but with containers, we can go one step further by doing more efficient resource sharing for the different applications we have to run.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Is the amount of data that you're processing stable? Is it steadily increasing, have spikes, a combination?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ricardo: So, the way it works is, we have what we call ‘beam’ which is when we actually have protons circulating in the accelerator. And during these periods, we try to get as much collisions as ...</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Some of the highlights of the show include: </p><p><br></p><ul><li>The challenges that CERN was facing when storing, processing, and analyzing data, and why it pushed them to think about containerization. </li><li>CERN’s evolution from using mainframes, to physical commodity hardware, to virtualization and private clouds, and eventually to containers. Ricardo also explains how the migration to containerization and Kubernetes was started.</li><li>Why there was a big push from groups that focus on reproducibility to explore containerization. </li><li>How end users have responded to Kubernetes and containers. Ricardo talks about the steep Kubernetes learning curve, and how they dealt with frustration and resistance. </li><li>Some of top benefits of migrating to Kubernetes, and the impact that the move has had on their end users. </li><li>Current challenges that CERN is working through, regarding hybrid infrastructure and rising data loads. Ricardo also talks about how CERN optimizes system resources for their scientists, and what it’s like operating as a public sector organization.</li><li>How CERN handles large data transfers. </li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>Email:<a href="mailto:ricardo.rocha@cern.ch">ricardo.rocha@cern.ch</a> </li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/ahcorporto">https://twitter.com/ahcorporto</a></li><li><a href="https://www.google.com/search?q=cern&amp;oq=cern&amp;aqs=chrome.0.69i59j46j69i59j35i39j0l2j69i60l2.707j0j7&amp;sourceid=chrome&amp;ie=UTF-8">CERN</a></li></ul><p><br></p><p><b>Transcript</b></p><p>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to the <em>Business of Cloud Native</em>. I'm your host, Emily Omier, and today I'm here with Ricardo Rocha. Ricardo, thank you so much for joining us.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ricardo: It's a pleasure.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Ricardo, can you actually go ahead and introduce yourself: where you work, and what you do?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ricardo: Yeah, yes, sure. I work at CERN, the European Organization for Nuclear Research. I'm a software engineer and I work in the CERN IT department. I've done quite a few different things in the past in the organization, including software development in the areas of storage and monitoring, and also distributed computing. But right now, I'm part of the CERN Cloud Team, and we manage the CERN private cloud and all the resources we have. And I focus mostly on networking and containerization, so Kubernetes and all these new technologies.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And on a day to day basis, what do you usually do? What sort of activities are you actually doing?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ricardo: Yeah. So, it's mostly making sure we provide the infrastructure that our physics users and experiments require, and also the people on campus. So, CERN is a pretty large organization. We have around 10,000 people on-site, and many more around the world that depend on our resources. So, we operate private clouds, we basically do DevOps-style work. And we have a team dedicated for the Cloud, but also for other areas of the data center. And it's mostly making sure everything operates correctly; try to automate more and more, so we do some improvements gradually; and then giving support to our users.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Just so everyone knows, can you tell a little bit more about what kind of work is done at CERN? What kind of experiments people are running?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ricardo: Our main goal is fundamental research. So, we try to answer some questions about the universe. So, what's dark matter? What's dark energy? Why don't we see antimatter? And similar questions. And for that, we build very large experiments. </p><p><br></p><p><br>So, the biggest experiment we have, which is actually the biggest scientific experiment ever built, is the Large Hadron Collider, and this is a particle accelerator that accelerates two beams of protons in opposite directions, and we make them collide at very specific points where we build this very large physics experiments that try to understand what happens in these collisions and try to look for new physics. And in reality, what happens with these collisions is that we generate large amounts of data that need to be stored, and processed, and analyzed, so the IT infrastructure that we support, it’s larger fraction dedicated to this physics analysis.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Tell me a little bit more about some of the challenges related to processing and storing the huge amount of data that you have. And also, how this has evolved, and how it pushed you to think about containerization.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ricardo: The big challenge we have is the amount of data that we have to support. So, these experiments, each of the experiments, at the moment of the collisions, it can generate data in the order of one petabyte a second. This is, of course, not something we can handle, so the first thing we do, we use these hardware triggers to filter this data quite significantly, but we still generate, per experiment, something like a few gigabytes a second, so up to 10 gigabytes a second. And this we have to store, and then we have large farms that will handle the processing and the reconstruction of all of this. So, we've had these sort of experiments since quite a while, and to analyze all of this, we need a large amount of resources, and with time. </p><p><br></p><p><br>If you come and visit CERN, you can see a bit of the history of computing, kind of evolving with what we used to have in the past in our data center. But it's mostly—we used to have large mainframes, that now it's more in the movies that we see them, but we used to have quite a few of those. And then we transitioned to physical commodity hardware with Linux servers. Eventually introduced virtualization and private clouds to improve the efficiency and the provisioning of these resources to our users, and then eventually, we moved to containers and the main motivation is always to try to be as efficient as possible, and to speed up this process of provisioning resources, and be more flexible in the way we assign compute and also storage. </p><p><br></p><p><br>What we've seen is that in the move from physical to virtualization, we saw that the provisioning and maintenance got significantly improved. What we see with containerization is the extra speed in also deployment and update of the applications that run on those resources. And we also see an improving resource utilization. We already had the possibility to improve quite a bit with virtualization by doing things like overcommit, but with containers, we can go one step further by doing more efficient resource sharing for the different applications we have to run.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Is the amount of data that you're processing stable? Is it steadily increasing, have spikes, a combination?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Ricardo: So, the way it works is, we have what we call ‘beam’ which is when we actually have protons circulating in the accelerator. And during these periods, we try to get as much collisions as ...</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 19 Aug 2020 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/3359d698/a7cafd3a.mp3" length="49657986" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2066</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>The European Organization for Nuclear Research (CERN), has produced some staggering accomplishments over the years, such as the discovery of the famous Higgs Boson, or “God particle,” and the internet. What often gets overlooked, though, is the sheer amount of data the organization is creating on a daily basis, and how the organization manages it.

In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, host Emily Omier talks with Ricardo Rocha who is a software engineer and architect at CERN. Ricardo provides an overview of how CERN is managing data today, as well as what led the organization to explore containerization and Kubernetes, and the benefits and challenges that it has produced for their staff members. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>The European Organization for Nuclear Research (CERN), has produced some staggering accomplishments over the years, such as the discovery of the famous Higgs Boson, or “God particle,” and the internet. What often gets overlooked, though, is the sheer amou</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Discussing the Latest Cloud Trends with Cloud Comrade Co-founder Andy Waroma</title>
      <itunes:episode>12</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>12</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Discussing the Latest Cloud Trends with Cloud Comrade Co-founder Andy Waroma</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">f1211ea9-33bb-4957-885d-afb2a0c30137</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/a00e2da4</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>Highlights from this episode include: </p><ul><li>Key market drivers that are causing Cloud Comrade’s clients to containerize applications — including the role that the global pandemic is playing.  </li><li>The pitfalls of approaching cloud migration with a cost-first strategy, and why Andy doesn’t believe in this approach. </li><li>Common misconceptions that can arise when comparing cloud TCO to on-premise infrastructure.</li><li>How today’s enterprises tend to view cloud computing versus cloud-native. Andy also mentions a key requirement that companies have to have when integrating cloud services.</li><li>Andy’s thoughts on build versus buy when integrating cloud services at the enterprise level.</li><li>Why cloud migration is a relatively safe undertaking for companies because it’s easy to correct mistakes.</li><li>Why businesses need to re-think AI and to be more realistic in terms of what can actually be automated. </li><li>Andy’s must-have engineering tool, which may surprise you.</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>Cloud Comrade LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/company/cloud-comrade/">https://www.linkedin.com/company/cloud-comrade/</a></li><li>Follow Andy on Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/andywaroma?lang=en">@andywaroma</a></li><li>Connect with Andy on LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/andyw/?originalSubdomain=sg">https://www.linkedin.com/in/andyw/</a></li></ul><p><b>Transcript</b></p><p>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. I'm Emily Omier, your host, and today I'm here with Andy Waroma. Andy, I just wanted to start with having you introduce yourself.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Andy: Yeah, hi. Thanks, Emily for having me on your podcast. My name is Andy Waroma, and I'm based in Singapore, but originally from Finland. I've been [unintelligible] in Singapore for about 20 years, and for 11 years I spent with a company called SAP focusing on business software applications. And then more recently, about six years ago, I co-founded together with my ex-colleague from SAP, a company called Cloud Comrade, and we have been running Cloud Comrade now for six years and Cloud Comrade focuses on two things: number one, on cloud migrations; and number two, on cloud managed services across the Southeast Asia region.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: What kind of things do you help companies understand when you're helping with cloud migrations? Is this like, like, a lift and shift? To what extent are you helping them change the architecture of their applications?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Andy: Good question. So, typically, if you look at the Southeast Asian market, we are probably anywhere between one to two years behind that of the US market. And I always like to say that the benefit that we have in Southeast Asia is that we have a time machine at our disposal. So, whatever has happened in the US in the past 18 months or so it's going to be happening also in Singapore and Southeast Asia. And for the first three to four years of this business, we saw a lot of lift and shift migrations, but more recently, we have been asked to go and containerize applications to microservices, revamp applications from monolithic approach to a much more flexible and cloud-native approach, and we just see those requirements increasing as companies understand what kind of innovation they can do on different cloud platforms.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And what do you think is driving, for your clients, this desire to containerize applications?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Andy: Well, if you asked me three months ago, I probably would have said it's about innovation, and business advantage, and getting ahead in the market, and investing in the future. Now, with the global pandemic situation, I would say that most companies are looking at two things: they're looking at cost savings, and they are also looking at automation. And I think cost savings is quite obvious; most companies need to know how they can reduce on their IT expenditure, how they can move from CAPEX to OPEX, how they can be targeting their resources up and down depending on the business demand what they have. And at the same time, they're also not looking to hire a lot of new people into their internal IT organization. So, therefore, most of our customers want to see their applications to be as automated as possible. And of course, microservices, CI/CD pipelines, and everything else helps them to achieve that somewhat. But first and foremost, of course, it's about all services that Cloud provides in general. And then once they have been moving some of those applications and getting positive experiences, that's where we typically see the phase two kicking in, going into cloud-native microservices, containers, Kubernetes, Docker, and so forth.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And do you think when companies are going into this, thinking, “Oh, I'm going to really reduce my costs.” Do you think they're generally successful?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Andy: I don't think in a way that they think they are. So, especially if I'm looking at the Southeast Asian markets: Singapore, Malaysia, Thailand, Philippines, Indonesia, and perhaps other countries like Vietnam, Myanmar, and Cambodia, it’s a very cost-conscious market, and I always, also like to say that when we go into a meeting, the first question that we get from the customers, “How much?” It is not even what are we going to be delivering, but how much it's going to cost them. That's the first gate of assessment. So, it's very much of an on-premise versus clouds comparison in the beginning.</p><p><br></p><p><br>And I think if companies go in with that type of a mindset, that's not necessarily the winning strategy for them. What they will come to know after a while is that, for example, setting up disaster recovery systems on an on-premise environment, especially when a separate location is extremely expensive, and doing something like that on the Cloud is going to be very cost-efficient. And that's when they start seeing cost savings. But typically, what they will start seeing on Cloud is a process cost-saving, so how they can do things faster, quicker, and be more flexible in terms of responding to end-user demands.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: At the beginning of the process, how much do you think your customers generally understand about how different the cost structure is going to be?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Andy: So, we have more than 200 customers, and we have done more than 500 projects over the six years, and there's a vast range of customers. We have done work with companies with a few people; we have done companies with Fortune 10 organizations, and everything in between, in all kinds of different industries: manufacturing, finance, insurance, public sector, industrial level things, nonprofits, research organizations. So, we can't really say that each customer are same. There are customers who are very sophisticated and they know exactly what they want when going to a cloud platform, but then there are, of course, many other customers who need to be advised much more in the beginning, and that’s where we typically...</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>Highlights from this episode include: </p><ul><li>Key market drivers that are causing Cloud Comrade’s clients to containerize applications — including the role that the global pandemic is playing.  </li><li>The pitfalls of approaching cloud migration with a cost-first strategy, and why Andy doesn’t believe in this approach. </li><li>Common misconceptions that can arise when comparing cloud TCO to on-premise infrastructure.</li><li>How today’s enterprises tend to view cloud computing versus cloud-native. Andy also mentions a key requirement that companies have to have when integrating cloud services.</li><li>Andy’s thoughts on build versus buy when integrating cloud services at the enterprise level.</li><li>Why cloud migration is a relatively safe undertaking for companies because it’s easy to correct mistakes.</li><li>Why businesses need to re-think AI and to be more realistic in terms of what can actually be automated. </li><li>Andy’s must-have engineering tool, which may surprise you.</li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>Cloud Comrade LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/company/cloud-comrade/">https://www.linkedin.com/company/cloud-comrade/</a></li><li>Follow Andy on Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/andywaroma?lang=en">@andywaroma</a></li><li>Connect with Andy on LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/andyw/?originalSubdomain=sg">https://www.linkedin.com/in/andyw/</a></li></ul><p><b>Transcript</b></p><p>Emily: Hi everyone. I’m Emily Omier, your host, and my day job is helping companies position themselves in the cloud-native ecosystem so that their product’s value is obvious to end-users. I started this podcast because organizations embark on the cloud naive journey for business reasons, but in general, the industry doesn’t talk about them. Instead, we talk a lot about technical reasons. I’m hoping that with this podcast, we focus more on the business goals and business motivations that lead organizations to adopt cloud-native and Kubernetes. I hope you’ll join me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. I'm Emily Omier, your host, and today I'm here with Andy Waroma. Andy, I just wanted to start with having you introduce yourself.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Andy: Yeah, hi. Thanks, Emily for having me on your podcast. My name is Andy Waroma, and I'm based in Singapore, but originally from Finland. I've been [unintelligible] in Singapore for about 20 years, and for 11 years I spent with a company called SAP focusing on business software applications. And then more recently, about six years ago, I co-founded together with my ex-colleague from SAP, a company called Cloud Comrade, and we have been running Cloud Comrade now for six years and Cloud Comrade focuses on two things: number one, on cloud migrations; and number two, on cloud managed services across the Southeast Asia region.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: What kind of things do you help companies understand when you're helping with cloud migrations? Is this like, like, a lift and shift? To what extent are you helping them change the architecture of their applications?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Andy: Good question. So, typically, if you look at the Southeast Asian market, we are probably anywhere between one to two years behind that of the US market. And I always like to say that the benefit that we have in Southeast Asia is that we have a time machine at our disposal. So, whatever has happened in the US in the past 18 months or so it's going to be happening also in Singapore and Southeast Asia. And for the first three to four years of this business, we saw a lot of lift and shift migrations, but more recently, we have been asked to go and containerize applications to microservices, revamp applications from monolithic approach to a much more flexible and cloud-native approach, and we just see those requirements increasing as companies understand what kind of innovation they can do on different cloud platforms.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And what do you think is driving, for your clients, this desire to containerize applications?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Andy: Well, if you asked me three months ago, I probably would have said it's about innovation, and business advantage, and getting ahead in the market, and investing in the future. Now, with the global pandemic situation, I would say that most companies are looking at two things: they're looking at cost savings, and they are also looking at automation. And I think cost savings is quite obvious; most companies need to know how they can reduce on their IT expenditure, how they can move from CAPEX to OPEX, how they can be targeting their resources up and down depending on the business demand what they have. And at the same time, they're also not looking to hire a lot of new people into their internal IT organization. So, therefore, most of our customers want to see their applications to be as automated as possible. And of course, microservices, CI/CD pipelines, and everything else helps them to achieve that somewhat. But first and foremost, of course, it's about all services that Cloud provides in general. And then once they have been moving some of those applications and getting positive experiences, that's where we typically see the phase two kicking in, going into cloud-native microservices, containers, Kubernetes, Docker, and so forth.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And do you think when companies are going into this, thinking, “Oh, I'm going to really reduce my costs.” Do you think they're generally successful?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Andy: I don't think in a way that they think they are. So, especially if I'm looking at the Southeast Asian markets: Singapore, Malaysia, Thailand, Philippines, Indonesia, and perhaps other countries like Vietnam, Myanmar, and Cambodia, it’s a very cost-conscious market, and I always, also like to say that when we go into a meeting, the first question that we get from the customers, “How much?” It is not even what are we going to be delivering, but how much it's going to cost them. That's the first gate of assessment. So, it's very much of an on-premise versus clouds comparison in the beginning.</p><p><br></p><p><br>And I think if companies go in with that type of a mindset, that's not necessarily the winning strategy for them. What they will come to know after a while is that, for example, setting up disaster recovery systems on an on-premise environment, especially when a separate location is extremely expensive, and doing something like that on the Cloud is going to be very cost-efficient. And that's when they start seeing cost savings. But typically, what they will start seeing on Cloud is a process cost-saving, so how they can do things faster, quicker, and be more flexible in terms of responding to end-user demands.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: At the beginning of the process, how much do you think your customers generally understand about how different the cost structure is going to be?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Andy: So, we have more than 200 customers, and we have done more than 500 projects over the six years, and there's a vast range of customers. We have done work with companies with a few people; we have done companies with Fortune 10 organizations, and everything in between, in all kinds of different industries: manufacturing, finance, insurance, public sector, industrial level things, nonprofits, research organizations. So, we can't really say that each customer are same. There are customers who are very sophisticated and they know exactly what they want when going to a cloud platform, but then there are, of course, many other customers who need to be advised much more in the beginning, and that’s where we typically...</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 12 Aug 2020 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/a00e2da4/e0f50212.mp3" length="35830102" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1490</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>The pandemic has forced many organizations to embrace cloud computing. In fact, 87 percent of global IT decision makers now agree that COVID-19 will push organizations to accelerate cloud migration, as they look to save money and improve reliability. 

In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, host Emily Omier speaks with Andy Waroma who is co-founder of Cloud Comrade — a leading Singapore-based cloud consulting agency. Emily and Andy discuss the recent surge in cloud computing, as well as key market trends. Andy also opens up about the Southeast Asia cloud market, and how enterprise customers are perceiving the cloud.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>The pandemic has forced many organizations to embrace cloud computing. In fact, 87 percent of global IT decision makers now agree that COVID-19 will push organizations to accelerate cloud migration, as they look to save money and improve reliability. 

</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>RVU’s Cloud Native Transformation with Paul Ingles</title>
      <itunes:episode>11</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>11</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>RVU’s Cloud Native Transformation with Paul Ingles</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">e5788788-c709-45f7-9b44-53caa35104e0</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/e4451bde</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>Some highlights of the show include:</strong></p><p><br></p><ul><li>The company’s cloud native journey, which accelerated with the acquisition of Uswitch. </li><li>How the company assessed risk prior to their migration, and why they ultimately decided the task was worth the gamble.</li><li>Uswitch’s transformation into a profitable company resulting from their cloud native migration.</li><li>The role that multidisciplinary, collaborative teams played in solving problems and moving projects forward. Paul also offers commentary on some of the tensions that resulted between different teams.</li><li>Key influencing factors that caused the company to adopt containerization and Kubernetes. Paul goes into detail about their migration to Kubernetes, and the problems that it addressed. </li><li>Paul’s thoughts on management and prioritization as CTO. He also explains his favorite engineering tool, which may come as a surprise. </li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>RVU Website: <a href="https://www.rvu.co.uk/">https://www.rvu.co.uk/</a></li><li>Uswitch Website: <a href="https://www.uswitch.com/">https://www.uswitch.com/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/pingles">https://twitter.com/pingles</a></li><li>GitHub: <a href="https://github.com/pingles">https://github.com/pingles</a></li></ul><p><b>Transcript</b></p><p><br>Announcer: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em> podcast, where we explore how end users talk and think about the transition to Kubernetes and cloud-native architectures.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. I'm your host, Emily Omier, and today I am chatting with Paul Ingles. Paul, thank you so much for joining me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Paul: Thank you for having me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Could you just introduce yourself: where do you work? What do you do? And include, sort of, some specifics. We all have a job title, but it doesn't always reflect what our actual day-to-day is.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Paul: I am the CTO at a company called <a href="https://www.rvu.co.uk/">RVU</a> in London. We run a couple of reasonably big-ish price comparison, aggregator type sites. So, we help consumers figure out and compare prices on broadband products, mobile phones, energy—so in the UK, energy is something which is provided through a bunch of different private companies, so you've got a fair amount of choice on kind of that thing. So, we tried to make it easier and simpler for people to make better decisions on the household choices that they have. I've been there for about 10 years, so I've had a few different roles. So, as CTO now, I sit on the exec team and try to help inform the business and technology strategy. But I've come through a bunch of teams. So, I've worked on some of the early energy price comparison stuff, some data infrastructure work a while ago, and then some underlying DevOps type automation and Kubernetes work a couple of years ago.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: So, when you get in to work in the morning, what types of things are usually on your plate?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Paul: So, I keep a journal. I use bullet journalling quite extensively. So, I try to track everything that I’ve got to keep on top of. Generally, what I would try to do each day is catch up with anybody that I specifically need to follow up with. So, at the start of the week, I make a list of every day, and then I also keep a separate column for just general priorities. </p><p><br></p><p><br>So, things that are particularly important for the week, themes of work going on, like, technology changes, or things that we're trying to launch, et cetera. And then I will prioritize speaking to people based on those things. So, I'll try and make sure that I'm focusing on the most important thing. I do a weekly meeting with the team. So, we have a few directors that look after different aspects of the business, and so we do a weekly meeting to just run through everything that's going on and sharing the problems. We use the three P's model: so, sharing progress problems and plans. And we use that to try and steer on what we do. And we also look at some other team health metrics. </p><p><br></p><p><br>Yeah, it's interesting actually. I think when I switched from working in one of the teams to being in the CTO role, things change quite substantially. That list of things that I had to care about increase hugely, to the point where it far exceeded how much time I had to spend on anything. So, nowadays, I find that I'm much more likely for some things to drop off. And so it's unfortunate, and you can't please everybody, so you just have to say, “I'm really sorry, but this thing is not high on the list of priorities, so I can't spend any time on it this week, but if it's still a problem in a couple of weeks time, then we'll come back to it.” But yeah, it can vary quite a lot.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Hmm, interesting. I might ask you more questions about that later. For now, let's sort of dive into the cloud-native journey. What made RVU decide that containerization was a good idea and that Kubernetes was a good idea? What were the motivations and who was pushing for it?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Paul: That's a really good question. So, I got involved about 10 years ago. So, I worked for a search marketing startup that was in London called Forward Internet Group, and they acquired <a href="https://www.uswitch.com/">USwitch</a> in 2010. And prior to working at Forward, I'd worked as a consultant at ThoughtWorks in London, so I spent a lot of time working in banks on continuous delivery and things like that. And so when Uswitch came along, there were a few issues around the software release process. Although there was a ton of automation, it was still quite slow to actually get releases out. We were only doing a release every fortnight. And we also had a few issues with the scalability of data. </p><p><br></p><p><br>So, it was a monolithic Windows Microsoft stack. So, there was SQL Server databases, and .NET app servers, and things like that. And our traffic can be quite spiky, so when companies are in the news, or there's policy changes and things like that, we would suddenly get an increase in traffic, and the Microsoft solution would just generally kind of fall apart as soon as we hit some kind of threshold. So, I got involved, partly to try and improve some of the automation and release practices because at the search start-up, we were releasing experiments every couple of hours, even. </p><p><br></p><p><br>And so we wanted to try and take a bit of that ethos over to Uswitch, and also to try and solve some of the data scalability and system scalability problems. And when we got started doing that, a lot of it was—so that was in the early heyday of AWS, so this was about 2008, that I was at the search startup. And we were used to using EC2 to try and spin up Hadoop clusters and a few other bits and pieces that we were playing around with. And when we acquired Uswitch, we felt like it was quickest for us to just create a different environment, stick it under the load balancer so end users wouldn't realize that some requests was being served off of the AWS infrastructure instead, and then just gradually go from there. We found that that was just the fastest way to move. </p><p><br></p><p><br>So, I think it was interesting, and it was both a deliberate move, but it was also I think the degree to which we followed through on it, I don't think we'd really anticipated quite how quickly we would shift everything. And so when Forward made the acquisition, I joined summer of 2010, and myself and a colleague wrote ...</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>Some highlights of the show include:</strong></p><p><br></p><ul><li>The company’s cloud native journey, which accelerated with the acquisition of Uswitch. </li><li>How the company assessed risk prior to their migration, and why they ultimately decided the task was worth the gamble.</li><li>Uswitch’s transformation into a profitable company resulting from their cloud native migration.</li><li>The role that multidisciplinary, collaborative teams played in solving problems and moving projects forward. Paul also offers commentary on some of the tensions that resulted between different teams.</li><li>Key influencing factors that caused the company to adopt containerization and Kubernetes. Paul goes into detail about their migration to Kubernetes, and the problems that it addressed. </li><li>Paul’s thoughts on management and prioritization as CTO. He also explains his favorite engineering tool, which may come as a surprise. </li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>RVU Website: <a href="https://www.rvu.co.uk/">https://www.rvu.co.uk/</a></li><li>Uswitch Website: <a href="https://www.uswitch.com/">https://www.uswitch.com/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/pingles">https://twitter.com/pingles</a></li><li>GitHub: <a href="https://github.com/pingles">https://github.com/pingles</a></li></ul><p><b>Transcript</b></p><p><br>Announcer: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em> podcast, where we explore how end users talk and think about the transition to Kubernetes and cloud-native architectures.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. I'm your host, Emily Omier, and today I am chatting with Paul Ingles. Paul, thank you so much for joining me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Paul: Thank you for having me.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Could you just introduce yourself: where do you work? What do you do? And include, sort of, some specifics. We all have a job title, but it doesn't always reflect what our actual day-to-day is.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Paul: I am the CTO at a company called <a href="https://www.rvu.co.uk/">RVU</a> in London. We run a couple of reasonably big-ish price comparison, aggregator type sites. So, we help consumers figure out and compare prices on broadband products, mobile phones, energy—so in the UK, energy is something which is provided through a bunch of different private companies, so you've got a fair amount of choice on kind of that thing. So, we tried to make it easier and simpler for people to make better decisions on the household choices that they have. I've been there for about 10 years, so I've had a few different roles. So, as CTO now, I sit on the exec team and try to help inform the business and technology strategy. But I've come through a bunch of teams. So, I've worked on some of the early energy price comparison stuff, some data infrastructure work a while ago, and then some underlying DevOps type automation and Kubernetes work a couple of years ago.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: So, when you get in to work in the morning, what types of things are usually on your plate?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Paul: So, I keep a journal. I use bullet journalling quite extensively. So, I try to track everything that I’ve got to keep on top of. Generally, what I would try to do each day is catch up with anybody that I specifically need to follow up with. So, at the start of the week, I make a list of every day, and then I also keep a separate column for just general priorities. </p><p><br></p><p><br>So, things that are particularly important for the week, themes of work going on, like, technology changes, or things that we're trying to launch, et cetera. And then I will prioritize speaking to people based on those things. So, I'll try and make sure that I'm focusing on the most important thing. I do a weekly meeting with the team. So, we have a few directors that look after different aspects of the business, and so we do a weekly meeting to just run through everything that's going on and sharing the problems. We use the three P's model: so, sharing progress problems and plans. And we use that to try and steer on what we do. And we also look at some other team health metrics. </p><p><br></p><p><br>Yeah, it's interesting actually. I think when I switched from working in one of the teams to being in the CTO role, things change quite substantially. That list of things that I had to care about increase hugely, to the point where it far exceeded how much time I had to spend on anything. So, nowadays, I find that I'm much more likely for some things to drop off. And so it's unfortunate, and you can't please everybody, so you just have to say, “I'm really sorry, but this thing is not high on the list of priorities, so I can't spend any time on it this week, but if it's still a problem in a couple of weeks time, then we'll come back to it.” But yeah, it can vary quite a lot.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Hmm, interesting. I might ask you more questions about that later. For now, let's sort of dive into the cloud-native journey. What made RVU decide that containerization was a good idea and that Kubernetes was a good idea? What were the motivations and who was pushing for it?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Paul: That's a really good question. So, I got involved about 10 years ago. So, I worked for a search marketing startup that was in London called Forward Internet Group, and they acquired <a href="https://www.uswitch.com/">USwitch</a> in 2010. And prior to working at Forward, I'd worked as a consultant at ThoughtWorks in London, so I spent a lot of time working in banks on continuous delivery and things like that. And so when Uswitch came along, there were a few issues around the software release process. Although there was a ton of automation, it was still quite slow to actually get releases out. We were only doing a release every fortnight. And we also had a few issues with the scalability of data. </p><p><br></p><p><br>So, it was a monolithic Windows Microsoft stack. So, there was SQL Server databases, and .NET app servers, and things like that. And our traffic can be quite spiky, so when companies are in the news, or there's policy changes and things like that, we would suddenly get an increase in traffic, and the Microsoft solution would just generally kind of fall apart as soon as we hit some kind of threshold. So, I got involved, partly to try and improve some of the automation and release practices because at the search start-up, we were releasing experiments every couple of hours, even. </p><p><br></p><p><br>And so we wanted to try and take a bit of that ethos over to Uswitch, and also to try and solve some of the data scalability and system scalability problems. And when we got started doing that, a lot of it was—so that was in the early heyday of AWS, so this was about 2008, that I was at the search startup. And we were used to using EC2 to try and spin up Hadoop clusters and a few other bits and pieces that we were playing around with. And when we acquired Uswitch, we felt like it was quickest for us to just create a different environment, stick it under the load balancer so end users wouldn't realize that some requests was being served off of the AWS infrastructure instead, and then just gradually go from there. We found that that was just the fastest way to move. </p><p><br></p><p><br>So, I think it was interesting, and it was both a deliberate move, but it was also I think the degree to which we followed through on it, I don't think we'd really anticipated quite how quickly we would shift everything. And so when Forward made the acquisition, I joined summer of 2010, and myself and a colleague wrote ...</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 05 Aug 2020 03:00:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/e4451bde/c49c6de9.mp3" length="54114140" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2252</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Paul Ingles is chief technology officer at RVU, a London-based price comparison aggregator. As CTO, Paul sits on the executive team and helps guide business and technical strategy. Over the last decade, Paul has played an instrumental role in helping the organization navigate their transition to containerization and Kubernetes. 

In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, host Emily Omier and Paul take a deep dive into the driving factors behind their cloud native migration, and why it has been a tremendous success for the organization.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Paul Ingles is chief technology officer at RVU, a London-based price comparison aggregator. As CTO, Paul sits on the executive team and helps guide business and technical strategy. Over the last decade, Paul has played an instrumental role in helping the </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Vodafone’s Cloud Native Journey with Tom Kivlin</title>
      <itunes:episode>10</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>10</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Vodafone’s Cloud Native Journey with Tom Kivlin</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">7725562f-dad8-44aa-87c7-329527009a8a</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/facd8f60</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>Some of the highlights include: </strong></p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why Vodafone moved to a cloud native architecture. As Tom explains, the company was struggling to manage operations across more than 20 markets. They also needed to improve the customer experience, and foster customer loyalty. </li><li>Why their business and engineering teams were both in favor of cloud native.</li><li>The benefits of deploying daily operational activities around a single cloud native platform.  </li><li>An overview of where Vodavone currently is in their overall cloud native journey. Tom also explains how cloud native conversations have changed inside of the company throughout their journey, as various business units have caught on to the benefits of the cloud.</li><li>Vodafaone’s transition from outsourcing roughly 97 percent of their operations, to bringing 95 percent in house. Tom explains how this has improved efficiency and expedited time to market.</li><li>The challenge that Vodafone faced in trying to apply legacy network security solutions to distributed and dynamic systems. </li><li>Tom’s thoughts on why Vodafone’s cloud native transition and modernization efforts have been crucial to their success over the last five years. </li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>Vodafone Group: <a href="https://www.vodafone.com/">https://www.vodafone.com/</a></li><li>Connect with Tom on LinkedIn: <a href="https://uk.linkedin.com/in/tom-kivlin-5b469321">https://uk.linkedin.com/in/tom-kivlin-5b469321</a></li><li>The Business of Cloud Native: <a href="http://thebusinessofcloudnative.com/">http://thebusinessofcloudnative.com</a> </li><li>Tom’s Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/tomkivlin">https://twitter.com/tomkivlin</a></li><li>CNCF GitHub: <a href="https://github.com/cncf">https://github.com/cncf</a></li><li>CNCF Slack: <a href="https://slack.cncf.io/">https://slack.cncf.io/</a></li><li>Kubernetes Slack: <a href="http://slack.kubernetes.io/">http://slack.kubernetes.io/</a></li></ul><p><br></p><p><b>Transcript</b></p><p><br>Announcer: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em> podcast, where we explore how end users talk and think about the transition to Kubernetes and cloud-native architectures.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. I'm Emily Omier, your host, and today I am chatting with Tom Kivlin. Tom, thank you so much for joining us.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Tom: You're welcome. No problem.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Let's just start out with having you introduce yourself. What do you do? Where do you work, and what do you actually do during your workday?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Tom: Sure. So, I'm a principal cloud orchestration architect at <a href="https://www.vodafone.com/">Vodafone Group</a>. I work in the UK. And my day job consists of providing guidance and strategy and architectural blueprints for cloud-native platforms within Vodafone. So, that's around providing guidance to the software domains that are looking to adopt cloud-native architectures and methodologies and also to the more traditional infrastructure domains to try and help them provide their services in a more cloud-native manner to those modern teams.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And what does that mean when you go into the office—or your home office, go into your dining room where your laptop is, I don't know—what do you actually do? What does an average day look like?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Tom: It can vary. So, depending on the activity at the time, it could be anything from preparing a global policy that needs to go through the senior technology leadership team, to preparing some extremely detailed requirements for selection process or creating some infrastructures code, or the code artifacts for the deployment of cloud-native services, whether that's in our lab, or to help our services teams within Vodafone.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Tell me a little bit more about what pain made Vodafone think about moving to cloud-native and Kubernetes.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Tom: Primarily, it was the challenge of having 25 different markets, or 23 now. We launched a digital strategy to—so back in 2015, we launched a five-year strategy, which we wanted to massively increase the rollout of 4G, of converged network offerings, of improved customer experience. And we found that the traditional way of managing software was not supportive enough in our ambition. And so, having to choose cloud-native technologies, things like Kubernetes, but also the modern operating models, that was the driver: it was to improve our customer experience, and our customer-affecting KPIs, really.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And when you say it wasn't supportive enough, what do you mean specifically?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Tom: So, things like time to market, for example. So, if we wanted to offer a new service—so one of the things that 4G started the drive towards was a more granulated service offering to consumers, and so lots of different things could be offered. And if it took you six months to think of an idea and then have to go through—or even longer than six months to get to the point where that could be offered to customers, even if it was just a very minor feature within an existing product, then that's not going to engender customer loyalty. And so, things like the cloud-native mindset, where there's a much closer link between the engineering teams and the customer, there are much shorter periods of time between ideas coming in from the customers and then being delivered back to the customers as product features, that sort of time to market was really enabled by cloud-native technologies and mindsets.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And how does having two dozen, more or less, different markets, how does that play into the decision A) to move to cloud-native in general, and managing the IT infrastructure?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Tom: So, one of the things that's really driven it is trying to simplify and reuse artifacts. So, if you've got 23 markets all doing a different thing, then there's obviously a lot of duplication happening across the group, whereas if everyone's using the same technology in the same platforms—take Kubernetes as the example—everyone can write their software for that platform. Everyone can write their operational ecosystem around that platform. So, the deployment artifacts, the pipelines, the day two operational activities, they can all be based around that single cloud-native platform. And so, that enables a huge amount of efficiency from the operational side. And that in turn allows those engineering teams to focus on things that are adding value to the business and the customer instead of having to focus on fairly low-level tasks that are just keeping the lights on, if you like.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: What's different for each one of those markets?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Tom: So, it might be something like language, it might be something as simple as that. It may be that the offerings are slightly tweaked. So, rather than, I don't know, as an example, rather than Spotify being included as a kind of add on, it might be some other service that's more relevant to that market. It may be that there are particular regulatory requirements that are specific to a market that needs to be considered within the product design and the engineering of it. And so, having a cloud-native response allows sharing and reuse of artifacts where we can, but still allows for that customization where it's required.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Where would you say Vodafone is in the cloud-native journey? Do you feel like you've, mission accomplished?</p><p>&lt;...</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>Some of the highlights include: </strong></p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why Vodafone moved to a cloud native architecture. As Tom explains, the company was struggling to manage operations across more than 20 markets. They also needed to improve the customer experience, and foster customer loyalty. </li><li>Why their business and engineering teams were both in favor of cloud native.</li><li>The benefits of deploying daily operational activities around a single cloud native platform.  </li><li>An overview of where Vodavone currently is in their overall cloud native journey. Tom also explains how cloud native conversations have changed inside of the company throughout their journey, as various business units have caught on to the benefits of the cloud.</li><li>Vodafaone’s transition from outsourcing roughly 97 percent of their operations, to bringing 95 percent in house. Tom explains how this has improved efficiency and expedited time to market.</li><li>The challenge that Vodafone faced in trying to apply legacy network security solutions to distributed and dynamic systems. </li><li>Tom’s thoughts on why Vodafone’s cloud native transition and modernization efforts have been crucial to their success over the last five years. </li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>Vodafone Group: <a href="https://www.vodafone.com/">https://www.vodafone.com/</a></li><li>Connect with Tom on LinkedIn: <a href="https://uk.linkedin.com/in/tom-kivlin-5b469321">https://uk.linkedin.com/in/tom-kivlin-5b469321</a></li><li>The Business of Cloud Native: <a href="http://thebusinessofcloudnative.com/">http://thebusinessofcloudnative.com</a> </li><li>Tom’s Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/tomkivlin">https://twitter.com/tomkivlin</a></li><li>CNCF GitHub: <a href="https://github.com/cncf">https://github.com/cncf</a></li><li>CNCF Slack: <a href="https://slack.cncf.io/">https://slack.cncf.io/</a></li><li>Kubernetes Slack: <a href="http://slack.kubernetes.io/">http://slack.kubernetes.io/</a></li></ul><p><br></p><p><b>Transcript</b></p><p><br>Announcer: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em> podcast, where we explore how end users talk and think about the transition to Kubernetes and cloud-native architectures.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. I'm Emily Omier, your host, and today I am chatting with Tom Kivlin. Tom, thank you so much for joining us.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Tom: You're welcome. No problem.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Let's just start out with having you introduce yourself. What do you do? Where do you work, and what do you actually do during your workday?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Tom: Sure. So, I'm a principal cloud orchestration architect at <a href="https://www.vodafone.com/">Vodafone Group</a>. I work in the UK. And my day job consists of providing guidance and strategy and architectural blueprints for cloud-native platforms within Vodafone. So, that's around providing guidance to the software domains that are looking to adopt cloud-native architectures and methodologies and also to the more traditional infrastructure domains to try and help them provide their services in a more cloud-native manner to those modern teams.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And what does that mean when you go into the office—or your home office, go into your dining room where your laptop is, I don't know—what do you actually do? What does an average day look like?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Tom: It can vary. So, depending on the activity at the time, it could be anything from preparing a global policy that needs to go through the senior technology leadership team, to preparing some extremely detailed requirements for selection process or creating some infrastructures code, or the code artifacts for the deployment of cloud-native services, whether that's in our lab, or to help our services teams within Vodafone.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Tell me a little bit more about what pain made Vodafone think about moving to cloud-native and Kubernetes.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Tom: Primarily, it was the challenge of having 25 different markets, or 23 now. We launched a digital strategy to—so back in 2015, we launched a five-year strategy, which we wanted to massively increase the rollout of 4G, of converged network offerings, of improved customer experience. And we found that the traditional way of managing software was not supportive enough in our ambition. And so, having to choose cloud-native technologies, things like Kubernetes, but also the modern operating models, that was the driver: it was to improve our customer experience, and our customer-affecting KPIs, really.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And when you say it wasn't supportive enough, what do you mean specifically?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Tom: So, things like time to market, for example. So, if we wanted to offer a new service—so one of the things that 4G started the drive towards was a more granulated service offering to consumers, and so lots of different things could be offered. And if it took you six months to think of an idea and then have to go through—or even longer than six months to get to the point where that could be offered to customers, even if it was just a very minor feature within an existing product, then that's not going to engender customer loyalty. And so, things like the cloud-native mindset, where there's a much closer link between the engineering teams and the customer, there are much shorter periods of time between ideas coming in from the customers and then being delivered back to the customers as product features, that sort of time to market was really enabled by cloud-native technologies and mindsets.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And how does having two dozen, more or less, different markets, how does that play into the decision A) to move to cloud-native in general, and managing the IT infrastructure?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Tom: So, one of the things that's really driven it is trying to simplify and reuse artifacts. So, if you've got 23 markets all doing a different thing, then there's obviously a lot of duplication happening across the group, whereas if everyone's using the same technology in the same platforms—take Kubernetes as the example—everyone can write their software for that platform. Everyone can write their operational ecosystem around that platform. So, the deployment artifacts, the pipelines, the day two operational activities, they can all be based around that single cloud-native platform. And so, that enables a huge amount of efficiency from the operational side. And that in turn allows those engineering teams to focus on things that are adding value to the business and the customer instead of having to focus on fairly low-level tasks that are just keeping the lights on, if you like.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: What's different for each one of those markets?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Tom: So, it might be something like language, it might be something as simple as that. It may be that the offerings are slightly tweaked. So, rather than, I don't know, as an example, rather than Spotify being included as a kind of add on, it might be some other service that's more relevant to that market. It may be that there are particular regulatory requirements that are specific to a market that needs to be considered within the product design and the engineering of it. And so, having a cloud-native response allows sharing and reuse of artifacts where we can, but still allows for that customization where it's required.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Where would you say Vodafone is in the cloud-native journey? Do you feel like you've, mission accomplished?</p><p>&lt;...</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 29 Jul 2020 03:00:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/facd8f60/df23eedf.mp3" length="39473656" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1642</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Back in 2015 Vodafone launched a cloud modernization campaign, a decision that led to significant technological and cultural changes within the organization. The project was a major success, helping Vodafone bring new solutions to market faster and more efficiently than they previously could. Vodafone now offers 4G service across 21 different markets, and has the largest 5G network in Europe.

In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, host Emily Omier talks with Tom Kivlin who is a principal cloud orchestration architect at Vodafone. Tom and Emily discuss some of the key influencing factors that pushed Vodafone to embrace cloud native, as well as the challenges and benefits that they have discovered throughout their migration journey.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Back in 2015 Vodafone launched a cloud modernization campaign, a decision that led to significant technological and cultural changes within the organization. The project was a major success, helping Vodafone bring new solutions to market faster and more e</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Cloud Costs: A Conversation with Travis Rehl</title>
      <itunes:episode>9</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>9</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Cloud Costs: A Conversation with Travis Rehl</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">accd2afc-457e-49cd-a4b3-5f93d1a17414</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/df116cf7</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>This conversation covers: </strong></p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why many businesses are shifting away from analyzing total cloud spend (CapEX vs. OpEX) and are now forecasting spend based around usage patterns.</li><li>The difference between cloud-native, cloud computing, and operating in the cloud. </li><li>The delta that often exists between engineering teams and business stakeholders regarding costs. Travis also offers tips for aligning both parties earlier in the project lifecycle.</li><li>Common misconceptions that exist around cost management, for both engineers and business stakeholders. For example, Travis talks about how engineers often assume that business teams manage purely to dollars and cents, when they are often very open to extending budgets when it’s necessary.</li><li>Tips for predicting cloud spend, and why teams usually fall short in their projections.</li><li>Why conducting cloud cost management too early in a project can be detrimental. </li><li>Comparing the cost of the cloud to a private data center. </li><li>The growing reliance on multi-cloud among large enterprises. Travis also explains why it’s important to have the right processes in place, to identify cross-cloud saving opportunities. </li><li>How IT has transitioned from a business enabler to a business driver in recent years, and is now arguably the most important component for the average company.</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/TravisWRehl">https://twitter.com/TravisWRehl</a></li><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/travis-rehl-tech/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/travis-rehl-tech/</a></li><li>Main Company Site: <a href="https://cloudcheckr.com">https://cloudcheckr.com</a> </li><li>CloudCheckr All Stars: <a href="https://cloudchecker.com/allstars">https://cloudchecker.com/allstars</a> </li></ul><p><b>Transcript</b></p><p><br>Announcer: Welcome to <em>The Business of cloud-native</em> podcast, where we explore how end users talk and think about the transition to Kubernetes and cloud-native architectures.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to the <em>Business of cloud-native</em>. I'm your host, Emily Omier, and I'm here today with Travis Rehl, who is the director of product at <a href="https://cloudcheckr.com">CloudCheckr</a>. Travis, I just wanted to start out, first of all, by saying thank you for joining me on the show. And second of all, if you could just start off by introducing yourself. What you do, and by that I mean, what does an actual day look like? And some of your background?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Travis: Yeah. Well, thanks for having me. So yeah, I'm Travis Rehl, director of product here at CloudCheckr. What that really means is, I have the fun job of figuring out what should the business do next in relation to our product offering here at the business. That means roadmap, looking at the market, what are customers doing differently now, or planning to do differently over the next year, two years or so, on cloud? What their cost strategies are, what their invoicing and chargeback strategies are, all that type of fun stuff, and how we can help accommodate those particular strategies using our product offering. </p><p><br></p><p><br>Sort of, day to day, though, I would say that a bunch of my time during the day is spent talking to customers, figuring out where they are in their cloud journey, if you will, what programs or projects they may have in flight that are interesting, or complicated, or they need help on. Especially making any sort of analysis help in particular, and then lastly, taking all that information and packaging it up neatly, so that the business can make a decision to add functionality to our product in some way that can assist them move forward.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: The first question I wanted to ask is actually if you could talk just a little bit about the distinction between cloud-native, and cloud computing, and operating in the cloud. What do all of those things actually mean, and where's the delta between them?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Travis: Sure. Yeah so, it's actually kind of interesting, and you'll hear it a little bit differently from different people. In my background, in particular—I used to run an engineering department for a managed service provider. And so we used to do a lot of project planning of companies as to what's their strategy for their software deployment of some kind on cloud. And typically the two you see for, say, cloud-native versus operating in the cloud, operating on the cloud is very atypical. </p><p><br></p><p><br>You'd associate that to something like lift and shift—probably hear about a lot—the concept of taking your on-prem workload and simply cloning it, or taking it in some way and copying in some way, on to the cloud-native vendor in particular. So, literally just standing up servers of clones of hard drives and so forth, and emulating what you had on-prem, but on the cloud. That's a great technique for moving quickly to cloud. That's not a great technique if you want to be cloud-native. So, that's really the big segue for cloud-native, in particular, is you want to build a software solution that takes advantage of cloud-only technology, meaning serverless compute resources, meaning auto-scaling different types of services themselves, stuff you probably didn't have when you're on-prem originally, that you now have, you can take advantage of on the cloud. That's almost like a redesign, or reimplementation around those models that cloud itself provides to you. That, to me, is the big difference. And I see oftentimes that gap-wise, many companies who are starting on-prem, they will do the migration to cloud first, the lift and shift model, and then they will decide, “Hey, I want to redesign pieces of it to make it more cloud-native.” And then you'll see startups who don't have on-prem at all, they will just go into cloud-native from the get-go.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Of course, CloudCheckr specializes in helping with costs among some other things, but how do costs fit into this journey, and what sort of cost-related concerns do companies have as they're on this cloud journey?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Travis: Yeah, so there's a few. I would actually say that years ago—just to clarify, the discussion has changed over the last few years—but years ago, it started with CapEx versus OpEx costs, specifically for purchasing of your IT services. On-prem, you'd probably purchase up-front a bulk number of VMs or servers or otherwise, for a number of years, and so be a CapEx cost. When you moved over to cloud and more of this, usage-based, model kind of threw a lot of people for a loop when it came to more OpEx usage space models. AWS, Azure, GCP have helped in that regard with things like reserved instances for companies who are more CapEx oriented as well, but in terms of the initial years ago, a big hurdle was communicating that difference and how the business may pay for these services. And a lot of people were very interested in moving to OpEx back then, in particular. </p><p><br></p><p><br>When it came to how do you take into account all these cost-related changes the business may go through, one of the big ones that I see most recently is around the transference and storage of data. In the past, it would have been about how much money total am I going to spend on the cloud itself. Now, it's about what am I forecasting to spend based off of those usage patterns. It's a bit easier to forecast those things when you have servers that run for a period of time, but when you have usage patterns for data ingestion, for data transfer, for servers spinning up and spinning down and scaling out horizontally, ...</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>This conversation covers: </strong></p><p><br></p><ul><li>Why many businesses are shifting away from analyzing total cloud spend (CapEX vs. OpEX) and are now forecasting spend based around usage patterns.</li><li>The difference between cloud-native, cloud computing, and operating in the cloud. </li><li>The delta that often exists between engineering teams and business stakeholders regarding costs. Travis also offers tips for aligning both parties earlier in the project lifecycle.</li><li>Common misconceptions that exist around cost management, for both engineers and business stakeholders. For example, Travis talks about how engineers often assume that business teams manage purely to dollars and cents, when they are often very open to extending budgets when it’s necessary.</li><li>Tips for predicting cloud spend, and why teams usually fall short in their projections.</li><li>Why conducting cloud cost management too early in a project can be detrimental. </li><li>Comparing the cost of the cloud to a private data center. </li><li>The growing reliance on multi-cloud among large enterprises. Travis also explains why it’s important to have the right processes in place, to identify cross-cloud saving opportunities. </li><li>How IT has transitioned from a business enabler to a business driver in recent years, and is now arguably the most important component for the average company.</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/TravisWRehl">https://twitter.com/TravisWRehl</a></li><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/travis-rehl-tech/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/travis-rehl-tech/</a></li><li>Main Company Site: <a href="https://cloudcheckr.com">https://cloudcheckr.com</a> </li><li>CloudCheckr All Stars: <a href="https://cloudchecker.com/allstars">https://cloudchecker.com/allstars</a> </li></ul><p><b>Transcript</b></p><p><br>Announcer: Welcome to <em>The Business of cloud-native</em> podcast, where we explore how end users talk and think about the transition to Kubernetes and cloud-native architectures.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to the <em>Business of cloud-native</em>. I'm your host, Emily Omier, and I'm here today with Travis Rehl, who is the director of product at <a href="https://cloudcheckr.com">CloudCheckr</a>. Travis, I just wanted to start out, first of all, by saying thank you for joining me on the show. And second of all, if you could just start off by introducing yourself. What you do, and by that I mean, what does an actual day look like? And some of your background?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Travis: Yeah. Well, thanks for having me. So yeah, I'm Travis Rehl, director of product here at CloudCheckr. What that really means is, I have the fun job of figuring out what should the business do next in relation to our product offering here at the business. That means roadmap, looking at the market, what are customers doing differently now, or planning to do differently over the next year, two years or so, on cloud? What their cost strategies are, what their invoicing and chargeback strategies are, all that type of fun stuff, and how we can help accommodate those particular strategies using our product offering. </p><p><br></p><p><br>Sort of, day to day, though, I would say that a bunch of my time during the day is spent talking to customers, figuring out where they are in their cloud journey, if you will, what programs or projects they may have in flight that are interesting, or complicated, or they need help on. Especially making any sort of analysis help in particular, and then lastly, taking all that information and packaging it up neatly, so that the business can make a decision to add functionality to our product in some way that can assist them move forward.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: The first question I wanted to ask is actually if you could talk just a little bit about the distinction between cloud-native, and cloud computing, and operating in the cloud. What do all of those things actually mean, and where's the delta between them?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Travis: Sure. Yeah so, it's actually kind of interesting, and you'll hear it a little bit differently from different people. In my background, in particular—I used to run an engineering department for a managed service provider. And so we used to do a lot of project planning of companies as to what's their strategy for their software deployment of some kind on cloud. And typically the two you see for, say, cloud-native versus operating in the cloud, operating on the cloud is very atypical. </p><p><br></p><p><br>You'd associate that to something like lift and shift—probably hear about a lot—the concept of taking your on-prem workload and simply cloning it, or taking it in some way and copying in some way, on to the cloud-native vendor in particular. So, literally just standing up servers of clones of hard drives and so forth, and emulating what you had on-prem, but on the cloud. That's a great technique for moving quickly to cloud. That's not a great technique if you want to be cloud-native. So, that's really the big segue for cloud-native, in particular, is you want to build a software solution that takes advantage of cloud-only technology, meaning serverless compute resources, meaning auto-scaling different types of services themselves, stuff you probably didn't have when you're on-prem originally, that you now have, you can take advantage of on the cloud. That's almost like a redesign, or reimplementation around those models that cloud itself provides to you. That, to me, is the big difference. And I see oftentimes that gap-wise, many companies who are starting on-prem, they will do the migration to cloud first, the lift and shift model, and then they will decide, “Hey, I want to redesign pieces of it to make it more cloud-native.” And then you'll see startups who don't have on-prem at all, they will just go into cloud-native from the get-go.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Of course, CloudCheckr specializes in helping with costs among some other things, but how do costs fit into this journey, and what sort of cost-related concerns do companies have as they're on this cloud journey?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Travis: Yeah, so there's a few. I would actually say that years ago—just to clarify, the discussion has changed over the last few years—but years ago, it started with CapEx versus OpEx costs, specifically for purchasing of your IT services. On-prem, you'd probably purchase up-front a bulk number of VMs or servers or otherwise, for a number of years, and so be a CapEx cost. When you moved over to cloud and more of this, usage-based, model kind of threw a lot of people for a loop when it came to more OpEx usage space models. AWS, Azure, GCP have helped in that regard with things like reserved instances for companies who are more CapEx oriented as well, but in terms of the initial years ago, a big hurdle was communicating that difference and how the business may pay for these services. And a lot of people were very interested in moving to OpEx back then, in particular. </p><p><br></p><p><br>When it came to how do you take into account all these cost-related changes the business may go through, one of the big ones that I see most recently is around the transference and storage of data. In the past, it would have been about how much money total am I going to spend on the cloud itself. Now, it's about what am I forecasting to spend based off of those usage patterns. It's a bit easier to forecast those things when you have servers that run for a period of time, but when you have usage patterns for data ingestion, for data transfer, for servers spinning up and spinning down and scaling out horizontally, ...</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 22 Jul 2020 03:00:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/df116cf7/9efc9643.mp3" length="50945580" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2120</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Travis Rehl is director of product at CloudCheckr, a platform that unifies IT, security, and finance teams around the cloud, through deep visibility, automation, and governance. As director of product, Travis works closely with customers, helping them navigate their cloud journeys, and using his insights to help the company roadmap future offerings.

In this episode of The Business of Cloud Native, host Emily Omier and Travis discuss the changing cloud landscape, and the massive role that cost can play during a migration. Travis also shares his thoughts on cloud cost management, offering expert advice for companies regardless of where they are in their cloud journey.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Travis Rehl is director of product at CloudCheckr, a platform that unifies IT, security, and finance teams around the cloud, through deep visibility, automation, and governance. As director of product, Travis works closely with customers, helping them nav</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>The Power of Aligning Engineering and Operations with Dave Mangot</title>
      <itunes:episode>8</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>8</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>The Power of Aligning Engineering and Operations with Dave Mangot</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">1f2dc5c3-e31d-4888-86e8-2464682ade21</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/8ad5875d</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>Some of the highlights of the show include: </strong></p><p><br></p><ul><li>The difference between cloud computing and cloud native.</li><li>Why operations teams often struggle to keep up with development teams, and the problems that this creates for businesses.</li><li>How Dave works with operations teams and trains them how to approach cloud native so they can keep up with developers, instead of being a drag on the organization. </li><li>Dave’s philosophy on introducing processes, and why he prefers to use as few as possible for as long as possible and implement them only when problems arise. </li><li>Why executives should strive to keep developers happy, productive, and empowered. </li><li>Why operations teams need to stop thinking about themselves as people who merely complete ticket requests, and start viewing themselves as key enablers who help the organization move faster. </li><li>Viewing wait time as waste. </li><li>The importance of aligning operations and development teams, and having them work towards the same goal. This also requires using the same reporting structure. </li></ul><p><strong><br>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>Company site: <a href="https://www.mangoteque.com/">https://www.mangoteque.com/</a></li><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/dmangot/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/dmangot/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/DaveMangot">https://twitter.com/DaveMangot</a></li><li>CIO Author page: <a href="https://www.cio.com/author/Dave-Mangot/">https://www.cio.com/author/Dave-Mangot/</a></li></ul><p><b>Transcript</b></p><p><br>Announcer: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em> podcast, where we explore how end users talk and think about the transition to Kubernetes and cloud-native architectures.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to The Business of Cloud Native. I'm your host, Emily Omier, and today I am chatting with Dave Mangot. And Dave is a consultant who works with companies on improving their web operations. He has experience working with a variety of companies making the transition to cloud-native and in various stages of their cloud computing journey. So, Dave, my first question is, can you go into detail about, sort of, the nitty-gritty of what you do?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Dave: Sure. I've spent my whole technical professional career mostly in Silicon Valley, after moving out to California from Maryland. And really, I got early into web operations working in Unix systems administration as a sysadmin, and then we all changed the names of all those things over the years from sysadmin to Technical Infrastructure Engineer, and then Site Reliability Engineer, and all the other fun stuff. But I've been involved in the DevOps movement, kind of, since the beginning, and I've been involved in cloud computing, kind of, since the beginning. </p><p><br></p><p><br>And so I'm lucky enough in my day job to be able to work with companies on their, like you said, transitions into Cloud, but really I'm helping companies, at least for their cloud stuff, think about what does cloud computing even mean? What does it mean to operate in a cloud computing manner? It's one thing to say, “We're going to move all of our stuff from the data center into Cloud,” but most people you'll hear talk about lift and shift; does that really the best way? And obviously, it's not. I think most of the studies will prove that and things like the State of DevOps report, and those other things, but really love working with companies on, like, what is so unique about the Cloud, and what advantages does that give, and how do we think about these problems in order to be able to take the best advantage that we can?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Dive into a little bit more. What is the difference between cloud computing and cloud-native? And where does some confusion sometimes seep in there?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Dave: I think cloud-native is just really talking about the fact that something was designed specifically for running in a cloud computing environment. To me, I don't really get hung up on those differences because, ultimately, I don't think they matter all that much. You can take memcached, which was designed to run in the data center, and you can buy that as a service on AWS. So, does that mean because it wasn't designed for the Cloud from the beginning, that it's not going to work? No, you're buying that as a service from AWS. </p><p><br></p><p><br>I think cloud-native is really referring to these tools that were designed with that as a first-class citizen. And there's times where that really matters. I remember, we did an analysis of the configuration management tools years back, and what would work best on AWS and things like that, and it was pretty obvious that some of those tools were not designed for the Cloud. They were not cloud-native. They really had this distinct feel that their cloud capabilities were bolted on much later, and it was clunky, and it was hard to work with, whereas some of the other tools, really felt like that was a very natural fit, like that was the way that they had been created. But ultimately, I think the differences aren't all that great, it just, really, matters how you're going to take advantage of those tools.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And with the companies that you work with, what is the problem or problems that they are usually facing that lead them to hire you?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Dave: Generally the question, or the statement, I guess, that I get from the CIOs and CTOs, and CEOs is, “My production web operations team can't keep up with my development teams.” And there's a lot of reasons why those kinds of things can happen, but with the dawn of all these cloud-native type things, which is pretty cool, like containers, and all this other stuff, and CI/CD is a big popular thing now, and all kinds of other stuff. What happens, tends to be is the developers are really able to take advantage of these things, and consume them, and use them because look at AWS. AWS is API, API, API. Make an API call for this, make an API call for that. </p><p><br></p><p><br>And for developers, they're really comfortable in that environment. Making an API call is kind of a no brainer. And then a lot of the operations teams are struggling because that's not normal for them. Maybe they were used to clicking around in a VMware console, and now that's not a thing because everything's API, API, API. And so what happens is the development teams start to rocket ahead of the operations teams, and the operations teams are running around struggling to keep up because they're kind of in a brand new world that the developers are dragging them into, and they have to figure out how they're going to swim in that world. </p><p><br></p><p><br>And so I tend to work with operations teams to help them get to a point where they're way more comfortable, and they're thinking about the problems differently, and they're really enabling development to go as quickly as development wants to go. Which, you know, that's going to be pretty fast, especially when you're working with cloud-native stuff. But I mean, kind of to the point earlier, we built—at one of the companies I worked at years ago—what I would say, like, a cloud environment in a data center, where everything was API first, and you didn't have to run around, and click in consoles, and try to find information, and manually specify things, and stuff like that; it just worked. Just like if you make a call for VM in AWS, an EC2 instance. And so, really, it's much more about the way that we look at the problems, then it is about where this thing happens to be located because obviously cloud-native is going to be Azure, it's going ...</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>Some of the highlights of the show include: </strong></p><p><br></p><ul><li>The difference between cloud computing and cloud native.</li><li>Why operations teams often struggle to keep up with development teams, and the problems that this creates for businesses.</li><li>How Dave works with operations teams and trains them how to approach cloud native so they can keep up with developers, instead of being a drag on the organization. </li><li>Dave’s philosophy on introducing processes, and why he prefers to use as few as possible for as long as possible and implement them only when problems arise. </li><li>Why executives should strive to keep developers happy, productive, and empowered. </li><li>Why operations teams need to stop thinking about themselves as people who merely complete ticket requests, and start viewing themselves as key enablers who help the organization move faster. </li><li>Viewing wait time as waste. </li><li>The importance of aligning operations and development teams, and having them work towards the same goal. This also requires using the same reporting structure. </li></ul><p><strong><br>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>Company site: <a href="https://www.mangoteque.com/">https://www.mangoteque.com/</a></li><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/dmangot/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/dmangot/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/DaveMangot">https://twitter.com/DaveMangot</a></li><li>CIO Author page: <a href="https://www.cio.com/author/Dave-Mangot/">https://www.cio.com/author/Dave-Mangot/</a></li></ul><p><b>Transcript</b></p><p><br>Announcer: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em> podcast, where we explore how end users talk and think about the transition to Kubernetes and cloud-native architectures.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to The Business of Cloud Native. I'm your host, Emily Omier, and today I am chatting with Dave Mangot. And Dave is a consultant who works with companies on improving their web operations. He has experience working with a variety of companies making the transition to cloud-native and in various stages of their cloud computing journey. So, Dave, my first question is, can you go into detail about, sort of, the nitty-gritty of what you do?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Dave: Sure. I've spent my whole technical professional career mostly in Silicon Valley, after moving out to California from Maryland. And really, I got early into web operations working in Unix systems administration as a sysadmin, and then we all changed the names of all those things over the years from sysadmin to Technical Infrastructure Engineer, and then Site Reliability Engineer, and all the other fun stuff. But I've been involved in the DevOps movement, kind of, since the beginning, and I've been involved in cloud computing, kind of, since the beginning. </p><p><br></p><p><br>And so I'm lucky enough in my day job to be able to work with companies on their, like you said, transitions into Cloud, but really I'm helping companies, at least for their cloud stuff, think about what does cloud computing even mean? What does it mean to operate in a cloud computing manner? It's one thing to say, “We're going to move all of our stuff from the data center into Cloud,” but most people you'll hear talk about lift and shift; does that really the best way? And obviously, it's not. I think most of the studies will prove that and things like the State of DevOps report, and those other things, but really love working with companies on, like, what is so unique about the Cloud, and what advantages does that give, and how do we think about these problems in order to be able to take the best advantage that we can?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Dive into a little bit more. What is the difference between cloud computing and cloud-native? And where does some confusion sometimes seep in there?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Dave: I think cloud-native is just really talking about the fact that something was designed specifically for running in a cloud computing environment. To me, I don't really get hung up on those differences because, ultimately, I don't think they matter all that much. You can take memcached, which was designed to run in the data center, and you can buy that as a service on AWS. So, does that mean because it wasn't designed for the Cloud from the beginning, that it's not going to work? No, you're buying that as a service from AWS. </p><p><br></p><p><br>I think cloud-native is really referring to these tools that were designed with that as a first-class citizen. And there's times where that really matters. I remember, we did an analysis of the configuration management tools years back, and what would work best on AWS and things like that, and it was pretty obvious that some of those tools were not designed for the Cloud. They were not cloud-native. They really had this distinct feel that their cloud capabilities were bolted on much later, and it was clunky, and it was hard to work with, whereas some of the other tools, really felt like that was a very natural fit, like that was the way that they had been created. But ultimately, I think the differences aren't all that great, it just, really, matters how you're going to take advantage of those tools.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And with the companies that you work with, what is the problem or problems that they are usually facing that lead them to hire you?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Dave: Generally the question, or the statement, I guess, that I get from the CIOs and CTOs, and CEOs is, “My production web operations team can't keep up with my development teams.” And there's a lot of reasons why those kinds of things can happen, but with the dawn of all these cloud-native type things, which is pretty cool, like containers, and all this other stuff, and CI/CD is a big popular thing now, and all kinds of other stuff. What happens, tends to be is the developers are really able to take advantage of these things, and consume them, and use them because look at AWS. AWS is API, API, API. Make an API call for this, make an API call for that. </p><p><br></p><p><br>And for developers, they're really comfortable in that environment. Making an API call is kind of a no brainer. And then a lot of the operations teams are struggling because that's not normal for them. Maybe they were used to clicking around in a VMware console, and now that's not a thing because everything's API, API, API. And so what happens is the development teams start to rocket ahead of the operations teams, and the operations teams are running around struggling to keep up because they're kind of in a brand new world that the developers are dragging them into, and they have to figure out how they're going to swim in that world. </p><p><br></p><p><br>And so I tend to work with operations teams to help them get to a point where they're way more comfortable, and they're thinking about the problems differently, and they're really enabling development to go as quickly as development wants to go. Which, you know, that's going to be pretty fast, especially when you're working with cloud-native stuff. But I mean, kind of to the point earlier, we built—at one of the companies I worked at years ago—what I would say, like, a cloud environment in a data center, where everything was API first, and you didn't have to run around, and click in consoles, and try to find information, and manually specify things, and stuff like that; it just worked. Just like if you make a call for VM in AWS, an EC2 instance. And so, really, it's much more about the way that we look at the problems, then it is about where this thing happens to be located because obviously cloud-native is going to be Azure, it's going ...</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 15 Jul 2020 03:00:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/8ad5875d/a7d4a83b.mp3" length="55888210" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2319</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Dave Mangot is a leading web operations consultant and principal at Mangoteque. A DevOps veteran, Dave has successfully led transformations and operations maturity at companies such as Salesforce, SolarWinds, and Cable &amp;amp; Wireless. He is known for coaching companies and helping them develop more efficient delivery models.

In this episode of The Business Cloud Native, host Emily Omier and Dave discuss the cloud native skills gap that often exists between developers and operations teams. Dave talks about his experiences trying to get operations teams up to speed with developers who are using cloud native technologies, and the amazing results that can occur when there is tight integration between the two departments. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Dave Mangot is a leading web operations consultant and principal at Mangoteque. A DevOps veteran, Dave has successfully led transformations and operations maturity at companies such as Salesforce, SolarWinds, and Cable &amp;amp; Wireless. He is known for coac</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Discussing Cloud Native Security with Abhinav Srivastava</title>
      <itunes:episode>7</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>7</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Discussing Cloud Native Security with Abhinav Srivastava</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">42a417ac-da51-4cfc-b9fa-73c6169aa024</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/6e530132</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>This conversation covers:</strong></p><ul><li>How Frame.io was faced with the decision to be cloud native or cloud-enabled — and the business and technical reasons why Frame.io chose to be cloud native. </li><li>How Abhinav successfully built a world class cloud-native security program from the ground up to protect Frame.io users’ sensitive video content. Abhinav also talks about the special security considerations for truly cloud native applications. </li><li>Cloud native as a “journey without a destination.” In other words, there is no end point with cloud native transitions, because new technologies are always being developed.</li><li>Why Abhinav is a firm believer in both ISEs and GitOps, and why he thinks the industry should embrace both of these strategies.</li><li>The challenge of not only maintaining security in this type of environment, but also communicating security issues to various stakeholders with different priorities. Abinhav also talks about the role that specialists like AWS and machine learning experts can play in furthering security agendas.</li><li>Common misconceptions about cloud native security.</li><li>Frame.io’s decision to roll out Kubernetes, and why they are also considering adding chaos engineering to fortify against unexpected issues.</li><li>Tool and vendor overload, and the importance of trying to find the right tools that fit your infrastructure. </li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>Frame.io: <a href="https://frame.io/">https://frame.io/</a></li><li>Connect with Abhinav on LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/absri/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/absri/</a></li><li>The Business of Cloud Native: <a href="http://thebusinessofcloudnative.com/">http://thebusinessofcloudnative.com</a> </li></ul><p><br><strong>Transcript</strong></p><p><br>Announcer: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em> podcast where we explore how end users talk and think about the transition to Kubernetes and cloud-native architectures.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. I'm Emily Omier, your host, and today I am chatting with Abhinav Srivastava. Abhinav, can you go ahead and introduce yourself and tell us about where you work, and what you do.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Abhinav: Thanks for having me, Emily. Hello, everyone. My name is Avinash Srivastava. I'm a VP and the head of information security and infrastructure at Frame.io. At Frame, I am building the security and infrastructure programs from ground up, making sure that we are secured and compliant, and our services are available and reliable. Before joining Frame.io, I spent a number of years in AT&amp;T Research. There I worked on various cloud and security technologies, wrote numerous research papers, and filed patents. And before joining AT&amp;T, I spent five great years in Georgia Tech on a Ph.D. in computer science. My dissertation was on cloud and virtualization security.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And what do you do? What does an average day look like?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Abhinav: Right. So, just to tell you where I answer the question where I work: so I work at Frame.io, and Frame.io is a cloud-based video review and collaboration startup that allows users to securely upload their video contents to our platform, and then invite teams and clients to collaborate on those uploaded assets. We are essentially building the video cloud, so you can think of us as a GitHub for videos. </p><p><br></p><p><br>What I do when I get to office—apart from getting my morning coffee—as soon as I arrive at my desk, I check my calendar to see how's my day looking; I check my emails and slack messages. We use slack primarily within the company doing for communication. And then I do my daily standup with my teams. We follow a two-week sprint across all departments that I oversee. So, a standup gives me a good picture on the current priorities and any blockers.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Tell me a little bit about the cloud-native journey at Frame.io? How did the company get started with containers, and what are you using to orchestrate now? How have you moved along in the cloud-native journey?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Abhinav: We are born in the cloud, kind of, company. So, we are hosted in Amazon AWS since day one. So, we are in the cloud from the get-go. And once you are in the cloud, it is hard not to use tools and technologies that are offered, because our goal has always been to build secure, reliable, and available infrastructure. So, we were very, very mindful from the get-go that while we are in the cloud, we can choose to be cloud-native or just cloud-enabled. Means use tools, just virtual machines, or heavyweight virtual machines, and not to use container and just host our entire workload within that. </p><p><br></p><p><br>But we chose to be cloud-native because, again, they wanted to boot up or spin up new containers very fast. As a platform we, as I mentioned, we allow users to upload videos, and once the videos are uploaded, we have to transcode those videos to generate different low-resolution videos. And that use case fits with the lightweight container model. So, from the get-go, we started using containerized microservices; orchestration layer; From AWS, their auto-scaling; automation infrastructure as a code; monitoring. so all those things were, kind of, no brainer for us to use because given our use case and given the way we wanted to be a very fast uploader and transcoder for all of our customers.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: This actually leads me to another question: have you guys seen a lot of scaling recently as a result of stay-at-home orders and work from home?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Abhinav: Right. So, we are seeing a lot more people moving towards remote collaboration tools who are actually working in the production house since they have to work from home now. So, they are now moving to these kind of tools such as Frame.io. And we do see a lot more customers joining our platform because of that. From the traffic perspective, we did not see much increase in the web traffic or load our infrastructure, because we have always set up the auto-scaling and our infrastructure can always meet these peak demands. So, we didn't see any adverse effect on our infrastructure from these remote situations.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: What were some of the other advantages? Like you were talking about that you had the choice to be either cloud-enabled or truly cloud-native? What were the biggest, you know—and I'm interested, obviously in business rationale to the extent you can talk about it—for being truly cloud-native?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Abhinav: So, from business perspective, again, a goal was to [basic] secure available and reliable production infrastructure to offer Frame.io services. But cloud-native actually helped us to faster time to market because our developers are just focusing on the business logic, deploying code. They were not worried about the infrastructure aspect, which is good. Then we’re rolling out bug fixes very quickly through CI/CD platform, so that, again, we offer the better [good] services to our customer. </p><p><br></p><p><br>Cloud-native helped us to meet our SLA and uptime so that our customer can access their content whenever they would like to. It also helped us securing our infrastructure and services, and our cost also went down because we were scaling up and down based on the peak demand, and we don't have to provide dedicated resources, so that's good there. And it also allowed us to faster onboard developers to our platform because we are using a lot of open source technologies, and so the developers can learn q...</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>This conversation covers:</strong></p><ul><li>How Frame.io was faced with the decision to be cloud native or cloud-enabled — and the business and technical reasons why Frame.io chose to be cloud native. </li><li>How Abhinav successfully built a world class cloud-native security program from the ground up to protect Frame.io users’ sensitive video content. Abhinav also talks about the special security considerations for truly cloud native applications. </li><li>Cloud native as a “journey without a destination.” In other words, there is no end point with cloud native transitions, because new technologies are always being developed.</li><li>Why Abhinav is a firm believer in both ISEs and GitOps, and why he thinks the industry should embrace both of these strategies.</li><li>The challenge of not only maintaining security in this type of environment, but also communicating security issues to various stakeholders with different priorities. Abinhav also talks about the role that specialists like AWS and machine learning experts can play in furthering security agendas.</li><li>Common misconceptions about cloud native security.</li><li>Frame.io’s decision to roll out Kubernetes, and why they are also considering adding chaos engineering to fortify against unexpected issues.</li><li>Tool and vendor overload, and the importance of trying to find the right tools that fit your infrastructure. </li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>Frame.io: <a href="https://frame.io/">https://frame.io/</a></li><li>Connect with Abhinav on LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/absri/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/absri/</a></li><li>The Business of Cloud Native: <a href="http://thebusinessofcloudnative.com/">http://thebusinessofcloudnative.com</a> </li></ul><p><br><strong>Transcript</strong></p><p><br>Announcer: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em> podcast where we explore how end users talk and think about the transition to Kubernetes and cloud-native architectures.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. I'm Emily Omier, your host, and today I am chatting with Abhinav Srivastava. Abhinav, can you go ahead and introduce yourself and tell us about where you work, and what you do.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Abhinav: Thanks for having me, Emily. Hello, everyone. My name is Avinash Srivastava. I'm a VP and the head of information security and infrastructure at Frame.io. At Frame, I am building the security and infrastructure programs from ground up, making sure that we are secured and compliant, and our services are available and reliable. Before joining Frame.io, I spent a number of years in AT&amp;T Research. There I worked on various cloud and security technologies, wrote numerous research papers, and filed patents. And before joining AT&amp;T, I spent five great years in Georgia Tech on a Ph.D. in computer science. My dissertation was on cloud and virtualization security.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And what do you do? What does an average day look like?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Abhinav: Right. So, just to tell you where I answer the question where I work: so I work at Frame.io, and Frame.io is a cloud-based video review and collaboration startup that allows users to securely upload their video contents to our platform, and then invite teams and clients to collaborate on those uploaded assets. We are essentially building the video cloud, so you can think of us as a GitHub for videos. </p><p><br></p><p><br>What I do when I get to office—apart from getting my morning coffee—as soon as I arrive at my desk, I check my calendar to see how's my day looking; I check my emails and slack messages. We use slack primarily within the company doing for communication. And then I do my daily standup with my teams. We follow a two-week sprint across all departments that I oversee. So, a standup gives me a good picture on the current priorities and any blockers.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Tell me a little bit about the cloud-native journey at Frame.io? How did the company get started with containers, and what are you using to orchestrate now? How have you moved along in the cloud-native journey?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Abhinav: We are born in the cloud, kind of, company. So, we are hosted in Amazon AWS since day one. So, we are in the cloud from the get-go. And once you are in the cloud, it is hard not to use tools and technologies that are offered, because our goal has always been to build secure, reliable, and available infrastructure. So, we were very, very mindful from the get-go that while we are in the cloud, we can choose to be cloud-native or just cloud-enabled. Means use tools, just virtual machines, or heavyweight virtual machines, and not to use container and just host our entire workload within that. </p><p><br></p><p><br>But we chose to be cloud-native because, again, they wanted to boot up or spin up new containers very fast. As a platform we, as I mentioned, we allow users to upload videos, and once the videos are uploaded, we have to transcode those videos to generate different low-resolution videos. And that use case fits with the lightweight container model. So, from the get-go, we started using containerized microservices; orchestration layer; From AWS, their auto-scaling; automation infrastructure as a code; monitoring. so all those things were, kind of, no brainer for us to use because given our use case and given the way we wanted to be a very fast uploader and transcoder for all of our customers.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: This actually leads me to another question: have you guys seen a lot of scaling recently as a result of stay-at-home orders and work from home?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Abhinav: Right. So, we are seeing a lot more people moving towards remote collaboration tools who are actually working in the production house since they have to work from home now. So, they are now moving to these kind of tools such as Frame.io. And we do see a lot more customers joining our platform because of that. From the traffic perspective, we did not see much increase in the web traffic or load our infrastructure, because we have always set up the auto-scaling and our infrastructure can always meet these peak demands. So, we didn't see any adverse effect on our infrastructure from these remote situations.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: What were some of the other advantages? Like you were talking about that you had the choice to be either cloud-enabled or truly cloud-native? What were the biggest, you know—and I'm interested, obviously in business rationale to the extent you can talk about it—for being truly cloud-native?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Abhinav: So, from business perspective, again, a goal was to [basic] secure available and reliable production infrastructure to offer Frame.io services. But cloud-native actually helped us to faster time to market because our developers are just focusing on the business logic, deploying code. They were not worried about the infrastructure aspect, which is good. Then we’re rolling out bug fixes very quickly through CI/CD platform, so that, again, we offer the better [good] services to our customer. </p><p><br></p><p><br>Cloud-native helped us to meet our SLA and uptime so that our customer can access their content whenever they would like to. It also helped us securing our infrastructure and services, and our cost also went down because we were scaling up and down based on the peak demand, and we don't have to provide dedicated resources, so that's good there. And it also allowed us to faster onboard developers to our platform because we are using a lot of open source technologies, and so the developers can learn q...</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 08 Jul 2020 03:00:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/6e530132/7656bb23.mp3" length="43267520" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1800</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Frame.io has emerged as one of the world’s most popular cloud video collaboration platforms, with over one million active users and a client base that includes NASA, Disney, Snapchat, BBC, and Turner Broadcasting.

In this episode of The Business Cloud Native, host Emily Omier interviews Abhinav Srivastava who is VP and Head of Information and Security and Infrastructure at Frame.io. Abhinav built Frame.io’s cloud native security and infrastructure programs from the ground up, while taking great care to ensure the company’s services remain available, reliable, and compliant.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Frame.io has emerged as one of the world’s most popular cloud video collaboration platforms, with over one million active users and a client base that includes NASA, Disney, Snapchat, BBC, and Turner Broadcasting.

In this episode of The Business Cloud </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Scaling in the Cloud: A Conversation with Jon Tirsen</title>
      <itunes:episode>6</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>6</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Scaling in the Cloud: A Conversation with Jon Tirsen</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">4e0c97d4-e8cd-49b0-963e-5bf082a003a7</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/ec6949c0</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode of the Business Cloud Native, host Emily Omier talks with Jon Tirsen, who is engineering lead for storage at Cash App. This conversation focuses on Cash App’s cloud native journey, and how they are working to build an application that is more scalable, flexible, and easier to manage.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>The conversation covers:</strong></p><p><br></p><ul><li>How the need for hybrid cloud services and uniform program models led Cash App to Kubernetes. </li><li>Some of the major scaling issues that Cash App was facing. For example, the company needed to increase user capacity, and add new product lines. </li><li>The process of trying to scale Cash App’s MySQL database, and the decision to split up their dataset into smaller parts that could run on different databases.</li><li>Cash App’s monolithic application, which contains hundreds of thousands of lines of code — and why it’s becoming increasingly difficult to manage and grow. </li><li>How Jon’s team is trying to balance product/ business and technical needs, and deliver value while rearchitecting their system to scale their operations.</li><li>Why Cash App is working to build small, product-oriented teams, and a system where products can be executed and deployed at their own pace through the cloud. Jon also discusses some of the challenges that are preventing this from happening.</li><li>How Cash App was able to help during the pandemic, by facilitating easy stimulus transfers through their service — and why it wouldn’t have been possible without a cloud native architecture. </li></ul><p><br><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>Cash App: <a href="https://cash.app/">https://cash.app/</a></li><li>Square: <a href="https://squareup.com/us/en">https://squareup.com/us/en</a></li><li>Jon on Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/tirsen?lang=en">https://twitter.com/tirsen?lang=en</a></li><li>Connect with Jon on LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tirsen/?originalSubdomain=au">https://www.linkedin.com/in/tirsen/?originalSubdomain=au</a></li><li>The Business of Cloud Native: <a href="http://thebusinessofcloudnative.com/">http://thebusinessofcloudnative.com</a> </li></ul><p><br><strong>Transcript</strong></p><p><br>Announcer: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em> podcast where we explore how end users talk and think about the transition to Kubernetes and cloud-native architectures.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. My name is Emily Omier, I'm here chatting with Jon Tirsen.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Jon: Happy to be here. My name is, as you said, Jon Tirsen, and I work as the engineering lead of storage here at Cash App. I've been at Cash for maybe four or five years now. So, I've been with it from the very early days. And before Cash, I was doing a startup, that failed, for five years. So, it's a travel guide in the mobile phone startup. And before that, I was at Google working on another failed product called the Google Wave, which you might remember, and before that, it was a company called ThoughtWorks, which some of you probably know about as well.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And in case people don't know, the Cash App is part of Square, right?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Jon: Yes. Cash App is where we're separating all the different products quite a lot these days. So, it used to be called just Square Cash, but now it has its own branding and its own identity, and its own leadership, and everything. So, we're trying to call it an ecosystem of startups. So, each product line can run its business the way it wants to, to a large degree.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And so, what do you actually spend your day doing?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Jon: Most of my days, I'm still code, and doing various operational tasks, and setting up systems, and testing, and that sort of thing. I also, maybe about half my day, I spend on more management tasks, which is reviewing documents, writing documents, and talking to people trying to figure out our strategy and so on. So, maybe about half my time, I do real technical things, and then the other half I do more management stuff.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Where would you say the cloud-native journey started for you?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Jon: Well, so a lot of Square used to run on-premises. So, we had our own data centers and things. But especially for Cash App, since we've grown so quickly, it started getting slightly out of control. We were basically outgrowing—we could not physically put more machines into our data centers. So, we've started moving a lot of our services over to Amazon in this case, and we want to have a shared way of building services that would work both in the Cloud and also in our data centers. </p><p><br></p><p><br>So, something like Kubernetes and all the tools around that would give us a more uniform programming model that we could use to deploy apps in both of these environments. We started that, two, three years ago. We started looking at moving our workload out of our data centers.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: What were the issues that you were encountering? Give me a little bit more details about the scaling issues that we were talking about.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Jon: There two dimensions that we needed to scale out the Cash App, sort of, system slash [unintelligible] architecture. So, one thing was that we just grew so quickly that we needed to be able to increase capacity. So, that was across the board. So, from databases to application servers, and bandwidth, everywhere. We need to just be able to increase our capacity of handling more users, but also we were trying to grow our product as well. So, at the same time, we also want to build and be able to add new features at an increased pace. So, we want to be able to add new product lines in the Cash App. </p><p><br></p><p><br>So, for example, we built the Cash Card, which is a way you can keep your money in the Cash App bank accounts, and then you can spend that money using a separate card, and then we add a new functionality around that card, and so on. So, we also needed to be able to scale out the team to be able to have more people working on the team to build new products for our users, for our customers. Those are the two dimensions: we needed to scale out the system, but we also needed to have more people be able to work productively. So, that's why we started trying to chop up—we have this big monolith as most companies probably do, which that's I don't know how many hundreds of thousands of lines of code in there. But we also wanted to move things out of that, to be able to have more people contribute productively.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And where are you in that process?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Jon: Well, [laughs], we're probably adding still adding code at an exponential rate to the monolith. We're also adding code at an exponential rate outside of the monolith, but it just feels so much easier to just build some code in the monolith than it is outside of it, unfortunately, which something we're trying to fix, but it's very hard. And it is getting a little bit out of hand, this monolith now. So, we have, sort of, a moratorium on adding new code to the monolith now, and I'm not sure how much of an effect that has made. But the monolith is still growing, as well as our non-monolith services as well, of course. </p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: When you were faced with this scaling issue, what were the conversations happening between the technical side and the business owners? And how is this decision made about the best way to solve this problem is x, is the Cloud, is cloud-native architecture?</p><p><br>&lt;...</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p>In this episode of the Business Cloud Native, host Emily Omier talks with Jon Tirsen, who is engineering lead for storage at Cash App. This conversation focuses on Cash App’s cloud native journey, and how they are working to build an application that is more scalable, flexible, and easier to manage.</p><p><br></p><p><strong>The conversation covers:</strong></p><p><br></p><ul><li>How the need for hybrid cloud services and uniform program models led Cash App to Kubernetes. </li><li>Some of the major scaling issues that Cash App was facing. For example, the company needed to increase user capacity, and add new product lines. </li><li>The process of trying to scale Cash App’s MySQL database, and the decision to split up their dataset into smaller parts that could run on different databases.</li><li>Cash App’s monolithic application, which contains hundreds of thousands of lines of code — and why it’s becoming increasingly difficult to manage and grow. </li><li>How Jon’s team is trying to balance product/ business and technical needs, and deliver value while rearchitecting their system to scale their operations.</li><li>Why Cash App is working to build small, product-oriented teams, and a system where products can be executed and deployed at their own pace through the cloud. Jon also discusses some of the challenges that are preventing this from happening.</li><li>How Cash App was able to help during the pandemic, by facilitating easy stimulus transfers through their service — and why it wouldn’t have been possible without a cloud native architecture. </li></ul><p><br><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>Cash App: <a href="https://cash.app/">https://cash.app/</a></li><li>Square: <a href="https://squareup.com/us/en">https://squareup.com/us/en</a></li><li>Jon on Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/tirsen?lang=en">https://twitter.com/tirsen?lang=en</a></li><li>Connect with Jon on LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/tirsen/?originalSubdomain=au">https://www.linkedin.com/in/tirsen/?originalSubdomain=au</a></li><li>The Business of Cloud Native: <a href="http://thebusinessofcloudnative.com/">http://thebusinessofcloudnative.com</a> </li></ul><p><br><strong>Transcript</strong></p><p><br>Announcer: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em> podcast where we explore how end users talk and think about the transition to Kubernetes and cloud-native architectures.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. My name is Emily Omier, I'm here chatting with Jon Tirsen.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Jon: Happy to be here. My name is, as you said, Jon Tirsen, and I work as the engineering lead of storage here at Cash App. I've been at Cash for maybe four or five years now. So, I've been with it from the very early days. And before Cash, I was doing a startup, that failed, for five years. So, it's a travel guide in the mobile phone startup. And before that, I was at Google working on another failed product called the Google Wave, which you might remember, and before that, it was a company called ThoughtWorks, which some of you probably know about as well.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And in case people don't know, the Cash App is part of Square, right?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Jon: Yes. Cash App is where we're separating all the different products quite a lot these days. So, it used to be called just Square Cash, but now it has its own branding and its own identity, and its own leadership, and everything. So, we're trying to call it an ecosystem of startups. So, each product line can run its business the way it wants to, to a large degree.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And so, what do you actually spend your day doing?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Jon: Most of my days, I'm still code, and doing various operational tasks, and setting up systems, and testing, and that sort of thing. I also, maybe about half my day, I spend on more management tasks, which is reviewing documents, writing documents, and talking to people trying to figure out our strategy and so on. So, maybe about half my time, I do real technical things, and then the other half I do more management stuff.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Where would you say the cloud-native journey started for you?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Jon: Well, so a lot of Square used to run on-premises. So, we had our own data centers and things. But especially for Cash App, since we've grown so quickly, it started getting slightly out of control. We were basically outgrowing—we could not physically put more machines into our data centers. So, we've started moving a lot of our services over to Amazon in this case, and we want to have a shared way of building services that would work both in the Cloud and also in our data centers. </p><p><br></p><p><br>So, something like Kubernetes and all the tools around that would give us a more uniform programming model that we could use to deploy apps in both of these environments. We started that, two, three years ago. We started looking at moving our workload out of our data centers.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: What were the issues that you were encountering? Give me a little bit more details about the scaling issues that we were talking about.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Jon: There two dimensions that we needed to scale out the Cash App, sort of, system slash [unintelligible] architecture. So, one thing was that we just grew so quickly that we needed to be able to increase capacity. So, that was across the board. So, from databases to application servers, and bandwidth, everywhere. We need to just be able to increase our capacity of handling more users, but also we were trying to grow our product as well. So, at the same time, we also want to build and be able to add new features at an increased pace. So, we want to be able to add new product lines in the Cash App. </p><p><br></p><p><br>So, for example, we built the Cash Card, which is a way you can keep your money in the Cash App bank accounts, and then you can spend that money using a separate card, and then we add a new functionality around that card, and so on. So, we also needed to be able to scale out the team to be able to have more people working on the team to build new products for our users, for our customers. Those are the two dimensions: we needed to scale out the system, but we also needed to have more people be able to work productively. So, that's why we started trying to chop up—we have this big monolith as most companies probably do, which that's I don't know how many hundreds of thousands of lines of code in there. But we also wanted to move things out of that, to be able to have more people contribute productively.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And where are you in that process?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Jon: Well, [laughs], we're probably adding still adding code at an exponential rate to the monolith. We're also adding code at an exponential rate outside of the monolith, but it just feels so much easier to just build some code in the monolith than it is outside of it, unfortunately, which something we're trying to fix, but it's very hard. And it is getting a little bit out of hand, this monolith now. So, we have, sort of, a moratorium on adding new code to the monolith now, and I'm not sure how much of an effect that has made. But the monolith is still growing, as well as our non-monolith services as well, of course. </p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: When you were faced with this scaling issue, what were the conversations happening between the technical side and the business owners? And how is this decision made about the best way to solve this problem is x, is the Cloud, is cloud-native architecture?</p><p><br>&lt;...</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 01 Jul 2020 00:30:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/ec6949c0/efb514fc.mp3" length="38584758" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1598</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Square’s Cash App has skyrocketed in popularity, growing 20.1 percent from April to May. The platform also had 250 million sessions in April, even more than PayPal which had under 200 million. This rapid growth wouldn’t have been possible, though, if Cash App hadn’t laid the groundwork with a cloud native architecture. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Square’s Cash App has skyrocketed in popularity, growing 20.1 percent from April to May. The platform also had 250 million sessions in April, even more than PayPal which had under 200 million. This rapid growth wouldn’t have been possible, though, if Cash</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Exploring 8x8’s Cloud Native Journey with Chief Product Officer Dejan Deklich </title>
      <itunes:episode>5</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>5</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Exploring 8x8’s Cloud Native Journey with Chief Product Officer Dejan Deklich </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">304afbf1-71a4-4dfe-a404-c13f250b3f57</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/07593abf</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>Emily and Dejan cover the following points:</strong></p><ul><li>8x8’s journey to a leading cloud technology provider.</li><li>Why 8x8 decided to migrate to Kubernetes, a move that gave them the flexibility to run workloads wherever they want.</li><li>Dejan’s thoughts on the Kubernetes migration, and how it’s helped the company improve its operations. For example, Kubernetes has helped 8x8 migrate away from several legacy systems.</li><li>The biggest challenges and surprises that the 8x8 team experienced during their migration journey, such as getting engineering teams to embrace a culture built around monitoring, observability, and documentation.</li><li>How 8x8 has avoided “feature bloat” and maintained a product that performs at a high level, while staying true to the features that are important for its core customer base. </li><li>The strategy of obtaining buy-in from stakeholders and fellow executives by focusing on business problems, instead of technical issues. This included cost, velocity of innovation, global scale, and so on.</li><li>How 8x8’s cloud-native architecture has made it faster and easier to scale. </li></ul><p><strong>Transcript</strong></p><p><br><br>Announcer: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em> podcast where we explore how end users talk and think about the transition to Kubernetes and cloud-native architectures.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. I'm Emily Omier, and I am talking with Dejan Deklich, from <a href="https://www.8x8.com/">8x8</a>.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Dejan: So, I'm the Chief Product Officer at 8x8. To give you an idea, 8x8 is now 16 or 1700 employees worldwide, 450 million in revenue, give or take, offices all over the world, customers all over the world. I'm responsible for all product management, engineering, QA, project management operations for all the products worldwide for 8x8.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Can you give me a little bit of an idea of 8x8’s history in the Cloud?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Dejan: So, 8x8 has been around, probably, a lot longer than most companies you're talking about. We've been public 30 years, give or take. We have been in the business of communication and collaboration since early 2000s. As you can imagine, we have gone through so many different tech stacks, architectures, and so on, that it is pretty amazing. </p><p><br></p><p><br>We have, in the last several years, done a massive cleanup and rebuild of our software stack. We rebuilt pretty much all of the mobile apps, desktop apps, web apps. We rebuilt the platform starting with billing and provisioning all the way down to how the voice traverses the world. So, it's been a incredible couple of years, incredible journey where I would argue we have gone from the early versions of hosted service to early versions of Cloud, maybe 10 years ago, and we are now what I would like to call a proper cloud technology company. And it's been a very interesting, difficult journey. We learned a lot. We messed up a lot of things, then we learned some more than they did it correctly.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: When you first moved to Kubernetes, and the modern public cloud, what was the rationale? What were their business reasons?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Dejan: Those multiple steps there. We moved to public cloud I don't know, five, six, seven years ago. We ran a lot of things in Amazon. And to be fair, we still also have data centers around the world. So, let me explain quickly what we actually running because I think it's important. So, we have, I think 16 data centers around the world, and then we run in pretty much every region of Amazon, we use Google Cloud extensively, and we have now shifted a lot of workloads to Oracle Cloud. At the same time, business is threatening me with Alibaba Cloud and Tencent Cloud as something that might be coming our way in the next couple of quarters. So, data centers are there because on the networking layer, the Cloud does not yet give us what we need for the realtime voice and video transmission. </p><p><br></p><p><br>We actually are the best voice provider in the industry. We have proven that, and that's where your milliseconds really matter, therefore networking still sits in data centers. As soon as the backbone can be moved into Amazon, and we are told that could happen in the next three to four years, we will move likely everything to the Cloud. So, what we have generally in the Cloud are different applications, and the reason for that is simply the velocity of deploying and scaling them. </p><p><br></p><p><br>So, what matters to us is, on one hand, the global reach: we have customers in 150 countries around the world. We have to have data centers close to the customers. And the applications need to be as close to the customer as possible, therefore all the different regions of Amazon, and Google, and whatnot. So, as you can imagine, managing all of that, monitoring all of that is a non-trivial exercise. </p><p><br></p><p><br>So, we moved to Kubernetes, in large reason, simply because it is one underlying framework that allows us to run workloads wherever we want. So, to give you an idea, we launched a video meetings product to compete with Zoom. We had, on launch, a couple of hundred thousand users, nothing really. And then, this COVID-19 happened, and within a period of weeks, we now hit 15 million users. The only way you can scale a system like that is if you have a properly built underlying architecture, everything horizontally scalable. </p><p><br></p><p><br>I was blown away, everything really worked. People were super busy, but by having proper cloud architecture, we were able to actually scale, and fulfill the demand that we have seen worldwide. Now, the nice thing is, as you put more and more workloads on top of Kubernetes, you can shift them between clouds as you want, or data centers as you want. And I think that's number one reason why we went with Kubernetes. </p><p><br></p><p><br>I love Amazon, I love Google, and nothing makes me happier than writing them a million-dollar checks, but I also want to be able to move the workloads wherever I can run them cheaply. And, to me, that's very important. I don't have unlimited budget; I have to be able to play the game and get the most compute and the most bandwidth for the lowest cost that I can, and Kubernetes lets me do that.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And would you say that Kubernetes was a technical decision or a business decision or both?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Dejan: That's a good question. I think normally, the way we operate at 8x8, you start with the business problem. The business problem was we don't want to be locked into one cloud. We want to be able to run wherever we want to run, and on top of that, we have customers in Europe who are not very friendly towards Amazon, and want us to run on other clouds. And then, we took a peek: what can we do? What's the fastest and easiest way to do it? Turned out it was Kubernetes, so that's the way we went.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: What did the move to Kubernetes, what was it like? What were some of the surprises?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Dejan: It was very interesting. It is still very interesting. So, on one hand, the good thing was we have already broken the monoliths in the past God knows how many years, into services. But to get things running properly in Kubernetes, you have to go a bit deeper, you actually have to really clean up your code, and so on, and so on. So, one thing that I thought was incredibly useful was this allowed us to, for the first time in 8x8 history, create a proper template for a service where all yo...</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>Emily and Dejan cover the following points:</strong></p><ul><li>8x8’s journey to a leading cloud technology provider.</li><li>Why 8x8 decided to migrate to Kubernetes, a move that gave them the flexibility to run workloads wherever they want.</li><li>Dejan’s thoughts on the Kubernetes migration, and how it’s helped the company improve its operations. For example, Kubernetes has helped 8x8 migrate away from several legacy systems.</li><li>The biggest challenges and surprises that the 8x8 team experienced during their migration journey, such as getting engineering teams to embrace a culture built around monitoring, observability, and documentation.</li><li>How 8x8 has avoided “feature bloat” and maintained a product that performs at a high level, while staying true to the features that are important for its core customer base. </li><li>The strategy of obtaining buy-in from stakeholders and fellow executives by focusing on business problems, instead of technical issues. This included cost, velocity of innovation, global scale, and so on.</li><li>How 8x8’s cloud-native architecture has made it faster and easier to scale. </li></ul><p><strong>Transcript</strong></p><p><br><br>Announcer: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em> podcast where we explore how end users talk and think about the transition to Kubernetes and cloud-native architectures.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. I'm Emily Omier, and I am talking with Dejan Deklich, from <a href="https://www.8x8.com/">8x8</a>.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Dejan: So, I'm the Chief Product Officer at 8x8. To give you an idea, 8x8 is now 16 or 1700 employees worldwide, 450 million in revenue, give or take, offices all over the world, customers all over the world. I'm responsible for all product management, engineering, QA, project management operations for all the products worldwide for 8x8.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Can you give me a little bit of an idea of 8x8’s history in the Cloud?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Dejan: So, 8x8 has been around, probably, a lot longer than most companies you're talking about. We've been public 30 years, give or take. We have been in the business of communication and collaboration since early 2000s. As you can imagine, we have gone through so many different tech stacks, architectures, and so on, that it is pretty amazing. </p><p><br></p><p><br>We have, in the last several years, done a massive cleanup and rebuild of our software stack. We rebuilt pretty much all of the mobile apps, desktop apps, web apps. We rebuilt the platform starting with billing and provisioning all the way down to how the voice traverses the world. So, it's been a incredible couple of years, incredible journey where I would argue we have gone from the early versions of hosted service to early versions of Cloud, maybe 10 years ago, and we are now what I would like to call a proper cloud technology company. And it's been a very interesting, difficult journey. We learned a lot. We messed up a lot of things, then we learned some more than they did it correctly.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: When you first moved to Kubernetes, and the modern public cloud, what was the rationale? What were their business reasons?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Dejan: Those multiple steps there. We moved to public cloud I don't know, five, six, seven years ago. We ran a lot of things in Amazon. And to be fair, we still also have data centers around the world. So, let me explain quickly what we actually running because I think it's important. So, we have, I think 16 data centers around the world, and then we run in pretty much every region of Amazon, we use Google Cloud extensively, and we have now shifted a lot of workloads to Oracle Cloud. At the same time, business is threatening me with Alibaba Cloud and Tencent Cloud as something that might be coming our way in the next couple of quarters. So, data centers are there because on the networking layer, the Cloud does not yet give us what we need for the realtime voice and video transmission. </p><p><br></p><p><br>We actually are the best voice provider in the industry. We have proven that, and that's where your milliseconds really matter, therefore networking still sits in data centers. As soon as the backbone can be moved into Amazon, and we are told that could happen in the next three to four years, we will move likely everything to the Cloud. So, what we have generally in the Cloud are different applications, and the reason for that is simply the velocity of deploying and scaling them. </p><p><br></p><p><br>So, what matters to us is, on one hand, the global reach: we have customers in 150 countries around the world. We have to have data centers close to the customers. And the applications need to be as close to the customer as possible, therefore all the different regions of Amazon, and Google, and whatnot. So, as you can imagine, managing all of that, monitoring all of that is a non-trivial exercise. </p><p><br></p><p><br>So, we moved to Kubernetes, in large reason, simply because it is one underlying framework that allows us to run workloads wherever we want. So, to give you an idea, we launched a video meetings product to compete with Zoom. We had, on launch, a couple of hundred thousand users, nothing really. And then, this COVID-19 happened, and within a period of weeks, we now hit 15 million users. The only way you can scale a system like that is if you have a properly built underlying architecture, everything horizontally scalable. </p><p><br></p><p><br>I was blown away, everything really worked. People were super busy, but by having proper cloud architecture, we were able to actually scale, and fulfill the demand that we have seen worldwide. Now, the nice thing is, as you put more and more workloads on top of Kubernetes, you can shift them between clouds as you want, or data centers as you want. And I think that's number one reason why we went with Kubernetes. </p><p><br></p><p><br>I love Amazon, I love Google, and nothing makes me happier than writing them a million-dollar checks, but I also want to be able to move the workloads wherever I can run them cheaply. And, to me, that's very important. I don't have unlimited budget; I have to be able to play the game and get the most compute and the most bandwidth for the lowest cost that I can, and Kubernetes lets me do that.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And would you say that Kubernetes was a technical decision or a business decision or both?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Dejan: That's a good question. I think normally, the way we operate at 8x8, you start with the business problem. The business problem was we don't want to be locked into one cloud. We want to be able to run wherever we want to run, and on top of that, we have customers in Europe who are not very friendly towards Amazon, and want us to run on other clouds. And then, we took a peek: what can we do? What's the fastest and easiest way to do it? Turned out it was Kubernetes, so that's the way we went.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: What did the move to Kubernetes, what was it like? What were some of the surprises?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Dejan: It was very interesting. It is still very interesting. So, on one hand, the good thing was we have already broken the monoliths in the past God knows how many years, into services. But to get things running properly in Kubernetes, you have to go a bit deeper, you actually have to really clean up your code, and so on, and so on. So, one thing that I thought was incredibly useful was this allowed us to, for the first time in 8x8 history, create a proper template for a service where all yo...</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 24 Jun 2020 03:00:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/07593abf/ceff4a0c.mp3" length="40482531" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1677</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode of The Business Cloud Native, host Emily Omier talks with Dejan Deklich who is chief product officer at 8x8 — a leading global voice over IP (VoIP) communications provider offering local number support in over 80 countries.

It’s been a remarkable journey for 8x8. The company launched as Integrated Information Technology (IIT) in 1987, producing graphics accelerator chips and coprocessors for microprocessors, before changing its name to 8x8 and entering the videoconferencing market. Over the last three decades, 8x8 has repeatedly adjusted to the rapidly-changing technology landscape, updating its software stack, and rebuilding its apps as well as its platform. The company has emerged as a leading cloud technology company, with a global presence and a dedicated customer base. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode of The Business Cloud Native, host Emily Omier talks with Dejan Deklich who is chief product officer at 8x8 — a leading global voice over IP (VoIP) communications provider offering local number support in over 80 countries.

It’s been a </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Why Companies Go Cloud-Native with Austin Adams and Zach Arnold </title>
      <itunes:episode>4</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>4</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Why Companies Go Cloud-Native with Austin Adams and Zach Arnold </itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">1045a53b-e57c-4d6b-9086-9a0e975e2c53</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/7e3e7b3e</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>Some of the highlights of the show include</strong></p><ul><li>The diplomacy that’s required between software engineers and management, and why influence is needed to move projects forward to completion.</li><li>Driving factors behind Ygrene’s Kubernetes migration, which included an infrastructure bottleneck, a need to streamline deployment, and a desire to leverage their internal team of cloud experts.</li><li>Management’s request to ship code faster, and why it was important to the organization. </li><li>How the company’s engineers responded to the request to ship code faster, and overcame disconnects with management.</li><li>How the team obtained executive buy-in for a Kubernetes migration.</li><li>Key cultural changes that were required to make the migration to Kubernetes successful.</li><li>How unexpected challenges forced the team to learn the “depths of Kubernetes,” and how it helped with root cause analysis.</li><li>Why the transition to Kubernetes was a success, enabling the team to ship code faster, deliver more value, secure more customers, and drive more revenue. </li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>HerdX: <a href="https://www.herdx.com/">https://www.herdx.com/</a></li><li>Ygrene: <a href="https://ygrene.com/">https://ygrene.com/</a></li><li>Austin Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/_austbot">https://twitter.com/_austbot</a></li><li>Austin LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/austbot/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/austbot/</a></li><li>Arnold’s book on publisher site: <a href="https://www.packtpub.com/cloud-networking/the-kubernetes-workshop">https://www.packtpub.com/cloud-networking/the-kubernetes-workshop</a> </li><li>Arnold’s book on Amazon: <a href="https://www.amazon.com/Kubernetes-Workshop-Interactive-Approach-Learning/dp/1838820752/">https://www.amazon.com/Kubernetes-Workshop-Interactive-Approach-Learning/dp/1838820752/</a></li></ul><p><strong>Transcript<br></strong><br>Announcer: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em> podcast where we explore how end users talk and think about the transition to Kubernetes and cloud-native architectures.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. My name is Emily Omier, and I am here with Austin Adams and Zack Arnold, and we are here to talk about why companies go cloud-native.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Austin: So, I'm currently the CTO of a small Agrotech startup called <a href="https://www.herdx.com/">HerdX</a>. And that means I spend my days designing software, designing architecture for how distributed systems talk, and also leading teams of engineers to build proof-of-concepts and then production systems as they take over the projects that I've designed. </p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And then, what did you do at <a href="https://ygrene.com/">Ygrene</a>? </p><p><br></p><p><br>Austin: I did the exact same thing, except for without the CTO title. And I also had other higher-level engineers working with me at Ygrene. So, we made a lot of technical decisions together. We all migrated to Kubernetes together, and Zack was a chief proponent of that, especially with the culture change. So, I focused on the designing software that teams of implementation engineers could take over and actually build out for the long run. And I think Zack really focused on—oh, I'll let Zack say what he focused on. [laughs].</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Go for it, Zach.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Zach: Hello. I'm Zack. I also no longer work for Ygrene, although I have a lot of admiration and respect for the people who do. It was a fantastic company. So, Austin called me up a while back and asked me to think about participating in a DevOps engineering role at Ygrene. And he sort of said at the outset, we don't really know what it looks like, and we're pretty sure that we just created a position out of a culture, but would you be willing to embody it? </p><p><br></p><p><br>And up until this point, I'd had cloud experience, and I had had software engineering experience, but I didn't really spend a ton of time focused on the actual movement of software from developer’s laptops to production with as few hiccups, and as many tests, and as much safety as possible in between. So, I always told people the role felt like it was three parts. It was part IT automation expert, part software engineer, and then part diplomat. And the diplomacy was mostly in between people who are more operations focused. So, support engineers, project managers, and people who were on-call day in and day out, and being a go-between higher levels of management and software engineers themselves because there's this awkward, coordinated motion that has to really happen at a fine-grained level in order to get DevOps to really work at a company. </p><p><br></p><p><br>What I mean by that is, essentially, Dev and Ops seem to on the surface have opposing goals, the operation staff, it’s job is to maintain stability, and the development side’s job is to introduce change, which invariably introduces instability. So, that dichotomy means that being able to simultaneously satisfy both desires is really a goal of DevOps, but it's difficult to achieve at an organizational level without dealing with some pretty critical cultural components. So, what do I spend my day on? The answer to that question is, yes. It really depends on the day. Sometimes it's cloud engineers. Sometimes it's QA folks, sometimes it's management. Sometimes I'm heads-down writing software for integrations in between tools. And every now and again, I get to contribute to open-source. So, a lot of different actual daily tasks take place in my position.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Tell me a little bit more about this diplomacy between software engineers and management.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Zach: [laughs]. Well, I'm not sure who's going to be listening in this amazing audience of ours, but I assume, because people are human, that they have capital O-pinions about how things should work, especially as it pertains to either software development lifecycle, the ITIL process of introducing change into a datacenter, into a cloud environment, compliance, security. There's lots of, I'll call them thought frameworks that have a very narrow focus on how we should be doing something with respect to software. So, diplomacy is the—well, I guess in true statecraft, it's being able to work in between countries. But in this particular case, diplomacy is using relational equity or influence, to be able to have every group achieve a common and shared purpose. </p><p><br></p><p><br>At the end of the day, in most companies the goal is actually to be able to produce a product that people would want to pay for, and we can do so as quickly and as efficiently as possible. To do that, though, it again requires a lot of people with differing goals to work together towards that shared purpose. So, the diplomacy looks like, aside from just having way too many meetings, it actually looks like being able to communicate other thought frameworks to different stakeholders and being able to synthesize all of the different narrow-focused frameworks into a common shared, overarching process. So, I'll give you a concrete example because it feels like I just spewed a bunch of buzzwords. A concrete example would be, let's say in the common feature that's being delivered for ABC Company, for this feature it requires X number of hours of software development; X number of hours of testing; X number of hours of preparing, either capacity planning, or fleet size recommendations, or some form of operational pre-work; and then the actual deployment, and running, and monitoring. So, in the company that I currently work for, we just...</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>Some of the highlights of the show include</strong></p><ul><li>The diplomacy that’s required between software engineers and management, and why influence is needed to move projects forward to completion.</li><li>Driving factors behind Ygrene’s Kubernetes migration, which included an infrastructure bottleneck, a need to streamline deployment, and a desire to leverage their internal team of cloud experts.</li><li>Management’s request to ship code faster, and why it was important to the organization. </li><li>How the company’s engineers responded to the request to ship code faster, and overcame disconnects with management.</li><li>How the team obtained executive buy-in for a Kubernetes migration.</li><li>Key cultural changes that were required to make the migration to Kubernetes successful.</li><li>How unexpected challenges forced the team to learn the “depths of Kubernetes,” and how it helped with root cause analysis.</li><li>Why the transition to Kubernetes was a success, enabling the team to ship code faster, deliver more value, secure more customers, and drive more revenue. </li></ul><p><strong>Links:</strong></p><ul><li>HerdX: <a href="https://www.herdx.com/">https://www.herdx.com/</a></li><li>Ygrene: <a href="https://ygrene.com/">https://ygrene.com/</a></li><li>Austin Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/_austbot">https://twitter.com/_austbot</a></li><li>Austin LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/austbot/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/austbot/</a></li><li>Arnold’s book on publisher site: <a href="https://www.packtpub.com/cloud-networking/the-kubernetes-workshop">https://www.packtpub.com/cloud-networking/the-kubernetes-workshop</a> </li><li>Arnold’s book on Amazon: <a href="https://www.amazon.com/Kubernetes-Workshop-Interactive-Approach-Learning/dp/1838820752/">https://www.amazon.com/Kubernetes-Workshop-Interactive-Approach-Learning/dp/1838820752/</a></li></ul><p><strong>Transcript<br></strong><br>Announcer: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em> podcast where we explore how end users talk and think about the transition to Kubernetes and cloud-native architectures.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. My name is Emily Omier, and I am here with Austin Adams and Zack Arnold, and we are here to talk about why companies go cloud-native.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Austin: So, I'm currently the CTO of a small Agrotech startup called <a href="https://www.herdx.com/">HerdX</a>. And that means I spend my days designing software, designing architecture for how distributed systems talk, and also leading teams of engineers to build proof-of-concepts and then production systems as they take over the projects that I've designed. </p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And then, what did you do at <a href="https://ygrene.com/">Ygrene</a>? </p><p><br></p><p><br>Austin: I did the exact same thing, except for without the CTO title. And I also had other higher-level engineers working with me at Ygrene. So, we made a lot of technical decisions together. We all migrated to Kubernetes together, and Zack was a chief proponent of that, especially with the culture change. So, I focused on the designing software that teams of implementation engineers could take over and actually build out for the long run. And I think Zack really focused on—oh, I'll let Zack say what he focused on. [laughs].</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Go for it, Zach.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Zach: Hello. I'm Zack. I also no longer work for Ygrene, although I have a lot of admiration and respect for the people who do. It was a fantastic company. So, Austin called me up a while back and asked me to think about participating in a DevOps engineering role at Ygrene. And he sort of said at the outset, we don't really know what it looks like, and we're pretty sure that we just created a position out of a culture, but would you be willing to embody it? </p><p><br></p><p><br>And up until this point, I'd had cloud experience, and I had had software engineering experience, but I didn't really spend a ton of time focused on the actual movement of software from developer’s laptops to production with as few hiccups, and as many tests, and as much safety as possible in between. So, I always told people the role felt like it was three parts. It was part IT automation expert, part software engineer, and then part diplomat. And the diplomacy was mostly in between people who are more operations focused. So, support engineers, project managers, and people who were on-call day in and day out, and being a go-between higher levels of management and software engineers themselves because there's this awkward, coordinated motion that has to really happen at a fine-grained level in order to get DevOps to really work at a company. </p><p><br></p><p><br>What I mean by that is, essentially, Dev and Ops seem to on the surface have opposing goals, the operation staff, it’s job is to maintain stability, and the development side’s job is to introduce change, which invariably introduces instability. So, that dichotomy means that being able to simultaneously satisfy both desires is really a goal of DevOps, but it's difficult to achieve at an organizational level without dealing with some pretty critical cultural components. So, what do I spend my day on? The answer to that question is, yes. It really depends on the day. Sometimes it's cloud engineers. Sometimes it's QA folks, sometimes it's management. Sometimes I'm heads-down writing software for integrations in between tools. And every now and again, I get to contribute to open-source. So, a lot of different actual daily tasks take place in my position.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Tell me a little bit more about this diplomacy between software engineers and management.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Zach: [laughs]. Well, I'm not sure who's going to be listening in this amazing audience of ours, but I assume, because people are human, that they have capital O-pinions about how things should work, especially as it pertains to either software development lifecycle, the ITIL process of introducing change into a datacenter, into a cloud environment, compliance, security. There's lots of, I'll call them thought frameworks that have a very narrow focus on how we should be doing something with respect to software. So, diplomacy is the—well, I guess in true statecraft, it's being able to work in between countries. But in this particular case, diplomacy is using relational equity or influence, to be able to have every group achieve a common and shared purpose. </p><p><br></p><p><br>At the end of the day, in most companies the goal is actually to be able to produce a product that people would want to pay for, and we can do so as quickly and as efficiently as possible. To do that, though, it again requires a lot of people with differing goals to work together towards that shared purpose. So, the diplomacy looks like, aside from just having way too many meetings, it actually looks like being able to communicate other thought frameworks to different stakeholders and being able to synthesize all of the different narrow-focused frameworks into a common shared, overarching process. So, I'll give you a concrete example because it feels like I just spewed a bunch of buzzwords. A concrete example would be, let's say in the common feature that's being delivered for ABC Company, for this feature it requires X number of hours of software development; X number of hours of testing; X number of hours of preparing, either capacity planning, or fleet size recommendations, or some form of operational pre-work; and then the actual deployment, and running, and monitoring. So, in the company that I currently work for, we just...</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 17 Jun 2020 08:00:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/7e3e7b3e/dcca6955.mp3" length="58698248" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2436</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Transitioning to a cloud-native architecture is a complicated process. It requires expert oversight, sound strategy, and a communication between managers and engineers. 

In this episode of The Business Cloud Native, host Emily Omier interviews Austin Adams and Zach Arnold, who together spearheaded Ygrene’s transition to Kubernetes. This conversation focuses largely on the groundwork that was required to migrate Ygrene’s infrastructure, and the lessons that Adams and Arnold learned throughout their journey. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Transitioning to a cloud-native architecture is a complicated process. It requires expert oversight, sound strategy, and a communication between managers and engineers. 

In this episode of The Business Cloud Native, host Emily Omier interviews Austin A</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Exploring Ant Financial’s Cloud-Native Journey with Haojie Hang</title>
      <itunes:episode>3</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>3</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Exploring Ant Financial’s Cloud-Native Journey with Haojie Hang</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">5fcbf1b3-eed1-4bbd-acd3-bf7e5f4965c6</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/9097153b</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>Some highlights of the show include</strong></p><ul><li>The challenges of operating digital commerce at scale, including the need for resource pooling and resiliency — and how this caused Ant Financial to re-think their infrastructure. </li><li>Ant Financial’s former approach to scaling, which was mostly manual, and highly resource-intensive. </li><li>How Kubernetes is expediting cloud development for Ant Financial.</li><li>Haojie’s thoughts on the global engineering skills gap, and China’s growing cloud computing market including driving factors and barriers. </li><li>Why Ant Financial’s migration has largely been a success — and why achieving operational security is now a top priority for the company.  </li><li>How Ant Financial is managing disconnect between its engineers and business leaders. </li><li>The company’s ongoing mission to migrate its systems and applications away from legacy architectures.</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links</strong></p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/haojiehang/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/haojiehang/</a></li><li><a href="https://www.investopedia.com/tech/worlds-top-10-fintech-companies-baba/">https://www.investopedia.com/tech/worlds-top-10-fintech-companies-baba/</a></li></ul><p><br><strong>Transcript</strong></p><p><br>Announcer: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em> podcast where we explore how end users talk and think about the transition to Kubernetes and cloud-native architectures.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: So, I always start the same way. Can you introduce yourself?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Haojie: Hey, my name is Haojie Hang. I'm a product manager in the CTO office at Ant Financial. I work on the product and strategy side for, basically, the CTO and the other executive leaders, as well as leading a small product teams within the org to look at the frontier technology in the cloud and other infrastructure businesses.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And can you tell me a little bit more about what Ant Financial does? And then, also, what do you do on a day to day basis? What do you do when you get into the office?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Haojie: Yeah, I'll do a quick introduction about the Ant Financial business. It's not just one business or two business, it's a group of businesses that we innovate and we do, mostly in China, but we're also expanding very rapidly all over the world. So, Ant Financial is basically a group of businesses including credit for both consumers and the enterprise, as well as loan businesses, both consumer and enterprise businesses. We say that the parent organization is basically, we call it Alipay, it’s the earliest business we do since 2004 when the business was basically born from Taobao, which is our parent company. So, in short, the Ant Financial Business has a lot of presence in the business of payments business, remittance, credit card, loans, securities, and many other businesses like intelligent technology, blockchain, pretty much everything you can imagine in the FinTech and financial services, we’re in there.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Tell me a little bit more about the cloud-native journey for Ant Financial. When did it start? Why did it start? What was some of the motivations behind moving to cloud-native?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Haojie: Yeah, it's actually quite interesting. I joined Ant Financial in 2008, but actually, the entire company started to look at cloud-native technology quite early, in 2012. So, back then, people were just looking at these technologies around the world, mostly from the US, they look at this open-source community, look at what other companies are doing, how to use the cloud-native technology to help with their business in the peak time, so during event. There’s online promotion event we're doing every year, called Double 11—Shuāng shíyī in Chinese. Every year, so we have a large amount of promotional events happening online, trying to help merchants and the customer is trying to sell and buy stuff in our Tmall and Taobao platform in very, very discounted price. So, for that promotion event online, we have to think about the resilience, the resource pooling, oftentimes the visits has to increase multiple times, sometimes over 100 times the increase compared to the normal time. So in that case, we have to think about how we can be very resilient and efficient infrastructure to support that business needs. So, this is a very large topic. And then, back then, there was a lot of focus and study in our cloud computing department. So, we started looking at this technology called Mesos in 2012. And then, we do a lot of experiments around this technology, but from the business perspective, it's still hard to justify the benefits of moving to Mesos completely. So, we have multiple teams doing a lot of research in Mesos, in Kubernetes, sometimes in our own technology stack, but there's not enough proof or enough confidence for us to move completely over to that technology, until the emergence of Docker container, this Docker technology. Then we started to look at our container infrastructure, really do the investigation around this technology, and understand why this is taking over so quickly over the world, from the business perspective, and from the technology perspective. If you look at the community of Docker, the thing does not really happen until 2015. But we are already in the game for about a year or two. So, we're actually quite happy about our original strategy, but it's just in terms of the research. We're actually a little bit behind in terms of moving to this cloud-native architecture. But as you can see, that I had an interview with CNCF. So, we are very happy about the results that we have right now. Pretty much the entire architecture we run within Ant Financial is, basically, on Kubernetes ecosystem. It's not just using the open-source version of it. We're doing a lot of customization around this open-source framework. Yeah, I can talk more about the details.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Yeah. Well, let's back up just a little bit. I’m curious what you were doing to manage this scaling before? And how did that change? And what about the whole process changed? Like, how stressful is it now, compared to before?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Haojie: The process was very manual, I would say. We have extremely large team of engineers, and DevOps, security teams. And oftentimes their responsibility are overlap. So, some engineers are doing security work, some engineers are doing basically operational work. I would say, some people really hated it because they have to be on the computer, look at monitor 24/7, making sure transactions succeeded. When the peak time happens, there's nothing wrong with it. Sometimes they have to keep their phone open 24/7, basically to make sure this thing will not fail, right? And then, just many parts of work has to—so in the previous way, the way we do this operation is quite manual. We don't have a mature system or methodology telling us what we should do first, we should do second, and what's what would you do after this. So, basically the collaboration chain was not there. Therefore, when issue happens, our operation team has to respond very quickly. But then, how can we quickly identify the problem, and make it a problem? That's a problem, right? So, we have to make sure every time we respond, we respond in a very effective manner. That's the problem. In the previous process when something unexpected happen, who had to engage with the entire team from product, engineering, operation, security, everybody has to get up and look at the problem together, which was quite inefficient. So, after we moved to this cloud-native architecture—it's not the standard cloud architect, it's, kind of—we have a lot of innovation on...</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>Some highlights of the show include</strong></p><ul><li>The challenges of operating digital commerce at scale, including the need for resource pooling and resiliency — and how this caused Ant Financial to re-think their infrastructure. </li><li>Ant Financial’s former approach to scaling, which was mostly manual, and highly resource-intensive. </li><li>How Kubernetes is expediting cloud development for Ant Financial.</li><li>Haojie’s thoughts on the global engineering skills gap, and China’s growing cloud computing market including driving factors and barriers. </li><li>Why Ant Financial’s migration has largely been a success — and why achieving operational security is now a top priority for the company.  </li><li>How Ant Financial is managing disconnect between its engineers and business leaders. </li><li>The company’s ongoing mission to migrate its systems and applications away from legacy architectures.</li></ul><p><br></p><p><strong>Links</strong></p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/haojiehang/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/haojiehang/</a></li><li><a href="https://www.investopedia.com/tech/worlds-top-10-fintech-companies-baba/">https://www.investopedia.com/tech/worlds-top-10-fintech-companies-baba/</a></li></ul><p><br><strong>Transcript</strong></p><p><br>Announcer: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em> podcast where we explore how end users talk and think about the transition to Kubernetes and cloud-native architectures.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: So, I always start the same way. Can you introduce yourself?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Haojie: Hey, my name is Haojie Hang. I'm a product manager in the CTO office at Ant Financial. I work on the product and strategy side for, basically, the CTO and the other executive leaders, as well as leading a small product teams within the org to look at the frontier technology in the cloud and other infrastructure businesses.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: And can you tell me a little bit more about what Ant Financial does? And then, also, what do you do on a day to day basis? What do you do when you get into the office?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Haojie: Yeah, I'll do a quick introduction about the Ant Financial business. It's not just one business or two business, it's a group of businesses that we innovate and we do, mostly in China, but we're also expanding very rapidly all over the world. So, Ant Financial is basically a group of businesses including credit for both consumers and the enterprise, as well as loan businesses, both consumer and enterprise businesses. We say that the parent organization is basically, we call it Alipay, it’s the earliest business we do since 2004 when the business was basically born from Taobao, which is our parent company. So, in short, the Ant Financial Business has a lot of presence in the business of payments business, remittance, credit card, loans, securities, and many other businesses like intelligent technology, blockchain, pretty much everything you can imagine in the FinTech and financial services, we’re in there.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Tell me a little bit more about the cloud-native journey for Ant Financial. When did it start? Why did it start? What was some of the motivations behind moving to cloud-native?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Haojie: Yeah, it's actually quite interesting. I joined Ant Financial in 2008, but actually, the entire company started to look at cloud-native technology quite early, in 2012. So, back then, people were just looking at these technologies around the world, mostly from the US, they look at this open-source community, look at what other companies are doing, how to use the cloud-native technology to help with their business in the peak time, so during event. There’s online promotion event we're doing every year, called Double 11—Shuāng shíyī in Chinese. Every year, so we have a large amount of promotional events happening online, trying to help merchants and the customer is trying to sell and buy stuff in our Tmall and Taobao platform in very, very discounted price. So, for that promotion event online, we have to think about the resilience, the resource pooling, oftentimes the visits has to increase multiple times, sometimes over 100 times the increase compared to the normal time. So in that case, we have to think about how we can be very resilient and efficient infrastructure to support that business needs. So, this is a very large topic. And then, back then, there was a lot of focus and study in our cloud computing department. So, we started looking at this technology called Mesos in 2012. And then, we do a lot of experiments around this technology, but from the business perspective, it's still hard to justify the benefits of moving to Mesos completely. So, we have multiple teams doing a lot of research in Mesos, in Kubernetes, sometimes in our own technology stack, but there's not enough proof or enough confidence for us to move completely over to that technology, until the emergence of Docker container, this Docker technology. Then we started to look at our container infrastructure, really do the investigation around this technology, and understand why this is taking over so quickly over the world, from the business perspective, and from the technology perspective. If you look at the community of Docker, the thing does not really happen until 2015. But we are already in the game for about a year or two. So, we're actually quite happy about our original strategy, but it's just in terms of the research. We're actually a little bit behind in terms of moving to this cloud-native architecture. But as you can see, that I had an interview with CNCF. So, we are very happy about the results that we have right now. Pretty much the entire architecture we run within Ant Financial is, basically, on Kubernetes ecosystem. It's not just using the open-source version of it. We're doing a lot of customization around this open-source framework. Yeah, I can talk more about the details.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Yeah. Well, let's back up just a little bit. I’m curious what you were doing to manage this scaling before? And how did that change? And what about the whole process changed? Like, how stressful is it now, compared to before?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Haojie: The process was very manual, I would say. We have extremely large team of engineers, and DevOps, security teams. And oftentimes their responsibility are overlap. So, some engineers are doing security work, some engineers are doing basically operational work. I would say, some people really hated it because they have to be on the computer, look at monitor 24/7, making sure transactions succeeded. When the peak time happens, there's nothing wrong with it. Sometimes they have to keep their phone open 24/7, basically to make sure this thing will not fail, right? And then, just many parts of work has to—so in the previous way, the way we do this operation is quite manual. We don't have a mature system or methodology telling us what we should do first, we should do second, and what's what would you do after this. So, basically the collaboration chain was not there. Therefore, when issue happens, our operation team has to respond very quickly. But then, how can we quickly identify the problem, and make it a problem? That's a problem, right? So, we have to make sure every time we respond, we respond in a very effective manner. That's the problem. In the previous process when something unexpected happen, who had to engage with the entire team from product, engineering, operation, security, everybody has to get up and look at the problem together, which was quite inefficient. So, after we moved to this cloud-native architecture—it's not the standard cloud architect, it's, kind of—we have a lot of innovation on...</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 10 Jun 2020 08:00:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/9097153b/07bc3f75.mp3" length="48901032" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2035</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>Ant Financial has emerged as one of the highest valued FinTech companies in the world. An offshoot of Alibaba Group, Ant Financial oversees several leading ventures including Alipay, Ant Fortune, and Ant Financial Cloud, among others. 

Haojie Hang is a project manager for the office of the CTO at Ant Financial, acting as an advisor to the organization’s CTO and other executive leaders, while leading small product teams in their technological pursuits. In this episode of The Business Cloud Native, host Emily Omier and Haojie discuss Ant Financial’s ongoing cloud-native journey, and how it’s helping to lower costs and drive efficiencies.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>Ant Financial has emerged as one of the highest valued FinTech companies in the world. An offshoot of Alibaba Group, Ant Financial oversees several leading ventures including Alipay, Ant Fortune, and Ant Financial Cloud, among others. 

Haojie Hang is a</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Key Factors to Consider During Containerization with Travis Jeppson</title>
      <itunes:episode>2</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>2</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>Key Factors to Consider During Containerization with Travis Jeppson</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">1a0247c8-7dfc-4907-85d9-9df52d7f933b</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/d3b6915b</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>Some of the highlights of the show include</strong></p><ul><li>How containerization enabled Nav to spread roughly 250 virtual machines across multiple environments, while drastically reducing infrastructure spend</li><li>Travis’s thoughts on buying cloud native software tools versus building them, and what engineers should consider during this process</li><li>The difficulty of finding security solutions that work inside of a cloud-native ecosystem</li><li>Why companies should expect to encounter unique challenges when migrating to Kubernetes</li><li>Why companies need to understand their end goal, and determine an overall objective before beginning a migration</li><li>Travis’s must-have engineering tool, and why he can’t live without it </li></ul><p><br><strong>Links</strong></p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/stmpy/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/stmpy/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/stmpy">https://twitter.com/stmpy</a> </li></ul><p><br><strong>Transcript</strong></p><p><br>Announcer: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em> Podcast where we explore how end users talk and think about the transition to Kubernetes and cloud-native architectures.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. I’m Emily Omier, your host. And today I’m here with Travis Jeppson. Travis is currently at Kasten, but he’s also going to talk about his time as a director of engineering at Nav.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Travis: At Nav, my role shifted quite a bit while I was there. I started as a software developer, writing Ruby back end applications for them, and then shifted into—actually within a month of being there, they shifted me over to the operational side because I had previous experience working with containerization, and also in infrastructure. So, they quickly moved me over into that realm and from there, I worked there for about a year until they told me, go spin up a team and get things moving. Help us move to containerization. Help us move to a more modern infrastructure and stuff. And so, about a year after that I became a director of engineering to where I had our ops team that had spun up, and then I also acquired both our QA team and our IT team that was there. And then, about a year after that, I ended up acquiring a little bit more than that. So, I ended up with a fair amount of our front end and some of our backend teams as well, and where they moved me into the senior director position. So, a day in the life, towards the end of when I was at Nav was a lot of working with the teams, helping them to do a lot of architectural perspective, and changes, and outlook to where we were trying to get as far as the company is concerned. We were building a product that we could address both first-party customers where they would log in to the Nav website directly, as well as working with partners so that we could issue out Nav functionality to those partners that they could incorporate to their pages as well. And so, we worked very hard to try to segment those two pieces together so that what we were building could be dispersed between both first-party customers and our third-party customers. And so, towards the end of my time there, it ended up being a lot of working within all of engineering to help facilitate those purposes. Then, just about six months ago, I ended up shifting my role over to a company called Kasten. And, Kasten is strictly working within the Kubernetes ecosystem. So, we do data management for Kubernetes based applications, and I am the site lead in Utah for Kasten, and so my day in and day out, a lot is, it's, kind of, all over the place. Sometimes it's working with engineering to help figure out some things going on there, sometimes it's working with brokers to help find office space for it. And sometimes it's dealing with insurance. It ended up being quite dynamic. But overall, I'd say most of my time is really spent more on the engineering side, just from the perspective of having worked at Nav and having been a consumer of a lot of these technologies, I think that they really appreciate my insights that I'm able to give there. So, I end up working, a lot, with the engineers to help facilitate what we're doing.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Sounds like you end up serving as a bridge from having been an end-user. But do you think that there is common miscommunications that happen, or what do those conversations sound like? Why is that experience valuable?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Travis: Yeah, so I don't know if it's as much as a miscommunication as much as what are customers looking for? And what are they trying to achieve? And why are they purchasing different software solutions? And what makes sense for them, more than anything. And I think that, having been a consumer of those products, I was more or less on the front lines there. When I was building our operational team at Nav, that was basically what I was doing is trying to figure out what things are we going to spend time on? And what things are we going to build ourselves, or what things do we need to just go find a solution for and bring them in-house? And the funny thing is when I was doing that for Nav is actually when I was introduced to Kasten and to the CEO here. And so, that ended up changing the way my career went. But overall, I think what Kasten—what those conversations really end up becoming is what are customers trying to do, and where are they trying to go?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Yeah, and in fact, that is exactly what I want to talk about more on this podcast. So, tell me a little bit about what your experience at Nav was. What were you looking for? What did you want to prioritize? What was the company hoping to get out of moving to containers?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Travis: So, I would say maybe the piece that really facilitated a lot of the progress in that sense was starting to understand our infrastructure spend. And then, to couple with that was also trying to become more agile. More agile in the sense of being able to push on demand, where previous to that we were pushing—you know, when we push our code, we did it on a bi-weekly basis—well, every other week, and it was always very cumbersome. If we have pictures of us in the early days of Nav, where there would be 10 engineers around someone’s desk, and they were the one person that was pushing the code into production, just waiting for the other shoe to fall, or waiting for something to happen. And so, when I started doing operational things for Nav, it started addressing those two things. What can we do to help control our infrastructure, and to understand it a little bit better? And how can we also create more of a dynamic infrastructure? Like, Nav is very much a US-based company. And so, the traffic that we're getting onto our website was regional very, very much. And so, there would be periods where it would be very busy, and then there'd be periods where it wasn’t. And the way that our infrastructure was designed, and a lot of times the way that they are designed, especially with virtual machines, is that you're building for capacity. You're building to be able to handle that load, and that has to stay there all the time, regardless of whether that capacity is being used or not. And so, that was one of the biggest questions, and that bill was—we were completely in the clouds. We were completely in AWS, but that bill continued to get more and more expensive every month. To the point of where it warranted the executive team to come down and say, “This needs to be fixed. This is going at an outrageous pace, and we need to be able to figure out how to control this.” And so, that's when they came to me and said, “Okay, get a team spun up, and let's figure out how to control this.” And so, I would say that those wer...</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>Some of the highlights of the show include</strong></p><ul><li>How containerization enabled Nav to spread roughly 250 virtual machines across multiple environments, while drastically reducing infrastructure spend</li><li>Travis’s thoughts on buying cloud native software tools versus building them, and what engineers should consider during this process</li><li>The difficulty of finding security solutions that work inside of a cloud-native ecosystem</li><li>Why companies should expect to encounter unique challenges when migrating to Kubernetes</li><li>Why companies need to understand their end goal, and determine an overall objective before beginning a migration</li><li>Travis’s must-have engineering tool, and why he can’t live without it </li></ul><p><br><strong>Links</strong></p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/stmpy/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/stmpy/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/stmpy">https://twitter.com/stmpy</a> </li></ul><p><br><strong>Transcript</strong></p><p><br>Announcer: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em> Podcast where we explore how end users talk and think about the transition to Kubernetes and cloud-native architectures.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. I’m Emily Omier, your host. And today I’m here with Travis Jeppson. Travis is currently at Kasten, but he’s also going to talk about his time as a director of engineering at Nav.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Travis: At Nav, my role shifted quite a bit while I was there. I started as a software developer, writing Ruby back end applications for them, and then shifted into—actually within a month of being there, they shifted me over to the operational side because I had previous experience working with containerization, and also in infrastructure. So, they quickly moved me over into that realm and from there, I worked there for about a year until they told me, go spin up a team and get things moving. Help us move to containerization. Help us move to a more modern infrastructure and stuff. And so, about a year after that I became a director of engineering to where I had our ops team that had spun up, and then I also acquired both our QA team and our IT team that was there. And then, about a year after that, I ended up acquiring a little bit more than that. So, I ended up with a fair amount of our front end and some of our backend teams as well, and where they moved me into the senior director position. So, a day in the life, towards the end of when I was at Nav was a lot of working with the teams, helping them to do a lot of architectural perspective, and changes, and outlook to where we were trying to get as far as the company is concerned. We were building a product that we could address both first-party customers where they would log in to the Nav website directly, as well as working with partners so that we could issue out Nav functionality to those partners that they could incorporate to their pages as well. And so, we worked very hard to try to segment those two pieces together so that what we were building could be dispersed between both first-party customers and our third-party customers. And so, towards the end of my time there, it ended up being a lot of working within all of engineering to help facilitate those purposes. Then, just about six months ago, I ended up shifting my role over to a company called Kasten. And, Kasten is strictly working within the Kubernetes ecosystem. So, we do data management for Kubernetes based applications, and I am the site lead in Utah for Kasten, and so my day in and day out, a lot is, it's, kind of, all over the place. Sometimes it's working with engineering to help figure out some things going on there, sometimes it's working with brokers to help find office space for it. And sometimes it's dealing with insurance. It ended up being quite dynamic. But overall, I'd say most of my time is really spent more on the engineering side, just from the perspective of having worked at Nav and having been a consumer of a lot of these technologies, I think that they really appreciate my insights that I'm able to give there. So, I end up working, a lot, with the engineers to help facilitate what we're doing.</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Sounds like you end up serving as a bridge from having been an end-user. But do you think that there is common miscommunications that happen, or what do those conversations sound like? Why is that experience valuable?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Travis: Yeah, so I don't know if it's as much as a miscommunication as much as what are customers looking for? And what are they trying to achieve? And why are they purchasing different software solutions? And what makes sense for them, more than anything. And I think that, having been a consumer of those products, I was more or less on the front lines there. When I was building our operational team at Nav, that was basically what I was doing is trying to figure out what things are we going to spend time on? And what things are we going to build ourselves, or what things do we need to just go find a solution for and bring them in-house? And the funny thing is when I was doing that for Nav is actually when I was introduced to Kasten and to the CEO here. And so, that ended up changing the way my career went. But overall, I think what Kasten—what those conversations really end up becoming is what are customers trying to do, and where are they trying to go?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Emily: Yeah, and in fact, that is exactly what I want to talk about more on this podcast. So, tell me a little bit about what your experience at Nav was. What were you looking for? What did you want to prioritize? What was the company hoping to get out of moving to containers?</p><p><br></p><p><br>Travis: So, I would say maybe the piece that really facilitated a lot of the progress in that sense was starting to understand our infrastructure spend. And then, to couple with that was also trying to become more agile. More agile in the sense of being able to push on demand, where previous to that we were pushing—you know, when we push our code, we did it on a bi-weekly basis—well, every other week, and it was always very cumbersome. If we have pictures of us in the early days of Nav, where there would be 10 engineers around someone’s desk, and they were the one person that was pushing the code into production, just waiting for the other shoe to fall, or waiting for something to happen. And so, when I started doing operational things for Nav, it started addressing those two things. What can we do to help control our infrastructure, and to understand it a little bit better? And how can we also create more of a dynamic infrastructure? Like, Nav is very much a US-based company. And so, the traffic that we're getting onto our website was regional very, very much. And so, there would be periods where it would be very busy, and then there'd be periods where it wasn’t. And the way that our infrastructure was designed, and a lot of times the way that they are designed, especially with virtual machines, is that you're building for capacity. You're building to be able to handle that load, and that has to stay there all the time, regardless of whether that capacity is being used or not. And so, that was one of the biggest questions, and that bill was—we were completely in the clouds. We were completely in AWS, but that bill continued to get more and more expensive every month. To the point of where it warranted the executive team to come down and say, “This needs to be fixed. This is going at an outrageous pace, and we need to be able to figure out how to control this.” And so, that's when they came to me and said, “Okay, get a team spun up, and let's figure out how to control this.” And so, I would say that those wer...</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 03 Jun 2020 08:00:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/d3b6915b/b637e418.mp3" length="62167532" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>2588</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>In this episode of The Business Cloud Native, host Emily Omier talks with Travis Jeppson, the engineering site lead for Utah at Kasten, and the former director of engineering at Nav. 

Their conversation focuses on Travis’s experiences at Nav, including how the need to control infrastructure and improve agility led the company to migrate to containerized applications. Travis elaborates on some of the key lessons that he learned at Nav, and how his time at Nav influenced his current role at Kasten. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>In this episode of The Business Cloud Native, host Emily Omier talks with Travis Jeppson, the engineering site lead for Utah at Kasten, and the former director of engineering at Nav. 

Their conversation focuses on Travis’s experiences at Nav, including</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>The Kubernetes Learning Curve with Edgaras Apsega</title>
      <itunes:episode>1</itunes:episode>
      <podcast:episode>1</podcast:episode>
      <itunes:title>The Kubernetes Learning Curve with Edgaras Apsega</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>full</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">0547c25d-3a3b-4f9a-a95d-e217aca291c8</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/edfdea21</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>Some of the highlights of the show include</strong></p><ul><li>Why Adform decided to move to a cloud native architecture and Kubernetes specifically </li><li>Who was the driving force behind the move to Kubernetes?</li><li>Was the switch purely an engineering decision or did it involve people outside of engineering?</li><li>Positive and less positive surprises that come with switching to cloud native </li><li>Organizational and technical problems Edgaras has faced</li><li>What’s next for Adform on their cloud journey</li></ul><p><strong>Links</strong></p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/apsega/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/apsega/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/Apsega">https://twitter.com/Apsega</a></li></ul><p><br></p><p><br><strong>Transcript</strong><br>Announcer: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em> Podcast where we explore how end users talk and think about the transition to Kubernetes and cloud-native architectures.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. I’m Emily Omier, your host. And I’m here today with Edgaras Apsega, lead IT systems engineer at AdForm. Edgaras, what I’d like to do is just start out with you introducing yourself.</p><p><br>Edgaras: I’m Edgaras. I’m working in the Adform. For anyone that doesn't know, Adform is one of the leading advertising technology companies in the world, and provides the software used by buyers and sellers to automate digital advertising. And, probably one of the most interesting parts of our solution stack is demand-side platform that has real-time bidding. And, what it means is that when that page is loading for some kind of internet users, behind the curtain, there's actually a bidding process that takes place for the placeholders to show ads. So, basically, you're doing low latency stuff. And, in Adform, I'm a lead systems engineer for the cloud services team. Our team consists of eight people, and we are providing private cloud storage, load balancing, CDN, service discovery and Kubernetes platforms for our developers that are in [00:01:36 unintelligible] production services.  So, to better understand the scale that our team is working on, first of all, you can see that we are not using public cloud and we have our own private cloud that has six regions, more than 1500 physical servers, and there are more than 4000 [00:01:55 unintelligible]. And, for Kubernetes, we have seven clusters, more than 50 physical machines and around 300 constantly running [00:02:05 pods].  So, we can say that we prefer bigger clusters with bigger resources sharing pools. And you asked, how do I spend my daily work, right?</p><p><br>Emily: Yeah. So, when you get into the office or—right now you're not going into the office—get into your table or your [laughs] home office, what are the first couple things that you do, or…</p><p><br>Edgaras: Yeah, so, when I arrive at work, or, like, at these times, just get off the showers straight into work desk, [laughs] actually, I'm most productive in the mornings and evenings. So, in the mornings, when I go to my work desk, I try to do as much as I can. My sprint plan tasks, and then I scroll through the Slacks, emails, and the tickets assigned to me because we have a development team in another region. So, instantly in the mornings, we have some kinds of support tasks that we need to do.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Let's go ahead and talk about what this is all about, the business of cloud native, and tell me a little bit about why Adform decided to move to a cloud native architecture. Why did you decide to use Kubernetes, for example?</p><p><br>Edgaras: I'd say, actually, there were two parts. At first, we moved from traditional and, let's say, old-fashioned monitoring solutions to Prometheus, and its integration with service discovery solved lots of operational time for constantly managing and configuring monitoring and alerting for our, quite often, changing infrastructure. And the second part is the adoption of Kubernetes and all of the together coming parts like continuous integration and delivery. So, why we moved to this kind of architecture? It was because the biggest pain points for developers were to maintain actually their virtual machines. And rolling out new software releases in an old-fashioned way, took just lots of time for new software releases to reach production. So, we were looking at the new solutions that were available in the market, and Kubernetes was actually one of them. So, after successful proof of concept, we have selected it as our main application scheduler and orchestration tool.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: What would you say was, like, the business value that you were hoping to get out of Kubernetes, out have the ability to release software faster, for example?</p><p><br></p><p>Edgaras: Yeah.  So, actually, we wanted to remove the operational time from our developers so that they could spend more time coding without taking care of all of the infrastructure surrounding parts, like the application operating system management, [00:04:58 unintelligible] monitoring, alerting, logging, and so on. So, basically what, I'm saying is that the business value was for the developers to be able to ship features faster, and have a more stable platform that scales application [00:05:15 unintelligible] as well. So, in addition to that, we have a big research department, and the research department always wanted us to have a dynamic environment where they could just launch an applications around some research models, and then shut it down.  So, I believe that was the business value.</p><p><br>Emily: Who in the organization do you think was motivating, or driving the move to Kubernetes?</p><p><br></p><p>Edgaras: I'd say, actually, it was more like the operation engineers, because the developers ended taking care of their environment virtual machines. They don't know much about it, but they still have to look after it, and constantly asking us for help. And we wanted to have this operational stuff only in our hands and for the developers to run only the code.  So, I believe, yeah.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: To what extent was the move to Kubernetes, or to cloud native in general, just purely an engineering decision? Or did it involve other people outside of engineering?</p><p><br>Edgaras: Well, it wasn't only the engineering decision, because we had to take it to the upper levels, just to show this new cloud native, the modern way of developing and running applications. So, the upper management level had to invest time for us to move to microservices oriented architecture and so on. So, basically, we had to show that with a little bit of time investment we can gain lots of benefits, like faster code deploys. So, we are taking the operational work from developers, and developers, when they're releasing their applications, they have full stack monitoring, logging, and they don't need to do any of the operational tasks.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: How difficult was it to have this conversation? Do you feel like the upper management, did they understand the value?</p><p><br>Edgaras: Yeah, it was kind of hard, because nobody wants to invest time to write the code. And, as we are a software company, we always need to write new features. But, once we showed a good example, when investing not so much time, we have those kinds of benefits, then it was quite easy to change the mindset of upper management.</p><p><br>Emily: And, how important do you think this was for Adform?</p><p><br></p><p>Edgaras: I think it was very im...</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>Some of the highlights of the show include</strong></p><ul><li>Why Adform decided to move to a cloud native architecture and Kubernetes specifically </li><li>Who was the driving force behind the move to Kubernetes?</li><li>Was the switch purely an engineering decision or did it involve people outside of engineering?</li><li>Positive and less positive surprises that come with switching to cloud native </li><li>Organizational and technical problems Edgaras has faced</li><li>What’s next for Adform on their cloud journey</li></ul><p><strong>Links</strong></p><ul><li>LinkedIn: <a href="https://www.linkedin.com/in/apsega/">https://www.linkedin.com/in/apsega/</a></li><li>Twitter: <a href="https://twitter.com/Apsega">https://twitter.com/Apsega</a></li></ul><p><br></p><p><br><strong>Transcript</strong><br>Announcer: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em> Podcast where we explore how end users talk and think about the transition to Kubernetes and cloud-native architectures.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Welcome to <em>The Business of Cloud Native</em>. I’m Emily Omier, your host. And I’m here today with Edgaras Apsega, lead IT systems engineer at AdForm. Edgaras, what I’d like to do is just start out with you introducing yourself.</p><p><br>Edgaras: I’m Edgaras. I’m working in the Adform. For anyone that doesn't know, Adform is one of the leading advertising technology companies in the world, and provides the software used by buyers and sellers to automate digital advertising. And, probably one of the most interesting parts of our solution stack is demand-side platform that has real-time bidding. And, what it means is that when that page is loading for some kind of internet users, behind the curtain, there's actually a bidding process that takes place for the placeholders to show ads. So, basically, you're doing low latency stuff. And, in Adform, I'm a lead systems engineer for the cloud services team. Our team consists of eight people, and we are providing private cloud storage, load balancing, CDN, service discovery and Kubernetes platforms for our developers that are in [00:01:36 unintelligible] production services.  So, to better understand the scale that our team is working on, first of all, you can see that we are not using public cloud and we have our own private cloud that has six regions, more than 1500 physical servers, and there are more than 4000 [00:01:55 unintelligible]. And, for Kubernetes, we have seven clusters, more than 50 physical machines and around 300 constantly running [00:02:05 pods].  So, we can say that we prefer bigger clusters with bigger resources sharing pools. And you asked, how do I spend my daily work, right?</p><p><br>Emily: Yeah. So, when you get into the office or—right now you're not going into the office—get into your table or your [laughs] home office, what are the first couple things that you do, or…</p><p><br>Edgaras: Yeah, so, when I arrive at work, or, like, at these times, just get off the showers straight into work desk, [laughs] actually, I'm most productive in the mornings and evenings. So, in the mornings, when I go to my work desk, I try to do as much as I can. My sprint plan tasks, and then I scroll through the Slacks, emails, and the tickets assigned to me because we have a development team in another region. So, instantly in the mornings, we have some kinds of support tasks that we need to do.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: Let's go ahead and talk about what this is all about, the business of cloud native, and tell me a little bit about why Adform decided to move to a cloud native architecture. Why did you decide to use Kubernetes, for example?</p><p><br>Edgaras: I'd say, actually, there were two parts. At first, we moved from traditional and, let's say, old-fashioned monitoring solutions to Prometheus, and its integration with service discovery solved lots of operational time for constantly managing and configuring monitoring and alerting for our, quite often, changing infrastructure. And the second part is the adoption of Kubernetes and all of the together coming parts like continuous integration and delivery. So, why we moved to this kind of architecture? It was because the biggest pain points for developers were to maintain actually their virtual machines. And rolling out new software releases in an old-fashioned way, took just lots of time for new software releases to reach production. So, we were looking at the new solutions that were available in the market, and Kubernetes was actually one of them. So, after successful proof of concept, we have selected it as our main application scheduler and orchestration tool.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: What would you say was, like, the business value that you were hoping to get out of Kubernetes, out have the ability to release software faster, for example?</p><p><br></p><p>Edgaras: Yeah.  So, actually, we wanted to remove the operational time from our developers so that they could spend more time coding without taking care of all of the infrastructure surrounding parts, like the application operating system management, [00:04:58 unintelligible] monitoring, alerting, logging, and so on. So, basically what, I'm saying is that the business value was for the developers to be able to ship features faster, and have a more stable platform that scales application [00:05:15 unintelligible] as well. So, in addition to that, we have a big research department, and the research department always wanted us to have a dynamic environment where they could just launch an applications around some research models, and then shut it down.  So, I believe that was the business value.</p><p><br>Emily: Who in the organization do you think was motivating, or driving the move to Kubernetes?</p><p><br></p><p>Edgaras: I'd say, actually, it was more like the operation engineers, because the developers ended taking care of their environment virtual machines. They don't know much about it, but they still have to look after it, and constantly asking us for help. And we wanted to have this operational stuff only in our hands and for the developers to run only the code.  So, I believe, yeah.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: To what extent was the move to Kubernetes, or to cloud native in general, just purely an engineering decision? Or did it involve other people outside of engineering?</p><p><br>Edgaras: Well, it wasn't only the engineering decision, because we had to take it to the upper levels, just to show this new cloud native, the modern way of developing and running applications. So, the upper management level had to invest time for us to move to microservices oriented architecture and so on. So, basically, we had to show that with a little bit of time investment we can gain lots of benefits, like faster code deploys. So, we are taking the operational work from developers, and developers, when they're releasing their applications, they have full stack monitoring, logging, and they don't need to do any of the operational tasks.</p><p><br></p><p>Emily: How difficult was it to have this conversation? Do you feel like the upper management, did they understand the value?</p><p><br>Edgaras: Yeah, it was kind of hard, because nobody wants to invest time to write the code. And, as we are a software company, we always need to write new features. But, once we showed a good example, when investing not so much time, we have those kinds of benefits, then it was quite easy to change the mindset of upper management.</p><p><br>Emily: And, how important do you think this was for Adform?</p><p><br></p><p>Edgaras: I think it was very im...</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Wed, 27 May 2020 08:00:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/edfdea21/efef42a0.mp3" length="30924540" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>1286</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>In the inaugural episode of The Business of Cloud Native, host Emily Omier interviews Edgaras Apsega of Adform about his journey into the world of Kubernetes. They discuss the reasons for switching to a cloud native environment, the approval process, and the exponential growth Adform has experienced since making the switch. There have been growing pains organizationally and technically, however. Despite these surprises, Edgaras is pleased with the results so far and looks forward to continuing on the cloud native journey.</itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>In the inaugural episode of The Business of Cloud Native, host Emily Omier interviews Edgaras Apsega of Adform about his journey into the world of Kubernetes. They discuss the reasons for switching to a cloud native environment, the approval process, and </itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
    <item>
      <title>Introduction to The Business of Cloud Native</title>
      <itunes:title>Introduction to The Business of Cloud Native</itunes:title>
      <itunes:episodeType>trailer</itunes:episodeType>
      <guid isPermaLink="false">69549841-d7a2-4c57-9c65-1ef64ed3d7bc</guid>
      <link>https://share.transistor.fm/s/fcd1731f</link>
      <description>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>About Emily Omier</strong></p><p>Emily Omier is a content strategy consultant who helps companies leverage content to build thought leadership, increase website traffic, grow their mailing list and book more demos. She has worked with CloudBees, Portworx, Plutora, Armory, and is a regular contributor for The New Stack. She graduated from the Columbia University Graduate School of Journalism and lives in Portland, Oregon.</p>]]>
      </description>
      <content:encoded>
        <![CDATA[<p><strong>About Emily Omier</strong></p><p>Emily Omier is a content strategy consultant who helps companies leverage content to build thought leadership, increase website traffic, grow their mailing list and book more demos. She has worked with CloudBees, Portworx, Plutora, Armory, and is a regular contributor for The New Stack. She graduated from the Columbia University Graduate School of Journalism and lives in Portland, Oregon.</p>]]>
      </content:encoded>
      <pubDate>Fri, 08 May 2020 00:00:00 -0700</pubDate>
      <author>Emily Omier</author>
      <enclosure url="https://dts.podtrac.com/redirect.mp3/media.transistor.fm/fcd1731f/3d94d6c3.mp3" length="3546760" type="audio/mpeg"/>
      <itunes:author>Emily Omier</itunes:author>
      <itunes:duration>145</itunes:duration>
      <itunes:summary>There’s a lot of talk about transition and implementation as more companies move to microservices, containers, and Kubernetes. One topic that isn’t discussed as much is why companies decided to make the switch to cloud native ecosystems in the first place. Emily Omier wants to turn that upside down by talking with end users from a business perspective about why they decided to switch. Join Emily as she learns about what made the switch necessary, the surprises and frustrations along the way, and would they do it again. </itunes:summary>
      <itunes:subtitle>There’s a lot of talk about transition and implementation as more companies move to microservices, containers, and Kubernetes. One topic that isn’t discussed as much is why companies decided to make the switch to cloud native ecosystems in the first place</itunes:subtitle>
      <itunes:keywords>Open source, open source startup, founder stories, Business, End User Stories, real world</itunes:keywords>
      <itunes:explicit>No</itunes:explicit>
    </item>
  </channel>
</rss>
